General instructions.
3691 OEM guidelines and safety instructions from the manual — battery handling, electrical precautions, parts handling, jacking, lifting and more. Each tip kept with its section context and the original page scan.
Find a guideline
Showing 1377 of 1377
FOREWORD
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p1 OEM manual
-
FOREWORD
This manual (Volume 1) contains maintenance and repair procedures for the engine of the 1991 MR2. Applicable models: SW20, 21 series. For repair procedures for the chassis and body, and for electrical service procedures, refer to VOLUME 2 (Pub. No. RM179U2). The manual is divided into 12 sections and 2 appendixes with a thumb index for each section at the edge of the pages. Please note that the publications below have also been prepared as relevant service manuals to the components and systems in this vehicle. All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. However, specifications and procedures are subject to change without notice.
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p3 OEM manual
-
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
See page IN-2
-
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
See page IN-4
-
GENERAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
See page IN-4
-
PRECAUTIONS FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH SRS AIRBAG
See page IN-7
-
PRECAUTIONS FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH A CATALYTIC CONVERTER
See page IN-11
-
PRECAUTIONS FOR VEHICLES WITH AN AUDIO SYSTEM WITH BUILT-IN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
See page IN-11
-
VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS
See page IN-12
-
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
See page IN-13
INTRODUCTION · How to Use This Manual
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p4 OEM manual
-
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
To assist you in finding your way through the manual, the Section Title and major heading are given at the top of every page. An INDEX is provided on the first page of each section to guide you to the item to be repaired. At the beginning of each section, PRECAUTIONS are given that pertain to all repair operations contained in that section. Read these precautions before starting any repair task. TROUBLESHOOTING tables are included for each system to help you diagnose the problem and find the cause. The repair for each possible cause is referenced in the remedy column to quickly lead you to the solution.
-
REPAIR PROCEDURES
Most repair operations begin with an overview illustration. It identifies the components and shows how the parts fit together. The overview illustration uses torque callouts in kg-cm (ft-lb, N·m) format to indicate specified torque values, and marks non-reusable parts with a diamond symbol.
INTRODUCTION · How to Use This Manual
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p5 OEM manual
-
STEP-BY-STEP FORMAT
The procedures are presented in a step-by-step format: The illustration shows what to do and where to do it. The task heading tells what to do. The detailed text tells how to perform the task and gives other information such as specifications and warnings.
-
REFERENCES
References have been kept to a minimum. However, when they are required you are given the page to refer to.
-
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications are presented in bold type throughout the text where needed. You never have to leave the procedure to look up your specifications. They are also found in Appendix A, for quick reference.
-
CAUTIONS
CAUTIONS are presented in bold type, and indicate there is a possibility of injury to you or other people.
-
NOTICES
NOTICES are also presented in bold type, and indicate the possibility of damaged to the components being repaired.
-
HINTS
HINTS are separated from the text but do not appear in bold. They provide additional information to help you efficiently perform the repair.
INTRODUCTION · Identification Information, General Repair Instructions
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p6 OEM manual
-
USE PROTECTIVE COVERS
Use fender seat and floor covers to keep the vehicle clean and prevent damage.
-
KEEP PARTS IN ORDER DURING DISASSEMBLY
During disassembly, keep parts in the appropriate order to facilitate reassembly.
-
OBSERVE BATTERY AND ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following battery and electrical safety precautions.
- Work must be started after approx. 20 seconds or longer from the time the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK" position and the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery (See page AB-2).
INTRODUCTION · General Repair Instructions
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p7 OEM manual
-
CHECK HOSE AND WIRING CONNECTORS
Check hose and wiring connectors to make sure that they are secure and correct.
-
NON-REUSABLE PARTS
Always replace cotter pins, gaskets, O-rings and oil seals etc. with new ones. Non-reusable parts are indicated in the component illustrations by the "♦" symbol.
-
PRECOATED PARTS
Precoated parts are bolts and nuts, etc. that are coated with a seal lock adhesive at the factory. If a precoated part is retightened, loosened or caused to move in any way, it must be recoated with the specified adhesive. Precoated parts are indicated in the component illustrations by the "★" symbol.
-
USE SEALER ON GASKETS
When necessary, use a sealer on gaskets to prevent leaks.
-
OBSERVE BOLT TIGHTENING TORQUES
Carefully observe all specifications for bolt tightening torques. Always use a torque wrench.
-
USE SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS (SST) AND SPECIAL SERVICE MATERIALS (SSM)
Use of special service tools (SST) and special service materials (SSM) may be required, depending on the nature of the repair. Be sure to use SST and SSM where specified and follow the proper work procedure. A list of SST and SSM can be found at the back of this manual.
-
REPLACING FUSES
When replacing fuses, be sure the new fuse has the correct amperage rating. DO NOT exceed the rating or use one with a lower rating.
-
JACKING UP AND SUPPORTING THE VEHICLE
Care must be taken when jacking up and supporting the vehicle. Be sure to lift and support the vehicle at the proper locations (See page IN-12).
INTRODUCTION · General Repair Instructions
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p8 OEM manual
-
DO NOT OPEN ECU COVER OR CASE UNLESS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY
Do not open the cover or case of the ECU unless absolutely necessary. If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.
-
PULL APART ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS BY THE CONNECTOR ITSELF
To pull apart electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires.
-
DO NOT DROP ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Be careful not to drop electrical components, such as sensors or relays. If they are dropped on a hard floor they should be replaced and not reused.
-
INSERT TESTER PROBE CAREFULLY WHEN CHECKING CONTINUITY
When checking continuity at the wire connector, insert the tester probe carefully to prevent terminals from bending.
-
DISCONNECT VACUUM HOSES FROM THE END
To disconnect vacuum hoses, pull on the end, not the middle of the hose.
-
PROTECT DISTRIBUTOR, COIL, AIR FILTER AND VCV WHEN STEAM CLEANING
When steam cleaning an engine, protect the distributor, coil, air filter and VCV from water.
-
NEVER USE IMPACT WRENCH ON TEMPERATURE SWITCHES OR SENSORS
Never use an impact wrench to remove or install temperature switches or temperature sensors.
-
USE STEP-DOWN ADAPTER WHEN VACUUM GAUGE HOSE IS TOO SMALL
When using a vacuum gauge, never force the hose onto a connector that is too large. Use a step-down adapter instead. Once the hose has been stretched, it may leak.
-
TAG HOSES BEFORE DISCONNECTING THEM
When disconnecting vacuum hoses, use tags to identify how they should be reconnected. After completing a job, double check that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. A label under the hood shows the proper layout.
INTRODUCTION · Precautions for Vehicles Equipped with SRS Airbag
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p9 OEM manual
-
PRECAUTIONS FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH SRS AIRBAG
The 1991 MR2 for USA specifications is equipped with an SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbag. Failure to carry out service operations in the correct sequence could cause the airbag system to unexpectedly deploy during servicing, possibly leading to a serious accident. Further, if a mistake is made in servicing the airbag system, it is possible the airbag may fail to operate when required. Before performing servicing (including removal or installation of parts, inspection or replacement), be sure to read the following items carefully, then follow the correct procedure described in this manual.
- Failure to carry out service operations in the correct sequence could cause the airbag system to unexpectedly deploy during servicing, possibly leading to a serious accident.
- If a mistake is made in servicing the airbag system, it is possible the airbag may fail to operate when required.
-
INSPECT DIAGNOSTIC CODES BEFORE DISCONNECTING BATTERY
Malfunction symptoms of the airbag system are difficult to confirm, so the diagnostic codes become the most important source of information when troubleshooting. When troubleshooting the airbag system, always inspect the diagnostic codes before disconnecting the battery (See page AB-24).
-
WAIT 20 SECONDS AFTER IGNITION LOCK AND BATTERY DISCONNECT
Work must be started after approx. 20 seconds or loner from the time the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and the negative (-) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery. The airbag system is equipped with a back-up power source so that if work is started within 20 seconds of disconnecting the negative (-) terminal cable of the battery, the airbag may be deployed.
- If work is started within 20 seconds of disconnecting the negative (-) terminal cable of the battery, the airbag may be deployed.
INTRODUCTION · Precautions for Vehicles Equipped with SRS Airbag
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p11 OEM manual
-
FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR — Never reuse after collision
Never reuse the front airbag sensors involved in a collision when the airbag has deployed. Replace both the left and right airbag sensors.
-
FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR — Install with arrow facing front
Install the front airbag sensor with the arrow on the sensor facing toward the front of the vehicle.
-
FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR — Replace set bolts and nuts
The front airbag sensor set bolts and nuts have been anti-rust treated. When the sensor is removed, always replace the set bolts and nuts with new ones.
-
FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR — Lock electrical connector securely
The front airbag sensor is equipped with an electrical connection check mechanism. Be sure to lock this mechanism securely when connecting the connector. If the connector is not securely locked, a malfunction code will be detected by the diagnosis system (See page AB-9).
-
SPIRAL CABLE (IN COMBINATION SWITCH)
The steering wheel must be fitted correctly to the steering column with the spiral cable at the neutral position; otherwise cable disconnection and other troubles may result. Refer to page AB-16 of this manual concerning correct steering wheel installation.
-
STEERING WHEEL PAD (WITH AIRBAG) — Place pad top surface facing up
When removing the steering wheel pad or handling a new steering wheel pad, it should be placed with the pad top surface facing up. In this case, the twin-lock type connector lock lever should be in the locked state and care should be taken to place it so the connector will not be damaged. And do not store a steering wheel pad on top of another one. (Storing the pad with its metallic surface up may lead to a serious accident if the airbag inflates for some reason.)
- Storing the pad with its metallic surface up may lead to a serious accident if the airbag inflates for some reason.
-
STEERING WHEEL PAD (WITH AIRBAG) — Never measure resistance of airbag squib
Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. This may cause the airbag to deploy, which is very dangerous.
- Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. This may cause the airbag to deploy, which is very dangerous.
INTRODUCTION · Precautions for Vehicles Equipped with SRS Airbag
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p12 OEM manual
-
DO NOT APPLY GREASE TO STEERING WHEEL PAD
Grease should not be applied to the steering wheel pad and the pad should not be cleaned with detergents of any kind.
-
STORE STEERING WHEEL PAD PROPERLY
Store the steering wheel pad where the ambient temperature remains below 90°C (200°F), without high humidity and away from electrical noise.
-
DISCONNECT AIRBAG CONNECTOR BEFORE ELECTRIC WELDING
When using electric welding, first disconnect the airbag connector (yellow color and 2 pins) under the steering column near the combination switch connector before starting work.
-
DEPLOY AIRBAG BEFORE DISPOSAL
When disposing of a vehicle or the steering wheel pad alone, the airbag should be deployed using an SST before disposal (See page AB-82). Perform the operation in a place away from electrical noise.
-
CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY — CONNECT/DISCONNECT WITH SENSOR MOUNTED
The connectors to the center airbag sensor assembly should be connected or disconnected with the sensor mounted on the floor. If the connectors are connected or disconnected while the center airbag sensor assembly is not mounted to the floor, it could cause undesired ignition of the airbag system.
-
WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
The airbag system's wire harness is integrated with the cowl wire harness assembly. The wires for the airbag wire harness are encased in a yellow corrugated tube. All the connectors for the system are also a standard yellow color. If the airbag system wire harness becomes disconnected or the connector becomes broken due to an accident, etc., repair or replace it as shown on page AB-21.
INTRODUCTION · Precautions for Vehicles Equipped with a Catalytic Converter, Precautions for Vehicles with an Audio System with Built-In Anti-Theft System
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p13 OEM manual
-
PRECAUTIONS FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH A CATALYTIC CONVERTER
If large amounts of unburned gasoline flow into the converter, it may overheat and create a fire hazard. To prevent this, observe the following precautions and explain them to your customer.
- If large amounts of unburned gasoline flow into the converter, it may overheat and create a fire hazard.
-
USE ONLY UNLEADED GASOLINE
Use only unleaded gasoline.
-
AVOID PROLONGED IDLING
Avoid running the engine at idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
-
AVOID SPARK JUMP TEST
Spark jump test only when absolutely necessary. Perform this test as rapidly as possible. While testing, never race the engine.
-
AVOID PROLONGED ENGINE COMPRESSION MEASUREMENT
Engine compression tests must be made as rapidly as possible.
-
DO NOT RUN ENGINE WHEN FUEL TANK IS NEARLY EMPTY
This may cause the engine to misfire and create an extra load on the converter.
-
AVOID COASTING WITH IGNITION TURNED OFF AND PROLONGED BRAKING
Avoid coasting with ignition turned off and prolonged braking.
-
DO NOT DISPOSE OF USED CATALYST ALONG WITH PARTS CONTAMINATED WITH GASOLINE OR OIL
Do not dispose of used catalyst along with parts contaminated with gasoline or oil.
-
PRECAUTIONS FOR VEHICLES WITH AN AUDIO SYSTEM WITH BUILT-IN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Audio Systems displaying the sign 'ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM' shown on the left has a built-in anti-theft system which makes the audio system soundless if stolen. If the power source for the audio system is cut even once, the anti-theft system operates so that even if the power source is reconnected, the audio system will not produce any sound unless the ID number selected by the customer is input again. Accordingly, when performing repairs on vehicles equipped with this system, before disconnecting the battery terminals or removing the audio system the customer should be asked for the ID number so that the technician can input the ID number afterwards, or else a request made to the customer to input the ID number. For the method to input the ID number or cancel the anti-theft system, refer to the Owner's Manual.
INTRODUCTION · Vehicle Lift and Support Locations
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p14 OEM manual
-
JACK POSITION — FRONT
Jack up support of front under cover center.
-
JACK POSITION — REAR
Rear suspension crossmember.
-
PANTOGRAPH JACK POSITION
Use the pantograph jack at the designated pantograph jack position points shown on the underbody diagram.
-
SUPPORT POSITION — SAFETY STAND
Place safety stands at the support position points indicated by the hatched symbols on the underbody diagram.
INTRODUCTION · Abbreviations Used in This Manual
Introduction
RM179U1_1991 · p15 OEM manual
-
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
ABS: Anti-Lock Brake System; A/C: Air Conditioner; Approx.: Approximately; A/T: Automatic Transaxle; ATF: Automatic Transmission Fluid; B1: Second Coast Brake; B2: Second Brake; B3: First and Reverse Brake; B4: Underdrive Brake; BTDC: Before Top Dead Center; BVSV: Bimetal Vacuum Switching Valve; C1: Forward Clutch; C2: Direct Clutch; C3: Underdrive Clutch; CALIF.: Vehicles Sold in California; CB: Circuit Breaker; CD: Compact Disc; DP: Dash Pot; ECT: Electronic Controlled Transaxle; ECU: Electronic Control Unit; EFI: Electronic Fuel Injection; EGR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation; ELR: Emergency Locking Retractor; ESA: Electronic Spark Advance; EVAP: Evaporative (Emission Control); EX: Exhaust (manifold, valve); Ex.: Except; F1: No.1 One-Way Clutch; F2: No.2 One-Way Clutch; F3: Underdrive One-Way Clutch; FIPG: Formed in Place Gasket; FL: Fusible Link; FR, Fr: Front; IN: Intake (manifold, valve); IG: Ignition; ISC: Idle Speed Control; J/B: Junction Block; LED: Light Emitting Diode; LH: Left-Hand; Max.: Maximum; MP: Multipurpose; M/T: Manual Transaxle; OD, O/D: Overdrive; O/S: Oversize; P & BV: Proportioning and Bypass Valve; PCV: Positive Crankcase Ventilation; PS: Power Steering; RH: Right-Hand; Rr: Rear; SRS: Supplemental Restraint System; SSM: Special Service Materials; SST: Special Service Tools; STD: Standard; SW: Switch; TDC: Top Dead Center; T-VIS: Toyota-Variable Induction System; TWC: Three-Way Catalyst; U/D: Underdrive; U/S: Undersize; VSV: Vacuum Switching Valve; w/: With; w/o: Without
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
RM179U1_1991 · p16 OEM manual
-
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SELECTION
The maintenance schedule for the vehicle consists of separate A and B schedules which are applicable depending on the conditions the vehicle is used in. Confirm the vehicle's usage conditions, select the appropriate schedule and service the vehicle accordingly.
-
PERFORM EVERY SERVICE ITEM
Every service item in the periodic maintenance list must be performed.
-
REFERENCE PAGES IN SCHEDULE
Next to the columns of periods in the schedule, reference pages have been added for easy access to service data and procedures necessary for each position.
-
SERVICE INTERVAL BASIS
Periodic maintenance service must be performed according to whichever interval in the periodic maintenance list occurs first, the odometer reading (miles) or the times interval (months).
-
MAINTENANCE AFTER LAST PERIOD
Maintenance services after the last period should be performed at the same interval as before unless otherwise noted.
-
IMPORTANCE OF COMPLETE MAINTENANCE
Failure to do even one item can cause the engine to run poorly and increase exhaust emissions.
MAINTENANCE · Maintenance Operations
Maintenance
RM179U1_1991 · p26 OEM manual
-
CHECK AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
Visually check the transaxle for fluid leakage. If leakage is found, check for the cause and repair. Check the fluid level; if the level is low, add fluid. Transmission fluid: See item 21 (B).
-
DO NOT OVERFILL A/T FLUID
Do not overfill. The transmission and differential are separate units.
- Do not overfill. The transmission and differential are separate units.
MAINTENANCE · Maintenance Operations
Maintenance
RM179U1_1991 · p27 OEM manual
-
RECHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL AT NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE
Recheck the fluid level with the normal temperature (70–80°C (158–176°F)) and add as necessary.
MAINTENANCE · General Maintenance
Maintenance
RM179U1_1991 · p29 OEM manual
-
TIRES
Check the pressure with a gauge. Adjust if necessary. Check for cuts, damage or excessive wear.
-
WHEEL NUTS
When checking the tires, check the nuts for looseness or for missing nuts. If necessary, tighten them.
-
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Check for wear or cracks whenever they do not wipe clean. Replace if necessary.
-
FLUID LEAKS
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid. If you smell gasoline fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected.
-
DOORS AND ENGINE HOOD
Check that all doors including the trunk lid and back door operate smoothly, and that all latches lock securely. Check that the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
-
LIGHTS
Check that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all working. Check the headlight aim.
-
WARNING LIGHTS AND BUZZERS
Check that all warning lights and buzzers function properly.
-
HORN
Check that it is working.
-
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Check for scratches, pits or abrasions.
-
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
Check operation of the wipers and washer. Check that the wipers do not streak.
-
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
Check that air comes out from the defroster outlet when operating the heater or air conditioner at defroster mode.
-
REAR VIEW MIRROR
Check that it is mounted securely.
-
SUN VISORS
Check that they move freely and are mounted securely.
-
STEERING WHEEL
Check that it has specified freeplay. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive freeplay or strange noise.
-
SEATS
Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjuster, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the locks hold securely in any latched position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position. For fold-down rear backs, check that the latches lock securely.
-
SEAT BELTS
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Check that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
MAINTENANCE · General Maintenance
Maintenance
RM179U1_1991 · p30 OEM manual
-
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.
-
CLUTCH PEDAL (See page CL-3)
Check the pedal for smooth operation. Check that the pedal has the proper freeplay.
-
BRAKE PEDAL (See page BR-6)
Check brake pedal condition.
-
BRAKES
At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.
-
PARKING BRAKE (See page BR-8)
Check parking brake condition.
-
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION "PARK" MECHANISM
Check automatic transmission park mechanism.
-
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Check that there is sufficient fluid in the tank.
-
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check that coolant level is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the see-through reservoir.
-
RADIATOR AND HOSES
Check radiator and hoses condition.
-
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
Check that the electrolyte level of all battery cells is between the upper and lower level lines on the case. If level is low, add distilled.
-
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID LEVELS
Check brake and clutch fluid levels.
-
ENGINE DRIVE BELTS
Check all drive belts for fraying, cracks, wear or oiliness.
-
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off.
-
POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
Check the level on the dipstick. The level should be in the "HOT" or "COLD" range depending on the fluid temperature.
-
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
Check automatic transmission fluid level.
-
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually inspect for cracks, holes or loose supports. If any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell of the exhaust fumes is noticed, have the cause located and corrected.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-Up
Engine — mechanical
RM179U1_1991 · p42 OEM manual
-
CHECK REMAINING VALVES AFTER CRANKSHAFT ROTATION
Turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align the mark as above (See procedure step 8). Check only the valves indicated as shown. Measure the valve clearance (See procedure step (a)).
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Timing Belt (3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
RM179U1_1991 · p69 OEM manual
-
TIMING BELT TENSIONER SETUP — FEELER GAUGE AND IDLER PULLEY BOLT
Insert a 1.90 mm (0.075 in.) feeler gauge between the tensioner body and No.1 idler pulley stopper. Turn the No.1 idler pulley bolt counterclockwise to obtain the specified torque. To apply the correct torque, apply the torque wrench along the axis through the bolts of the No.1 idler pulley and exhaust camshaft timing pulley.
-
TIGHTEN TENSIONER BOLTS ALTERNATELY
While pushing the tensioner, alternately tighten the two bolts to the specified torque.
-
REMOVE HEXAGON WRENCH FROM TENSIONER
Remove the 1.27 mm hexagon wrench from the tensioner.
-
ALIGN CRANKSHAFT PULLEY TO ATDC 60°
Slowly turn the crankshaft pulley one revolution, and align its groove with the ATDC 60° mark of the No.1 timing belt cover.
- Always turn the crankshaft clockwise.
-
FINAL IDLER PULLEY BOLT TORQUE
Turn the No.1 idler pulley bolt counterclockwise to obtain the specified torque. To apply the correct torque, apply the torque wrench along the axis through the bolts of the No.1 idler pulley and exhaust camshaft timing pulley.
-
CHECK TENSIONER CLEARANCE WITH FEELER GAUGE
Using a feeler gauge, check the specified clearance between the tensioner body and No.1 idler pulley stopper.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p1015 OEM manual
-
REMOVE SHOCK ABSORBER
Step 5 of the preceding removal procedure.
- Cover the drive shaft boot with cloth to avoid damaging it.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension · Assembly of Rear Shock Absorber
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p1016 OEM manual
-
RELEASE GAS BEFORE DISCARDING SHOCK ABSORBER
Before discarding the shock absorber, first loosen the ring nut 2 or 3 turns to release the gas completely. SST 09720-00012 (09721-00071)
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension · Ball Joint / Lower Arm
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p1020 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF LOWER ARM
See page SA-69. Procedure to remove the rear suspension lower arm.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension · Strut Rod
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p1022 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF STRUT ROD
See page SA-69. Install rear suspension arm No.1, then temporarily install the strut rod holding bolt and nut and cushion to the body.
-
INSTALL REAR SUSPENSION ARM No.1
Install the retainers, cushions, collar and suspension arm No.1 to the strut rod with the nut as shown. Install the nut to the bolt end. Do not misinstall the front and rear cushions. Temporarily install the strut rod holding bolt and nut and cushion to the body.
- Install the nut to the bolt end.
- Do not misinstall the front and rear cushions.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p1026 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT EXHAUST PIPE MOUNTING FROM REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER
Remove the two exhaust pipe mounting installation bolts.
-
DISCONNECT REAR ENGINE MOUNT FROM REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER
Remove the three installation bolts of the rear engine mounting.
-
REMOVE SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING BOLTS
Hold the rear suspension crossmember with a jack. Remove the four bolts, then remove the rear suspension crossmember.
-
REMOVE STABILIZER BAR
Lift down the crossmember until the front side bolt of the stabilizer bar bracket can be removed. Be careful not to damage the exhaust pipe by shoving with the stabilizer bar. Remove the two bolts and two nuts. Remove the stabilizer bar with brackets. Remove the brackets and cushions from the stabilizer bar.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Check and Adjustments
Brakes
RM179U1_1991 · p1037 OEM manual
-
CHECK THAT PEDAL RESERVE DISTANCE IS CORRECT, AS SHOWN
Release the parking brake. With the engine running, depress the pedal and measure the pedal reserve distance, as shown. Pedal reserve distance from asphalt sheet at 50 kg (110.2 lb, 490 N): More than 117 mm (4.61 in.). If the reserve distance is incorrect, troubleshoot the brake system.
-
OPERATIONAL TEST OF BRAKE BOOSTER — OPERATING CHECK
(a) Depress the brake pedal several times with the engine off and check that there is no change in the pedal reserve distance. (b) Depress the brake pedal and start the engine. If the pedal goes down slightly, operation is normal.
-
OPERATIONAL TEST OF BRAKE BOOSTER — AIR TIGHTNESS
(a) Start the engine and stop it after one or two minutes. Depress the brake pedal several times slowly. If the pedal goes down the farthest the first time, but gradually rises after the second or third time, the booster is air tight. (b) Depress the brake pedal while the engine is running, and stop the engine with the pedal depressed. If there is no change in the pedal reserve travel after holding the pedal for thirty seconds, the booster is air tight.
-
BLEEDING OF BRAKE SYSTEM — NOTICE
Do not let brake fluid remain on a painted surface. Wash it off immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Checks and Adjustments
Brakes
RM179U1_1991 · p1038 OEM manual
-
CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF PARKING BRAKE
Check and adjust the parking brake lever travel.
-
CHECK THAT PARKING BRAKE LEVER TRAVEL IS CORRECT
Pull the parking brake lever all the way up and down for two or three times. Then return the parking brake lever. Depress the brake pedal for several times. Pull the parking brake lever all the way up, and count the notches of lever travel. Parking brake lever travel at 20 kg (44.1 lb, 196 N): 5 – 8 clicks. If incorrect, adjust the parking brake.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Master Cylinder · Inspection and Assembly
Brakes
RM179U1_1991 · p1043 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CYLINDER BORE FOR RUST OR SCORING
Inspect cylinder bore for rust or scoring.
-
INSPECT CYLINDER FOR WEAR OR DAMAGE
Inspect cylinder for wear or damage. If necessary, clean or replace the cylinder.
-
CLEAN DISASSEMBLED PARTS
Clean the disassembled parts with compressed air.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Diagnostic Flowchart
Brakes
RM179U1_1991 · p1087 OEM manual
-
ECU CONNECTOR CHECK
Is connector of ECU properly connected? And are all terminals in the connector? If NO: Faulty connector.
-
POWER CIRCUIT CHECK
Is there 10–16 V between terminal IG on ECU wire harness side connector and body ground? (Ignition switch on) If NO: Faulty power circuit.
-
WARNING LIGHT CHECK WITH CONNECTORS DISCONNECTED
Does warning light go off when both the ECU connector and service connector are disconnected? (Ignition switch on) If NO (Come on): Short circuit in wire harness between ECU terminal WA and actuator terminal WA. If YES (Goes off): Faulty ECU.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Diagnostic Code Reading
Brakes
RM179U1_1991 · p1094 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSTIC CODE BLINK PATTERN HINT
The first number of blinks will equal the first digit of a two digit diagnostic code. After a 1.5 second pause, the 2nd number of blinks will equal the 2nd number of a two digit code. If there are two or more codes, there will be a 2.5 second pause between each code, and then indication will begin again after a 4.0 second pause, continuing in order from the smaller value up to the larger one. Each blink is 0.12s ON and 0.12s OFF. Initial normal pattern blinks rapidly before the trouble code sequence begins (0.5s pause, then digits). Example shown is Code 72: 7 blinks, 1.5s pause, 2 blinks, followed by 2.5 or 4.0s pause.
STEERING · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Steering
RM179U1_1991 · p1108 OEM manual
-
REPLACE PARTS PROPERLY
Care must be taken to replace parts properly because they could affect the performance of the steering system and result in a driving hazard.
-
AIRBAG PRECAUTION (USA)
The steering wheel pad has an airbag built in, so take all due precautions when handling it. For more details, see the SRS AIRBAG section.
STEERING · Steering Column
Steering
RM179U1_1991 · p1112 OEM manual
-
INSTALL WHEEL PAD — TORX SCREW ENGAGEMENT
Install the wheel pad after confirming that the circumference groove of the torx screws is caught on the screw case.
-
TIGHTEN TORX SCREWS TO SPECIFIED TORQUE
Using a torx wrench, tighten the four screws to the specified torque.
- Make sure the wheel pad is installed to the specified torque.
- If the wheel pad has been dropped, or there are cracks, dents or other defects in the case or connector, replace the wheel pad with a new one.
- When installing the wheel pad, take care that the wirings do not interfere with other parts and are not pinched between other parts.
-
CHECK STEERING WHEEL CENTER POINT AFTER INSTALLING STEERING COLUMN
Check steering wheel center point after installing steering column.
STEERING · Steering Column · Removal & Inspection
Steering
RM179U1_1991 · p1116 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT OF STEERING COLUMN
Inspection and replacement procedures for the steering column components.
-
INSPECT KEY CYLINDER
Check that the steering lock mechanism operates properly.
-
IF NECESSARY, REPLACE KEY CYLINDER
(a) Place the ignition key at the ACC position. (b) Push down the stop pin with a thin rod, and pull out the key cylinder. (c) Make sure the ignition key is at the ACC position. (d) Install a new key cylinder.
-
IF NECESSARY, REPLACE MAIN SHAFT BUSHING
(a) Remove the snap ring. (b) Using a screwdriver, remove the bushing.
STEERING · Steering Column · Inspection & Assembly
Steering
RM179U1_1991 · p1117 OEM manual
-
INSPECT UPPER BEARING
Check the upper bearing rotation condition and check for abnormal noise.
-
INSPECT KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID (A/T)
See page AT-165
-
INSTALL BUSHING IN COLUMN TUBE
Align the holes of the tube and projections of a new bushing, and insert the bushing in the column tube. Install the snap ring.
STEERING · Power Steering (On-Vehicle Inspection) · Oil Pressure Check
Steering
RM179U1_1991 · p1137 OEM manual
-
CHECK THAT FLUID IN RESERVOIR IS NOT FOAMY OR CLOUDY AND DOES NOT RISE OVER MAXIMUM WHEN ENGINE IS STOPPED
Measure the fluid level with the engine running. Stop the engine and measure the fluid level. Maximum rise: 5 mm (0.20 in.)
STEERING · Power Steering · Power Steering Pump
Steering
RM179U1_1991 · p1139 OEM manual
-
USE TOYOTA POWER STEERING FLUID EH
When supplementing the power steering fluid, use TOYOTA POWER STEERING FLUID EH or equivalent which is exclusively for EHPS use.
-
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE POWER STEERING PUMP
The power steering pump is not to be disassembled, so if a malfunction occurs, replace it as an assembly.
SRS AIRBAG · Operation · Function of Components
SRS / airbag
RM179U1_1991 · p1174 OEM manual
-
FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR
The front airbag sensors are mounted inside of the radiator upper support. The sensor unit is a mechanical type. When the sensor detects deceleration force above a predetermined limit in a collision, the contacts in the sensor make contact, sending a signal to the center airbag sensor assembly. The sensor cannot be disassembled.
-
SPIRAL CABLE (in COMBINATION SWITCH)
A spiral cable is used as an electrical joint from the vehicle body side to the steering wheel.
-
STEERING WHEEL PAD (with AIRBAG)
The inflater and bag of the airbag system are stored in the steering wheel pad and cannot be disassembled. The inflater contains a squib, igniter charge, gas generant, etc., and inflates the bag in case of a frontal collision.
-
AIRBAG WARNING LIGHT
The airbag warning light is located on the combination meter. It goes on to alert the driver of trouble in the system when a malfunction is detected in the center airbag sensor assembly self-diagnosis. In normal operating condition when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or ON position, the light goes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.
-
CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
The center airbag sensor assembly is mounted on the floor inside the center cluster. The center airbag sensor assembly consists of a center airbag sensor, safing sensors, ignition control and drive circuit, diagnosis circuit, etc. It receives signals from the airbag sensors, judges whether the airbag must be activated or not and diagnoses system malfunctions.
SRS AIRBAG · Inspection Items and Replacement Requirements · Front Airbag Sensor
SRS / airbag
RM179U1_1991 · p1179 OEM manual
-
HINT: STEERING WHEEL HORN BUTTON CONTACT PLATE
If the horn button contact plate of the steering wheel is deformed, never repair it. Always replace the steering wheel with a new one.
-
HINT: STEERING WHEEL PAD CLEARANCE
There should be no interference between the steering wheel pad and the steering wheel, and the clearance should be uniform all the way around when the new steering wheel pad is installed on the steering wheel.
-
REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
In the following cases, replace the steering wheel pad, steering wheel or spiral cable. CAUTION: For replacement of the steering wheel pad, see page AB-15, 'REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION' and be sure to follow the correct procedure. Replace if: the airbag has been deployed; the steering wheel pad or spiral cable has been found to be faulty in troubleshooting; the steering wheel pad, steering wheel or spiral cable has been found to be faulty during the check in item 1.-(b) or 2.-(b); the steering wheel pad has been dropped.
SRS AIRBAG · Inspection Items and Replacement Requirements
SRS / airbag
RM179U1_1991 · p1180 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS — FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR
In the following cases, replace the front airbag sensor: If the airbag has been deployed in a collision (replace both the left and right airbag sensors); If the front airbag sensor has been found to be faulty in troubleshooting; If the front airbag sensor has been found to be faulty during the check in item 2.-(b); If the front airbag sensor has been dropped. For replacement of the front airbag sensor, see page AB-17, 'REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION'.
-
REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS — CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
In the following cases, replace the center airbag sensor assembly: If the center airbag sensor assembly has been found to be faulty in troubleshooting; If the center airbag sensor assembly has been found to be faulty during the check in item 2.-(b); If the center airbag sensor assembly has been dropped. For replacement of the center airbag sensor assembly, see page AB-19, 'REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION'. If the center airbag sensor assembly interferes with any other parts, perform a check after repairs.
SRS AIRBAG · Inspection Items and Replacement Requirements · Wire Harness and Connector
SRS / airbag
RM179U1_1991 · p1181 OEM manual
-
WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR HINT
The airbag system wire harness is integrated with the cowl wire harness assembly and luggage compartment wire harness assembly. The wires for the airbag wire harness are encased in a yellow corrugated tube and all the connectors in the system are a standard yellow color.
-
INSPECTION ITEMS — VEHICLES NOT INVOLVED IN A COLLISION
Perform a diagnostic system check (See page AB-29).
-
INSPECTION ITEMS — VEHICLES INVOLVED IN A COLLISION
Perform a diagnostic system check (See page AB-29). Check if there is a break in any of the wires in the airbag system wire harness, or if conductors are exposed. Check if the airbag system wire harness connectors are cracked or chipped.
-
REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
In the following cases, replace the wire harness or connector: If any part of the airbag system wire harness or any connector has been found to be faulty in troubleshooting. If any part of the airbag system wire harness or any connector has been found to be faulty during the check in item 2. – (b) or (c). NOTICE: If the wire harness used in the airbag system is damaged, replace the whole wire harness assembly. When the connector to the front airbag sensors can be repaired alone (when there is no damage to the wire harness), use the repair wire specially designed for the purpose (See page AB-21).
SRS AIRBAG · Removal and Installation of Component Parts · Front Airbag Sensor
SRS / airbag
RM179U1_1991 · p1184 OEM manual
-
DO NOT DISCONNECT WIRING CONNECTOR WITH IGNITION ON OR ACC
If the wiring connector of the airbag system is disconnected with the ignition switch at ON or ACC, diagnostic codes will be recorded.
-
NEVER USE AIRBAG PARTS FROM ANOTHER VEHICLE
Never use airbag parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts, replace with new parts.
-
NEVER REUSE SENSOR AFTER COLLISION WITH DEPLOYMENT
Never reuse the sensor involved in a collision when the airbag has deployed.
-
NEVER REPAIR A SENSOR FOR REUSE
Never repair a sensor in order to reuse it.
SRS AIRBAG · Removal and Installation of Component Parts
SRS / airbag
RM179U1_1991 · p1187 OEM manual
-
INSTALL SENSOR ASSEMBLY TO SPECIFIED TORQUE
Make sure the sensor assembly is installed to the specified torque.
-
REPLACE DROPPED OR DAMAGED SENSOR ASSEMBLY
If the sensor assembly has been dropped, or there are cracks, dents or other defects in the case, bracket or connector, replace the sensor assembly with a new one.
-
PREVENT AIRBAG WIRING INTERFERENCE
When installing the sensor assembly, take care that the airbag wirings do not interfere with other parts and are not pinched between other parts.
-
CHECK FOR LOOSENESS AFTER INSTALLATION
After installation, shake the sensor assembly to check that there is no looseness.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Customer Problem Analysis Check Sheet
SRS / airbag
RM179U1_1991 · p1195 OEM manual
-
SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM CHECK SHEET
A Customer Problem Analysis Check Sheet for SRS Airbag system troubleshooting. Fields include: Customer's Name, Registration No., Registration Year, Frame No., Date Vehicle Brought In, Odometer Reading (Miles). Date of Problem Occurrence. Conditions at Time of Problem Occurrence covering Weather (Fine, Cloudy, Rainy, Snowy, Various/Other), Outdoor Temperature (Hot, Warm, Cool, Cold with approx °C/°F), Vehicle Operation (Starting, Idling, Driving with sub-options: Constant speed, Acceleration, Deceleration, Other), and Condition of road. Free-text fields for Details of Problem and Vehicle Inspection/Repair History Prior to Occurrence of Malfunction (Including Airbag System). Diagnosis System Inspection section covering Airbag Warning Light Inspection (1st Time and 2nd Time, each with options: Remains On, Sometimes Lights Up, Does Not Light Up) and Diagnostic Code Inspection (1st Time and 2nd Time, each with options: Normal Code, Malfunction Code with code entry field).
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Diagnostic Codes
SRS / airbag
RM179U1_1991 · p1197 OEM manual
-
SOURCE VOLTAGE DROP HINT
When the airbag warning light remains lit up and the diagnostic code is the normal code, this means a source voltage drop. This malfunction is not stored in memory by the center airbag sensor assembly and if the power source voltage returns to normal, after approx. 10 seconds the airbag warning light will automatically go out.
-
CODE 22 RECORDING
Code 22 is recorded when a malfunction occurs in the airbag warning light system. If an open malfunction occurs in the airbag warning light system, the airbag warning light does not light up, so that until the malfunction is repaired, the diagnostic codes (including code 22) cannot be confirmed.
-
CODES 11–31 MEMORY CLEARING
When a malfunction occurs in the airbag system, malfunction codes 11 to 31 are output. After repairing the malfunction indicated by malfunction codes 11 to 31, codes 11 to 31 are cleared from the memory, but code 41 is output instead. Once the malfunction has been detected, the airbag warning light will remain lit up until code 41 is cleared, even though the malfunction has been repaired.
-
MULTIPLE CODES
When two or more codes are indicated, the lowest numbered code will appear first.
-
UNLISTED CODE
If a code not listed on the chart is displayed, then the center airbag sensor assembly is faulty.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Diagnostic Code Chart
SRS / airbag
RM179U1_1991 · p1201 OEM manual
-
HINT: Normal code with warning light lit
When the airbag warning light remains lit up and the diagnostic code is the normal code, this means a source voltage drop.
-
HINT: Code 22 recording condition
Code 22 is recorded when a malfunction occurs in the airbag warning light system. If an open malfunction occurs in the airbag warning light system, the airbag warning light does not light up, so that until the malfunction is repaired, the diagnostic codes (including code 22) cannot be confirmed.
-
HINT: Code 41 behavior
When a malfunction occurs in the airbag system, malfunction codes 11 to 31 are output. After repairing the malfunction indicated by malfunction codes 11 to 31, codes 11 to 31 are cleared from the memory, but code 41 is output instead. Once the malfunction has been detected, the airbag warning light will remain lit up until code 41 is cleared, even though the malfunction has been repaired.
-
PROBLEM SYMPTOM: Airbag warning light always lit up
With the ignition switch at ACC or ON, the airbag warning light sometimes light up after approx. 6 seconds have elapsed. Airbag warning light lights up even when ignition switch is in the LOCK position. Inspection Item: Airbag warning light system (Always lit up). See page AB-75.
-
PROBLEM SYMPTOM: Diagnostic code display issues
Diagnostic code not displayed. Diagnostic code continuously displayed. Inspection Item: Tc terminal circuit. See page AB-77.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Diagnostic Chart
SRS / airbag
RM179U1_1991 · p1245 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSTIC CHART — WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram showing the Tc terminal circuit connections. The Check Connector (terminals E1 and Tc) connects via the Tc line to the Center Airbag Sensor Assembly (Tc terminal, with diode). The same Tc line branches to three ECUs, each with a diode on their Tc terminal: Power Steering ECU, Cruise Control ECU, and ABS ECU. The E1 terminal of the Check Connector is grounded.
SRS AIRBAG · Disposal of Steering Wheel Pad (with Airbag)
Steering
RM179U1_1991 · p1255 OEM manual
-
CONFIRM FUNCTIONING OF SST
When deploying the airbag, always use the specified SST: SRS AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT TOOL. SST 09082-00700.
-
CONNECT SST TO BATTERY
Connect the red clip of the SST to the battery positive (+) terminal and the black clip to the battery negative (-) terminal. HINT: Do not connect the yellow connector which connects with the airbag system.
-
CONFIRM FUNCTIONING OF SST
Press the SST activation switch, and confirm the LED of the SST activation switch lights up.
- If the LED lights up when the activation switch is not being pressed, SST malfunction is probable, so definitely do not use the SST.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Light System · Daytime Running Light System (CANADA)
Body electrical
RM179U1_1991 · p1281 OEM manual
-
Daytime Running Light System Description
The daytime running light system has front fog lights and taillights that go on automatically when the engine is started. This system is standard equipment on all grade models for Canada. The daytime running lights are controlled by the light retractor relay.
-
Standby Operation
The daytime running light system is activated when the ignition switch is turned on and the engine is started. The lights are turned on and off, as shown below, depending on the condition on applicable switches. Lights do not go on when the ignition switch is merely turned on. Lights remain on when the running engine stalls.
-
Terminal Bracket Note
The terminals indicated in brackets ( ) are for models w/ Light Auto Turn Off System.
-
Power Source Circuit Note
The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Wiper and Washer System
Body electrical
RM179U1_1991 · p1300 OEM manual
-
CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS
Connector diagrams for Ignition Switch (10-pin), Wiper Motor (4-pin), Wiper and Washer Switch Connector A (15-pin) and Connector B (20-pin), Washer Motor for Canada/USA with Cold Area Spec (3-pin), and Washer Motor for USA without Cold Area Spec (2-pin).
-
PARTS REPLACEMENT
See Parts Replacement of Combination Switch on page BE-30.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Door Lock Control System · Parts Location
Body electrical
RM179U1_1991 · p1329 OEM manual
-
PARTS LOCATION — POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagram identifying the location of all power door lock control system components on the vehicle: Ignition Switch (driver side dash/steering column area), Door Lock Control Relay (driver side lower dash/kick panel area), Door Lock Manual Switch (driver door panel — left side), Door Lock Manual Switch (center console/dash — top center), Key Unlock Warning Switch (driver side lower area), Door Key Lock and Unlock Switch (passenger door), Door Lock Assembly and Door Lock Motor (passenger door), Door Courtesy Switch (passenger door lower area).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Mirror Control System
Body electrical
RM179U1_1991 · p1336 OEM manual
-
POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM — Parts Location
Outer Rear View Mirror (Mirror Motor) located on both left and right sides of the vehicle. Mirror Switch located on the driver's door/interior panel area.
-
POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM — Wiring and Connector Diagrams
The power source circuit is powered through Fuse RAD CIG via the Ignition Switch (ACC position) from the Battery. The Mirror Switch (Control Switch) contains Up/Left, Down/Right, Up, Down, Left, Right positions and a Left/Right Adjustment Switch. Connector terminals: Mirror Switch pins 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10. Circuit nodes connect to Left Side Mirror Motor (terminals 1, 2, 3) and Right Side Mirror Motor (terminals 1, 2, 3). Wire nodes 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 connect switch to motors. Mirror Motor connector is a 3-pin connector (pins 1, 2, 3). The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified — for full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Theft Deterrent System · Diagnostic Circuits
Body electrical
RM179U1_1991 · p1381 OEM manual
-
STARTER CUT SYSTEM CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch to ST. Disconnect TD ECU connector and inspect connector on wire harness side as follows. Inspect Starter Cut System Circuit: Turn ignition switch to ST position (*1 with shift lever at N or P position or *2 with clutch pedal depressed). Is there battery voltage between terminal 18 and ground? If Yes: Replace TD ECU. Then recheck system. If No: Short or open circuit in starter relay circuit. HINT: If starter does not operate, even when system is cancelled, before checking the circuit, use the key to turn the door lock to the unlock position and recheck starter operation. *1 A/T, *2 M/T.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Parts Location
Body electrical
RM179U1_1991 · p1388 OEM manual
-
AUDIO SYSTEM PARTS LOCATION
Diagram identifying the location of all audio system components within the vehicle, including: Front Window Printed Antenna, Radio-Tape Player Unit, CD Player, Tweeter (left and right), Front Speaker (left and right), Rear Speaker (left and right), Woofer Amplifier, Woofer, Power Amplifier, Motor Antenna Assembly (Antenna Motor, Antenna Motor Control Relay).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System
Body electrical
RM179U1_1991 · p1391 OEM manual
-
Radio-Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier, w/Woofer): Symbol P
Wiring diagram for Radio-Tape Player Unit with separate power amplifier and woofer, denoted by symbol P.
-
Radio-Tape Player Unit + CD Player: Symbol C
Wiring diagram for Radio-Tape Player Unit combined with CD Player, denoted by symbol C.
-
THE POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified.
For full details, see page BE-8.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Tape Player Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM179U1_1991 · p1407 OEM manual
-
SOUND QUALITY POOR (VOLUME PAINT) — Tape Player Diagnostic 12
Diagnostic flowchart for poor sound quality on tape player. U = Radio–Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier); P = Radio–Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). Steps: (1) Function OK if different cassette tape inserted? Yes → Cassette tape faulty. No → (2) Operates normally after cleaning the heads? (See page BE-137) Yes → Head dirty. No → (3) Is radio operating normally? Yes → Radio assembly faulty. No → (4) Is speaker properly installed? No → Install properly. Yes → (5) Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → U: Radio assembly faulty. P: Radio assembly or power amplifier faulty.
-
TAPE JAMMED, MALFUNCTION WITH TAPE SPEED OR AUTO-REVERSE — Tape Player Diagnostic 13
Diagnostic flowchart for tape jammed or tape speed/auto-reverse malfunction. Steps: (1) Functions OK if different tape (less than 120 mins.) is inserted? Yes → Cassette tape faulty. No → (2) Is there a foreign object inside tape player? Yes → Remove foreign object. No → (3) Operates normally after cleaning the heads? (See page BE-137) Yes → Head dirty. No → Radio assembly faulty.
-
APS, SKIP, RPT BUTTONS NOT OPERATING — Tape Player Diagnostic 14
Diagnostic flowchart for APS, SKIP, RPT buttons not operating. Steps: (1) Functions OK if different cassette tape inserted? No → Radio assembly faulty. Yes → Cassette tape faulty. (Less than 3 secs. of silence between songs (APS, RPT). Less than 15 secs. of silence (SKIP).)
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Clock · Troubleshooting
Body electrical
RM179U1_1991 · p1416 OEM manual
-
CLOCK CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
As shown in the illustration, those are clock circuit and connector diagrams. Inspect each terminal for applicable trouble.
BODY · Moulding
Body
RM179U1_1991 · p1448 OEM manual
-
HEAT BODY AND MOULDING
Be sure that the body and moulding are heated to the proper temperature.
-
DO NOT DEPRESS ADHESIVE-COATED PARTS EXCESSIVELY
Do not depress the adhesive-coated parts excessively just hold them down with your thumb.
-
SCRAPE OFF OVERFLOWING ADHESIVE
Scrape off any overflowing adhesive with a plastic spatula and clean the surface with a dry rang.
-
DO NOT WASH VEHICLE FOR 24 HOURS
After installation, do not wash the vehicle for 24 hours.
BODY · Back Window Glass · Removal and Installation
Body
RM179U1_1991 · p1462 OEM manual
-
REMOVE BACK WINDOW LOWER MOULDING
Using the knife, cut off the moulding as shown.
- Do not damage the body with the knife.
-
REMOVE BACK WINDOW GLASS
Remove two screws. Remove the glass in the same manner as windshield. See step 11 on page BO-38.
BODY · T-Bar Roof · Assembly / Disassembly of Sunshade Trim
Body
RM179U1_1991 · p1470 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY OF SUNSHADE TRIM
See page BO-48. REMOVE SUNSHADE TRIM HOLDER: Remove two screws and the holder.
-
ASSEMBLY OF SUNSHADE TRIM
See page BO-48. INSTALL SUNSHADE TRIM HOLDER: Install the holder with two screws.
BODY · Moon Roof · Components
Body
RM179U1_1991 · p1473 OEM manual
-
MOON ROOF COMPONENTS
Exploded diagram identifying all moon roof components: Removable Roof, Sunshade Trim, Wind Defector Panel, Sun Visor, Holder, Inner Rear View Mirror, Map Light, Map Light Cover, Hinge Case, Opening Trim, Auxiliary Catch, Front Pillar Garnish, Sunshade Lock Stopper, Sunshade Trim Knob, Inner Weatherstrip, Roof Headlining, Removable Roof Garnish, Lock Handle, Spacer, Lock Base, Lock Garnish, Door Scuff Plate.
BODY · Instrument Panel · Removal/Installation
Body
RM179U1_1991 · p1485 OEM manual
-
SCREW SIZE CODE REFERENCE
Screw sizes in the illustration on the previous page are indicated using the code below for removal and installation of instrument panel. Code A: φ=6 (0.24) mm, L=20 (0.79) mm. Code B: φ=4.5 (0.177) mm, L=12 (0.47) mm. Code C: φ=5.22 (0.2055) mm, L=16 (0.63) mm. Code D: φ=6 (0.24) mm, L=14 (0.55) mm. Code E: no size listed.
-
REMOVE FOLLOWING PARTS FROM SAFETY PAD
Step 27: Remove the following parts from safety pad: Defroster nozzle, Defroster nozzle No. 1 garnish, Defroster nozzle No. 2 garnish, Meter hood No. 1 retainer, Meter hood No. 2 retainer, Glove compartment door lock mounting bracket, Duct heater to register No. 1, Duct heater to register No. 4, No. 3 register, Under cover No. 1 bracket, Pin.
-
REMOVE FOLLOWING PARTS
Step 28: Remove the following parts: Defroster lower nozzle, Duct heater to register No. 3, No. 1 brace, No. 2 brace, Console box mounting No. 1 bracket.
BODY · Body Dimensions · General Information
Body
RM179U1_1991 · p1489 OEM manual
-
BASIC DIMENSIONS — Three-dimensional distance
Straight-line distance between the centers of two measuring points.
-
BASIC DIMENSIONS — Two-dimensional distance
Horizontal distance in forward/rearward between the centers of two measuring points, and the height from an imaginary standard line.
-
BASIC DIMENSIONS — Symmetry
In cases in which only one dimension is given, left and right are symmetrical.
-
BASIC DIMENSIONS — Actual distance
The dimensions in the following drawing indicate actual distance. Therefore, please use the dimensions as a reference.
-
MEASURING — Use tracking gauge
Basically, all measurements are to be done with a tracking gauge. For portions where it is not possible to use a tracking gauge, a tape measure should be used.
-
MEASURING — Tracking gauge condition
Use only a tracking gauge that has no looseness in the body, measuring plate, or pointers.
-
MEASURING HINT 1 — Equal pointer heights
The height of the left and right pointers must be equal.
-
MEASURING HINT 2 — Calibrate before measuring
Always calibrate the tracking gauge before measuring or after adjusting the pointer height.
-
MEASURING HINT 3 — Handle with care
Take care not to drop the tracking gauge or otherwise shock it.
-
MEASURING HINT 4 — Secure pointers
Confirm that the pointers are securely in the holes.
-
MEASURING — Tape measure: avoid twists and bends
When using a tape measure, avoid twists and bends in the tape.
-
MEASURING — Diagonal measurement along panel surface
When tracking a diagonal measurement from the front spring support inner hole to the suspension member upper rear installation hole, measure along the front spring support panel surface.
BODY · Body Dimensions · Under Body
Body
RM179U1_1991 · p1494 OEM manual
-
AIRBAG SENSOR MOUNTING ANGLE NOTICE
True up the mounting section of the front airbag sensor very carefully and accurately so that the sensor can be mounted at the correct angle.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · General Information
Air conditioning
RM179U1_1991 · p1499 OEM manual
-
ELECTRICAL PARTS
Before removing and inspecting the electrical parts, set the ignition switch to the LOCK position and disconnect the negative (-) terminal cable from the battery.
- Work must not be started until after at least 20 seconds or longer from the time the negative (-) terminal cable is disconnected.
-
SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM
Failure to carry out service operation in the correct sequence could cause the airbag system to deploy, possibly leading to a serious accident. When removal or installation of the parts and the yellow wire harness and connector for the airbag is necessary, refer to the precautionary notices in the AB section before performing the operation.
- Failure to carry out service operation in the correct sequence could cause the airbag system to deploy, possibly leading to a serious accident.
-
WHEN HANDLING REFRIGERANT (R-12), FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED
Do not handle refrigerant in an enclosed area or near an open flame. Always wear eye protection. Be careful that liquid refrigerant does not get in your eyes or on your skin. If liquid refrigerant gets in your eyes or on your skin: Do not rub. Wash the area with lots of cool water. Apply clean petroleum jelly to the skin. Go immediately to a physician or hospital for professional treatment. Do not attempt to treat yourself.
- Do not handle refrigerant in an enclosed area or near an open flame.
- Always wear eye protection.
- Be careful that liquid refrigerant does not get in your eyes or on your skin.
- If liquid refrigerant gets in your eyes or on your skin: Do not rub, wash the area with lots of cool water, apply clean petroleum jelly to the skin, go immediately to a physician or hospital for professional treatment, do not attempt to treat yourself.
-
WHEN REPLACING PARTS IN REFRIGERANT LINE
Discharge the refrigerant in the line slowly before replacement. Insert a plug immediately in disconnected parts to prevent the entry of moisture and dust. Do not leave a new condenser or receiver, etc., lying around with the plug removed.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Description · Dampers Position
Air conditioning
RM179U1_1991 · p1503 OEM manual
-
DAMPARS POSITION
Diagram and table describing the position of air inlet damper, mode damper, and air mix damper based on A/C control switch and lever positions. Air Inlet Control Lever: Fresh = position 1 (outside air); Recirc = position 2 (inside air recirculation). Temperature Control Lever: Warm = positions 3, 4 (air mix damper range); Cool = positions 4, 5 (air mix damper range). Mode Control Lever positions and corresponding damper numbers and air flow vents: Def. = dampers 8, 11, 15 — Side (large), DEF (large); Foot/Def. = dampers 9, 12, 15 — Side (large), Foot (large), DEF (large); Foot = dampers 10, 13, 15 — Side (large), Foot (large), DEF (small); Bi-Level = dampers 9, 14, 16 — Center (large), Side (large), Foot (large); Face = dampers 8, 14, 17 — Center (large), Side (large). The size of circle indicates the proportion of the air flow volume.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Refrigeration System
Air conditioning
RM179U1_1991 · p1510 OEM manual
-
DISCHARGING OF REFRIGERANT IN REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
See Air Conditioning Fundamentals and Repairs Pub. No. 36950E.
-
EVACUATING OF AIR IN REFRIGERATION SYSTEM AND CHARGING WITH REFRIGERANT
See Air Conditioning Fundamentals and Repairs Pub. No. 36950E.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Refrigeration Lines
Air conditioning
RM179U1_1991 · p1512 OEM manual
-
INSPECT HOSE AND TUBE CONNECTIONS FOR LOOSENESS
Inspect hose and tube connections for looseness.
-
INSPECT HOSES AND TUBES FOR LEAKAGE
Using a gas leak tester, check for leakage of refrigerant.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Compressor
Air conditioning
RM179U1_1991 · p1525 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CLEARANCE OF MAGNETIC CLUTCH
Set the dial-gauge to the pressure plate of the magnetic clutch. Connect the magnetic clutch lead wire to the positive (+) terminal of the battery. Check the clearance between the pressure plate and rotor, when connect the negative (–) terminal of the battery. Standard Clearance: 0.8 ± 0.2 mm (0.32 ± 0.08 in.). If the clearance is not within standard clearance, adjust the clearance using shims to obtain the standard clearance.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Receiver, Condenser
Air conditioning
RM179U1_1991 · p1527 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CONDENSER FINS FOR BLOCKAGE OR DAMAGE
If the fins are clogged, wash them with water and dry with compressed air. Be careful not to damage the fins. If the fins are bent, straighten them with a screwdriver or pliers.
- Be careful not to damage the fins.
-
INSPECT CONDENSER FITTINGS FOR LEAKAGE
Repair as necessary.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Condenser, Cooling Unit
Cooling
RM179U1_1991 · p1529 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF COOLING UNIT
1. DISCONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE FROM BATTERY 2. DISCHARGE REFRIGERANT FROM REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 3. DISCONNECT SUCTION TUBE FROM COOLING UNIT OUTLET FITTING 4. DISCONNECT LIQUID TUBE FROM COOLING UNIT INLET FITTING — Cap the open fittings immediately to keep moisture out of the system. 5. REMOVE GLOVE BOX 6. DISCONNECT CONNECTORS 7. REMOVE COOLING UNIT — Remove the three nuts and four bolts and the cooling unit.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Thermistor
Air conditioning
RM179U1_1991 · p1534 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF THERMISTOR
See Disassembly of Cooling Unit on page AC-30.
-
INSTALLATION OF THERMISTOR
See Assembly of Cooling Unit on page AC-32.
-
INSPECT THERMISTOR OPERATION
Place the thermistor in cold water. While varying the temperature of the water, measure the resistance at the connector and at the same time, measure the temperature of the water with a thermometer. Compare the two readings on the chart. If the intersection is not between the two lines, replace the thermistor. Thermistor must be more than 10 cm (3.94 in.) from ice.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · A/C Control Assembly · Mode Control Switch
Air conditioning
RM179U1_1991 · p1536 OEM manual
-
INSPECT SWITCH CONTINUITY (Fresh/Recirc)
Check continuity at Connector A terminals for switch positions: FRESH (Free): continuity between A-1 and A-9 (diode), and A-1 to A-15; RECIRC (Pushed in): continuity between A-9 and A-15 (diode). If continuity is not as specified, replace the A/C control assembly.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · A/C Control Assembly · Temperature Control Lever
Air conditioning
RM179U1_1991 · p1538 OEM manual
-
INSPECT SWITCH CONTINUITY
Using Connector C, verify continuity between terminals C-5 and C-6 when switch is in A/C position. No continuity expected in OFF position. If continuity is not as specified, replace the A/C switch.
-
ADJUST AIR MIX DAMPER CONTROL CABLE
Set the air mix damper and the control lever to COOL, then install the control cable and lock the clamp.
-
ADJUST WATER VALVE CONTROL CABLES
Set the water valve and the control lever to COOL, then install the control cable and lock the clamp.
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · Automatic Transaxle (A241E)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p1554 OEM manual
-
ENGINE STALL REVOLUTION
Engine stall revolution: 2,550 ± 150 rpm
-
TIME LAG
Time lag N range → D range: Less than 1.2 seconds. N range → R range: Less than 1.5 seconds.
-
ENGINE IDLE SPEED (A/C OFF, N RANGE)
700 ± 50 rpm
-
SHIFT SCHEDULE — D RANGE (THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN [FULLY CLOSED])
1→2: 53-59 km/h (33-37 mph); 2→3: 102-112 km/h (63-70 mph); 3→O/D: 137-149 km/h (85-93 mph); [3→O/D]: 46-52 km/h (29-32 mph); [O/D→3]: 19-24 km/h (12-15 mph); O/D→3: 131-143 km/h (81-89 mph); 3→2: 98-108 km/h (61-67 mph); 2→1: 44-50 km/h (27-31 mph)
-
SHIFT SCHEDULE — 2 RANGE (THROTTLE VALVE FULLY OPEN [FULLY CLOSED])
1→2: 53-59 km/h (33-37 mph); 2→1: 44-50 km/h (27-31 mph)
-
SHIFT SCHEDULE — L RANGE
2→1: 34-40 km/h (21-25 mph)
-
LOCK-UP POINT — D RANGE (THROTTLE VALVE OPENING 5%)
Lock-up ON O/D: 80-87 km/h (50-54 mph). Lock-up OFF O/D: 74-80 km/h (46-50 mph).
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
RM179U1_1991 · p185 OEM manual
-
Measure cylinder bore diameter in thrust directions
(b) Measure the cylinder bore diameter in the thrust directions. (See step 4 on page EM-152) (c) Subtract the piston diameter measurement from the cylinder bore diameter measurement. If the oil clearance is greater than maximum, replace all the four pistons. If necessary, replace the cylinder block.
-
HINT (Use new cylinder block)
Use a piston with the same number mark as the cylinder bore diameter marked on the cylinder block.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block · Post Assembly
Engine — mechanical
RM179U1_1991 · p244 OEM manual
-
RETIGHTEN CAP NUTS 90°
Retighten the cap nuts 90° in the numerical order shown.
-
CHECK PAINTED MARK ANGLE
Check that the painted mark is now at a 90° angle to the front.
-
CHECK CRANKSHAFT ROTATION
Check that the crankshaft turns smoothly.
-
CHECK CONNECTING ROD THRUST CLEARANCE
Check the connecting rod thrust clearance. See step 2 on page EM-193.
-
INSTALL REAR OIL SEAL RETAINER
Install a new gasket and the retainer with the six bolts. Torque: 95 kg-cm (82 in.-lb, 9.3 N·m).
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Precautions
Turbocharger
RM179U1_1991 · p263 OEM manual
-
IDLE ENGINE AFTER HARD DRIVING
Do not stop the engine immediately after pulling a trailer or high speed or uphill driving. Idle the engine for 20 – 120 seconds, depending on the severity of the driving condition.
-
AVOID SUDDEN RACING ON COLD START
Avoid sudden racing or acceleration immediately after starting a cold engine.
-
DO NOT RUN ENGINE WITHOUT AIR CLEANER
If the engine is run with the air cleaner removed, foreign material entering will damage the wheels which run at extremely high speed.
-
CHECK CAUSE OF DEFECT BEFORE REPLACING TURBOCHARGER
If the turbocharger is defective and must be replaced, first check for the cause of the defect in reference to the following items and replace parts if necessary: Engine oil level and quality; Conditions under which the turbocharger was used; Oil lines leading to the turbocharger.
-
HANDLE TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY WITH CARE
Use caution when removing and reinstalling the turbocharger assembly. Do not drop it or bang it against anything or grasp it by easily-deformed parts, such as the actuator or rod, when moving it.
-
PLUG PORTS BEFORE REMOVING TURBOCHARGER
Before removing the turbocharger, plug the intake and exhaust ports and oil inlet to prevent entry of dirt or other foreign material.
-
CHECK OIL PIPES FOR SLUDGE WHEN REPLACING TURBOCHARGER
If replacing the turbocharger, check for accumulation of sludge particles in the oil pipes, and if necessary, replace the oil pipes.
-
REMOVE GASKET FROM OIL PIPE AND TURBOCHARGER FLANGES
Completely remove the gasket adhered to the lubrication oil pipe flange and turbocharger oil flange.
-
USE SPECIFIED NEW BOLTS OR NUTS
If replacing bolts or nuts, do so only with the specified new ones to guard against breakage or deformation.
-
PRIME NEW TURBOCHARGER WITH OIL
If replacing the turbocharger, put 20 cc (1.2 cu in.) of oil into the turbocharger oil inlet and turn the impeller wheel by hand to spread oil to the bearing.
-
DISTRIBUTE OIL AFTER ENGINE OVERHAUL OR REPLACEMENT
If overhauling or replacing the engine, cut the fuel supply after reassembly and crank the engine for 30 seconds to distribute oil throughout the engine. Then allow the engine to idle for 60 seconds.
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
Turbocharger
RM179U1_1991 · p264 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING HINT
Before troubleshooting the turbocharger, first check the engine itself. (Valve clearance, engine compression, ignition timing etc.)
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Turbocharger · Components
Turbocharger
RM179U1_1991 · p267 OEM manual
-
INSPECT IMPELLER WHEEL ROTATION
See step 1 on page TC-13
-
INSPECT TURBOCHARGING PRESSURE VSV
See page FI-165
-
INSPECT TURBOCHARGING PRESSURE SENSOR
See page FI-171
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Emission control
RM179U1_1991 · p286 OEM manual
-
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index listing all emission control system sections for both 3S-GTE and 5S-FE engines, with page references. Sections covered: SYSTEM PURPOSE, COMPONENT LAYOUT AND SCHEMATIC DRAWING, POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM, FUEL EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL (EVAP) SYSTEM, EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM, THREE-WAY CATALYST (TWC) SYSTEM. NOTE: TROUBLESHOOTING (See pages EM-6 to 9).
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (3S-GTE) · Component Layout and Schematic Drawing
Emission control
RM179U1_1991 · p288 OEM manual
-
COMPONENT LAYOUT AND SCHEMATIC DRAWING
Illustrates the physical component layout and vacuum/emissions schematic for the 3S-GTE engine emission control system. Components identified include: EGR Vacuum Modulator, BVSV (For EVAP), Charcoal Canister, VSV (For EGR), EGR Valve, Jet, ISC Valve, BVSV (For EVAP), Sub-TWC, Main TWC, Oxygen Sensor.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (3S-GTE) · Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
Emission control
RM179U1_1991 · p289 OEM manual
-
PCV SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
To reduce HC emissions, crankcase blow-by gas (HC) is routed to the intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (3S-GTE) · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Exhaust
RM179U1_1991 · p293 OEM manual
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION — COOLANT BELOW 54°C (129°F)
VSV is CLOSED. EGR Valve is CLOSED. Exhaust gas is not recirculated regardless of throttle valve position.
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION — COOLANT ABOVE 60°C (140°F), THROTTLE ABOVE E PORT
VSV is OPEN. Throttle valve positioned above E port. Pressure in EGR valve pressure chamber condition (1). EGR Vacuum Modulator not activated. EGR Valve is CLOSED. Exhaust gas is not recirculated.
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION — COOLANT ABOVE 60°C (140°F), THROTTLE BELOW E PORT
VSV is OPEN. Throttle valve positioned below E port. Pressure in EGR valve pressure chamber condition (2). EGR Vacuum Modulator closes passage to atmosphere. EGR Valve is OPEN. Exhaust gas is recirculated (increase).
-
EGR VACUUM MODULATOR REMARK
When the throttle valve is positioned above the E port, the EGR vacuum modulator will close the atmosphere passage and open the EGR valve to increase the EGR gas, even if the exhaust pressure is insufficiently low.
-
EGR SYSTEM PURPOSE
To reduce NOx emissions, part of the exhaust gases are recirculated through the EGR valve to the intake manifold to lower the maximum combustion temperature.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (3S-GTE) · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System · Inspection of EGR Valve
Engine — mechanical
RM179U1_1991 · p296 OEM manual
-
EGR SYSTEM AIR FLOW TEST AT 2,500 RPM
Start the engine, and maintain speed at 2,500 rpm. Repeat the above test. Check that there is a strong resistance to air flow. Reconnect the vacuum hoses to the proper locations.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (3S-GTE) · Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) System · EC-13
Emission control
RM179U1_1991 · p298 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF HEAT INSULATOR (Sub-Catalytic Converter)
1. Check heat insulator for damage. 2. Check for adequate clearance between catalytic converter and heat insulator.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (3S-GTE) · Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) System · Sub-Catalytic Converter
Emission control
RM179U1_1991 · p300 OEM manual
-
REINSTALL IDLER PULLEY BRACKET AND A/C COMPRESSOR WITHOUT DISCONNECTING HOSES
See step 16 on pages EM-173 and 174.
-
REINSTALL FRONT EXHAUST PIPE
See step 3 on page EC-17.
-
REINSTALL TAILPIPE
See step 4 on page EC-18.
-
REINSTALL NO.1 AND NO.2 AIR INTAKE CONNECTORS
See steps 38 and 39 on page EM-179.
-
REINSTALL ENGINE UNDER COVERS
-
CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF BATTERY
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (5S-FE) · System Purpose
Emission control
RM179U1_1991 · p303 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM PURPOSE
Table listing emission control systems, their abbreviations, and purposes: PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) reduces blow-by gas (HC); EVAP (Fuel evaporative emission control) reduces evaporative HC; EGR (Exhaust gas recirculation) reduces NOx; TWC (Three-way catalyst) reduces HC, CO and NOx; EFI (Electronic fuel injection) regulates all engine conditions for reduction of exhaust emissions. For inspection and repair of the EFI system, refer to EFI section of this manual.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (5S-FE) · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Exhaust
RM179U1_1991 · p309 OEM manual
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION — COOLANT BELOW 55°C (131°F)
When coolant temperature is below 55°C (131°F), VSV is CLOSED regardless of engine RPM or throttle position. EGR valve is CLOSED and exhaust gas is not recirculated.
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION — COOLANT ABOVE 60°C (140°F), ENGINE BELOW 4,000 RPM, VSV OFF
When VSV is OFF and throttle valve is positioned below E port (regardless of PIM), EGR valve pressure chamber has no pressure, EGR valve is CLOSED and exhaust gas is not recirculated.
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION — COOLANT ABOVE 60°C (140°F), ENGINE BELOW 4,000 RPM, VSV OFF, THROTTLE BELOW E PORT WITH CONDITION (1)
When VSV is OFF, throttle positioned below E port, and condition (1) applies, pressure in EGR valve pressure chamber is present but EGR vacuum modulator state is not activated. EGR valve remains CLOSED and exhaust gas is not recirculated.
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION — COOLANT ABOVE 60°C (140°F), ENGINE BELOW 4,000 RPM, VSV ON, THROTTLE BETWEEN E AND R PORTS — CONDITION (2)
When VSV is ON, throttle positioned between E port and R port, pressure in EGR valve pressure chamber is HIGH (condition 2). EGR vacuum modulator CLOSES passage to atmosphere. EGR valve OPENS and exhaust gas is recirculated. Pressure increase → Modulator closes → EGR valve opens → Pressure drops → EGR valve close → Modulator opens.
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION — COOLANT ABOVE 60°C (140°F), ENGINE BELOW 4,000 RPM, VSV ON, THROTTLE ABOVE R PORT — CONDITION (3)
When VSV is ON and throttle valve is positioned above R port, pressure in EGR valve pressure chamber is HIGH (condition 3). EGR vacuum modulator CLOSES passage to atmosphere and opens EGR valve to increase exhaust gas recirculation even if exhaust pressure is insufficiently low.
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION — ENGINE ABOVE 4,000 RPM
When engine RPM is above 4,000 rpm, VSV is OFF and throttle is CLOSED. EGR valve is CLOSED and exhaust gas is not recirculated.
-
VSV DIAGNOSTIC SWITCH NOTE
If terminals TE1 and E1 of check connector are connected, the VSV switches ON.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (5S-FE) · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Exhaust
RM179U1_1991 · p312 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF EGR VALVE — REMOVE EGR VALVE
Check for sticking and heavy carbon deposits. If a problem is found, replace the valve.
-
INSPECTION OF EGR VALVE — REINSTALL EGR VALVE
Install a new gasket.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (5S-FE) · Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) System
Emission control
RM179U1_1991 · p314 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF HEAT INSULATOR (Sub-Catalytic Converter (CALIF. only))
1. CHECK HEAT INSULATOR FOR DAMAGE. 2. CHECK FOR ADEQUATE CLEARANCE BETWEEN CATALYTIC CONVERTER AND HEAT INSULATOR.
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions · Electronic Control System
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p324 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE REMOVING EFI WIRING
Before removing EFI wiring connectors, terminals, etc., first disconnect the power by either turning the ignition switch OFF or disconnecting the battery terminals. Always check the diagnosis code before disconnecting the battery terminals.
-
CONNECT BATTERY CABLES CORRECTLY
When installing the battery, be especially careful not to incorrectly connect the positive (+) and negative (−) cables.
-
HANDLE EFI PARTS WITH CARE
Do not permit parts to receive a severe impact during removal or installation. Handle all EFI parts carefully, especially the ECU.
-
AVOID CARELESS TROUBLESHOOTING
Do not be careless during troubleshooting as there are numerous transistor circuits and even slight terminal contact can cause further troubles.
-
DO NOT OPEN THE ECU COVER
Do not open the ECU cover.
-
PREVENT WATER ENTRY DURING INSPECTION
When inspecting during rainy weather, take care to prevent entry of water. Also, when washing the engine compartment, prevent water from getting on the EFI parts and wiring connectors.
-
REPLACE PARTS AS AN ASSEMBLY
Parts should be replaced as an assembly.
-
CARE WHEN PULLING OUT AND INSERTING WIRING CONNECTORS
Care is required when pulling out and inserting wiring connectors.
-
INSPECTING A CONNECTOR WITH A VOLT/OHMMETER
When inspecting a connector with a volt/ohmmeter.
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions · Fuel System
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p325 OEM manual
-
INSERT TEST PROBE FROM WIRING SIDE
Insert the test probe into the connector from wiring side when checking the continuity, amperage or voltage.
-
DO NOT APPLY UNNECESSARY FORCE TO TERMINAL
Do not apply unnecessary force to the terminal.
-
REINSTALL WATER-PROOFING RUBBER
After checking, install the water-proofing rubber on the connector securely.
-
USE SST FOR INJECTOR INSPECTION
Use SST for inspection or test of the injector, cold start injector or its wiring connector. SST 09842-30050 (A) and 09842-30060 (B) for 3S-GTE; 09842-30050 (A) and 09842-30070 (C) for 5S-FE.
-
DISCONNECTING HIGH FUEL PRESSURE LINE
When disconnecting the high fuel pressure line, a large amount of gasoline will spill out, so observe the following procedures.
-
CONNECTING FLARE NUT OR UNION BOLT ON HIGH PRESSURE PIPE UNION
When connecting the flare nut or union bolt on the high pressure pipe union, observe the following procedures.
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p327 OEM manual
-
CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKS WITH RETURN HOSE PINCHED
When the fuel return hose is pinched, the pressure within high pressure line will rise to approx. 4 kg/cm² (57 psi, 392 kPa). In this state, check to see that there are no leaks from any part of the fuel system.
- Always pinch the hose. Avoid bending as it may cause the hose to crack.
-
TURN OFF IGNITION AND REMOVE SST AFTER INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the SST. SST 09843-18020.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · FI-15
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p332 OEM manual
-
CHECK IDLE SPEED
Standard idle speed: 3S-GTE 800±50 rpm; 5S-FE 750±50 rpm USA M/T, 700±50 rpm USA A/T, 850±50 rpm CANADA M/T, 750±50 rpm CANADA A/T. If BAD: 1. ISC system — (1) Wiring connection, (2) ISC valve (See page FI-148 or 151), (3) ECU (test by substitution). 2. (5S-FE) Idle speed — Adjust (See page EM-20).
-
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Connect terminals TE1 and E1 of the check connector. 2. Check ignition timing. Standard: 10° BTDC @ idle. If NO: Ignition timing — Adjust (See page IG-17 or 22).
-
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Standard gap: 3S-GTE 0.8 mm (0.031 in.); 5S-FE 1.1 mm (0.043 in.). HINT: Check compression pressure and valve clearance if necessary. If NO: 1. Spark plugs (See page IG-6 or 11). 2. Compression pressure (See page EM-25) Minimum (at 250 rpm): 3S-GTE 9.0 kg/cm² (128 psi, 883 kPa); 5S-FE 10.0 kg/cm² (142 psi, 981 kPa). 3. Valve clearance (Cold) (See page EM-11 or 16).
-
CHECK COLD START INJECTOR
See page FI-99 or 102. If BAD: 1. Cold start injector (See page FI-99 or 102). 2. Cold start injector time switch (See page FI-158).
-
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
See page FI-87. If BAD: 1. Fuel pump (See page FI-85). 2. Fuel filter. 3. Fuel pressure regulator (See page FI-105 or 107).
-
CHECK INJECTORS
See page FI-110 or 120. If BAD: Injection condition. Continue OK on page FI-16.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p341 OEM manual
-
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Check spark plugs against standard gap. 3S-GTE: 0.8 mm (0.031 in.), 5S-FE: 1.1 mm (0.043 in.). HINT: Check compression pressure and valve clearance if necessary. If NO: 1. Spark plugs (See page IG-6 or 11); 2. Compression pressure (See page EM-25) Minimum at 250 rpm: 3S-GTE 9.0 kg/cm2 (128 psi, 883 kPa), 5S-FE 10.0 kg/cm2 (142 psi, 981 kPa); 3. Valve clearance (Cold) (See page EM-11 or 15).
-
CHECK T-VIS VALVE (3S-GTE)
See page EM-22. Check if air control valve is open with engine running at 4,200 rpm above. If BAD: 1. T-VIS VSV (See page FI-163); 2. Vacuum leaks.
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER
See page FI-33. If BAD: 1. Wiring connections; 2. Power to ECU: (1) Fusible links, (2) Fuses, (3) EFI main relay (See page FI-156); 3. (3S-GTE) Air flow meter (See page FI-131); 4. (5S-FE) Vacuum sensor (See page FI-170); 5. Water temp. sensor (See page FI-168); 6. Intake air temp. sensor (See page FI-131 or 169); 7. Throttle position sensor (See page FI-134 or 141); 8. Injection signal circuit: (1) Injector wiring, (2) (3S-GTE) Solenoid resistor (See page FI-159), (3) ECU (See page FI-176).
EFI SYSTEM · Diagnosis System
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p342 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECU contains a built-in, self-diagnosis system that detects which troubles within the engine signal network and then flashes a warning on the 'CHECK' engine warning light on the instrument panel. By analyzing various signals shown in the tables (See page 28 or 30) the ECU detects system malfunctions which are related to the various operating parameter sensors or actuator. The ECU stores the failure code associated with the detected failure until the diagnosis system is cleared by removing the EFI fuse with the ignition switch OFF.
-
CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CHECK
1. The 'CHECK' engine warning light will come on when the ignition switch is placed at ON and the engine is not running. 2. When the engine is started, the 'CHECK' engine warning light should go off. If the light remains on, the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Fuel Pump)
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p403 OEM manual
-
FUEL PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM — 5S-FE
Wiring diagram showing the EFI fuel pump circuit for the 5S-FE engine. The circuit originates from the Battery through FL MAIN 2.0L fusible link, FL 1.0Y fusible link, and FL AM2 40A fusible link. The Ignition Switch (AM2) provides IG2 and ST2 outputs. The EFI Main Relay is powered via Fuse AM2 7.5A and Fuse EFI 15A. The Starter Relay is activated through the Clutch Start Switch (M/T) or Neutral Start Switch (A/T) via ST2. The Circuit Opening Relay receives +B supply and is controlled by the ECU via FC, E1, and STA terminals. The Fuel Pump is powered through the Check Connector (FP and +B terminals) and the Circuit Opening Relay (FP terminal). The FC terminal of the Circuit Opening Relay connects to the ECU (FC).
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Fuel Pump) · Disassembly / Assembly
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p413 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF FUEL PUMP
See page FI-95
-
INSTALL FUEL PUMP FILTER TO FUEL PUMP
Install the pump filter with a new clip.
-
INSTALL FUEL PUMP TO FUEL PUMP BRACKET
(a) Connect the fuel hose to the outlet port of the fuel pump. (b) Connect the lead wire to the fuel pump with the spring washer and nut. Connect the three lead wires. (c) Install the rubber cushion to the fuel pump. (d) Install the fuel pump by pushing the lower side of the fuel pump.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Cold Start Injector (5S-FE))
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p420 OEM manual
-
REMOVE COLD START INJECTOR
Remove the two bolts, cold start injector and gasket.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Injectors (5S-FE))
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p440 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF DELIVERY PIPE AND INJECTORS
Preceding steps on this page cover removal of delivery pipe and injectors for the 5S-FE engine.
- Be careful not to drop the injectors when removing the delivery pipe.
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling
RM179U1_1991 · p500 OEM manual
-
COOLING SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index listing all subsections of the Cooling System chapter with corresponding page numbers: DESCRIPTION (CO-2), TROUBLESHOOTING (CO-4), ENGINE COOLANT CHECK (CO-4), REPLACEMENT OF ENGINE OF COOLANT (CO-5), WATER PUMP (CO-10), THERMOSTAT (CO-14), RADIATOR (CO-16), ELECTRIC COOLING FANS (CO-21), Radiator Cooling Fans (w/ A/C) (CO-21), Radiator Cooling Fan (w/o A/C) (CO-28), Engine Compartment Cooling Fan (3S-GTE) (CO-31).
COOLING SYSTEM · Description
Cooling
RM179U1_1991 · p501 OEM manual
-
COOLING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This engine utilizes a pressurized forced circulation cooling system which includes a thermostat equipped with a by-pass valve mounted on the inlet side.
COOLING SYSTEM · Troubleshooting, Engine Coolant Check
Cooling
RM179U1_1991 · p503 OEM manual
-
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL AT RESERVE TANK
The coolant level should be between the "LOW" and "FULL" lines. If low, check for leaks and add coolant up to the "FULL" line.
-
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT QUALITY
There should not be any excessive deposits of rust or scales around the radiator (water filler) cap or water filler hole, and the coolant should be free from oil. If excessively dirty, replace the coolant.
-
THERMOSTAT REMOVAL HINT
Removal of the thermostat would have an adverse effect, causing a lowering of cooling efficiency. Do not remove the thermostat, even if the engine tends to overheat.
COOLING SYSTEM · Replacement of Engine Coolant · Engine Coolant Circuit
Cooling
RM179U1_1991 · p504 OEM manual
-
AVOID BURNS — COOL ENGINE BEFORE WORK
To avoid the danger of burns, do not begin work until the engine and coolant are properly cooled down.
- Do not begin work until the engine and coolant are properly cooled down.
-
PERFORM WORK ON LEVEL AREA
To ensure that coolant is poured in properly, perform the operation at a level area. Performing work with the vehicle inclined may cause improper removal of coolant or improper air removal when pouring coolant.
- Performing work with the vehicle inclined may cause improper removal of coolant or improper air removal when pouring coolant.
-
CHECK WATER LEVEL AFTER REPLACEMENT
When replacement has been performed, check the water level in the water filler and reservoir tank once or twice within 500 km (311 miles) of driving or within one week.
COOLING SYSTEM · Water Pump · Inspection and Installation
Cooling
RM179U1_1991 · p511 OEM manual
-
INSPECT WATER PUMP
Turn the pulley and check that the water pump bearing moves smoothly and quietly.
COOLING SYSTEM · Thermostat
Cooling
RM179U1_1991 · p513 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF THERMOSTAT — INSPECT THERMOSTAT
HINT: The thermostat is numbered with the valve opening temperature. (a) Immerse the thermostat in water and gradually heat the water. (b) Check the valve opening temperature. Valve opening temperature: 80–84°C (176–183°F). If the valve opening temperature is not as specified, replace the thermostat. (c) Check the valve lift. Valve lift: 8 mm (0.31 in.) or more at 95°C (203°F). If the valve lift is less than specification, replace the thermostat. (d) Check that the valve spring is tight when the thermostat is fully closed. If necessary, replace the thermostat.
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fans · Radiator Cooling Fan (w/o A/C)
Cooling
RM179U1_1991 · p527 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM CIRCUIT — Radiator Cooling Fan (w/o A/C)
The radiator cooling fan circuit (without A/C) consists of: Battery → FL MAIN 2.0L → FL ALT 120A → Fan Main Relay → (power path) Fuse AM2 7.5A → Ignition Switch (AM2/IG2) → Fan Main Relay coil. High-current path: Fuse RAD FAN 30A → Cooling Fan Relay → No. 1 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor (M). The Water Temp. Switch controls the Cooling Fan Relay coil to switch the fan on/off based on coolant temperature.
-
LOCATION OF RADIATOR COOLING FAN COMPONENTS
Components are located as follows: Fan Main Relay ('FAN MAIN') — underhood fuse/relay block. Cooling Fan Relay ('FAN No. 1') — underhood fuse/relay block. Fuse AM2 7.5A — underhood fuse/relay block. Fuse RAD FAN 30A — underhood fuse/relay block. FL ALT 120A — underhood fuse/relay block. No. 1 Radiator Cooling Fan — front of engine bay at radiator. Water Temp. Switch — engine coolant outlet.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Description
Lubrication / oil
RM179U1_1991 · p537 OEM manual
-
LUBRICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A fully pressurized, fully filtered lubrication system has been adopted for this engine. Oil flow path: OIL PAN → OIL STRAINER → OIL PUMP (with RELIEF VALVE) → OIL FILTER (with RELIEF VALVE) → OIL COOLER (with RELIEF VALVE) → MAIN OIL HOLE → distributed to: CRANKSHAFT (→ CONNECTING RODS → PISTONS), OIL NOZZLES, CYLINDER HEAD (→ CAMSHAFT JOURNALS → CAMS → VALVE LIFTERS & VALVE STEMS), and TURBOCHARGER. All return paths lead back to OIL PAN.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Operation
Lubrication / oil
RM179U1_1991 · p538 OEM manual
-
LUBRICATION SYSTEM OPERATION — 5S-FE
Oil flows from the OIL PAN through the OIL STRAINER to the OIL PUMP. From the OIL PUMP it passes through the OIL FILTER (with a RELIEF VALVE bypass) and through the OIL COOLER (with a RELIEF VALVE bypass) into the MAIN OIL HOLE. A third RELIEF VALVE is also present in the circuit. From the MAIN OIL HOLE oil is distributed to: (1) CRANKSHAFT → CONNECTING RODS → PISTONS; (2) CYLINDER HEAD → CAMSHAFT JOURNALS → CAMS → VALVE LIFTERS & VALVE STEMS → CAMSHAFT GEARS. Excess/bypassed oil returns to the OIL PAN.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Operation
Lubrication / oil
RM179U1_1991 · p539 OEM manual
-
LUBRICATION SYSTEM OVERVIEW
A pressure feeding lubrication system has been adopted to supply oil to the moving parts of this engine. The lubrication system consists of an oil pan, oil pump, oil filter and other external parts which supply oil to the moving parts in the engine block. The oil circuit is shown in the illustration at the top of the previous page. Oil from the oil pan is pumped up by the oil pump. After it passes through the oil filter, it is fed through the various oil holes in the crankshaft and cylinder block. After passing through the cylinder block and performing its lubricating function, the oil is returned by gravity to the oil pan. A dipstick on the center left side of the cylinder block is provided to check the oil level.
-
OIL PUMP
The oil pump pumps up oil from the oil pan and sends it under pressure to the various parts of the engine. An oil strainer is mounted in front of the inlet to the oil pump. The oil pump itself is a trochoid type pump, inside of which there is a drive rotor and a driven rotor. When the drive rotor rotates, the driven rotor rotates in the same direction, and since the axis of the driven rotor shaft is different from the center of the driven rotor, the space between the two rotors is changed as they rotate. Oil is drawn in when the space is wide and is discharged when the space is narrow.
-
OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR
At high engine speeds, the engine oil supplied by the oil pump exceeds the capacity of the engine to utilize it. For that reason, the oil pressure regulator works to prevent an oversupply of oil. During normal oil supply, a coil spring and valve keep the bypass closed, but when too much oil is being fed, the pressure become extremely high, overpowering the force of the spring and opening the valves. This allows the excess oil to flow through the valve and return to the oil pan.
-
OIL FILTER
The oil filter is a full flow type filter with a built-in paper filter element. Particles of metal from wear, airborn dirt, carbon and other impurities can get into the oil during use and could cause accelerated wear or sizing if allowed to circulate through the engine. The oil filter, integrated into the oil line, removes these impurities as the oil passes through it. The filter is mounted outside the engine to simplify replacement of the filter element. A relief valve is also included ahead of the filter element to relieve the high oil pressure in case the filter element becomes clogged with impurities. The relief valve opens when the oil pressure overpowers the force of the spring. Oil passing through the relief valve by-passes the oil filter and flows directly into the main oil hole in the engine.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Replacement of Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Lubrication / oil
RM179U1_1991 · p542 OEM manual
-
SKIN CONTACT WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oil will result in the removal of natural fats from the skin, leading to dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin cancer.
- Prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oil may cause skin cancer.
-
PROTECTIVE MEASURES WHEN HANDLING ENGINE OIL
Care should be taken, therefore, when changing engine oil, to minimize the frequency and length of time your skin is exposed to used engine oil. Protective clothing and gloves, that cannot be penetrated by oil, should be worn. The skin should be thoroughly washed with soap and water, or use waterless hand cleaner, to remove any used engine oil. Do not use gasoline, thinners, or solvents.
- Do not use gasoline, thinners, or solvents to clean skin.
-
ENVIRONMENTAL DISPOSAL
In order to preserve the environment, used oil and used oil filter must be disposed of only at designated disposal sites.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil Pump · Disassembly and Inspection
Lubrication / oil
RM179U1_1991 · p548 OEM manual
-
INSPECT RELIEF VALVE
Coat the valve with engine oil and check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight. If it doesnt, replace the relief valve. If necessary, replace the oil pump assembly.
-
INSPECT DRIVE AND DRIVEN ROTORS — Rotor body clearance
Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the driven rotor and body. If the body clearance is greater than maximum, replace the rotors as a set. If necessary, replace the oil pump assembly.
-
INSPECT DRIVE AND DRIVEN ROTORS — Rotor tip clearance
Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the drive and driven rotors. If the tip clearance is greater than maximum, replace the rotors as a set.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil pump · Replacement / Assembly
Lubrication / oil
RM179U1_1991 · p549 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT OF CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL
See page EM-160.
-
ASSEMBLY OF OIL PUMP
See page LU-12. Steps: 1. INSTALL DRIVE AND DRIVEN ROTORS: (a) Place the drive and driven rotors into pump body with the marks facing the pump body cover side. (b) Install a new O-ring to the pump body. (c) Install the pump body cover with the two bolts. Torque: 90 kg-cm (78 in.-lb, 8.8 N·m). 2. INSTALL RELIEF VALVE: (a) Insert the relief valve, spring and retainer into the pump body hole. (b) Using snap ring pliers, install the snap ring.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil Cooler (5S-FE) · Removal & Inspection
Lubrication / oil
RM179U1_1991 · p559 OEM manual
-
REMOVE WATER BY-PASS HOSE HEAT PROTECTOR
Remove the bolt, two nuts and heat protector.
-
DISCONNECT WATER BY-PASS HOSES FROM OIL COOLER
Disconnect the two water by-pass hoses.
-
REMOVE OIL COOLER
Remove the relief valve and plate washer, then the nut and oil cooler, then the O-ring and gasket from the oil cooler.
IGNITION SYSTEM
Ignition
RM179U1_1991 · p562 OEM manual
-
IGNITION SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index listing sections: PRECAUTIONS (IG-2), TROUBLESHOOTING (IG-3), IGNITION SYSTEM CIRCUIT (IG-4), ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (3S-GTE) (IG-5), ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (5S-FE) (IG-10), DISTRIBUTOR (3S-GTE) (IG-14), DISTRIBUTOR (5S-FE) (IG-19).
IGNITION SYSTEM · On-Vehicle Inspection (3S-GTE) · Distributor & Igniter Inspection
Ignition
RM179U1_1991 · p570 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF IGNITER
See procedure Spark Test on page IG-5.
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter · Inspection
Starting / charging
RM179U1_1991 · p591 OEM manual
-
INSPECT FIELD COIL FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between the lead wire and field coil brush lead. If there is no continuity, replace the field frame.
-
INSPECT FIELD COIL FOR GROUND
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between the field coil end and field frame. If there is continuity, replace the field frame.
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter · Assembly
Starting / charging
RM179U1_1991 · p597 OEM manual
-
INSTALL END COVER
Install the end cover with two new O-rings (1.4 kW and 1.6 kW types) and the two screws.
CHARGING SYSTEM · Alternator · Components
Starting / charging
RM179U1_1991 · p608 OEM manual
-
COMPONENTS — 70 A Type
Exploded view of 70 A Type alternator components: Pulley, Drive End Frame (Stator), Front Bearing, Retainer, Bearing Cover, Rear Bearing, Rotor, Rear End Cover, Brush Holder Cover, Brush Holder, Spring, Brush, IC Regulator, Rectifier Holder, Rubber Insulator, Rectifier End Frame, Terminal Insulator.
-
COMPONENTS — 80 A and 100 A Types
Exploded view of 80 A and 100 A Type alternator components: Pulley, Drive End Frame (Stator), Front Bearing, Retainer, Alternator Washer, Bearing Cover, Rear Bearing, Rotor, Rear End Cover, Brush Holder Cover, Brush Holder, IC Regulator, Rectifier Holder, Rubber Insulator, Rectifier End Frame, Seal Plate, Terminal Insulator.
CHARGING SYSTEM · Alternator · Inspection and Repair of Alternator
Starting / charging
RM179U1_1991 · p611 OEM manual
-
REMOVE RECTIFIER END FRAME
Using SST, remove the rectifier end frame. SST 09286-46011
-
REMOVE ALTERNATOR WASHER (80 A and 100 A Types)
For 80 A and 100 A Types, remove the alternator washer.
-
INSPECT ROTOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between the slip rings. Standard resistance (Cold): 2.8 – 3.0 Ω. If there is no continuity, replace the rotor.
-
INSPECT ROTOR FOR GROUND
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between the slip ring and rotor. If there is continuity, replace the rotor.
CHARGING SYSTEM · Alternator · Inspection
Starting / charging
RM179U1_1991 · p612 OEM manual
-
INSPECT STATOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between the coil leads. If there is no continuity, replace the drive end frame assembly.
-
INSPECT STATOR FOR GROUND
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between the coil lead and drive end frame. If there is continuity, replace the drive end frame assembly.
-
INSPECT EXPOSED BRUSH LENGTH
Using scale or vernier calipers, measure the exposed brush length. If the exposed length is less than minimum, replace the brushes (70 A type) or brushes and brush holder assembly (80 A and 100 A types).
EFI System (3S-GTE) · Service Specifications · Specifications (Cont'd)
EFI / fuel injection
RM179U1_1991 · p632 OEM manual
-
ECU MEASUREMENT HINTS
Perform all voltage and resistance measurements with the ECU connected. Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or above with the ignition switch is ON.
STANDARD BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Unclassified
RM179U1_1991 · p642 OEM manual
-
HOW TO DETERMINE BOLT STRENGTH
Bolt class is determined by the mark on the bolt head or the type of bolt. Hexagon head bolt with bolt head number 4 = 4T, 5 = 5T, 6 = 6T, 7 = 7T, 8 = 8T, 9 = 9T, 10 = 10T, 11 = 11T. Hexagon head bolt with no mark = 4T. Hexagon flange bolt / w/ washer hexagon bolt with no mark = 4T. Hexagon head bolt with two protruding lines = 5T. Hexagon flange bolt / w/ washer hexagon bolt with two protruding lines = 6T. Hexagon head bolt with three protruding lines = 7T. Hexagon head bolt with four protruding lines = 8T. Stud bolt with no mark = 4T. Stud bolt with grooved shank = 6T. Welded bolt = 4T.
CLUTCH · Clutch Master Cylinder
Clutch
RM179U1_1991 · p653 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF MASTER CYLINDER
Clean the disassembled parts with compressed air.
-
INSPECT MASTER CYLINDER BORE FOR SCORING OR CORROSION
If a problem is found, clean or replace the cylinder.
-
INSPECT PISTON AND CUPS FOR WEAR, SCORING, CRACKS OR SWELLING
If either one requires replacement, use the parts from the cylinder kit.
-
INSPECT PUSH ROD FOR WEAR OR DAMAGE
If necessary, replace the push rod.
CLUTCH · Clutch Release Cylinder
Clutch
RM179U1_1991 · p657 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF RELEASE CYLINDER
See page CL-8. Steps: (1) Coat piston with Lithium Soap Base Glycol Grease, as shown. (2) Install piston. (3) Install boot and insert push rod.
-
INSTALLATION OF RELEASE CYLINDER
See page CL-8. Steps: (1) Install release cylinder — Torque: 120 kg-cm (9 ft-lb, 12 N·m). (2) Install engine front mounting bracket set bolts — Torque: 790 kg-cm (57 ft-lb, 77 N·m). (3) Remove supports for engine and transaxle.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · Description
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p664 OEM manual
-
TRANSAXLE TYPES S54 AND E153
Transaxle types S54 and E153 are constant mesh synchronizers for forward gears, and a sliding mesh reverse gear.
-
INPUT AND OUTPUT SHAFT COMPOSITION
The input shaft is composed of the 1st and 2nd speed gears and the reverse drive gear, and the output shaft is composed of the drive gear (for use with the ring gear).
-
OIL USED IN TRANSAXLES
The oil used in the transaxles are as follows: S51 — ATF type DEXRON II; E153 — Transaxle oil E50 (08885-80206) or equivalent.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · Description · Function of Component Parts
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p665 OEM manual
-
S54 AND E153 TRANSAXLES — GEAR ENGAGEMENT ILLUSTRATIONS
The illustrations below show the engagements of transaxle gears for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, and Reverse. Each gear position engages a specific Drive Gear and Driven Gear pair on the input/output shafts, which then drives the Differential Drive Gear and Differential Assembly. Reverse uses an additional Reverse Idler Gear between the Reverse Drive Gear and Reverse Driven Gear to achieve reverse rotation.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p666 OEM manual
-
FIPG MATERIAL PRECAUTIONS
When working with FIPG material, you must observe the following.
-
REMOVE OLD PACKING
Using a razor blade and gasket scraper, remove all the old packing (FIPG) material from the gasket surfaces.
-
CLEAN ALL COMPONENTS
Thoroughly clean all components to remove all the loose material.
-
CLEAN SEALING SURFACES
Clean both sealing surfaces with a non-residue solvent.
-
APPLY SEAL PACKING
Apply the seal packing in approx. 1 mm (0.04 in.) bead along the sealing surface.
-
ASSEMBLE WITHIN 10 MINUTES
Parts must be assembled within 10 minutes of application. Otherwise, the packing (FIPG) material must be removed and reapplied.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (S54) · Removal of Component Parts · Components
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p670 OEM manual
-
COMPONENTS (Cont'd)
Exploded diagram showing the component parts of the S54 Manual Transaxle including: Oil Seal (non-reusable), Transaxle Case, No.2 Shift Fork Shaft, Transaxle Case Oil Receiver, Reverse Shift Fork, Interlock Pin, No.1 Shift Fork, No.2 Shift Fork, No.1 Shift Fork Shaft, No.1 Shift Head, Differential Assembly, Reverse Shift Arm, Input Shaft, Output Shaft Front Bearing, Output Shaft Cover, Input Shaft Front Bearing, Output Shaft, Reverse Idler Gear and Shaft, Synchronizer Ring, Spacer, Needle Roller Bearing, 4th Gear, Radial Ball Bearing, Snap Ring, Slotted Spring Pin, 3rd Gear, Needle Roller Bearing, Synchronizer Ring, No.2 Hub Sleeve, Snap Ring.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (S54) · Component Parts (Differential)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p707 OEM manual
-
INSTALL TRANSMISSION CASE AND MEASURE SIDE BEARING PRELOAD
Steps (c) through (f): Install the transmission case to the transaxle case. Install and torque the seventeen bolts. Using SST 09564-32011, rotate the differential in both directions to snug the bearing down. Using SST 09564-32011 and a torque meter, measure the preload of the side bearing. If the preload is not within specification, remove the bearing retainer from the case. Re-select the transmission case side adjusting shim.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (E153) · Removal of Component Parts · Inspection of Component Parts
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p730 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF COMPONENT PARTS
Inspection procedures for manual transaxle E153 component parts.
-
INSPECT SYNCHRONIZER RING FOR FIFTH GEAR
(a) Check for wear or damage. (b) Turn the ring and push it in to check the braking action. (c) Measure the clearance between the synchronizer ring back and the gear spline end. If the clearance is less than the minimum limit, replace the synchronizer ring.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Operation · Function of Components
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p784 OEM manual
-
FUNCTION OF COMPONENTS
Describes the function of each component in the automatic transaxle: C1 Forward Clutch connects input shaft and front planetary ring gear; C2 Direct Clutch connects input shaft and front & rear planetary sun gear; C3 U/D Clutch connects underdrive sun gear and underdrive planetary carrier; B1 2nd Coast Brake prevents front & rear planetary sun gear from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise; B2 2nd Brake prevents outer race of F1 from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise, thus preventing the front & rear planetary sun gear from turning counterclockwise; B3 1st & Reverse Brake prevents rear planetary carrier from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise; B4 U/D Brake prevents underdrive sun gear from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise; F1 No. 1 One-Way Clutch — when B2 is operating, this clutch prevents the front & rear planetary gear from turning counterclockwise; F2 No. 2 One-Way Clutch prevents rear planetary carrier from turning counterclockwise; F3 U/D One-Way Clutch prevents underdrive planetary sun gear from turning clockwise; Planetary Gears change the route through which driving force is transmitted, in accordance with the operation of each clutch and brake, in order to increase or reduce the input and output speed.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Operation · A241E Electronic Control System
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p787 OEM manual
-
A241E Electronic Control System — General
The electronic control system for the A241E automatic transaxle provides extremely precise control of the gear shift timing and lock-up timing in response to driving conditions as sensed by various sensors located throughout the vehicle and in response to the engine's running condition. At the same time, the ECU control reduces vehicle squat when the vehicle starts out the gear shift shock. The electronic control system is also equipped with a self diagnosis system which diagnoses malfunctions of electronically controlled components and warns the driver, and a fail-safe which makes it possible for the vehicle to continue functioning when a malfunction occurs.
-
A241E Electronic Control System — Construction
The electronic control system can be broadly divided into three groups; the sensors, ECU and actuators. Sensors include: Throttle Position Sensor (IDL — Idling Signal, VTA — Throttle Position Signal), Water Temperature Sensor (THW), Distributor (Ne — Engine RPM Sensor, G1/G- — Crankshaft Angle Signal), No. 1 Speed Sensor (SPD), No. 2 Speed Sensor (SP2), Neutral Start Switch (NSW — Neutral Start Signal, 2/L — Shift Lever Position Signal), Stop Light Switch (STP), O/D Main Switch (OD2), Cruise Control Computer (OD1), Battery (+B). The Engine & Transaxle ECU contains: Engine — Ignition Timing Control (outputs IGt, IGf); Transaxle — Control of Shift Timing (outputs S1, S2), Control of Lock-Up Timing (output SL), Self-Diagnostic System (output OD2), Back-Up System. Actuators include: ESA — Igniter → Ignition Coil → Distributor → Spark Plugs; No. 1 Solenoid Valve (S1); No. 2 Solenoid Valve (S2); Lock-Up Solenoid Valve (SL); O/D OFF Indicator Light / Diagnostic Code Display (OD2).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · Basic Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p788 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING OVERVIEW
Trouble occurring in the ECT can stem from one of three sources: the engine, the ECT electronic control unit or the transaxle itself. Before troubleshooting, determine in which these three sources the problem lies, and begin troubleshooting with the simplist operation, gradually working up in order of difficulty.
-
Basic Troubleshooting
Before troubleshooting and ECT, first determine whether the problem is electrical or mechanical. To do this, just refer to the basic troubleshooting flow-chart provided below. If the cause is already known, using the basic troubleshooting chart below along with the general troubleshooting chart on the following page should speed the procedure. Flow: (1) Preliminary Check (See page AT-12) — Bad → Repair or Replace; OK → (2) Read Diagnostic Code (See page AT-15) — Bad → Repair or Replace; OK → (3) Manual Shifting Test (See page AT-19) — Bad → Mechanical System Tests (See page AT-31) — Bad → Repair Transaxle; OK → Electrical Control System Check (See page AT-20) — Bad → Repair or Replace; OK → Mechanical System Tests (See page AT-31).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting (Diagnosis System) · Troubleshooting Flow-Chart
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p796 OEM manual
-
Overdrive OFF indicator blink warning
If diagnostic code Nos. 42, 61, 62 or 63 are output, the overdrive OFF indicator light will begin to blink immediately to warn the driver. However, an impact or shock may cause the blinking to stop; but the code will still be retained in the Engine and ECT ECU memory until canceled out.
-
No warning for code 64
There is no warning for diagnostic code No. 64.
-
Simultaneous malfunction of both speed sensors
In the event of a simultaneous malfunction of both No. 1 and No. 2 speed sensors, no diagnostic code will appear and the fail-safe system will not function. However, when driving in the D range, the transaxle will not up-shift from first gear, regardless of the vehicle speed.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting (Mechanical System Tests) · Mechanical System Tests
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p810 OEM manual
-
PERFORM TEST AT NORMAL FLUID TEMPERATURE
Perform the test at normal operation fluid temperature (50 – 80°C or 122 – 176°F).
-
DO NOT RUN TEST LONGER THAN 5 SECONDS
Do not continuously run this test longer than 5 seconds.
-
CONDUCT TEST IN SAFE AREA
To ensure safety, conduct this test in a wide, clear, level area which provides good traction.
-
CARRY OUT STALL TEST IN PAIRS
The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One should observe the condition of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is performing the test.
-
EVALUATION — STALL SPEED SAME FOR BOTH RANGES, LOWER THAN SPECIFIED
If the stall speed is the same for both ranges without the rear wheels rotating but lower than specified value: Engine output may be insufficient; Stator one-way clutch is not operating properly.
-
EVALUATION — STALL SPEED IN D RANGE HIGHER THAN SPECIFIED
If the stall speed in D range is higher than specified: Line pressure too low; Forward clutch slipping; No. 2 one-way clutch not operating properly; Underdrive one-way clutch not operating properly.
-
EVALUATION — STALL SPEED IN R RANGE HIGHER THAN SPECIFIED
If the stall speed in R range is higher than specified: Line pressure too low; Direct clutch slipping; First and reverse brake slipping; Underdrive brake slipping.
-
EVALUATION — STALL SPEED IN BOTH R AND D RANGES HIGHER THAN SPECIFIED
If the stall speed in both R and D ranges are higher than specified: Line pressure too low; Improper fluid level; Underdrive brake slipping.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · On-Vehicle Repair · Throttle Cable
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p818 OEM manual
-
WORK START DELAY AFTER IGNITION LOCK
Work must be started after approx. 20 seconds or longer from the time the ignition switch is turned to the 'LOCK' position and the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery.
-
ON-VEHICLE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
The components mentioned below can be replaced on the vehicle without any necessity for removal of the transmission. For the respective operating procedures refer to the following pages: Valve body — Removal AT-49 to AT-51, Installation AT-157 to AT-160; Throttle cable — Removal AT-39, Installation AT-39 and AT-40.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Second Coast Brake)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p851 OEM manual
-
INSPECT BRAKE BAND
If the lining of the brake band is exfoliated or discolored, or even part of the printed numbers are defaced, replace the brake band.
-
REMOVE SPRING, WASHER AND PISTON ROD
Remove the spring, washer and piston rod.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Valve Body) · Location of Keys, Pins, Vibrating Stopper and Check Balls
Engine — mechanical
RM179U1_1991 · p896 OEM manual
-
KEY, STOPPER AND PIN
Diagram showing location of keys (a, b, c), pins, and vibrating stopper on the automatic transaxle valve body. Three keys are identified: (a) Accumulator Control Valve key, (b) Cut-back Valve key, and (c) Low Coast Modulator Valve key. A vibrating stopper and multiple pins are also located on the valve body as shown in diagram AT5689.
-
CHECK BALL
Diagram (AT5678) showing the location of check balls on the automatic transaxle valve body.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Valve Body) · Location of Keys and Strainer
Engine — mechanical
RM179U1_1991 · p899 OEM manual
-
LOCATION OF KEYS AND STRAINER
Diagram showing the location of keys (a through f) and the strainer on both the Upper Side and Lower Side of the automatic transaxle valve body.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Installation of Component Parts
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U1_1991 · p931 OEM manual
-
PLANETARY RING GEAR INSTALLATION CHECK
If the planetary ring gear and the other parts are installed correctly into the case, the end of the bushing with the ring gear flange will be flush with a shoulder of the intermediate shaft or under.
-
INSTALL RACES AND BEARING ONTO RING GEAR FLANGE
Coat the races and bearing with petroleum jelly and install them onto the tip of ring gear flange as shown. Front Race: outer diameter 37.9 mm (1.492 in.), inner diameter 22.0 mm (0.866 in.). Bearing: outer diameter 36.1 mm (1.421 in.), inner diameter 22.2 mm (0.874 in.). Rear Race: outer diameter 35.7 mm (1.406 in.), inner diameter 23.0 mm (0.906 in.).
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Troubleshooting
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p946 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagnostic table mapping suspension and axle problems to possible causes and remedies with front and rear page references. Problems covered: Wanders/pulls, Bottoming, Sways/pitches, Front wheel shimmy, Abnormal tire wear. Possible causes and remedies are listed with corresponding front and rear section page references.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Front Axle Hub
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p960 OEM manual
-
INSTALL ROTOR DISC TO AXLE HUB
Before removing the rotor disc, place the matchmarks on the axle hub and rotor disc.
-
INSTALL DISC BRAKE CALIPER TO STEERING KNUCKLE
Install and torque the two bolts. Torque: 600 kg-cm (43 ft-lb, 59 N·m)
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Front Suspension · Lower Arm
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p969 OEM manual
-
INSPECT BALL JOINT FOR ROTATION
Remove the ball joint. Flip the ball joint stud back and forth 5 times as shown in the figure, before installing the nut. Using a torque gauge, turn the nut continuously one turn each 2-4 seconds and take the torque reading on the fifth turn. Torque (turning): 8-25 kg-cm (7-22 in.-lb, 0.8-2.5 N·m). If not within specification, replace the ball joint. Install the ball joint.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Front Suspension · Stabilizer Bar and Link / Strut Bar
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p972 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF STRUT BAR — MEASURE LENGTH "L" BEFORE REMOVE
Measure length "L" before removing the strut bar.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Front Suspension · Strut Bar
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p973 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF STRUT BAR
See page SA-24
-
INSTALL STRUT BAR
(a) Install the nut, retainer, cushion and collar to the strut bar. (b) Install the strut bar to the body, and connect to the lower arm. (c) Install the cushion, retainer spring washer and nut.
- Do not misinstall the front and rear cushions.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Axle Shaft and Carrier
Suspension & axle
RM179U1_1991 · p981 OEM manual
-
INSTALL ROTOR DISC
Align the matchmarks and install the rotor disc to the axle hub.
-
INSTALL BRAKE CALIPER
Torque: 600 kg-cm (43 ft-lb, 59 N·m)
-
INSTALL PLATE WASHER, BEARING LOCK NUT, BEARING LOCK NUT CAP AND NEW COTTER PIN
Install the plate washer and lock nut. With the parking brake engaged, tighten the nut. Install the lock nut cap and a new cotter pin.
-
INSPECT REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
See page SA-31
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p2 OEM manual
-
COMPRESSION TEST — REPEAT FOR EACH CYLINDER
Repeat steps (a) through (c) for each cylinder. This measurement must be done in as short a time as possible.
- This measurement must be done in as short a time as possible.
-
LOW COMPRESSION DIAGNOSIS
If the cylinder compression in one or more cylinders is low, pour a small amount of engine oil into the cylinder through the spark plug hole and repeat steps (a) through (c) for cylinders with low compression. If adding oil helps the compression, chances are that the piston rings and/or cylinder bore are worn or damaged. If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating is improper, or there may be leakage past the gasket.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p13 OEM manual
-
SUSPEND A/C COMPRESSOR
Suspend the A/C compressor to strut rod with a string.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Mechanical
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p27 OEM manual
-
MEASURE PLASTIGAGE OIL CLEARANCE
Measure the Plastigage at its widest point. If the oil clearance is greater than maximum, replace the bearings. If necessary, grind or replace the crankshaft. HINT: If using a standard bearing, replace it with one having the same number marked on the connecting rod cap. There are three sizes of standard bearings, marked '1', '2' and '3' accordingly.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Crankshaft Removal
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p28 OEM manual
-
KEEP BEARINGS AND CONNECTING ROD TOGETHER
Keep the bearings, connecting rod and cap together.
-
ARRANGE PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLIES IN ORDER
Arrange the piston and connecting rod assemblies in correct order.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p30 OEM manual
-
MEASURE PLASTIGAGE AT WIDEST POINT
Measure the Plastigage at its widest point to determine main bearing oil clearance. Standard clearance for No.3 STD: 0.025–0.044 mm (0.0010–0.0017 in.), U/S 0.25: 0.021–0.061 mm (0.0008–0.0024 in.). Others STD: 0.015–0.034 mm (0.0006–0.0013 in.), U/S 0.25: 0.029–0.069 mm (0.0011–0.0027 in.). Maximum clearance: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in.).
-
REPLACE BEARINGS IF CLEARANCE EXCEEDS MAXIMUM
If the oil clearance is greater than maximum, replace the bearings. If necessary, grind or replace the crankshaft.
-
SELECT CORRECT STANDARD BEARING BY NUMBER
If using a standard bearing, replace it with one having the same number. If the number of the bearing cannot be determined, select the correct bearing by adding together the numbers imprinted on the cylinder block and crankshaft, then selecting the bearing with the same number as the total. There are five sizes of standard bearings, marked '1', '2', '3', '4' and '5' accordingly. EXAMPLE: Cylinder block '2' + Crankshaft '1' = Total number 3 (Use bearing '3'). Bearing selection table: Cylinder block mark 1 / Crankshaft 0→Use 1, 1→Use 2, 2→Use 3; Cylinder block mark 2 / Crankshaft 0→Use 2, 1→Use 3, 2→Use 4; Cylinder block mark 3 / Crankshaft 0→Use 3, 1→Use 4, 2→Use 5.
-
REPLACEMENT CYLINDER BLOCK BEARING CLEARANCE HINT
If replacing the cylinder block subassembly, the bearing standard clearance will be: No.3: 0.027–0.054 mm (0.0011–0.0021 in.), Others: 0.017–0.044 mm (0.0007–0.0017 in.).
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Crankshaft
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p31 OEM manual
-
Completely remove the Plastigage
Completely remove the Plastigage.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p32 OEM manual
-
ARRANGE MAIN BEARING CAPS IN ORDER
Arrange the main bearing caps, bearings and thrust washers in correct order.
-
CYLINDER BLOCK INSPECTION
Inspection procedure for the cylinder block after disassembly.
-
CLEAN CYLINDER BLOCK — Remove gasket material
Using a gasket scraper, remove all the gasket material from the top surface of the cylinder block.
-
CLEAN CYLINDER BLOCK — Clean cylinder block
Using a soft brush and solvent, thoroughly clean the cylinder block.
-
INSPECT TOP SURFACE OF CYLINDER BLOCK FOR FLATNESS
Using a precision straight edge and feeler gauge, measure the surfaces contacting the cylinder head gasket for warpage. If warpage is greater than maximum, replace the cylinder block.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Piston and Connecting Rod
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p35 OEM manual
-
PISTON AND PIN ARE A MATCHED SET
The piston and pin are a matched set.
-
ARRANGE PARTS IN CORRECT ORDER
Arrange the pistons, pins, rings, connecting rods and bearings in correct order.
-
REMOVE PISTON PIN AND CONNECTING ROD
Using plastic-faced hammer and brass bar, lightly tap out the piston pin and remove the connecting rod.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block Assembly
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p44 OEM manual
-
INSTALL PISTON RINGS — COMPRESSION RINGS
Using a piston ring expander, install the two compression rings with the code mark facing upward. Code mark: R
-
INSTALL PISTON RINGS — RING END POSITIONING
Position the piston rings so that the ring ends are as shown.
- Do not align the piston ring ends.
-
INSTALL BEARINGS
Align the bearing claw with the groove of the connecting rod or connecting cap. Install the bearings in the connecting rod and connecting rod cap.
-
CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY — GENERAL HINTS
Thoroughly clean all parts to be assembled. Before installing the parts, apply new engine oil to all sliding and rotating surfaces. Replace all gaskets, O-rings and oil seals with new parts.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p81 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT HOSES FROM NO.1 AIR TUBE AREA
Disconnect the following hoses: (2) Water by-pass hoses from No.1 air tube; (3) Air hose from turbocharging pressure VSV; (4) Heater water hose.
-
REMOVE WATER BY-PASS PIPE
Remove the three bolts, two nuts, water by-pass pipe, gasket and O-ring.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p91 OEM manual
-
HEAT CYLINDER HEAD FOR GUIDE BUSHING INSTALLATION
Gradually heat the cylinder head to 80–100°C (176–212°F).
-
TAP IN NEW GUIDE BUSHING
Using SST 09201-70010 and a hammer, tap in a new guide bushing until the snap ring makes contact with the cylinder head.
-
REAM GUIDE BUSHING
Using a sharp 6 mm reamer, ream the guide bushing to obtain the specified clearance (see step 5 above) between the guide bushing and valve stem.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · EG1-97
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p92 OEM manual
-
CHECK VALVE OVERALL LENGTH
Check the valve overall length. If the overall length is less than minimum, replace the valve.
-
CHECK VALVE STEM TIP
Check the surface of the valve stem tip for wear. If the valve stem tip is worn, resurface the tip with a grinder or replace the valve.
- Do not grind off more than minimum.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Inspect Valve Springs
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p93 OEM manual
-
CORRECT VALVE SEAT POSITION — TOO LOW
If the seating is too low on the valve face, use 75° and 45° cutters to correct the seat. Target seating width: 1.0 – 1.4 mm.
-
HAND-LAP VALVE AND VALVE SEAT
Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound. After hand-lapping, clean the valve and valve seat.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head Assembly
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p99 OEM manual
-
THOROUGHLY CLEAN ALL PARTS
Thoroughly clean all parts to be assembled.
-
APPLY NEW ENGINE OIL
Before installing the parts, apply new engine oil to all sliding and rotating surfaces.
-
REPLACE GASKETS AND OIL SEALS
Replace all gaskets and oil seals with new ones.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Description · Operation
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p124 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION
The 3S-GTE engine is an in-line, 4-cylinder, 2.0 liter DOHC 16-valve engine.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Troubleshooting
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p127 OEM manual
-
Troubleshooting — CO/HC Concentration
If the CO/HC concentration does not comply with regulations, perform troubleshooting in the order given below: (a) Check oxygen sensor operation (See Main Oxygen Sensor Inspection under SMPI System). (b) See the table below for possible causes, and then inspect and correct the applicable causes if necessary.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Description · Operation
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p128 OEM manual
-
ENGINE MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
The 3S-GTE engine is an in-line, 4-cylinder, 2.0 liter DOHC 16-valve engine.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p129 OEM manual
-
ENGINE CONFIGURATION
The 3S-GTE engine is an in-line, 4-cylinder engine with the cylinders numbered 1-2-3-4 from the front. The crankshaft is supported by 5 bearings inside the crankcase. These bearings are made of aluminum alloy.
-
CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft is integrated with 8 weights for balance. Oil holes are placed in the center of the crankshaft to supply oil to the connecting rods, bearing, pistons and other components. The ignition order is 1-3-4-2.
-
CYLINDER HEAD
The cylinder head is made of aluminum alloy, with a cross flow type intake and exhaust layout and with pent-roof type combustion chambers. The spark plugs are located in the center of the combustion chambers.
-
INTAKE MANIFOLD AND CAMSHAFTS
The intake manifold has 8 independent long ports and utilizes the inertial supercharging effect to improve engine torque at low and medium speeds. Both the intake camshaft and the exhaust camshaft are driven by a single timing belt. The cam journal is supported at 5 places between the valve lifters of each cylinder and on the front end of the cylinder head. Lubrication of the cam journals and cams is accomplished by oil being supplied through the oiler port in the center of the camshaft.
-
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment of the valve clearance is done by means of an outer shim type system, in which valve adjusting shims are located above the valve lifters. This permits replacement of the shims without removal of the camshafts.
-
PISTONS
Pistons are made of high temperature-resistant aluminum alloy, and a depression is built into the piston head to prevent interference with the valves.
-
PISTON PINS
Piston pins are the full-floating type, with the pins fastened to neither the piston boss nor the connecting rods. Instead, snap rings are fitted on both ends of the pins, preventing the pins from falling out.
-
PISTON RINGS
The No.1 compression ring is made of steel and the No.2 compression ring is made of cast iron. The oil ring is made of a combination of steel and stainless steel. The outer diameter of each piston ring is slightly larger than the diameter of the piston and the flexibility of the rings allows them to hug the cylinder walls when they are mounted on the piston. Compression rings No. 1 and No.2 work to prevent gas leakage from the cylinder and the oil ring works to scrape oil off the cylinder walls to prevent it from entering the combustion chambers.
-
CYLINDER BLOCK
The cylinder block is made of cast iron. It has 4 cylinders which are approximately twice the length of the piston stroke. The top of each cylinder is closed off by the cylinder head and the lower end of the cylinders becomes the crankcase, in which the crankshaft is installed. In addition, the cylinder block contains a water jacket, through which coolant is pumped to cool the cylinders.
-
OIL PAN
The oil pan is bolted onto the bottom of the cylinder block. The oil pan is an oil reservoir made of pressed steel sheet. A dividing plate is included inside the oil pan to keep sufficient oil in the bottom of the pan even when the vehicle is tilted. This dividing plate also prevents the oil from making waves when the vehicle is stopped suddenly and the oil shifts away from the oil pump suction pipe.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · PREPARATION — SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p130 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
List of special service tools required for 3S-GTE engine mechanical work. Tools listed: 09043-38100 Hexagon 10 mm Wrench (Cylinder head bolt); 09201-41020 Valve Stem Oil Seal Replacer; 09201-70010 Valve Guide Bushing Remover & Replacer; 09202-70010 Valve Spring Compressor; 09213-54015 Crankshaft Pulley Holding Tool with (90119-08216) Bolt; 09213-31021 Crankshaft Pulley Puller; 09222-30010 Connecting Rod Bushing Remover & Replacer; 09223-50010 Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Replacer (Camshaft oil seal); 09223-63010 Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Replacer; 09228-06500 Oil Filter Wrench; 09248-55020 Valve Clearance Adjust Tool Set with (09248-05011) Valve Lifter Press.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Equipment
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p132 OEM manual
-
EQUIPMENT
List of equipment required for 3S-GTE engine mechanical service: Battery specific gravity gauge, Belt tension gauge, Caliper gauge, CO/HC meter, Compression gauge, Connecting rod aligner, Cylinder gauge, Dial indicator, Dye penetrant, Engine Tune-up tester, Heater, Magnetic finger, Micrometer, Piston ring compressor, Piston ring expander, Plastigage, Precision straight edge, Soft brush, Spring tester (Valve spring), Steel square (Valve spring), Thermometer, Torque wrench, Valve seat cutter, Vernier calipers.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p140 OEM manual
-
COMPONENT DIAGRAM — ENGINE MECHANICAL (3S-GTE)
Exploded view diagram of the 3S-GTE engine upper assembly showing the following components and their relationships: High-Tension Cord, Spark Plug, Seal Washer, Cylinder Head Cover, Gasket (non-reusable), Vacuum Hose, EGR Vacuum Modulator and VSV, Vacuum Hose (left side), Engine Wire Protector, Air By-Pass Hose, VTV, Throttle Position Sensor Connector, Water By-Pass Hose, Gasket (non-reusable, marked with diamond), IACV Connector, Vacuum Hose, Air Hose, PCV Hose, Accelerator Cable, Intake Air Connector Stay, Intake Air Connector, Spacer, No.1 Intake Air Connector.
-
NON-REUSABLE PARTS
Parts marked with a diamond (◆) symbol are non-reusable and must be replaced during reassembly. On this page the Gasket between the intake manifold and throttle body is identified as a non-reusable part.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p154 OEM manual
-
TIMING BELT WEAR CHECK
If there is noticeable wear on the belt teeth, check the timing cover for damage, correct gasket installation, and the foreign material on the pulley teeth. If necessary, replace the timing belt.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · TROUBLESHOOTING
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p177 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE USAGE
You will find the source of the trouble more easily by correctly using the table shown below. In this table, each number shows the order of priority of the causes of the trouble. Check each part in the order shown. If necessary, replace the part.
-
WIRING HARNESS INSPECTION HINT
When inspecting a wire harness or circuit, the electrical wiring diagrams at the end of volume 2 of repair manual should be referred to and the circuits of related systems also should be checked.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Diagnostic Index / Symptom Table
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p179 OEM manual
-
SYMPTOM-TO-COMPONENT DIAGNOSTIC CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE
This table cross-references engine symptoms (rows) with suspect components/systems (columns). Numbers in cells indicate the inspection/diagnostic step sequence for that symptom-component combination. Components listed include: Circuit Opening Relay (EG1-376), Fuel Cut System (EG1-411), Theft Deterrent Control Module (BE-1), PCME (EG1-406), Fuel Quality, Fuel Leakage, Coolant Leakage, Oil Leakage, Vacuum Leakage, Starter Relay (ST-25), Clutch Start SW (CL-1), Starter (ST-5), Spark Plug (IG-8), Distributor (IG-11), Ignition Coil (IG-11), EGR System (EG1-243), Turbocharger (EG1-196), Accelerator Pedal Link, Brakes Drag Even When Released, Cooling Fan System (EG1-441), Clutch (CL-1), Compression (EG1-32), Valve Clearance (EG1-16).
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · TUNE-UP
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p180 OEM manual
-
ENGINE OIL INSPECTION — CHECK OIL QUALITY
Check the oil for deterioration, entry of water, discoloring or thinning. If oil quality is poor, replace it.
-
ENGINE OIL INSPECTION — CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
The oil level should be between the "L" and "F" marks on the dipstick. If low, check for leakage and add oil up to the "F" mark.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · EG1-13
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p181 OEM manual
-
AIR FILTER INSPECTION AND CLEANING
Step 1: REMOVE AIR FILTER — Remove the air cleaner cap and air filter. Step 2: INSPECT AND CLEAN AIR FILTER — (a) Visually check that the air filter is not excessively damaged or only. If necessary, replace the air filter. (b) Clean the air filter with compressed air. First blow from the inside thoroughly, then blow off the outside of the air filter. Step 3: REINSTALL AIR FILTER.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Alternator Drive Belt Inspection
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p183 OEM manual
-
NEW BELT DEFINITION
"New belt" refers to a belt which has been used less than 5 minutes on a running engine.
-
USED BELT DEFINITION
"Used belt" refers to a belt which has been used on a running engine for 5 minutes or more.
-
CHECK BELT SEATING AFTER INSTALLATION
After installing the belt, check that it fits properly in the ribbed grooves.
-
CONFIRM BELT GROOVE ENGAGEMENT
Check by hand to confirm that the belt has not slipped out of the groove on the bottom of the pulley.
-
RECHECK TENSION AFTER NEW BELT RUN-IN
After installing a new belt, run the engine for about 5 minutes and recheck the belt tension.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Adjusting Shim Selection Chart (Intake)
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p189 OEM manual
-
ADJUSTING SHIM SELECTION CHART (INTAKE)
Use the chart to select the correct replacement shim. Find the row corresponding to the measured clearance and the column corresponding to the installed shim thickness; the intersection gives the new shim number. New shims have the thickness in millimeters imprinted on the face. Shim thicknesses: No.1=2.500mm(0.0984in), No.2=2.550mm(0.1004in), No.3=2.600mm(0.1024in), No.4=2.650mm(0.1043in), No.5=2.700mm(0.1063in), No.6=2.750mm(0.1083in), No.7=2.800mm(0.1102in), No.8=2.850mm(0.1122in), No.9=2.900mm(0.1142in), No.10=2.950mm(0.1161in), No.11=3.000mm(0.1181in), No.12=3.050mm(0.1201in), No.13=3.100mm(0.1220in), No.14=3.150mm(0.1240in), No.15=3.200mm(0.1260in), No.16=3.250mm(0.1280in), No.17=3.300mm(0.1299in). EXAMPLE: The 2.800mm(0.1102in) shim is installed, and the measured clearance is 0.450mm(0.0177in). Replace the 2.800mm(0.1102in) shim with a new No.12 shim.
3S-GTE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Adjusting Shim Selection Chart (Exhaust)
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_engineme · p190 OEM manual
-
SHIM SELECTION — EXHAUST
New shims have the thickness in millimeters imprinted on the face. Use the Adjusting Shim Selection Chart (Exhaust) to select the correct replacement shim: locate the installed shim thickness column and the measured clearance row; the intersection gives the new shim number. Example: The 2.800 mm (0.1102 in.) shim is installed, and the measured clearance is 0.450 mm (0.0177 in.). Replace the 2.800 mm (0.1102 in.) shim with a new No. 9 shim.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · COOLANT REPLACEMENT
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p2 OEM manual
-
AVOID BURNS — COOL ENGINE BEFORE WORK
To avoid the danger of burns, do not begin work until the engine and coolant have properly cooled down.
- Do not begin work until the engine and coolant have properly cooled down.
-
PERFORM WORK ON LEVEL AREA
To ensure that coolant is poured in properly, perform the operation at a level area. Performing work with the vehicle inclined may cause improper removal of coolant or improper air removal when pouring coolant.
- Performing work with the vehicle inclined may cause improper removal of coolant or improper air removal when pouring coolant.
-
CHECK WATER LEVEL AFTER REPLACEMENT
After replacing the coolant, check the water level in the water filler and reservoir tank once or twice within 500 km (311 miles) of driving or within one week.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Description & Operation
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p8 OEM manual
-
COOLING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This engine utilizes a pressurized forced circulation cooling system which includes a thermostat equipped with a by-pass valve mounted on the inlet side.
-
COOLING SYSTEM OPERATION
The cooling system is composed of the water jacket (inside the cylinder block and cylinder head), radiator, water pump, thermostat, electric fan, hoses and other components. Coolant which is heated in the water jacket is pumped to the radiator, through which an electric fan blows air to cool the coolant as it passes through. Coolant which has been cooled is then sent back to the engine by the water pump, where it cools the engine. The water jacket is a network of channels in the shell of the cylinder block and cylinder head through which coolant passes. It is designed to provide adequate cooling of the cylinders and combustion chambers which become heated during engine operation.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · ENGINE COMPARTMENT ELECTRIC COOLING FAN
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p9 OEM manual
-
PARTS LOCATION — ENGINE COMPARTMENT ELECTRIC COOLING FAN
Identifies the physical location of all components in the engine compartment electric cooling fan system, including: AM2 Fuse, AM1 H-Fuse, AM2 H-Fuse, ALT H-Fuse, GAUGE Fuse, ECU-IG Fuse, VENT Fuse, Cooling Fan Relay ('VENT'), Ignition Main Relay ('IGN'), Engine Compartment Temp. Sensor, Engine Compartment Cooling Fan, and Cooling Fan Control Module.
-
SYSTEM CIRCUIT — ENGINE COMPARTMENT ELECTRIC COOLING FAN
Wiring diagram showing the complete electrical circuit. Battery feeds MAIN FL 2.0L, then AM1 50A and ALT 120A fuses. AM2 40A fuse feeds the Ignition Main Relay. AM1 feeds AM2 7.5A fuse via IG1; AM2 feeds AM2 7.5A fuse via IG2. VENT 20A fuse supplies the Cooling Fan Relay coil. GAUGE 7.5A fuse supplies the Cooling Fan Warning Light and the Cooling Fan Control Module. ECU-IG 7.5A fuse also feeds the control module. The Cooling Fan Relay drives the Engine Compartment Cooling Fan motor (M). The Engine Compartment Temp. Sensor connects to the Cooling Fan Control Module on pins 6, 3, 1. The Cooling Fan Control Module has additional connections on pins 2, 9, 7, 5.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Cooling Fan
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p15 OEM manual
-
COOLING FAN INSTALLATION — INSTALL COOLING FAN
(a) Install the cooling fan with the three bolts. (b) Connect the cooling fan connector.
-
DISASSEMBLY — REMOVE FAN MOTOR
Remove the three screws, rubber bushings, steel plate bushings and motor.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p19 OEM manual
-
IGNITION MAIN RELAY INSPECTION
1. REMOVE IGNITION MAIN RELAY. 2. INSPECT IGNITION MAIN RELAY: A. Inspect relay continuity: (a) Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between terminals 1 and 3. (b) Check that there is continuity between terminals 2 and 4. (c) Check that there is no continuity between terminals 4 and 5. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Cooling Fan Relay ('VENT') Inspection
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p20 OEM manual
-
INSPECT RELAY OPERATION (Ignition Main Relay — Section B)
(a) Apply battery voltage across terminals 1 and 3. (b) Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between terminals 1 and 2. (c) Check that there is continuity between terminals 4 and 5. If operation is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
REINSTALL IGNITION MAIN RELAY
Reinstall the ignition main relay after inspection.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Description & Operation
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p21 OEM manual
-
COOLING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This engine utilizes a pressurized forced circulation cooling system which includes a thermostat equipped with a by-pass valve mounted on the inlet side.
-
COOLING SYSTEM OPERATION
The cooling system is composed of the water jacket (inside the cylinder block and cylinder head), radiator, water pump, thermostat, electric fan, hoses and other components. Coolant which is heated in the water jacket is pumped to the radiator, through which and electric fan blows air to cool the coolant as it passes through. Coolant which has been cooled is then sent back to the engine by the water pump, where it cools the engine. The water jacket is a network of channels in the shell of the cylinder block and cylinder head through which coolant passes. It is designed to provide adequate cooling of the cylinders and combustion chambers which become heated during engine operation.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p22 OEM manual
-
RADIATOR
The radiator cools the coolant which has passed through the water jacket and become hot, and it is mounted in the front of the vehicle. The MR2 radiator is different from that in other models, in that it is a cross flow type in which the coolant flows horizontally. It includes side tanks and a core which connects them. The inlet for coolant from the water jacket and the drain cock for draining out coolant are located in the left tank. The outlet coolant and an air drain, which facilitates the supply of coolant to the engine are located in the right tank. The core contains many tubes through which coolant flows from left tank to the right tank as well as cooling fins which radiate heat away from the coolant in the tubes. Air sucked in by the electric cooling fan, as well as the wind generated by the vehicle's travel, passes through the radiator, cooling the coolant heated by the water jacket as it passes through the tubes in the core. Models with automatic transmission include an automatic transmission fluid cooler incorporated into the cooling pipes. A fan with an electric motor is mounted behind the radiator to assist the flow of air through the radiator. The fan operates when the coolant temperature becomes high in order to prevent it from becoming too high.
-
RADIATOR CAP
The radiator cap is a pressure type cap which seals the radiator, resulting in pressurization of the radiator as the coolant expands. The pressurization prevents the coolant from boiling even when the coolant temperature exceeds 100°C (212°F). A relief valve (pressurization valve) and a vacuum valve (negative pressure valve) are built into the radiator cap. The relief valve opens and lets steam escape through the overflow pipe when the pressure generated inside the cooling system exceeds the limit (coolant temperature: 110–120°C (230–248°F), pressure: 59–103 kPa (0.60–1.05 kgf/cm², 8.5–14.9 psi)). The vacuum valve opens to alleviate the vacuum which develops in the coolant system after the engine is stopped and the coolant temperature drops. The valve's opening allows the coolant in the reservoir tank to return to the cooling system.
-
RESERVOIR TANK
The reservoir tank is used to catch coolant which overflows the cooling system as a result of volumetric expansion when the coolant is heated. The coolant in the reservoir tank returns to the radiator when the coolant temperature drops, thus keeping the radiator full at all times and avoiding needless coolant loss. Check the reservoir tank level to learn if the coolant needs to be replenished.
-
WATER PUMP
The water pump is used for forced circulation of coolant through the cooling system. It is mounted on the front of the cylinder block and driven by a timing belt.
-
THERMOSTAT
The thermostat has a wax type by-pass valve and is mounted in the water inlet housing. The thermostat includes a type of automatic valve operated by fluctuations in the coolant temperature. This valve closes when the coolant temperature drops, preventing the circulation of coolant through the engine and thus permitting the engine to warm up rapidly. The valve opens when the coolant temperature has risen, allowing the circulation of coolant. Wax inside the thermostat expands when heated and contracts when cooled. Heating the wax thus generates pressure which overpowers the force of the spring which keeps the valve closed, thus opening the valve. When the wax cools, its contraction causes the force of the spring to take effect once more, closing the valve. The thermostat in this engine operates at a temperature of 82°C (180°F).
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · RADIATOR ELECTRIC COOLING FAN (WITHOUT AC)
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p24 OEM manual
-
RADIATOR ELECTRIC COOLING FAN (WITHOUT AC) — PART LOCATION
Identifies the location of cooling fan system components: Fan Main Relay ('FAN MAIN'), Cooling Fan Relay ('FAN No.1'), AM2 Fuse, RAD FAN H-Fuse, ALT H-Fuse, No.1 Radiator Cooling Fan, and Engine Coolant Temperature Switch on the 3S-GTE engine vehicle.
-
SYSTEM CIRCUIT
Wiring diagram showing the radiator electric cooling fan circuit (without AC). Circuit includes: Battery → MAIN FL 2.0L → ALT 120A → Fan Main Relay; AM2 7.5A fuse powered from AM2 terminal through Ignition Switch (IG2); RAD FAN 30A fuse → Cooling Fan Relay → No.1 Radiator Cooling Fan (motor); Engine Coolant Temperature Switch controls the Cooling Fan Relay ground circuit.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Engine Coolant Temperature Switch
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p31 OEM manual
-
INSTALL RADIATOR LOWER AIR DEFLECTOR
Install the radiator lower air deflector.
-
CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF BATTERY
Connect the cable to the negative terminal of the battery.
-
INSTALL HOOD WEATHERSTRIP
Install the hood weatherstrip.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Fan Relay Inspection
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p32 OEM manual
-
FAN MAIN RELAY INSPECTION
See Radiator Cooling Fans w/ A/C
-
NO-1 COOLING FAN RELAY INSPECTION
See Radiator Cooling Fans w/ A/C
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · RADIATOR ELECTRIC COOLING FAN (WITH AC)
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p33 OEM manual
-
RADIATOR ELECTRIC COOLING FAN (WITH AC) — Parts Location
Identifies locations of cooling fan system components including: No.3 Cooling Fan Relay ('FAN MAIN'), Fan Main Relay ('FAN MAIN'), AM2 Fuse, No.2 Cooling Fan Relay ('FAN No.2'), RAD FAN Fuse, CDS FAN Fuse, No.1 Cooling Fan Relay ('FAN No.1'), ALT H-Fuse, AM1 H-Fuse, GAUGE Fuse, ECTS, A/C Amplifier, No.2 Radiator Cooling Fan (A/C), No.1 Radiator Cooling Fan (Engine).
-
RADIATOR ELECTRIC COOLING FAN (WITH AC) — System Circuit
Wiring diagram showing: Battery, MAIN FL 2.0L, ALT 120A, AM1 50A, AM2 7.5A fuses; Ignition Switch (AM1/IG1, AM2/IG2); Fan Main Relay; RAD FAN 30A fuse; CDS FAN 30A fuse; GAUGE 7.5A fuse; No.1 Cooling Fan Relay; No.2 Cooling Fan Relay with Diode; No.3 Cooling Fan Relay; A/C Pressure Switch; No.1 Radiator Cooling Fan (Engine) with motor M; No.2 Radiator Cooling Fan (A/C) with motor M; ECTS; A/C Amplifier (pins 1,2,4,6,8,9,10,11,13,14,15,17,18) connecting to: A/C Idle-Up Valve, A/C Pressure Switch, A/C Control Assembly, PCME, A/C Magnet Clutch Relay, A/C Thermistor (x2), Igniter.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Cooling Fan Assembly / Cooling Fans Installation
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p40 OEM manual
-
COOLING FANS INSTALLATION
See Components for Disassembly and Assembly. Install the cooling fan with the three bolts. Install the two cooling fans.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · ECTS Inspection / Fan Main Relay Inspection
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p45 OEM manual
-
FAN MAIN RELAY INSPECTION
Remove Fan Main Relay. Inspect relay continuity using an ohmmeter: (a) Check that there is continuity between terminals 1 and 3. (b) Check that there is continuity between terminals 2 and 4. (c) Check that there is no continuity between terminals 4 and 5. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Cooling Fan Relay Inspection
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p46 OEM manual
-
FAN MAIN RELAY — Inspect Relay Operation
B. Inspect relay operation: (a) Apply battery voltage across terminals 1 and 3. (b) Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between terminals 2 and 4. (c) Check that there is continuity between terminals 4 and 5. If operation is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
REINSTALL FAN MAIN RELAY
Step 3: Reinstall Fan Main Relay after inspection.
-
NO.2 COOLING FAN RELAY INSPECTION — Remove
Step 1: REMOVE NO.2 COOLING FAN RELAY from the relay block.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Cooling Fan Relay Inspection
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p47 OEM manual
-
INSPECT NO.2 COOLING FAN RELAY — Relay Continuity
A. Inspect relay continuity: (a) Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between terminals 1 and 2. (b) Check that there is continuity between terminals 3 and 4. (c) Check that there is no continuity between terminals 3 and 5. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
INSPECT NO.2 COOLING FAN RELAY — Relay Operation
B. Inspect relay operation: (a) Apply battery voltage across terminals 1 and 2. (b) Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between terminals 3 and 4. (c) Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between terminals 3 and 5. If operation is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
REINSTALL NO.2 COOLING FAN RELAY
Reinstall the No.2 Cooling Fan Relay after inspection.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · RADIATOR
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p48 OEM manual
-
RADIATOR CLEANING
Using water or a steam cleaner, remove any mud and dirt from the radiator core.
- If using a high pressure type cleaner, be careful not to deform the fins of the radiator core. If the cleaner nozzle pressure is 2,942 – 3,432 kPa (30 – 35 kgf/cm², 427 – 498 psi), keep a distance of at least 40 – 50 cm (15.75 – 19.69 in.) between the radiator core and cleaner nozzle.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Components for Removal and Installation
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p50 OEM manual
-
COMPONENTS FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Exploded diagram showing all components involved in the removal and installation of the 3S-GTE engine cooling system, including: Dash Panel Front Trim Cover, Upper Radiator Support Seal, Upper Radiator Support, Hood Lock, Cooling Fan Connector, Radiator Hose, ECTS Connector, O-Ring (non-reusable), ECTS, O-Ring (non-reusable), Drain Plug, Radiator Lower Air Deflector, Lower Radiator Support, Radiator, No.1 Cooling Fan, No.2 Cooling Fan, Cooling Fan Connector, Radiator Hose.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Radiator Removal / Installation
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p53 OEM manual
-
RADIATOR REMOVAL — Remove radiator and lower supports
Steps (b) and (c) of radiator removal: (b) Remove the radiator. (c) Remove the two lower radiator supports.
-
(w/ A/C) REMOVE ECTS FROM RADIATOR
(a) Remove the ECTS. (b) Remove the O-ring from the ECTS.
-
(w/o A/C) REMOVE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SWITCH FROM RADIATOR
(a) Remove the temperature switch. (b) Remove the O-ring from the temperature switch.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Thermostat Inspection
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p59 OEM manual
-
INSPECT THERMOSTAT
HINT: The thermostat is numbered with the valve opening temperature. (a) Immerse the thermostat in water and gradually heat the water. (b) Check the valve opening temperature. Valve opening temperature: 80–84°C (176–183°F). If the valve opening temperature is not as specified, replace the thermostat. (c) Check the valve lift. Valve lift: 8 mm (0.31 in.) or more at 95°C (203°F). If the valve lift is not as specified, replace the thermostat. (d) Check that the valve spring is tight when the thermostat is fully closed. If not closed, replace the thermostat.
3S-GTE ENGINE · COOLING SYSTEM · Water Pump
Cooling
RM285U_1993_3sgte_coolings · p64 OEM manual
-
REMOVE WATER PUMP FROM WATER PUMP COVER
Remove the screw, two bolts, water pump and gasket.
-
INSPECT WATER PUMP
Turn the pulley and check that the water pump bearing moves smoothly and quietly.
WIRING DIAGRAM · How to Read Wiring Diagrams · Symbol Definitions
EFI / fuel injection
smoke_engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p1 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM TITLE (A)
Indicates the System Title.
-
WIRING COLOR CODE (B)
Indicates the wiring color. Wire colors are indicated by an alphabetical code. B=Black, BR=Brown, G=Green, GR=Gray, L=Blue, LG=Light Green, O=Orange, P=Pink, R=Red, V=Violet, W=White, Y=Yellow. The first letter indicates the basic wire color and the second letter indicates the color of the stripe. Example: L-Y means Blue wire with Yellow stripe.
-
CONNECTOR PIN REFERENCE (C)
Indicates the connector to be connected to a part (the numeral indicates the pin No.).
-
PIN NUMBER (D)
Indicates the pin number of the connector. The numbering system is different for female and male connectors. Female connectors are numbered in order from upper left to lower right. Male connectors are numbered in order from upper right to lower left. The numbering system for the overall wiring diagram is the same as above.
-
RELAY BLOCK (E)
Indicates a Relay Block. No shading is used and only the Relay Block No. is shown to distinguish it from the J/B. Example: circle-1 indicates Relay Block No. 1.
-
JUNCTION BLOCK (F)
Junction Block — the number in the circle is the J/B No. and the connector code is shown beside it. Junction Blocks are shaded to clearly separate them from other parts (different junction blocks are shaded differently for further clarification). Example: 3B indicates that it is inside Junction Block No. 3.
-
RELATED SYSTEM (G)
Indicates related system.
-
WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (H)
Indicates the wiring harness and wiring harness connector. The wiring harness with male terminal is shown with arrows (male symbol). Outside numerals are pin numbers. All connectors are shown from the open end, and the lock is on top.
-
VEHICLE/ENGINE/SPECIFICATION VARIATION (I)
Parentheses ( ) are used to indicate different wiring and connector, etc. when the vehicle model, engine type, or specification is different.
-
SEALED WIRING HARNESS (J)
Indicates a sealed wiring harness.
-
GROUND POINT (K)
Indicates a ground point.
MR2 · Wiring · Connector Views
Unclassified
smoke_engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p62 OEM manual
-
CONNECTOR VIEWS — ENGINE AND BODY HARNESS
Connector face views for the following harness connectors: EB1 (Engine Wire, 8-pin), EB1 (R/B No.2, 8-pin), EC1 GRAY (Engine No.4 Wire, 2-pin), EC1 GRAY (Engine Wire, 2-pin), IG1 (Compartment Wire, 1-pin), IG1 (Engine Room Main Wire, 1-pin), IH1 (Cowl Wire, 20-pin), IH1 (A/C Sub Wire, 20-pin), IJ1 (Cowl Wire, 10-pin), IJ2 (Front Door RH Wire LHD / Front Door LM Wire RHD, 14-pin), IJ2 (Cowl Wire, 14-pin).
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · AC IDLE-UP VALVE
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p1 OEM manual
-
AC IDLE-UP VALVE
The A/C Idle-Up Valve is located between the IACV (Idle Air Control Valve) and the intake manifold. Air flows from IACV through the A/C Idle-Up Valve to the intake manifold. The valve is controlled electrically via the PCME (& T): power is supplied from the MPI Main Relay through the +B (+B1) terminal, the valve coil (solenoid), and ground through terminal E1. The ISCV terminal on the PCME connects to the valve circuit.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p7 OEM manual
-
MPI SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The MPI system is composed of three basic sub-systems: Fuel, Air Induction and Electronic Control Systems.
-
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel is supplied under constant pressure to the MPI injectors by an electric fuel pump. The injectors inject a metered quantity of fuel into the intake port in accordance with signals from the PCME (& T) (Powertrain Control Module (Engine & Transmission)).
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
The air induction system provides sufficient air for engine operation.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
The MR2 5S-FE engine is equipped with a TOYOTA Computer Controlled System (TCCS) which centrally controls the MPI, EI, IAC diagnosis systems etc. by means of a Powertrain Control Module (Engine & Transmission) (PCME (& T)–formerly MPI computer) employing a microcomputer. The PCME (& T) controls the following functions: 1. Electronic Fuel Injection — The PCME (& T) receives signals from various sensors indicating changing engine operation conditions such as: Intake manifold pressure, Intake air temperature, Coolant temperature, Engine rpm, Throttle valve opening angle, Exhaust oxygen content etc. The signals are utilized by the PCME (& T) to determine the injection duration necessary for an optimum air-fuel ratio. 2. Electronic Ignition (EI) — The PCME (& T) is programmed with data for optimum ignition timing under any and all operating conditions. Using data provided by sensors which monitor various engine functions (rpm, coolant temperature, etc.), the microcomputer (PCME (& T)) triggers the spark at precisely the right instant. 3. Idle Speed Control (IAC) — The PCME (& T) is programmed with target idling speed values to respond to different engine conditions (coolant temperature, air conditioner ON/OFF, etc.) Sensors transmit signals to the PCME (& T) which controls the flow of air through the by-pass of the throttle value and adjust idle speed to the target value. 4. Diagnosis — The PCME (& T) detects any malfunctions and abnormalities in the sensor network and lights a 'CHECK' engine warning light on the combination meter. At the same time, trouble is identified and a diagnostic trouble code is recorded by the PCME (& T). The diagnostic trouble code can be read by the number of blinks of the 'CHECK' engine warning light when terminals TE1 and E1 are connected. The diagnostic trouble codes are referred to the later page (See page EG2-209). 5. Fail-Safe Function — In the event of the sensor malfunction, a back-up circuit will take over to provide minimal drivability, and the 'CHECK' engine warning light will illuminate.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p8 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The PCME (& T) contains a built-in self-diagnosis system by which troubles with the engine signal network are detected and a 'CHECK' engine warning light on the combination meter lights up. By analyzing various signals as shown in the later table (See page EG2-209) the PCME (& T) detects system malfunctions relating to the sensors or actuators. The self-diagnosis system has two modes, a normal mode and a test mode. If a malfunction is detected when in the normal mode, the PCME (& T) lights up the 'CHECK' engine warning light to inform the driver of the occurrence of a malfunction. (For some codes the light does not come on.) The light goes off automatically when the malfunction has been repaired. But the diagnostic trouble code(s) remains stored in the PCME (& T) memory (except for code No. 16). The PCME (& T) stores the code(s) until it is cleared by removing the EFI fuse with the ignition switch off. The diagnostic trouble code can be read by the number of blinks of the 'CHECK' engine warning light when TE1 and E1 terminals on the data link connector 1 are connected. When 2 or more codes are indicated, the lowest number (code) will appear first. If a malfunction is detected when in the test mode, the PCME (& T) lights up the 'CHECK' engine warning light to inform the technician of the occurrence of a malfunction (except for code Nos. 42, 43 and 51). In this case, TE2 and E1 terminals on the data link connector 1 should be connected as shown later (See page EG2-206). In the test mode, even if the malfunction is corrected, the malfunction code is stored in the PCME (& T) memory even when the ignition switch is off (except code Nos. 42, 43 and 51). This also applies in the normal mode. The diagnostic mode (normal or test) and the output of the 'CHECK' engine warning light can be selected by connecting the TE1, TE2 and E1 terminals on the data link connector 1, as shown later. A test mode function has been added to the functions of the self-diagnosis system of the normal mode for the purpose of detecting malfunctions such as poor contact, which are difficult to detect in the normal mode. This function fills up the self-diagnosis system. The test mode can be implemented by the technician following the appropriate procedures of check terminal connection and operation described later (See page EG2-206).
-
CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CHECK
1. The 'CHECK' engine warning light will come on when the ignition switch is placed at ON and the engine is not running. 2. When the engine is started, the 'CHECK' engine warning light should go off. If the light remains on, the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p10 OEM manual
-
MALFUNCTION CODE INDICATION
In the event of a malfunction, the light will blink every 0.52-seconds. The first number of blinks will equal the first digit of a 2-digit diagnostic trouble code and, after a 1.5-second pause, the 2nd number of blinks will equal the 2nd. If there are two or more codes, there will be a 2.5-second pause between each code. After all the codes have been output, there will be a 4.5 second pause and they will all be repeated as long as the terminals TE1 and E1 of the data link connector 1 are connected. HINT: In the event of a number of trouble codes, indication will begin from the smaller value and continue to the larger.
-
2 TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble codes 25, 26, 27 and 71 use '2 trip detection logic'. With this logic, when a malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporarily stored in the PCME (& T) memory. If the same case is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the 'CHECK' engine warning light to light up. The 2 trip repeats the same mode a 2nd time. (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st time and 2nd time.) In the Test Mode, the 'CHECK' engine warning light lights up the 1st time a malfunction is detected.
-
REMOVE SST AFTER DIAGNOSIS CHECK
After the diagnosis check, remove SST. SST 09843-18020.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p12 OEM manual
-
REMOVE SST AFTER DIAGNOSIS CHECK
After the diagnosis check, remove SST 09843-18020.
-
TEST MODE START CONDITION
The test mode will not start if terminals TE2 and E1 are connected after the ignition switch is turned on.
-
STARTER SIGNAL AND VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS
The starter signal and vehicle speed signal will be diagnosed by the PCME (& T) as malfunctions, and code Nos. 42 and 43 will be output, if the operation in step 4 is not performed.
-
CODE 51 NORMAL CONDITION
When the automatic transmission shift lever is in the "D", "2", "L" or "R" shift position, or when the air conditioner is on or when the accelerator pedal is depressed, code "51" (Switch condition signal) is output, but this is not abnormal.
-
ALTERNATIVE CANCELLATION METHOD — BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
Cancellation can also be done by removing the battery negative (–) terminal, but in this case, other memory systems (clock, etc.) will also be cancelled out.
-
RETAINED CODE IF NOT CANCELLED
If the diagnostic trouble code is not cancelled out, it will be retained by the PCME (& T) and appear along with a new code in the event of future trouble.
-
CHECK FOR STORED CODE BEFORE BATTERY REMOVAL
If it is necessary to work on engine components requiring removal of the battery terminal, a check must first be made to see if a diagnostic trouble code has been recorded.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · DIAGNOSIS INDICATION
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p13 OEM manual
-
MULTIPLE CODES DISPLAY ORDER
When 2 or more codes are indicated, the lowest number (code) will appear first.
-
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE RETENTION
All detected diagnostic trouble codes, except code Nos. 43 and 53 will be retained in memory by the PCME (& T) from the time of detection until cancelled out.
-
CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT BEHAVIOUR AFTER MALFUNCTION CLEARED
Once malfunction is cleared, the "CHECK" engine warning light on the combination meter will go off but the diagnostic trouble code(s) remains stored in PCME (& T) memory (except for code Nos. 43 and 51).
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · Electronic Parts Location
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p23 OEM manual
-
ELECTRONIC PARTS LOCATION
Diagram showing the location of electronic components in the MPI system for the 5S-FE engine on the Toyota MR2 SW20. Components identified include: Oxygen Sensor (Main), Sub-Oxygen Sensor (CALIF. only), ECTS, MAP, EGR Function Sensor (CALIF. only), VSV (for Fuel Pressure), VSV (for EGR), PCME (& T), A/C Idle-Up Valve, Ignition Main Relay ("IGN"), MPI Main Relay ("EFI"), Circuit Opening Relay ("C/OPN").
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · Fuel Pressure Regulator
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p28 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT VACUUM SENSING HOSE FROM FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Disconnect the vacuum sensing hose from the fuel pressure regulator.
-
DISCONNECT FUEL RETURN PIPE FROM FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Remove the union bolt and two gaskets, and disconnect the return pipe from the pressure regulator. HINT: Put a suitable container or shop towel under the pressure regulator. Slowly loosen the union bolt.
-
REMOVE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Remove the two bolts, and pull out the pressure regulator. Remove the O-ring from the pressure regulator.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p31 OEM manual
-
NO FUEL PRESSURE — CHECK THE FOLLOWING PARTS
If there is no pressure, check the following parts: Fusible links (2.01, 1.0Y), H-fuse (AM2 40A), Fuses (EFI 15A, AM2 7.5A), MPI main relay, Fuel pump, Wiring connections.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · Components for Removal and Installation
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p35 OEM manual
-
COMPONENTS FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Diagram identifying interior components relevant to MPI system removal and installation, including: Lower No.1 Instrument Panel Finish Panel, Center Instrument Cluster Finish Panel, Ash Receptacle Box, Ash Receptacle Retainer, Upper Console Panel, Console Box, Grommet, Service Hole Cover, Fuel Sender Gauge Connector, Shifting Hole Cover, Fuel Pump Connector.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · Fuel Pump Disassembly / Assembly
EFI / fuel injection
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p42 OEM manual
-
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
See Components for Disassembly and Assembly.
-
INSTALL FUEL PUMP FILTER TO FUEL PUMP
Install the pump filter with a new clip.
-
INSTALL FUEL PUMP TO FUEL PUMP BRACKET
(a) Connect the fuel hose to the outlet port of the fuel pump. (b) Connect the lead wire to the fuel pump with the spring washer and nut. Connect the three lead wires. (c) Install the rubber cushion to the fuel pump. (d) Install the fuel pump by pushing the lower side of the fuel pump.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · Fuel Lines and Connections Inspection
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p48 OEM manual
-
ALWAYS USE NEW GASKETS
Always use new gaskets when replacing the fuel tank or component parts.
-
APPLY PROPER TORQUE
Apply the proper torque to all parts tightened.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · IACV
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p52 OEM manual
-
IACV INSTALLATION
See Components for Removal and Installation.
-
INSTALL IACV
Place a new gasket on the throttle body, then install the IACV with the four screws.
-
INSTALL THROTTLE BODY
See Throttle Body Installation.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · INJECTOR
EFI / fuel injection
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p54 OEM manual
-
INJECTOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Diagram showing the fuel injector layout on the 5S-FE engine including: Delivery Pipe, Fuel Pulsation Damper, Fuel Inlet Pipe, Fuel Return Hose, and Fuel Injectors (Connector Color: Green). Four injectors (No.1, No.2, No.3, No.4) are controlled by the PCME (& T) via terminals #20, #10, E01, E02. Power supply is via AM2 7.5A fuse from battery, through Ignition Main Relay (AM2 40A) activated by Ignition Switch IG2. Main FL 2.0L fuse also present in circuit.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · Injectors Inspection
EFI / fuel injection
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p60 OEM manual
-
REMOVE DELIVERY PIPE AND INJECTORS ASSEMBLY
Remove the two bolts, the delivery pipe and four injectors assembly from the RH side of the engine.
- Be careful not to drop the injectors when removing the delivery pipe.
-
REMOVE INSULATORS, SPACERS AND INJECTORS
Remove the four insulators and two spacers from the cylinder head. Pull out the four injectors from the delivery pipe. Remove the O-ring and grommet from each injector.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · OPERATION FUEL SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p72 OEM manual
-
FUEL SYSTEM OPERATION
Fuel pumped up by the fuel pump, flows through the fuel filter and is distributed to each injector at a set pressure maintained by the pressure regulator. The fuel pressure regulator adjusts the pressure of the fuel from the fuel line (high pressure side) to a pressure 284 kPa (2.9 kgf/cm2, 41 psi) higher than the pressure inside the intake manifold, and excess fuel is returned to the fuel tank through the return pipe. The pulsation damper absorbs the slight fluctuations in fuel pressure caused by fuel injector from the injector. The injectors operate on input of injection slights from the PCME (& T) and inject fuel into the intake manifold.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p73 OEM manual
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Air is filtered through the air cleaner and the amount flowing to the air intake chamber is determined according to the throttle valve opening in the throttle body and the engine rpm. Intake air controlled by the throttle valve opening is distributed from the air intake chamber to the manifold of each cylinder and is drawn into the combination chamber. At low temperatures the IACV opens and the air flows through the IACV and the throttle body, into the air intake chamber. During engine warming up, even if the throttle valve is completely closed, air flows to the air intake chamber, thereby increasing the idle speed (first idle operation). The air intake chamber prevents pulsation of the intake air. It also prevents intake air interference in each cylinder.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p74 OEM manual
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The control system consists of sensors which detect various engine conditions, and a PCME (& T) which determines the injection volume (timing) based on the signals from the sensors. The various sensors detect the intake air pressure, engine rpm, oxygen density in the exhaust gas, coolant temperature, intake air temperature and atmospheric etc. and convert the information into an electrical signal which is sent to the PCME (& T). Based on these signals, the PCME (& T) calculates the optimum ignition timing for the current conditions and operates the injectors. The PCME (& T) not only controls the fuel injection timing, but also the self diagnostic function which records the occurrence of a malfunction, ignition timing control, idle rpm control and EGR control.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · Precaution / Maintenance Precautions
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p83 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE BEFORE WORKING ON FUEL SYSTEM
Before working on the fuel system, disconnect the cable from negative (–) terminal of the battery. Any diagnostic trouble code retained by the computer will be erased when the battery terminal is removed. Therefore, if necessary, read the diagnosis before removing the terminal.
-
DO NOT SMOKE OR WORK NEAR OPEN FLAME WHEN WORKING ON FUEL SYSTEM
Do not smoke or work near an open flame when working on the fuel system.
-
KEEP GASOLINE AWAY FROM RUBBER OR LEATHER PARTS
Keep gasoline away from rubber or leather parts.
-
CHECK CORRECT ENGINE TUNE-UP
See Tune-Up under Engine Mechanical.
-
PRECAUTION WHEN CONNECTING GAUGE
Use battery as the power source for the timing light, tachometer, etc. Connect the tester probe of a tachometer to the terminal IG(–) of the data link connector 1.
-
IN EVENT OF ENGINE MISFIRE, FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN
Check proper connection of battery terminals, etc. Handle high-tension cords carefully. After repair work, check that the ignition coil terminals and all other ignition system lines are reconnected securely. When cleaning the engine compartment, be especially careful to protect the electrical system from water.
-
PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING OXYGEN SENSOR
Do not allow oxygen sensor to drop or hit against an object. Do not allow the sensor to come into contact with water.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p84 OEM manual
-
IF VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM (HAM, CB, ETC.)
The PCME (& T) has been designed so that it will not be affected by outside interference. However, if your vehicle is equipped with a CB radio transceiver, etc. (even one with about 10 W output), it may, at times, have an affect upon PCME (& T) operation, especially if the antenna and feeder are installed nearby. Therefore, observe the following precautions:
-
INSTALL ANTENNA FAR FROM PCME
Install the antenna as far away as possible from the PCME (& T). The PCME (& T) is located on the partition panel into rear luggage compartment so the antenna should be installed at the rear side of the vehicle.
-
KEEP ANTENNA FEEDER AWAY FROM PCME WIRES
Keep the antenna feeder as far away as possible from the PCME (& T) wires—at least 20 cm (7.87 in.)—and, especially, do not wind them together.
-
CHECK FEEDER AND ANTENNA ADJUSTMENT
Check that the feeder and antenna are properly adjusted.
-
DO NOT EQUIP POWERFUL MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Do not equip your vehicle with a powerful mobile radio system.
-
DO NOT OPEN PCME COVER UNLESS NECESSARY
Do not open the cover or the case of the PCME (& T) unless absolutely necessary. If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM — SEPARATION OF ENGINE COMPONENTS
Separation of the engine oil dipstick, oil filler cap, PCV hose, etc. may cause the engine to run out of turn.
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM — DISCONNECTION OR CRACKS
Disconnection, looseness or cracks in the parts of the air induction system between the throttle body and cylinder head will allow air suction and cause the engine to run out of tune.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM — DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE REMOVING MPI CONNECTORS
Before removing MPI wiring connectors, terminals, etc., first disconnect the power by either turning the ignition switch OFF or disconnecting the battery terminals. HINT: Always check the diagnostic trouble code before disconnecting the battery terminal.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p85 OEM manual
-
BATTERY CONNECTION
When installing the battery, be especially careful not to incorrectly connect the positive (+) and negative (-) cables.
-
HANDLE MPI PARTS CAREFULLY
Do not permit parts to receive a severe impact during removal or installation. Handle all MPI parts carefully, especially the PCME (& T).
-
TROUBLESHOOTING CAUTION
Do not be careless during troubleshooting as there are numerous transistor circuits and even slight terminal contact can further troubles.
-
DO NOT OPEN PCME COVER
Do not open the PCME (& T) cover.
-
PREVENT WATER ENTRY
When inspecting during rainy weather, take care to prevent entry of water. Also, when washing the engine compartment, prevent water from getting on the MPI parts and wiring connectors.
-
REPLACE PARTS AS ASSEMBLY
Parts should be replaced as an assembly.
-
PULLING OUT AND INSERTING WIRING CONNECTORS
Care is required when pulling out and inserting wiring connectors.
-
INSPECTING A CONNECTOR WITH A VOLT/OHMMETER
When inspecting a connector with a volt/ohmmeter.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · Fuel System
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p86 OEM manual
-
CONNECTOR INSPECTION PRECAUTIONS
Insert the test probe into the connector from wiring side when checking the continuity, amperage or voltage. Do not apply unnecessary force to the terminal. After checking, install the water-proofing rubber on the connector securely.
-
USE SST FOR INJECTOR INSPECTION
Use SST for inspection or test of the injector or its wiring connector. SST 09842-30070.
-
DISCONNECTING HIGH FUEL PRESSURE LINE
When disconnecting the high fuel pressure line, a large amount of gasoline will spill out, so observe the following procedures: (a) Put a container under the connection. (b) Slowly loosen the connection. (c) Disconnect the connection. (d) Plug the connection with a rubber plug.
-
CONNECTING FLARE NUT OR UNION BOLT — UNION BOLT TYPE
When connecting the flare nut or union bolt on the high pressure pipe union (Union Bolt Type): (a) Always use a new gasket. (b) Tighten the union bolt by hand. (c) Tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.
-
CONNECTING FLARE NUT OR UNION BOLT — FLARE NUT TYPE
When connecting the flare nut or union bolt on the high pressure pipe union (Flare Nut Type): (a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the flare and tighten the flare nut by hand. (b) Using SST, tighten the flare nut to the specified torque. SST 09631-22020. HINT: Use a torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 30 cm (111.81 in.).
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p87 OEM manual
-
PRECAUTIONS WHEN REMOVING AND INSTALLING INJECTORS
Observe the following precautions when removing and installing the injectors.
- Never reuse the O-ring.
- When placing a new O-ring on the injector, take care not to damage it in any way.
- Coat a new O-ring with spindle oil or gasoline before installing — never use engine, gear or brake oil.
-
INSTALL INJECTOR TO DELIVERY PIPE AND CYLINDER HEAD
Install the injector to delivery pipe and cylinder head as shown in the illustration.
-
CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKS AFTER MAINTENANCE
Check that there are no fuel leaks after performing any maintenance on the fuel system.
- Do not start the engine.
- Always pinch the hose, avoid bending as it may cause the hose to crack.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · PREPARATION
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p89 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
List of special service tools required for MPI system service on the 5S-FE engine.
-
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
List of recommended tools for MPI system service on the 5S-FE engine.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · EQUIPMENT
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p90 OEM manual
-
EQUIPMENT
List of equipment used for MPI System service procedures on the 5S-FE engine: Graduated cylinder (Injector), Carburetor cleaner (Throttle body), Sound scope (Injector), Tachometer, Torque wrench, Vacuum gauge, Soft brush (Throttle body).
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS — SERVICE DATA
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p91 OEM manual
-
SERVICE DATA — 5S-FE ENGINE MPI SYSTEM
Fuel pressure regulator: Fuel pressure at no vacuum 265-304 kPa (2.7-3.1 kgf/cm², 38-44 psi). Fuel pump resistance: 0.2-3.0 Ω. Injector resistance: Approx. 13.8 Ω; injection volume 49-59 cm³ (3.0-3.6 cu in.) per 15 sec; difference between each cylinder 5 cm³ (0.3 cu in.) or less; fuel leakage one drop or less per minute. Throttle body fully closed angle: 6°; throttle opener setting speed 1,300-1,500 rpm (w/ Cooling fan OFF). Throttle position sensor clearance/resistance values as tabulated. IACV resistance (+B - ISCC or ISCO): 19.3-22.3 Ω. ECTS resistance: 10-20 kΩ at -20°C (-4°F), 4-7 kΩ at 0°C (32°F), 2-3 kΩ at 20°C (68°F), 0.9-1.3 kΩ at 40°C (104°F), 0.4-0.7 kΩ at 60°C (140°F), 0.2-0.4 kΩ at 80°C (176°F). TATS resistance: same values as ECTS. VSV (for Fuel pressure) resistance (Cold): 37-44 Ω. VSV (for EGR) resistance (Cold): 33-39 Ω. A/C idle-up valve resistance (Cold): 30-34 Ω. EGR function sensor (Calif. only) resistance: 69-89 kΩ at 50°C (122°F), 11-15 kΩ at 100°C (212°F), 2-4 kΩ at 150°C (302°F). Oxygen sensor heater coil resistance: 5.1-6.3 Ω at 20°C (68°F).
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p98 OEM manual
-
Disconnect tachometer
E. Disconnect tachometer
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING WITH VOLT OHMMETER
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p105 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES OVERVIEW
The following troubleshooting procedures are designed for inspection of each separate system, and therefore the actual procedure may vary somewhat. However, troubleshooting should be performed while referring to the inspection methods described in this manual.
-
CHECK FUSES AND CONNECTORS FIRST
Before beginning inspection, it is best to first make a simple check of the fuses, H-fuses, fusible link and the condition of the connectors.
-
TROUBLESHOOTING ASSUMPTION
The following troubleshooting procedures are based on the supposition that the trouble lies in either a short or open circuit within the computer.
-
PCME REPLACEMENT CONDITION
If engine trouble occurs even though proper operating voltage is detected in the computer connector, then it can be assumed that the PCME(& T) is faulty and should be replaced.
-
FUSES, H-FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK LOCATION
Fuse and fusible link locations include: AM2 Fuse, AM1 H-Fuse, AM2 H-Fuse, ALT H-Fuse (located in the main fuse box), EFI 15A (located in the engine compartment fuse box), and GAUGE 7.5A (located in the instrument panel fuse box).
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · MPI System Check Procedure (M/T)
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p106 OEM manual
-
PERFORM VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS WITH CONNECTORS CONNECTED
Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected.
-
VERIFY BATTERY VOLTAGE
Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or more when the ignition switch is in the 'ON' position.
-
USE HIGH IMPEDANCE VOLTMETER
Using a voltmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum), measure the voltage at each terminal of the wiring connectors.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · EG2-223
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p111 OEM manual
-
VTA-E2
Diagnostic flowchart for no specified voltage at PCME terminals VTA and E2. Step 1: There is no specified voltage at PCME terminals VTA and E2 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between PCME terminals VC and E2 (IG SW ON). If NO: Refer to VC-E2 trouble section. If OK: Check throttle position sensor (See page EG2-288). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between PCME and throttle position sensor. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Try another PCME.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · Diagnostic Table No. 9
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p117 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN IGT AND E1 AT IDLING — DIAGNOSTIC FLOW
(1) There is no voltage between PCME terminals IGT and E1. (Idling). (2) Check that there is voltage between PCME terminal IGT and body ground. (Idling). If NO: (3) Check wiring between PCME terminal E1 and body ground. If BAD: Repair or Replace. If OK: Try another PCME. If OK at step 2: Check fuse, H-fuse, fusible link, ignition switch and ignition main relay. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check distributor (See IG section). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between PCME and battery. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check igniter (See IG section). If BAD: Repair or replace.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · EGR Function Sensor Diagnostic
Emission control
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p121 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN PCME TERMINALS THG AND E2 (IG SW ON)
Step 1: There is no voltage between PCME terminals THG and E2 with IG SW ON. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between PCME terminal +B or +B1 and body ground with IG SW ON. If OK, proceed to check wiring between PCME terminal E1 and body ground. If NO, refer to No.1 (See page EG2-220). If E1 wiring is BAD, repair or replace. If E1 wiring is OK, check EGR system (See page EG2-173). If EGR system is BAD, repair or replace. If EGR system is OK, check EGR function sensor (See page EG2-321). If EGR function sensor is BAD, replace EGR function sensor. If EGR function sensor is OK, check wiring between PCME and EGR function sensor. If wiring is OK, try another PCME. If wiring is BAD, repair or replace.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · System Check Procedure (A/T)
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p122 OEM manual
-
PERFORM VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS WITH CONNECTORS CONNECTED
Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected.
-
VERIFY BATTERY VOLTAGE
Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or more when the ignition switch is in the 'ON' position.
-
USE HIGH IMPEDANCE VOLTMETER
Using a voltmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum), measure the voltage at each terminal of the wiring connectors.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · Diagnostic Flowcharts
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p127 OEM manual
-
VC-E2 DIAGNOSTIC FLOWCHART
Flowchart for diagnosing no voltage between PCME & T terminals VC and E2 (IG SW ON). Step 1: Check for voltage between PCME & T terminal +B (+B1) and body ground (IG SW ON). If OK, proceed to check throttle position sensor (See page EG2-288). If BAD, repair or replace. If OK after TPS check, check wiring between PCME & T and throttle position sensor. If wiring OK, try another PCME & T. If wiring BAD, repair or replace wiring. If no voltage at +B/+B1, refer to No-1 (See page EG2-236).
-
VTA-E2 DIAGNOSTIC FLOWCHART
Flowchart for diagnosing no specified voltage at PCME & T terminals VTA and E2 (IG SW ON). Step 1: Check that there is voltage between PCME & T terminals VC and E2 (IG SW ON). If NO, refer to VC-E2 trouble section. If OK, proceed to step 3: Check throttle position sensor (See page EG2-288). If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, check wiring between PCME & T and throttle position sensor. If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, try another PCME & T.
5S-FE ENGINE · MPI SYSTEM · VSV (For Fuel Pressure)
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_5sfe_mpisyste · p138 OEM manual
-
VSV (For Fuel Pressure)
Diagram showing the location and circuit of the VSV (Vacuum Switching Valve) for fuel pressure on the 5S-FE engine MPI system. The VSV is connected via vacuum sensing hoses to the fuel pressure regulator. The circuit diagram shows connections from the PCME (&T) to: STA (to Ignition Switch ST2), +B/+B1 (to MPI Main Relay), FPU (through VSV for Fuel Pressure), THW (through ECTS), E2, THA (through IATS), and E1 (ground).
MAINTENANCE · 3S-GTE · General Maintenance
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p1 OEM manual
-
TIRES
Check the pressure with a gauge. Adjust if necessary. Check for cuts, damage or excessive wear.
-
WHEEL NUTS
When checking the tires, check the nuts for looseness or for missing nuts. If necessary, tighten them.
-
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Check for wear or cracks whenever they do not wipe clean. Replace if necessary.
-
FLUID LEAKS
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid. If you smell gasoline fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected.
-
DOORS AND ENGINE HOOD
Check that all doors including the trunk lid operate smoothly, and that all latches lock securely. Check that the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
-
LIGHTS
Check that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all working. Check the headlight aim.
-
WARNING LIGHTS AND BUZZERS
Check that all warning lights and buzzers function properly.
-
HORN
Check that it is working.
-
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Check for scratches, pits or abrasions.
-
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
Check operation of the wipers and washer. Check that the wipers do not streak.
-
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
Check that the air comes out from the defroster outlet when operating the heater or air conditioner at defroster mode.
-
REAR VIEW MIRROR
Check that it is mounted securely.
-
SUN VISORS
Check that they more freely and mounted securely.
-
STEERING WHEEL
Check that it has the specified freeplay. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive freeplay or strange noise.
-
SEATS
Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the locks hold securely in any latches position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.
-
SEAT BELTS
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Check that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
-
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.
-
CLUTCH PEDAL (See CL section)
Check the pedal for smooth operation. Check that the pedal has the proper freeplay.
MAINTENANCE · 3S-GTE · Under Hood
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p2 OEM manual
-
BRAKE PEDAL (See BR section)
Check the pedal for smooth operation. Check that the pedal has the proper reserve distance and freeplay. Check the brake booster function.
-
BRAKES
At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.
-
PARKING BRAKE (See BR section)
Check that the lever has the proper travel. On a safe incline, check that the vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.
-
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Check that there is sufficient fluid in the tank.
-
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check that the coolant level is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the see-through reservoir.
-
RADIATOR AND HOSES
Check that the front of the radiator is clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt or bugs. Check that hoses for cracks, kinks, rot or loose connections.
-
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
Check that the electrolyte level of all battery cells is between the upper and lower level lines on the case. If level low, add distilled water only.
-
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID LEVELS
Check that the brake fluid level is near the upper level line on the see-through reservoir. Check that the clutch fluid level is within ±5 mm (0.20 in.) of the reservoir hem.
-
ENGINE DRIVE BELTS
Check all drive belts for fraying, cracks, wear or oiliness.
-
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off.
-
POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
Check the level. The level should be in the "HOT" or "COLD" range depending on the fluid temperature.
-
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually inspect for cracks, holes or loose supports. If any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell of the exhaust fumes is noticed, have the cause located and corrected.
MAINTENANCE · 3S-GTE
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p5 OEM manual
-
SPARK PLUG ELECTRODE GAP CHECK AND INSTALLATION
(d) Check the electrode gap of new spark plugs. Correct electrode gap: 0.8 mm (0.0031 in.). Recommended spark plugs: PK20R8 for ND, BKR6EP8 for NGK. NOTICE: If adjusting the gap of a new plug, bend only the base of the ground electrode. Do not touch the tip. Never attempt to adjust the gap on a used plug. (e) Using a 16 mm plug wrench, reinstall the spark plugs. (f) Reconnect the high-tension cords. (g) Reconnect the No.1 intake air connector to the throttle body.
- If adjusting the gap of a new plug, bend only the base of the ground electrode. Do not touch the tip. Never attempt to adjust the gap on a used plug.
-
ENGINE COOLANT HINTS
Use a good brand of ethylene-glycol base coolant and mix it according to the manufacturer's instructions. Using coolant which includes more than 50% ethylene-glycol (but not more than 70%) is recommended.
MAINTENANCE · Maintenance Schedule · Schedule A (3S-GTE)
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p13 OEM manual
-
CONDITIONS FOR SCHEDULE A
Schedule A applies under the following conditions: Towing a trailer, using a camper or car top carrier. Repeated short trips less than 8 km (5 miles) and outside temperature remains below freezing. Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. Operating on dusty, rough muddy or salt spread roads.
-
FOOTNOTE 1 — TIMING BELT
Applicable to vehicles operated under conditions of extensive idling and/or low speed driving for a long distance such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
-
FOOTNOTE 2 — AIR FILTER
Applicable when operating mainly on dusty road. If not, apply SCHEDULE B.
-
FOOTNOTE 3 — FUEL LINES AND CONNECTIONS
Includes inspection of fuel tank band and vapor vent system.
-
FOOTNOTE 4 — STEERING GEAR HOUSING
Check for oil leaks from steering gear housing.
-
FOOTNOTE 5 — BOLTS AND NUTS ON CHASSIS AND BODY
Applicable only when operating mainly on rough, muddy roads. The applicable parts are listed below. For other usage conditions, refer to SCHEDULE B. Parts: Front and rear suspension member to cross body; Strut bar bracket to body bolts; Bolts for sheet installation.
MAINTENANCE · Schedule B
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p14 OEM manual
-
SCHEDULE B CONDITIONS
Conditions other than those listed for SCHEDULE A.
-
MAINTENANCE BEYOND 96,000 KM (60,000 MILES)
Maintenance service beyond 96,000 km (60,000 miles) should continue to be performed at the same intervals shown for each maintenance schedule.
-
EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY ITEMS
Items marked with * indicate maintenance which is part of the warranty conditions for the Emission Control System. The warranty period is in accordance with the owner's guide or the warranty booklet. (*: California specification vehicles).
-
FUEL LINES AND CONNECTIONS — INSPECTION SCOPE
Includes inspection of fuel tank band and vapor vent system.
-
TRANSAXLE AND DIFFERENTIAL — INSPECTION METHOD
Check for leakage.
-
STEERING GEAR HOUSING OIL — INSPECTION METHOD
Check for oil leaks from steering gear housing.
-
BOLTS AND NUTS ON CHASSIS AND BODY — APPLICABLE PARTS
The applicable parts are listed below: Front and rear suspension member to cross body; Strut bar bracket to body bolt; Bolts for sheet installation.
MAINTENANCE · 5S-FE · GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p17 OEM manual
-
TIRES
Check the pressure with a gauge. Adjust if necessary. Check for cuts, damage or excessive wear.
-
WHEEL NUTS
When checking the tires, check the nuts for looseness or for missing nuts. If necessary, tighten them.
-
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Check for wear or cracks whenever they do not wipe clean. Replace if necessary.
-
FLUID LEAKS
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid. If you smell gasoline fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected.
-
DOORS AND ENGINE HOOD
Check that all doors including the trunk lid operate smoothly, and that all latches lock securely. Check that the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
-
LIGHTS
Check that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all working. Check the headlight aim.
-
WARNING LIGHTS AND BUZZERS
Check that all warning lights and buzzers function properly.
-
HORN
Check that it is working.
-
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Check for scratches, pits or abrasions.
-
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
Check operation of the wipers and washer. Check that the wipers do not streak.
-
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
Check that the air comes out from the defroster outlet when operating the heater or air conditioner at defroster mode.
-
REAR VIEW MIRROR
Check that it is mounted securely.
-
SUN VISORS
Check that they more freely and mounted securely.
-
STEERING WHEEL
Check that it has the specified freeplay. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive freeplay or strange noise.
-
SEATS
Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the locks hold securely in any latches position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.
-
SEAT BELTS
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Check that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
-
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.
-
CLUTCH PEDAL
Check the pedal for smooth operation. Check that the pedal has the proper freeplay. See CL section.
MAINTENANCE · 5S-FE · Periodic Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p18 OEM manual
-
BRAKE PEDAL (See BR section)
Check the pedal for smooth operation. Check that the pedal has the proper reserve distance and freeplay. Check the brake booster function.
-
BRAKES
A safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.
-
PARKING BRAKE (See BR section)
Check that the lever has the proper travel. On a safe incline, check that the vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.
-
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION PARK MECHANISM
Check that lock release button of the selector lever for proper and smooth operation. On a safe incline, check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the 'P' position and all brakes released.
-
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Check that there is sufficient fluid in the tank.
-
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check that the coolant level is between the 'FULL' and 'LOW' lines on the see-through reservoir.
-
RADIATOR AND HOSES
Check that the front of the radiator is clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt or bugs. Check that hoses for cracks, kinks, rot or loose connections.
-
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
Check that the electrolyte level of all battery cells is between the upper and lower level lines on the case. If level low, add distilled water only.
-
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID LEVELS
Check that the brake fluid level is near the upper level line on the see-through reservoir. Check that the clutch fluid level is within ±5 mm (0.20 in.) of the reservoir hem.
-
ENGINE DRIVE BELTS
Check all drive belts for fraying, cracks, wear or oiliness.
-
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off.
-
POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
Check the level. The level should be in the 'HOT' or 'COLD' range depending on the fluid temperature.
-
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
Park the vehicle on a level surface. With the engine idling and the parking brake applied, shift the selector into all positions from 'P' to 'L' and then shift into 'P'. Pull out the dipstick and wipe off the fluid with a clean rag. Re-insert the dipstick and check that the fluid level is in the HOT range. Perform this check with the fluid at normal driving temperature (70-80°C (158-176°F)). HINT: Wait about 30 minutes before checking the fluid level after extended driving at high speeds in hot weather, driving in heavy traffic or with a trailer.
-
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually inspect for cracks, holes or loose supports. If any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell of the exhaust fumes is noticed, have the cause located and corrected.
MAINTENANCE · ENGINE · Cold Engine Operations
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p19 OEM manual
-
BELT CONDITION HINTS
Cranks on the rib side of a belt are considered acceptable. If the belt has chunks missing from the ribs, it should be replaced.
-
NEW BELT DEFINITION
'New belt' refers to a belt which has been used less than 5 minutes on a running engine.
-
USED BELT DEFINITION
'Used belt' refers to a belt which has been used on a running engine for 5 minutes or more.
-
BELT INSTALLATION CHECK
After installing the belt, check that it fits properly in the ribbed grooves.
-
PULLEY GROOVE CHECK
Check by hand to confirm that the belt has not slipped out of the groove on the bottom of the pulley.
-
NEW BELT RECHECK
After installing a new belt, run the engine for about 5 minutes and recheck the belt tension.
MAINTENANCE · 5S-FE
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p21 OEM manual
-
REINSTALL SPARK PLUGS
Using a 16 mm plug wrench, reinstall the spark plugs. Reconnect the high-tension cords.
-
ENGINE COOLANT HINTS
Use a good brand of ethylene-glycol base coolant and mix it according to the manufacturer's instructions. Using coolant which includes more than 50% ethylene-glycol (but not more than 74%) is recommended.
MAINTENANCE · 5S-FE · Brake Inspection
Brakes
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p23 OEM manual
-
CHECK BRAKE LINES AND HOSES
Check all brake lines and hoses for: Damage, Wear, Deformation, Cracks, Corrosion, Leaks, Bends, Twists.
-
CHECK CLAMPS AND CONNECTIONS
Check all clamps for tightness and connections for leakage.
-
CHECK HOSE AND LINE CLEARANCE
Check that the hoses and lines are clear of sharp edges, moving parts and the exhaust system.
-
CHECK GROMMET ALIGNMENT
Check that the lines installed in grommets pass through the center of the grommets.
MAINTENANCE · 5S-FE
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p25 OEM manual
-
INSPECT STEERING GEAR HOUSING OIL
Check the steering gear housing for oil leakage.
-
INSPECT DRIVE SHAFT BOOTS
Check the drive shaft boots for clamp looseness, leakage or damage.
-
CHECK TRANSAXLE OIL (FLUID)
Visually check the transaxle for oil (fluid) leakage. If leakage is found, check for the cause and repair.
-
REPLACE TRANSAXLE OIL (FLUID) (INCL. DIFFERENTIAL OIL) — Replace transaxle oil (M/T)
Remove the filler and drain plugs, and drain the oil. Reinstall the drain plug securely.
MAINTENANCE · 5S-FE
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p26 OEM manual
-
Add transaxle oil (M/T)
Add new oil until it begins to run out of the filler hole. In case the recommended oil grade is unavailable, use Type A (API GL-4, SAE 75W-90) or Type B (AN GL-5, SAE 75W-90). Reinstall the filler plug securely.
MAINTENANCE · 5S-FE · Service Specifications
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_maintenance · p31 OEM manual
-
FIRING ORDER
Firing order: 1 – 3 – 4 – 2
BRAKE · ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) · ABS ACTUATOR DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p2 OEM manual
-
ABS ACTUATOR OPERATION INSPECTION — INSPECTION BATTERY VOLTAGE
Battery voltage: 10–14.5 V
-
ABS ACTUATOR OPERATION INSPECTION — DISCONNECT CONNECTORS
Disconnect the three connectors from the actuator as shown.
BRAKE · ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) · Description
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p8 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION
The ABS is a brake system which controls the brake cylinder hydraulic pressure of all four wheels during sudden braking and braking on slippery road surfaces, preventing the wheels from locking. This ABS provides the following benefits: (1) Enables steering round an obstacle with a greater degree of certainty even when panic braking. (2) Enables stopping in a panic brake while keeping the effect upon stability and steerability to a minimum, even on curves. The function of the ABS is to help maintain directional stability and vehicle steerability on most road conditions. However, the system cannot prevent the vehicle from skidding if the cornering speed limit is exceeded. In case a malfunction occurs, a diagnosis function and fail-safe system have been adopted for the ABS to increase serviceability.
BRAKE · ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) · CONNECTORS
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p11 OEM manual
-
ABS ACTUATOR CONNECTORS
Connector A (6-pin): pins labeled MR, SR, R-, WA, GND (pins 1,2,4,5,6). Connector B (6-pin): pins labeled MT, AST, SRR, SFL, SFR (pins 2,3,4,5,6). Connector C (2-pin): pins labeled +BM (pin 1), +BS (pin 2).
-
FRONT SPEED SENSOR (LH) CONNECTOR
2-pin connector: pin 1 = FL+, pin 2 = FL-.
-
FRONT SPEED SENSOR (RH) CONNECTOR
2-pin connector: pin 1 = FR+, pin 2 = FR-.
-
REAR SPEED SENSOR (LH) CONNECTOR
2-pin connector: pin 1 = (unlabeled positive), pin 2 = (unlabeled negative).
-
REAR SPEED SENSOR (RH) CONNECTOR
2-pin connector: pin 1 = (unlabeled positive), pin 2 = (unlabeled negative).
-
ABS ECU CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS
34-pin connector layout. Upper row pins 23-28: pin 23=WA, pin 24=FSS, pin 25=FSS, pin 26=FL+, pin 27=R-, pin 28=SR/SFL. Lower row pins 29-34: pin 29=AST, pin 30=MT/AST, pin 31=MT, pin 32=FL-, pin 33=SRR, pin 34=MR/SRR. Upper row pins 1-11: pin 1=SFR, pin 2=GND, pin 3=RL-, pin 4=TS/STP, pin 5=RSS, pin 6=W, pin 7=IG1, pin 8=FR+, pin 9=FSS, pin 10=W, pin 11=SFL. Lower row pins 12-22: pin 12=GND, pin 13=RL+, pin 14=EX, pin 15=TC, pin 16=PKB, pin 17=RR-, pin 18=RR+, pin 19=BAT, pin 20=FR-, pin 21=FL-, pin 22=RR+.
BRAKE · ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) · Diagnosis System
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p12 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If a malfunction occurs, the system will identify the problem and the ECU will store the codes for the trouble items. At the same time, the system informs the driver of a malfunction via the "ABS" warning light in the combination meter. To identify the trouble by the number of blinks (diagnostic code) of the warning light turn on the ignition switch, disconnect the service connector, and use SST to connect Tc and E1 of the data link connector. In the event of two codes, that having the smallest number (code) will be identified first. HINT: The warning light does not show the diagnostic codes while the vehicle is running.
BRAKE · ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) · TROUBLESHOOTING
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p23 OEM manual
-
ABS TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE
Problem index: 'A6S' warning light — Always comes on after ignition switch is turned on (No.1); Does not come on for 3 seconds after ignition switch on (No.2); Comes on and off (No.3); Comes on while running (No.1). Brake condition — Brakes pull (No.4); Braking inefficient (No.4); ABS operates at ordinary braking (No.4); ABS operates just before stopping at ordinary braking (No.4); Brake pedal pulsates abnormally while ABS is operating (No.4); Skidding noise occurs while ABS operating — ABS operates inefficiently (No.5).
BRAKE · ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) · Diagnostic Flowchart
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p24 OEM manual
-
ECU CONNECTOR CHECK
Check if connector of ECU is properly connected and all terminals are in the connector. If NO: Faulty ECU connector.
-
POWER CIRCUIT VOLTAGE CHECK
Check if there is 10-16 V between terminal IG on ECU wire harness side connector and body ground with ignition switch on. If NO: Faulty power circuit.
-
WARNING LIGHT CHECK WITH CONNECTORS DISCONNECTED
Check if warning light goes off when both the ECU connector and service connector are disconnected with ignition switch on. If NO (comes on): Short circuit in wire harness between ECU terminal W and control relay Terminal W. If YES (goes off): Faulty ECU.
BRAKE · ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) · Diagnostic Flowchart 2
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p25 OEM manual
-
ABS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON FOR 3 SECONDS AFTER IGNITION SWITCH ON
Diagnostic flowchart for condition 2: ABS warning light does not come on for 3 seconds after ignition switch on. Step 1: Pull out the short pin and ground terminal W of the female side connector with ignition switch on. If warning light does NOT come on: bulb burned out or open circuit in wire harness between warning light and control relay terminal W. If YES: Disconnect connectors from ECU and control relay and ground terminal W of ECU wire harness side connector with ignition switch on. If warning light does NOT come on: open circuit in wire harness between ECU terminal W and warning light. If YES: With ignition switch off, disconnect control relay connectors and check continuity between terminal W and BS on actuator side. Reverse tester leads and check again. If there is NOT one-way continuity between terminals: short circuit in control relay inside diode. If YES (one-way continuity confirmed): Faulty ECU. HINT: If the diode is short-circuited, a malfunction at ECU terminal W will occur. When inspecting the terminal, connect the ECU connector, and disconnect actuator connectors and data link connector. Then turn the ignition switch on, and check that the warning light goes on. If it does, the ECU terminal is OK.
BRAKE · ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) · Diagnostic Flowchart — Symptom 3 & 4
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p26 OEM manual
-
ABS WARNING LIGHT COMES ON AND OFF (Symptom 3)
Check for short circuit in wire harness between terminal Te and E, of check connector.
-
BRAKES PULL / BRAKING INEFFICIENT / ABS OPERATES AT ORDINARY BRAKING (Symptom 4)
Symptoms include: Brakes pull; Braking inefficient; ABS operates at ordinary braking; ABS operates just before stopping at ordinary braking; Brake pedal pulsates abnormally while ABS is operating. Diagnostic flowchart: Pull out the short pin and connect terminals Tc and E of check connector (See page BR-53). If warning light does NOT show the diagnostic normal code (ignition switch on), see diagnostic code (See page BR-55). If YES, check that each speed sensor is installed in place and each installation bolt is tightened securely. If NO, speed sensor installation is faulty. If YES, try speed sensor diagnosis system — check if sensor signal level is OK (See page BR-62). If NO, inspect speed sensor and replace if necessary. If YES, try speed sensor diagnosis system — check if sensor signal change is OK (See page BR-62). If NO, inspect sensor rotor and replace if necessary. If YES, disconnect connector from ECU, inspect continuity between each speed sensor terminals on wire harness side (See page BR-66). If abnormal change occurs in continuity when connectors or wire harness of the speed sensor and intermediate connectors are twisted or bent, the wire harness is faulty. If no change, continued on page BR-61.
BRAKE · ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) · Diagnostic Flowchart
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p27 OEM manual
-
FOREIGN MATERIAL / FERRIC CHIPS CHECK
If there is foreign material or ferric chips on the sensor tip, clean chips from the speed sensor. If not, inspect the actuator operation (See page BR-66). If actuator operation is not OK, replace faulty actuator. If actuator operation is OK, replace ECU.
-
SYMPTOM 5 — ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM OPERATES INEFFICIENTLY
Pull out the short pin and connect terminals Tc and E1 of data link connector (See page BR-53). Check if warning light shows the diagnostic normal code with ignition switch on. If NO, see diagnostic code (See page BR-55). If YES, check for battery voltage between ECU terminal STP and body ground when depressing brake pedal. If NO, there is an open circuit in stop light switch and/or wire harness. If YES, inspect actuator (See page BR-66).
BRAKE · CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT · Brake Booster Operational Test
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p31 OEM manual
-
CHECK THAT PEDAL RESERVE DISTANCE IS CORRECT, AS SHOWN
Release the parking brake. With the engine running, depress the pedal and measure the pedal reserve distance, as shown. If the reserve distance is incorrect, troubleshoot the brake system.
BRAKE · DESCRIPTION
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p34 OEM manual
-
REPLACE PARTS PROPERLY
Care must be taken to replace each part properly as it could affect the performance of the brake system and result in a driving hazard. Replace the parts with parts of the same part number or equivalent.
-
KEEP PARTS AND AREA CLEAN
It is very important to keep parts and the area clean when repairing the brake system.
BRAKE · FRONT BRAKE · Cylinder Removal
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p37 OEM manual
-
INSTALL INSIDE PAD
Install inside pad with the pad wear indicator plate facing downward.
-
INSTALL OUTSIDE PAD
Install outside pad.
- There should be no oil grease adhering to the friction surfaces of the pads or the rotor disc.
-
INSTALL ANTI-SQUEAL SPRINGS
Install the two anti-squeal springs.
-
INSTALL CYLINDER
Draw out a small amount of brake fluid from the reservoir tank. Place a wooden plate on the piston, and press in the piston with a hammer handle or similar implement. HINT: If the piston is difficult to punch in, loosen the bleeder plug and push in the piston while letting some brake fluid escape. Temporarily install the cylinder on the torque plate with two installation bolts. Hold the sliding pin and torque the installation bolts.
-
INSTALL FRONT WHEEL
Install front wheel.
-
CHECK FLUID LEVEL
Check that fluid level is at MAX line.
BRAKE · FRONT BRAKE · Cylinder Disassembly
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p38 OEM manual
-
REMOVE FOLLOWING PARTS
Remove the following parts: (a) Two anti-squeal springs, (b) Two brake pads, (c) Four anti-squeal shims, (d) Pad wear indicator, (e) Two pad support plates.
BRAKE · FRONT BRAKE · Cylinder Removal
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p46 OEM manual
-
CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY — REMOVE FOLLOWING PARTS
Remove the following parts during cylinder disassembly: (a) Two sliding bushings, (b) Four dust boots.
-
REMOVE CYLINDER BOOT SET RING AND CYLINDER BOOT
Using a screwdriver, remove the cylinder boot set ring and cylinder boot.
BRAKE · FRONT BRAKE · Cylinder Assembly
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p48 OEM manual
-
REPLACE THE DISC IF NECESSARY
If rotor disc runout is not within specification, replace the disc following the procedure below.
BRAKE · GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p52 OEM manual
-
REPLACE PARTS PROPERLY
Care must be taken to replace each part properly as it could affect the performance of the brake system and result in a driving hazard. Replace the parts with parts of the same part number or equivalent.
-
KEEP PARTS AND AREA CLEAN
It is very important to keep parts and the area clean when repairing the brake system.
BRAKE · MASTER CYLINDER
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p55 OEM manual
-
MASTER CYLINDER COMPONENTS INSPECTION
HINT: Clean the disassembled parts with compressed air.
-
INSPECT CYLINDER BORE FOR RUST OR SCORING
-
INSPECT CYLINDER FOR WEAR OR DAMAGE
If necessary, clean or replace the cylinder.
BRAKE · OPERATION · FOOT BRAKE
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p58 OEM manual
-
FOOT BRAKE OPERATION
When the brake pedal is depressed, a vacuum builds up in the booster which amplifies the pedal force, pressing on the piston in the master cylinder. The piston raises the hydraulic pressure in the cylinder. This hydraulic pressure is then applied to each front brake cylinder and rear wheel cylinder (or rear brake cylinder), and acts to press the front brake pads and rear brake pads (or rear brake shoes) against the rotating rotor discs (or brake drums). The resulting friction converts the rotational energy to thermal energy, stopping the vehicle.
BRAKE · PREPARATION · SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p59 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
List of special service tools required for brake system service.
BRAKE · TROUBLESHOOTING
Brakes
RM285U_1993_brake · p76 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING PRIORITY TABLE
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · FRONT AXLE · DESCRIPTION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p1 OEM manual
-
FRONT AXLE DESCRIPTION
The wheel bearings are double-row angular ball bearings combined with the oil seals having small rolling resistance and are free from maintenance. There is no need for bearing grease maintenance or preload adjustment.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · FRONT AXLE · Hub Bearing Removal and Installation
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p6 OEM manual
-
FRONT AXLE HUB ASSEMBLY — INSTALL HUB BEARING
1. INSTALL HUB BEARING (a) Using SST, install a new axle hub bearing. SST 09608-30012 (09608-04070) (b) Using snap ring pliers, install the hole snap ring.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · FRONT AXLE · Front Axle Hub Installation
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p8 OEM manual
-
INSTALL HUB GREASE CAP
Using SST, install the hub grease cap. SST 09608–30012 (09608–04020), 09649–17010
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · FRONT AXLE
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p9 OEM manual
-
TORQUE STEERING KNUCKLE TO SHOCK ABSORBER
Torque the steering knuckle to the shock absorber.
-
INSTALL ROTOR DISC TO AXLE HUB
HINT: Before removing the rotor disc, place the matchmarks on the axle hub and rotor disc.
-
INSTALL DISC BRAKE CALIPER TO STEERING KNUCKLE
Install and torque the two bolts.
-
INSTALL FRONT WHEEL AND LOWER VEHICLE
Install front wheel and lower vehicle.
-
CHECK FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
See page SA-3.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · FRONT SUSPENSION · Ball Joint Removal / Inspection
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p13 OEM manual
-
BALL JOINT INSPECTION — INSPECT BALL JOINT FOR ROTATION
(a) Remove the ball joint. (b) Flip the ball joint stud back and forth 5 times as shown in the figure, before installing the nut. (c) Using a torque gauge, turn the nut continuously one turn each 2–4 seconds and take the torque reading on the fifth turn. If not within specification, replace the ball joint.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · FRONT SUSPENSION · DESCRIPTION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p15 OEM manual
-
FRONT SUSPENSION DESCRIPTION
The front suspension of the new model use MacPherson struts as in the previous model. The strut bar changed the cushion type into the bushing type. The basic construction and operation remain the same, but the suspension geometry and the bushings have been modified to improve stability and riding comfort.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · FRONT SUSPENSION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p19 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY — REMOVE DUST COVER AND NUT
(b) Remove the dust cover. (c) Using SST, hold the spring seat so that it will not turn, and remove the nut. SST 09729-22031. (d) Remove the suspension support, dust seal, spring seat, spring, insulators and bumper.
-
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION — INSTALL BUMPER COIL SPRING, SPRING SEAT AND DUST SEAL
(a) Using SST, compress the coil spring. SST 09727-00045, 09727-30020. (b) Install the bumper to the piston rod. (c) Align the coil spring end with the lower seat hollow and install. (d) Face the 'OUT' mark of the spring seat toward the outside of the vehicle, and install it. (e) Install the dust seal on the spring seat. (f) Install the suspension support.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · FRONT SUSPENSION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p23 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT STRUT BAR FROM LOWER ARM
Remove the two nuts and disconnect the strut bar from the lower arm.
-
REMOVE LOWER ARM
Remove the bolt and washer, then remove the lower arm from the body.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · FRONT SUSPENSION · PREPARATION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p25 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOL)
Special service tools required for front suspension service: 09610-20012 Pitman Arm Puller; 09720-00012 Shock Absorber Overhaul Tool Set (includes 09721-00071 Front Shock Absorber Ring Nut Wrench); 09727-00045 Arm Set; 09727-30020 Coil Spring Compressor; 09729-22031 Front Spring Upper Seat Holder.
-
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09025-00010 Small Torque Wrench.
-
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · FRONT SUSPENSION · Stabilizer Bar
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p27 OEM manual
-
REMOVE STABILIZER BAR FROM BODY
(a) Remove the nuts and bolts. (b) Remove the stabilizer bar with the brackets and cushion.
-
REMOVE STABILIZER BAR BRACKETS AND STABILIZER BAR CUSHIONS FROM STABILIZER BAR
Remove the stabilizer bar brackets and stabilizer bar cushions from the stabilizer bar.
-
INSPECT STABILIZER LINK
Rotate ball joint arm in all directions. If movement is not smooth and free, replace stabilizer link.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR AXLE · DESCRIPTION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p31 OEM manual
-
REAR AXLE DESCRIPTION
The rear axle also uses oil-sealed double-row angular ball bearings for wheel bearings as the front axle. The preload of the bearings can be determined only by tightening the axle hub nut at a specified torque, improving serviceability.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR AXLE · PREPARATION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p32 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
List of special service tools required for rear axle service procedures.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR AXLE
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p33 OEM manual
-
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09025-00010 Small Torque Wrench; 09905-00013 Snap Ring Pliers
-
EQUIPMENT
Dial indicator; Torque wrench
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR AXLE · Rear Axle Shaft and Carrier Installation
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p39 OEM manual
-
INSTALL DUST DEFLECTOR
Using SST and a hammer, drive in a new dust deflector to the rear axle carrier. SST 09316-60010 (09316-00010, 09316-00040)
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR AXLE · Rear Axle Shaft Bolt Replacement
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p41 OEM manual
-
STABILIZE SUSPENSION
Install the rear wheel and lower vehicle. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to allow the suspension to settle.
-
TIGHTEN BOLT AND NUT
Tighten the bolt and nut with the vehicle load applied onto the suspension.
-
CHECK REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Check rear wheel alignment. See page SA-3.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT (3S-GTE) · DESCRIPTION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p43 OEM manual
-
REAR DRIVE SHAFT (3S-GTE) DESCRIPTION
The drive shaft has a cross-groove type CVJ (Constant Velocity Joint) on the differential side and Rzeppa type CVJ on the wheel side. The LH shaft consists of a Cross-Groove Type CVJ on the differential side and a Rzeppa Type CVJ on the wheel side. The RH shaft consists of a Center Bearing and Cross-Groove Type CVJ on the differential side and a Rzeppa Type CVJ on the wheel side.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT(3S-GTE) · PREPARATION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p44 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
List of special service tools required for rear drive shaft service on 3S-GTE engine vehicles.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT(3S-GTE)
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p50 OEM manual
-
OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT — REMOVE OIL SEALS
Using SST, drive out the oil seals. SST 09308-00010
-
OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT — INSTALL NEW OIL SEAL (LH)
Using SST and hammer, tap in a new LH oil seal. SST 09223-15010
-
OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT — INSTALL NEW OIL SEAL (RH)
Using SST and hammer, tap in a new RH oil seal. SST 09316-60010 (09316-00010)
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT (3S-GTE)
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p52 OEM manual
-
INBOARD JOINT REASSEMBLY HINT
Should the joint become disassembled, reassemble it in the way shown.
-
SERVICE HINT — INBOARD JOINT REASSEMBLY
Steps for reassembling the inboard joint after disassembly.
-
ALIGN MATCHMARKS
Align the matchmarks placed before disassembly.
-
INSERT SPARK PLUG WRENCH
Insert the spark plug wrench into the inner race.
-
INSERT SIX BALLS
Lift the outer race and cage, and insert the six balls.
-
SEAT BALLS IN GROOVES
Jiggle the outer race and cage as shown to place the balls in their respective grooves.
-
LOWER OUTER RACE AND CAGE
Lower the outer race and cage so that they fit tightly with the inner race.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT (3S-GTE) · Assembly
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p55 OEM manual
-
INSTALL DUST COVER TO CENTER DRIVE SHAFT
Using a press, press in a new dust cover to the inboard joint.
-
INSTALL NEW SNAP RING
Using a snap ring expander, install a new snap ring.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT(3S-GTE)
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p58 OEM manual
-
ALIGN MATCHMARKS AND INSTALL INBOARD JOINT
Align the matchmarks placed before remove, and install the side gear shaft or center drive shaft and a new gasket to the inboard joint sub-assembly.
-
TEMPORARILY TIGHTEN HEXAGON BOLTS
Using SST, temporarily tighten the six hexagon bolts with three washers. SST 09923-00020
-
CHECK DRIVE SHAFT
Check to see that there is no play in the inboard joint and outboard joint. Check to see that the inboard slide smoothly in the thrust direction.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT (5S-FE) · Description
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p63 OEM manual
-
REAR DRIVE SHAFT (5S-FE) DESCRIPTION
The drive has a tripod type CVJ (Constant Velocity Joint) on the differential side and Rzeppa type CVJ on the wheel side. Both LH and RH rear drive shafts share this configuration.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT (5S-FE) · PREPARATION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p64 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
Special service tools required for rear drive shaft service on 5S-FE: 09316-60010 Transmission & Transfer Bearing Replacer (includes 09316-00010 Replacer Pipe); 09350-32014 TOYOTA Automatic Transmission Tool Set (includes 09351-32111 Side Bearing Race Replacer, 09351-32130 Handle, 09351-32150 Oil Seal Replacer); 09608-16041 Front Hub Bearing Adjusting Tool (includes 096008-02020 Bolt & Nut, 096008-02040 Retainer); 09950-00020 Bearing Remover — used for Center drive shaft dust cover.
-
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09905-00012 Snap Ring No. 1 Expander — For removing and installing snap ring.
-
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT (5S-FE) · Removal
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p67 OEM manual
-
AXLE BEARING PROTECTION NOTICE
The axle bearing could be damaged if it is subjected to the vehicle weight, such as when moving the vehicle with the drive shaft removed. Therefore, if it is absolutely necessary to place the vehicle weight on the axle bearing, first support it with SST.
-
ABS SENSOR ROTOR PROTECTION (w/ ABS)
After disconnecting the drive shaft from the axle hub, work carefully so as not to damage the sensor rotor serrations on the drive shaft.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT (5S-FE) · Oil Seal Replacement
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p69 OEM manual
-
ABS SENSOR ROTOR CAUTION
With ABS: Be careful not to damage the sensor rotor of the drive shaft.
-
REMOVE LH DRIVE SHAFT
Using a hammer and hub nut wrench or an equivalent, remove the LH drive shaft.
- Be careful not to damage the dust cover.
- Cover the hub nut wrench or an equivalent with cloth so as not to damage the transaxle body.
-
REMOVE RH DRIVE SHAFT
Using a hammer and brass bar, drive out the RH drive shaft.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT (5S-FE) · Disassembly
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p70 OEM manual
-
INSTALL LH OIL SEAL (A/T)
Using SST and hammer, tap in a new LH oil seal. SST 09350-32014 (09351-32111, 09351-32150). HINT: Coat the oil seal lip with MP grease.
-
INSTALL RH OIL SEAL (A/T)
Using SST and hammer, tap in a new RH oil seal. SST 09350-32014 (09351-32130, 09351-32150). HINT: Coat the oil seal lip with MP grease.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR DRIVE SHAFT (5S-FE) · Removal / Assembly
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p72 OEM manual
-
REMOVE DAMPER
Step 7 of rear drive shaft removal.
-
REMOVE OUTBOARD JOINT BOOT CLAMPS AND BOOT
Step 8 of rear drive shaft removal.
- Do not disassemble the outboard joint.
-
REMOVE DUST COVER
Step 9 of rear drive shaft removal. (a) LH Drive Shaft: Using SST and press, press out the dust cover from the inboard joint tulip. SST 09950-00020. (b) RH Drive Shaft: Using a press, press out the dust cover.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR SUSPENSION · Ball Joint
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p80 OEM manual
-
BALL JOINT INSPECTION — INSPECT BALL JOINT FOR ROTATION CONDITION
Flip the ball joint stud back and forth 5 times as shown in the figure, before installing the nut. Using a torque gauge, turn the nut continuously one turn each 2–4 seconds and take the torque reading on the fifth turn. Torque (turning): 1.47–2.94 N–m (15–30 kgf–cm, 13–26 in.–lbf). If not within specification, replace the ball joint.
-
BALL JOINT INSTALLATION — INSTALL BALL JOINT TO REAR AXLE CARRIER
Install the ball joint in place with the two bolts. Torque: 113 N–m (1,150 kgf–cm, 83 ft–lbf)
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR SUSPENSION · DESCRIPTION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p82 OEM manual
-
REAR SUSPENSION DESCRIPTION
The rear suspensions of the new model use MacPherson struts as in the previous model. The basic construction and operation remain the same, but the suspension geometry and bushing have been modified to improve stability and riding comfort.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR SUSPENSION · ENGINE LATERAL CONTROL ROD
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p84 OEM manual
-
REMOVE ENGINE LATERAL CONTROL ROD
(a) Remove the engine lateral control rod with the No.1 and No.2 brackets. (b) Remove the engine lateral control rod from the engine No.1 lateral control rod brackets.
-
DISASSEMBLY ENGINE LATERAL CONTROL ROD
Remove the following parts: Nut, Three retainers, Two cushions, No.2 bracket.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR SUSPENSION · Lower Arm Removal / Installation
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p86 OEM manual
-
REMOVE LOWER ARM
Step 4 of the preceding removal procedure: (a) Remove the bolt holding the lower arm to the body and remove the lower arm. (b) Remove the strut bar cushions, collar and retainer from the lower arm.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR SUSPENSION · Rear Shock Absorber Disassembly
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p91 OEM manual
-
REMOVE SHOCK ABSORBER
Remove the three suspension holding nuts. Remove the two upper bolts and remove the axle carrier assembly. Remove the shock absorber.
- Cover the drive shaft boot with cloth to avoid damaging it.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR SUSPENSION
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p97 OEM manual
-
INSPECT STABILIZER LINK
Rotate the ball joint arm in all directions, if the movement is not smooth and free, replace the stabilizer link.
-
INSTALL STABILIZER BAR
Install the cushions and brackets touching the line painted on the stabilizer bar. Install the stabilizer bar to the rear suspension crossmember and tighten the bracket bolts.
-
INSTALL SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER
Install the suspension crossmember in place, then install and tighten the four bolts.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · REAR SUSPENSION · Suspension Arm
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p103 OEM manual
-
SUSPENSION ARM DISASSEMBLY
Disassemble suspension arm by: (a) Loosen the tie rod adjusting tube two nuts. (b) Turn the tie rod adjusting tube, and remove the tie rod adjusting tube, and remove the tie rod end and the suspension arm No.2.
-
SUSPENSION ARM ASSEMBLY — INSTALL TIE ROD END AND SUSPENSION ARM NO. 2 TO TIE ROD TUBE
(a) Install the tie rod adjusting tube, tie rod adjusting tube nuts, tie rod end and rear suspension arm No. 2. (b) Adjust the rear suspension arm. (c) Temporarily tighten the tie rod adjusting tube nut. HINT: Fully tighten after adjusting the rear wheel alignment.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p109 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING PRIORITY TABLE
Use the table to find troubles easier. Each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts. Troubles covered: Wander/pulls, Bottoming, Sways/pitches, Front wheel shimmy, Abnormal tire wear. Parts checked: Tires, Cold tire inflation pressure, Wheel alignment, Springs, Stabilizer bar, Shock absorber, Ball joint, Hub bearings, Steering linkage, Steering gear, Suspension parts, Overloaded, Wheel balance.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · WHEEL ALIGNMENT · REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p112 OEM manual
-
TIE ROD LENGTH EQUALITY CHECK
If wheel angles differ from the standard specifications, check to see if the lengths of the left and right tie rods are the same. If the rod lengths are not equal, the wheel angle cannot be adjusted properly. If the tie rod lengths were changed to adjust the wheel angle, inspect the toe-in.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · WHEEL ALIGNMENT · REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Suspension & axle
RM285U_1993_suspension · p114 OEM manual
-
TIE ROD LENGTH EQUALITY CHECK
If wheel angles differ from the standard specifications, check to see if the lengths of the left and right tie rods are the same. If the rod lengths are not equal, the wheel angle cannot be adjusted properly. If the tie rod lengths were changed to adjust the wheel angle, inspect the toe-in.
CLUTCH · CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
Clutch
RM285U_1993_clutch · p2 OEM manual
-
MASTER CYLINDER INSPECTION
HINT: Clean the disassembled parts with compressed air.
-
INSPECT MASTER CYLINDER BORE FOR SCORING OR CORROSION
If a problem is found, clean or replace the cylinder.
-
INSPECT PISTON AND CUPS FOR WEAR, SCORING CRACKS OR SWELLING
If either one requires replacement, use the parts from the cylinder kit.
-
INSPECT PUSH ROD FOR WEAR OR DAMAGE
If necessary, replace the push rod.
CLUTCH · CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
Clutch
RM285U_1993_clutch · p3 OEM manual
-
MASTER CYLINDER INSTALLATION
Procedure for installing the clutch master cylinder assembly.
CLUTCH · CLUTCH PEDAL
Clutch
RM285U_1993_clutch · p5 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CONTINUITY OF CLUTCH START SWITCH
Check that there is continuity between terminals when the switch is ON (pushed). Check that there is no continuity between terminals when the switch is OFF (free). If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
CLUTCH · CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER · Removal & Disassembly
Clutch
RM285U_1993_clutch · p7 OEM manual
-
PULL OUT PUSH ROD
Pull out the push rod from the release cylinder.
-
REMOVE BOOT
Remove the boot from the release cylinder.
-
REMOVE PISTON
Using compressed air, remove the piston and spring from the cylinder.
CLUTCH · CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER
Clutch
RM285U_1993_clutch · p8 OEM manual
-
RELEASE CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
1. COAT PISTON WITH LITHIUM SOAP BASE GLYCOL GREASE, AS SHOWN. 2. INSTALL PISTON. 3. INSTALL BOOT AND INSERT PUSH ROD.
-
RELEASE CYLINDER INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL RELEASE CYLINDER. Torque: 12 N-m (120 kgf-cm, 9 ft-lbf). 2. INSTALL ENGINE FRONT MOUNTING BRACKET SET BOLTS. Torque: 77 N-m (790 kgf-cm, 57 ft-lbf). 3. REMOVE SUPPORTS FOR ENGINE AND TRANSAXLE.
CLUTCH · DESCRIPTION
Clutch
RM285U_1993_clutch · p16 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION
The diaphragm spring turnover type clutch providing lighter release performance.
CLUTCH · TROUBLESHOOTING
Clutch
RM285U_1993_clutch · p20 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE USAGE
You will find the cause of trouble more easily properly using the table shown below. In this table, the numbers indicate the priority of the probable cause of trouble. Check each part in the order shown. If necessary, repair or replace the part.
3S-GTE ENGINE · EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
Exhaust
RM285U_1993_3sgte_emission · p1 OEM manual
-
EGR SYSTEM OVERVIEW
To reduce NOx emissions, part of the exhaust gases is recirculated through the EGR valve to the intake manifold to lower the maximum combustion temperature.
-
EGR OPERATION — BELOW 54°C (129°F)
When coolant temperature is below 54°C (129°F), VSV is CLOSED. EGR Valve is CLOSED. Exhaust gas is not recirculated regardless of throttle valve position.
-
EGR OPERATION — ABOVE 60°C (140°F), THROTTLE ABOVE PORT E
When coolant temperature is above 60°C (140°F) and throttle valve is positioned above port E (condition 1): VSV is OPEN, pressure in EGR valve pressure chamber is condition (1), EGR vacuum modulator state is dash (not active), EGR valve is CLOSED, exhaust gas is not recirculated.
-
EGR OPERATION — ABOVE 60°C (140°F), THROTTLE BELOW PORT E
When coolant temperature is above 60°C (140°F) and throttle valve is positioned below port E (condition 2): VSV is OPEN, pressure in EGR valve pressure chamber is condition (2) (bullet present), EGR vacuum modulator CLOSED passage to atmosphere, EGR valve is OPEN, exhaust gas is recirculated (increase).
-
REMARK — THROTTLE ABOVE PORT E
When the throttle valve is positioned above the port E, the EGR vacuum modulator will close the atmosphere passage and open the EGR valve to increase the EGR gas, even if the exhaust pressure is insufficiently low.
3S-GTE ENGINE · EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · EGR Vacuum Modulator and Valve Inspection
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_emission · p4 OEM manual
-
EGR VALVE INSPECTION — REMOVE EGR VALVE
Steps to remove the EGR valve prior to inspection.
-
EGR VALVE INSPECTION — INSPECT EGR VALVE
Check for sticking and heavy carbon deposits. If a problem is found, replace the valve.
3S-GTE ENGINE · EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · TVS INSPECTION / JET INSPECTION
Emission control
RM285U_1993_3sgte_emission · p8 OEM manual
-
JET INSPECTION
1. REMOVE JET. 2. INSPECT JET: Blow air from each side of the jet, and check for stoppage. If operation is not as specified, replace the jet. 3. REINSTALL JET.
3S-GTE ENGINE · EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Layout and Schematic Drawing
Emission control
RM285U_1993_3sgte_emission · p9 OEM manual
-
LAYOUT AND SCHEMATIC DRAWING
Physical layout drawing showing the emission control components on the 3S-GTE engine including: VSV (for EGR), EGR Vacuum Modulator, EGR Valve, TVS (for EVAP), and Charcoal Canister. Schematic drawing showing the interconnection of: EGR Vacuum Modulator, EGR Valve, VSV (For EGR), IACV, Jet, BVSV (For EVAP), Charcoal Canister, Sub-TWC, Main TWC, and Oxygen Sensor.
3S-GTE ENGINE · EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Emission control
RM285U_1993_3sgte_emission · p11 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM PURPOSE
Lists emission control systems for the 3S-GTE engine: Positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) reduces blow-by gas (HC); Fuel evaporative emission control (EVAP) reduces evaporative HC; Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) reduces NOx; Three-way catalyst (TWC) reduces HC, CO and NOx; Electronic fuel injection (SMPI) regulates all engine conditions for reduction of exhaust emissions. For inspection and repair of the SMPI system, refer to SMPI Section.
3S-GTE ENGINE · EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Emission control
RM285U_1993_3sgte_emission · p13 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM PURPOSE
Lists emission control systems for the 3S-GTE engine: Positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) reduces blow-by gas (HC); Fuel evaporative emission control (EVAP) reduces evaporative HC; Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) reduces NOx; Three-way catalyst (TWC) reduces HC, CO and NOx; Electronic fuel injection (SMPI) regulates all engine conditions for reduction of exhaust emissions. For inspection and repair of the SMPI system, refer to SMPI Section.
3S-GTE ENGINE · EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · THREE-WAY CATALYST (TWC) SYSTEM
Emission control
RM285U_1993_3sgte_emission · p14 OEM manual
-
THREE-WAY CATALYST (TWC) SYSTEM OPERATION
To reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions, they are oxidized, reduced and converted to carbon dioxide (CO2), water (H2O) and nitrogen (N2) by the catalyst. Exhaust port emissions (CO, HC, NOx) pass through the Main TWC (oxidation and reduction), then the Sub-TWC (oxidation and reduction), resulting in exhaust gas of CO2, H2O, N2.
-
SUB-TWC INSPECTION — INSPECT FOR DENTS OR DAMAGE
If any part of protector is damaged or dented to the extent that it contacts the sub-TWC, repair or replace it.
3S-GTE ENGINE · EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Emission control
RM285U_1993_3sgte_emission · p29 OEM manual
-
EXHAUST PIPE REMOVAL ROUTING
The stabilizer bar and drive shaft will be in the way while removing the exhaust pipe. Follow directions according to illustration. Sequence: 1st — pull pipe clear of drive shaft; 2nd — clear stabilizer bar (pull); 3rd — clear stabilizer bar (pull).
FOREWORD
Introduction
smoke_aw11_1988_full · p1 OEM manual
-
FOREWORD
This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for the 1988 MR 2. Applicable model: AW11 series. The manual is divided into 21 sections and 5 appendixes with a thumb index for each section at the edge of the pages. All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. However, specifications and procedures are subject to change without notice.
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
smoke_aw11_1988_full · p3 OEM manual
-
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
See page IN-2
-
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
See page IN-4
-
GENERAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
See page IN-4
-
PRECAUTIONS FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH A CATALYTIC CONVERTER
See page IN-6
-
VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS
See page IN-7
-
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
See page IN-8
CHARGING SYSTEM · ALTERNATOR · Components for Disassembly and Assembly
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_charging · p7 OEM manual
-
COMPONENTS FOR DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY — 70 A Type
Exploded diagram of the 70 A Type alternator showing all components: Pulley, Drive End Frame (Stator), Front Bearing, Retainer, Rotor, Rear Bearing, Bearing Cover, Terminal Insulator, Brush Holder Cover, Brush Holder, Spring, Brush, Rear End Cover, IC Regulator, Rubber Insulator, Rectifier Holder, Rectifier End Frame.
-
COMPONENTS FOR DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY — 80 A or 90 A Type
Exploded diagram of the 80 A or 90 A Type alternator showing all components: Pulley, Drive End Frame (Stator), Front Bearing, Retainer, Rotor, Rear Bearing, Bearing Cover, Alternator Washer, Terminal Insulator, Brush Holder Cover, Plate Terminal, Rear End Cover, Brush Holder, Seal Plate, IC Regulator, Rubber Insulator, Rectifier Holder, Rectifier End Frame.
CHARGING SYSTEM · ALTERNATOR
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_charging · p14 OEM manual
-
REPLACE FRONT BEARING
Steps preceding the rear bearing inspection on this page cover front bearing replacement.
CHARGING SYSTEM · PRECAUTION
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_charging · p24 OEM manual
-
CHECK BATTERY CABLE CONNECTIONS
Check that the battery cables are connected to the correct terminals.
-
DISCONNECT BATTERY CABLES DURING QUICK CHARGE
Disconnect the battery cables when the battery is given a quick charge.
-
DO NOT USE HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTER
Do not perform tests with a high voltage insulation resistance tester.
-
NEVER DISCONNECT BATTERY WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING
Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running.
CHARGING SYSTEM · VEHICLE INSPECTION
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_charging · p26 OEM manual
-
NEW BELT DEFINITION
New belt refers to a belt which has been used less than 5 minutes on a running engine.
-
USED BELT DEFINITION
Used belt refers to a belt which has been used on a running engine for 5 minutes or more.
-
BELT INSTALLATION CHECK — RIBBED GROOVES
After installing a belt, check that it fits properly in the ribbed grooves.
-
BELT INSTALLATION CHECK — PULLEY GROOVE
Check with your hand to confirm that the belt has not slipped out of the groove on the bottom of the pulley.
-
POST-INSTALLATION TENSION RECHECK
After installing a new belt, run the engine for about 5 minutes and recheck the belt tension.
CHARGING SYSTEM · OPERATION
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_charging · p29 OEM manual
-
OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned ON, current from the battery flows from terminal L of the alternator through the IC regulator to terminal E, causing the discharge warning light to light up. Then when the engine is started, the voltage output increases as the alternator rpm increases. When the voltage output becomes greater than the battery voltage, current for recharging flows from terminal B. Simultaneously, voltage at terminal L increases and the potential difference between battery and terminal L disappears, causing the discharge warning light to go off. When the voltage output exceeds the regulator adjustment voltage, the transistor inside the IC regulator regulates the voltage so that the voltage from the alternator remains constant.
CHARGING SYSTEM · PRECAUTION
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_charging · p30 OEM manual
-
CHECK BATTERY CABLE CONNECTIONS
Check that the battery cables are connected to the correct terminals.
-
DISCONNECT BATTERY CABLES DURING QUICK CHARGE
Disconnect the battery cables when the battery is given a quick charge.
-
DO NOT USE HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTER
Do not perform tests with a high voltage insulation resistance tester.
-
NEVER DISCONNECT BATTERY WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING
Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · WIRING AND CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p2 OEM manual
-
WIRING AND CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS — AUDIO SYSTEM
Radio symbol: R. Radio-Tape Player Unit (built-in Power Amplifier, w/o Woofer) symbol: U. Diagram shows connections between Battery, Ignition Switch (CIG & RAD), Fuse DOME, Fuse ECU-IG, Antenna Motor Control Relay (w/ Auto Antenna), Radio or Radio Assembly connectors A and B, Front Speakers (RH/LH), Rear Speakers (RH/LH), Tweeters (RH/LH), Taillight Control Relay (ILL+, A-10), and Light Control Rheostat (ILL-, B-5, models except 2-Din Type Radio-Type Player Unit). The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p3 OEM manual
-
RADIO-TAPE PLAYER UNIT (BUILT-IN POWER AMPLIFIER, W/ WOOFER): SYMBOL U
Wiring diagram for the Radio-Tape Player Unit with built-in power amplifier and woofer (Symbol U). Shows connections between: Radio Assembly (Connector A and Connector B), Woofer Amplifier, Antenna Motor Control Relay, Front Speakers (RH/LH), Rear Speakers (RH/LH), Tweeters (RH/LH), and Woofer. Power sources include Fuse DOME, Fuse ECU-IG, Fuse TAIL, and Battery. Grounds at A-7 (GND). Illumination inputs ILL+ (A-10) from Fuse TAIL and ILL- (B-5) to Light Control Rheostat. The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p4 OEM manual
-
Radio-Tape Player Unit (separate Power Amplifier, w/ Woofer): Symbol P
Wiring diagram for Radio-Tape Player Unit with separate Power Amplifier and Woofer. Symbol P applies to this configuration.
-
Radio-Tape-CD Player Unit: Symbol C
Wiring diagram for Radio-Tape-CD Player Unit. Symbol C applies to this configuration.
-
POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT SIMPLIFIED NOTE
The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p5 OEM manual
-
RADIO WAVE BAND
The radio wave bands used in radio broadcasting are as follows: Frequency ranges from 30 kHz to 300 MHz. Designations: LF (Low Frequency), MF (Medium Frequency), HF (High Frequency), VHF (Very High Frequency). Radio waves: AM spans MF to HF range; FM spans VHF range. Modulation methods: AM uses Amplitude modulation; FM uses Frequency modulation.
-
SERVICE AREA
There is great difference in the size of the service area for AM, FM monaural, and FM stereo broadcasting. Thus it may happen that FM broadcast cannot be received even though AM comes in very clearly. Not only does FM stereo have the smallest service area, but it also picks up static and other types of interference ('noise') the most easily.
-
RECEPTION PROBLEMS — Fading
Besides electrical interference, AM broadcasts are also susceptible to other types of interference, especially at night. This is because AM radio waves bounce off the ionosphere at night. These radio waves then interfere with the signals from the same transmitter that reach the vehicle's antenna directly. This type of interference is called 'fading'.
-
RECEPTION PROBLEMS — Multipath
One type of interference caused by the bouncing of radio waves off of obstructions is called 'multipath'. Multipath occurs when a signal from the broadcast transmitter antenna bounces off of buildings and mountains and interferes with the signal that is received directly.
-
RECEPTION PROBLEMS — Fade Out
Because FM radio waves are of higher frequencies than AM radio waves, they bounce off of buildings, mountains, and other obstructions. For this reason, FM signals often seem to gradually disappear or fade away as the vehicle goes behind a building or other obstruction. This is called 'fade out'.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · COMPACT DISC PLAYER / MAINTENANCE
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p6 OEM manual
-
COMPACT DISC PLAYER — GENERAL
Compact Disc (hereafter called "CD") players use a laser beam pick-up to read the digital signals recorded on the CD and reproduce analog signals of the music, etc. There are 4.7 in. (12 cm) and 3.2 in. (8 cm) CD available.
- Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part of the player unit. Do not insert any object other than a disc into the slot.
- CD players use invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed. Be sure to operate the player correctly as instructed.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · HOW TO USE DIAGNOSTIC CHART
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p7 OEM manual
-
AUDIO SYSTEM TYPE AND SYMBOL USED
Confirm the applicable type of audio system. See page BE-158. Symbols used: [R] = w/o Tape Player, [S] = Radio-Tape Player (Separate), [U] = Radio-Tape Player Unit w/o CD Player, [C] = w/CD Player.
-
SYMBOL FOR TYPE OF AUDIO SYSTEM THE QUESTION APPLIES TO (marker 2)
Each question in the diagnostic chart is labeled with the audio system type symbol(s) it applies to. If the audio system type is not applicable, proceed to next question below.
-
JUNCTION WITHOUT BLACK CIRCLE (marker 3)
At a junction without a black circle, proceed to the next question below.
-
JUNCTION WITH BLACK CIRCLE (marker 4)
At a junction with a black circle, proceed to the question for the applicable audio system type.
-
SELECT QUESTION FOR APPLICABLE AUDIO SYSTEM TYPE (marker 5)
Select the question for the applicable audio system type at branching points labeled with system type symbols.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p8 OEM manual
-
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
The anti-theft system is only provided for audio systems equipped with an Acoustic Flavor function. The words 'ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM' are displayed on the cassette tape slot cover. For operation instructions for the anti-theft system, please consult the audio system section in the Owner's Manual.
-
SETTING SYSTEM
The system is in operation once the customer has pushed the required buttons and entered the customer-selected 3-digit ID number. (Refer to the Owner's Manual 'SETTING THE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM'). When the audio system is shipped the ID number has not been input, so the anti-theft system is not in operation. If the ID number has not been input, the audio system remains the same as a normal audio system.
-
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM OPERATION
If the normal electrical power source (connector or battery terminal) is cut off, the audio system becomes inoperable, even if the power supply resumes.
-
CANCELLING SYSTEM
The ID number chosen by the customer is input to cancel the anti-theft system. (Refer to the Owner's Manual 'IF THE SYSTEM IS ACTIVATED'). To change or cancel the ID number, please refer to the Owner's Manual 'CANCELLING THE SYSTEM'.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p9 OEM manual
-
ECU REPLACEMENT NOTICE
When replacing the internal mechanism (ECU part) of the audio system, be careful that no part of your body or clothing comes in contact with the terminals of the leads from the IC, etc. of the replacement part (spare part).
-
INSPECTION HINT
This inspection procedure is a simple troubleshooting which should be carried out on the vehicle during system operation and was prepared on the assumption of system component troubles (except for the wires and connectors, etc.).
-
OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT
Always inspect the trouble taking into consideration open or short circuit of the wire harness.
-
CONNECTOR OR TERMINAL CONNECTION FAULT
Always inspect the trouble taking into consideration connector or terminal connection fault.
-
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PRIORITY
For audio systems with anti-theft system, troubleshooting items marked (*) indicate that 'Troubleshooting for ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM' should be carried out first.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p13 OEM manual
-
Radio – NOISE PRESENT, BUT AM–FM NOT OPERATING
Diagnostic flowchart for condition where noise is present but AM-FM is not operating. Applies to [R]: Radio, [U]: Radio–Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier), [P]: Radio–Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). Step 1: Check if power for the antenna is being output from the radio or radio assembly. If No → Radio or radio assembly faulty. If Yes ([R][U]): proceed to check tape player. If Yes ([P]): Check if power for the antenna is being output from the power amplifier. If No → Power amplifier faulty. If Yes → Go to No. 23. If radio side faulty ([R][U]) → Radio or radio assembly faulty. Check if tape player is operating normally. If Yes → Radio or radio assembly faulty. If No → Check if hissing sound from speaker. If No → Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair. If Yes → Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair.
-
Radio – EITHER SPEAKER DOES NOT WORK
Diagnostic flowchart for condition where either speaker does not work. Applies to [R]: Radio, [U]: Radio–Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier), [P]: Radio–Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). [U][P]: Check if tape player is operating normally. If Yes → Radio assembly faulty. [R][U][P]: Check if hiss is produced by non-functioning speaker. If Yes → [R]: Radio faulty. [U]: Radio assembly faulty. [P]: Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair. If No → Check if there is continuity in speaker wire harness. If No → Speaker wire harness faulty. If Yes → Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? If Yes → Speaker faulty. If No → [R]: Radio faulty. [U]: Radio assembly faulty. [P]: Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · Tape Player Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p19 OEM manual
-
POWER COMING IN, BUT TAPE PLAYER NOT OPERATING
Diagnostic flowchart #10 for Tape Player. Applies to [U] Radio-Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier) and [P] Radio-Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). Flowchart logic: (1) Functions OK if different cassette tape inserted? Yes → Cassette tape faulty. No → (2) Is radio operating normally? Yes → Radio assembly faulty. No → (3) Is there continuity in speaker wire harness? No → Speaker wire harness faulty. Yes → (4) Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → [U] Radio assembly faulty. [P] → (5) Hissing sound from speaker? No → Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair. Yes → Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair.
-
EITHER SPEAKER DOES NOT WORK
Diagnostic flowchart #11 for Tape Player. Applies to [U] Radio-Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier) and [P] Radio-Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). Flowchart logic: (1) Is radio operating normally? Yes → Radio assembly faulty. No → (2) Is hiss produced by non-functioning speaker? Yes → [U] Radio assembly faulty. [P] Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair. No → (3) Is there continuity in speaker wire harness? No → Speaker wire harness faulty. Yes → (4) Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → [U] Radio assembly faulty. [P] Radio amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · Tape Player Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p20 OEM manual
-
SOUND QUALITY POOR (VOLUME PAINT) — Tape Player Diagnostic 12
Flowchart for diagnosing poor sound quality on tape player. [U]: Radio–Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier); [P]: Radio–Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). Step 1: Function OK if different cassette tape inserted? Yes → Cassette tape faulty. No → Step 2. Step 2: Operates normally after cleaning the heads? (See page BE-162) Yes → Head dirty. No → Step 3. Step 3: Is radio operating normally? Yes → Radio assembly faulty. No → Step 4. Step 4: Is speaker properly installed? No → Install properly. Yes → Step 5. Step 5: Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → U: Radio assembly faulty. P: Radio assembly or power amplifier faulty.
-
TAPE JAMMED, MALFUNCTION WITH TAPE SPEED OR AUTO-REVERSE — Tape Player Diagnostic 13
Flowchart for diagnosing tape jammed, malfunction with tape speed or auto-reverse. Step 1: Functions OK if different tape (less than 120 mins.) is inserted? Yes → Cassette tape faulty. No → Step 2. Step 2: Is there a foreign object inside tape player? Yes → Remove foreign object. No → Step 3. Step 3: Operates normally after cleaning the heads? (See page BE-162) Yes → Head dirty. No → Radio assembly faulty.
-
APS, SKIP, RPT BUTTONS NOT OPERATING — Tape Player Diagnostic 14
Flowchart for diagnosing APS, SKIP, RPT buttons not operating. Step 1: Functions OK if different cassette tape inserted? No → Radio assembly faulty. Yes → Cassette tape faulty. (Less than 3 secs. of silence between songs (APS, RPT). Less than 15 secs. of silence (SKIP).)
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · CD Player Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p22 OEM manual
-
CD CANNOT BE INSERTED
Diagnostic flowchart #16 for CD Player. If CD is already inserted, eject it. If auto search button of radio is operating normally, check if +B is applied to CD player; if No → Radio assembly faulty; if Yes → Check GND (wire harness side) to CD player; if NG → Radio assembly faulty; if OK → CD player faulty. If auto search button is NOT operating normally: Check if DOME fuse is OK; if NG → Replace fuse; if OK → Check if +B is applied to power amplifier; if No → +B wire harness faulty; if Yes → Check GND (wire harness side) to power amplifier; if NG → GND faulty; if OK → Check if +B is applied to radio assembly; if No → Power amplifier faulty; if Yes → Check GND (wire harness side) to radio assembly; if NG → Power amplifier faulty; if OK → Radio assembly faulty.
-
CD INSERTS, BUT NO POWER
Diagnostic flowchart #17 for CD Player. If radio is operating normally: Check if ACC is applied to CD player; if No → Radio assembly faulty; if Yes → CD player faulty. If radio is NOT operating normally: Check if CIG & RAD fuse is OK; if NG → Replace fuse; if OK → Check if ACC is applied to power amplifier; if No → ACC wire harness faulty; if Yes → Check if ACC is applied to radio assembly; if Yes → Radio assembly faulty; if No → Check if there is continuity in ACC wire harness between the radio assembly and the power amplifier; if No → ACC wire harness faulty; if Yes → Power amplifier faulty.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · CD Player Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p23 OEM manual
-
CD Player — POWER COMING IN, BUT CD PLAYER NOT OPERATING
Diagnostic flowchart #18: (1) Is CD inserted correct side up? No → Insert correctly. Yes → (2) Functions OK if different CD inserted? Yes → CD faulty. No → (3) Is radio operating normally? Yes → Is temperature inside cabin hot? Yes → Protective circuit in operation. No → Has sudden temperature change occurred inside cabin? Yes → Formation of condensation due to temp. change. No → CD player faulty. No (radio not operating) → (4) Is there continuity in speaker wire harness? No → Speaker wire harness faulty. Yes → (5) Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → (6) Hissing sound from speaker? No → Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair. Yes → Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair.
-
CD Player — SOUND JUMPS
Diagnostic flowchart #19: (1) Does sound jump only during strong vibration? Yes → Jumping caused by vibration. No → (2) Is CD player properly installed? No → Install properly. Yes → (3) Functions OK if different CD inserted? Yes → CD faulty. No → (4) Has sudden temperature change occurred inside cabin? Yes → Formation of condensation due to temp. change. No → CD player faulty.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · CD Player Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p24 OEM manual
-
CD Player — SOUND QUALITY POOR (VOLUME FAINT)
Diagnostic flowchart #20: (1) Functions OK if different CD inserted? Yes → CD faulty. No → (2) Is radio operating normally? Yes → CD player faulty. No → (3) Is speaker properly installed? No → Install properly. Yes → (4) Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → Radio assembly, CD player or power amplifier faulty.
-
CD Player — EITHER SPEAKER DOES NOT WORK
Diagnostic flowchart #21: (1) Is radio operating normally? Yes → CD player faulty. No → (2) Is hiss produced by non-functioning speaker? Yes → Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair. No → (3) Is there continuity in speaker wire harness? No → Speaker wire harness faulty. Yes → (4) Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · Antenna
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p26 OEM manual
-
ANTENNA-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC FLOWCHART [P]: Antenna w/o Motor
Is antenna extended? No → Extend fully. Yes → Temporarily install another antenna. Functions OK? Yes → Antenna faulty. No → Radio side faulty.
-
ANTENNA-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC FLOWCHART [M][D]: Motor Antenna and Glass Printed Antenna
Does antenna extend when radio switch ON? Yes → [M]: Temporarily install another antenna. Functions OK? Yes → Motor antenna faulty. No → Radio side faulty. [D]: Inspect glass printed antenna (See page BE-184). NG → Glass printed antenna faulty. OK → Temporarily install another antenna. Functions OK? Yes → Motor antenna faulty. No → Radio side faulty. No → Inspect antenna motor (See page BE-184). NG → Antenna motor faulty. OK → Inspect antenna control relay (Relay circuit) (See page BE-184). OK → Relay faulty. NG → Is power related to the antenna being input to the antenna motor control relay? Yes → Relay circuit faulty. No → Check continuity between antenna motor control relay and radio. NG → Wire harness faulty. OK → Radio side faulty.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · Noise Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p27 OEM manual
-
NOISE PRODUCED BY VIBRATION OR SHOCK WHILE DRIVING (Diagnostic 24)
Flowchart: 1) Is speaker properly installed? If No → Install properly. If Yes → 2) Is each system correctly installed? If No → Install properly. If Yes → 3) With vehicle stopped, lightly tap each system. Is noise produced? If Yes → Each system faulty. If No → Noise produced by static electricity accumulating in the vehicle body.
-
NOISE PRODUCED WHEN ENGINE STARTS (Diagnostic 25)
Flowchart: 1) Whistling noise which becomes high-pitched when accelerator strongly depressed, disappears shortly after engine stops → Yes: Alternator noise. No → 2) Whining noise occurs when A/C is operating → Yes: A/C noise. No → 3) Scratching noise occurs during sudden acceleration, driving on rough roads or when ignition switch is turned on → Yes: Fuel gauge noise. No → 4) Clicking sound heard when horn button is pressed, then released. Whirring/grating sound when pushed continuously → Yes: Horn noise. No → 5) Murmuring sound, stops when engine stops → Yes: Ignition noise. No → 6) Tick-tock noise, occurs in co-ordination with blinking of flasher → Yes: Turn signal noise. No → 7) Noise occurs during window washer operation → Yes: Washer noise. No → 8) Scratching noise occurs while engine is running, continues a while even after engine stops → Yes: Water temp. gauge noise. No → 9) Scraping noise in time with wiper beat → Yes: Wiper noise. No → Other type of noise.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · AUDIO SYSTEM · ANTENNA MOTOR / ANTENNA MOTOR CONTROL RELAY / GLASS PRINTED ANTENNA
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p28 OEM manual
-
ANTENNA MOTOR CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION — RELAY CIRCUIT
Disconnect the connector from the relay and inspect the connector on wire harness side as shown in the chart. If circuit is as specified, replace the relay.
-
GLASS PRINTED ANTENNA INSPECTION
Use same procedure as for 'INSPECT DEFOGGER WIRES' or page BE–87.
-
REPAIR GLASS PRINTED ANTENNA
Use same procedure as for 'REPAIR DEFOGGER WIRES' or page BE–87.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · BACK-UP LIGHT SYSTEM · PARTS LOCATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p29 OEM manual
-
BACK-UP LIGHT SYSTEM PARTS LOCATION
Diagram identifying the location of all back-up light system components on the Toyota MR2 SW20. Components identified: Park/Neutral Switch (A/T) — located at the gear selector/transmission area inside the cabin; Ignition Switch — located on the steering column; Relay Block No. 2 / ECU-IG Fuse — located in the rear luggage/trunk area; Back-Up Light (M/T) Switch — located on the transmission/underbody rear area; Back-Up Light — located at the rear of the vehicle (tail light cluster).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · BACK UP LIGHT–SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p31 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE USAGE
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · BACK-UP LIGHT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p32 OEM manual
-
PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION
See page AX-35.
-
IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION
See page BE-11.
-
IGNITION RELAY INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals. Constant condition: continuity between terminals 2 and 4 (coil), and between terminals 1 and 3. Apply battery voltage to terminals 1 and 3: continuity between terminals 4 and 5. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CLOCK · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p33 OEM manual
-
CLOCK TROUBLESHOOTING
As shown in the illustration, those are clock circuit and connector diagrams. Inspect each terminal for applicable trouble.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p36 OEM manual
-
COMBINATION METER WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram showing the combination meter circuits including Voltmeter (V), Fuel Gauge (F), Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge (E), Turbo Booster Pressure Gauge (B), and Tachometer (T). Also shows Turbo Boost Pressure Gauge Drive Circuit, Speedometer Circuit, Security Warning, Engine Oil Level Circuit, and all warning indicators and signal indicators. Connector terminals are listed for connectors A, B, and C with their respective wiring connector side connections.
-
CONNECTOR A TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS
A2: Airbag ECU; A3: Vehicle Speed Pulse Generator; A4: Door Courtesy Switch – terminal 2; A5: Fuse DOME; A6: Fuse ECU-B; A7: Seat Belt Warning Relay; A8: Fuel Sender Gauge – terminal 2; A9: Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch terminal 1 and Parking Brake Switch; A10: Cooling FAN ECU; A11: O/D OFF Switch; A12: Cruise Control ECU; A13: Fuel Sender Gauge – terminal 1.
-
CONNECTOR B TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS
B1: Ground; B2: Ignitor; B3: Turbo Pressure Sensor; B4: Fuse GAUGE; B5: Theft Deterrent ECU; B6: Ground; B7: Engine Oil Level ECU; B8: Taillight Control Relay; B9: Light Control Rheostat; B10: Speed Control Unit; B11: Starter Relay; B12: Turn Signal Switch; B13: Turn Signal Switch.
-
CONNECTOR C TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS
C1: Engine Coolant Temperature Sender Gauge; C2: Ground; C3: Low Oil Pressure Warning Switch; C4: Power Steering ECU; C5: Fog Light Switch; C6: Fuse IGN; C7: Alternator – terminal L; C8: Powertrain Control Module; C9: ABS ECU; C10: Headlight Dimmer Switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER · SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p37 OEM manual
-
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
Wiring diagram for the shift position indicator in the combination meter. Connector D is an 8-pin connector. Pins D1–D6 connect to range indicator lamps (P, R, N, D, 2, L ranges) via illumination bulbs. D7 connects to the common side of P through 2 range bulbs. D8 connects to the common side of the L range bulb circuit including a resistor and diode network. Connector D pin assignments: Pin 1 = Park/Neutral Switch, Pin 2 = Park/Neutral Switch, Pin 3 = Park/Neutral Switch, Pin 4 = Park/Neutral Switch, Pin 5 = Park/Neutral Switch, Pin 6 = Park/Neutral Switch, Pin 7 = Ground, Pin 8 = TAIL Fuse.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p38 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
-
NOTE *1
Refer to BE-68 inspect the meter circuit plate.
-
NOTE *2
Inspect the speedometer driven gear and drive gear or try another speedometer.
-
NOTE *3
Inspect the B4 terminal.
-
NOTE *4
Refer to BE-68 inspect the meter circuit plate or try another tachometer.
-
NOTE *5
Refer to BE-13 inspect the 'Taillight System'.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER · WARNING LIGHTS AND WARNING CHIME
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p39 OEM manual
-
WARNING LIGHTS AND WARNING CHIME — DIAGNOSTIC MATRIX
Troubleshooting matrix for warning lights that do not light up. Each trouble condition lists numbered inspection priorities across the following components: GAUGE Fuse, IG2 Fuse, ECU-B Fuse, DOME Fuse, Low Oil Pressure Warning Switch (BE-78), Fuel Level Warning Switch (BE-75), Engine Oil Level Sensor (BE-77), Engine Oil Level ECU (BE-77), Light Control Rheostat (BE-83), Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch (BE-79), Parking Brake Switch (BE-79), Door Courtesy Switch (BE-49), Combination Meter Wiring Circuit (BE-68), Bulb, Wire Harness, Other Parts. Inspection order (1=first, highest number=last) per trouble row: (1) Warning lights do not light up (Except Discharge, Airbag Door): GAUGE Fuse=1, Combination Meter Wiring Circuit=2(*1), Wire Harness=3. (2) Low oil pressure warning light does not light up: Low Oil Pressure Warning Switch=3, Combination Meter Wiring Circuit=2(*2), Bulb=1, Wire Harness=4. (3) Fuel level warning light does not light up: Fuel Level Warning Switch=3, Combination Meter Wiring Circuit=2(*3), Bulb=1, Wire Harness=4. (4) ABS Warning light does not light up: Bulb=1, Wire Harness=3, Other Parts=2(**4). (5) Check engine warning light does not light up: Bulb=1, Wire Harness=3, Other Parts=2(**). (6) Seat belt warning light does not light up: Bulb=1, Wire Harness=2. (7) Discharge warning light does not light up: IG2 Fuse=1, Bulb=2, Wire Harness=3, Other Parts=4(**). (8) Engine oil level warning light does not light up: Engine Oil Level Sensor=2, Engine Oil Level ECU=3, Bulb=1, Wire Harness=4. (9) Meter illumination lights do not light up: Light Control Rheostat=1, Bulb=2, Wire Harness=3. (10) Brake warning light does not light up: Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch=4, Parking Brake Switch=3, Combination Meter Wiring Circuit=2(**), Bulb=1, Wire Harness=6, Other Parts=5(**). (11) Airbag warning light does not light up: ECU-B Fuse=1, Bulb=2, Wire Harness=3, Other Parts=4(**10). (12) Open door warning light does not light up: DOME Fuse=1, Door Courtesy Switch=4, Combination Meter Wiring Circuit=3, Bulb=2, Wire Harness=5. Footnotes: *1=Inspect B4 terminal, *2=Inspect C3 terminal, *3=Inspect A8 terminal, *4=Inspect ABS ECU, *5=Inspect Powertrain Control Module, *6=Inspect Bulb Check Relay and Alternator, *7=Inspect the 'Taillight System', 'Stop Light System', *8=Inspect A9 terminal, *9=Inspect Bulb Check Relay, *10=Inspect Airbag ECU.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER · INDICATOR LIGHTS
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p40 OEM manual
-
INSPECT TERMINAL A11
*1 Inspect Terminal A11.
-
INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL ECU
*2 Inspect Cruise Control ECU.
-
INSPECT C10 AND B1 TERMINAL
*3 Inspect C10 and B1 terminal.
-
INSPECT HEADLIGHT SYSTEM
*4 Inspect "Headlight System".
-
INSPECT B12, B13 AND B1 TERMINAL
*5 Inspect B12, B13 and B1 terminal.
-
INSPECT TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM
*6 Inspect "Turn Signal and Hazard Warning System".
-
INSPECT TERMINAL 13 AND 1
*7 Inspect terminal 13 and 1.
-
INSPECT TERMINAL 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 AND 8
*8 Inspect terminal 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.
-
INSPECT TERMINAL 4, 5, 6 AND 8
*9 Inspect terminal 4, 5, 6 and 8.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER · SPEEDOMETER SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p41 OEM manual
-
INSPECT SPEEDOMETER (ON-VEHICLE)
Using a speedometer tester, inspect the speedometer for allowable indication error and check the operation of the odometer. Check the speedometer for pointer vibration and abnormal noise. If error is excessive, replace the speedometer.
-
TIRE WEAR AND INFLATION NOTE
The wear and tire over or under inflation will increase the indication error.
-
POINTER VIBRATION HINT
Pointer vibration can be caused by a loose speedometer cable.
-
VEHICLE SPEED PULSE GENERATOR VOLTAGE HINT
The voltage change should be 4 times per each revolution of the vehicle speed pulse generator shaft. If operation is not as specified, replace the generator.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER · BE-74
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p42 OEM manual
-
VOLTMETER INSPECTION — INSPECT VOLTMETER (ON-VEHICLE)
Compare the tester and voltmeter indications. If error is excessive, replace the voltmeter.
-
FUEL RECEIVER GAUGE INSPECTION — OPERATION
Disconnect the connector from the sender gauge. Turn the ignition switch ON, check that the receiver gauge needle indicates EMPTY. Connect terminals 1 and 3 on the wire harness side connector through a 3.4 W test bulb. Turn the ignition switch ON, check that the bulb lights up and receiver gauge needle moves toward the full side. HINT: Because of the silicon oil in the gauge, it will take a short time for the needle to stabilize. If operation is not as specified, inspect the receiver gauge resistance.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER · Fuel Level Warning System
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p43 OEM manual
-
RESISTANCE — RECEIVER GAUGE
Measure the resistance between terminals A–B, A–C, and B–C. If resistance value is not as specified, replace the receiver gauge.
-
FUEL SENDER GAUGE INSPECTION OPERATION
Connect a series of three 1.5V dry cell batteries. Connect the positive W lead from the dry cell batteries to terminal 1 through a 3.4 W test bulb and the negative H lead to terminal 3. Check that the voltage rises between terminals 1 and 3 as the float is moved from the top to bottom position.
-
RESISTANCE — FUEL SENDER GAUGE
Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 3 for each float position. If resistance value is not as specified, replace the sender gauge.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER · Warning Systems
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p46 OEM manual
-
RELAY CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Disconnect the connectors from the engine oil level ECU and engine oil level sensor. Inspect the connectors on the wire harness side as shown in the chart. If circuit is as specified, replace the engine oil level ECU.
-
LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION
Inspect the low oil pressure warning switch: (a) Check that there is continuity between terminal and ground with the engine stopped. (b) Check that there is no continuity between terminal and ground with the engine running. HINT: Oil pressure should be over 49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2, 7.1 psi). If operation is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
BRAKE WARNING LIGHT INSPECTION
Inspect the brake warning light: (a) Disconnect the connectors from the brake fluid level warning switch and parking brake switch. (b) Connect terminals on the wire harness side of the level warning switch connector. (e) Turn the ignition switch ON, check that the warning light lights up. If the warning light does not light up, test the bulb.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p47 OEM manual
-
INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
(a) Check that there is continuity between terminals with the switch ON (switch pin released). (b) Check that there is no continuity between terminals with the switch OFF (switch pin pushed in).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · COMBINATION METER · Seat Belt Level Warning Light Inspection
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p48 OEM manual
-
BUCKLE SWITCH INSPECTION — INSPECT BUCKLE SWITCH
Check that there is continuity between terminals on the switch side connector with the switch ON (belt fastened). Check that there is no continuity between terminals on the switch side connector with the switch OFF (belt unfastened). If operation is not as specified, replace the seat belt inner.
-
SEAT BELT WARNING RELAY INSPECTION — RELAY CIRCUIT
Disconnect connector and inspect connector on wire harness side as shown in the chart. If circuit is as specified, replace the relay.
-
DOOR COURTESY SWITCH INSPECTION
See Interior Light System on page BE–49.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM · PARTS LOCATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p52 OEM manual
-
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM PARTS LOCATION
Diagram identifying the location of all cruise control system components including: Combination Meter (Cruise Control Indicator), Control Switch, Cruise Control ECU, Parking Brake Switch, Stop Light Switch, Clutch Switch, Throttle Position Sensor, Vehicle Speed Pulse Generator, Actuator, Check Connector, Park/Neutral Switch (A/T).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM · CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p55 OEM manual
-
CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS — CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Connector pin-layout diagrams for all cruise control system components: Cruise Control Switch (USA: e-6-1-C; Canada: V-34-2 Connector A and Connector B), Stop Light Switch (BE5656), Clutch Switch M/T (G-2-2), Parking Brake Switch (BE1412), Park/Neutral Switch A/T (SH-9-2-A), Cruise Control ECU (Vd-26-2-B), Actuator (Ie-7-2), Starter Relay (ST0280), Throttle Position Sensor 3-Pin Type and 4-Pin Type (AC2241), Vehicle Speed Pulse Generator M/T (N04050) and A/T (N04051).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM · SYSTEM DESCRIPTION / BASIC OPERATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p56 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION — IGNITION SWITCH ON
When the ignition switch is turned ON, current flows from the battery to terminal 14 of the cruise control (CC) ECU.
-
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION — GROUND
Terminal 13 of the CC ECU is always grounded.
-
BASIC OPERATION HINT
For all explanations below, the ignition switch is in the ON position.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION — OVERVIEW
The CC switch controls MAIN switch, SET/COAST, RESUME/ACCEL and CANCEL functions.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION (USA) — MAIN SWITCH
When the main switch is pushed ON, current flows from terminal 4 of the CC ECU – terminal 5 of the control switch – terminal 3 of the switch – ground. As a result, the CC ECU is on standby and terminal 5 of the CC ECU is grounded. Therefore the CC indicator lights up.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION (USA) — SET/COAST, RESUME/ACCEL AND CANCEL SWITCH
The control switch controls the SET, COAST, RESUME, ACCEL and CANCEL functions. When the control switch is turned to each position, current flows from terminal 18 of the CC ECU – terminal 4 of the control switch → (each resistance) → terminal 3 of the switch → ground. In this way, the CC ECU detects each position the control switch is turned to, and starts operation. HINT: The SET function is detected by the CC ECU when the control switch is released from SET/COAST.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION (CANADA) — MAIN SWITCH
When the main switch is pushed ON, current flows from terminal 4 of the CC ECU → terminal 15 of the control switch → terminal 19 of the switch → ground. As a result, the CC ECU is on standby and terminal 5 of the CC ECU is grounded. Therefore the CC indicator lights up.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION (CANADA) — SET/COAST SWITCH
When the control switch is turned to SET/COAST position, the current flows from terminal 19 of the CC ECU → terminal 5 of the CC switch → terminal 19 of the CC switch → ground.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION (CANADA) — RESUME/ACCEL SWITCH
When the control switch is turned to RESIACC position, the current flows from terminal 18 of the CC ECU → terminal 17 of the CC switch → terminal 19 of the CC switch → ground.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION (CANADA) — CANCEL SWITCH
When the control switch is turned to CANCEL position, the current flows from terminal 17 of the CC ECU → terminal 11 of the CC switch → terminal 19 of the CC switch → ground.
-
SPEED CONTROL OPERATION — VEHICLE SPEED SET
When the vehicle speed is set by the control switch, the ECU sends signal from terminal 10 → terminal 2 of the stop light switch → terminal 4 of the switch → terminal 5 of the actuator → (safety magnetic clutch) – terminal 4 of the actuator → ground.
-
SPEED CONTROL OPERATION — SPEED BELOW SET SPEED
When the actual vehicle speed drops below the set speed, the CC ECU sends a signal (voltage) from terminal 12 → terminal 6 of actuator → (motor) → terminal 7 of actuator → terminal 11 of CC ECU. This causes the motor to rotate the actuator arm in the throttle opening direction, increasing the vehicle speed. Then, when the arm reaches the prescribed angle, the CC ECU detects this at terminal 25 and stops the signal from 12.
-
SPEED CONTROL OPERATION — SPEED ABOVE SET SPEED
When the actual vehicle speed rises above the set speed, the CC ECU sends a signal from terminal 11, turning the motor in the opposite direction so that the vehicle speed is reduced.
-
SPEED CONTROL OPERATION — POSITION SENSOR
The CC ECU sends approx. 5 V from terminal 24 → terminal 1 of the actuator → (position sensor) → terminal 3 of the actuator → terminal 26 of the CC ECU. When this occurs, the position sensor sends the position of the actuator arm as a signal (voltage) from terminal 2 of the actuator to terminal 25 of the CC ECU.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM · MANUAL CANCEL OPERATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p57 OEM manual
-
Speed Control Switch (CANCEL)
When the control switch is turned to CANCEL position, cruise control is cancelled.
-
Parking Brake Switch
When the parking brake lever is pulled, the parking brake switch is turned ON and sends a cancellation signal (ground voltage) to terminal 3 of the CC ECU.
-
Park/Neutral Switch (A/T)
When the shift lever is set to 'N' or 'P' range, the park/neutral switch is turned ON and sends a cancellation signal (ground voltage) to terminal 2 of the CC ECU.
-
Clutch Switch (M/T)
When the clutch pedal is depressed, the clutch switch is turned ON and sends a cancellation signal (ground voltage) to terminal 2 of the CC ECU.
-
Stop Light Switch
When the brake pedal is depressed, SW B of the stop light switch is turned OFF, the safety magnetic clutch (in actuator) is released, and SW A of the stop light switch is turned ON and sends a cancellation signal (battery voltage) to terminal 16 of the CC ECU. When the CC ECU detects any of the above signals, it stops output of signals to the actuator, and cancels cruise control.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p59 OEM manual
-
INDICATION CODES APPEAR IN ORDER FROM No. 11
Indication codes appear in order from No. 11.
-
NO INDICATION CODE — PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING
If there is no indication code, perform troubleshooting and inspection. (See page BE–124).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p61 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the source of the trouble more easily be properly using the table shown below. In this table, the numbers indicate the order of priority of the causes of trouble. Check each part in the order shown.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM · Diagnostic Procedures O & P
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p78 OEM manual
-
ECT SOLENOID No. 2 CIRCUIT (with A/T)
Diagnostic procedure for ECT Solenoid No. 2 Circuit in the cruise control system with automatic transmission. Step 1: INSPECT ECT SYSTEM — Is ECT system normal? If No: Repair ECT system. Then recheck system. If Yes: Disconnect connector from CC ECU and inspect connector on wire harness side as follows. Step 2: INSPECT No. 2 SOLENOID CIRCUIT — Is there approx. 13Ω between terminal 22 and ground? If No: Open or short circuit in wire harness between terminal 22 of CC ECU and No. 2 solenoid. If Yes: Replace CC ECU. Then recheck system.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM · Cruise Control Switch / Parking Brake Switch / Stop Light Switch
Brakes
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p82 OEM manual
-
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION
See Brake Warning System on page BE-79.
-
STOP LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2. Switch pin free (Brake pedal depressed): Continuity. Switch pin pushed in (Brake pedal released): No continuity. If continuity is not as specified, replace the stop light switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM · Component Inspections
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p83 OEM manual
-
PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION
See page AX-35.
-
STARTER RELAY INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals as follows: Constant condition — continuity between terminals 1 and 2 (coil, shown with resistor symbol) and between terminals 3 and ... (open). Apply battery voltage to terminals 1 and 3 — continuity between terminals 2 and 4. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
INSPECT VEHICLE SPEED PULSE GENERATOR
Connect the positive (+) lead from battery to terminal 1 and negative (–) lead to terminal 2. Connect the positive (+) lead from tester to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 2. Revolve shaft. Check that there is voltage change from approx. 0V to 11V or more between terminal 3 and 2. HINT: The voltage change should be 4 times per each revolution of the vehicle speed pulse generator shaft. If operation is not as specified, replace the generator.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM · Position Sensor / Cruise Control Cable / Throttle Position Sensor
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p85 OEM manual
-
POSITION SENSOR
Inspection of the cruise control actuator position sensor.
-
CRUISE CONTROL CABLE
Inspection and adjustment of the cruise control cable freeplay.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · DEFOGGER SYSTEM · Parts Location / Wiring and Connector Diagram
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p86 OEM manual
-
DEFOGGER SYSTEM PARTS LOCATION
The defogger system consists of the following components: A/C Control Assembly (Defogger Switch) located at the dashboard, Rear Window Glass (Rear Window Defogger Wire) at the rear of the vehicle, Relay Block No. 1 (Defogger Relay) located at the front left of the cabin, and the Ignition Switch located on the steering column.
-
WIRING AND CONNECTOR DIAGRAM
The defogger circuit runs from Battery through Ignition Switch (IG1, GAUGE terminals), through the Defogger Switch (in A/C Control Assembly) at connector pins 10, 11, and 15, through the Defogger Relay (pins 1, 2, 3, 5) to the Rear Window Defogger Wire. The DEFOG signal is taken from the defogger switch. The Defogger Switch connector (in A/C Control Assembly) is an 8-18-2 type connector with pins labeled 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 (top row) and 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9 (bottom row). The Defogger Relay has terminals numbered 1, 2, 3, 5. The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · DEFOGGER SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p87 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · DEFOGGER SYSTEM · ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p88 OEM manual
-
DEFOGGER IDLE-UP SYSTEM INSPECTION
Set the defogger switch ON, check that the engine revolutions increase.
-
DEFOGGER RELAY INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check relay continuity: Terminals 1 and 2 must have continuity (through coil) under constant condition. When battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2, continuity must exist between terminals 3 and 5. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · DEFOGGER SYSTEM · DEFOGGER WIRE INSPECTION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p89 OEM manual
-
CLEAN GLASS WITH SOFT DRY CLOTH
When cleaning the glass, use a soft, dry cloth, and wipe the glass in the direction of the wire. Take care not to damage the wires.
-
DO NOT USE ABRASIVE CLEANERS
Do not use detergents or glass cleaners with abrasive ingredients.
-
USE TIN FOIL FOR VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
When measuring voltage, wind a piece of tin foil around the top of the negative probe and press the foil against the wire with your finger as shown.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · FRONT FOG LIGHT SYSTEM · PARTS LOCATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p91 OEM manual
-
FRONT FOG LIGHT SYSTEM PARTS LOCATION
Diagram identifying the location of front fog light system components including: Fog Light (front of vehicle), Relay Block No. 5 (containing Front Fog Light Relay, Headlight Control Relay, FR Fog Fuse), Light Retractor Relay, Ignition Switch, Door Courtesy Switch, Light Control Switch (dashboard), and Front Fog Light Switch (center console/dashboard area).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · FRONT FOG LIGHT SYSTEM · CANADA
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p93 OEM manual
-
FRONT FOG LIGHT SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM (CANADA)
Wiring diagram for the Canada-specification Front Fog Light System showing connections between: Ignition Switch (GAUGE, G1), Front Fog Light Relay (terminals 1, 2, 3, 5), Light Retractor Relay (connectors A and B), Front Fog Light Switch (terminals 1, 2), Door Courtesy Switch (Driver's and Passenger's), Battery, RTR relay, Headlight Dimmer Switch (FLASH, LO, HI; connectors A12, A3, A14), Light Control Switch (OFF, HOLD, TAIL, HEAD; connectors A13, B20, A2, A11), and connections to Headlight Control Relay, Headlights, and Panel Relay. Connector references: Light Control Switch/Headlight Dimmer Switch — Connector A (V-34-2), Connector B (V-34-2); Front Fog Light Relay (BE4049) terminals 1, 2, 3, 5; Front Fog Light Switch (BE4707) terminals 5, 4, 2, 1; Light Retractor Relay — Connector A (a-6-2-A), Connector B (a-18-2-A). The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · FRONT FOG LIGHT SYSTEM · DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p94 OEM manual
-
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system is activated when engine is started. However, if the parking brake lever is engaged when the engine is started, the DRL will not light up after the engine has started. Once the parking brake is released, the DRL will then light up and will remain on regardless of operation of the parking brake lever. The DRL remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.
-
POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT NOTE
The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · FRONT FOG LIGHT SYSTEM · OPERATION EXAMPLE (CURRENT FLOW TABLE)
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p95 OEM manual
-
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LIGHTS UP
Switch positions required: Ignition Switch = *ON (with Engine Running), Light Control Switch = OFF, Headlight Dimmer Switch = LO or HI, *Door Courtesy Switch = ON. Condition: Battery voltage → ①, Battery voltage → ② → ③, Battery voltage → ④. Continuity: ⑤ → Ground. Circuit path: Battery → ⑥ [Front Fog Light Circuit] → Front Fog Light Relay (coil ⑦→⑧→⑤→Ground; relay coil ⑨→Ground).
-
FRONT FOG LIGHT LIGHTS UP
Switch positions required: Ignition Switch = OFF or ON, Light Control Switch = HEAD, Headlight Dimmer Switch = LO, *Door Courtesy Switch = ON, Front Fog Light Switch = ON. Condition: Battery voltage → ①, Battery voltage → ② → ③, Battery voltage → ④. Continuity: ⑤ → Ground; ⑫ → ⑬ → ⑭ → Ground; ⑮ → ⑯ → ⑰ → Ground; ⑩ → ⑪ → Ground. Circuit path: Battery → ⑥ [Front Fog Light Circuit] → Front Fog Light Relay (coil ⑦→⑧→⑤→Ground; relay coil ⑨→Ground).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · FRONT FOG LIGHT SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p96 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the cause of troubles more easily using the table shown below. In this table, the numbers indicate the order priority of the causes in trouble. Check each part in the order shown. If necessary, replace the parts.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · Operation Example (Current Flow Table)
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p97 OEM manual
-
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LIGHTS UP
Condition for daytime running lights: Ignition Switch *ON, Light Control Switch OFF, Headlight Dimmer Switch LO or HI, *1 Door Courtesy Switch ON, with Engine Running. Battery voltage → ①, Battery voltage → ② → ③, Battery voltage → ④. Continuity: ⑤ → Ground. Taillight Control Relay: Battery < Taillight Circuit > → ⑥ → [relay coil] → ⑦ → ⑨ → ⑤ → Ground, relay coil → ⑧ → Ground. Headlight Control Relay: < Headlight Circuit > → ⑩ → [relay coil] → ⑪ → ⑫ → ⑤ → Ground, relay coil → ⑭ → ⑮ → ⑯ → Ground.
-
TAILLIGHT LIGHTS UP
Condition for taillight: Ignition Switch OFF* or ON (* with Engine Running), Light Control Switch TAIL, Headlight Dimmer Switch LO or HI, *1 Door Courtesy Switch ON. Battery voltage → ①, *(Battery voltage → ② → ③, Battery voltage → ④). Continuity: ⑤ → Ground. Taillight Control Relay: Battery < Taillight Circuit > → ⑥ → [relay coil] → ⑦ → ⑨ → ⑱ → ⑲ → Ground, relay coil → ⑧ → Ground. < Headlight Circuit > refer to 1 above.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · GENERAL INFORMATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p99 OEM manual
-
WIRING COLOR CODE
Wire colors are indicated by an alphabetical code. B = Black, L = Blue, R = Red, BR = Brown, LG = Light Green, V = Violet, G = Green, O = Orange, W = White, GR = Gray, P = Pink, Y = Yellow. The first letter indicates the basic wire color and the second letter indicates the color of the stripe.
-
PIN NUMBER OF FEMALE CONNECTOR
Numbered in order from upper left to lower right.
-
PIN NUMBER OF MALE CONNECTOR
Numbered in order from upper right to lower left. HINT: When connectors with different or the same number of terminals are used with the same parts, each connector name (letter of the alphabet) and pin number is specified. e.g. A7 = No. 7 pin of connector 'A'.
-
DISTINCTION OF MALE AND FEMALE CONNECTORS
Male and female connectors are distinguished by shape of their internal pins. (a) All connectors are shown from the open end, and the lock is on top. (b) To pull apart the connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires. HINT: Check to see what kind of connector you are disconnecting before pulling apart.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · GENERAL INFORMATION · REPLACEMENT OF FUSE
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p100 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT OF FUSE — HINT
If replacing the fuse, be sure to replace it with a fuse with an equal amperage rating.
-
TURN OFF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS BEFORE REPLACING FUSE
Turn off all electrical components and the ignition switch before replacing a fuse. Do not exceed the fuse amperage rating.
-
ALWAYS USE A FUSE PULLER
Always use a fuse puller for removing and inserting a fuse. Remove and insert straight in and out without twisting. Twisting could force open the terminals too much, resulting in a bad connection. If a fuse continues to blow, a short circuit is indicated. The system must be checked by a qualified technician.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · GENERAL INFORMATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p101 OEM manual
-
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE
Establish conditions in which voltage is present at the check point, then use a voltmeter (or test bulb) with the negative (–) lead connected to a good ground point or negative (–) battery terminal and the positive (+) lead to the connector or component terminal.
-
CHECK FOR CONTINUITY AND RESISTANCE
Disconnect the battery terminal or wire so there is no voltage between the check points, then contact the two leads of an ohmmeter to each of the check points. If the circuit has diodes, reverse the two leads and check again. When contacting the negative(–) lead to the diode positive (+) side and the positive (+) lead to the negative (–) side, there should be continuity. When contacting the two leads in reverse, there should be no continuity. HINT: Specifications may vary depending on the type of tester, so refer to the tester's instruction manual before performing the inspection.
-
CHECK LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
Check LED in the same manner as that for diodes. Use a tester with a power source of 3V or greater to overcome the circuit resistance. If a suitable tester is not available, apply battery voltage and check that the LED lights up.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · GENERAL INFORMATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p102 OEM manual
-
USE VOLT/OHMMETER WITH HIGH IMPEDANCE
Use a volt/ohmmeter with high impedance (10k/V minimum) for troubleshooting of the electrical circuit.
-
CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Procedure to locate a short circuit using a test bulb in place of the blown fuse.
-
ELECTRICAL PARTS
Before removing and inspecting the electrical parts, set the ignition switch to the LOCK position and disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery.
- Work must not be started until after at least 20 seconds or longer from the time the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected.
-
SRS AIR-BAG SYSTEM
Failure to carry out service operations in the correct sequence could cause the airbag system to deploy, possibly leading to a serious accident. When removal or installation of the parts and the yellow wire harness and connector for the airbag is necessary, refer to the precautionary notices in the AB section before performing the operation.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · PARTS LOCATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p103 OEM manual
-
PARTS LOCATION — HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM
Diagram identifying the location of all headlight and taillight system components on the Toyota MR2 SW20. Components identified include: Headlight, Light Retractor Motor, Light Retractor Relay, Relay Block No. 5 (HEAD (LH) Fuse, HEAD (RH) Fuse, Headlight Control Relay, RTR Fuse), Parking Brake Switch, Ignition Switch, Panel Relay, Door Courtesy Switch, Taillight, Light Control Switch, Turn Signal Flasher, Taillight Control Relay, J/B No. 1 (TAIL Fuse, GAUGE Fuse).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p106 OEM manual
-
CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS
Connector pin-out diagrams for the following components in the Headlight and Taillight System: Ignition Switch (9-10-2-B), Headlight Control Relay (BE2763), Taillight Control Relay (BE4049), Light Retractor Relay Connector A (e-6-2-A), Light Retractor Relay Connector B (e-18-2-A), Door Courtesy Switch (e-2-1-G), Light Control Switch / Headlight Dimmer Switch Connector A and Connector B (V-34-2).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · LIGHT RETRACTABLE SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p108 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION – LIGHT RETRACTABLE SYSTEM
Current flows from the battery to terminal 8 (B–8) of the light retractor relay. Battery voltage is applied to terminal 5 (B–5) and 7 (B–7) of the light retractor relay. The terminals indicated in brackets ( ) are for CANADA models. The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH IN "TAIL"
When the switch is set continuity is produced between terminal 13 (B–13) of the light retractor relay (hereafter called LRR) and the body ground. Also, because continuity is produced between terminal 2 (B–2) of the LRR and the body ground, the taillight control relay (hereafter called TCR) is turned on. Then the taillights light up.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH IN "HEAD"
When the switch is set continuity is produced between terminal 13 (B–13) of the LRR and the body ground, and 14 (B–14) of the LRR and the body ground of the LRR. Also continuity is produced between terminals 9 (B–9) and 18 (B–18) of the LRR. Then the LRR operates to lead current from terminal 8 → terminal 16 (B–16) [6 (B–6)] of the LRR → terminal 4 of the light retractor motor → terminal 5 of the motor → the body ground, and the motor starts, to run in order to raise the headlights. When the headlights rise, the limit switch operates, so that continuity is broken between terminals 2 and 1 of the motor, and continuity is produced between terminals 2 and 3. As a result, because the LRR is interrupted, the headlights stay in position.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p109 OEM manual
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CHANGED FROM "HEAD" TO "TAIL"
When the switch is set continuity is broken between terminal 14 (B–14) of the LRR and the body ground, and continuity is produced between terminal 3 (B–3) of the LRR and body ground. As a result, the headlights are kept in position. By breaking continuity between terminal 14 (B–14) of the LRR and the body ground, continuity is broken between terminal 10 (B–10) and the body ground. Then the headlights go out.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CHANGED FROM "TAIL" TO "HOLD"
When the switch is set, continuity is broken between terminal 13 (B–13) of the LRR and the bodyground. Also, because continuity is broken between terminal 2 (B–2) of the LRR and the bodyground, the TCR is turned off. Then the taillights go out. The headlights are kept in position, because continuity is kept between terminal 3 (B–3) of the LRR and the body ground.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CHANGED FROM "HOLD" TO "OFF"
When the switch is set, continuity is broken between terminal 3 (B–3) of the LRR and the body ground, so that continuity is produced between terminal 1 (B–1) and 18 (B–18) of the LRR. Then the LRR operates so that the current flows from terminal 8 (B–8) → terminal 16 (B–16) [6 (B–6)] of the LRR → terminal 4 of the light retractor motor → terminal 5 of the motor → the body ground, and the motor starts to run in order to retract the headlights. When the headlights are retracted, the limit switch operates, so that continuity is broken between terminals 2 and 3 of the motor, and continuity is proceeded between terminals 2 and 1. As a result, because the LRR is interrupted, the headlights stay in position.
-
IGNITION SWITCH TURNED FROM "ON" TO "ACC" OR "LOCK" AND DRIVER'S DOOR OPEN WITH LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH IN "HEAD" (Light Auto Turn Off system)
When the switches are set, current does not flow from the battery to terminal 4 (B–4) of the LRR, and continuity is produced between terminal 15 (B–15) of the LRR and the body ground. Also because continuity is broken between terminal 2 (B–2) of the LRR and the body ground, and 10 (B–10) of the LRR and the body ground, the TCR and the HCR are turned off. Then the taillights and the headlights go out. Also with the light control switch in "TAIL", the taillights go out. When the ignition switch is turned on again, the taillights and headlights light normally. During light auto turn off operation, if the light switch is turned first to "HOLD" or "OFF", then turned to "TAIL" or "HEAD", both sets of lights will come on again.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p110 OEM manual
-
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system is activated when engine is started. However, if the parking brake lever is engaged when the engine is started, the DRL will not light up after the engine has started. Once the parking brake is released, the DRL will then light up and will remain on regardless of operation of the parking brake lever. The DRL remain on until the ignition switch is turned off.
-
POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT NOTE
The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
-
FRONT INDICATOR LIGHTS NOTE (*1)
Front Indicator Lights (Light Control Switch: TAIL or HEAD to Illumination; Light Control Switch: OFF).
-
GAUGE FUSE NOTE (*2)
From GAUGE Fuse.
-
TAILLIGHT CONTROL RELAY NOTE (*3)
From Terminal 3 of Taillight Control Relay.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · Operation Example (Current Flow Table)
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p111 OEM manual
-
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LIGHTS UP
Switch positions for daytime running light operation: Ignition Switch = *ON, Light Control Switch = OFF, Headlight Dimmer Switch = LO or HI, *1 Door Courtesy Switch = ON. Condition requires engine running. Battery voltage flows through points 1, then 2→3, then 4. Continuity: 5→Ground. Taillight Control Relay circuit: Battery → Taillight Circuit → 6 → relay coil(7→9→5→Ground) and relay contact(8→Ground). Headlight Control Relay circuit: Battery → Headlight Circuit → 10 → relay coil(11→12→5→Ground) and relay contacts(14→15→16→Ground).
-
TAILLIGHT LIGHTS UP
Switch positions for taillight operation: Ignition Switch = OFF* or ON (* with Engine Running), Light Control Switch = TAIL, Headlight Dimmer Switch = LO or HI, *1 Door Courtesy Switch = ON. Condition: Battery voltage→1, *(Battery voltage→2→3), Battery voltage→4. Continuity: 5→Ground. Taillight Control Relay circuit: Battery → Taillight Circuit → 6 → relay coil(7→9→18→19→Ground) and relay contact(8→Ground). Headlight Circuit: refer to item 1 above.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · BE-22
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p112 OEM manual
-
HEADLIGHT LOW BEAM LIGHTS UP
Condition for low beam operation: Ignition Switch OFF* or ON, Light Control Switch HEAD, Headlight Dimmer Switch LO, *1 Door Courtesy Switch ON, with Engine Running. Battery voltage at connector 1; *(Battery voltage at connector 2 → connector 3); Battery voltage at connector 4. Continuity: connector 5 → Ground. Taillight Circuit refers to 2 above. Headlight Circuit: Battery → connector 10 → Headlight Control Relay → connector 11 → connector 12 → connector 13 → connector 20 → connector 19 → Ground; relay also → connector 14 → connector 15 → connector 16 → connector 21 → connector 22 → Ground.
-
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAM LIGHT UP
Condition for high beam operation: Ignition Switch OFF or *ON, Light Control Switch HEAD, Headlight Dimmer Switch HI, *1 Door Courtesy Switch ON, with Engine Running. Battery voltage at connector 1; *(Battery voltage at connector 2 → connector 3); Battery voltage at connector 4. Continuity: connector 5 → Ground. Taillight Circuit refers to 2 above. Headlight Circuit: Battery → connector 10 → Headlight Control Relay → connector 11 → connector 12 → connector 13 → connector 20 → connector 19 → Ground; relay also → connector 14 → connector 15 → connector 23 → connector 24 → connector 22 → Ground.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT FLASH
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p113 OEM manual
-
HEADLIGHT FLASH
Describes the switch positions and circuit conditions required for headlight flash operation. Ignition Switch: OFF or *ON; Light Control Switch: OFF or TAIL or HEAD; Headlight Dimmer Switch: Flash; *1 Door Courtesy Switch: ON. Condition applies with Engine Running. Battery voltage → ①, *(Battery voltage → ② → ③, Battery voltage → ④). Continuity: ⑤ → Ground. Taillight Circuit: Battery → refer to 1 above (when engine running and light control switch turned to OFF); → refer to 2 above (when light control switch turned to TAIL or HEAD). Headlight Circuit: Battery → ⑩ → Headlight Control Relay → ⑪ → ⑫ → ⑬ → ㉕ → ㉒ → Ground; → ⑭ → ⑮ → ㉓ → ㉔ → ㉒ → Ground.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p114 OEM manual
-
HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT
Two adjustment screws are provided on the headlight assembly: one for adjustment in the Vertical Direction (lower screw) and one for adjustment in the Horizontal Direction (upper/side screw). Turn the respective screw to aim the headlight beam in the desired direction.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p115 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · COMBINATION SWITCH COMPONENTS
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p116 OEM manual
-
COMBINATION SWITCH COMPONENTS (A Type)
Exploded diagram identifying all components of the A Type combination switch assembly, including: Connector, Wire Harness Holder No. 1, Wire Harness Holder No. 2, Wiper and Washer Switch, Headlight Dimmer and Turn Signal Switch, Cruise Control Switch (w/o Airbag), Horn Contact, Light Control Switch, Spring, Ball, Ball Set Plate. A separate inset shows the w/ Airbag variant which replaces the Cruise Control Switch with a Spiral Cable assembly.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · B Type
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p117 OEM manual
-
B TYPE COMPONENT LAYOUT
Exploded/assembly diagram showing the steering column switch assembly components for B Type configuration, including: Connector, Wire Harness Holder No. 1, Wiper and Washer Switch, Wire Harness Holder No. 2, Headlight Dimmer Switch, Turn Signal Switch, Light Control Switch, Horn Contact, Spring, Ball, Ball Set Plate, Headlight Dimmer Switch Pin. A separate inset shows the w/ Airbag variant with Spiral Cable.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p119 OEM manual
-
INSTALL PARTS OF COMBINATION SWITCH IN REVERSE SEQUENCE OF DISASSEMBLY
After installing the light control switch to the switch body, insure that the switch operation is smoothly. Push in the terminal until it is securely locked in the connector lug.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · Switch and Relay Inspection
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p120 OEM manual
-
COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION — LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals at each switch position: - OFF: no continuity specified. - HOLD (•): continuity between A-11 and B-20. - TAIL (–): continuity between A-2 and A-11; continuity between A-13 and B-20. - HEAD: continuity between A-2 and A-11; continuity between A-11 and A-13. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals at each switch position: - Flash: continuity between A-9 and A-12; continuity between A-12 and A-14. - Low beam: continuity between A-3 and A-9; continuity between A-9 and A-12. - High beam: continuity between A-3 and A-9; continuity between A-9 and A-14. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals at each switch position: - Left turn: continuity between A-1 and A-5. - Neutral: no continuity specified. - Right turn: continuity between A-1 and A-8. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
TAILLIGHT CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION
Check continuity between terminals as follows: - Constant condition: continuity between terminals 1 and 2 (through coil). - Apply battery voltage to terminals 1 and 2: continuity between terminals 3 and 5. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · HEADLIGHT AND TAILLIGHT SYSTEM · Parking Brake Switch / Panel Relay
Brakes
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p122 OEM manual
-
RELAY OPERATION
Connect the positive W lead from the voltmeter to terminal A-6 and negative (-) lead to the ground. Check that there is battery voltage with light control switch is turned on. If operation is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
PANEL RELAY INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check continuity of the panel relay per the following table: Under consistent condition, there is continuity between terminals 1 and 2 (through coil). When battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2, there is continuity between terminals 3 and 5. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · IGNITION SWITCH
Ignition
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p125 OEM manual
-
IGNITION SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM
See Power Source Section on page BE-9.
-
KEY CONFINE PREVENTION SYSTEM
See Power Door Lock Control System on page BE-96.
-
KEY UNLOCK WARNING SYSTEM
Wiring diagram showing connections between Battery, Ignition Switch (IG1, GAUGE), DOME fuse, Seat Belt Warning Relay (pins 1-7), Key Unlock Warning Switch (pins 1, 5, 7), Driver's Door Courtesy Switch (pins 2, 3), and Seat Belt Warning Relay (pins 1-4, 5-10). Connector references: Ignition Switch and Key Unlock Warning Switch connector g-10-2-B (10-pin), Driver's Door Courtesy Switch connector e-2-1-G (2-pin), Seat Belt Warning Relay connector S-10-2 (10-pin). Note: The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · IGNITION SWITCH
Ignition
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p126 OEM manual
-
KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 5. OFF (ignition key removed): no continuity. ON (ignition key set): continuity present. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
DOOR COURTESY SWITCH INSPECTION
See page BE-49.
-
DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION
See page BE-102.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · IGNITION SWITCH · KEY UNLOCK WARNING SYSTEM
Ignition
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p127 OEM manual
-
KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION
See page BE–11.
-
DOOR COURTESY SWITCH INSPECTION
See page BE–49.
-
SEAT BELT WARNING RELAY INSPECTION
See page BE–80.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · INTERIOR LIGHT SYSTEM · PARTS LOCATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p128 OEM manual
-
INTERIOR LIGHT SYSTEM PARTS LOCATION
Diagram identifying the location of all interior light system components on the Toyota MR2 SW20, including: Interior Light (roof/ceiling), Relay Block No. 5 with DOME Fuse (upper left/dash area), Door Handle Switch (upper right area), Courtesy Light (right B-pillar area), Room Light Control Relay (lower left/dash area), Ignition Switch (lower left/column area), Courtesy Light (lower left/door area), Door Courtesy Switch (lower center/door sill area), and Luggage Compartment Light (lower right/rear).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · INTERIOR LIGHT SYSTEM · ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p129 OEM manual
-
WIRING AND CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS — ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM (w/o Door Key Cylinder Illumination Light)
Circuit includes: Battery, DOME light, Room Light Control Relay (terminals 1, 2, 3), Open Door Warning Light, Interior Light Switch (OFF/DOOR/ON positions), Ignition Switch Key Illumination, Door Courtesy Switch Driver's (terminal 2), Door Courtesy Switch Passenger's (terminal 2). The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
-
WIRING AND CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS — ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM (w/ Door Key Cylinder Illumination Light)
Circuit includes: Battery, DOME light, Door Key Cylinder Illumination Light, Interior Light Switch (OFF/DOOR/ON positions), Ignition Switch Key Illumination (terminal 4), Room Light Control Relay (terminals 1, 2, 4, 6), Door Courtesy Switch Driver's (terminal 2), Door Courtesy Switch Passenger's (terminals 1, 2, 3), Door Handle Switch Driver's. The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
-
CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION — Room Light Control Relay (w/o Door Key Cylinder Illumination Light)
4-pin connector with terminals labeled 2, 1, 4, 3. Reference diagram BE4851.
-
CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION — Room Light Control Relay (w/ Door Key Cylinder Illumination Light)
6-pin connector with terminals labeled 2, 1, 6, 5, 4, 3. Reference diagram BE5056.
-
CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION — Door Courtesy Switch
2-pin connector with terminals labeled 1, 2. Reference diagram e-2-1-G.
-
CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION — Door Handle Switch
Connector shown. Reference diagram IY-2-1-A.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · INTERIOR LIGHT SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p130 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the cause of trouble more easily using the table shown below. In this table, the numbers indicate the order priority of the causes in trouble. Check each part in the order shown. If necessary, replace the parts.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · INTERIOR LIGHT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p131 OEM manual
-
DOOR COURTESY SWITCH INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check continuity per the following table: Terminal 1 and Switch body have continuity when switch position is ON (Switch pin released). Terminal 2 and Switch body have continuity when switch position is ON (Switch pin released). No continuity in any terminal combination when switch position is OFF (Switch pin pushed in). If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
Steps: (a) Disconnect the connector from interior light assembly. (b) Turn the interior light switch DOOR, check that there is continuity between terminal switch body and 2. (c) Turn the interior light switch OFF. (d) Push the interior light switch ON, check that there is continuity between terminal 1 and 2.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p135 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING PRIORITY TABLE
Use the table to find troubles easier. Each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM · Switch Inspections
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p136 OEM manual
-
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK MANUAL SWITCH INSPECTION
Check continuity of Passenger's Door Lock Manual Switch (4-pin connector). LOCK position: continuity between terminals 3-4. OFF position: no continuity. UNLOCK position: continuity between terminals 2-4. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
DOOR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION
Check continuity of Door Key Lock and Unlock Switch (3-pin connector). LOCK position: continuity between terminals 1-2. OFF position: no continuity. UNLOCK position: continuity between terminals 1-3. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION
See Key Confine Prevention System on page BE-11.
-
DOOR COURTESY SWITCH INSPECTION
See Interior Light System on page BE-49.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM · Inspection
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p138 OEM manual
-
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals 1 (1) and 3 (4). When switch position is OFF (Door lock set to LOCK): no continuity. When switch position is ON (Door lock set to UNLOCK): continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3. HINT: The number in brackets applies to vehicles w/ Theft Deterrent System. If continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock assembly.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p142 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM · MIRROR SWITCH / MIRROR MOTOR
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p143 OEM manual
-
MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals as specified in the continuity table for each combination of Left/Right adjustment switch position (LEFT SIDE, OFF, RIGHT SIDE) and control switch position (OFF, UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT). Terminals involved are 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER SOURCE · PARTS LOCATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p144 OEM manual
-
POWER SOURCE PARTS LOCATION
Diagram showing the location of power source components on the Toyota MR2 SW20. Under the hood (engine compartment lid): Relay Block No. 5 (left side), Battery (center). On the vehicle body: Relay Block No. 2 (rear right area), Relay Block No. 1 (lower left/driver side) containing Defogger Relay, Taillight Control Relay, and Turn Signal Flasher.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER SOURCE
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p145 OEM manual
-
RELAY BLOCK NO. 1 — FUSE AND RELAY IDENTIFICATION
Relay Block No. 1 contains 12 fuse positions and 3 relays. Fuses: 1. RAD CIG 15A, 2. GAUGE 7.5A, 3. STOP 15A, 4. PWR 30A, 5. TURN 7.5A, 6. DEFOG 20A, 7. DOOR 20A, 8. WIPER 20A, 9. TAIL 15A, 10. PANEL 7.5A, 11. —, 12. —. Relays: A. TURN SIGNAL FLASHER, B. DEFOGGER, C. TAIL (Taillight Control).
-
RELAY BLOCK NO. 2 — FUSE AND RELAY IDENTIFICATION
Relay Block No. 2 contains 3 fuse positions and 4 relays. Fuses: 1. EFI 15A, 2. VENT 20A, 3. ECU-IG 7.5A. Relays: A. IGN, B. EFI, C. C/OPN, D. VENT.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER SOURCE · RELAY BLOCK NO. 5
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p146 OEM manual
-
RELAY BLOCK NO. 5 — FUSES AND HIGH CURRENT FUSES
Fuse positions and ratings for Relay Block No. 5: 1. ALT SENCING 7.5A; 2. CDS FAN 30A; 3. RAD FAN 30A; 4. FR FOG 15A; 5. —; 6. —; 7. HEAD (LH) 15A; 8. HEAD (RH) 15A; 9. A.C. 10A; 10. ECU-B 7.5A; 11. AM2 7.5A; 12. HAZ-HORN 15A; 13. RTR 30A; 14. DOME 15A; 15. AM1 50A H-Fuse; 16. HTR 40A H-Fuse; 17. A.B.S. 80A H-Fuse; 18. ALT 120A H-Fuse; 19. AM2 40A H-Fuse.
-
RELAY BLOCK NO. 5 — RELAYS
Relay positions for Relay Block No. 5: A. HTR; B. H-LP (Headlight Control); C. HORN; D. FAN NO. 2; E. FAN NO. 1; F. FAN MAIN; G. FAN NO. 3; H. —; I. FR FOG.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM · PARTS LOCATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p148 OEM manual
-
PARTS LOCATION
Diagram showing the physical location of all Power Window Control System components on the Toyota MR2 SW20, including: Power Main Relay, Power Window Motor (driver side front), Power Window Motor (passenger side front), Power Window Switch (passenger side), Master Switch (driver side), Door Lock Control Relay, Door Courtesy Switch, and Power Window Switch (rear/hatch area).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p150 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM · Power Window Switch / Power Window Motor Inspection
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p153 OEM manual
-
POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION — LEFT SIDE DOOR MOTOR/MOTOR OPERATION
Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 1 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 2, check that the motor turns counterclockwise. Reverse the polarity, check that the motor turns clockwise. If operation is not as specified, replace the motor.
-
POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION — LEFT SIDE DOOR MOTOR/CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION
With the window in the full closed position, hold the power window switch in 'UP' position and check that there is a circuit breaker operation noise within 4 to 40 seconds. With the window in the full closed position, hold the switch in 'DOWN' and check that the window begins to descend within 60 seconds. If operation is not as specified, replace the motor.
-
POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION — RIGHT SIDE DOOR MOTOR/MOTOR OPERATION
Connect the positive W lead from the battery to terminal 1 and the negative H lead to terminal 2, check that the motor turns clockwise. Reverse the polarity, check that the motor turns counterclockwise. If operation is not as specified, replace the motor.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM · RIGHT SIDE DOOR MOTOR/CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p154 OEM manual
-
DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION
See Door Lock Control System on page BE-102.
-
POWER MAIN RELAY INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals as follows: Constant condition — terminals 1 and 2 show continuity through coil (terminals 1-2 = coil), terminal 3 shows continuity to open circuit. When battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 3 — continuity exists between terminals 2 and 4. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · STOP LIGHT SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p157 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM · PARTS LOCATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p159 OEM manual
-
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM PARTS LOCATION
Diagram showing the location of all theft deterrent system components on the Toyota MR2 SW20, including: Door Key Lock and Unlock Switch (front and rear), Door Lock Assembly (Door Lock Switch, Door Lock and Unlock Switch), Door Courtesy Switch (front and rear), Engine Hood Courtesy Switch, Theft Deterrent Horn, Rear Luggage Door Courtesy Switch, Luggage Door Key Unlock Switch, Starter Relay, Theft Deterrent ECU, Park/Neutral Switch (A/T), Door Courtesy Switch (driver side), Clutch Start Switch (M/T), Relay Block No. 1, Relay Block No. 5, Combination Meter Indicator Light, Front Luggage Door Courtesy Switch, Ignition Switch & Key Unlock Warning Switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM · CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p161 OEM manual
-
CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS — THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
Connector diagrams for the following components: Theft Deterrent ECU (e-20-2-C), Door Key Lock and Unlock Switch (Ie-3-1), Luggage Door Key Unlock Switch (GA-3-1), Door Lock Assembly (IS-6-2-B), Theft Deterrent Horn (IA-2-2), Courtesy Switch (Engine Hood) (IU-3-2), Courtesy Switch (Front Luggage Door) (IU-3-2), Courtesy Switch (Rear Luggage Door) (e-1-1), Courtesy Switch (Door) (e-2-1-G), Ignition Switch / Key Unlock Warning Switch (g-10-2-B), Starter Relay (ST0280), Headlight Control Relay (BE2763), Taillight Control Relay (BE4049).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p162 OEM manual
-
CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM
Check that the operation of Power Door Lock Control System is normal.
-
CONFIRM MALFUNCTION CONDITIONS
When the system is not operating, lower the door glass and confirm under what conditions it does not operate, or malfunctions.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM · Indicator Light Circuit / Door Lock and Unlock Switch Circuit
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p164 OEM manual
-
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT
Diagnostic procedure for Door Lock and Unlock Switch Circuit on TD ECU. Steps: (1) Turn ignition switch off. (2) Disconnect TD ECU connector and inspect connector on wire harness side. (3) INSPECT DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT: Is there continuity between terminal 3 and ground with driver's door unlocked? If No: Open circuit in driver's door lock and unlock switch circuit. If Yes: proceed. (4) INSPECT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT: Is there continuity between terminal 12 and ground with passenger's door unlocked? If No: Open circuit in passenger's door lock and unlock switch circuit. If Yes: Replace TD ECU. Then recheck system.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p168 OEM manual
-
IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
Diagnostic flowchart for the Ignition Switch Circuit of the Theft Deterrent system. Steps: 1) Turn ignition switch off. 2) Is RAD/CIG fuse normal? If No: Replace fuse. Is operation normal? If Yes: Fuse faulty. If No: Short circuit in wire harness between fuse and terminal 6 of TD ECU. If Yes (fuse normal): 3) TD ECU — Disconnect TD ECU connector and inspect connector on wire harness side as follows. 4) INSPECT IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT — Is there battery voltage between terminal 6 and ground with ignition switch turned to ACC or ON? If No: Open circuit in wire harness between fuse and terminal 6 of TD ECU. If Yes: Replace TD ECU. Then recheck system.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p169 OEM manual
-
STARTER CUT SYSTEM CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch off. Disconnect TD ECU connector and inspect connector on wire harness side as follows. INSPECT STARTER CUT SYSTEM CIRCUIT: Turn ignition switch to ST position (*1 with shift lever at N or P position or *2 with clutch pedal depressed). Is there battery voltage between terminal 18 and ground? If Yes: Replace TD ECU. Then recheck system. If No: Short or open circuit in starter relay circuit. HINT: if starter does not operate, even when system is cancelled, before checking the circuit, use the key to turn the door lock to the unlock position and recheck starter operation. *1 A/T *2 M/T
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p170 OEM manual
-
LIGHT RETRACTOR RELAY CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch off. Disconnect TD ECU connector and inspect connector on wire harness side as follows. INSPECT LIGHT RETRACTOR RELAY CIRCUIT: Ground the terminal 20 and check that the headlights and taillights light up. If No: Open circuit in light retractor relay circuit; Check the light retractor relay. If Yes: Replace TD ECU.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM · Door Lock Switch / Luggage Door Key Unlock Switch
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p172 OEM manual
-
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION
See Power Door Lock Control Switch on page BE-101.
-
KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION
See Key Confine Prevention System on page BE-11.
-
IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION
See Ignition Switch on page BE-11.
-
DOOR KEY LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION
See Power Door Lock Control System on page BE-99.
-
LUGGAGE DOOR KEY UNLOCK SWITCH INSPECTION
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 3: OFF condition — no continuity. UNLOCK condition — continuity between terminals 1 and 3.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM · Courtesy & Neutral Switches
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p173 OEM manual
-
FRONT LUGGAGE DOOR COURTESY SWITCH INSPECTION
See Engine Hood Courtesy Switch on this page.
-
DOOR COURTESY SWITCH INSPECTION
See Interior Light System on page BE-49.
-
REAR LUGGAGE DOOR COURTESY SWITCH INSPECTION
Check continuity: OFF (Closed) — no continuity between terminal 1 and Switch Body. ON (Opened) — continuity between terminal 1 and Switch Body. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION
See page AX-35.
-
CLUTCH START SWITCH INSPECTION
See page CL-5.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p174 OEM manual
-
STARTER RELAY INSPECTION
See Cruise Control System on page BE–138.
-
HEADLIGHT CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION
See page BE–30.
-
TAILLIGHT CONTROL RELAY INSPECTION
See page BE–30.
-
THEFT DETERRENT INDICATOR LIGHT INSPECTION
Connect a series of three 1.5 V dry cell batteries. Connect the positive (+) lead from the dry cell batteries to terminal 5 of connector "B" and the negative (–) lead to terminal 6 of connector "B". Check that the indicator light lights up. If the indicator light does not light up, replace the indicator light.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM · PARTS LOCATION
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p175 OEM manual
-
PARTS LOCATION — TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM
Diagram identifying the location of all components in the Turn Signal and Hazard Warning System on the Toyota MR2 SW20. Components identified include: Turn Signal Light (front and rear), Relay Block No. 5 (containing HAZ-HORN Fuse), Ignition Switch, Light Control Switch (including Turn Signal Switch), Hazard Warning Switch, Turn Signal Flasher, Taillight Control Relay, and J/B No. 1 (containing TAIL Fuse and TURN Fuse).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p177 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the cause of troubles more easily using the table shown below. In this table, the numbers indicate the order priority of the causes in trouble. Check each part in the order shown. If necessary, replace the parts.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p178 OEM manual
-
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH INSPECTION
See combination switch on page BE–30.
-
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION — CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals per the switch position table. When OFF: continuity between terminals 7 and 9; illumination terminals 2 and 3 show continuity. When ON: continuity between terminals 4–5, 5–6, 6–7, 7–8, and terminal 9; illumination terminals 2 and 3 show continuity. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
TURN SIGNAL FLASHER HINT
The turn signal lights should flash 60 to 120 times per minute. If one of the front or rear turn signal lights has an open circuit, the flash rate will be more than 140 times per minute. If operation is not as specified, replace the flasher.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM · Parts Location / Wiring Diagram
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p179 OEM manual
-
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM PARTS LOCATION
Identifies the location of the Washer Motor, Wiper and Washer Switch, and Wiper Motor on the vehicle body.
-
WIRING DIAGRAM
Shows the wiring circuit for the Wiper and Washer System including: Ignition Switch (terminals 4/IG1/2), Washer Motor (terminals 1/2), Wiper Motor (terminals 1/2/3/4), and Battery. Wiper Switch continuity table covers positions OFF, MIST for modes INT, LO, HI across terminals B-4(L-A), B-7(L-B), B-8(L), B-13(R-O), B-16(B), B-18(L-W). Washer Switch continuity table covers positions OFF and ON across same terminals. Note: The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p181 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
-
PARTS REPLACEMENT
See Combination Switch on page BE-26.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM · COMBINATION SWITCH
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p182 OEM manual
-
COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL
See page BO-72.
-
COMBINATION SWITCH INSTALLATION
See page BO-72.
-
COMBINATION SWITCH DISASSEMBLY
See page BE-28.
-
COMBINATION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
See page BE-29.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM · WASHER SWITCH / WASHER MOTOR
Body electrical
RM285U_1993_body_electrical · p185 OEM manual
-
WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION
See (Wiper and Washer Switch/Continuity) on page BE–62.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · COMPONENT PARTS REMOVAL
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_s54 · p22 OEM manual
-
COMPONENT PARTS DIAGRAM — MANUAL TRANSAXLE REMOVAL
Exploded diagram identifying all component parts for manual transaxle removal, including: Oil Seal (non-reusable part), Transaxle Case, No. 2 Shift Fork Shaft, Transaxle Case Oil Receiver, Reverse Shift Fork, Interlock Pin, No. 1 Shift Fork, No. 2 Shift Fork, No. 1 Shift Fork Shaft, No. 1 Shift Head, Differential Assembly, Output Shaft, Input Shaft, Output Shaft Front Bearing, Output Shaft Cover, Input Shaft Front Bearing, Reverse Shift Arm, Reverse Idler Gear and Shaft.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · DESCRIPTION
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_s54 · p35 OEM manual
-
REMOVE OLD SEALANT FROM GASKET SURFACES
Using a razor blade and gasket scraper, remove all the old sealant (FIPG) material from the gasket surfaces.
-
THOROUGHLY CLEAN ALL COMPONENTS
Thoroughly clean all components to remove all the loose material.
-
CLEAN SEALING SURFACES WITH NON-RESIDUE SOLVENT
Clean both sealing surfaces with a non-residue solvent.
-
APPLY SEALANT BEAD
Apply the sealant in approx. 1 mm (0.04 in.) bead along the sealing surface.
-
ASSEMBLE WITHIN 10 MINUTES
Parts must be assembled within 10 minutes of application. Otherwise, the sealant (FIPG) material must be removed and reapplied.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · INPUT SHAFT · Inspect / Assembly
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_s54 · p47 OEM manual
-
INSPECT INPUT SHAFT
Check the input shaft for wear or damage. Using a micrometer, measure the outer diameter of the input shaft journal surface. If the outer diameter is less than the minimum, replace the input shaft. Using a dial indicator, check the shaft runout; if the outer diameter exceeds the minimum, replace the input shaft.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · OPERATION
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_s54 · p51 OEM manual
-
TRANSAXLE GEAR ENGAGEMENTS
The illustration below show the engagements of transaxle gears. Six diagrams are provided showing power flow paths for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, and Reverse gear positions. Each diagram identifies the relevant Drive Gear, Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, and Differential Assembly. In Reverse, an additional Reverse Idler Gear is introduced between the Reverse Drive Gear and Reverse Driven Gear to reverse the direction of rotation.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · OUTPUT SHAFT · Component Parts Inspection
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_s54 · p54 OEM manual
-
OUTPUT SHAFT COMPONENT PARTS INSPECTION
Inspection procedures for output shaft component parts.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · OUTPUT SHAFT · Inspection / Assembly
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_s54 · p55 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CLEARANCE OF SHIFT FORKS AND HUB SLEEVES
Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the hub sleeve and shift fork. Maximum clearance: 1.0 mm (0.039 in.). If the clearance exceeds the maximum, replace the shift fork or hub sleeve.
-
INSPECT OUTPUT SHAFT
Using a micrometer, measure the outer diameter of the output shaft journal surface. If the outer diameter is less than the minimum, replace the output shaft. Using a dial indicator, check the shaft runout. If the runout exceeds the maximum, replace the output shaft.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · SHIFT AND SELECT LEVER SHAFT
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_s54 · p66 OEM manual
-
REMOVE INTERLOCK SHAFT, NO.1 SHIFT INNER LEVER, NO.2 SHIFT INNER LEVER, SPRING AND REVERSE RESTRICT PIN
Using a pin punch and hammer, drive out the slotted spring pin. Remove the interlock shaft, No.1 shift inner lever, No.2 shift inner lever, spring and reverse restrict pin.
-
REMOVE E-RING
Remove the E-ring from the shift and select lever shaft.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_s54 · p70 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
STEERING · TROUBLESHOOTING
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p2 OEM manual
-
GENERAL DESCRIPTION — PARTS REPLACEMENT
Care must be taken to replace parts properly because they could affect the performance of the steering system and result in a driving hazard.
-
GENERAL DESCRIPTION — STEERING WHEEL PAD AIRBAG
The steering wheel pad has an airbag built in, so take all due precautions when handling it. For more details, see the SRS AIRBAG section.
-
TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE USAGE
Find the cause of trouble more easily by properly using the table shown. The numbers in the table indicate the priority of the probable cause of trouble. Check each part in the order shown. If necessary, repair or replace the part.
STEERING · MANUAL STEERING GEAR HOUSING · ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p3 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove and install the parts as shown.
STEERING · MANUAL STEERING GEAR HOUSING
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p11 OEM manual
-
CHECK TUBE HOLES IN BUSHING
Insure that the tube holes are not clogged with grease. HINT: If the tube holes are clogged, the pressure inside the boot will increase.
-
INSTALL NEW BUSHING INTO RACK HOUSING
Install a new bushing into the rack housing, making sure to align into the three holes.
STEERING · MANUAL STEERING GEAR HOUSING · PREPARATION
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p16 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
List of special service tools required for Manual Steering Gear Housing service.
STEERING · MANUAL STEERING GEAR HOUSING
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p17 OEM manual
-
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09025-00010 Small Torque Wrench — used for Total preload measurement.
-
EQUIPMENT
Required equipment: Dial indicator, Torque wrench, Steering rack.
-
SSM (SPECIAL SERVICE MATERIALS)
08833-00080 Adhesive 1344, THREE BOND 1344, LOCTITE 242 or equivalent — apply to Pinion bearing adjusting screw, Pinion bearing adjusting screw lock nut, and Rack guide spring cap.
STEERING · POWER STEERING · DESCRIPTION
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p19 OEM manual
-
EHPS (Electro–Hydraulic Power Steering)
In conventional and ordinary hydraulically–controlled power steering, hydraulic pressure needed for control is generated when the pump is turned by the engine. In the EHPS, the pump is turned by an electric motor. The ECU controls the voltage acting on the pump motor according to the movement of the steering wheel and the vehicle speed. The pump motor speed is changed accordingly to modulate the hydraulic pressure being generated in the pump.
STEERING · POWER STEERING · Neutral (Straight-Ahead) Position / When Turning
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p20 OEM manual
-
NEUTRAL (STRAIGHT-AHEAD) POSITION
Fluid from the pump is sent to the control valve. If the control valve is in the neutral position, all the fluid will flow through the control valve into the relief port and back to the pump. At this time, hardly any pressure is created and because the pressure on the cylinder piston equal on both sides, the piston will not move in either direction.
-
WHEN TURNING
When the steering main shaft is turned in either direction, the control valve also moves, closing one of the fluid passages. The other passage then opens wider, causing a change in fluid flow volume and, at the same time, pressure is created. Consequently, a pressure difference occurs between both sides of the piston and the piston moves in the direction of the lower pressure so that the fluid in the cylinder is forced back to the pump through the control valve.
STEERING · POWER STEERING · Service Hint
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p21 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION — Purpose
Trouble with the power steering system usually involves hard steering resulting from lack of assist. Before attempting repairs, determine whether the trouble lies with the pump or with the gear housing by using a pressure gauge to perform an on-vehicle inspection.
-
HYDRAULIC FAULT DIAGNOSIS — Pump vs Control Valve vs Piston Seal
Power steering problems are normally due to insufficient fluid pressure acting on the piston. If the fault lies with the pump, the same symptoms will generally occur whether the steering wheel is turned fully to the right or left. If the fault lies with the control valve, there will generally be a difference between the amount of assist when the steering wheel is turned left and right, causing harder steering. If the piston seal of the power cylinder is worn, there will be a loss of fluid pressure whether the steering wheel is turned to the right or left and the symptoms will be the same for both.
-
CHECK FOR AIR IN SYSTEM BEFORE INSPECTION
Before performing an on-vehicle inspection, confirm that the power steering system is completely free of any air. If there is air in the system, the volume of this air will change when fluid pressure is raised, causing a fluctuation in the fluid pressure so that the power steering will not function properly. To determine if there is any air in the system, check if there is a change of fluid level in the reservoir tank when the steering wheel is turned fully to the right or left.
-
AIR IN SYSTEM — Effect on Fluid Level
If there is air in the system, it will be compressed to a smaller volume when the steering wheel is turned, causing a considerable drop in the fluid level. If the system is free of air, there will be very little change in the level even when the fluid pressure is raised. This is because the fluid, being a liquid, does not change volume when compressed. The small change in the fluid level is due to expansion of the hoses between the pump and gear housing when pressure rises.
-
AIR IN SYSTEM — Abnormal Noise
Air in the system sometimes causes abnormal noise in the pump or gear housing when the steering wheel is fully turned in either direction.
-
PERFORM ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AFTER OVERHAUL OR REPAIR
This on-vehicle inspection must be performed every time after overhauling or repairing the pump or gear housing to ensure that the power steering is working properly.
STEERING · POWER STEERING · GEAR HOUSING
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p22 OEM manual
-
GEAR HOUSING — USE SST BEFORE VISE MOUNTING
If the gear housing is secured directly in a vise during overhaul, there is danger of deforming it, so always first secure it in the SST provided (rack and pinion steering rack housing stand) before placing it in the vise.
-
OIL SEALS — USE NEW SEALS AND AVOID SCRATCHES
The oil seals on both sides of the power cylinder are for the prevention of leakage of the high pressure fluid which acts on the piston. Always use new oil seals when reassembling and be very careful not to scratch or damage them. Because of the high pressure, even the slightest scratch will cause fluid leakage, resulting in an inoperative power steering system.
-
RACK SLIDING SURFACE — CHECK FOR BURRS BEFORE ASSEMBLY
Be very careful not to scratch the sliding portion of the rack which makes contact with the oil seals. When removing the rack ends from the rack, it is very easy to cause a burr when holding the tip of the rack with a wrench. Therefore, before assembling the rack, first check the tip for burrs and remove any with an oil stone.
-
TEFLON RINGS — DO NOT STRETCH; SNUG INTO GROOVE BEFORE ASSEMBLY
Teflon rings are used for the piston and control valve. These teflon rings are highly durable against wear, but if it is necessary to replace them, be careful not to stretch the new ones. After installing a teflon ring into its groove, snug it down into the groove before assembly of the cylinder or housing to prevent possible damage.
STEERING · POWER STEERING
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p23 OEM manual
-
PRELOAD IMPORTANCE FOR POWER STEERING
As with the rack and pinion type steering, preload is very important. If the preload is not correct, it could result in such trouble as steering wheel play or shimmy or lack of durability, so always make sure that it is correct.
STEERING · POWER STEERING · DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p24 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
When a malfunction exists, the corresponding code number is stored in memory until the ignition switch is turned off. In case of a malfunction other than one identified by code No. 21, the P/S warning light is turned on to warn the driver. By connecting terminals Tc and E1 of the data link connector, malfunction codes that are stored in memory can be displayed by the way the light blinks.
-
P/S WARNING LIGHT CHECK
Check the P/S warning light operation.
STEERING · POWER STEERING
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p28 OEM manual
-
INSPECT POWER STEERING DRIVER CONTINUITY
Inspect continuity between terminals on the driver side connector. Verify continuity (with diode symbol) between M+ and PGND terminals.
STEERING · POWER STEERING · ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p32 OEM manual
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM PRECAUTION
Do not open the cover or the case of the ECU and various computers unless absolutely necessary. (If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.)
- If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.
STEERING · POWER STEERING · ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p51 OEM manual
-
BLEEDING OF POWER STEERING SYSTEM — CHECK FLUID LEVEL IN RESERVOIR TANK
Check the fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Check that the fluid level is within the HOT LEVEL of the dipstick. If the fluid is cold, check that it is within the COLD LEVEL of the dipstick. Use only TOYOTA PS fluid EH or equivalent. Otherwise, you may not get expected power assist.
-
BLEEDING OF POWER STEERING SYSTEM — START ENGINE AND TURN STEERING WHEEL FROM LOCK TO LOCK THREE OR FOUR TIMES
With the engine speed below 1,000 rpm, turn the steering wheel to left or right full lock and keep it there for 2–3 seconds, then turn the wheel to the reverse full lock and keep it there for 2–3 seconds.
STEERING · POWER STEERING · OIL PRESSURE CHECK
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p52 OEM manual
-
CHECK THAT FLUID IN RESERVOIR IS NOT FOAMY OR CLOUDY AND DOES NOT RISE OVER MAXIMUM WHEN ENGINE IS STOPPED
Measure the fluid level with the engine running. Stop the engine and measure the fluid level. Maximum rise: 5 mm (0.20 in.)
STEERING · POWER STEERING · POWER STEERING PUMP
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p54 OEM manual
-
POWER STEERING FLUID SPECIFICATION
When supplementing the power steering fluid, use TOYOTA POWER STEERING FLUID EH or equivalent which is exclusively for EHPS use.
-
POWER STEERING PUMP NOT DISASSEMBLABLE
The power steering pump is not to be disassembled, so if a malfunction occurs, replace it as an assembly.
STEERING · POWER STEERING · PREPARATION
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p56 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
List of special service tools required for power steering service operations.
STEERING · POWER STEERING
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p57 OEM manual
-
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS LIST
List of special service tools required for power steering service operations.
STEERING · STEERING COLUMN · Assembly Removal and Installation
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p61 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove and install the parts as shown.
STEERING · STEERING COLUMN · Assembly
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p68 OEM manual
-
INSPECT UPPER BEARING
Check the upper bearing rotation condition and check for abnormal noise.
-
INSPECT KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID (A/T)
See page AT-80.
STEERING · STEERING COLUMN · PREPARATION
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p72 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
Special service tools required for steering column service: 09609-20011 Steering Wheel Puller; 09910-00015 Puller Set (includes 09911-00011 Puller Clamp and 09912-00010 Puller Slide Hammer); 09950-20017 Universal Puller (includes 09956-00010 Tightening Piece).
-
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09904-00010 Expander Set (includes 09904-00050 No. 4 Claw) — for removing and installing snap ring.
-
EQUIPMENT
Torque wrench.
STEERING · TROUBLESHOOTING
Steering
RM285U_1993_steering · p73 OEM manual
-
GENERAL DESCRIPTION — PARTS REPLACEMENT
Care must be taken to replace parts properly because they could affect the performance of the steering system and result in a driving hazard.
-
GENERAL DESCRIPTION — STEERING WHEEL PAD / AIRBAG
The steering wheel pad has an airbag built in, so take all due precautions when handling it. For more details, see the SRS AIRBAG section.
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — METHOD
You will find the cause of trouble more easily by properly using the table shown below. In this table, the numbers indicate the priority of the probable cause of trouble. Check each part in the order shown. If necessary, repair or replace the part.
3S-GTE ENGINE · TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · DESCRIPTION
Turbocharger
RM285U_1993_3sgte_turbocha · p9 OEM manual
-
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Systems which increase the amount of air sent to the engine are either turbocharger type (using exhaust gas to turn the turbine) or supercharger type (using the engine crankshaft, etc. to mechanically turn the pump, etc.). For MR2 3S-GTE engine, the turbocharger type been adopted. The turbocharger is a device which increases engine output by sending a greater amount of air-fuel mixture to the engine than under normal conditions. Engine output depends upon the volume of the air-fuel mixture ignited per unit of time. Therefore, to increase engine output, the most effective method is to send a greater amount of air-fuel mixture into the cylinder. In other words, by installing a special turbocharger and providing a higher air-fuel mixture than usual, engine output can be increased by increasing the average combustion pressure without increasing the engine speed.
3S-GTE ENGINE · TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · OPERATION
Turbocharger
RM285U_1993_3sgte_turbocha · p10 OEM manual
-
OPERATION — Turbocharger System Overview
Exhaust gas acts on the turbine wheel inside the turbine housing, causing it to revolve. When the turbine wheel revolves, the impeller which is located on the same shaft also revolves, compressing the intake air which has passed through the air flow sensor from the air cleaner housing. When expelled from the compressor housing the compressed air is suppressed air is supplied to the cylinders. When the engine speed increases, the exhaust gas volume increases and the turbine wheel revolutions increase (approx. 20,000–110,000 rpm), thus the turbocharged air pressure grows greater and engine output increases.
-
Waste Gate Valve
Although on the one hand high output is achieved by turbocharging, if the turbocharged air pressure becomes too high, knocking occurs and, on the contrary, a reduction in engine output is caused. If the turbocharged air pressure exceeds the prescribed air pressure, the flow of exhaust gas by-passes the turbine, controlling turbine wheel revolutions and turbocharged air pressure. This by-pass valve which controls the quantity of exhaust gas flowing to the turbine is called the waste gate valve. When the turbocharged air pressure exceeds the prescribed pressure, the actuator operates, the waste gate valve opens and part of the exhaust gas by-passes the turbine. This causes a drop in the turbine revolution rate and controls the turbocharged air within the prescribed limits.
-
Charge Air Cooler (CAC)
The CAC cools the turbocharged air (intake air) put out by the turbocharger, thereby increasing the air density. As the intake air temperature decreases, the gas temperature in the combustion chamber falls and the occurrence of knocking is suppressed, giving an increase in engine output. The MR2 CAC is an air cooling type located at the top of the engine, utilizing the vehicle windstream to cool the turbocharged air.
3S-GTE ENGINE · TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Precaution
Turbocharger
RM285U_1993_3sgte_turbocha · p11 OEM manual
-
IDLE ENGINE AFTER HARD DRIVING
Do not stop the engine immediately after pulling a trailer or after high speed or uphill driving. Idle the engine for 20 – 120 seconds, depending on how hard the vehicle has been driven.
-
AVOID SUDDEN ACCELERATION ON COLD START
Avoid sudden acceleration or racing immediately after starting a cold engine.
-
DO NOT RUN ENGINE WITHOUT AIR CLEANER
Do not run the engine with air cleaner removed, as this may cause foreign material to enter and damage the impeller wheel operating at high speed.
-
CHECK CAUSE BEFORE REPLACING DEFECTIVE TURBOCHARGER
If a turbocharger is found to be defective and must be replaced, check for the cause, and repair or replace the following items as necessary: Engine oil level and quality; Conditions under which the turbocharger was used; Oil lines leading to the turbocharger.
-
HANDLE TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY WITH CARE
Use caution when removing and reinstalling the turbocharger assembly. Do not drop it or bang it against anything or grasp it by easily-deformed parts, such as the actuator or rod, when moving it.
-
PLUG PORTS BEFORE REMOVING TURBOCHARGER
Before removing the turbocharger, plug the intake and exhaust ports and oil inlet to prevent entry of dirt or other foreign material.
-
CHECK OIL PIPES FOR SLUDGE WHEN REPLACING TURBOCHARGER
If replacing the turbocharger, check for accumulation of sludge particles in the oil pipes, and if necessary, replace the oil pipes.
-
REMOVE GASKET FROM OIL PIPE AND TURBOCHARGER FLANGES
Completely remove the gasket adhered to the lubrication oil pipe flange and turbocharger oil flange.
-
USE AUTHORIZED REPLACEMENT BOLTS AND NUTS
When replacing bolt or nuts, use only authorized replacement parts to prevent breakage or deformation.
-
PRE-OIL TURBOCHARGER BEARING ON INSTALLATION
If replacing the turbocharger, put 20 cm³ (1.2 cu in.) of oil into the turbocharger oil inlet and turn the impeller wheel by hand to spread oil to the bearing.
-
DISTRIBUTE OIL AFTER ENGINE OVERHAUL OR REPLACEMENT
If overhauling or replacing the engine, cut the fuel supply after reassembly and crank the engine for 30 seconds to distribute oil throughout the engine. Then allow the engine to idle for 60 seconds.
3S-GTE ENGINE · TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · PREPARATION
Turbocharger
RM285U_1993_3sgte_turbocha · p12 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
09992-00241 Turbocharger Pressure Gauge
-
EQUIPMENT
Dial indicator, Inpeller wheel, Torque wrench
3S-GTE ENGINE · TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING
Turbocharger
RM285U_1993_3sgte_turbocha · p14 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING HINT
Before troubleshooting the turbocharger, first check the engine itself. (Valve clearance, engine compression, ignition timing etc.)
3S-GTE ENGINE · TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Components for Removal and Installation
Turbocharger
RM285U_1993_3sgte_turbocha · p17 OEM manual
-
INSPECT IMPELLER WHEEL ROTATION
See step 1 in Turbocharger Inspection.
-
INSPECT VSV FOR TURBOCHARGING PRESSURE
See VSV Inspection under SMPI System.
-
INSPECT MAP
See MAP Inspection under SMPI System.
3S-GTE ENGINE · TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM
Turbocharger
RM285U_1993_3sgte_turbocha · p22 OEM manual
-
SUSPEND A/C COMPRESSOR
Suspend the A/C compressor to strut rod with a string.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · AC IDLE-UP VALVE
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p1 OEM manual
-
AC IDLE-UP VALVE
The A/C Idle-Up Valve is located in the engine bay and routes air from the air cleaner to the intake manifold. It is controlled by the PCME via the AC signal terminal. Power is supplied through the MPI Main Relay to the +B (+B1) terminal. The valve solenoid coil is grounded through the E1 terminal. When the A/C is active, the PCME outputs a signal on the AC terminal to energize the valve, allowing additional air to bypass into the intake manifold to raise idle speed.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Air Flow Sensor
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p7 OEM manual
-
INSPECT AIR FLOW SENSOR
Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between terminals VS and E2 by moving the measuring plate. Resistance: 200–600Ω at fully closed, 20–1,200Ω at fully open. Resistance will change in a wave pattern as the measuring plate slowly opens. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the air flow sensor.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Cold Start Injector
EFI / fuel injection
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p14 OEM manual
-
INSPECT INJECTION OF COLD START INJECTOR
Install SST (two unions) to the injector and delivery pipe with four new gaskets and the union bolts (SST 09268-41045, 09268-41080). Connect SST (hose) to the unions (SST 09268-41045). Connect SST (wire) to the injector (SST 09842-30050). Put a container under the injector.
- Keep injector clear of sparks during the test.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p18 OEM manual
-
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel is supplied under constant pressure to the SMPI injectors by an electric fuel pump. The injectors inject a metered quantity of fuel into the intake manifold in accordance with signals from the PCM E (Powertrain Control Module (Engine)).
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
The air induction system provides sufficient air for engine operation.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
The MR2 3S-GTE engine is equipped with a TOYOTA Computer Controlled System (TCCS) which centrally controls the SMPI, EI, IAC, Diagnosis systems etc. by means of a Powertrain Control Module (PCME-formerly SMPI computer) employing a microcomputer. By means of the PCME, the controls the following functions: (1) Multipoint Electronic Fuel Injection — The PCM receives signals from various sensors indicating changing engine operation conditions such as: Intake air volume, Intake air temperature, Coolant temperature, Engine rpm, Acceleration/deceleration, Exhaust oxygen content etc. The signals are utilized by the PCME to determine the injection duration necessary for an optimum air-fuel ratio. (2) Electronic Ignition (EI) — The PCME is programmed with data for optimum ignition timing under any and all operating conditions. Using data provided by sensors which monitor various engine functions (rpm, coolant temperature, etc.), the microcomputer (PCME) triggers the spark at precisely the right instant. (3) Idle Air Control (IAC) — The PCME is programmed with target idling speed values to respond to different engine conditions (coolant temperature, air conditioner ON/OFF, etc.). Sensors transmit signals to the PCME which control the flow of air through the by-pass of the throttle valve and adjust idle speed to the target value. (4) Diagnosis — The PCME detects any malfunctions and abnormalities in the sensor network and lights a CHECK engine warning light on the combination meter. At the same time, the trouble is identified and a diagnostic trouble code is recorded by the PCME. The diagnostic trouble code can be read by the number of blinks of the CHECK engine warning light when terminals TE1 and E1 are connected. (5) Fail-Safe Function — In the event of the sensor malfunctioning, a back-up circuit will take over to provide minimal driveability, and the CHECK engine warning light will illuminate.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p19 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The PCME contains a built-in self-diagnosis system by which troubles with the engine signal network are detected and a 'CHECK' engine warning light on the combination meter lights up. By analyzing various signals the PCME detects system malfunctions relating to the sensors or actuators. The self-diagnosis system has two modes: a normal mode and a test mode. In normal mode, the PCME lights up the 'CHECK' engine warning light when a malfunction is detected; the light goes off automatically when repaired, but diagnostic trouble codes remain stored until the EFI fuse is removed with ignition off. Diagnostic trouble codes can be read by the number of blinks of the 'CHECK' engine warning light when TE1 and E1 terminals on data link connector 1 are connected; lowest code number appears first when multiple codes are present. In test mode, the PCME lights up the 'CHECK' engine warning light for malfunctions (except code Nos. 42, 43 and 51), using TE2 and E1 terminals on data link connector 1. In test mode, malfunction codes are stored even when ignition is off (except codes 42, 43, 51). The test mode detects malfunctions such as poor contact that are difficult to detect in normal mode.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p21 OEM manual
-
MALFUNCTION CODE INDICATION
In the event of a malfunction, the light will blink every 0.52-seconds. The first number of blinks will equal the first digit of a 2-digit diagnostic trouble code and, after a 1.5-second pause, the 2nd number of blinks will equal the 2nd. If there are two or more codes, there will be a 2.5-second pause between each code. After all the codes have been output, there will be a 4.5 second pause and they will all be repeated as long as the terminals TE 1 and E 1 of the data link connector 1 are connected. HINT: In the event of a number of trouble codes, indication will begin from the smaller value and continue to the larger.
-
2 TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble codes 25, 26 and 71 use '2 trip detection logic'. With this logic, when a malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporarily stored in the PCME memory. If the same case is detected again during the second drive test, this second detection causes the 'CHECK' engine warning light to light up. The 2 trip repeats the same mode a 2nd time. (However, the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st time and 2nd time.) In the Test Mode, the 'CHECK' engine warning light lights up the 1st time a malfunction is detected.
-
REMOVE SST AFTER DIAGNOSIS CHECK
After the diagnosis check, remove SST. SST 09843-18020
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Diagnostic Trouble Code Cancellation
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p23 OEM manual
-
REMOVE SST AFTER DIAGNOSIS CHECK
After the diagnosis check, remove SST 09843-18020. The test mode will not start if terminals TE2 and E1 are connected after the ignition switch is turned on. The starter signal and vehicle speed signal will be diagnosed by the PCME as malfunctions, and code Nos. 42 and 43 will be output, if the operation in step 4 is not performed. When the air conditioner is on or when the accelerator pedal is depressed, code '51' (Switch condition signal) is output, but this is not abnormal.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · DIAGNOSIS INDICATION
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p24 OEM manual
-
LOWEST CODE DISPLAYED FIRST
When 2 or more codes are indicated, the lowest number (code) will appear first.
-
CODES RETAINED IN PCME MEMORY
All detected diagnostic trouble codes, except code Nos. 43, 51 and 53 will be retained in memory by the PCM E from the time of detection until cancelled out.
-
MALFUNCTION CLEARED — CODES REMAIN STORED
Once malfunction is cleared, the "CHECK" engine warning light on the combination meter will go off but the diagnostic trouble code(s) remains stored in PCME memory (except for code Nos. 43, 51 and 53).
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Electronic Parts Location
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p33 OEM manual
-
ELECTRONIC PARTS LOCATION
Diagram showing the location of electronic components for the 3S-GTE engine SMPI system, including: ECTS, Oxygen Sensor, Fuel Pump Resistor, VSV (for EGR), EGR Function Sensor (CALIF. only), MAP, PCME, Cold Start Injector Time Switch, Circuit Opening Relay ('C/OPN'), Ignition Main Relay ('IGN'), Solenoid Resistor, MPI Main Relay ('EFI'), Fuel Pump Relay, VSV (for Turbocharging Pressure), VSV (for T-VIS).
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · EG1-313
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p44 OEM manual
-
CHECK PRESSURE IN FUEL FILTER HOSE
Check that there is pressure in the hose from the fuel filter. HINT: At this time, you will hear fuel return noise.
-
TURN IGNITION SWITCH OFF
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
-
REMOVE SST FROM DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1
Remove the SST from the data link connector 1. SST 09843-18020
-
NO PRESSURE DIAGNOSIS
If there is no pressure, check the following parts: Fusible links (2.0L, 1.0Y); H-fuse (AM2 40A); Fuses (EFI 15A, AM2 7.5A); MPI main relay; Fuel pump; Fuel pump relay; Fuel pump resistor; Wiring connections.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Components for Removal and Installation
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p48 OEM manual
-
COMPONENTS FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Diagram illustrating the components involved in removal and installation for the 3S-GTE SMPI system, including: Lower No.1 Instrument Panel Finish Panel, Center Instrument Cluster Finish Panel, Ash Receptacle Box, Ash Receptacle Retainer, Upper Console Panel, Console Box, Grommet, Service Hole Cover, Fuel Sender Gauge Connector, Shifting Hole Cover, Fuel Pump Connector.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Fuel Pump Disassembly / Assembly
EFI / fuel injection
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p55 OEM manual
-
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
See Components for Disassembly and Assembly. Assembly steps follow:
-
INSTALL FUEL PUMP FILTER TO FUEL PUMP
Install the pump filter with a new clip.
-
INSTALL FUEL PUMP TO FUEL PUMP BRACKET
(a) Connect the fuel hose to the outlet port of the fuel pump. (b) Connect the lead wire to the fuel pump with the spring washer and nut. Connect the three lead wires. (c) Install the rubber cushion to the fuel pump. (d) Install the fuel pump by pushing the lower side of the fuel pump.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Fuel Lines and Connections Inspection
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p61 OEM manual
-
ALWAYS USE NEW GASKETS
Always use new gaskets when replacing the fuel tank or component parts.
-
APPLY PROPER TORQUE
Apply the proper torque to all parts tightened.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · IACV
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p65 OEM manual
-
IACV INSTALLATION
See Components for Removal and Installation.
-
INSTALL IACV
Step 1: Place a new gasket on the throttle body. Step 2: Install the IACV with the four screws.
-
INSTALL THROTTLE BODY
See Throttle Body Installation.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · INJECTOR
EFI / fuel injection
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p67 OEM manual
-
INJECTOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Diagram showing the injector layout on the 3S-GTE engine including Fuel Inlet Hose, Fuel Return Hose, Injector, and Delivery Pipe locations. A wiring diagram is also shown detailing the electrical circuit from Battery through Main FL 2.0L fuse, AM2 7.5A fuse, Ignition Switch (AM2 to IG2), AM2 40A fuse, Ignition Main Relay, Solenoid Resistor (terminals #10, #20, #30, #40), four Injectors (No.10, No.20, No.30, No.40), and PCME terminals (#4, #3, #2, #1, E01, E02). Power supply to solenoid resistor is via +B line.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p73 OEM manual
-
MOVE ENGINE WIRE PROTECTOR
Move the engine wire protector toward the direction shown in the illustration (Lift and Push).
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · OPERATION FUEL SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p85 OEM manual
-
FUEL SYSTEM OPERATION OVERVIEW
Fuel is pumped up by the fuel pump, flows through the fuel filter and is distributed to each injector and cold start injector at a set pressure maintained by the pressure regulator.
-
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR OPERATION
The fuel pressure regulator adjusts the pressure of the fuel from the fuel line (high pressure side) to a pressure 284 kPa (2.9 kgf/cm2, 41 psi) higher than the pressure inside the intake manifold, and excess fuel is returned to the fuel tank through the return pipe. When the engine is hot, the fuel pressure is increased to control percolation in the fuel system and improve restartability and idling stability.
-
PULSATION DAMPER OPERATION
The pulsation damper absorbs the slight fluctuations in fuel pressure caused by fuel injector from the injector.
-
INJECTOR OPERATION
The injectors operate on input of injection signals from the PCME and inject fuel into the intake manifold.
-
COLD START INJECTOR OPERATION
The cold start injector operates when starting at low coolant temperature or at normal temperature ranges, injecting fuel into the air intake chamber to improve startability.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p86 OEM manual
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Air filtered through the air cleaner passes through the air flow sensor and the amount flowing to the air intake chamber is determined according to the throttle valve opening in the throttle body and the engine rpm. The air flow sensor measures the intake air flow by the opening of the measuring plate in response to the volume of intake air to the engine. Located in the throttle body is the throttle valve, which regulates the volume of intake air to the engine. Intake air controlled by the throttle valve opening is distributed from the air intake chamber to the manifold of each cylinder and is drawn into the combustion chamber. At low temperatures the IACV opens and the air flows through the IACV and the throttle body, into the air intake chamber. During engine warming up, even if the throttle valve is completely closed, air flows to the air intake chamber, thereby increasing the idle speed (first idle operation). The air intake chamber prevents pulsation of the intake air, reduces the influence on the air flow sensor and increases the accuracy of the measurement of the intake air volume. It also prevents intake air interference in each cylinder.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p87 OEM manual
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The control system consists of sensors which detect various engine conditions, and a PCME which determines the injection volume (timing) based on the signals from the sensors. The various sensors detect the intake air volume, engine rpm, oxygen density in the exhaust gas, coolant temperature, intake air temperature and atmospheric pressure etc. and convert the information into an electrical signal which is sent to the PCME. Based on these signals, the PCME calculates the optimum ignition timing for the current conditions and operates the injectors. The PCME not only controls the fuel injection timing, but also the self diagnostic function which records the occurrence of a malfunction, ignition timing control, idle rpm control, fuel pressure control and fuel pump control.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Precaution / Maintenance Precautions
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p95 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL BEFORE FUEL SYSTEM WORK
Before working on the fuel system, disconnect the cable from negative (–) terminal of the battery. Any diagnostic trouble code retained by the computer will be erased when the battery terminal is removed. Therefore, if necessary, read the diagnosis before removing the terminal.
-
NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAMES NEAR FUEL SYSTEM
Do not smoke or work near an open flame when working on the fuel system.
-
KEEP GASOLINE AWAY FROM RUBBER OR LEATHER PARTS
Keep gasoline away from rubber or leather parts.
-
CHECK CORRECT ENGINE TUNE-UP
See Tune-Up under Engine Mechanical.
-
PRECAUTION WHEN CONNECTING GAUGE
Use battery as the power source for the timing light, tachometer, etc. Connect the tester probe of a tachometer to the terminal IG– of the data link connector 1.
-
IN EVENT OF ENGINE MISFIRE, FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN
Check proper connection of battery terminals, etc. Handle high-tension cords carefully. After repair work, check that the ignition coil terminals and all other ignition system lines are reconnected securely. When cleaning the engine compartment, be especially careful to protect the electrical system from water.
-
PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING OXYGEN SENSOR
Do not allow oxygen sensor to drop or hit against an object. Do not allow the sensor to come into contact with water.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p96 OEM manual
-
IF VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM (HAM, CB, ETC.)
The PCME has been designed so that it will not be affected by outside interference. However, if your vehicle is equipped with a CB radio transceiver, etc. (even one with about 10 W output), it may, at times, have an affect upon PCME operation, especially if the antenna and feeder are installed nearby.
-
INSTALL ANTENNA FAR FROM PCME
Install the antenna as far away as possible from the PCME. The PCME is located on the partition panel into rear luggage compartment so the antenna should be installed at the rear side of the vehicle.
-
KEEP ANTENNA FEEDER AWAY FROM PCME WIRES
Keep the antenna feeder as far away as possible from the PCME wires — at least 20 cm (7.87 in.) — and, especially, do not wind them together.
-
CHECK FEEDER AND ANTENNA ADJUSTMENT
Check that the feeder and antenna are properly adjusted.
-
DO NOT EQUIP WITH POWERFUL MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Do not equip your vehicle with a powerful mobile radio system.
-
DO NOT OPEN PCME COVER UNLESS NECESSARY
Do not open the cover or the case of the PCME unless absolutely necessary. If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.
- If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM — SEPARATION OF COMPONENTS
Separation of the engine oil dipstick, oil filler cap, PCV hose, etc. may cause the engine to run out of turn.
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM — DISCONNECTION OR CRACKS
Disconnection, looseness or cracks in the parts of the air induction system between the throttle body and cylinder head will allow air suction and cause the engine to run out of tune.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM — DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE REMOVING CONNECTORS
Before removing SMPI wiring connectors, terminals, etc., first disconnect the power by either turning the ignition switch OFF or disconnecting the battery terminals. HINT: Always check the diagnostic trouble code before disconnecting the battery terminal.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p97 OEM manual
-
BATTERY CONNECTION
When installing the battery, be especially careful not to incorrectly connect the positive (+) and negative (–) cables.
-
HANDLE PARTS CAREFULLY DURING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Do not permit parts to receive a severe impact during removal or installation. Handle all SMPI parts carefully, especially the PCME.
-
TAKE CARE DURING TROUBLESHOOTING
Do not be careless during troubleshooting as there are numerous transistor circuits and even slight terminal contact can further troubles.
-
DO NOT OPEN THE PCME COVER
Do not open the PCME cover.
-
PREVENT WATER ENTRY DURING INSPECTION
When inspecting during rainy weather, take care to prevent entry of water. Also, when washing the engine compartment, prevent water from getting on the SMPI parts and wiring connectors.
-
REPLACE PARTS AS AN ASSEMBLY
Parts should be replaced as an assembly.
-
CARE WHEN HANDLING WIRING CONNECTORS
Care is required when pulling out and inserting wiring connectors.
-
INSPECTING A CONNECTOR WITH A VOLT/OHMMETER
When inspecting a connector with a volt/ohmmeter.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · FUEL SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p98 OEM manual
-
INSERT TEST PROBE FROM WIRING SIDE
Insert the test probe into the connector from wiring side when checking the continuity, amperage or voltage. Do not apply unnecessary force to the terminal. After checking, install the water-proofing rubber on the connector securely.
-
USE SST FOR INJECTOR INSPECTION
Use SST for inspection or test of the injector, cold start injector or its wiring connector. SST 09842-30050 (A) for cold start injector; SST 09842-30060 (B) for injector.
-
DISCONNECTING HIGH FUEL PRESSURE LINE
When disconnecting the high fuel pressure line, a large amount of gasoline will spill out, so observe the following procedures.
-
CONNECTING FLARE NUT OR UNION BOLT ON HIGH PRESSURE PIPE UNION
When connecting the flare nut or union bolt on the high pressure pipe union, observe the following procedures.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · PREPARATION
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p101 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
Lists all special service tools required for SMPI system service on the 3S-GTE engine.
-
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
Lists recommended tools for SMPI system service on the 3S-GTE engine.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Equipment
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p102 OEM manual
-
EQUIPMENT
List of equipment and their associated components: Graduated cylinder (Injector), Carburetor cleaner (Throttle body), Sound scope (Injector), Tachometer, Torque wrench, Vacuum gauge, Soft brush (Throttle body).
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS — SERVICE DATA
Maintenance
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p103 OEM manual
-
SERVICE DATA — 3S-GTE SMPI SYSTEM
Reference table of resistance, pressure, and electrical specifications for fuel system components including fuel pressure regulator, fuel pump, cold start injector, injector, air flow sensor, throttle body, throttle position sensor, IACV, cold start injector time switch, ECTS, solenoid resistor, fuel pump resistor, VSV (T-VIS), and VSV (Turbocharging pressure).
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · SOLENOID RESISTOR
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p106 OEM manual
-
SOLENOID RESISTOR WIRING
The solenoid resistor is powered via the ignition switch (IG2) through the AM2 40A fuse and Ignition Main Relay. Battery positive (+B) feeds the solenoid resistor assembly which supplies resistors #10, #20, #30, #40 to injectors No.10, No.20, No.30, No.40. The PCME controls injectors via terminals #4, #3, #2, #1, E01, E02. The AM2 7.5A fuse protects the AM2 branch from the MAIN FL 2.0L fusible link and battery.
-
COMPONENTS FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
The solenoid resistor assembly is located in the engine bay alongside the A/C Idle-Up Valve. Disconnect the Solenoid Resistor Connector and Fuel Pump Connector prior to removal. The solenoid resistor mounts to a bracket and is secured with screws/bolts. The fuel pump connector is located at the base of the assembly.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Solenoid Resistor
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p107 OEM manual
-
SOLENOID RESISTOR REPLACEMENT
See Components for Removal and Installation.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · THROTTLE BODY
Body
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p109 OEM manual
-
THROTTLE BODY
Diagram showing the Throttle Body assembly location including the Throttle Body, Throttle Position Sensor, and Throttle Opener on the 3S-GTE engine. Also includes a wiring diagram showing the Throttle Position Sensor connector pinout (E2, IDL, VTA, VC) and its connection to the PCME terminals (E2, IDL, VTA, VC, E1, +B/+B1).
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Throttle Body
Body
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p115 OEM manual
-
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT — APPLY VACUUM AND SET FEELER GAUGE
(b) Apply vacuum to the throttle opener. (c) Insert a 0.60 mm (0.024 in.) feeler gauge between the throttle stop screw and stop lever. (d) Connect the test probe of an ohmmeter to the terminals IDL and E2 of the sensor.
-
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT — ROTATE SENSOR
(e) Gradually turn the sensor clockwise until the ohmmeter deflects, and secure it with the two set screws.
-
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ADJUSTMENT — RECHECK CONTINUITY
(f) Recheck the continuity between terminals IDL and E2. At 0.50 mm (0.020 in.) clearance between lever and stop screw: Continuity. At 0.70 mm (0.028 in.) clearance: No continuity.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · TROUBLESHOOTING WITH VOLT OHMMETER
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p117 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE BASIS
The following troubleshooting procedures are designed for inspection of each separate system, and therefore the actual procedure may vary somewhat. However, troubleshooting should be performed while referring to the inspection methods described in this manual.
-
PRE-INSPECTION CHECK
Before beginning inspection, it is best to first make a simple check of the fuses, H-fuses, fusible link and the condition of the connectors.
-
TROUBLESHOOTING ASSUMPTION
The following troubleshooting procedures are based on the supposition that the trouble lies in either a short or open circuit within the computer.
-
PCME REPLACEMENT CONDITION
If engine trouble occurs even though proper operating voltage is detected in the computer connector, then it can be assumed that the PCME is faulty and should be replaced.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · Diagnostic Procedures
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p123 OEM manual
-
VTA – et DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Step 1: There is no specified voltage at PCME terminals VTA and E2. (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between PCME terminals VC and E2. (IG SW ON). If NO, refer to VC–E2 trouble section. Step 3: If VC-E2 OK, check throttle position sensor (See page EG1-362). If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, check wiring between PCME and throttle position sensor. If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, try another PCME.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · EG1-305
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p129 OEM manual
-
CHECK FOR NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN IGT AND E1 (IDLING)
Diagnostic procedure for trouble code 9: No voltage between PCME terminals IGT and E1 during idling. Standard voltage should be pulse generation.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM
Unclassified
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p133 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSTIC CHECK — AC TO E1 NO VOLTAGE (No. 13)
Diagnostic flowchart for trouble code No. 13: terminals AC–E1, trouble = No voltage, condition = Air conditioning ON, STD voltage = 9–14 V. Step 1: Confirm there is no voltage between PCME terminals AC and E1 with air conditioning ON. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between PCME terminal AC and body ground. If NO → Check compressor running; if BAD → Check that there is voltage between amplifier terminal and body ground; if BAD → Repair or replace; if OK → Check wiring between amplifier and PCME or compressor; if BAD → Repair or replace. If OK (voltage present at AC to body ground) → Step 3: Check wiring between PCME terminal E1 and body ground; if OK → Try another PCME; if BAD → Repair or replace. After Step 2 OK path also leads to: Check wiring between PCME terminal AC and amplifier; if BAD → Repair or replace.
3S-GTE ENGINE · SMPI SYSTEM · EGR Function Sensor Diagnostic
Emission control
RM285U_1993_3sgte_smpisyst · p135 OEM manual
-
EGR FUNCTION SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS — NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN THG AND E2
Diagnostic flowchart for condition: There is no voltage between PCME terminals THG and E2 (IG SW ON). Applies to California-spec vehicles only with 3S-GTE engine SMPI system.
-
STEP 1 — CHECK +B SUPPLY TO PCME
Check that there is voltage between PCME terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If OK, proceed to next step. If NO, refer to No.1 (See page EG1-296).
-
STEP 2 — CHECK E1 GROUND WIRING
Check wiring between PCME terminal E1 and body ground. If OK, proceed. If BAD, repair or replace.
-
STEP 3 — CHECK EGR SYSTEM
Check EGR system (See page EG1-243). If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, proceed to check EGR function sensor.
-
STEP 4 — CHECK EGR FUNCTION SENSOR
Check EGR function sensor (See page EG1-402). If BAD, replace EGR function sensor. If OK, check wiring between PCME and EGR function sensor. If wiring OK, try another PCME. If wiring BAD, repair or replace.
FOREWORD
Introduction
AW11_1988_full · p1 OEM manual
-
FOREWORD
This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for the 1988 MR 2. Applicable model: AW11 series. The manual is divided into 21 sections and 5 appendixes with a thumb index for each section at the edge of the pages. All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. However, specifications and procedures are subject to change without notice.
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
AW11_1988_full · p3 OEM manual
-
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
See page IN-2
-
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
See page IN-4
-
GENERAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
See page IN-4
-
PRECAUTIONS FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH A CATALYTIC CONVERTER
See page IN-6
-
VEHICLE LIFT AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS
See page IN-7
-
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
See page IN-8
INTRODUCTION · How to Use This Manual
Introduction
AW11_1988_full · p4 OEM manual
-
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL — NAVIGATION
To assist you in finding your way through the manual, the Section Title and major heading are given at the top of every page.
-
INDEX
An INDEX is provided on the first page of each section to guide you to the item to be repaired.
-
PRECAUTIONS
At the beginning of each section, PRECAUTIONS are given that pertain to all repair operations contained in that section. Read these precautions before starting any repair task.
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING tables are included for each system to help you diagnose the system problem and find the cause. The repair for each possible cause is referenced in the remedy column to quickly lead you to the solution.
-
REPAIR PROCEDURES
Most repair operations begin with an overview illustration. It identifies the components and shows how the parts fit together.
INTRODUCTION · How to Use This Manual
Introduction
AW11_1988_full · p5 OEM manual
-
STEP-BY-STEP FORMAT
The procedures are presented in a step-by-step format: Illustration shows what to do and where to do it. The task heading tells what to do. The detailed text tells how to perform the task and gives other information such as specifications and warnings.
-
REFERENCES
References have been kept to a minimum. However, when they are required you are given the page to go to.
-
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications are presented in bold type throughout the text in the applicable step. You never have to leave the procedure to look up your specs. All specifications are also found in Appendix A, Specifications, for quick reference.
-
WARNINGS
WARNINGS are presented in bold type, and indicate there is a possibility of injury to you or other people.
-
CAUTIONS
CAUTIONS are also presented in bold type, and indicate the possibility of damage to the components being repaired.
-
NOTES
NOTES are separated from the text but do not appear in bold. They provide additional information to help you efficiently perform the repair.
INTRODUCTION · Identification Information, General Repair Instructions
Introduction
AW11_1988_full · p6 OEM manual
-
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is stamped on the front luggage end panel of the front luggage compartment. This number is also stamped on top of the instrument panel and the driver's door.
-
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block, as shown.
-
USE PROTECTIVE COVERS
Use fender seat and floor covers to keep the vehicle clean and prevent damage.
-
KEEP PARTS IN ORDER DURING DISASSEMBLY
During disassembly, keep parts in order to facilitate reassembly.
-
OBSERVE BATTERY SAFETY PROCEDURES
Observe the following when performing electrical work or disconnecting the battery.
-
CHECK HOSE AND WIRING CONNECTORS
Check hose and wiring connectors to make sure that they are secure and correct.
-
NON-REUSABLE PARTS
Always replace cotter pins, gaskets, O-rings and oil seals etc. with new ones. Non-reusable parts are indicated in the component illustrations by the '◆' symbol.
INTRODUCTION · General Repair Instructions
Introduction
AW11_1988_full · p7 OEM manual
-
PRECOATED PARTS
Precoated parts are the bolts and nuts, which have been coated with a seal lock adhesive at the factory. If a precoated part is retightened, loosened or caused to move in any way, it must be recoated with the specified adhesive. Precoated parts are indicated in the component illustrations by the "★" symbol.
-
USE SEALER ON GASKETS
When necessary, use a sealer on gaskets to prevent leaks.
-
OBSERVE BOLT TIGHTENING TORQUES
Carefully observe all specifications for bolt tightening torques. Always use a torque wrench.
-
USE SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS (SST) AND SPECIAL SERVICE MATERIALS (SSM)
Use of special service tools (SST) and special service materials (SSM) may be required, depending on the nature of the repair. Be sure to use SST and SSM where specified and follow the proper work procedure. A list of SST and SSM can be found at the back of this manual.
-
REPLACING FUSES
When replacing fuses, be sure the new fuse has the correct amperage rating. DO NOT exceed the fuse amp rating or use one of a lower rating.
-
JACKING UP AND SUPPORTING THE VEHICLE
Care must be taken when jacking up and supporting the vehicle. Be sure to lift and support the vehicle at the proper locations (See page IN-7).
-
PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID DAMAGE TO PARTS
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to parts:
- Do not open the cover or the case of the ECU unless absolutely necessary. If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.
INTRODUCTION · General Repair Instructions · Precautions for Vehicles Equipped with a Catalytic Converter
Introduction
AW11_1988_full · p8 OEM manual
-
STEAM CLEANING ENGINE
When steam cleaning an engine, protect the distributor, coil and air filter from water.
-
THERMO SWITCHES AND SENSORS
Never use an impact wrench to remove or install thermo switches or thermo sensors.
-
CHECKING CONTINUITY AT WIRE CONNECTOR
When checking continuity at the wire connector, insert the tester probe carefully to prevent terminals from bending.
-
USING A VACUUM GAUGE
When using a vacuum gauge, never force the hose onto a connector that is too large. Use a step-down adapter instead. Once the hose has been stretched, it may leak.
-
TAG HOSES BEFORE DISCONNECTING THEM
Tag hoses before disconnecting them.
-
USE ONLY UNLEADED GASOLINE
Use only unleaded gasoline.
- If large amounts of unburned gasoline flow into the converter, it may overheat and create a fire hazard. To prevent this, observe the following precautions and explain them to your customer.
-
AVOID PROLONGED IDLING
Avoid running the engine at idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
-
AVOID SPARK JUMP TEST
Avoid spark jump test.
-
AVOID PROLONGED ENGINE COMPRESSION MEASUREMENT
Engine compression tests must be made as quickly as possible.
-
DO NOT RUN ENGINE WHEN FUEL TANK IS NEARLY EMPTY
This may cause the engine to misfire and create an extra load on the converter.
-
AVOID COASTING WITH IGNITION TURNED OFF AND PROLONGED BRAKING
Avoid coasting with ignition turned off and prolonged braking.
-
DO NOT DISPOSE OF A USED CATALYST ALONG WITH PARTS CONTAMINATED WITH GASOLINE OR OIL
Do not dispose of a used catalyst along with parts contaminated with gasoline or oil.
INTRODUCTION · Vehicle Lift and Support Locations
Introduction
AW11_1988_full · p9 OEM manual
-
JACK POSITION — FRONT
Jack up support of front luggage pan.
-
JACK POSITION — REAR
Rear engine mounting.
-
PANTOGRAPH JACK POSITION
Use seam notches on the vehicle body for pantograph jack positioning, as illustrated.
-
SUPPORT POSITION — SAFETY STAND
Safety stand positions are indicated by the hatched (diagonal lines) symbols on the underside diagram.
-
SWING ARM LIFT NOTE
If the arms of the swing arm lift cannot be positioned as shown by the rectangles above, position them under the floor pan reinforcements shown by the hexagons.
INTRODUCTION · Abbreviations Used in This Manual
Introduction
AW11_1988_full · p10 OEM manual
-
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
ABV: Air By-pass Valve; A/C: Air Conditioner; A/T, ATM: Automatic Transaxle; B1: Second Coast Brake; B2: Second Brake; B3: First and Reverse Brake; B4: Underdrive Brake; BTDC: Before Top Dead Center; BVSV: Bimetal Vacuum Switching Valve; C1: Forward Clutch; C2: Direct Clutch; C3: Underdrive Clutch; Calif.: Vehicles Sold in California; C/B: Circuit Breaker; DP: Dash Pot; ECT: Electronic Controlled Transaxle; ECU: Electronic Controlled Unit; EFI: Electronic Fuel Injection; EGR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation; ELR: Emergency Locking Retractor; ESA: Electronic Spark Advance; EVAP: Evaporative (Emission Control); EX: Exhaust (Manifold, Valve); Ex.: Except; F1: No. 1 One-way Clutch; F2: No. 2 One-way Clutch; F3: Underdrive One-way Clutch; FIPG: Formed in Place Gasket; FL: Fusible Link; FPU: Fuel Pressure Up; IG: Ignition; IN: Intake (Manifold, Valve); ISC: Idle Speed Control; LH: Left-hand; Max.: Maximum; Min.: Minimum; MP: Multipurpose; M/T, MTM: Manual Transaxle; N: Neutral; O/D: Overdrive; O/S: Oversize; PCV: Positive Crankcase Ventilation; PS: Power Steering; RH: Right-hand; SSM: Special Service Materials; SST: Special Service Tools; STD: Standard; S/W: Switch; TCCS: TOYOTA Computer Controlled System; TDC: Top Dead Center; TWC: Three-way Catalyst; UD: Underdrive; U/S: Undersize; VSV: Vacuum Switching Valve; VTV: Vacuum Transmitting Valve; w/: With; w/o: Without
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
AW11_1988_full · p11 OEM manual
-
PERFORM ALL PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Every service item in the periodic maintenance list must be performed.
-
FAILURE TO MAINTAIN CAUSES POOR ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Failure to do even one item can cause the engine to run poorly and increase exhaust emissions.
MAINTENANCE · Maintenance Operations · Engine — Cold Engine Operations
Maintenance
AW11_1988_full · p14 OEM manual
-
NEW BELT DEFINITION
"New belt" refers to a belt which has been used less than 5 minutes on a running engine.
-
USED BELT DEFINITION
"Used belt" refers to a belt which has been used on a running engine for 5 minutes or more.
-
CHECK BELT SEATING AFTER REPLACEMENT
After replacing the drive belt, check that it fits properly in the ribbed grooves, especially in the places difficult to see.
-
RECHECK TENSION AFTER NEW BELT INSTALLATION
After installing a new belt, run the engine for about 5 minutes and then recheck the tension.
MAINTENANCE · Maintenance Operations
Maintenance
AW11_1988_full · p17 OEM manual
-
INSPECT FUEL LINES AND CONNECTIONS
Visually inspect the fuel lines for cracks, leakage, loose connections, deformation or tank band looseness.
-
INSPECT EXHAUST PIPE AND MOUNTINGS
Visually inspect the pipes, hangers and connections for severe corrosion, leaks or damage.
-
ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE
Check and adjust the valve clearance while the engine is cold. (a) Remove the valve covers. (b) Measure and adjust valve clearance (See step 3 on page EM-7). (c) Reinstall the valve covers.
MAINTENANCE · Maintenance Operations
Maintenance
AW11_1988_full · p19 OEM manual
-
INSPECT STEERING GEAR HOUSING OIL
Check the steering gear housing for oil leakage.
-
CHECK STEERING LINKAGE
Check the steering linkage for looseness and damage. Check that: tie rod ends do not have excessive play; dust seals and boots are not damaged; boot clamps are not loose.
MAINTENANCE · General Maintenance
Maintenance
AW11_1988_full · p22 OEM manual
-
TIRES
Check the pressure with a gauge. If necessary, adjust. Check for cuts, damage or excessive wear.
-
WHEEL NUTS
When checking the tires, check the nuts for looseness or for missing nuts. If necessary, tighten them.
-
TIRE ROTATION
It is recommended that the tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
-
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Check for wear or cracks whenever they do not wipe clean. Replace if necessary.
-
FLUID LEAKS
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid. If you smell gasoline fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected.
-
DOORS AND HOODS
Check that all doors and hoods including the trunk lid operate smoothly, and that all latches lock securely. Check that the front hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
-
LIGHTS
Check that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all working.
-
WARNING LIGHTS AND BUZZERS
Check that all warning lights and buzzers function properly.
-
HORN
Check that it is working.
-
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Check for scratches, pits or abrasions.
-
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
Check operation of the wipers and washer. Check that the wipers do not streak.
-
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
Check that air comes out from the defroster outlet when operating the heater or air conditioner.
-
REAR VIEW MIRROR
Check that it is mounted securely.
-
SUN VISORS
Check that they move freely and are mounted securely.
-
STEERING WHEEL
Check that it has specified freeplay. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive freeplay or strange noise.
-
SEATS
Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the locks hold securely in any latched position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.
MAINTENANCE · General Maintenance
Maintenance
AW11_1988_full · p23 OEM manual
-
SEAT BELTS
Check that the seat belt system such as the buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Check that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
-
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.
-
CLUTCH PEDAL (See page CL-3)
Check the pedal for smooth operation. Check that the pedal has the proper freeplay.
-
BRAKE PEDAL (See page BR-5)
Check the pedal for smooth operation. Check that the pedal has the proper reserve distance and freeplay. Check the brake booster function.
-
BRAKES
At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.
-
PARKING BRAKE (See page BR-7)
Check that the lever has the proper travel. On a safe incline, check that vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.
-
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Check that there is sufficient fluid in the tank.
-
RADIATOR AND HOSES
Check that the front of the radiator is clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt or bugs. Check the hoses for cracks, kinks, rot or loose connections.
-
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID LEVELS
Check that the brake fluid level is near the upper level line on the see-through reservoir. Check that the clutch fluid level is within ±5 mm (0.20 in.) of the reservoir hem.
-
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check that the coolant level is between the 'FULL' and 'LOW' lines on the see-through reservoir.
-
HOSES AND CONNECTIONS
Check the hoses for cracks, kinks, rot or loose connection.
-
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
Check that the electrolyte level of all battery cells is between the upper and lower level lines on the case. If level is low, add distilled water only.
-
ENGINE DRIVE BELTS
Check all drive belts for fraying, cracks wear on oiliness.
-
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off.
-
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
Park the vehicle on a level surface. With the engine idling and the parking brake applied, shift the selector into all positions from 'P' to 'L', and then shift into 'P'. Pull out the dipstick and wipe off the fluid with a clean rag. Reinsert the dipstick and check that the fluid level is in the 'HOT' range. Perform this check with the fluid at normal driving temperature (70-80°C or 158-176°F). NOTE: Wait until the engine cools (about 30 min.) before checking the fluid level after extended high-speed driving in hot weather, driving in heavy traffic or pulling a trailer.
-
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually inspect for cracks, holes or loose supports. If any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell of the exhaust fumes is noticed, have the cause located and corrected.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-up
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p31 OEM manual
-
REMOVE ADJUSTING SHIM
Remove the adjusting shim with a small screwdriver and magnetic finger.
-
DETERMINE REPLACEMENT ADJUSTING SHIM SIZE
Determine the replacement adjusting shim size following Formula or Charts: Using a micrometer, measure the thickness of the shim which was removed. Calculate the thickness of a new shim so the valve clearance comes within specified value. T = Thickness of used shim, A = Measured valve clearance, N = Thickness of new shim. Intake: N = T + (A - 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)). Exhaust: N = T + (A - 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)). Select a new shim with a thickness as close as possible to the calculated values. Shims are available in seventeen sizes of 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.), from 2.50 mm (0.0984 in.) to 3.30 mm (0.1299 in.).
-
INSTALL A NEW ADJUSTING SHIM
Place a new adjusting shim on the valve lifter. Using SST (A), press down the valve lifter and remove SST (B). SST 09248-55010.
-
RECHECK VALVE CLEARANCE
Recheck the valve clearance.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-up · Adjusting Shim Selection Using Chart
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p32 OEM manual
-
ADJUSTING SHIM SELECTION USING CHART — INTAKE
Use the Installed Shim Thickness (mm) chart cross-referenced with the Measured Clearance (mm) to determine the correct replacement shim number. Example: A 2.800 mm shim is installed and the measured clearance is 0.450 mm. Replace the 2.800 mm shim with shim No. 24 (3.050 mm).
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-up · Adjusting Shim Selection Using Chart
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p33 OEM manual
-
ADJUSTING SHIM SELECTION USING CHART — EXHAUST
Use the chart to select the correct replacement shim. Find the row corresponding to the measured valve clearance, then find the column corresponding to the installed shim thickness. The intersection gives the replacement shim number. Example: A 2.800 mm shim is installed and the measured clearance is 0.450 mm. Replace the 2.800 mm shim with shim No. 22 (3.000 mm).
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-up
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p35 OEM manual
-
FURTHER CHECK IDLE SPEED
Idle speed: 800 rpm. If the idle speed is not within this value carry out either of the belowlisted procedures and then recheck the idle speed. Carry out a driving test, including stop-go several times at a speed above 10 km/h, or start the engine, idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine off repeatedly. By doing this, idle data will be stored in the ISC and the idle rpm will be at specified value.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-up · Troubleshooting
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p36 OEM manual
-
HC High, CO Normal — Rough Idle
Possible causes: 1. Faulty ignition: Incorrect timing, Fouled/shorted/improperly gapped plugs, Open or crossed high-tension cords, Cracked distributor cap. 2. Incorrect valve clearance. 3. Leaky EGR valve. 4. Leaky intake and exhaust valves. 5. Leaky cylinder.
-
HC High, CO Low — Rough Idle / Fluctuating HC Reading
Possible causes: 1. Vacuum leak: PCV hose, EGR valve, Intake manifold, Intake air control valve (4A-GE), Throttle body, Brake booster line. 2. Lean mixture causing misfire.
-
HC High, CO High — Rough Idle / Black Smoke from Exhaust
Possible causes: 1. Restricted air filter. 2. Faulty EFI system: Faulty pressure regulator, Clogged fuel return line, Defective water temp. sensor, Defective air temp. sensor, Faulty ECU, Faulty injector, Faulty cold start injector, Faulty throttle position sensor, Air flow meter.
MAINTENANCE · General Maintenance
Maintenance
AW11_1988_full · p41 OEM manual
-
TIRES
Check the pressure with a gauge. If necessary, adjust. Check for cuts, damage or excessive wear.
-
WHEEL NUTS
When checking the tires, check the nuts for looseness or for missing nuts. If necessary, tighten them.
-
TIRE ROTATION
It is recommended that the tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
-
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Check for wear or cracks whenever they do not wipe clean. Replace if necessary.
-
FLUID LEAKS
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid. If you smell gasoline fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected.
-
DOORS AND HOODS
Check that all doors and hoods including the trunk lid operate smoothly, and that all latches lock securely. Check that the front hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
-
LIGHTS
Check that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all working.
-
WARNING LIGHTS AND BUZZERS
Check that all warning lights and buzzers function properly.
-
HORN
Check that it is working.
-
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Check for scratches, pits or abrasions.
-
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
Check operation of the wipers and washer. Check that the wipers do not streak.
-
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
Check that air comes out from the defroster outlet when operating the heater or air conditioner.
-
REAR VIEW MIRROR
Check that it is mounted securely.
-
SUN VISORS
Check that they move freely and are mounted securely.
-
STEERING WHEEL
Check that it has specified freeplay. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive freeplay or strange noise.
-
SEATS
Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that all latches lock securely in any position. Check that the locks hold securely in any latched position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.
MAINTENANCE · General Maintenance
Maintenance
AW11_1988_full · p42 OEM manual
-
SEAT BELTS
Check that the seat belt system such as the buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Check that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
-
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching.
-
CLUTCH PEDAL (See page CL-3)
Check the pedal for smooth operation. Check that the pedal has the proper freeplay.
-
BRAKE PEDAL (See page BR-5)
Check the pedal for smooth operation. Check that the pedal has the proper reserve distance and freeplay. Check the brake booster function.
-
BRAKES
At a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied.
-
PARKING BRAKE (See page BR-7)
Check that the lever has the proper travel. On a safe incline, check that vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied.
-
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Check that there is sufficient fluid in the tank.
-
RADIATOR AND HOSES
Check that the front of the radiator is clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt or bugs. Check the hoses for cracks, kinks, rot or loose connections.
-
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID LEVELS
Check that the brake fluid level is near the upper level line on the see-through reservoir. Check that the clutch fluid level is within ±5 mm (0.20 in.) of the reservoir hem.
-
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check that the coolant level is between the 'FULL' and 'LOW' lines on the see-through reservoir.
-
HOSES AND CONNECTIONS
Check the hoses for cracks, kinks, rot or loose connection.
-
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
Check that the electrolyte level of all battery cells is between the upper and lower level lines on the case. If level is low, add distilled water only.
-
ENGINE DRIVE BELTS
Check all drive belts for fraying, cracks wear on oiliness.
-
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off.
-
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL
Park the vehicle on a level surface. With the engine idling and the parking brake applied, shift the selector into all positions from 'P' to 'L', and then shift into 'P'. Pull out the dipstick and wipe off the fluid with a clean rag. Reinsert the dipstick and check that the fluid level is in the 'HOT' range. Perform this check with the fluid at normal driving temperature (70-80°C or 158-176°F). NOTE: Wait until the engine cools (about 30 min.) before checking the fluid level after extended high-speed driving in hot weather, driving in heavy traffic or pulling a trailer.
-
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually inspect for cracks, holes or loose supports. If any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell of the exhaust fumes is noticed, have the cause located and corrected.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-up
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p50 OEM manual
-
REMOVE ADJUSTING SHIM
Remove the adjusting shim with a small screwdriver and magnetic finger.
-
DETERMINE REPLACEMENT ADJUSTING SHIM SIZE
Determine the replacement adjusting shim size following Formula or Charts: Using a micrometer, measure the thickness of the shim which was removed. Calculate the thickness of a new shim so the valve clearance comes within specified value. T = Thickness of used shim, A = Measured valve clearance, N = Thickness of new shim. Intake: N = T + (A - 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)). Exhaust: N = T + (A - 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)). Select a new shim with a thickness as close as possible to the calculated values. NOTE: Shims are available in seventeen sizes of 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.), from 2.50 mm (0.0984 in.) to 3.30 mm (0.1299 in.).
-
INSTALL NEW ADJUSTING SHIM
Place a new adjusting shim on the valve lifter. Using SST (A) 09248-55010, press down the valve lifter and remove SST (B).
-
RECHECK VALVE CLEARANCE
Recheck the valve clearance after installing the new adjusting shim.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-up · Adjusting Shim Selection Using Chart
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p51 OEM manual
-
ADJUSTING SHIM SELECTION USING CHART — INTAKE
Use the Installed Shim Thickness (mm) chart cross-referenced with the Measured Clearance (mm) to determine the correct replacement shim number. Example: A 2.800 mm shim is installed and the measured clearance is 0.450 mm. Replace the 2.800 mm shim with shim No. 24 (3.050 mm).
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-up · Adjusting Shim Selection Using Chart
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p52 OEM manual
-
ADJUSTING SHIM SELECTION USING CHART — EXHAUST
Use the chart to select the correct replacement shim. Find the row corresponding to the measured clearance (mm) and the column corresponding to the installed shim thickness (shim number). The intersecting cell gives the replacement shim number. Example: A 2.800 mm shim (No. 14) is installed and the measured clearance is 0.450 mm. Replace the 2.800 mm shim with shim No. 22 (3.000 mm).
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-up · Idle HC/CO Concentration Check Method
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p54 OEM manual
-
FURTHER CHECK IDLE SPEED
Idle speed: 800 rpm. If the idle speed is not within this value carry out either of the belowlisted procedures and then recheck the idle speed. Carry out a driving test, including stop-go several times at a speed above 10 km/h, or start the engine, idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine off repeatedly. By doing this, idle data will be stored in the ISC and the idle rpm will be at specified value.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-up · Troubleshooting
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p55 OEM manual
-
Troubleshooting: High HC, Normal CO — Rough idle
Possible causes: 1. Faulty ignition: Incorrect timing, Fouled/shorted/improperly gapped plugs, Open or crossed high-tension cords, Cracked distributor cap. 2. Incorrect valve clearance. 3. Leaky EGR valve. 4. Leaky intake and exhaust valves. 5. Leaky cylinder.
-
Troubleshooting: High HC, Low CO — Rough idle, Fluctuating HC reading
Possible causes: 1. Vacuum leak: PCV hose, EGR valve, Intake manifold, Intake air control valve (4A-GE), Throttle body, Brake booster line. 2. Lean mixture causing misfire.
-
Troubleshooting: High HC, High CO — Rough idle, Black smoke from exhaust
Possible causes: 1. Restricted air filter. 2. Faulty EFI system: Faulty pressure regulator, Clogged fuel return line, Defective water temp. sensor, Defective air temp. sensor, Faulty ECU, Faulty injector, Faulty cold start injector, Faulty throttle position sensor, Air flow meter.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Timing Belt · Inspection of Timing Belt Components
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p61 OEM manual
-
INSPECT TIMING BELT
Inspect the timing belt for defects. Check the following points if defects are found.
- Do not bend, twist or turn the timing belt inside out.
- Do not allow the timing belt to come into contact with oil, water or steam.
- Do not utilize timing belt tension when installing or removing the mount bolt of the camshaft timing pulley.
-
PREMATURE PARTING CHECK
If there is premature parting, check for proper installation and check timing cover gasket for damage and proper installation.
-
CRACKED OR DAMAGED BELT TEETH CHECK
If the belt teeth are cracked or damaged, check to see if either the camshaft or water pump is locked.
-
WEAR OR CRACKS ON BELT FACE CHECK
If there is noticeable wear or cracks on the belt face, check to see if there are nicks on the side of the idler pulley lock.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head (4A-GE)
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p74 OEM manual
-
TIMING BELT HANDLING NOTES
Support the belt so the meshing of the crankshaft timing pulley and timing belt does not shift. Be careful not to drop anything inside the timing belt cover. Do not allow the belt to come into contact with oil, water or dust.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head (4A-GE)
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p83 OEM manual
-
HAND-LAP VALVE AND VALVE SEAT
Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound.
-
CLEAN VALVE AND VALVE SEAT
Clean the valve and valve seat after hand-lapping.
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · Automatic Transaxle · Specifications (A241E/4A-GZE)
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p1003 OEM manual
-
ENGINE IDLE SPEED (Cooling fan and A/C OFF)
800 rpm
-
ENGINE STALL REVOLUTION
2,650 ± 150 rpm
-
TIME LAG — N range → D range
Less than 1.2 seconds
-
TIME LAG — N range → R range
Less than 1.5 seconds
-
SHIFT POINT — D range NORM — 1→2
46-50 km/h (29-31 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range NORM — 2→3
88-96 km/h (55-60 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range NORM — 3→OD
132-140 km/h (82-87 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range NORM — [3→OD]
30-35 km/h (19-22 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range NORM — [OD→3]
19-23 km/h (12-14 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range NORM — OD→3
126-134 km/h (78-83 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range NORM — 3→2
82-90 km/h (51-56 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range NORM — 2→1
42-46 km/h (26-29 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range PWR — 1→2
51-56 km/h (32-35 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range PWR — 2→3
95-103 km/h (59-64 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range PWR — 3→OD
150-159 km/h (93-99 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range PWR — [3→OD]
40-46 km/h (25-29 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range PWR — [OD→3]
19-23 km/h (12-14 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range PWR — OD→3
143-152 km/h (89-94 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range PWR — 3→2
89-97 km/h (55-60 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — D range PWR — 2→1
42-46 km/h (26-29 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — 2 range NORM — 1→2
51-56 km/h (32-35 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — 2 range PWR — 1→2
51-56 km/h (32-35 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — 2 range NORM — 2→1
42-46 km/h (26-29 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — 2 range PWR — 2→1
42-46 km/h (26-29 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
SHIFT POINT — L range NORM — 2→1
46-50 km/h (29-31 mph), throttle valve fully open
-
LOCK-UP POINT — D range NORM — Lock-up ON — 3rd (OD switch OFF)
66-70 km/h (41-43 mph), throttle valve opening 5%
-
LOCK-UP POINT — D range NORM — Lock-up ON — OD
54-59 km/h (34-37 mph), throttle valve opening 5%
-
LOCK-UP POINT — D range NORM — Lock-up OFF — 3rd (OD switch OFF)
60-65 km/h (37-40 mph), throttle valve opening 5%
-
LOCK-UP POINT — D range NORM — Lock-up OFF — OD
51-56 km/h (32-35 mph), throttle valve opening 5%
-
LOCK-UP POINT — D range PWR — Lock-up ON — 3rd (OD switch OFF)
103-112 km/h (64-70 mph), throttle valve opening 5%
-
LOCK-UP POINT — D range PWR — Lock-up ON — OD
81-89 km/h (50-55 mph), throttle valve opening 5%
-
LOCK-UP POINT — D range PWR — Lock-up OFF — 3rd (OD switch OFF)
95-103 km/h (59-64 mph), throttle valve opening 5%
-
LOCK-UP POINT — D range PWR — Lock-up OFF — OD
77-82 km/h (48-51 mph), throttle valve opening 5%
-
VALVE BODY SPRING — Upper valve body — Primary regulator valve
Free length: 66.65 mm (2.6240 in.), Coil outer diameter: 18.6 mm (0.732 in.), No. of coils: 12.5, Wire diameter: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.), Color: Purple
-
VALVE BODY SPRING — Upper valve body — Lock-up relay valve
Free length: 18.80 mm (0.7402 in.), Coil outer diameter: 5.1 mm (0.201 in.), No. of coils: 14.5, Wire diameter: 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), Color: None
-
VALVE BODY SPRING — Upper valve body — Low coast modulator valve
Free length: 27.51 mm (1.0831 in.), Coil outer diameter: 8.3 mm (0.327 in.), No. of coils: 12.5, Wire diameter: 0.9 mm (0.035 in.), Color: Yellow
-
VALVE BODY SPRING — Upper valve body — Kick-down valve
Free length: 29.76 mm (1.1717 in.), Coil outer diameter: 8.73 mm (0.3437 in.), No. of coils: 13.5, Wire diameter: 1.0 mm (0.039 in.), Color: White
-
VALVE BODY SPRING — Upper valve body — Throttle valve
Free length: 29.18 mm (1.1488 in.), Coil outer diameter: 9.2 mm (0.362 in.), No. of coils: 9.5, Wire diameter: 0.7 mm (0.028 in.), Color: Yellow Green
-
VALVE BODY SPRING — Upper valve body — Throttle modulator valve
Free length: 29.90 mm (1.1772 in.), Coil outer diameter: 9.0 mm (0.354 in.), No. of coils: 15.5, Wire diameter: 0.9 mm (0.035 in.), Color: Green
-
VALVE BODY SPRING — Upper valve body — Accumulator control valve
Free length: 35.90 mm (1.4134 in.), Coil outer diameter: 10.0 mm (0.394 in.), No. of coils: 11.5, Wire diameter: 0.9 mm (0.035 in.), Color: Blue
STANDARD BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Unclassified
AW11_1988_full · p1013 OEM manual
-
HOW TO DETERMINE BOLT STRENGTH
Bolt strength class is determined by the mark on the bolt head or stud bolt. Hexagon head bolt with bolt head number 4 corresponds to classes 4T, 5T, 6T, 7T depending on head number (4-, 5-, 6-, 7-). Hexagon head bolt with no mark is class 4T. Hexagon flange bolt / w/washer hexagon bolt with no mark is class 4T. Hexagon head bolt with two protruding lines is class 5T. Hexagon flange bolt / w/washer hexagon bolt with two protruding lines is class 6T. Hexagon head bolt with three protruding lines is class 7T. Stud bolt with no mark is class 4T. Stud bolt with grooved mark is class 6T. Welded bolt is class 4T.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION · A240E AND A241E · D RANGE FIRST GEAR CIRCUIT
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p1031 OEM manual
-
D RANGE FIRST GEAR CIRCUIT — HYDRAULIC PRESSURE LEGEND
Color-coded hydraulic circuit diagram for A240E and A241E automatic transmissions in D Range First Gear. Legend: (1) Line Pressure — Red; (2) Throttle Pressure — Blue; Throttle Modulator Pressure — Blue (lighter); Accumulator Control Pressure — Yellow (dark); Converter Pressure — Yellow; Lubrication — Yellow (light); (3) Cooler Pressure — Yellow/gold. Components shown include: Manual Valve, 2nd Coast Modulator Valve, 2-3 Shift Valve, Low Coast Modulator Valve, 1-2 Shift Valve, Lock-up Solenoid (OFF), Lock-up Control Valve, Lock-up Signal Valve, Cut Back Valve, Kick Down Valve, Throttle Valve, Secondary Regulator Valve, Primary Regulator Valve, To Sensor Rotor, To Differential, Oil Pump, Strainer, Lock-up Relay Valve, Bypass Valve, No. 1 Solenoid (ON), No. 2 Solenoid (OFF), 3-4 Shift Valve, C1 Accumulator, C2 Accumulator, B1 Accumulator, B2 Accumulator, Accumulator Control Valve, Throttle Modulator Valve. Applied clutches/brakes: C1 Applied, B4 Applied.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION · A240E AND A241E · D Range Third Gear Circuit
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p1033 OEM manual
-
D RANGE THIRD GEAR CIRCUIT — PRESSURE LEGEND
Color-coded hydraulic circuit diagram for A240E and A241E automatic transmissions in D Range Third Gear. Legend: (1) Line Pressure (red), Throttle Pressure (red/lighter), Throttle Modulator Pressure (pink/orange), Accumulator Control Pressure (blue), Converter Pressure (yellow), Lubrication (yellow), (2) Cooler Pressure (yellow/labeled 2), (3) labeled 3. Components shown include: Manual Valve, 2nd Coast Modulator Valve, Low Coast Modulator Valve, 1-2 Shift Valve, 2-3 Shift Valve, 3-4 Shift Valve, No. 1 Solenoid (OFF), No. 2 Solenoid (ON), Lock-up (OFF), Lock-up Signal Valve, Lock-up Relay Valve, Cut-Back Valve, Throttle Valve, Kick-down Valve, Secondary Regulator Valve, Primary Regulator Valve, Throttle Modulator Valve, By-pass Valve, Lock-up Relay Valve, C1 Accumulator, B1 Accumulator, C2 Accumulator, B2 Accumulator, C0 Accumulator. Applied clutches/brakes: C2 Applied, C1 Applied, B1 Applied, B0 Applied. Outputs: To Differential, To Sensor Rotor, To Strainer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION · A240E AND A241E · D RANGE O/D GEAR CIRCUIT LOCK-UP ON
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p1034 OEM manual
-
D RANGE O/D GEAR CIRCUIT LOCK-UP ON — HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Hydraulic circuit diagram for A240E and A241E automatic transmissions showing pressure routing in D Range with O/D gear and lock-up engaged. Color coding: Red = Line Pressure, Dark Red/Maroon = Throttle Modulator Pressure, Blue = Accumulator Control Pressure, Yellow = Converter Pressure, Light Yellow = Lubrication, Dark Yellow/Gold = Cooler Pressure. Accumulators shown: C2 Accumulator, C0 Accumulator, B1 Accumulator, C1 Accumulator, B2 Accumulator. Valves shown include: Manual Valve, 1-2 Shift Valve, 2-3 Shift Valve, 3-4 Shift Valve, Lock-up Modulator Valve, Lock-up Control Valve, Lock-up Solenoid (ON), Lock-up Relay Valve, By-pass Valve, Kick-down Valve, Varnish Valve, Cut-Back Valve, Secondary Regulator Valve, Primary Regulator Valve, Accumulator Control Valve, Throttle Modulator Valve. Solenoids: No. 1 Solenoid (for F1), No. 2 Solenoid (CFF1). Applied clutches/brakes: C0 Applied, C1 Applied, C2 Applied, B1 Applied, B2 Applied. Oil pump components: Oil Pump (CJ Pump), Strainer. Sensor Rotor and Differential outputs also indicated.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION · A240E AND A241E · 2 RANGE FIRST GEAR CIRCUIT
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p1035 OEM manual
-
2 RANGE FIRST GEAR CIRCUIT — PRESSURE LEGEND
Color-coded hydraulic circuit diagram for A240E and A241E automatic transmissions in 2 Range First Gear. Pressure types: (1) Line Pressure (red), Throttle Pressure (dark red/maroon), Throttle Modulator Pressure, Accumulator Control Pressure (blue), (2) 2nd Modulator Pressure, Converter Pressure (light red/pink), (3) Lubrication (yellow), Cooler Pressure (yellow-outlined).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION · A240E AND A241E · 2 RANGE SECOND GEAR CIRCUIT
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p1036 OEM manual
-
2 RANGE SECOND GEAR CIRCUIT — PRESSURE LEGEND
Color-coded hydraulic circuit diagram legend: (1) Line Pressure = Red; (2) Throttle Pressure = Blue; (2) Throttle Modulator Pressure = Light Blue; (1) Accumulator Control Pressure = Pink/Light Red; (2) 2nd Modulator Pressure = Dark Pink; (1) Converter Pressure = Yellow-Gold; (2) Lubrication = Yellow; (3) Cooler Pressure = Yellow-Olive. Diagram shows fluid routing through Manual Valve, 1-2 Shift Valve, 2-3 Shift Valve, 3-4 Shift Valve, Low Coast Valve, 2nd Coast Valve, Lockup Signal Valve, Lockup Solenoid (OFF), Cut-Back Valve, Kick-down Valve, Throttle Valve, Primary Regulator Valve, Secondary Regulator Valve, By-pass Valve, Lock-up Relay Valve, Accumulator Control Valve, Throttle Modulator Valve, No. 1 Solenoid (ON), No. 2 Solenoid (ON), and accumulators B1, B2, C1, C2, C0. Applied clutches/brakes: B1 Applied, C1 Applied, B2 Applied, B4 Applied.
ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS · HOW TO READ THIS SECTION
Unclassified
AW11_1988_full · p1039 OEM manual
-
PIN NUMBER
Pin numbers are assigned to connector terminals. Connectors with different numbers of terminals used with the same parts specify both the pin number and the number of terminals (e.g. (1/4) = No.1 pin/4 terminals connector). Female connectors are numbered in order from upper left to lower right. Male connectors are numbered in order from upper right to lower left. Male and female connectors are distinguished by the shape of their internal pins. All connectors are shown from the open end, and the lock is on top.
-
JUNCTION BLOCK OR RELAY BLOCK
Wire color is shown on the left side of the block, Block No. is shown in the center, and Wire Color is shown on the right side. The interior of the block is labeled 'Block Inside'. Example shown: R-G (Red with Green stripe) on left, block number 2, R (Red) on right.
-
WIRE COLOR
Wire colors are indicated by an alphabetical code. B=Black, BR=Brown, G=Green, GR=Gray, L=Blue, LG=Light Green, O=Orange, P=Pink, R=Red, V=Violet, W=White, Y=Yellow. The 1st letter indicates the basic wire color and the 2nd indicates the stripe color. Example: R-G indicates a Red wire with a Green stripe.
-
ABBREVIATION
The following abbreviations are used in this wiring diagram: A/C=Air Conditioner, A/T=Automatic Transaxle, CB=Circuit Breaker, ECU=Electronic Controlled Unit, EFI=Electronic Fuel Injection, FL=Fusible Link, J/B=Junction Block, LH=Left-hand, M/T=Manual Transaxle, O/D=Overdrive, RH=Right-hand, S/W=Switch, T-VIS=Toyota Variable Induction System, VSV=Vacuum Switching Valve, w/=With, w/o=Without.
MR2 · System Index · 1988 Model
Unclassified
AW11_1988_full · p1040 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM INDEX — 1988 MODEL (Page 1 to Page 6)
Index listing all electrical/mechanical systems for the 1988 Toyota MR2 with their corresponding wiring diagram location page references. Systems listed: Air Conditioner, Cooler and Heater (2-6); Auto Antenna (5-7); Back-up Lights (3-8); Charging (1-3, 6-2 4A-GZE); Cigarette Lighter (5-6); Clock (5-5); Combination Meter (3-2); Cruise Control (4-6); Door Locks (4-4); ECT (3-7); EFI (1-7 4A-GE, 6-5 4A-GZE); Engine Compartment Cooling Fan (1-5); Front Wiper and Washer (4-1); Fuel Control System (6-7); Headlights (5-3); Horn (4-1); Idle-up (2-1); Ignition (1-5 4A-GE, 6-8 4A-GZE); Interior Lights (5-5); Power Source (1-1, 6-1 4A-GZE); Power Windows (4-2); Radiator Fan (2-2); Radio and Tape Player (5-8); Rear Window Defogger (3-4); Remote Control Mirrors (5-6); Starting (1-2, 6-2 4A-GZE); Stop Lights (4-7); Taillights and Illumination (5-1); Turn Signal and Hazard (3-5); Unlock and Seat Belt Warning (4-8).
Charging · Ignition (4A-GE) · Wiring Diagram
Ignition
AW11_1988_full · p1042 OEM manual
-
CHARGING AND IGNITION WIRING DIAGRAM (4A-GE)
Wiring diagram showing the charging system and ignition system for the 4A-GE engine. Includes: Engine Main Relay (terminals 1,2,3,4,5), Charge Warning Light (Comb. Meter) with 9/12 and 7/12 connections, Ribbon Wire (Comb. Meter) with terminals 3 and 4, Alternator with IC Regulator (terminals L 2/3, 1/3 S, 3/3 IG) with wire colours W, W, B-Y. Fuses shown: 5A CHARGE fuse (terminal H), 10A ENGINE fuse (terminal A). Connections noted: From Brake Warning Light (3-3), To 'CHARGE' Fuse (6-3), To Back-up Light S/W (3-7), To ECT Computer (3-7), To Seat Belt Warning Relay (4-8), To A/C Amplifier (2-5), To Tachometer (3-2). Ignition coil connected via B-R wires. Igniter with terminals 4,5,1,2 and wire colours B-Y, B-W. Noise Filter terminals 1,2. Check Connector terminal 18 (W-B). All signals routed To EFI ECU (1-...). Wire colours used: B-O (Black-Orange), B-R (Black-Red), B-Y (Black-Yellow), W-B (White-Black), W (White), B (Black), Y (Yellow).
2 MR2 (Cont'd) · Idle-up / Radiator Fan · Wiring Diagram
Cooling
AW11_1988_full · p1045 OEM manual
-
IDLE-UP CIRCUIT
Circuit includes 7.5A FAN-I/UP fuse, Electrical Idle-Up VSV, connections from Cooling Fan Relay (1-6), HEAD RH Fuse (5-3), Defogger S/W (3-4), TAIL Fuse (5-1), EFI ECU (1-8) and to EFI ECU (6-7). Applies to 4A-GZE and 4A-GE engines. Ground point 'a' located in right front fender.
-
RADIATOR FAN CIRCUIT
Circuit includes 20A RDI FAN fuse, Fan Main Relay, Radiator Fan Relay No. 1, A/C High Pressure S/W (W/O A/C configuration shown), and Radiator Fan Motor. Wire colors used: B-O (Black-Orange), W-B (White-Black), B-R (Black-Red), L-R (Light Green-Red), W-G (White-Green), W (White). Ground point 'c' located under right front pillar.
AIR CONDITIONING · Wiring Diagram
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p1046 OEM manual
-
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
d = Located under left front pillar; e = Located on center of back panel
Air Conditioner, Cooler and Heater
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p1047 OEM manual
-
RECIRC/FRESH CONTROL SERVO MOTOR WIRING
Wiring diagram showing the Recirc/Fresh Control Servo Motor connected via R-L wire to pin 1, with pins 2 and 3 connected through the heater control assembly. The servo motor contains a motor (M) and a position feedback potentiometer.
-
HEATER CONTROL ASSEMBLY
The heater control assembly contains illumination LEDs and switches for the following modes: A/C, E/C, FACE, B/L, FOOT, F/D, DEF, REC/FRS. Each mode has an associated LED indicator and switch. Power is supplied via a 10A A/C fuse through wire L-R, then R-L. Ground is via W-B wire.
-
THERMISTOR CONNECTION
A thermistor is connected with Y-G wire and W-L wire. It interfaces with connector pins 1/13, 1/1, 2/13, 12/13, 11/13, 13/13. Signal wires R-L, R-L, and P-Y are routed to the heater control assembly.
-
FUSE
A 10A fuse labeled A/C is present in the circuit, connected via L-R on the supply side and R-L on the load side.
-
IGNITER CONNECTION
A connection labeled 'From Igniter (T4)' feeds into the heater control assembly via wire B.
MR2 (Cont'd) · Combination Meter · Wiring Diagram
Unclassified
AW11_1988_full · p1049 OEM manual
-
COMBINATION METER WIRING — MR2 (Cont'd)
Wiring diagram showing the Combination Meter circuit for the Toyota MR2 (AW11). Includes gauge circuits for OIL pressure, WATER TEMP, FUEL level, TACH, VOLT, and SPEED SENSOR. Indicator light circuits include SUPER CHARGER, FUEL, BRAKE, Seat Belt Warning Light (4-8), Check Engine (1-8)(6-6), Cooling Fan Warning Light (1-5), and Pattern Indicator (3-6). The meter cluster receives power via R-L wires routed through a 7.5A TURN/GAG fuse on the G bus. Connections noted: To Heater Relay (2-8), To Light Retainer Relay (5-2), To Fuel Control System (6-7), To Cruise Control Main S/W (4-5), To Pattern Select S/W (3-6), To Auto Antenna Control Relay and Motor (5-7). Sensor feeds: Oil Pressure Sender (Y-B ribbon wire 3/12 to 4), Water Temp Sender (Y-G ribbon wire 5/12 to 4), Fuel Sender (Y-R 5/10). Tach signal from Igniter (1-4) via 9/10 B wire. Volt gauge via 6/8 W-B. Speed Sensor via 5/8 BR. Cooling Fan Computer (1-5), ECT Computer (3-7), EFI ECU (1-8)(6-6) & Cruise Control Computer (4-6) feed via V-W ribbon wire (4/8). Ground points: a = Located in right front fender, b = Located on engine block, c = Located under right front pillar, d = Located under left front pillar. Output to CHARGI (1-3)(6-3). Wire designations use Toyota color codes: R-L (Red-Blue), Y-B (Yellow-Black), Y-G (Yellow-Green), Y-R (Yellow-Red), B (Black), W-B (White-Black), V-W (Violet-White), BR (Brown).
Electrical · Rear Window Defogger · Wiring Diagram
Body
AW11_1988_full · p1050 OEM manual
-
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT
Wiring diagram showing the rear window defogger circuit including: 20A DEFOG fuse (B-Y wire), DEFOGGER S/W (switch terminals 1, 2, 4), REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER element (terminals B, 1), connection to Electrical Idle-up VSV (2-1), and ground paths via W-B wires. Also shows related circuits: SUPER CHARGER, FUEL gauge (Y-L wire, FUEL SENDER terminals 2-3, BR wire), BRAKE warning (RIBBON WIRE terminals 3-4, BRAKE FLUID LEVEL S/W G-W wire, PARKING BRAKE S/W G-W wire), connections from Cruise Control Computer (4-6) and ECT Computer (3-7), and To 'CHARGE' Fuse (1-3)(6-3). Turn Signal Flasher shown on right side (terminals 1, 2, 3, W-B wires). Warning Light references: (4-8), (1-8)(6-6), (1-5), (3-6).
Electrical · Horn / Front Wiper and Washer / Power Windows · Wiring Diagram
Body
AW11_1988_full · p1053 OEM manual
-
HORN CIRCUIT
10A HORN fuse feeds LH and RH horns via G-W wiring through HORN S/W (terminals 10 and 13). Ground point c is located under right front pillar.
-
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER CIRCUIT
20A WIPER fuse (B-Y/G) feeds WIPER AND WASHER S/W (terminals B, V, +1, +2, C, E, E, W) with switch positions OFF, MIST, INT, LOW, HIGH, WASHER. WIPER RELAY includes INT (intermittent) control. Wiper motor has terminals 1, 2, 3, 4. Washer motor connects via L-Y wiring to terminal 7. Ground point d is located under left front pillar.
-
POWER WINDOW CIRCUIT
POWER WINDOW MASTER S/W provides UP/DOWN control for driver (DH) and assistant positions via terminals 1, 2, 8, 9. Wiring colours G-R, G-O, G-Y, G used. POWER WINDOW RELAY (terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9) drives DRIVER and ASSISTANT POWER WINDOW MOTORS (each with terminals 1 and 2). Ground point e is located on center of back panel.
-
GROUND POINTS
c = Located under right front pillar; d = Located under left front pillar; e = Located on center of back panel.
ELECTRICAL · Headlights · Wiring Diagram
Unclassified
AW11_1988_full · p1058 OEM manual
-
HEADLIGHTS AND RETRACT MOTOR WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram showing headlight relay, headlight fuses (15A HEAD LH, 18A HEAD RH), retract motor fuses (30A RTR MTR, 7.5A RTR), retract control relay, retract motors LH and RH, dimmer switch (comb. S/W) with FLASH/LOW/HIGH positions, high beam indicator light (comb. meter), interior light and S/W, ribbon wire connections, and associated wiring colour codes. Note: e = Located on center of back panel. Variants shown for W/O Light Retainer Relay and W/ Light Retainer Relay configurations.
Electrical · Body Electrical · Remote Control Mirrors / Auto Antenna / Radio and Tape Player
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p1060 OEM manual
-
REMOTE CONTROL MIRROR S/W WIRING
Wiring diagram showing Remote Control Mirror Switch (terminals B, E, HI, VI, C, V2, H2) connected via W-B, F, LG, BR, R-G, J wire colours to LH and RH Mirror Motors (R, R-G, BR terminals).
-
AUTO ANTENNA CONTROL RELAY AND MOTOR WIRING
Wiring diagram showing Auto Antenna Control Relay and Motor fed from 'TURN GAG' Fuse (3-1) via GR wire to connector pin 1, P-L to pin 3, R-L to pin 6. Motor (M) connected with UP/DOWN switch between pins 4 and 2/5. Ground via BR wire.
-
RADIO AND TAPE PLAYER WIRING
Wiring diagram showing Radio and Tape Player fed from 'FL 1.25B' (1-1) through 15A HAZ-RADIO fuse. GR wire to Turn Signal and Hazard S/W (3-5). Connector pins 3/10 and 4/10 provide power. Speaker outputs: Rear RH (R/W, pins 1/6 and 3/6), Rear LH (B/Y, pins 2/6 and 6/6), Front RH (B-R/BR via LG wire, pins 8/10, 1/10, 7/10, 5/10), Front LH (P/V wire, pins 2/10, 6/10, 9/10). Woofer connector pin 5 (L/P-L) to pins 1(LG), 3(P), with ground pin 7. Ground via BR and W-B wires.
MR2 · Power Source (4A-GZE) · Starting (4A-GZE)
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p1061 OEM manual
-
STARTING SYSTEM WIRING — 4A-GZE
Wiring diagram showing the starting circuit for the MR2 with 4A-GZE engine. Circuit includes: Battery (with FL 1.25B fuse), Ignition S/W (AM1/AM2 with ACC, IG1, IG2, ST2 positions), FL 7.5A AM2 fuse, Clutch Start S/W (M/T) / Neutral Start S/W (A/T), Starter Relay, Starter motor, Cold Start Injector, Start Injector Time S/W, Engine Main Relay, and connections To EFI ECU (6-6). Charge Warning Light (Comb Meter) and connections from Cooling Fan Warning Light (1-5) and Brake Warning Light (3-3) are also shown. Wire colours present: B-O, B-W, W-R, W-B, B-R, B-L, B. Ground points: b = Located on engine block, d = Located under left front pillar, e = Located on (cut off).
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p124 OEM manual
-
KEEP PARTS IN ORDER
Keep the inserted bearing, connecting rod and cap together. Arrange the piston and connecting rod assemblies in correct order.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p125 OEM manual
-
MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT REMOVAL SEQUENCE
Uniformly loosen and remove the main bearing cap bolts in several passes, in the sequence shown (sequence: 4, 8, 10, 6, 2, 3, 7, 9, 5, 1 as labeled in the diagram).
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p127 OEM manual
-
ARRANGE CAPS, BEARINGS AND THRUST WASHERS IN CORRECT ORDER
Arrange the caps, bearings and thrust washers in correct order.
-
PILOT BEARING LUBRICATION
The pilot bearing in the crankshaft rear end is permanently lubricated and requires no cleaning or lubrication.
-
MEASURE PLASTIGAGE AT WIDEST POINT
Measure the Plastigage at its widest point. If the clearance is greater than maximum, replace the bearings. If necessary, grind or replace the crankshaft. If replacing the cylinder block subassembly, the bearing standard clearance will be 0.015 – 0.045 mm (0.0006–0.0018 in.).
-
COMPLETELY REMOVE THE PLASTIGAGE
Completely remove the Plastigage.
SUPERCHARGER SYSTEM · Supercharger · Inspection
Unclassified
AW11_1988_full · p166 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF AIR BY-PASS VALVE (ABV) AND AIR CONTROL VALVE (ACV) SYSTEM — INSPECT AIR BY-PASS VALVE (ABV)
Apply a vacuum to the ABV and measure the vacuum when the valve opens. Partially open vacuum: 105–165 mmHg (4.134–6.496 in.Hg, 13.00–21.99 kPa). Fully open vacuum: 245–395 mmHg (9.646–15.551 in.Hg, 32.66–52.65 kPa). If the vacuum is not within specification, replace the ABV.
-
INSPECT ABV VSV
(a) Apply battery voltage across the terminals. (b) Check that air flows from pipe E to air filter. (c) Disconnect the battery terminals. (d) Check that air flows from pipe E to G. If a problem is found, replace the VSV.
-
INSPECT ACV
(a) Apply battery voltage across the terminals. (b) Check that air flows from pipe A to B and C.
SUPERCHARGER SYSTEM · Supercharger · Installation
Unclassified
AW11_1988_full · p167 OEM manual
-
ACV CHECK
Disconnect the battery terminals. Check that air does not flow from pipe A to B or C. If a problem is found, replace the ACV.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Emission control
AW11_1988_full · p174 OEM manual
-
NOTE: TROUBLESHOOTING
See page EM-2
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · System Purpose
Emission control
AW11_1988_full · p175 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM PURPOSE
Table listing emission control systems, their abbreviations, and purposes: PCV (Positive crankcase ventilation) reduces blow-by gas (HC); EVAP (Fuel evaporative emission control) reduces evaporative HC; DP (Dash pot) reduces HC and CO; EGR (Exhaust gas recirculation) reduces NOx; TWC (Three-way catalyst) reduces HC, CO and NOx; EFI (Electronic fuel injection) regulates all engine conditions for reduction of exhaust emissions. For inspection and repair of the EFI system, refer to EFI section.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Component Layout and Schematic Drawing (4A-GE)
Emission control
AW11_1988_full · p176 OEM manual
-
COMPONENT LAYOUT AND SCHEMATIC DRAWING (4A-GE)
Shows the physical layout of emission control components on the 4A-GE engine including: EGR Vacuum Modulator, EGR Gas Temp. Sensor (Calif. only), BVSV (For EVAP), BVSV (For EGR), Charcoal Canister, EGR Valve, DP, Oxygen Sensor, Check Valve, Diaphragm (For T-VIS), Vacuum Tank, VSV. The schematic diagram below shows the vacuum circuit interconnections between: BVSV (For EGR), BVSV (For EVAP), Oxygen Sensor, TWC, Charcoal Canister, Vacuum Tank, VSV, Check Valve, EGR Vacuum Modulator, EGR Valve, and DP.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Component Layout and Schematic Drawing (4A-GZE)
Emission control
AW11_1988_full · p177 OEM manual
-
COMPONENT LAYOUT AND SCHEMATIC DRAWING (4A-GZE)
Shows the physical component layout and schematic drawing of the emission control system for the 4A-GZE engine. Components identified include: EGR Vacuum Modulator, EGR Gas Temp. Sensor (Calif. only), BVSV (For EVAP), Charcoal Canister, EGR Valve, Oxygen Sensor, VSV (For EGR), and TWC (Three-Way Catalytic converter). The schematic diagram (EC2999) shows the interconnections between the Oxygen Sensor, TWC, BVSV, EGR Valve, EGR Vacuum Modulator, VSV, and Charcoal Canister.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
Emission control
AW11_1988_full · p178 OEM manual
-
PCV SYSTEM OPERATION
To reduce HC emissions, crankcase blow-by gas (HC) is routed to the intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Fuel Evaporative Emission Control (EVAP) System
Emission control
AW11_1988_full · p179 OEM manual
-
EVAP SYSTEM OPERATION
To reduce HC emissions, evaporated fuel from the fuel tank is routed through the charcoal canister to the intake manifold for combustion in the cylinders. When coolant temp is below 35°C (95°F) the BVSV is CLOSED and HC from tank is absorbed into the canister. When coolant temp is above 54°C (129°F) the BVSV is OPEN: if throttle valve is positioned below purge port, canister check valve (1) is CLOSED and HC is still absorbed; if throttle valve is positioned above purge port, canister check valve (1) is OPEN and HC from canister is led into air intake manifold. When high pressure exists in tank, canister check valves (2) OPEN and (3) CLOSED, check valve in cap CLOSED, and HC from tank is absorbed into the canister. When high vacuum exists in tank, canister check valve (2) CLOSED, (3) OPEN, check valve in cap OPEN, and air is led into the fuel tank.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Fuel Evaporative Emission Control (EVAP) System · Inspection
Emission control
AW11_1988_full · p180 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF BVSV — CHECK BVSV BY BLOWING AIR INTO PIPE
Steps: (a) Drain the coolant from the cylinder block into a suitable container. (b) Remove the BVSV. (c) Cool the BVSV to below 35°C (95°F) with cool water. (d) Blow air into a pipe and check that the BVSV is closed. (e) Heat the BVSV to above 54°C (129°F) with hot water. (f) Blow air into a pipe and check that the BVSV is open. If a problem is found, replace the BVSV. (g) Apply liquid sealer to the threads of the BVSV and reinstall. (h) Fill the cylinder block with coolant.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Dash Pot (DP) System
Emission control
AW11_1988_full · p181 OEM manual
-
DASH POT (DP) SYSTEM OPERATION
To reduce HC and CO emissions, when decelerating the dash pot opens the throttle valve slightly more than at idle. This causes the air-fuel mixture to burn completely.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System (4A-GE)
Exhaust
AW11_1988_full · p183 OEM manual
-
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM (4A-GE) — COMPONENT OVERVIEW
The EGR system for the 4A-GE engine consists of the following components: EGR Valve, EGR Vacuum Modulator, EGR Gas Temperature Sensor (California only), BVSV (Bimetallic Vacuum Switching Valve), VSV (Vacuum Switching Valve), Check Valve (Black and Orange ports), Vacuum Tank, Distributor, and ECU. Diagrams (1) and (2) show the vacuum and signal routing between these components, including E Port, R Port, pressure chamber from exhaust manifold, and connections to the vacuum tank and ECU.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System (4A-GE) · EC-11
Exhaust
AW11_1988_full · p184 OEM manual
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION OVERVIEW
To reduce NOx emissions, part of the exhaust gases are recirculated through the EGR valve to the intake manifold to lower the maximum combustion temperature.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System (4A-GE) · Inspection
Exhaust
AW11_1988_full · p186 OEM manual
-
CHECK EGR VACUUM MODULATOR (via R Port vacuum gauge test)
Disconnect the vacuum hose from R port of the EGR vacuum modulator and connect R port directly to the intake manifold with another hose. Check that the vacuum gauge indicates high vacuum at 3,500 rpm. NOTE: As a large amount of EGR gas enters, the engine will misfire slightly. Disconnect the vacuum gauge and reconnect the vacuum hoses to the proper locations.
-
CHECK EGR VALVE
Apply vacuum directly to the EGR valve with the engine idling. Check that the engine runs rough or dies. Reconnect the vacuum hoses to the proper location. IF NO PROBLEM IS FOUND WITH THIS INSPECTION, THE SYSTEM IS OKAY; OTHERWISE INSPECT EACH PART.
-
INSPECTION OF EGR VALVE — REMOVE EGR VALVE
Check the valve for sticking and heavy carbon deposits. If a problem is found, replace it.
-
INSPECTION OF EGR VALVE — REINSTALL EGR VALVE WITH A NEW GASKET
Reinstall EGR valve with a new gasket.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System (4A-GE) · Inspection of Check Valve
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p188 OEM manual
-
CHECK FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the terminals as shown. Specified resistance: 33 – 39 Ω at 20°C (68°F). If resistance is not within specification, replace the VSV.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System (4A-GZE)
Exhaust
AW11_1988_full · p189 OEM manual
-
EGR SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
The EGR system for the 4A-GZE engine consists of: EGR Vacuum Modulator, EGR Gas Temperature Sensor (California only), EGR Valve, and VSV (Vacuum Switching Valve). Diagram (1) shows the EGR valve in the closed position. Diagram (2) shows the EGR valve in the open position. The VSV is controlled by the ECU and is connected to the Distributor circuit. Vacuum routing runs from the E Port and R Port through the EGR Vacuum Modulator to the VSV and EGR Valve.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System (4A-GZE) · EC-17
Exhaust
AW11_1988_full · p190 OEM manual
-
EGR SYSTEM OPERATION — NOx REDUCTION
To reduce NOx emissions, part of the exhaust gases are recirculated through the EGR valve to the intake manifold to lower the maximum combustion temperature.
-
EGR VACUUM MODULATOR PRESSURE CYCLE
Pressure increase → Modulator closes → EGR valve opens → Pressure drops → EGR valve closes → Modulator opens (cycle repeats).
-
THROTTLE VALVE ABOVE R PORT — EGR INCREASE
When the throttle valve is positioned above the R port, the EGR vacuum modulator will close the atmosphere passage and open the EGR valve to increase the EGR gas, even if the exhaust pressure is insufficiently low.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System (4A-GZE) · Inspection
Exhaust
AW11_1988_full · p192 OEM manual
-
EGR SYSTEM CHECK NOTE
As a large amount of EGR gas enters, the engine will misfire slightly.
-
SYSTEM OK CONDITION
IF NO PROBLEM IS FOUND WITH THIS INSPECTION, THE SYSTEM IS OKAY; OTHERWISE INSPECT EACH PART.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) System
Emission control
AW11_1988_full · p194 OEM manual
-
THREE-WAY CATALYST (TWC) SYSTEM
To reduce HC, CO and NOx emissions, they are oxidized, reduced and converted to nitrogen (N2), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O) by the catalyst. Exhaust port inputs: HC, CO, AND NOx. TWC process: OXIDATION AND REDUCTION. Exhaust Gas outputs: CO2, H2O, N2.
-
INSPECTION OF CATALYTIC CONVERTER — CHECK FOR DENTS OR DAMAGE
If any part of protector is damaged or dented to the extent that it contacts the catalyst, repair or replace.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS · Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) System
Emission control
AW11_1988_full · p195 OEM manual
-
CHECK HEAT INSULATOR FOR DAMAGE
Check heat insulator for damage.
-
CHECK FOR ADEQUATE CLEARANCE BETWEEN CATALYTIC CONVERTER AND HEAT INSULATOR
Check for adequate clearance between catalytic converter and heat insulator.
EFI SYSTEM
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p196 OEM manual
-
EFI SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index listing all subsections of the EFI SYSTEM chapter with corresponding page references: DESCRIPTION (FI-2), PRECAUTIONS (FI-5), INSPECTION PRECAUTIONS (FI-5), TROUBLESHOOTING (FI-9), DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (FI-21), TROUBLESHOOTING WITH VOLT/OHMMETER (4A-GE) (FI-29), TROUBLESHOOTING WITH VOLT/OHMMETER (4A-GZE) (FI-31), TROUBLESHOOTING EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT WITH VOLT/OHMMETER (4A-GE) (FI-33), TROUBLESHOOTING EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT WITH VOLT/OHMMETER (4A-GZE) (FI-48), FUEL SYSTEM (FI-64), Fuel Pump (FI-64), Cold Start Injector (FI-73), Pressure Regulator (4A-GE) (FI-78), Pressure Regulator (4A-GZE) (FI-79), Injector (FI-80), Fuel Tank and Line (FI-93), AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM (FI-94), Air Flow Meter (FI-94), Throttle Body (FI-97), Idle Speed Control (ISC) Valve (4A-GZE) (FI-106), Auxiliary Air Valve (4A-GE) (FI-108), ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM (FI-109), Location of Electronic Control Parts (FI-109), EFI Main Relay (FI-110), Circuit Opening Relay (FI-111), Solenoid Resistor (4A-GZE) and Injector Relay (FI-113), Start Injector Time Switch (FI-115), Water Temperature Sensor (FI-116), EGR Gas Temperature Sensor (For California) (FI-117), High Temperature Line Pressure Up System (FI-118), Idle-up System (FI-119), Oxygen Sensor (FI-120), Electronic Controlled Unit (ECU) (FI-123), Fuel Cut RPM (FI-128).
EFI SYSTEM · Description
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p197 OEM manual
-
EFI SYSTEM DESCRIPTION — 4A-GE
System overview diagram showing all major EFI components and their interconnections for the 4A-GE engine. Components include: Fuel Tank, Fuel Pump, Fuel Filter, Injector, Cold Start Injector, Start Injector Time Switch, Oxygen Sensor, Ignition Switch, Battery, Distributor, Ignition Coil, VSV (FPU), VSV (T-VIS), VSV (ISC), Pressure Regulator, Diaphragm (T-VIS), Air Control Valve (T-VIS), ECU, A/C Magnet Switch, Check Connector (T-E1), Neutral Start Switch (For A/T), Air Cleaner, Temp. Sensor (Inlet Air Temp.), Air Flow Meter, Auxiliary Air Valve, Throttle Position Sensor, Water Temp. Sensor (Coolant Temp.), and CHECK ENGINE Warning Light. Note: * indicates connection To Vacuum Reservoir Tank.
EFI SYSTEM · Description
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p198 OEM manual
-
EFI SYSTEM DESCRIPTION — 4A-GZE
System overview diagram showing the Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) system layout for the 4A-GZE engine. Components illustrated include: Fuel Tank, Fuel Pump, Fuel Filter, Fuel Pulsation Damper, Injector, Cold Start Injector, Start Injector Time Switch, Knock Sensor, Oxygen Sensor, Water Temp. Sensor (Coolant Temp.), Pressure Regulator, VSV (FPU), VSV (ISC), VSV (Air By-pass Valve Vacuum Modulator), EGR Gas Temp. Sensor, Throttle Position Sensor, Air Flow Meter, Temp. Sensor (Inlet Air Temp.), Air Cleaner, Distributor, Ignition Coil, ECU, Battery, Ignition Switch, 'CHECK ENGINE' Warning Light, A/C Magnet Switch, Check Connector (T-E1), Neutral Start Switch (For A/T). Asterisk (*) denotes connection To Vacuum Reservoir Tank.
EFI SYSTEM · Description
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p199 OEM manual
-
FUEL SYSTEM
An electric fuel pump supplies sufficient fuel, under a constant pressure, to the injectors. These injectors inject a metered quantity of fuel into the intake manifold in accordance with signals from the ECU (Electronic Control Unit).
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
The air induction system provides sufficient air for engine operation.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
The 4A-GE and 4A-GZE engine is equipped with a Toyota Computer Control System (TCCS) which centrally controls the EFI, ESA, Diagnosis systems, etc. by means of an Electronic Control Unit (ECU — formerly EFI computer) employing a microcomputer. By the ECU, the TCCS controls the following functions: (1) Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) — The ECU receives signals from various sensors indicating changing engine operating conditions such as: Intake air volume, Intake air temperature, Coolant temperature, Engine rpm, Acceleration/deceleration, Exhaust oxygen content etc. These signals are utilized by the ECU to determine the injection duration necessary for an optimum air-fuel ratio. (2) Electronic Spark Advance (ESA) — The ECU is programmed with data for optimum ignition timing under any and all operating conditions. Using data provided by sensors which monitor various engine functions (rpm, A/C signal, coolant temperature, etc.), the microcomputer (ECU) triggers the spark at precisely the right instant. (3) Diagnosis — The ECU detects any malfunctions or abnormalties in the sensor network and lights a 'CHECK ENGINE' warning light on the instrument panel. At the same time, the trouble is identified and a diagnostic code is recorded by the ECU. The diagnostic code can be read by the number of blinks of the 'CHECK ENGINE' warning light when terminals T and E1 are short-circuited. There are 13 (Calif.) or 14 (Ex. Calif.) different diagnostic codes, including 'normal operation.' (See pages FI-24 to 27). (4) Fail-Safe Function — In the event of a sensor malfunction, a back-up circuit will take over to provide minimal drivability. Simultaneously the 'CHECK ENGINE' warning light is activated.
EFI SYSTEM · Precautions, Inspection Precautions
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p200 OEM manual
-
BEFORE WORKING ON FUEL SYSTEM
Before working on the fuel system, disconnect the negative terminal from the battery.
- Any diagnosis code retained by the computer will be erased when the battery terminal is removed. Therefore read the diagnosis before removing the battery terminal.
-
DO NOT SMOKE OR WORK NEAR OPEN FLAME
Do not smoke or work near an open flame when working on the fuel system.
-
KEEP GASOLINE OFF RUBBER OR LEATHER PARTS
Keep gasoline off rubber or leather parts.
-
INSURE CORRECT ENGINE TUNE-UP
Insure correct engine tune-up.
-
PRECAUTIONS WHEN CONNECTING GAUGE
Connect the tachometer (+) terminal to the ignition coil (-) terminal. Use the battery as the power source for the timing light, tachometer, etc.
-
IN EVENT OF ENGINE MISFIRE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN
Insure proper connection of battery terminals, etc. Handle high-tension cords carefully. After repair work, insure that the ignition coil terminals and all other ignition system lines are reconnected securely. When cleaning the engine compartment, be especially careful to protect the electrical system from water.
-
PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING OXYGEN SENSOR
Do not allow oxygen sensor to drop or hit against an object. Do not allow water to come into contact with the sensor or attempt to cool it.
-
IF CAR IS EQUIPPED WITH MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM (HAM, CB, ETC.)
The ECU has been designed so that it will not be affected by outside interference. However, if your vehicle is equipped with a CB radio transceiver, etc., (even one with about 10 W output), it may, at times, have an affect upon ECU operation, especially if the antenna and feeder are installed nearby. Therefore, observe the following precautions.
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p201 OEM manual
-
FEEDER AND ANTENNA
Insure that the feeder and antenna are properly adjusted.
-
DO NOT EQUIP POWERFUL MOBILE RADIO
Do not equip your vehicle with a powerful mobile radio system.
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM — SECURE FITTINGS
Make sure that the oil dipstick, oil filler cap, PCV hose, etc., are all securely fitted, otherwise the engine may run out of tune.
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM — CHECK FOR DISCONNECTION OR CRACKS
Disconnection, looseness or cracks in the parts of the air intake system between the air flow meter and cylinder head will allow air suction and cause the engine to run out of tune.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM — DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE REMOVING CONNECTORS
Before removing EFI wiring connectors, terminals, etc., first disconnect the power by either turning OFF the ignition switch or disconnecting the battery terminals.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM — CORRECT BATTERY CABLE CONNECTION
When installing a battery, be especially careful not to incorrectly connect the positive and negative cables.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM — HANDLE PARTS CAREFULLY
Do not permit parts to receive a severe impact during removal or installation. Handle all EFI parts carefully, especially the ECU.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM — CAREFUL TROUBLESHOOTING
Do not be careless during troubleshooting as there are numerous transistor circuits and even slight terminal contact can cause further troubles.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM — DO NOT OPEN ECU COVER
Do not open the ECU cover.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM — PREVENT WATER ENTRY
When inspecting during rainy weather, take care to prevent entry of water. Also, when washing the engine compartment, prevent water from getting on the EFI parts and wiring connectors.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM — REPLACE PARTS AS ASSEMBLY
Parts should be replaced as an assembly.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM — WIRING CONNECTOR HANDLING
Care is required when pulling out and inserting wiring connectors.
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p202 OEM manual
-
INSPECTING A CONNECTOR WITH A CIRCUIT TESTER
When inspecting a connector with a circuit tester, follow the sub-steps below.
-
USE SST FOR INJECTOR INSPECTION
Use SST for inspection or test of the injector, cold start injector or its wiring connector. SST 09842-30050(A), 09842-30060(B) (4A-GZE) and 09842-30070(C) (4A-GE)
-
DISCONNECTING THE HIGH FUEL PRESSURE LINE
When disconnecting the high fuel pressure line, a large amount of gasoline will spill out so observe the following procedure.
-
CONNECTING THE FLARE NUT OR UNION BOLT ON HIGH PRESSURE PIPE UNION
When connecting the flare nut or union bolt on the high pressure pipe union, observe the following procedure (Union bolt type).
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p203 OEM manual
-
FLARE NUT TIGHTENING
Apply a thin coat of oil to the flare and tighten the flare nut. Then using SST, tighten the nut to the specified torque. Use a torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 30 cm (11.81 in.)
-
INJECTOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following precautions when removing and installing the injectors: (a) Never reuse an O-ring. (b) When placing an O-ring on the injector, use care not to damage it in any way. (c) Lubricate the O-ring with spindle oil or gasoline before installing — never use engine, gear or brake oil.
-
INJECTOR INSTALLATION TO DELIVERY PIPE AND CYLINDER HEAD
Install the injector to the delivery pipe and cylinder head as shown in the figure.
-
FUEL LEAK CHECK AFTER MAINTENANCE
Confirm that there are no fuel leaks after performing any maintenance on the fuel system. (a) With engine stopped, turn the ignition switch to ON. (b) Short circuit the fuel pump check terminals (Fp − +B) in the check connector. NOTE: The check connector is located near the resonator (4A-GE) or intercooler (4A-GZE). (c) When the fuel return hose is pinched, the pressure within the high pressure line will rise to about 4 kg/cm² (57 psi, 392 kPa). In this state, check to see that there are no leaks from any part of the fuel system.
- Always pinch the hose. Avoid bending as it may cause the hose to crack.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p204 OEM manual
-
ENGINE TROUBLES USUALLY NOT CAUSED BY EFI SYSTEM
Engine troubles are usually not caused by the EFI system. When troubleshooting, always first check the condition of the other systems: (a) Electronic source — Battery, Fusible links, Fuses; (b) Body ground; (c) Fuel supply — Fuel leakage, Fuel filter, Fuel pump; (d) Ignition system — Spark plugs, High-tension cords, Distributor, Igniter and ignition coil; (e) Air induction system — Vacuum leaks; (f) Others — Ignition timing (ESA system), Idle speed, etc.
-
CHECK WIRING CONNECTORS
The most frequent cause of problems is simply a bad contact in wiring connectors. Always make sure that connections are secure. When inspecting the connector, pay particular attention to the following points: (a) Check to see that the terminals are not bent. (b) Check to see that the connector is pushed in completely and locked. (c) Check to see that there is no signal change when the connector is slightly tapped or wiggled.
-
TROUBLESHOOT BEFORE REPLACING ECU
Sufficiently troubleshoot for other causes before replacing the ECU, as the ECU is of high quality and is expensive.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p205 OEM manual
-
USE HIGH IMPEDANCE VOLT/OHMMETER
Use a volt/ohmmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum) for troubleshooting of the electrical circuit. (See page FI-26)
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · FI-11
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p206 OEM manual
-
CHECK FUEL SUPPLY TO INJECTOR
1. Fuel in tank. 2. Fuel pressure in fuel line: (1) Short terminals FP and +B of the check connector. (2) Fuel pressure at fuel return hose can be felt. (See page FI-65 or 68). If BAD: 1. Fuel line – leakage – deformation, 2. Fuse, 3. Circuit opening relay (See page FI-111), 4. Fuel pump (See page FI-64), 5. Fuel filter, 6. Fuel pressure regulator (See page FI-78 or 79).
-
CHECK FUEL PUMP SWITCH IN AIR FLOW METER
Check continuity between terminals FC and E1 while measuring plate of air flow meter is open. If BAD: Air flow meter (See page FI-94).
-
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Plug gap: 1.1 mm (0.043 in.). Check compression pressure and valve clearance if necessary. (See page EM-14). If NO: 1. Spark plug, 2. Compression pressure Limit (at 250 rpm): 4A-GE 10.0 kg/cm2 (142 psi, 981 kPa), 4A-GZE 8.5 kg/cm2 (120 psi, 834 kPa), 3. Valve clearance (Cold) STD: IN 0.15–0.25 mm (0.006–0.010 in.), EX 0.20–0.30 mm (0.008–0.012 in.). If BAD (All Plugs WET): 1. Injector(s) – shorted or leaking, 2. Injector wiring(s) between the resistor and ECU shorted, 3. Cold start injector – leakage (See page FI-73), 4. Start injector time switch (See page FI-115).
-
CHECK AUXILIARY AIR VALVE (4A-GE)
See page FI-108. If BAD: 1. Air valve, 2. Water hoses.
-
CHECK ISC VALVE (4A-GZE)
See page FI-106. If BAD: 1. ISC Valve, 2. Wiring connection (See page FI-60), 3. A/C switch.
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER
See page FI-33 or 48. If BAD: 1. Wiring connection, 2. Power to computer (ECU): (1) Fusible links, (2) Fuses, (3) EFI main relay, 3. Air Flow meter, 4. Water temperature sensor, 5. Air temperature sensor (In air flow meter), 6. Injection signal circuit: (1) Injector wiring, (2) Computer (ECU), (3) Resistor (4A-GZE).
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p208 OEM manual
-
CHECK AUXILIARY AIR VALVE (4A-GE)
See page FI-108. If BAD: 1. Air valve 2. Water hoses
-
CHECK ISC VALVE (4A-GZE)
See page FI-106. If BAD: 1. ISC valve 2. Wiring connection (See page FI-60) 3. A/C switch
-
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
See page FI-65 or 68. If BAD: 1. Fuel pump (See page FI-64) 2. Fuel filter 3. Fuel pressure regulator (See page FI-78 or 79)
-
CHECK INJECTORS
See page FI-80. If BAD: Injection condition
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER
See page FI-33 or 48. If BAD: 1. Wiring connection 2. Power to computer (ECU): (1) Fusible links (2) Fuses (3) EFI main relay 3. Air flow meter 4. Water temperature sensor 5. Air temperature sensor (In air flow meter) 6. Injection signal circuit: (1) Injector wiring (2) Computer (ECU) (3) Resistor (4A-GZE)
-
SYMPTOM — ENGINE SOMETIMES STALLS: CHECK DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Check for output of diagnostic code. See page FI-21. If Malfunction code: Diagnostic code(s) (See pages FI-24 to 27)
-
SYMPTOM — ENGINE SOMETIMES STALLS: CHECK AIR FLOW METER
See page FI-94. If BAD: Air flow meter
-
SYMPTOM — ENGINE SOMETIMES STALLS: CHECK WIRING CONNECTORS AND RELAYS
Check that there is a signal change when the connector or relay is slightly tapped or wiggled. If BAD: 1. Connector 2. EFI main relay (See page FI-110) 3. Circuit opening relay (See page FI-111)
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · Symptom — Rough Idling And/Or Missing
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p209 OEM manual
-
CHECK DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Check for output of diagnostic code. See page FI-21. If malfunction code: See Diagnostic code(s) pages FI-24 to 27.
-
CHECK FOR VACUUM LEAKS IN AIR INTAKE LINE
If BAD: 1. Oil filler cap, 2. Oil level gauge, 3. Hose connections, 4. PCV hose, 5. EGR system — EGR valve stays open.
-
CHECK AIR FILTER ELEMENT
If BAD: Element — Clean or replace.
-
CHECK IDLE SPEED
STD: 800 rpm. If NO: Idle speed — Adjust (4A-GE); ISC system (4A-GZE).
-
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Short terminals T and E1 of the check connector. 2. Check ignition timing. STD: 10° BTDC @ Idling (w/short-circuited T — E1). If NO: Ignition timing — Adjust (See page IG-11).
-
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Plug gap: 1.1 mm (0.043 in.). Note — Check compression pressure and valve clearance if necessary. (See page EM-14). If NO: 1. Spark plug, 2. Compression pressure Limit (at 250 rpm): 4A-GE 10.0 kg/cm² (142 psi, 981 kpa); 4A-GZE 8.5 kg/cm² (120 psi, 834 kpa). 3. Valve clearance (Cold) STD: IN 0.15–0.25 mm (0.006–0.010 in.), EX 0.20–0.30 mm (0.008–0.012 in.).
-
CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (4A-GE)
Check that the air control valve is closed. If NO: 1. VSV for air control valve, 2. Vacuum leaks.
-
CHECK ISC VALVE (4A-GZE)
See page FI-106. If BAD: 1. ISC valve, 2. Wiring connection (See page FI-60), 3. A/C switch.
-
CHECK COLD START INJECTOR
See page FI-73. If BAD: 1. Cold start injector, 2. Start injector time switch (See page FI-115). Continued on page FI-15.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · FI-15
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p210 OEM manual
-
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
See page FI-65 or 68. If BAD: 1. Fuel pump (See page FI-64), 2. Fuel filter, 3. Fuel pressure regulator (See page FI-78 or 79).
-
CHECK INJECTORS
See page FI-80. If BAD: Injection condition.
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER
See page FI-33 or 48. If BAD: 1. Wiring connection, 2. Power to computer (ECU): (1) Fusible link, (2) Fuses, (3) EFI main relay, 3. Air flow meter, 4. Water temperature sensor, 5. Air temperature sensor (in air flow meter), 6. Injection signal circuit: (1) Injector wirings, (2) Computer (ECU), (3) Resistor (4A-GZE), 7. Oxygen sensor.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p215 OEM manual
-
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Plug gap: 1.1 mm (0.043 in.). Check compression pressure and valve clearance if necessary. (See page EM-14). If NO: check spark plug, compression pressure, and valve clearance.
-
CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (4A-GE)
Check if air control valve is open with engine running at 4,350 rpm or above. If NO: check VSV for air control valve.
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER
See page FI-33 or 48. If BAD: check (1) Wiring connection, (2) Power to computer (ECU) — fusible link, fuses, EFI main relay, (3) Air flow meter, (4) Water temp. sensor, (5) Air temp. sensor (in air flow meter), (6) Throttle position sensor, (7) Injection signal circuit — injector wirings, computer (ECU), resistor (4A-GZE).
EFI SYSTEM · Diagnosis System
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p216 OEM manual
-
CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CHECK
The 'CHECK ENGINE' warning light will come on when the ignition switch is placed at ON and the engine is not running. When the engine is started, the 'CHECK ENGINE' warning light should go out. If the light remains on, the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.
-
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECU contains a built-in self-diagnosis system by which troubles with the engine signal network are detected and indicated by a 'CHECK ENGINE' warning light on the instrument panel. The ECU stores the failure code associated with the detected failure until the diagnosis system is cleared by removing the AM2 fuse with the ignition switch off. The light goes out automatically when the malfunction has been cleared.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter · 4A-GE
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p224 OEM manual
-
EFI SYSTEM CHECK PROCEDURE
The EFI circuit can be checked by measuring the resistance and voltage at the wiring connectors of the ECU.
-
PERFORM VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS WITH CONNECTORS CONNECTED
Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected.
-
VERIFY BATTERY VOLTAGE
Verify that the battery voltage is 11V or above when the ignition switch is at ON.
-
USE HIGH IMPEDANCE VOLTMETER
Using a voltmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum), measure the voltage at each terminal of the wiring connector. NOTE: If there is any problem, see TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT WITH VOLT/OHMMETER.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter · 4A-GZE
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p226 OEM manual
-
EFI CIRCUIT CHECK METHOD
The EFI circuit can be checked by measuring the resistance and voltage at the wiring connectors of the ECU.
-
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT CONNECTION
Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected.
-
BATTERY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION
Verify that the battery voltage is 11V or above when the ignition switch is at ON.
-
VOLTMETER SPECIFICATION
Using a voltmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum), measure the voltage at each terminal of the wiring connector.
-
FURTHER TROUBLESHOOTING REFERENCE
If there is any problem, see TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT WITH VOLT/OHMMETER.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter · Location of Fuses and Fusible Links
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p228 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT WITH VOLT/OHMMETER (4A-GE)
The following troubleshooting procedures are designed for inspection of each separate system, and therefore the actual procedure may vary somewhat. However, troubleshooting should be performed by referring to the inspection methods described in this manual. Before beginning inspection, it is best to first make a simple check of the fuses, fusible links and the condition of the connectors. The following troubleshooting procedures are based on the supposition that the trouble lies in either a short or open circuit in a component outside the computer or a short circuit within the computer. If engine trouble occurs even though proper operating voltage is detected in the computer connector, then the computer is faulty and should be replaced.
-
LOCATION OF FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINKS
Junction Block No. 2 contains: EFI Main Relay, EFI 15A fuse, AM2 7.5A fuse, and Injector Relay. Fusible Link 1.25B is located separately in the engine compartment.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p229 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS +B1 OR +B AND E1 (IG S/W ON)
Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals +B1 or +B and E1 with IG S/W ON. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminals +B1 or +B and body ground (IG S/W ON). If NO: Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK on step 2: Check fuse, fusible link and wiring harness. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check EFI main relay. If BAD: Replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p232 OEM manual
-
VTA ↔ E2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1) There is no specified voltage at ECU terminals VTA and E2 (IG S/W ON). 2) Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B1 or +B and body ground (IG S/W ON). If NO: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground; if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK from step 2: Refer to No. 1 (See page FI-34); if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: 3) Check throttle position sensor; if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU and throttle position sensor; if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Try another ECU.
-
VCC ↔ E2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1) There is no voltage between ECU terminals VCC and E2 (IG S/W ON). Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B1 or +B and body ground (IG S/W ON). If OK: 2) Check throttle position sensor; if BAD: Repair or replace. If NO: Refer to No. 1 (See page FI-34). If throttle position sensor OK: Check wiring between ECU and throttle position sensor; if OK: Try another ECU; if BAD: Repair or replace wiring.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p235 OEM manual
-
No voltage between ECU terminals W and E1 (Idling)
Step 1: Confirm no voltage between ECU terminals W and E1 while idling. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal W and body ground. If NO voltage at W to body ground, proceed to step 3. If OK, check fuse and check engine warning light. Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If OK, try another ECU. If BAD, repair or replace. If fuse and warning light check is BAD, try another ECU. If fuse blows again, check wiring between ECU terminal W and fuse. If BAD, repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter · FI-43
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p238 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING: No voltage between ECU terminals STA and E1 (IG S/W ON)
1. Check starter operation. If OK, check wiring between ECU and starter terminal 50. If that wiring is OK, check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground; if bad, repair or replace. If starter operation is BAD, check fusible link, battery, wiring ignition switch, starter relay and clutch start switch; if bad, repair or replace. If all OK, proceed to step 2. 2. Check that there is voltage at STA (50) terminal of starter (IG S/W ST), STD voltage 6–14V. If OK, check starter. If NO, check wiring between ignition switch ST terminal and starter STA (50) terminal.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p241 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS VF AND E1
Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal VF and body ground. If NO: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If OK: Try another ECU. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK at VF to body ground check: proceed to air leak check.
-
CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
Is air leaking into air intake system? If BAD: Repair air leak. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Check spark plugs. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK DISTRIBUTOR AND IGNITION SYSTEM
Check distributor and ignition system. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
Check fuel pressure. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK INJECTOR
Check injector. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK COLD START INJECTOR
Check cold start injector (Rich malfunction only). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK AIR FLOW METER
Check air flow meter. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK OPERATION OF OXYGEN SENSOR
Check operation of oxygen sensor. If OK: System normal. If BAD: Check wiring between oxygen sensor and ECU connector. If BAD: Repair wiring. If OK: Replace oxygen sensor.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter · Location of Fuses and Fusible Links
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p243 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT WITH VOLT/OHMMETER (4A-GZE)
The following troubleshooting procedures are designed for inspection of each separate system, and therefore the actual procedure may vary somewhat. However, troubleshooting should be performed by referring to the inspection methods described in this manual. Before beginning inspection, it is best to first make a simple check of the fuses, fusible links and the condition of the connectors. The following troubleshooting procedures are based on the supposition that the trouble lies in either a short or open circuit in a component outside the computer or a short circuit within the computer. If engine trouble occurs even though proper operating voltage is detected in the computer connector, then the computer is faulty and should be replaced.
-
LOCATION OF FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINKS
Junction Block No. 2 contains: EFI Main Relay, EFI 15A fuse, AM2 7.5A fuse, and Injector Relay. A Fusible Link 1.25B is also present in the engine bay.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p247 OEM manual
-
VTA ↔ E2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Diagnostic flowchart for when there is no specified voltage at ECU terminals VTA and E2 (IG S/W ON). Steps: (1) No specified voltage at ECU terminals VTA and E2 (IG S/W ON). (2) Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B1 or +B and body ground (IG S/W ON). If NO: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground — if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK from step 2: Refer to No. 1 (See Page FI-49) — if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: (3) Check throttle position sensor — if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU and throttle position sensor — if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Try another ECU.
-
VC ↔ E2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Diagnostic flowchart for when there is no voltage between ECU terminals VC and E2 (IG S/W ON). Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B1 or +B and body ground (IG S/W ON). If OK: (2) Check throttle position sensor — if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU and throttle position sensor — if OK: Try another ECU; if BAD: Repair or replace wiring. If NO voltage at +B1/+B: Refer to No. 1 (See page FI-49).
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p249 OEM manual
-
No voltage at terminals No. 10 and No. 20 (Ignition Switch ON)
There is no voltage between computer terminal No. 10 and/or No. 20 and E01 and/or E02. (IG S/W ON). Follow the diagnostic flowchart: (1) Check specified voltage between resistor terminal (+) and body ground STD voltage 9-14V. If NO: Check fuse, fusible link, injector relay and ignition switch — if BAD: Repair or replace. (2) Check specified voltage between resistor terminal (-) and body ground STD voltage 9-14V. If NO: Replace resistor. If OK: (3) Check resistance of the magnetic coil in each injector STD resistance Approx. 2.9 Ω. If OK: Check wiring between computer and resistor. If BAD: Replace injector.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p251 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN THA AND E2 (IG S/W ON)
Step 1: There is no specified voltage between ECU terminals THA and E2 with ignition switch ON. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B1 or +B and body ground with ignition switch ON. If NO, refer to No. 1 (See page FI-49). If OK, proceed to Step 3. Step 3: Check air temp. sensor. If BAD, replace air temp. sensor. If OK, check wiring between ECU and air temperature sensor. If wiring check is OK, try another ECU. If wiring check is BAD, repair or replace wiring.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p252 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING: No Voltage at THW – E2 (No. 8)
Diagnostic flowchart for condition where there is no specified voltage (0.1–1.0 V) between ECU terminals THW and E2 with ignition switch ON and coolant temperature at 80°C (176°F). Step 1: Confirm no voltage between THW and E2 (IG S/W ON). Step 2: Check voltage between ECU terminal +B1 or +B and body ground (IG S/W ON). If NO → Refer to No. 1 (page FI-49). If OK → Step 3: Check water temp. sensor. If BAD → Replace water temp. sensor. If OK → Check wiring between ECU and air temp. sensor. If OK → Try another ECU. If BAD → Repair or replace wiring.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p253 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — No voltage between STA and E1 (IG S/W ON)
1. Verify there is no voltage between ECU terminals STA and E1 with ignition switch ON. 2. Check starter operation. If OK, check wiring between ECU and starter terminal 50. If BAD, repair or replace. If wiring between ECU and starter terminal 50 is OK, check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If BAD, repair or replace. If starter operation is BAD, check fusible link, battery, wiring, ignition switch, starter relay and clutch start switch. If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, proceed to step 2. 3. (Step 2) Check that there is voltage at STA (50) terminal of starter with ignition switch in ST position; STD voltage 6–14V. If OK, check starter. If NO, check wiring between ignition switch ST terminal and starter STA (50) terminal.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p254 OEM manual
-
IGT – E1 NO VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
There is no voltage between ECU terminal IGT and E1 (Idling). Step 1: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal IGT and body ground (Idling). If NO: Refer to No.1 (See page FI-69); if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK on No.1: Check wiring between ECU and distributor; if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check distributor; if BAD: Replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU and Igniter; if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check igniter (See page IG-4); if BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Try another ECU. If voltage check between IGT and body ground is OK: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground; if BAD: Repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting EFI Electronic Circuit with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p257 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS VF AND E1
There is no voltage between ECU terminals VF and E1. Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal VF and body ground. If NO: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If OK: Try another ECU. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK (voltage present at VF to body ground): proceed to air intake check.
-
CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
Is air leaking into air intake system? If BAD: Repair air leak. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Check spark plugs. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK DISTRIBUTOR AND IGNITION SYSTEM
Check distributor and ignition system. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
Check fuel pressure. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK INJECTOR
Check injector. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK COLD START INJECTOR
Check cold start injector. * (Rich malfunction only) If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK AIR FLOW METER
Check air flow meter. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: proceed.
-
CHECK OPERATION OF OXYGEN SENSOR
Check operation of oxygen sensor (step 2). If OK: System normal. If BAD: Check wiring between oxygen sensor and ECU connector. If BAD: Repair wiring. If OK: Replace oxygen sensor.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Fuel Pump
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p259 OEM manual
-
FUEL PUMP COMPONENTS
The fuel pump is an in-tank electric pump. Internal components include: Check Valve, Relief Valve, Bearing, Brush, Armature, Magnet, Bearing, Impeller, Filter, and Rubber Cushion. The impeller rotates within a casing drawing fuel from the inlet and discharging through the outlet.
-
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
The fuel pump circuit consists of: Fusible Link 1.25B, Fuse EFI 15A, EFI Main Relay (IG2/AM2), Ignition ST2 Switch, Fuse AM2 7.5A, Clutch (M/T) or Neutral (A/T) Start Switch, Starter Relay, Circuit Opening Relay (+B, STA, E1, Fc, FP), Check Connector (FP, +B), Fuel Pump Switch (in Air Flow Meter), and Fuel Pump.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p265 OEM manual
-
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK PROCEDURE (CONTINUED)
Steps q through w covering reconnection of vacuum sensing hose, measurement of fuel pressure at idle after 90 seconds, pressure hold check after engine off, SST removal, cold start injector hose reconnection, wiring connector reconnection, and fuel leakage check.
- Disconnect the battery ground cable and carefully remove the SST to prevent gasoline from splashing.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Removal of Fuel Pump
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p266 OEM manual
-
FIRE SAFETY WARNING
Do not smoke or work near an open flame when working on the fuel pump.
- Do not smoke or work near an open flame when working on the fuel pump.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Pressure Regulator (4A-GE)
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p273 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (See page FI-40)
-
INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE REGULATOR
Step 1: INSTALL PRESSURE REGULATOR — Install a new o-ring and the pressure regulator, and torque the two bolts. Step 2: CONNECT FUEL PIPE. Step 3: CONNECT VACUUM SENSING HOSE. Step 4: CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKAGE (See page FI-8)
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Pressure Regulator (4A-GZE)
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p274 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (See page FI-65)
-
INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE REGULATOR
Steps: 1. INSTALL PRESSURE REGULATOR — Install a new o-ring and the pressure regulator, and torque the two bolts. Torque: 75 kg-cm (65 in-lb, 7.4 N·m). 2. CONNECT FUEL HOSE — Install two new gasket, fuel hose and union bolt. Torque: 150 kg-cm (11 ft-lb, 15 N·m). 3. CONNECT VACUUM SENSING HOSE. 4. CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKAGE (See page FI-8).
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Fuel Tank and Line
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p288 OEM manual
-
ALWAYS USE NEW GASKETS
Always use new gaskets when replacing the fuel tank or component part.
-
INCLUDE RUBBER PROTECTORS ON RE-INSTALLATION
When re-installing, be sure to include the rubber protectors on the upper surfaces of the fuel tank and tank band.
-
APPLY PROPER TORQUE
Apply the proper torque to all parts tightened.
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Air Flow Meter
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p290 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF AIR FLOW METER — MEASURE RESISTANCE OF AIR FLOW METER
Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between each terminal by moving the measuring plate. Terminals E1–Fc: Infinity (fully closed) / Zero (other than closed) for both 4A-GE and 4A-GZE. Terminals E2–Vs: 4A-GE 20–400 Ω (fully closed), 20–3,000 Ω (fully open); 4A-GZE 200–600 Ω (fully closed), 20–1,200 Ω (fully open). NOTE: Resistance between terminals E2 and Vs will change in a wave pattern as the measuring plate slowly opens.
-
INSTALLATION OF AIR FLOW METER
1. INSTALL AIR FLOW METER. 2. CONNECT AIR CLEANER HOSES TO AIR FLOW METER. 3. CONNECT AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR. 4. INSTALL RESONATOR (4A-GE) OR INTERCOOLER (4A-GZE).
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p293 OEM manual
-
CHECK VACUUM AT PORT N
Start the engine. Check the vacuum at port 'N' with your finger.
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Removal of Throttle Body
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p294 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF THROTTLE BODY (4A-GZE)
Procedure for removing throttle body on 4A-GZE engine variant.
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Disassembly of Throttle Body
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p297 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY OF THROTTLE BODY (4A-GZE) — REMOVE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Remove the two screws and sensor.
-
DISASSEMBLY OF THROTTLE BODY (4A-GZE) — REMOVE ISC VALVE
Remove the four screws and ISC valve with the gasket.
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Assembly of Throttle Body
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p298 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF THROTTLE BODY (4A-GZE) — INSTALL ISC VALVE
Install a new gasket, ISC valve and four screws.
-
ASSEMBLY OF THROTTLE BODY (4A-GZE) — INSTALL THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check that the throttle valve is fully closed. Place the sensor on the throttle body as shown in the figure.
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Installation of Throttle Body
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p299 OEM manual
-
ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
See step 4 on page FI-100. Turn the sensor clockwise, and temporarily install the two screws.
-
INSTALLATION OF THROTTLE BODY (4A-GZE) — INSTALL THROTTLE BODY
Place on a new gasket and install the throttle body with two bolts and two nuts. Torque: 220 kg-cm (16 ft-lb, 22 N·m). Then connect two water by-pass hoses.
-
INSTALLATION OF THROTTLE BODY (4A-GZE) — INSTALL INTAKE AIR CONNECTOR
Place on a new gasket and install the throttle body with two bolts and two nuts. Torque: 100 kg-cm (7 ft-lb, 10 N·m). Connect throttle cable (A/T) and accelerator cable.
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Idle Speed Control (ISC) Valve (4A-GZE)
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p301 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION — INSPECT RESISTANCE OF ISC VALVE
Inspect resistance of ISC valve by: (a) Disconnecting the ISC valve connector. (b) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between each terminal. Resistance: ISC1 – +B: 16–17 Ω; ISC2 – +B: 16–17 Ω.
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · ISC Valve
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p302 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF ISC VALVE
1. INSTALL ISC VALVE (See page FI-103) 2. CONNECT TWO WATER BY-PASS HOSES 3. CONNECT ISC VALVE CONNECTOR 4. REFILL WITH COOLANT
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Auxiliary Air Valve (4A-GE)
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p303 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF AUXILIARY AIR VALVE
1. REMOVE THROTTLE BODY (See page FI-99). 2. REMOVE AIR VALVE (See step 2 on page FI-102).
-
INSTALLATION OF AUXILIARY AIR VALVE
1. INSTALL AIR VALVE (See step 2 on page FI-103). 2. INSTALL THROTTLE BODY (See page FI-104).
EFI SYSTEM · Electronic Control System · Location of Electronic Control Parts
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p304 OEM manual
-
LOCATION OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL PARTS
Diagram showing the physical locations of electronic control components in the engine bay and interior of the vehicle, including: Solenoid Resistor (4A-GZE), Injector Relay, Throttle Position Sensor, Water Temperature Sensor, Start Injector Time Switch, EFI Main Relay, ECU, and Circuit Opening Relay.
EFI SYSTEM · Electronic Control System · Electronic Controlled Unit (ECU)
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p318 OEM manual
-
PERFORM VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS WITH CONNECTORS CONNECTED
Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected.
-
VERIFY BATTERY VOLTAGE
Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or above when the ignition switch is ON.
EFI SYSTEM · Electronic Control System · Connectors of ECU (4A-GZE)
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p320 OEM manual
-
Connectors of ECU (4A-GZE)
Lists all ECU connector symbols and their corresponding terminal functions for the 4A-GZE engine. Symbols marked with * are For A/T; symbols marked with ** are For Calif. Terminals include: E01 Engine ground (Power), E02 Engine ground (Power), RSC ISC valve, RSO ISC valve, STA Starter switch, IGT Igniter, EGR EGR valve, E1 Engine ground, *NSW Neutral start switch, SMC Super charger relay, No.10 No. 3,4 injector, No.20 No. 1,2 injector, G(-) Engine revolution sensor, VF Service connector, G1 Engine revolution sensor, T Service connector, G2 Engine revolution sensor, VTA Throttle position sensor, NE Engine revolution sensor, IDL Throttle position sensor, VSV3 VSV (Air bypass), HT Oxygen sensor heater, IGF Igniter, OX Oxygen sensor, THW Water temperature sensor, E2 Sensor ground, R/P Fuel control switch, E22 Sensor ground, VSV2 VSV (Air bleed), *L1 ECT computer, *L3 ECT computer, *L2 ECT computer, ECT1 ECT computer, TIL Super charger indicator lamp, A/C A/C Magnet clutch, SPD Speedometer sensor, W Warning light, ELS1 Stop light, FPU VSV (FPU), THA Inlet air temp. sensor, KNK Knock sensor, VS Air flow meter, VC Air flow meter, *THG EGR temperature sensor, BATT Battery, +B EFI main relay, ELS2 Accessory switch, +B1 EFI main relay.
COOLING SYSTEM · Troubleshooting, Check of Engine Coolant
Cooling
AW11_1988_full · p325 OEM manual
-
THERMOSTAT NOTE — A SERIES ENGINE
The thermostat on the A series engine is equipped with a by-pass valve. Therefore, if the engine tends to overheat, removal of the thermostat will an adversely effect, cooling efficiency.
COOLING SYSTEM · Water Pump · Adjust Drive Belt Tension
Cooling
AW11_1988_full · p332 OEM manual
-
NEW BELT DEFINITION
"New belt" refers to a belt which has been used less than 5 minutes on a running engine.
-
USED BELT DEFINITION
"Used belt" refers to a belt which has been used on a running engine for 5 minutes or more.
-
CHECK BELT FIT IN RIBBED GROOVES
After installing the drive belt, check that it fits properly in the ribbed grooves.
COOLING SYSTEM · Thermostat
Cooling
AW11_1988_full · p333 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF THERMOSTAT
NOTE: The thermostat is numbered according to the valve opening temperature.
COOLING SYSTEM · Radiator
Cooling
AW11_1988_full · p334 OEM manual
-
CLEANING OF RADIATOR
Using water or steam cleaner, remove any mud and dirt from the radiator core.
- If using a high pressure type cleaner, be careful not to deform radiator core fins. Keep a distance of more than 40 – 50 cm (15.75 – 19.69 in.) between the radiator core and cleaner nozzle when the cleaner nozzle pressure is 30 – 35 kg/cm2 (427 – 498 psi, 2,942 – 3,432 kPa).
-
CHECK RADIATOR CAP (WATER FILLER CAP)
Using a radiator cap tester, pump the tester until the relief valve opens. Check that the valve opens between 0.75 kg/cm2 (10.7 psi, 74 kPa) and 1.05 kg/cm2 (15 psi, 103 kPa). Check that the pressure gauge does not drop rapidly when pressure on the cap is below 0.6 kg/cm2 (8.5 psi, 59 kPa). If either check is not within limits, replace the cap.
-
CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
Fill the radiator with coolant and attach a radiator cap tester. Warm up the engine. Pump it to 1.2 kg/cm2 (17 psi, 118 kPa), check that pressure does not drop. If the pressure drops, check for leaks from the hoses, pipes, radiator or water or water pump. If no external leaks are found, check the heater core, block and head.
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fan (Radiator)
Cooling
AW11_1988_full · p339 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY OF ELECTRIC COOLING FAN
See page CO-13. Step 1: REMOVE FAN — Remove the nut and fan. Step 2: REMOVE FAN MOTOR — Remove the three screws and fan motor.
-
ASSEMBLY OF ELECTRIC COOLING FAN
See page CO-13. Step 1: INSTALL FAN MOTOR — Install the fan with the three screws. Step 2: INSTALL FAN — Install the fan with the nut.
-
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC COOLING FAN
Step 1: INSTALL ELECTRIC COOLING FAN(S). Step 2: CONNECT CONNECTOR OF FAN MOTOR.
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fan (Engine Compartment)
Cooling
AW11_1988_full · p343 OEM manual
-
Inspect Relay Continuity
Using an Ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between terminals 1 and 2. Check that there is continuity between terminals 3 and 4. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
Inspect Relay Operation
Apply battery voltage across terminals 1 and 2. Check that there is no continuity between terminals 3 and 4. If operation is not as described, replace the relay.
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fan (Engine Compartment)
Cooling
AW11_1988_full · p344 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY OF ELECTRIC COOLING FAN
See page CO-17. Steps: 1. REMOVE FAN — Remove the nut and fan. 2. REMOVE FAN MOTOR — Remove the three screws and fan motor.
-
ASSEMBLY OF ELECTRIC COOLING FAN
See page CO-17. Steps: 1. INSTALL FAN MOTOR — Install the fan motor with the three screws. 2. INSTALL FAN — Install the fan with nut.
-
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC COOLING FAN
Steps: 1. INSTALL ELECTRIC COOLING FAN — Install the cooling fan with the three bolts and spacers. 2. CONNECT CONNECTOR OF FAN MOTOR.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil Pump · Replacement of Oil Seal / Assembly of Oil Pump
Lubrication / oil
AW11_1988_full · p353 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF OIL PUMP
See page LU-5. Steps: (1) INSTALL RELIEF VALVE — (a) Insert the relief valve, spring and retainer into the pump body hole. (b) Using snap ring pliers, install the snap ring. (2) INSTALL DRIVE AND DRIVEN GEARS — (a) Insert the drive and driven gears into the pump body.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil Cooler and Pressure Regulator
Lubrication / oil
AW11_1988_full · p359 OEM manual
-
REMOVE OIL COOLER
Step 8 of the removal procedure: (a) Remove the clamps and disconnect the two water hoses and two oil cooler hoses. (b) Remove the two bolts, insulator and oil cooler.
IGNITION SYSTEM · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Ignition
AW11_1988_full · p363 OEM manual
-
DO NOT KEEP IGNITION SWITCH ON TOO LONG
Do not keep the ignition switch on for more than 10 minutes if the engine will not start.
-
TACHOMETER CONNECTION METHODS
There are two methods of connecting the tachometer: (1) To the ignition coil — Connect the positive (+) terminal to the ignition coil negative (−) terminal. (2) To the check connector — Connect the tachometer test probe to the check connector terminal IG ⊖.
-
CONFIRM TACHOMETER COMPATIBILITY
As some tachometers are not compatible with this ignition system, we recommended that you confirm the compatibility of your unit before using.
-
NEVER ALLOW IGNITION COIL TERMINALS TO TOUCH GROUND
NEVER allow the ignition coil terminals to touch ground as it could result in damage to the igniter and/or ignition coil.
-
DO NOT DISCONNECT BATTERY WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING
Do not disconnect the battery when the engine is running.
-
ENSURE IGNITER IS PROPERLY GROUNDED
Make sure that the igniter is properly grounded to the body.
IGNITION SYSTEM · Electronic Spark Advance (ESA)
Ignition
AW11_1988_full · p364 OEM manual
-
ELECTRONIC SPARK ADVANCE (ESA)
The ECU is programmed with data for optimum ignition timing under any and all operating conditions. Using data provided by sensors which monitor various engine functions (rpm, intake air volume, engine temperature, etc.) the microcomputer (ECU) triggers the spark at precisely the right instant.
IGNITION SYSTEM · On-Vehicle Inspection
Ignition
AW11_1988_full · p366 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF SPARK PLUG (Platinum Tipped Spark Plug) — CAUTIONS
Never use a wire brush for cleaning. Never attempt to adjust gap on used plug. Spark plugs should be replaced every 60,000 miles (100,000 km).
- Never use a wire brush for cleaning.
- Never attempt to adjust gap on used plug.
-
INSPECT ELECTRODE
(a) If using a megger (insulation resistance meter): Measure the insulation resistance. Correct insulation resistance: More than 10 MΩ. If less than 10 MΩ, proceed to step 2. (b) If not using a megger: Quickly race the engine to 4,000 rpm five times. Visually inspect the spark plugs. If the electrode is dry — Okay. If the electrode is wet — Proceed to step 2.
IGNITION SYSTEM · On-Vehicle Inspection
Ignition
AW11_1988_full · p368 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF DISTRIBUTOR — INSPECT AIR GAPS
Using a feeler gauge, measure the gap between the signal rotor and pickup coil projection. Air gap: 0.2 - 0.4 mm (0.008 - 0.016 in.). If the gap is not within specification, replace the distributor.
IGNITION SYSTEM · Distributor
Ignition
AW11_1988_full · p371 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF DISTRIBUTOR — SET NO. 1 CYLINDER TO TDC/COMPRESSION
Turn the crankshaft pulley and align its groove with the 'O' mark on the No. 1 timing belt cover. Remove the oil filler cap and check that you can see the cavity in the camshaft. If necessary, turn the crankshaft pulley one complete revolution.
-
INSTALLATION OF DISTRIBUTOR — INSTALL DISTRIBUTOR
Install a new O-ring to the distributor. Always use a new O-ring when installing the distributor.
STARTING SYSTEM
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p374 OEM manual
-
STARTING SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index listing sections: TROUBLESHOOTING (ST-2), STARTER (ST-3), CLUTCH STARTER RELAY (ST-12), CLUTCH START SWITCH (ST-12).
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter · Inspection
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p378 OEM manual
-
Armature Coil — INSPECT THAT COMMUTATOR IS NOT GROUNDED
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between the commutator and armature coil core. If there is continuity, replace the armature.
-
Armature Coil — INSPECT COMMUTATOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If there is no continuity between any segment, replace the armature.
-
Commutator — INSPECT COMMUTATOR FOR DIRTY AND BURNT SURFACES
If the surface is dirty or burnt, correct with sandpaper (No. 400) or a lathe.
-
Commutator — INSPECT COMMUTATOR CIRCLE RUNOUT
If the circle runout is greater than the maximum, correct with a lathe.
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p379 OEM manual
-
INSPECT FIELD COIL FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between the lead wire and field coil brush lead. If there is no continuity, replace the field frame.
-
INSPECT THAT FIELD COIL IS NOT GROUNDED
Using an ohmmeter, check for no continuity between the field coil end and field frame. If there is continuity, replace the field frame.
-
MEASURE BRUSH LENGTH
If length is less than the minimum, replace the brush and dress with an emery cloth.
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p380 OEM manual
-
MEASURE BRUSH SPRING LOAD WITH A PULL SCALE
If the reading is below standard, replace the brush spring. Spring installed load: 1.785 – 2.415 kg (3.9 – 5.3 lb, 18 – 24 N). NOTE: Take the pull scale reading at the very instant the brush spring separates from the brush.
-
INSPECT INSULATION OF BRUSH HOLDER
Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between the positive and negative brush holders. If there is continuity, repair or replace the brush holder.
-
INSPECT BEARINGS
Turn each bearing by hand while applying inward force. If resistance is felt or if the bearing sticks, replace the bearing.
-
IF NECESSARY, REPLACE BEARINGS
Using SST, remove the bearing from the armature shaft. Using SST, remove the other bearing on the opposite side. SST 09286-46011
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter · Magnetic Switch
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p381 OEM manual
-
INSTALL LARGE BEARING ONTO SHAFT
Using SST and a press, tap a new large bearing onto the shaft. SST 09201-41020
-
INSTALL SMALL BEARING ONTO SHAFT
Using a press, install a new small bearing onto the shaft.
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter, Starter Relay, Clutch Start Switch
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p385 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CLUTCH STARTER RELAY — Inspect Relay Continuity
NOTE: The relay is located in the No. 2 junction block of the engine compartment. (a) Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between terminals 1 and 3. (b) Check that there is no continuity between terminals 2 and 4. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
INSPECT CLUTCH STARTER RELAY — Inspect Relay Operation
(a) Apply battery voltage across terminals 1 and 3. (b) Check that there is continuity between terminals 2 and 4. If operation is not as specified, replace the relay.
CHARGING SYSTEM · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p387 OEM manual
-
CHECK BATTERY CABLE CONNECTIONS
Check that the battery cables are connected to the correct terminals.
-
DISCONNECT BATTERY CABLES DURING QUICK CHARGE
Disconnect the battery cables when the battery is given a quick charge.
-
DO NOT USE HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTER
Do not perform tests with a high voltage insulation resistance tester.
-
NEVER DISCONNECT BATTERY WITH ENGINE RUNNING
Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running.
CHARGING SYSTEM · On-Vehicle Inspection
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p390 OEM manual
-
CHECK CHARGING CIRCUIT (NO LOAD)
Check the charging circuit as follows: With the engine running from idling to 2,000 rpm, check the reading on the ammeter and voltmeter. Standard amperage: Less than 10 A.
-
VOLTAGE READING GREATER THAN STANDARD
If the voltage reading is greater than standard, replace the IC regulator.
-
VOLTAGE READING LESS THAN STANDARD
If the voltage reading is less than standard, check the IC regulator and alternator as follows: with terminal "F" grounded, start the engine and check the voltage reading of terminal "B". If the voltage reading is greater than standard, replace the IC regulator. If the voltage reading is less than standard, check the alternator.
CHARGING SYSTEM · Alternator · Removal and Disassembly
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p392 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY OF ALTERNATOR
See page CH-6. Perform the following disassembly steps.
-
(4A-GZE) REAR COVER PLATE
Step 1 of disassembly (4A-GZE only): (a) Remove the nut and terminal insulator. (b) Remove the three nuts and cover plate. (c) Remove the two bolts.
-
REMOVE REAR END COVER
Step 2 of disassembly: (a) (4A-GE) Remove the nut and terminal insulator. (b) Remove the three nuts and end cover.
-
REMOVE BRUSH HOLDER AND IC REGULATOR (4A-GE) OR READ WIRE (4A-GZE)
Step 3 of disassembly: (4A-GE) Remove the five screws, brush holder and IC regulator.
CHARGING SYSTEM · Alternator · Brush and Brush Holder / Rectifier
Starting / charging
AW11_1988_full · p395 OEM manual
-
INSPECT POSITIVE SIDE RECTIFIER
Using an ohmmeter, connect one tester probe to the positive stud and the other to each rectifier terminal. Reverse the polarity of the tester probes and repeat step a. Check that one shows continuity and the other shows no continuity. If not, replace the rectifier holder.
CLUTCH · Check and Adjustment of Clutch Pedal, Bleeding of Clutch System
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p404 OEM manual
-
BLEEDING OF CLUTCH SYSTEM
NOTE: If any work is done on the clutch system or if air is suspected in the clutch lines, bleed the system of air.
- DO NOT let brake fluid remain on a painted surface. Wash it off immediately.
-
FILL CLUTCH RESERVOIR WITH BRAKE FLUID
Check the reservoir frequently. Add fluid if necessary.
-
CONNECT VINYL TUBE TO BLEEDER PLUG
Insert the other end of the tube in a half-filled container of brake fluid.
-
BLEED CLUTCH LINE
(a) Slowly pump the clutch pedal several times. (b) While depressing the pedal, loosen the bleeder plug until the fluid starts to run out. Then close the bleeder plug. (c) Repeat this procedure until there are no more air bubbles in the fluid.
CLUTCH · Inspection of Clutch Start System
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p405 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF CLUTCH START SWITCH — INSPECT CONTINUITY
1. INSPECT CONTINUITY OF CLUTCH START SWITCH: (a) Check that there is continuity between terminals when the switch is ON (pushed). (b) Check that there is no continuity between terminals when the switch is OFF (free). If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF CLUTCH START SWITCH — ADJUST SWITCH
2. ADJUST CLUTCH START SWITCH: (a) Measure the pedal stroke, and check the switch clearance "A" using the chart. (b) Loosen and adjust the switch position. (c) Recheck that the engine does not start when the clutch pedal is released.
CLUTCH · Clutch Master Cylinder
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p408 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF MASTER CYLINDER
See page CL-5. Steps: (1) Coat piston with lithium soap base glycol grease, as shown. (2) Insert piston into cylinder. (3) Install push rod assembly — insert and push in the push rod assembly, and using a screwdriver, install the snap ring. (4) Install reservoir tank.
-
CLEAN DISASSEMBLED PARTS
Clean the disassembled parts with compressed air.
CLUTCH · Clutch Release Cylinder
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p411 OEM manual
-
REMOVE TWO BOLTS AND PULL OUT RELEASE CYLINDER
Remove two bolts and pull out the release cylinder.
-
INSPECTION OF RELEASE CYLINDER
Clean the disassembled parts with compressed air.
-
INSPECT RELEASE CYLINDER BORE FOR SCORING OR CORROSION
If a problem is found, clean or replace the cylinder.
-
INSPECT PISTON AND CUPS FOR WEAR, SCORING, CRACKS OR SWELLING
If either one requires replacement, use the parts from the cylinder kit.
-
INSPECT PUSH ROD FOR WEAR OR DAMAGE
If necessary, replace the push rod.
CLUTCH · Clutch Release Cylinder
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p412 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF RELEASE CYLINDER
See page CL-9. Steps: 1. INSTALL RELEASE CYLINDER AND TWO BOLTS. 2. INSTALL BLEEDER TUBE WITH BLEEDER PLUG. 3. CONNECT CLUTCH LINE AND BLEEDER TUBES — Using SST 09751-36011, connect the tubes. Torque: 200 kg-cm (14 ft-lb, 20 N·m). 4. FILL CLUTCH RESERVOIR WITH BRAKE FLUID AND BLEED CLUTCH SYSTEM (See page CL-3). 5. CHECK FOR LEAKS.
CLUTCH · Clutch Unit · Inspection and Repair
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p414 OEM manual
-
REMOVE CLUTCH COVER AND DISC
Step 2 of clutch unit removal procedure.
-
REMOVE RELEASE BEARING, FORK AND BOOT FROM TRANSAXLE
Step 3 of clutch unit removal procedure.
CLUTCH · Clutch Unit · Inspection & Installation
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p415 OEM manual
-
INSPECT DIAPHRAGM SPRING FOR WEAR
Using calipers, measure the diaphragm spring for depth and width of wear. Maximum: Depth 0.6 mm (0.024 in.), Width 5.0 mm (0.197 in.). If necessary, replace the clutch cover.
-
INSPECT RELEASE BEARING
Turn the bearing by hand while applying force in the axial direction. If the bearing sticks or has much resistance, replace the release bearing together with the hub. NOTE: The bearing is permanently lubricated and requires no cleaning or lubrication.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p418 OEM manual
-
REMOVE OIL PACKING (FIPG) FROM GASKET SURFACES
Using a razor blade and gasket scraper, remove all the oil packing (FIPG) material from the gasket surfaces.
-
THOROUGHLY CLEAN ALL COMPONENTS
Thoroughly clean all components to remove all the loose material.
-
CLEAN SEALING SURFACES
Clean both sealing surfaces with a non-residue solvent.
-
APPLY SEAL PACKING
Apply the seal packing in approx. 1 mm (0.04 in.) bead along the sealing surface.
-
ASSEMBLE WITHIN 10 MINUTES
Parts must be assembled within 10 minutes of application. Otherwise, the packing (FIPG) material must be removed and reapplied.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · C52 Transaxle · Reassembly
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p444 OEM manual
-
MEASURE PRELOAD AND RESELECT ADJUSTING SHIM
Using SST 09564-32011 and torque meter, measure the preload (starting). New bearing: 8–16 kg-cm (6.9–13.9 in.-lb, 0.8–1.6 N·m). Reused bearing: 5–10 kg-cm (4.3–8.7 in.-lb, 0.5–1.0 N·m). If the preload is not within specification, remove the transmission case side outer race of the side bearing with SST. Reselect an adjusting shim. The preload will change about 3–4 kg-cm (2.6–3.5 in.-lb, 0.3–0.4 N·m) with each shim thickness.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · C52 Transaxle · Differential
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p453 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT OF DIFFERENTIAL
See pages AT-131 to 133.
-
ADJUSTMENT OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE
See pages AT-134, 135.
-
INSTALLATION OF DIFFERENTIAL
Step 1: INSTALL DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY TO TRANSAXLE — See steps 18 to 37 and 39 to 48 on pages MT-27 to 36. Step 2: INSTALL TRANSAXLE — See pages MT-37 to 40.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · E51 Transaxle · Assembly
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p495 OEM manual
-
TRANSAXLE CASE COVER INSTALLATION
Remove any packing material and be careful not to drop oil on the contacting surfaces of the transaxle case or cover. Apply seal packing to the transaxle case cover as shown in the figure. Install the transaxle case cover as soon as the seal packing is applied. Apply liquid sealant to the bolt threads. Install and torque the four bolts and three nuts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · System Description, Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p519 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The transaxle for A240E and A241E, also called Electronic Controlled Transaxle (ECT), differs from the oil pressure control type transaxle in that it is controlled by a microcomputer. Accordingly, troubleshooting procedures differ also. Trouble occurring in the ECT can stem from one of three sources: the engine, the ECT electronic control unit or the transaxle itself. Before troubleshooting, determine in which of these three sources the problem lies, and begin troubleshooting with the simplest operation, gradually working up in order of difficulty.
-
Basic Troubleshooting
Before troubleshooting an ECT, first determine whether the problem is electrical or mechanical. To do this, just refer to the basic troubleshooting flow-chart provided below. If the cause is already known, using the basic troubleshooting chart below along with the general troubleshooting chart on the following page should speed the procedure.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · General Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p520 OEM manual
-
Fluid discolored or smells burnt
Possible causes: Fluid contaminated (Replace fluid, AT-5); Torque converter faulty (Replace torque converter, AT-48); Transmission faulty (Disassemble and inspect transmission, AT-50).
-
Vehicle does not move in any forward range or reverse
Possible causes: Control cable out of adjustment (Adjust control cable, AT-6); Valve body or primary regulator faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Parking lock pawl faulty (Inspect parking lock pawl, AT-66); Torque converter faulty (Replace torque converter, AT-48); Oil pump intake screen blocked (Clean screen); Transmission faulty (Disassemble and inspect transmission, AT-50).
-
Shift lever position incorrect
Possible causes: Control cable out of adjustment (Adjust control cable, AT-6); Manual valve and lever faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Transmission faulty (Disassemble and inspect transmission, AT-50).
-
Harsh engagement into any drive range
Possible causes: Throttle cable out of adjustment (Adjust throttle cable, AT-6); Valve body or primary regulator faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Transmission faulty (Disassemble and inspect transmission, AT-50).
-
Delayed 1-2, 2-3 or 3-OD up-shift, or down-shifts from OD-3 or 3-2 and shifts back to 4 or 3
Possible causes: Throttle cable out of adjustment (Adjust throttle cable, AT-6); Valve body faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Solenoid valve faulty (Inspect solenoid valve, AT-27).
-
Slips on 1-2, 2-3 or 3-OD up-shift, or slips or shudders on acceleration
Possible causes: Control cable out of adjustment (Adjust control cable, AT-6); Throttle cable out of adjustment (Adjust throttle cable, AT-6); Valve body faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Solenoid valve faulty (Inspect solenoid valve, AT-17); Transmission faulty (Disassemble and inspect transmission, AT-50).
-
Vehicle does not hold in P range
Possible causes: Control cable out of adjustment (Adjust control cable, AT-6); Parking lock pawl cam and spring faulty (Inspect cam and spring, AT-66).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · General Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p521 OEM manual
-
Drag, binding or tie-up on 1-2, 2-3 or 3-OD up-shift
Possible causes: Control cable out of adjustment (Adjust control cable, AT-6); Valve body faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Transmission faulty (Disassemble and inspect transmission, AT-50).
-
No lock-up in 2nd, 3rd or OD
Possible causes: Electronic control faulty (Inspect electronic control, AT-15); Valve body faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Solenoid valve faulty (Inspect solenoid valve, AT-27); Transmission faulty (Disassemble and inspect transmission, AT-50).
-
Harsh down-shift
Possible causes: Throttle cable out of adjustment (Adjust throttle cable, AT-6); Valve body faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Transmission faulty (Disassemble and inspect transmission, AT-50).
-
No down-shift when coasting
Possible causes: Valve body faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Solenoid valve faulty (Inspect solenoid valve, AT-27); Electronic control faulty (Inspect electronic control, AT-15).
-
Down-shift occurs too quickly or too late while coasting
Possible causes: Throttle cable out of adjustment (Adjust throttle cable, AT-6); Valve body faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Transmission faulty (Disassemble and inspect transmission, AT-50); Solenoid valve faulty (Inspect solenoid valve, AT-27); Electronic control faulty (Inspect electronic control, AT-15).
-
No OD-3, 3-2 or 2-1 kick-down
Possible causes: Throttle cable out of adjustment (Adjust throttle cable, AT-6); Solenoid valve faulty (Inspect solenoid valve, AT-96); Electronic control faulty (Inspect electronic control, AT-15); Valve body faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96).
-
No engine braking in 2 or L range
Possible causes: Solenoid valve faulty (Inspect solenoid valve, AT-27); Electronic control faulty (Inspect electronic control, AT-15); Valve body faulty (Inspect valve body, AT-96); Transmission faulty (Disassemble and inspect transmission, AT-50).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · Hydraulic Test
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p527 OEM manual
-
EVALUATION — All ranges higher than specified
If the measured values at all ranges are higher than specified: Throttle cable out of adjustment; Throttle valve defective; Regulator valve defective.
-
EVALUATION — All ranges lower than specified
If the measured values at all ranges are lower than specified: Throttle cable out of adjustment; Throttle valve defective; Regulator valve defective; Oil pump defective; UD one-way clutch not operating properly.
-
EVALUATION — Pressure low in D range only
D range circuit fluid leakage; Forward clutch defective; UD one-way clutch not operating properly.
-
EVALUATION — Pressure low in R range only
R range circuit fluid leakage; Direct clutch defective; First and reverse brake defective; UD one-way clutch not operating properly.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · Road Test
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p528 OEM manual
-
EVALUATION — No 1→2 up-shift
If there is no 1→2 up-shift: No. 2 solenoid is stuck; 1-2 shift valve is stuck.
-
EVALUATION — No 2→3 up-shift
If there is no 2→3 up-shift: No. 1 solenoid is stuck; 2-3 shift valve is stuck.
-
EVALUATION — No 3→OD up-shift
If there is no 3→OD up-shift (throttle valve opening 1/2): 3-OD shift valve is stuck.
-
EVALUATION — Defective shift point
If the shift point is defective: Throttle valve, 1-2 shift valve, 2-3 shift valve, 3-OD shift valve etc., are defective.
-
EVALUATION — Defective lock-up
If the lock-up is defective: No. 3 solenoid is stuck; Lock-up relay valve is stuck.
-
EVALUATION — Severe shock at up-shifts
If the shock is severe: Line pressure is too high; Accumulator is defective; Check ball is defective.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p529 OEM manual
-
CHECK ABNORMAL NOISE AND VIBRATION IN OD GEAR
Run in the OD gear of the D range and with the lock-up in operation, and check for abnormal noise and vibration. NOTE: Check for cause of abnormal noise and vibration must be made with extreme care as they could also be due to unbalance in the drive shaft, differential, tire, torque converter, etc. or insufficient bending rigidity, etc., in the power train.
-
CHECK KICK-DOWN VEHICLE SPEED LIMITS
While running in the D range 2nd, 3rd gears and OD, check to see that the possible kick-down vehicle speed limits for 2→1, 3→2, OD→3 and OD→2 kick-downs conform to those indicated on the automatic shift diagram.
-
CHECK ABNORMAL SHOCK AND SLIP AT KICK-DOWN
Check for abnormal shock and slip at kick-down.
-
CHECK ENGINE BRAKING EFFECT
While running about 80 km/h (50 mph) in the D range OD gear, shift into the 2 and L ranges and check the engine braking effect at each of these ranges. EVALUATION: (1) If there is no engine braking effect at the 2 range — 3rd Gear: Second brake is defective; 2nd Gear: Second brake and second coast brake are defective. (2) If there is no engine braking effect at the L range — 2nd Gear: Second brake and second coast brake are defective; 1st Gear: First and reverse brake are defective.
-
CHECK DOWN-SHIFT POINTS IN D RANGE
While running in the D range, release your foot from the accelerator pedal and shift into the L range. Then check to see if OD→3, 3→2 and 2→1 down-shift points conform to those indicated on the automatic shift diagram.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p531 OEM manual
-
L RANGE ENGINE BRAKING CHECK
While running in the L range, release the accelerator pedal and check the engine braking effect.
-
L RANGE ABNORMAL NOISE CHECK
Check for abnormal noise at acceleration and deceleration while in the L range.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · Electronic Control Components
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p533 OEM manual
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL COMPONENTS
Diagram showing the locations of all electronic control components for the automatic transaxle on the vehicle, including: ECT ECU, TCCS ECU, Throttle Position Sensor, Water Thermo Sensor, Pattern Select Switch, No. 1 Speed Sensor, No. 2 Speed Sensor, Lock-up Solenoid, No. 1 and No. 2 Solenoid, Neutral Start Switch, Service Connector, OD Main Switch, Stop Light Switch, Pattern Select Switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · Electronic Control System
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p534 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSTIC CODE NOTES
If diagnostic code Nos. 42, 61, 62 or 63 occur, the overdrive indicator light will begin to blink immediately to warn the driver. However, an impact or shock may cause the blinking to stop; but, the code will still be retained in the ECT computer memory until canceled out.
-
NO WARNING FOR CODE 64
There is no warning for diagnostic code No. 64.
-
SIMULTANEOUS SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION
In the event of a simultaneous malfunction of both No. 1 and No. 2 speed sensors, no diagnostic code will appear and the fail-safe system will not function. However, when driving in the D range, the transmission will not up-shift from first gear, regardless of the vehicle speed.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p536 OEM manual
-
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART (AT-19)
Connect ECT computer connector and road test. Check if terminal ECT voltage rises from 0V to 7V in sequence. If 0→7V: Transmission faulty or Solenoid faulty. If 0→5V: Proceed to trouble 4 (AT-21). If 0V (stays at 0V): Check if there are 12V between ECT computer terminals L – GND when in D range. If Yes: Neutral start switch circuit faulty or Neutral start switch faulty. If No: Try another ECT computer. If 0→3V: Check if there are 12V between ECT computer terminals 2 – GND when in D range. If Yes: Neutral start switch circuit faulty or Neutral start switch faulty. If No: Try another ECT computer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p541 OEM manual
-
MULTIPLE TROUBLE CODES
In the event of several trouble codes occurring simultaneously, indication will begin from the smaller value and continue to the larger.
-
REMOVE SERVICE WIRE
Remove the service wire from the DG terminal.
-
CODES 62, 63, 64 NOTE
If codes 62, 63 and 64 appear, there is an electrical malfunction in the solenoid. Causes due to mechanical failure, such as a stuck switch, will not appear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p545 OEM manual
-
PATTERN SELECTION SWITCH CONTINUITY TABLE
Terminal 5 to 4: continuity in NORM pattern. Terminal 5 to 3: continuity in PWR pattern.
-
OD SWITCH CONTINUITY TABLE
Terminals 1 and 3: continuity when S/W position is OFF. No continuity when S/W position is ON.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p546 OEM manual
-
LOCK-UP CHECK PROCEDURE
Continuation of lock-up inspection steps: (c) Turn the OD switch ON. (d) Select the normal pattern. (e) Drive at around 50 km/h (31 mph) to where 7, 5 or 3 volts appears on the voltmeter (this is the lock-up range). (f) Depress the accelerator pedal and read the tachometer. If there is a big jump in engine rpm there is not lock-up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Operating Mechanism for Each Gear
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p547 OEM manual
-
OPERATING MECHANISM FOR EACH GEAR — TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Table showing which clutches (C1, C2, C3), brakes (B1, B2, B3, B4), and one-way clutches (F1, F2, F3) are operating (marked O) for each shift lever position and gear position. P/Parking: B4. R/Reverse: C2, B3, B4. N/Neutral: B4. D/1st: C1, B4, F2, F3. D/2nd: C1, B2, B4, F3. D/3rd: C1, C2, B2, B4, F3. D/OD: C1, C2, C3, B2. 2/1st: C1, B4, F2, F3. 2/2nd: C1, C3, B1, B4, F3. 2/3rd: C1, C2, B1, B4, F3. L/1st: C1, B2, B4, F2, F3. L/2nd: C1, B1, B1, B4, F1, F3.
-
OPERATING MECHANISM FOR EACH GEAR — SOLENOID SYSTEM
Table showing possible gear positions in accordance with solenoid operating conditions across Normal, No.1 Solenoid Malfunctioning, No.2 Solenoid Malfunctioning, and Both Solenoids Malfunctioning conditions. D range Normal: ON/OFF=1st, ON/ON=2nd, OFF/ON=3rd, OFF/OFF=OD. D range No.1 Solenoid Malfunctioning: x/ON(OFF)=3rd(OD), x/ON=3rd, x/ON=3rd, x/OFF=OD. D range No.2 Solenoid Malfunctioning: ON/x=1st, OFF(ON)/x=OD(1st), OFF/x=OD, OFF/x=OD. D range Both Solenoids Malfunctioning: x/x=OD for all. 2 range Normal: ON/OFF=1st, ON/ON=2nd, OFF/ON=3rd. 2 range No.1 Solenoid Malfunctioning: x/ON(OFF)=3rd(OD), x/ON=3rd, x/ON=3rd. 2 range No.2 Solenoid Malfunctioning: ON/x=1st, OFF(ON)/x=3rd(1st), OFF/x=3rd. 2 range Both Solenoids Malfunctioning: x/x=3rd for all. L range Normal: ON/OFF=1st, ON/ON=2nd. L range No.1 Solenoid Malfunctioning: x/OFF=1st, x/ON=2nd. L range No.2 Solenoid Malfunctioning: ON/x=1st, ON/x=1st. L range Both Solenoids Malfunctioning: x/x=1st for all. Note: ( ): No fail safe function; x: Malfunctions.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Automatic Shift Diagram (A240E/4A-GE)
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p548 OEM manual
-
NO LOCK-UP IN 2 AND L RANGES
There is no lock-up in the 2 and L ranges.
-
LOCK-UP RELEASE CONDITIONS
In the following cases, the lock-up will be released regardless of the lock-up pattern: When the throttle is completely closed. When the brake light switch is ON.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Automatic Shift Diagram (A240E/4A-GE)
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p550 OEM manual
-
2 range NORM, PWR pattern
Shift diagram showing up-shift and down-shift points for 2 range NORM/PWR pattern. X-axis: Vehicle Speed (0-180 km/h / 0-100 mph). Y-axis: Throttle Valve Opening (0-100%). Up-shift lines (solid): 1→2 at low speed/low throttle stepping up to higher throttle thresholds; 1→2 and 2→3 transitions shown. Down-shift lines (dashed): 1→2, 1→2, and 2→3 down-shift thresholds shown at corresponding speed/throttle combinations.
-
L range NORM, PWR pattern
Shift diagram showing down-shift point for L range NORM/PWR pattern. X-axis: Vehicle Speed (0-180 km/h / 0-100 mph). Y-axis: Throttle Valve Opening (0-100%). Only a down-shift line (dashed) is shown: 1→2 down-shift at approximately 50 km/h across all throttle openings. No up-shift line is present in L range.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Automatic Shift Diagram (A241E/4A-GZE)
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p551 OEM manual
-
NO LOCK-UP IN 2 AND L RANGES
There is no lock-up in the 2 and L ranges.
-
LOCK-UP RELEASE CONDITIONS
In the following cases, the lock-up will be released regardless of the lock-up pattern: when the throttle is completely closed; when the brake light switch is ON.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Automatic Shift Diagram (A241E/4A-GZE)
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p552 OEM manual
-
D RANGE NORM PATTERN
Shift diagram showing up-shift (solid line) and down-shift (dashed line) points for D range NORM pattern. X-axis is Vehicle Speed (0–160 km/h / 0–100 mph), Y-axis is Throttle Valve Opening (0–100%). Shift points labeled: 1→2, 2→3, 3→OD for up-shifts and corresponding down-shift points at varying throttle and speed combinations.
-
D RANGE PWR PATTERN
Shift diagram showing up-shift (solid line) and down-shift (dashed line) points for D range PWR pattern. X-axis is Vehicle Speed (0–160 km/h / 0–100 mph), Y-axis is Throttle Valve Opening (0–100%). Shift points labeled: 1→2, 2→3, 3→OD for up-shifts and corresponding down-shift points. PWR pattern shifts at higher vehicle speeds compared to NORM pattern.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Automatic Shift Diagram (A241E/4A-GZE)
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p553 OEM manual
-
2 range NORM, PWR pattern
Shift diagram showing up-shift (solid line) and down-shift (dashed line) points for 2 range NORM/PWR pattern. Gear transitions shown: 1→2 (first step, low speed/low throttle), 1→2 (second step, mid speed), 2→3 (at approximately 120 km/h / 75 mph at 100% throttle). Throttle valve opening plotted on Y-axis (0–100%), vehicle speed on X-axis (0–180 km/h / 0–100 mph).
-
L range NORM, PWR pattern
Shift diagram showing down-shift only (dashed line) for L range NORM/PWR pattern. Gear transition shown: 1→2 down-shift point at approximately 50 km/h / 30 mph. No up-shift line present — transmission holds 1st gear. Throttle valve opening plotted on Y-axis (0–100%), vehicle speed on X-axis (0–160 km/h / 0–100 mph).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · On-Vehicle Repair
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p554 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF SPEED SENSOR
Inspect speed sensor by connecting an ohmmeter between the terminals, then bringing a magnet close to and away from the sensor tip. Check that the meter needle deflects from 0Ω to ∞Ω.
-
INSTALLATION OF SPEED SENSOR
1. Install and coat new O-ring with ATF. 2. Install speed sensor. 3. Install retaining plate. 4. Connect speed sensor connector.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · On-Vehicle Repair · Removal of Throttle Cable
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p555 OEM manual
-
INSTALL AIR FLOW METER AND AIR CLEANER HOSE
Install air flow meter and air cleaner hose.
-
(A241E/4A-GZE) INSTALL INTERCOOLER
Connect the two hose clamps, and install the four bolts and intercooler.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · On-Vehicle Repair · Valve Body Removal/Installation
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p558 OEM manual
-
REMOVE OIL TUBES
Pry up both tube ends with a large screwdriver and remove the five tubes.
-
DISCONNECT SOLENOID CONNECTORS
Disconnect solenoid connectors.
-
REMOVE MANUAL DETENT SPRING
Remove manual detent spring.
-
REMOVE VALVE BODY
Remove the valve body.
-
REMOVE SECOND BRAKE APPLY GASKET
Remove second brake apply gasket.
-
DISASSEMBLY OF VALVE BODY
See page AT-96.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Torque Converter, Oil Pump
Lubrication / oil
AW11_1988_full · p565 OEM manual
-
CLEAN TORQUE CONVERTER
If the transmission is contaminated, the torque converter and transmission cooler should be thoroughly flushed with Toyota Transmission Cleaner.
-
REPLACEMENT OF OIL SEAL
1. REMOVE OIL SEAL WITH SST: SST 09350-32013 (09308-10010). 2. INSTALL NEW OIL SEAL: (a) Apply MP grease to the oil seal lip. (b) Drive in the oil seal with SST. SST 09350-32013 (09351-32140)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Disassembly of Transmission · Components (Cont'd)
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p568 OEM manual
-
NON-REUSABLE PARTS
Parts marked with a filled diamond (◆) are non-reusable parts and must be replaced during disassembly/reassembly. These include: O-Ring (Oil Pump), 2nd Brake Drum Gasket, O-Ring (2nd Brake Drum).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Groups · Component Group Disassembly, Inspection and Assembly
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p587 OEM manual
-
WORK ON ONE COMPONENT GROUP AT A TIME
The instructions here are organized so that you work on only one component group at a time. This will help avoid confusion of similar-looking parts from different subassemblies being on your workbench at the same time. The component groups are inspected and repaired from the converter housing side. As much as possible, complete the inspection, repair and assembly before proceeding to the next component group. If a component group cannot be assembled because parts are being ordered, be sure to keep all parts of that group in a separate container while proceeding with disassembly, inspection, repair and assembly of other component groups.
-
GENERAL CLEANING NOTE 1 — WASH AND BLOW OUT PASSAGES
All disassembled parts should be washed clean and the fluid passages and holes blown through with compressed air to make sure that they are not clogged.
-
GENERAL CLEANING NOTE 2 — USE RECOMMENDED FLUID FOR CLEANING
The recommended automatic transmission fluid or kerosene should be used for cleaning.
-
GENERAL CLEANING NOTE 3 — KEEP FACE AWAY WHEN USING COMPRESSED AIR
When using compressed air to dry parts, keep face away to avoid spraying ATF or kerosene in your face.
-
PARTS ARRANGEMENT 1 — ARRANGE PARTS IN PROPER ORDER
After cleaning, the parts should be arranged in proper order to allow performing inspection, repairs, and reassembly with efficiency.
-
PARTS ARRANGEMENT 2 — KEEP VALVES WITH CORRESPONDING SPRINGS
When disassembling a valve body, be sure to keep each valve together with the corresponding spring.
-
PARTS ARRANGEMENT 3 — SOAK NEW BRAKES AND CLUTCHES BEFORE ASSEMBLY
New brakes and clutches that are to be used for replacement must be soaked in transmission fluid for at least two hours before assembly.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 1 — COAT ROTATING AND SLIDING PARTS WITH FLUID
All oil seal rings, clutch discs, clutch plates, rotating parts, and sliding surfaces should be coated with transmission fluid prior to reassembly.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 2 — REPLACE ALL GASKETS AND O-RINGS
All gaskets and rubber O-rings should be replaced.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 3 — INSTALL SNAP RINGS CORRECTLY
Make sure that the ends of a snap ring are not aligned with one of the cutouts and are installed in the groove correctly.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 4 — REPLACE SUBASSEMBLY CONTAINING WORN BUSHING
If a worn bushing is to be replaced, the subassembly containing that bushing must be replaced.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 5 — CHECK THRUST BEARINGS AND RACES
Check thrust bearings and races for wear or damage. Replace if necessary.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 6 — USE PETROLEUM JELLY TO KEEP PARTS IN PLACE
Use petroleum jelly to keep parts in place.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Groups (Direct Clutch) · AT-75
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p592 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLE DIRECT CLUTCH ON OIL PUMP AND BLOW OUT PISTON
Step 5 of disassembly procedure.
-
REMOVE CLUTCH PISTON O-RING
Step 6 of disassembly procedure.
-
INSPECT CLUTCH PISTON
Check that check ball is free by shaking the piston. Check that the valve does not leak by applying low-pressure compressed air.
-
INSPECT DISC, PLATE AND FLANGE
Check that the sliding surface of disc is not worn or burnt. If the disc is worn or burnt, replace all discs. Then check that the sliding surfaces of plate and flange are not worn or burnt. If necessary, replace them. NOTE: Do not allow the discs to dry out. Prepare new discs by soaking them at least two hours in ATF.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Groups (Forward Clutch) · Inspection
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p595 OEM manual
-
COMPRESS PISTON RETURN SPRINGS AND REMOVE SNAP RING
Place SST on the spring retainer and compress the springs with a press. SST 09350-32013 (09351-32070). Remove the snap ring with snap ring pliers.
-
REMOVE SPRING RETAINER AND THE EIGHTEEN SPRINGS
Remove the spring retainer and all eighteen springs.
-
BLOW OUT PISTON
Apply compressed air into the oil passage to remove the piston. If the piston does not come out, use needle-nose pliers to remove it.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Groups (No.1 One-way Clutch and Sun Gear)
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p598 OEM manual
-
REMOVE SUN GEAR FROM DRUM
Using the snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring from the drum. Remove the sun gear from the drum.
-
REMOVE SHAFT SNAP RING
Using the snap ring pliers, remove the shaft snap ring from the sun gear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Clutch and Rear Planetary Gear · No. 2 One-way Clutch and Rear Planetary Gear
Clutch
AW11_1988_full · p599 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF ONE-WAY CLUTCH — INSTALL ONE-WAY CLUTCH
Install the one-way clutch into the outer race, facing the flanged side of one-way clutch toward the shiny side of outer race.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Groups (First and Reverse Brake Piston)
Engine — mechanical
AW11_1988_full · p602 OEM manual
-
REMOVE PISTON FROM TRANSMISSION CASE WITH COMPRESSED AIR
Apply compressed air into the oil passage of the case to remove the piston. Hold the piston so it is not slanted and then blow with the gun slightly away from the oil hole. If the piston does not pop out with compressed air, use needle-nose pliers to remove it.
-
REMOVE O-RINGS FROM PISTON
Remove O-rings from piston.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Groups (Intermediate Shaft) · Intermediate Shaft
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p603 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT OF INTERMEDIATE SHAFT REAR BEARING
REMOVE INTERMEDIATE SHAFT REAR BEARING: Using SST, press out the bearing. SST 09350-32013 (09351-32090) and 09555-55010
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Assembly of Transmission
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p629 OEM manual
-
PRECISION PARTS INSPECTION
The automatic transmission is composed of highly precision-finished parts, necessitating careful inspection before assembly because even a small nick could cause fluid leakage or affect performance.
-
SOAK NEW CLUTCH DISCS
Before assembling new clutch discs, soak them in automatic transmission fluid for at least two hours.
-
APPLY ATF TO SLIDING/ROTATING SURFACES
Apply automatic transmission fluid on the sliding or rotating surfaces of parts before assembly.
-
USE PETROLEUM JELLY FOR SMALL PARTS
Use petroleum jelly to keep small parts in their places.
-
NO ADHESIVE CEMENTS ON GASKETS
Do not use adhesive cements on gaskets and similar parts.
-
USE NEW GASKETS AND O-RINGS
When assembling the transmission, be sure to use new gaskets and O-rings.
-
DRY PARTS WITH COMPRESSED AIR
Dry all parts by blowing with compressed air. Never use shop rags.
-
INSTALL THRUST BEARINGS AND RACES CORRECTLY
Be sure to install the thrust bearings and races in the correct direction and position.
-
VERIFY COMPONENT GROUP ASSEMBLY BEFORE FINAL ASSEMBLY
Before assembly, make sure again that all component groups are assembled correctly. If something wrong is found in a certain component group during assembly, inspect and repair this group immediately. Recommended ATF: DEXRON® II.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Differential · Replacement of Oil Seal and Outer Race
Transmission / transaxle
AW11_1988_full · p654 OEM manual
-
INSTALL RING GEAR AND LOCKING PLATES
Quickly install the ring gear on the differential case. Install new locking plates and set bolts. Tighten the set bolts uniformly and a little at a time. Torque the bolts.
-
STAKE LOCKING PLATES
Using a hammer and drift punch, stake the locking plates. NOTE: Stake one claw flush with the flat surface of the nut. For the claw contacting the protruding portion of the nut, stake only the half on the tightened side.
FRONT AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Front Shock Absorber
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p681 OEM manual
-
REMOVE NUT FROM SPRING SEAT
Using SST, hold the spring seat so that it will not turn, and remove the nut. SST 09729-22031
-
REMOVE SUSPENSION COMPONENTS
Remove the suspension support, spring seat, spring, insulator and bumper.
-
REPLACE ABSORBER IF OPERATION ABNORMAL
If the absorber operation is not as specified, replace the absorber, as an assembly.
FRONT AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Front Suspension · Lower Arm
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p685 OEM manual
-
INSPECT BALL JOINT FOR ROTATION
Remove the ball joint. Flip the ball joint stud back and forth 5 times as shown in the figure, before installing the nut. Using a torque gauge, turn the nut continuously one every 2–4 seconds and take the torque reading on the fifth turn. If not within specification, replace the ball joint. Install the ball joint.
FRONT AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Front Suspension · Stabilizer Bar and Link
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p687 OEM manual
-
INSPECT STABILIZER LINK
Rotate ball joint arm in all directions. If the movement is not smooth and free, replace the stabilizer link.
-
INSPECT FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
See page FA-3.
FRONT AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Front Suspension · Strut Bar
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p689 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF STRUT BAR
Install strut bar components in the following order.
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Axle Hub and Carrier
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p698 OEM manual
-
REMOVE REAR AXLE CARRIER SET NUTS AND BOLTS
Remove the two axle carrier set nuts and two bolts with the camber adjusting cam.
-
REMOVE REAR AXLE CARRIER AND AXLE HUB
Remove the rear axle carrier and axle hub.
- Cover the drive shaft boot with cloth to protect it from damage.
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Axle Hub and Carrier
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p701 OEM manual
-
INSTALL DUST DEFLECTOR
Using SST, drive the dust deflector to the rear axle carrier. SST 09608-35014 (09608-06020, 09608-06180)
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Drive Shaft
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p708 OEM manual
-
SST USAGE — 4A-GZE M/T (LH)
Use SST 09223-15010 for 4A-GZE Manual Transmission Left Hand side rear drive shaft removal/installation.
-
SST USAGE — 4A-GZE M/T (RH)
Use SST 09316-60010 (09316-00010) for 4A-GZE Manual Transmission Right Hand side rear drive shaft removal/installation.
-
SST USAGE — A/T (LH)
Use SST 09350-32013 (09351-32111) and 09631-12020 for Automatic Transmission Left Hand side rear drive shaft removal/installation.
-
SST USAGE — 4A-GE A/T (RH)
Use SST 09350-32013 (09351-32150) and 09631-12020 for 4A-GE Automatic Transmission Right Hand side rear drive shaft removal/installation.
-
SST USAGE — 4A-GZE A/T (RH)
Use SST for 4A-GZE Automatic Transmission Right Hand side rear drive shaft removal/installation (see diagram E5022).
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Drive Shaft
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p710 OEM manual
-
CHECK DRIVE SHAFT (4A-GZE)
Pre-disassembly inspection checks for the 4A-GZE drive shaft.
-
REMOVE BOOT CLAMPS (4A-GZE)
Remove boot clamps from the drive shaft assembly.
-
DISASSEMBLE INBOARD JOINT (4A-GZE)
Place matchmarks on the inboard joint and drive shaft, then remove the snap ring using snap ring pliers.
- Do not punch the marks.
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Drive Shaft
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p714 OEM manual
-
(4A-GZE) TEMPORARILY INSTALL BOOTS AND NEW BOOT CLAMPS
Before installing the boot, wrap vinyl tape around the spline of the shaft to prevent damaging the boot.
-
(4A-GZE) ASSEMBLE NEW INBOARD JOINT COVER
Apply seal packing to the inboard joint cover as shown in the figure. Sealant: Part No. 08826-00801, THREE BOND 1121 or equivalent. Install a nozzle that has been cut to a 1mm (0.04 in.) opening. Avoid applying an excess amount to the surface.
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Suspension · Rear Shock Absorber
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p721 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY OF REAR SHOCK ABSORBER — CLAMP SHOCK ABSORBER IN VISE
Install a bolt and two nuts to the bracket at the lower portion of the shock absorber shell and secure it in a vise.
-
DISASSEMBLY OF REAR SHOCK ABSORBER — REMOVE COIL SPRING
Using SST, compress the coil spring. SST 09727-22032
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Suspension · Rear Shock Absorber
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p722 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY — REMOVE SUSPENSION SUPPORT AND SPRING
Steps to disassemble the rear shock absorber assembly.
-
INSPECT OPERATION OF SHOCK ABSORBER
While pushing the piston rod, check that the pull throughout the stroke is even, and that there is no abnormal resistance or noise. Push the piston rod in fully and release it. Check that it returns at a constant speed. If the absorber operation is defective, replace the absorber, as an assembly.
- Before discarding the shock absorber, first loosen the ring nut 2 or 3 turns with SST to completely release the gas. SST 09720-00011 (09721-00071)
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Suspension
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p723 OEM manual
-
ALIGN SUSPENSION SUPPORT WITH SHOCK ABSORBER LOWER BRACKET
Align the suspension support with the shock absorber's lower bracket as shown (5° alignment).
-
TORQUE SUSPENSION SUPPORT NUT
Hold the octagon head of suspension support in the vise. Torque the suspension support nut. Install the suspension support cover.
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Suspension · Ball Joint / Lower Arm
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p726 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF LOWER ARM
See page RA-23
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Suspension · Suspension Arm
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p729 OEM manual
-
TIGHTEN STRUT ROD HOLDING NUT
Tighten the strut rod holding nut to specified torque on both lower arm side and body side.
-
DISASSEMBLY OF SUSPENSION ARM
Step 1: Remove tie rod end and suspension arm from tie rod tube. Step 2: Inspect ball joint for rotation condition — flip the ball joint stud back and forth 5 times before installing the nut, then using a torque gauge, turn the nut continuously one turn every 2-4 seconds and take the torque reading on the fifth turn. Torque (turning): 8.5-35 kg-cm (7.4-30 in.-lb, 0.8-3.4 N·m). If not within specification, replace the ball joint.
REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION · Rear Suspension
Suspension & axle
AW11_1988_full · p730 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF SUSPENSION ARM — INSTALL TIE ROD END AND SUSPENSION ARM TO TIE ROD TUBE
Install the suspension arm and tie rod to the tie rod tube. Adjust the tie rod end and suspension arm to the length indicated in the figure (336 mm / 13.23 in.). NOTE: Fully tighten after rear wheel alignment.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Brakes
AW11_1988_full · p732 OEM manual
-
REPLACE PARTS PROPERLY
Care must be taken to replace each part properly as it could affect the performance of the brake system and result in a driving hazard. Replace the parts with parts of the same part number or equivalent.
-
KEEP PARTS AND AREA CLEAN
It is very important to keep parts and area clean when repairing the brake system.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Checks and Adjustments
Brakes
AW11_1988_full · p736 OEM manual
-
CHECK THAT PEDAL RESERVE DISTANCE IS CORRECT, AS SHOWN
Release the parking brake. With engine running, depress the pedal and measure the pedal reserve distance, as shown. Pedal reserve distance from asphalt sheet at 50 kg (110.2 lb, 490 N): 4A-GE: More than 87 mm (3.43 in.); 4A-GZE: More than 77 mm (3.03 in.). If incorrect, troubleshoot the brake system.
-
BLEEDING OF BRAKE SYSTEM
If any work is done on the brake system or if air is suspected in the brake lines, bleed the system of air.
- Do not let brake fluid remain on a painted surface. Wash it off immediately.
-
FILL BRAKE RESERVOIR WITH BRAKE FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary, add brake fluid.
-
BLEED MASTER CYLINDER
If the master cylinder was disassembled or if the reservoir becomes empty, bleed the air from the master cylinder. (a) Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. (b) Depress the brake pedal and hold it.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Checks and Adjustments
Brakes
AW11_1988_full · p737 OEM manual
-
BEGIN BLEEDING AIR FROM BRAKE CYLINDER WITH LONGEST HYDRAULIC LINE
Connect the vinyl tube to the brake cylinder bleeder plug, and insert the other end of the tube in a half-full container of brake fluid. Slowly pump the brake pedal several times. While having an assistant press on the pedal, loosen the bleeder plug until fluid starts to runout. Then close the bleeder plug. Repeat until there are no more air bubbles in the fluid. Tighten the bleeder plug.
-
REPEAT PROCEDURE FOR EACH WHEEL
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each wheel.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Master Cylinder · Removal / Inspection
Brakes
AW11_1988_full · p741 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CYLINDER BORE FOR RUST AND SCORING
Clean the disassembled parts with compressed air. Inspect cylinder bore for rust and scoring.
-
INSPECT CYLINDER FOR WEAR OR DAMAGE
If necessary, clean or replace the cylinder.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Brake Hoses and Tubes
Brakes
AW11_1988_full · p770 OEM manual
-
INSPECT BRAKE HOSES
Inspect the hose for damage, cracks or swelling. Inspect the threads for damage.
-
INSPECT BRAKE TUBES
Inspect the tube for damage, cracks, dents or corrosion. Inspect the threads for damage.
STEERING · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Steering
AW11_1988_full · p772 OEM manual
-
PRECAUTIONS
Care must be taken to replace parts properly because they could affect the performance of the steering system and result in a driving hazard.
STEERING · On-Vehicle Inspection, Steering Column Assembly
Steering
AW11_1988_full · p773 OEM manual
-
CHECK THAT STEERING WHEEL FREEPLAY IS CORRECT
With the vehicle stopped and pointed straight ahead, rock the steering wheel gently back and forth with light finger pressure. Freeplay should not exceed the maximum limit. Maximum freeplay: 30 mm (1.18 in.). If excessive, repair.
-
CHECK STEERING LINKAGE AND GEAR HOUSING
Check the steering linkage for looseness or damage. Also check that: the tie rod ends do not have excessive play; the boots are not damaged; the boot clamps are not loose. Check gear housing for grease leakage or oozing.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · General Information
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p797 OEM manual
-
WIRING COLOR CODE
Wire colors are indicated by an alphabetical code. B = Black, L = Blue, R = Red, BR = Brown, LG = Light Green, V = Violet, G = Green, O = Orange, W = White, GR = Gray, P = Pink, Y = Yellow. The first letter indicates the basic wire color and the second letter indicates the color of the stripe.
-
PIN NUMBER OF FEMALE CONNECTOR
Numbered in order from upper left to lower right.
-
PIN NUMBER OF MALE CONNECTOR
Numbered in order from upper right to lower left.
-
DISTINCTION OF MALE AND FEMALE CONNECTORS
Male and female connectors are distinguished by shape of their internal pins.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · General Information
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p799 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT OF FUSES
Install new fuses with correct amperage ratings.
- Turn off all electrical components and the ignition switch before replacing a fuse. Do not exceed the fuse amp rating.
- Always use a fuse puller for removing and inserting a fuse. Remove and insert straight in and out without twisting. Twisting could force open the terminals too much, resulting in a bad connection.
- If a fuse continues to blow, the circuit is probably shorted. Have the system checked by a qualified technician.
-
TAKE CARE WHEN INSPECTING HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT
Before inspecting or adjusting the retractable headlight circuit, disconnect the light retractor control relay connector.
- Before inspecting or adjusting the retractable headlight circuit, disconnect the light retractor control relay connector.
-
VOLTAGE CHECK
Establish conditions in which voltage is present at the check point. Example: A - Ignition S/W on; B - Ignition S/W and S/W 1 on; C - Ignition S/W, S/W 1 and Relay on (S/W 2 off). Using a voltmeter, connect the negative lead to a good ground point or negative battery terminal and the positive lead to the connector or component terminal. This check can be done with a test light instead of a voltmeter.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · General Information
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p800 OEM manual
-
CONTINUITY AND RESISTANCE CHECK
Procedure for checking continuity and resistance in electrical circuits using an ohmmeter.
-
DISCONNECT BATTERY BEFORE CHECKING
Disconnect the battery terminal or wire so there is no voltage between the check points.
-
CONTACT OHMMETER LEADS TO CHECK POINTS
Contact the two leads of an ohmmeter to each of the check points.
-
DIODE CIRCUIT CHECK
If the circuit has diodes, reverse the two leads and check again. When contacting the negative lead to the diode positive side and the positive lead to the negative side, there should be continuity. When contacting the two leads in reverse, there should be no continuity.
-
USE HIGH IMPEDANCE VOLT/OHMMETER
Use a volt/ohmmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum) for troubleshooting of the electrical circuit.
-
FINDING A SHORT CIRCUIT
Procedure for locating a short circuit in the vehicle electrical system.
-
REMOVE BLOWN FUSE AND DISCONNECT LOADS
Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads of the fuse.
-
CONNECT TEST LIGHT IN PLACE OF FUSE
Connect a test light in place of the fuse.
-
ESTABLISH CONDITIONS FOR TEST LIGHT
Establish conditions in which the test light comes on. Example: (A) Ignition S/W on. (B) Ignition S/W and S/W 1 on. (C) Ignition S/W, S/W 1 and Relay on (Connect the Relay) and S/W 2 off (or Disconnect S/W 2).
-
DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT CONNECTORS
Disconnect and reconnect the connectors while watching the test light. The short lies between the connector where the test light stays lit and the connector where the light goes out.
-
FIND EXACT LOCATION OF SHORT BY SHAKING WIRE
Find the exact location of the short by lightly shaking the problem wire along the body.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Location of Switches and Relays · Engine Compartment Switches and Relays
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p801 OEM manual
-
ENGINE COMPARTMENT SWITCHES AND RELAYS
Diagram showing the location of engine compartment switches and relays including: Water Temperature Sender Gauge, Oil Pressure Sender Gauge, Vacuum Pump, Actuator, Cruise Control Computer, Cruise Control Vacuum Switch. Engine variants shown: 4A-GZE, 4A-GE (A/T), 4A-GE (M/T).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Location of Switches and Relays · Passenger Compartment Switches and Relays
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p803 OEM manual
-
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT SWITCHES AND RELAYS
Diagram showing the location of switches and relays in the passenger compartment, including: Turn Signal Flasher, Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch, Headlight Retainer Relay, CB (Door Lock), Taillight Control Relay, Headlight Control Relay, Light Retractor Control Relay, and Heater Relay.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Location of Switches and Relays · Passenger and Luggage Compartment Switches and Relays
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p804 OEM manual
-
PASSENGER AND LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT SWITCHES AND RELAYS
Diagram showing the location of switches and relays in the passenger and luggage compartment, including: Power Window Door Switch, Stop Light Switch, Door Lock Switch, Clutch Switch, Door Lock Control Relay, Power Window Relay, Power Window Master Switch, Power Window Motor, Door Lock Solenoid, Door Lock Key Switch, Parking Brake Switch, Door Courtesy Switch, Seat Belt Warning Relay, Fuel Sender Gauge.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting · Headlight Dimmer Switch
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p808 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CONTINUITY OF HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH
Inspect the switch continuity between terminals. Terminal 13 (ED, W-B), Terminal 6 (HL, R-G), Terminal 5 (HU, R-Y), Terminal 12 (HF, R-W). Flash: continuity between 13-5 and 13-12. Low Beam: continuity between 13-6. High Beam: continuity between 13-5. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting · Headlight Control Relay / Taillight Control Relay
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p809 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF TAILLIGHT CONTROL RELAY — INSPECT RELAY CONTINUITY
Check relay continuity as specified. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay. (a) Check that there is continuity between terminals 1 and 3. (b) Check that there is no continuity between terminals 2 and 4. (c) Check that there is no continuity between terminals 3 and 4.
-
INSPECTION OF TAILLIGHT CONTROL RELAY — INSPECT RELAY OPERATION
Check relay operation as specified. If operation is not as described, replace the relay. (a) Apply battery voltage across terminals 1 and 3. (b) Check that there is continuity between terminals 2 and 4. (c) Check that there is no continuity between terminals 3 and 4.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting · Light Retractor Motor / Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Switch
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p812 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
Inspect switch continuity between terminals. Switch positions and terminal continuity: Turn signal L — continuity between terminals 9(TL/G-B) and 3(TB/G-W); continuity between terminals 7(F/G) and 1(B2/G-O). Turn signal N — continuity between terminals 7(F/G) and 1(B2/G-O). Turn signal R — continuity between terminals 3(TB/G-W) and 8(TR/G-Y); continuity between terminals 7(F/G) and 1(B2/G-O). Hazard ON — continuity between terminals 9(TL/G-B) and 3(TB/G-W) and 8(TR/G-Y); continuity between terminals 2(B1/G-L) and 1(B2/G-O). If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting · Turn Signal Flasher
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p813 OEM manual
-
REPLACE TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
Steps to replace the turn signal and hazard warning switch: (a) Remove the terminals from the connector (See pages BE-2, 3). (b) Remove the turn signal and hazard switch. (c) Install the turn signal and hazard switch. (d) Install the terminals to the connector (See pages BE-3, 17).
-
TURN SIGNAL FLASH RATE NOTE
The turn signal lights should flash 60 to 120 times per minute. If one of the front or rear turn signal lights has an open circuit, the number of flashes will be more than 140 per minute. If operation is not as specified, replace the flasher.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Wiper and Washer · Inspection
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p815 OEM manual
-
INSPECT WASHER SWITCH OPERATION
Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 2 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 4. Connect the positive (+) lead from the voltmeter to terminal 3 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 4. Push in the washer switch. Check that the voltage changes as shown in the table: washer switch ON approx. 0.5 sec, battery voltage; OFF approx. 2.5 sec, 0 volt. If operation is not as specified, replace the wiper and washer switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Wiper and Washer · BE-21
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p816 OEM manual
-
INSPECT THAT MOTOR OPERATES, STOPPING AT STOP POSITION
Perform motor stop position inspection as follows:
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Instruments, Gauges and Warning Lights · Combination Meter and Gauge
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p819 OEM manual
-
COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT
Connector A pin assignments: 1=Fuel Level Warning Switch Terminal 2, 2=TURN GAG Fuse, 4=Cooling Fan Computer, 5=Fuel Sender Gauge Terminal 1, 8=ECT Select Switch, 9=Igniter Terminal 4, 10=OD Main Switch. Connector B pin assignments: 1=ECT Select Switch, 2=Light Control Rheostat Terminal 1, 3=TAIL Fuse, 4=TCCS ECU and Cruise Control Computer Terminal 7, 5=Ground, 6=Ground, 7=Turn Signal Switch Terminal 6, 8=Turn Signal Switch Terminal 9. Connector C pin assignments: 1=Turn Signal Switch Terminal 8, 2=TCCS ECU, 3=Oil Pressure Sender Gauge, 4=Ground, 5=Water Temperature Sender Gauge, 7=CHARGE Fuse, 8=Parking Brake Switch Terminal 1 and Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch Terminal 1, 9=Ignition Switch Terminal 2, 10=TCCS ECU, 11=Seat Belt Warning Relay Terminal 5. Circuit connections: B-4=Speed Sensor=B-5, A-8=ECT PWR, B-1=ECT NORM, B-7=Beam, B-8=Left Turn Signal, C-1=Right Turn Signal, A-2=Voltmeter, Oil Pressure Gauge=C-3, Tachometer=A-9, C-2=Supercharger Indicator Circuit=B-6, Brake Warning=C-8, Discharge Warning=C-7, Cooling Fan=A-4, A-5, Fuel Gauge=C-4, Water Temperature Warning=C-5, Check Engine Warning=C-10, Fuel Level Warning=A-1, Fasten Belt=C-11, OD OFF=A-10, B-3=Illumination=B-2.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Instruments, Gauges and Warning Lights · Speedometer / Tachometer / Voltmeter
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p820 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION OF TACHOMETER
Connect a tune-up test tachometer, and start the engine. Compare the tester and tachometer indication. If error is excessive, replace the tachometer.
- Reversing the connection of the tachometer will damage the transistors and diodes inside.
- When removing or installing the tachometer, be careful not to drop or subject it to any heavy shocks.
-
INSPECTION OF VOLTMETER
Compare the tester and voltmeter indications. If error is excessive, replace the voltmeter.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Instruments, Gauges and Warning Lights · Fuel Level Warning / Water Temperature Gauge
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p822 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE — INSPECT RECEIVER GAUGE OPERATION
1. (a) Disconnect the connector from the sender gauge. Ground the terminal through a 3.4 W bulb. (b) Turn the ignition switch on. Check that the bulb lights and that the receiver gauge needle operates. If indication is not correct, remove and test the receiver gauge.
-
INSPECTION OF WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE — MEASURE RECEIVER GAUGE RESISTANCE BETWEEN TERMINALS
2. Measure resistance between terminals: IG–E: 145.8 Ω, TU–E: 201.8 Ω, IG–TU: 56 Ω. If each resistance value is not as shown in the table above, replace the receiver gauge.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Rear Window Defogger · Troubleshooting
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p826 OEM manual
-
CAUTION: CLEANING THE GLASS
When cleaning the glass, use a soft, dry cloth, and wipe the glass in the direction of the wire. Take care not to damage the wires.
-
CAUTION: DO NOT USE DETERGENTS
Do not use detergents or glass cleaners with abrasive ingredients.
-
CAUTION: MEASURING VOLTAGE
When measuring voltage, wind a piece of tin foil around the tip of the negative probe and press the foil against the wire with your finger as shown.
-
INSPECT FOR WIRE BREAKAGE
Turn the ignition switch to ON. Turn the defogger switch to ON.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Rear Window Defogger
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p827 OEM manual
-
INSPECT FOR WIRE BREAKAGE POINT
Steps to locate a broken defogger wire: (a) Place the voltmeter positive (+) lead against the defogger positive (+) terminal. (b) Place the voltmeter negative (-) lead with the foil strip against the heat wire at the positive (+) terminal end and slide it toward the negative (-) terminal end. (c) The point where the voltmeter deflects from zero to several volts is the place where the heat wire is broken. NOTE: If the heat wire is not broken, the voltmeter will indicate 0V at the positive (+) end of the heat wire but gradually increase to about 12V as the meter probe is moved to the other end.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Heater · Connectors
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p829 OEM manual
-
CONNECTORS — HEATER CONTROL ASSEMBLY
18-pin connector for the Heater Control Assembly. Pin numbering: top row 8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1; bottom row 18,17,16,15,14,13,12,11,10,9.
-
CONNECTORS — BLOWER SWITCH
8-pin connector for the Blower Switch. Top row pins: 5,4,3,2,1; bottom row pins: 8,7,6.
-
CONNECTORS — AMPLIFIER
10-pin connector for the Amplifier. Top row pins: 4,3,2,1; bottom row pins: 10,9,8,7,6,5.
-
CONNECTORS — AIR VENT MODE CONTROL SERVO MOTOR
13-pin connector for the Air Vent Mode Control Servo Motor. Top row pins: 3,2,1; middle row: 8,7,6,5,4; bottom row: 13,12,11,10,9.
-
CONNECTORS — RECIRC/FRESH CONTROL SERVO MOTOR
3-pin connector for the RECIRC/FRESH Control Servo Motor. Pins: 3,2,1.
-
CONNECTORS — BLOWER MOTOR
2-pin connector for the Blower Motor. Pins: 1 (top), 2 (bottom).
-
CONNECTORS — BLOWER RESISTOR
4-pin connector for the Blower Resistor. Pins: top row 2,1; bottom row 4,3.
-
CONNECTORS — HEATER RELAY
5-pin connector for the Heater Relay. Pins: 1 (bottom-left), 2 (bottom-center), 3 (bottom-right), 4 (top-left), 5 (top-right).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Heater · Inspection
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p831 OEM manual
-
INSPECT RELAY OPERATION
Apply battery voltage across terminals 1 and 3. Check that there is continuity between terminals 4 and 5. Check that there is no continuity between terminals 2 and 4. If operation is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
INSPECT RESISTOR CONTINUITY
Check that there is continuity between terminals 2 and 3. If continuity is not as specified, replace the resistor.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Heater · Servo Motor Inspection
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p832 OEM manual
-
INSPECT AIR VENT MODE SWITCH CONTINUITY
Inspect the mode switch continuity between terminals. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
INSPECTION OF AIR VENT MODE CONTROL SERVO MOTOR — INSPECT SERVO MOTOR OPERATION
Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal A1 and the negative (-) lead to terminal A5. Check that the arm turns.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Heater · Heater Control
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p833 OEM manual
-
SERVO MOTOR POLARITY CHECK
Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal A5 and the negative (-) lead to terminal A1. Check that the arm turns the opposite way.
-
SERVO MOTOR CONTINUITY CHECK
Check for continuity between terminals as shown in the table for each switch position (FACE, FACE~BI-LEVEL, BI-LEVEL, BI-LEVEL~FOOT, FOOT, FOOT~FOOT/DEF, FOOT/DEF, FOOT/DEF~DEF, DEF) across terminals A2, A6, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5. If operation is not as specified, replace the SERVO Motor.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Connectors
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p835 OEM manual
-
CONNECTORS — CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Connector pin-layout diagrams for all components in the Cruise Control System, including: Neutral Start Switch (3-pin), Cruise Control Computer (18-pin, two rows), Control S/W (22-pin, two rows), Parking Brake S/W (2-pin), Clutch S/W (3-pin), Stop Light S/W (2-pin and 4-pin variants), Vacuum S/W for 4A-GE M/T (1-pin round) and Others (1-pin round), Vacuum Pump for 4A-GE M/T (2-pin) and Others (2-pin), Actuator (3-pin), Speed Sensor (multi-pin assembly with B5 and B4 sub-connectors), ECT Computer Wire Harness Side (17-pin), Alternator Wire Harness Side (3-pin), and Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch (2-pin).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Read Type B Code
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p837 OEM manual
-
SAVE DIAGNOSTIC CODE
In order to save the diagnostic code a malfunction has occured, always inspect with the ignition and main switches on. Should the power be cut, the diagnostic code will be erased from the computer memory.
-
CODE DISPLAY ORDER
Indication codes appear in order from No. 11.
-
INDICATION STOP CONDITION
Indication is stopped when vehicle speed is over 16 km/h (10 mph) or main switch is turned off.
-
NO INDICATION CODE
If there is no indication code, perform diagnosis and inspection. (See page BE-44)
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Troubleshooting
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p838 OEM manual
-
CRUISE CONTROL DOES NOT OPERATE — TYPE A CODE INSPECTION
Inspect type A codes (No. 1 through No. 6). If No. 1 NO → check B; No. 2 NO → check C; No. 3 NO → check J; No. 4 NO → check F to I; No. 5 NO → check E; No. 6 NO → check E. Then inspect type B codes: 11 → D, 21 → E, 23 → D/E, 31 → C, 33 → B/C. If all codes normal → check A, D, E.
-
VEHICLE SPEED DOES NOT DECREASE WHEN COAST SWITCH TURNED ON
Inspect No. 1 of type A code. If OK → check D; if NO → check B.
-
VEHICLE SPEED DOES NOT FLUCTUATE WHEN SET SWITCH TURNED ON
No specific inspection item listed. Refer to troubleshooting chart.
-
VEHICLE SPEED DOES NOT ACCELERATE WHEN ACCEL SWITCH TURNED ON
Inspect No. 2 of type A code. If OK → check D; if NO → check C.
-
VEHICLE SPEED DOES NOT RETURN TO MEMORIZED SPEED WHEN RESUME SWITCH TURNED ON
No specific inspection item listed. Refer to troubleshooting chart.
-
SETTING SPEED DEVIATES ON HIGH SIDE
No inspection item listed. Check D, E.
-
SETTING SPEED DEVIATES ON LOW SIDE
No inspection item listed. Refer to troubleshooting chart.
-
RETURN AND ACCELERATION RESPONSE IS SLUGGISH
Inspect No. 3 of type A code. If OK → check D; if NO → check J.
-
SETTING SPEED DOES NOT CANCEL WHEN BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED
Inspect No. 4 of type A code. If OK → check D; if NO → check F.
-
SETTING SPEED DOES NOT CANCEL WHEN PARKING BRAKE PULLED UP
Inspect No. 4 of type A code. If OK → check D; if NO → check G.
-
SETTING SPEED DOES NOT CANCEL WHEN CLUTCH PEDAL DEPRESSED (M/T ONLY)
Inspect No. 4 of type A code. If OK → check D; if NO → check H.
-
SETTING SPEED DOES NOT CANCEL WHEN SHIFTED TO 'N' RANGE (A/T ONLY)
Inspect No. 4 of type A code. If OK → check D; if NO → check I.
-
SPEED CAN BE SET BELOW ABOUT 40 KM/H (25 MPH)
Inspect No. 5 of type A code and No. 6 of type A code. If OK → check D; if NO → check E.
-
CRUISE CONTROL WILL NOT DISENGAGE EVEN ABOUT 40 KM/H (25 MPH)
Inspect No. 5 of type A code and No. 6 of type A code. If OK → check D; if NO → check E.
-
A SHORT PERIOD AFTER THE O/D CUT (APPROX. WITHIN 14 SECONDS) THE O/D WILL RESUME
No inspection item listed. Check K.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Control Switch / Stop Light Switch
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p854 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF STOP LIGHT SWITCH — INSPECT SWITCH CONTINUITY
Inspect the switch continuity between terminals. Switch free: continuity between terminals 1 and 2. Switch pin pushed: continuity between terminals 3 and 4. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Vacuum Switch / Vacuum Pump
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p857 OEM manual
-
INSPECT VACUUM PUMP OPERATION
Steps to inspect vacuum pump: (a) Connect a vacuum gauge to the ACT side of the pump. (b) Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 1 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 2. (c) Check that there is the vacuum of 200 mmHg (7.87 in.Hg, 26.7 kPa) or above. If operation is not as specified, replace the pump.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Window · Master Switch & Door Switch Inspection
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p858 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF POWER WINDOW DOOR SWITCH
Inspect the switch continuity between terminals. For UP: continuity between terminals 4 and 7, 7 and 8, 8 and 9. For OFF: continuity between terminals 3 and 4, 7 and 8, 8 and 9 (per diagram circles). For DOWN: continuity between terminals 3 and 4, 8 and 9. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Door Lock Control System
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p861 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF DOOR LOCK KEY SWITCH — INSPECT SWITCH CONTINUITY
Check switch continuity per the following sub-steps. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
INSPECTION OF DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY — INSPECT RELAY OPERATION
Disconnect the relay connector and inspect the connector on the wire harness side as shown in the table.
-
UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH
See page BE-11.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Door Lock Control System · Door Lock Solenoid
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p862 OEM manual
-
CIRCUIT OPERATION CHECK
If circuit operation is correct, replace the relay.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Door Lock Control System, Remote Control Mirror · Remote Control Mirror
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p863 OEM manual
-
DOOR LOCK SOLENOID UNLOCK CHECK
Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 2. Connect the negative (–) lead to terminal 1. Check that the solenoid operates in the unlock direction.
-
DOOR LOCK SOLENOID CONTINUITY CHECK
Check that there is continuity between terminals 3 and 4. If operation is not as specified, replace the solenoid.
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION OF MIRROR — INSPECT LEFT AND RIGHT MIRROR OPERATION
Tests for mirror movement in all directions by applying battery leads to the mirror connector terminals.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Radio, Stereo Tape Player and Antenna · Troubleshooting
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p864 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS
Rectangle symbol = Inspection. Rounded rectangle (oval) symbol = Check or replace part. Circle with inner circle symbol = Test by operating radio.
-
DEAD RADIO AND TAPE PLAYER — POSSIBLE CAUSES
Possible causes include: Blown CIG-RADIO fuse; Short circuit or broken wire in power source wire harness; Loose connectors behind radio and tape player; Loose speaker connector; Defective speaker; Broken wire in speaker wire harness; Improperly installed radio or tape player; Defective radio or tape player.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Radio, Stereo Tape Player and Antenna · Diagnostic Tests
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p865 OEM manual
-
TEST 2 — Connector and Power Check
Are all connectors behind radio and tape player properly connected? If No: Connect properly. If Yes: Is there power to radio and player connectors? If No: Inspect and repair power wire harness to radio and player. If Yes: Are radio and player properly connected? If No: Properly re-install. If Yes: Proceed to Test 3.
-
TEST 3 — Speaker and Wire Harness Check
Are speaker connectors connected? If No: Connect properly. If Yes: Temporarily install another speaker. If OK: Replace speaker. If No (temp speaker not OK): Is there continuity in speaker wire harness? If Yes: Replace radio and tape player (w/o player: Proceed to Test 1 of following item). If No: Inspect and repair speaker wire harness.
-
TEST 1 — Radio Electronic Search Type Check
Is radio electronic search type? If No: Proceed to Test 3. If Yes: Is either AM or FM okay? If Yes: Proceed to Test 2. If No: (no further action listed on this page).
-
(b) Tape player okay but no sound from either the AM or FM band — Possible Causes
Possible causes: Antenna disconnected; Antenna plug not properly connected; Defective antenna; Defective antenna cable; Defective radio or tape player; Blown HAZ-RADIO fuse; Short circuit or broken wire in wire harness for back-up power source.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Radio, Stereo Tape Player and Antenna · Diagnostic Tests
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p866 OEM manual
-
TEST 3 — ANTENNA PLUG CHECK
Check that antenna plug is secure in radio. If Loose: Properly insert. If OK: Reinsert plug. If OK after reinsertion: Inspect antenna plug. If No (not OK after reinsertion): Check if radio alone works. If Yes: Replace tape player. If No: Proceed to Test 4.
-
TEST 4 — ANTENNA SUBSTITUTION TEST
Temporarily install another antenna. If OK: Inspect antenna and antenna cable, and replace as necessary. If No: Replace radio.
-
BACK-UP POWER NOTE
Back-up power refers to the storage voltage for preset tuning. This is applied even when the ignition switch is OFF.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Radio, Stereo Tape Player and Antenna · Diagnostic — No sound from one speaker
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p867 OEM manual
-
NO SOUND FROM ONE SPEAKER — POSSIBLE CAUSES
Possible causes: Loose speaker connector, Broken wire in speaker wire harness, Defective speaker, Defective radio and tape player.
-
TEST 1 — Check speaker connection
Is the speaker connected? If No: Connect it, then check if OK. If Yes: Pull out connector and reinsert. If OK: Inspect connector. If No: Proceed to Test 2.
-
TEST 2 — Isolate speaker vs. harness vs. radio
Temporarily install another speaker. If Okay (Yes): Replace speaker. If No: Check for continuity in speaker wire harness. If OK: Replace radio and tape player. If No continuity: Inspect and repair speaker wire harness.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Radio, Stereo Tape Player and Antenna · Diagnostic Flowcharts
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p868 OEM manual
-
FAINT RECEPTION
Possible causes: Defective antenna or cable, Defective speaker, Defective radio. TEST: If both reception and static are faint with antenna fully lengthened → Yes: Temporarily install another speaker. If okay → Replace speaker. If not okay → Replace radio. If No: Temporarily install another antenna. If okay → Inspect antenna and cable and repair as necessary. If not okay → Replace radio.
-
BAD SOUND QUALITY — Sound quality bad when radio played
Possible causes: Multipath interference or excessive interception, Tuner dial not synchronized with station, Defective antenna, Defective antenna cable, Speaker improperly installed, Vibration sound from components near speaker, Defective speaker, Defective radio. TEST 1: Is sound quality bad in certain areas only? Yes → FM multipath interference and excessively strong AM reception near broadcasting station which cannot be avoided in most cases. No → Is tuner dial properly synchronized? No → Properly synchronize. Yes → Temporarily install another antenna. Okay? Yes → Inspect antenna cable, and repair as necessary. No → Proceed to Test 2.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Radio, Stereo Tape Player and Antenna · Diagnostic
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p869 OEM manual
-
TEST 2 — Speaker vibration / sound quality diagnostic
Flowchart: (1) Is speaker installed correctly (not loose or too tight)? If No → Properly install. If speaker frame bent, replace. If Yes → (2) Is there a vibration sound coming from components near speaker? If Yes → Repair. If No → (3) Temporarily install another speaker. Okay? If Yes → Replace speaker. If No → Replace radio.
-
FM DISTORTION NOTE
FM distortion tends to increase sharply if the tuner not synchronized.
-
Sound quality bad when tape player played — Possible causes
Bad tape; Dirty head; Incorrectly installed speaker; Vibration noise from around speaker; Defective speaker; Defective tape player.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Radio, Stereo Tape Player and Antenna · Diagnostic Tests
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p870 OEM manual
-
HEAD CLEANING PROCEDURE
Procedure for cleaning the tape head, pinch rollers and capstans.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Clock · Troubleshooting
Body electrical
AW11_1988_full · p871 OEM manual
-
CLOCK LOSES OR GAINS TIME
Check amount of time the clock loses or gains per day or a week against the allowable error table. If it exceeds allowable error, check to see if there is 11V–15V on terminal B of connector on clock side. If below 11V, locate cause and repair, or recharge battery. If OK, adjust or replace clock.
BODY · General Information
Body
AW11_1988_full · p874 OEM manual
-
APPLY PROTECTION TAPE TO BODY ADJACENT AREAS
If there is a possibility that the body or/and part may be damaged, first removed the danger before performing repair operations. Apply protection tape to the body adjacent for removing and installing body part.
-
APPLY PROTECTION TAPE TO SCREWDRIVER OR SCRAPER TIP
When prying off the body parts with a screwdriver or scraper etc., be sure to apply protection tape to the tip or blade to prevent from damaged the paint film or body part.
-
REPAIR DAMAGED ANTI-RUST AGENTS — PEELING AND CRACKS
If damaged the anti-rust agents while repairing, be sure to repair with each anti-rust agent. If body sealer, paint film and undercoat are damaged by peeling, cracks, etc., be sure to repair with each anti-rust agent.
-
APPLY RUST INHIBITOR AFTER LOOSENING OR REMOVING HINGE OR EXTERIOR BODY PANEL
If loosen or removed the hinge or exterior body panel, after repairing be sure to apply rust inhibitor.
BODY · Front Hood, Engine Hood
Body
AW11_1988_full · p875 OEM manual
-
SUBSTITUTE CENTERING BOLT BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
Since the centering bolt is used as the hood hinge set bolt, the hood can not be adjusted with it on. Substitute the bolt with washer for the centering bolt.
-
ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE HOOD — FORWARD/REARWARD AND LEFT/RIGHT DIRECTIONS
Adjust the hood by loosening the body side hinge bolts.
-
ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE HOOD — REAR EDGE IN VERTICAL DIRECTION
Adjust the hood by turning the cushions.
-
ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE HOOD — FRONT EDGE IN VERTICAL DIRECTION
Adjust the hood by increasing or decreasing the number of shims.
-
ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE HOOD — HOOD LOCK
Adjust the hood lock by loosening the mounting bolts.
BODY · Front Door · Components
Body
AW11_1988_full · p877 OEM manual
-
FRONT DOOR COMPONENTS
Exploded diagram identifying all front door components including: Door Glass, Door Lock Cylinder, Door Lock Striker, Outside Handle, Cover, Door Trim Support, Door Grass Stopper, Rear View Mirror, Front Lower Frame, Inside Handle, Door Hinge, Door Lock with Solenoid, Power Window Regulator, Door Lock, Window Regulator, Door Weatherstrip, Belt Moulding, Door Trim (w/o Power Window), Door Trim (w/ Power Window), Inside Handle Bezel, Power Window Relay, Power Window Switch, Inside Pull Handle, Door Trim No. 1 Braket, Plate, Snap Ring, Regulator Handle, Service Hole Cover.
BODY · Moulding · Replacement of Fastener and Clip / Installation of Windshield Moulding
Body
AW11_1988_full · p890 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF WINDSHIELD MOULDING — INSTALL NEW CLIP INTO UPPER MOULDING
Install new clip into upper moulding.
-
INSTALLATION OF WINDSHIELD MOULDING — APPLY ADHESIVE AT A NEW CLIP INSTALLATION AREA
Apply adhesive at a new clip installation area.
BODY · Moulding · Side Moulding
Body
AW11_1988_full · p892 OEM manual
-
SIDE MOULDING COMPONENTS
Diagram identifying all side moulding components: Quarter Window Moulding (w/ T-bar Roof), Quarter Window Moulding (w/o T-bar Roof), Rear Roof Bracket Cover (w/ T-bar Roof), Roof Drip Moulding, Quarter Ventilation Louver, Quarter Belt Moulding, Center Pillar Moulding, Door Belt Moulding, Side Body Moulding, Rocker Panel Moulding.
BODY · Moulding · Roof Drip Moulding / Door Belt Moulding
Body
AW11_1988_full · p893 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRIP MOULDING — INSTALL ROOF DRIP MOULDING
Attach the lower edge of the moulding to the body flange, and tap on by hand.
-
INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRIP MOULDING — INSTALL WINDSHIELD SIDE MOULDING
See page BO-18.
-
REMOVAL OF DOOR BELT MOULDING — REMOVE DOOR TRIM
See page BO-6.
-
REMOVAL OF DOOR BELT MOULDING — REMOVE DOOR WEATHERSTRIP
Remove door weatherstrip.
BODY · Moulding
Body
AW11_1988_full · p894 OEM manual
-
REMOVE DOOR BELT MOULDING
Step 3 of the door belt moulding removal procedure.
-
INSTALLATION OF DOOR BELT MOULDING
1. INSTALL BELT MOULDING: (a) Tap the moulding onto the door by hand. (b) Install the two screws. 2. INSTALL DOOR WEATHERSTRIP. 3. INSTALL DOOR TRIM.
BODY · Moulding
Body
AW11_1988_full · p897 OEM manual
-
INSTALL REAR ROOF BRACKET MOUNTING NUT (w/ T-BAR ROOF)
Step 6 of roof side garnish installation sequence.
-
INSTALL ROOF SIDE INNER GARNISH
Step 7: (a) Install the roof side garnish with the two screws and clip. NOTE: To reinstall the clip, pull its center out to the second "waist". Then insert the clip into the hole and press in the center. (b) Install the quarter trim with the two screws.
-
INSTALL SEAT BELT SHOULDER ANCHOR
Step 8 of roof side garnish installation sequence.
-
INSTALL REAR ROOF BRACKET COVER (w/ T-BAR ROOF)
Step 9 of roof side garnish installation sequence.
-
INSTALL WEATHERSTRIP RETAINER AND WEATHERSTRIP
(b) Install the weatherstrip retainer with the three screws. (c) Install the weatherstrip.
-
INSTALLATION OF ROCKER PANEL MOULDING
1. INSTALL REAR MOULDING: (a) Install the moulding with the two screws. (b) Install the clip to the moulding. 2. INSTALL FRONT MOULDING: Install the moulding with the ten screws.
BODY · Moulding · Side Body Moulding
Body
AW11_1988_full · p898 OEM manual
-
PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING MOULDING MATERIAL
Store in cool place, avoiding direct sunlight, high temperature and dust. The moulding is of polyvinyl chloride, so do not allow it to come in contact with thinner or other solvent, open flame, or boiling water. The storage time for the moulding adhesive is limited to about 9 months.
-
INSTALLATION OF SIDE BODY MOULDING — CLEAN MOULDING MOUNTING SURFACES
Wipe off stains with cleaner.
BODY · Moulding · Rear Moulding
Body
AW11_1988_full · p902 OEM manual
-
REMOVE QUARTER OUTSIDE MOULDING AND SUN VISOR
(a) Remove the four screws and quarter outside moulding. (b) Remove the other side moulding and sun visor.
BODY · Windshield · Tools and Supplies
Body
AW11_1988_full · p903 OEM manual
-
CHOOSE SUITABLE ADHESIVE SET
Use an adhesive set suitable for the ambient temperature. Temperature ranges: 0-15°C (32-59°F) use part 08850-00070 Windshield glass adhesive set No. 15; 15-35°C (59-95°F) use part 08850-00080 Windshield glass adhesive set No. 35; 35-45°C (95-113°F) use part 08850-00090 Windshield glass adhesive set No. 45.
-
CHECK ADHESIVE USABLE TIME
After mixing the main and hardening agents, finish glass installation within the specified time as shown. Example: For glass installation in an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F), apply adhesive set No. 35 within 45 minutes.
-
CHECK ADHESIVE HARDENING TIME
First, mix the main and hardening agents. Then, perform a leak test only after the hardening time has elapsed. Example: The hardening time for adhesive set No. 35 with an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F) is 2½ hours.
- Do not drive the vehicle until at least double the hardening time has elapsed.
BODY · Windshield
Body
AW11_1988_full · p905 OEM manual
-
CLEAN AND SHAPE CONTACT SURFACE OF BODY
Remove any dam remaining on the body. Cut out any rough areas with a knife. Leave as much urethane layer on the body as possible.
BODY · T-Bar Roof · Components
Body
AW11_1988_full · p915 OEM manual
-
T-BAR ROOF COMPONENTS
Exploded diagram identifying all components of the T-Bar Roof assembly, including: Removable Roof, Roof Top Moulding, Weatherstrip Center Roof Retainer, Removable Roof Opening Trim, Weatherstrip Front Roof Retainer, Weatherstrip Rear Roof Retainer, Roof Headlining, Front Pillar Garnish, Sun Visor and Holder, Room Light, Roof Headlining Rear Trim, Rear View Mirror, Removable Roof Weatherstrip, Roof Side Garnish, Rear Roof Bracket, Front Roof Bracket Cover, Removable Roof Guide, Front Roof Bracket, Rear Roof Bracket Cover, Roof Lock Lever, Snap Ring, Roof Lock Cylinder, Roof Side Rail Garnish, Roof Knob, Removable Roof Lock, Retainer, Lock Guide, Roof Side Rail Retainer, Roof Side Rail Weatherstrip, Removable Roof Glass with Bracket.
BODY · T-Bar Roof · On-Vehicle Inspection / Adjustment of Removable Roof
Body
AW11_1988_full · p916 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
With the removable roof installed, check for water leakage. Check for a difference in level between the removable roof glass and roof panel.
BODY · T-Bar Roof · Removable Roof
Body
AW11_1988_full · p918 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF T-BAR ROOF BRACKET
Install T-bar roof parts following removal sequence. Seat belt shoulder anchor belt. Torque: 440 kg-cm (32 ft-lb, 43 N·m). Adjust removable roof.
BODY · T-Bar Roof · Disassembly / Assembly of Removable Roof
Body
AW11_1988_full · p919 OEM manual
-
REMOVE ROOF SIDE RAIL WEATHERSTRIP
Step 7 of disassembly sequence.
-
REMOVE ROOF SIDE RAIL RETAINER AND HOLDER
Step 8 of disassembly sequence. Remove the four screws and roof side rail retainer and holder.
BODY · Instrument Panel · Components
Body
AW11_1988_full · p926 OEM manual
-
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENTS
Exploded diagram identifying all instrument panel components including: Clock, No. 2 Speaker Panel, No. 4 Register, No. 3 Register, No. 1 Speaker Panel, Register Bezel, Instrument Cluster Finish Upper Panel, Instrument Cluster Finish Panel No. 1 Garnish, No. 2 Register, Glove Compartment Door Lock, Glove Compartment Door, Instrument Cluster Finish Panel Retainer, Instrument Cluster Finish Panel, Combination Meter, Glove Compartment Door Check, Glove Compartment, Instrument Panel Center Reinforcement, Radio and Stereo or Stereo Opening Cover, Instrument Cluster Finish Center Panel, Instrument Finish End Panel, Steering Wheel, Instrument Panel Under Cover, Ash Receptacle, Rear Console Box, Console Lower Cover, Console Box, No. 1 Register, Instrument Panel Finish Lower Panel, Console Rear Cover.
BODY · Instrument Panel · Removal/Installation
Body
AW11_1988_full · p931 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF INSTRUMENT PANEL
See page BO-53. Install parts of instrument panel in reverse sequence of removal.
-
INSERT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FINISH UPPER PANEL
Insert the both of instrument cluster finish upper panel into the hole of instrument panel center reinforcement. Match the seam of the instrument cluster finish upper panel with the instrument panel finish end panel head and insert.
-
INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT
Install the glove compartment with the door check arm pulled out.
-
INSTALL GLOVE COMPARTMENT DOOR
Install the glove compartment door with the door check arm as shown in the figure.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · General Description · Refrigeration Cycle
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p939 OEM manual
-
COMPRESSOR
Draws off gaseous refrigerant from the evaporator and compresses it. This causes the refrigerant gas temperature and pressure to rise rapidly.
-
CONDENSER
Through which the heated refrigerant gas gives off heat to the engine cooling air. The refrigerant gas cools off and once again becomes a liquid.
-
RECEIVER
Removes any traces of moisture and filters out dirt in the system. It also serves as a reservoir for excessive refrigerant.
-
EXPANSION VALVE
Meters liquid refrigerant into the evaporator cores, causing a drop in pressure and consequently drop in temperature.
-
EVAPORATOR
The released refrigerant expands and flows through the evaporator tubes. It then removes heat from the air blowing across the fins and tubes and evaporates, causing the temperature inside the car gradually to be lowered.
-
REFRIGERATION CYCLE STEP 1
The compressor discharges high temperature and high pressure refrigerant that contains the heat absorbed from the evaporator plus the heat created by the compressor in a discharge stroke.
-
REFRIGERATION CYCLE STEP 2
This gaseous refrigerant flows into the condenser. In the condenser, the gaseous refrigerant condenses into liquid refrigerant.
-
REFRIGERATION CYCLE STEP 3
This liquid refrigerant flows into the receiver which stores and filters the liquid refrigerant till the evaporator requires the refrigerant.
-
REFRIGERATION CYCLE STEP 4
By the valve, the liquid refrigerant changes into low temperature, low pressure liquid and gaseous mixture.
-
REFRIGERATION CYCLE STEP 5
This cold and foggy refrigerant flows to the evaporator. Vaporizing the liquid in the evaporator, the heat from the warm air stream passing through the evaporator core is transferred to the refrigerant. All the liquid change into the gaseous refrigerant in the evaporator and only heat-laden gaseous refrigerant is drawn into the compressor. Then, the process is repeated again.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · General Description
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p940 OEM manual
-
PRINCIPLE OF A/C ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
Wiring diagram showing the A/C electrical circuit including: Circuit Breaker, Ignition Switch, Battery, Fuse, Heater Relay, A/C Fuse, A/C Switch, Blower Motor, Blower Switch, Dual Pressure Switch, VSV, Revolution Detecting Sensor (4A-GZE E/G only), Thermistor, A/C Amplifier, and Magnetic Clutch.
-
HOW MAGNETIC CLUTCH BE ENERGIZED?
The general process until magnetic clutch is energized is shown below: (1) Ignition Switch ON. (2) Blower Switch ON → Heater Relay ON (Blower Motor RUN). (3) A/C Switch ON → A/C amplifier ON (A/C Amp. Main Power Supply). (4) Dual Pressure Switch ON: Refrigerant Condition 2.1 kg/cm2 (30 psi, 206 kPa) less than 27 kg/cm2 (384 psi, 2648 kPa). (5) Thermistor supplys temperature of evaporator to A/C amplifier. (6) VSV ON → E/G Idle Up. (7) A/C amplifier Turns on Magnetic Clutch. (8) Magnetic Clutch ON. (9) Revolution Detecting Sensor supplys RPM of compressor to A/C amplifier. If compressor is not locked, magnetic clutch is continuosly energized.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · System Components
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p944 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Diagram identifying all major air conditioning system components including: VSV, Suction Hose, Suction Tube, Discharge Hose, Discharge Tube, Cooling Unit, Low Pressure Charging Valve, Condenser, Receiver, Pressure Switch, High Pressure Charging Valve, Liquid Tube (x2), Water Temperature Sensor, A/C Switch, A/C Amplifier, and Cooling Unit (dashboard location).
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Precautions · Special Tools and Equipment
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p945 OEM manual
-
HANDLING REFRIGERANT (R-12)
When handling refrigerant (R-12), the following precautions should be observed.
- Always wear eye protection.
- Keep the refrigerant container (service drum) below 40°C (104°F).
- Do not handle refrigerant in an enclosed area where there is an open flame.
- Discharge refrigerant slowly when purging the system.
- Be careful that the liquid refrigerant does not get on your skin.
-
IF LIQUID REFRIGERANT GETS IN THE EYES OR ON THE SKIN
If liquid refrigerant gets in the eyes or on the skin, take the following actions.
- Do not rub eyes or skin.
- Wash the area with a lot of cool water.
- Apply clean petroleum jelly to the skin.
- Rush to a physician or hospital for immediate professional treatment.
- Do not attempt to treat yourself.
-
WHEN TUBING
When working with tubing and O-ring fittings, observe the following.
- Apply a few drops of compressor oil onto the O-ring fittings.
- Tighten the nut using two wrenches to avoid twisting the tube.
- Tighten the O-ring fitting to the specified torque.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p946 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — No blower operation
Possible causes: Blown fuse (Replace, AC-4,5); Defective blower motor (Check and repair); Defective blower relay (Check operation, AC-4,5); Defective blower switch (Check for short or open circuit, BE-35); Blown blower resistor (Replace, BE-36); Defective wiring connection (Check and repair, AC-4,5).
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — No blower control
Possible causes: Blown blower resistor (Replace); Defective blower switch (Check for short or open circuit, BE-35); Defective servo motor (Check operation, BE-37); Defective blower control relay (Check operation, AC-4,5); Defective system amplifier (Replace amplifier and recheck); Defective A/C amplifier (Check operation, AC-41,42); Defective wiring connection (Check and repair, AC-4,5).
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — Interior temperature does not drop
Possible causes: Blown fuse (Replace, AC-4,5); Defective magnetic clutch (Check and repair, AC-15); Defective compressor (Check and repair, AC-15); Defective pressure switch (Replace, AC-35); Insufficient refrigerant in system (Check discharge refrigeration system, AC-14); Defective A/C switch (Check for short or open circuit, AC-40); Defective servo motor (Check operation, BE-37); Defective system amplifier (Replace amplifier and recheck); Defective A/C amplifier (Check operation, AC-41,42); Defective wiring connection (Check and repair, AC-4,5); Defective water valve (Check for leak and repair).
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — Interior temperature does not rise
Possible causes: Defective water valve (Check operation); Defective servo motor (Check operation, BE-37); Defective system amplifier (Replace amplifier and recheck); Defective A/C amplifier (Check operation, AC-41,42); Defective wiring connection (Check and repair, AC-4,5).
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — Unstable operation (fluctuating)
Possible causes: Defective servo motor (Check operation, BE-37); Defective system amplifier (Replace amplifier and recheck); Defective A/C amplifier (Check operation, AC-41,42); Defective wiring connection (Check and repair, AC-4,5).
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · Checking of Refrigeration System with Manifold Gauge
Exhaust
AW11_1988_full · p947 OEM manual
-
Checking of Refrigeration System with Manifold Gauge
Read the manifold gauge pressure with the following established conditions: (a) Temperature at the air inlet is 30-35°C (86-95°F), (b) Engine running at 2,000 rpm, (c) Blower speed set at high, (d) Temperature control lever set at cool. NOTE: It should be noted that the gauge indications may vary slightly due to ambient temperature conditions.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · Checking of Refrigeration System with Manifold Gauge
Exhaust
AW11_1988_full · p948 OEM manual
-
NOTE at No. 6
These gauge indications are shown when the refrigeration system has been opened and the refrigerant charged without vacuum purging.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · Checking of Refrigeration System with Manifold Gauge
Exhaust
AW11_1988_full · p949 OEM manual
-
Checking of Refrigeration System with Manifold Gauge (Cont'd)
Diagnostic table entries 7 and 8 for refrigeration system troubleshooting using manifold gauge readings.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Refrigeration System
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p951 OEM manual
-
Checking of Refrigerant Charge
1. RUN ENGINE AT APPROX. 2000 RPM. 2. OPERATE AIR CONDITIONER AT MAXIMUM COOLING FOR A FEW MINUTES. 3. CHECK AMOUNT OF REFRIGERANT — Observe the sight glass on the receiver.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Compressor · Disassembly / Assembly
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p960 OEM manual
-
REMOVE FRONT VALVE PLATE
Remove the two pins from the front housing. Discard the pins.
-
REMOVE REAR HOUSING
Using a screwdriver, remove the rear housing.
- Be careful not to scratch the sealing surface of the rear housing.
-
REMOVE FRONT AND REAR O-RINGS FROM CYLINDER BLOCK
Discard the O-rings.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Compressor · Assembly
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p963 OEM manual
-
POUR COMPRESSOR OIL INTO COMPRESSOR
Add the same quantity plus 20 cc of oil into the compressor. Compressor oil: DENSOIL 6 SUNISO No. 5GS
-
INSTALL SERVICE VALVE
Step 10 of compressor assembly: (a) Lubricate new O-rings with compressor oil. Install the O-rings in the service valve. (b) Install the service valve on the compressor. Using SST and torque wrench, tighten the bolts. SST 07110-61050
-
CHECK SHAFT STARTING TORQUE
Torque: 30 kg-cm (26 in.-lb, 2.9 N·m) or less
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Receiver, Condenser
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p967 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION — RECEIVER
Check sight glass, fusible plug and fitting for leakage. Use a gas leak detector. Repair as necessary.
-
INSTALLATION OF RECEIVER
See page AC-7. Step 1: Install receiver in receiver holder. NOTE: Do not remove the blind plugs until connecting the liquid tubes to the receiver. Step 2: Connect two liquid tubes to receiver. Torque: 135 kg-cm (10 ft-lb, 13 N·m). Step 3: Install trim cover and spare tire. Step 4: If receiver was replaced, add compressor oil to compressor — add 20 cc (0.7 fl.oz.). Step 5: Evacuate air from air conditioning system. Step 6: Charge air conditioning system with refrigerant and check on gas leakage. Specified amount: 600–750 g (1.3–1.7 lb).
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION — CONDENSER
1. Check condenser fins for blockage or damage. If the fins are clogged, wash them with water and dry with compressed air. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the fins. If the fins are bent, straighten them with a screwdriver or pliers. 2. Check condenser fittings for leakage. Repair as necessary.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Condenser
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p968 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF CONDENSER
See page AC-7. Steps: 1. Install condenser — install the two lower condenser nuts, making sure the rubber cushions fit on the mounting flanges correctly. 2. Connect liquid tube, discharge tube and two clamps to condenser (torques as specified). 3. Install two upper condenser bolts. 4. Install two upper radiator bolts. 5. Install front grille and under cover. 6. If condenser was replaced, add compressor oil to compressor: 40-50 cc (1.4-1.7 fl.oz.). 7. Evacuate air from air conditioning system. 8. Charge air conditioning system with refrigerant and check on gas leakage — specified amount: 600-750 g (1.3-1.7 lb).
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Cooling Unit · Evaporator
Cooling
AW11_1988_full · p974 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF COOLING UNIT — INSTALL COMPONENTS ON EVAPORATOR
Connect the expansion valve to the inlet fitting of the evaporator and torque the nut. Ensure O-rings are positioned on the tube fitting. Install the holder to the suction tube with heat sensitizing tube. Connect the liquid tube to the inlet fitting of the expansion valve and torque the nut. Install lower unit case to the evaporator. Install thermistor to the evaporator. Install upper unit case. Install four screws. Install four clips. Connect connectors.
-
INSTALLATION OF COOLING UNIT
Install the cooling unit with two nuts and four screws. Connect connectors. Install glove box and under cover.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Cooling Unit, Refrigerant Lines
Cooling
AW11_1988_full · p975 OEM manual
-
INSTALL GROMMETS ON INLET AND OUTLET FITTINGS
Install grommets on inlet and outlet fittings.
-
CONNECT LIQUID TUBE TO COOLING UNIT INLET FITTING
Torque the nut. Torque: 135 kg-cm (10 ft-lb, 13 N·m)
-
CONNECT SUCTION TUBE TO COOLING UNIT OUTLET FITTING
Torque the nut. Torque: 325 kg-cm (24 ft-lb, 32 N·m)
-
IF EVAPORATOR WAS REPLACED, ADD COMPRESSOR OIL TO COMPRESSOR
Add 40 – 50 cc (1.4 – 1.7 fl.oz.)
-
CONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE TO BATTERY
Connect the negative cable to the battery.
-
EVACUATE AIR FROM AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Evacuate air from the air conditioning system.
-
CHARGE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM WITH REFRIGERANT AND CHECK ON GAS LEAKAGE
Specified amount: 600 – 750 g (1.3 – 1.7 lb)
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION — INSPECT HOSES AND TUBES FOR LEAKAGE
Use a gas leak detector. Replace, if necessary.
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION — CHECK THAT HOSE AND TUBE CLAMPS ARE NOT LOOSE
Tighten or replace as necessary.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Thermistor, A/C Switch
Air conditioning
AW11_1988_full · p976 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL AND INSPECTION OF THERMISTOR — REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE COOLING UNIT
Remove and disassemble cooling unit. See page AC-36.
-
REMOVAL AND INSPECTION OF THERMISTOR — REMOVE THERMISTOR FROM EVAPORATOR
Remove thermistor from evaporator.
-
REMOVAL AND INSPECTION OF THERMISTOR — CHECK THERMISTOR OPERATION
Place the thermistor in cold water. While varying the temperature of the water, measure the resistance at the connector and at the same time, measure the temperature of the water with a thermometer. Compare the two readings on the chart. If the intersection is not between the two lines, replace the thermistor.
-
INSTALLATION OF THERMISTOR — INSTALL THERMISTOR TO EVAPORATOR
Install thermistor to evaporator.
-
INSTALLATION OF THERMISTOR — ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL COOLING UNIT
Assemble and install cooling unit.
-
INSPECTION OF SWITCH — INSPECT SWITCH CONTINUITY
Inspect continuity between the terminals. A/C position: continuity between terminals 4, 2, 10, 15. ECONO position: continuity between terminals 2, 10, 15. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch. See page AC-7.
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · Maintenance
Maintenance
AW11_1988_full · p981 OEM manual
-
Drive belt tension — 4A-GE Alternator New belt
175 ± 5 lb
-
Drive belt tension — 4A-GE Alternator Used belt
115 ± 20 lb
-
Drive belt tension — 4A-GE A/C New belt
160 ± 20 lb
-
Drive belt tension — 4A-GE A/C Used belt
105 ± 10 lb
-
Drive belt tension — 4A-GZE Alternator w/ Air con. New belt
165 ± 10 lb
-
Drive belt tension — 4A-GZE Alternator w/ Air con. Used belt
85 ± 15 lb
-
Drive belt tension — 4A-GZE Alternator w/o Air con. New belt
175 ± 5 lb
-
Drive belt tension — 4A-GZE Alternator w/o Air con. Used belt
115 ± 20 lb
-
Drive belt tension — 4A-GZE Supercharger New belt
175 ± 5 lb
-
Drive belt tension — 4A-GZE Supercharger Used belt
115 ± 20 lb
-
Spark plug firing order
1 – 3 – 4 – 2
-
Idle speed
800 rpm
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · EFI System · EFI SYSTEM (4A-GE) Specifications
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p986 OEM manual
-
PERFORM MEASUREMENTS WITH COMPUTER CONNECTED
Perform all voltage and resistance measurements with the computer connected.
-
VERIFY BATTERY VOLTAGE
Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or above when the ignition switch is ON.
-
AVOID CONTACT WITH Ox AND VF TERMINALS
The testing probes must not make contact with the computer Ox and VF terminals.
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · EFI System · EFI System (4A-GZE)
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p988 OEM manual
-
EFI SYSTEM (4A-GZE) SPECIFICATIONS
Cold start injector resistance: 2-4 Ω. Fuel leakage: one drop of fuel per minute or less. Injector resistance: approx. 2.9 Ω. Injection volume: 80-100 cc/15 sec (4.9-6.1 cu in.). Difference between each injector: 5 cc (0.31 cu in.) or less. Fuel leakage: one drop of fuel per minute or less. Start injector time switch resistance STA-STJ: 20-40 Ω below 30°C (86°F), 40-60 Ω above 40°C (104°F). STA-Ground: 20-80 Ω. Air flow meter resistance Vs-E2: 200-600 Ω (measuring plate fully closed), 20-1200 Ω (measuring plate fully open). Vc-E2: 200-400 Ω. Fc-E1: ∞ (measuring plate closed), 0 (measuring plate open).
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · EFI System · Specifications (Cont'd)
EFI / fuel injection
AW11_1988_full · p989 OEM manual
-
Perform all voltage and resistance measurements with the computer connected
Perform all voltage and resistance measurements with the computer connected.
-
Verify battery voltage is 11 V or above when ignition switch is ON
Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or above when the ignition switch is ON.
-
Testing probes must not make contact with computer Ox and VF terminals
The testing probes must not make contact with the computer Ox and VF terminals.
CLUTCH · Clutch Master Cylinder
Clutch
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p8 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF MASTER CYLINDER
Clean the disassembled parts with compressed air.
-
INSPECT MASTER CYLINDER BORE FOR SCORING OR CORROSION
If a problem is found, clean or replace the cylinder.
-
INSPECT PISTON AND CUPS FOR WEAR, SCORING, CRACKS OR SWELLING
If either one requires replacement, use the parts from the cylinder kit.
-
INSPECT PUSH ROD FOR WEAR OR DAMAGE
If necessary, replace the push rod.
CLUTCH · Clutch Release Cylinder · Removal & Disassembly
Clutch
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p11 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT CLUTCH LINE UNION
Step 3 of removal procedure: (a) Using SST, disconnect the union. Use a container to catch the brake fluid. SST 09751-36011. (b) Remove the retainer.
-
SUPPORT ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION
Step 4 of removal procedure: Support the engine and transmission using a wooden block.
-
REMOVE ENGINE FRONT MOUNTING BRACKET SET BOLTS
Step 5 of removal procedure: Remove the two bolts from engine side.
-
REMOVE BOLT AND PULL OUT RELEASE CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
Step 6 of removal procedure: Remove the bolt and pull out the release cylinder assembly.
CLUTCH · Clutch Release Cylinder
Clutch
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p12 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF RELEASE CYLINDER
See page CL-8. Steps: 1. COAT PISTON WITH LITHIUM SOAP BASE GLYCOL GREASE, AS SHOWN. 2. INSTALL PISTON. 3. INSTALL BOOT AND INSERT PUSH ROD.
-
INSTALLATION OF RELEASE CYLINDER
See page CL-8. Steps: 1. INSTALL RELEASE CYLINDER. Torque: 120 kg-cm (9 ft-lb, 12 N·m). 2. INSTALL ENGINE FRONT MOUNTING BRACKET SET BOLTS. Torque: 790 kg-cm (57 ft-lb, 77 N·m). 3. REMOVE SUPPORTS FOR ENGINE AND TRANSAXLE.
-
CLEAN DISASSEMBLED PARTS
Clean the disassembled parts with compressed air.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · Description
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p19 OEM manual
-
TRANSAXLE TYPES S54 AND E153 — CONSTANT MESH SYNCHRONIZERS
Transaxle types S54 and E153 are constant mesh synchronizers for forward gears, and a sliding mesh reverse gear.
-
INPUT AND OUTPUT SHAFT COMPOSITION
The input shaft is composed of the 1st and 2nd speed gears and the reverse drive gear, and the output shaft is composed of the drive gear (for use with the ring gear).
-
OIL USED IN TRANSAXLES
S51: ATF type DEXRON II. E153: Transaxle oil E50 (08885-80206) or equivalent.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · Description · Function of Component Parts
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p20 OEM manual
-
S54 AND E153 TRANSAXLES — GEAR ENGAGEMENT DIAGRAMS
The illustrations show the engagements of transaxle gears for each gear position: 1st (1st Drive Gear, 1st Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly), 2nd (2nd Drive Gear, 2nd Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly), 3rd (3rd Drive Gear, 3rd Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly), 4th (4th Drive Gear, 4th Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly), 5th (5th Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly), and Reverse (Reverse Drive Gear, Reverse Driven Gear, Reverse Idler Gear, Differential Assembly).
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p21 OEM manual
-
REMOVE OLD FIPG MATERIAL
Using a razor blade and gasket scraper, remove all the old packing (FIPG) material from the gasket surfaces.
-
THOROUGHLY CLEAN ALL COMPONENTS
Thoroughly clean all components to remove all the loose material.
-
CLEAN SEALING SURFACES
Clean both sealing surfaces with a non-residue solvent.
-
APPLY SEAL PACKING
Apply the seal packing in approx. 1 mm (0.04 in.) bead along the sealing surface.
-
ASSEMBLE WITHIN 10 MINUTES
Parts must be assembled within 10 minutes of application. Otherwise, the packing (FIPG) material must be removed and reapplied.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (S54) · Removal of Component Parts · Components
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p25 OEM manual
-
COMPONENTS (Cont'd)
Exploded diagram showing the component parts of the S54 Manual Transaxle including: Oil Seal (non-reusable), Transaxle Case, No.2 Shift Fork Shaft, Transaxle Case Oil Receiver, Reverse Shift Fork, Interlock Pin, No.1 Shift Fork, No.2 Shift Fork, No.1 Shift Fork Shaft, No.1 Shift Head, Differential Assembly, Reverse Shift Arm, Input Shaft, Output Shaft Front Bearing, Output Shaft Cover, Input Shaft Front Bearing, Output Shaft, Reverse Idler Gear and Shaft, Synchronizer Ring, Spacer, Needle Roller Bearing, 4th Gear, Radial Ball Bearing, Snap Ring, Input Shaft, Slotted Spring Pin, 3rd Gear, Needle Roller Bearing, Synchronizer Ring, No.2 Hub Sleeve, Snap Ring.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (S54) · Removal of Component Parts · Components
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p26 OEM manual
-
COMPONENTS (Cont'd) — Output Shaft Assembly
Exploded view of output shaft components in order: Slotted Spring Pin, Output Shaft, Thrust Washer, 1st Gear, Needle Roller Bearing, Synchronizer Ring, No.1 Hub Sleeve, Snap Ring, Synchronizer Ring, 2nd Gear, Spacer, Needle Roller Bearing, 3rd Driven Gear, Output Gear Spacer, 4th Driven Gear, Radial Ball Bearing.
-
COMPONENTS (Cont'd) — Shift Mechanism Assembly
Exploded view of shift mechanism components: No.1 Shift Inner Lever, Slotted Spring Pin, Interlock Shaft, Spring, Shift Interlock Plate, E-Ring, Spring, Reverse Restrict Pin, No.2 Shift Inner Lever, Shift and Select Bar Shaft, E-Ring.
-
PART MARKINGS
Diamond (◆) indicates Non-reusable part. Star (★) indicates Precoated part.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (S54) · Component Parts (Shift and Select Lever Assembly)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p52 OEM manual
-
REMOVE INTERLOCK SHAFT, NO. 1 SHIFT INNER LEVER, NO. 2 SHIFT INNER LEVER, SPRING AND REVERSE RESTRICT PIN
Step 2 of disassembly: remove the interlock shaft, No. 1 shift inner lever, No. 2 shift inner lever, spring and reverse restrict pin.
-
REMOVE E-RING
Step 3 of disassembly: remove the E-ring.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (S54) · Component Parts (Differential) · Assembly
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p59 OEM manual
-
COAT SURFACES WITH ATF BEFORE ASSEMBLY
Coat all of the sliding and rotating surfaces with ATF before assembly.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (S54) · Component Parts (Differential)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p62 OEM manual
-
INSTALL TRANSMISSION CASE AND MEASURE SIDE BEARING PRELOAD
Steps (c) through (f) for installing transmission case to transaxle case, torquing seventeen bolts, rotating differential with SST 09564-32011 to snug bearing, and measuring preload of side bearing with SST and torque meter.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (E153) · Removal of Component Parts · Inspection of Component Parts
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p85 OEM manual
-
INSPECT SYNCHRONIZER RING FOR FIFTH GEAR
1. (a) Check for wear or damage. (b) Turn the ring and push it in to check the braking action. (c) Measure the clearance between the synchronizer ring back and the gear spline end. Minimum clearance: 0.6 mm (0.024 in.). If the clearance is less than the limit, replace the synchronizer ring.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (E153) · Component Parts (Differential)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p116 OEM manual
-
TRANSAXLE CASE COVER INSTALLATION
Remove any packing material and be careful not to drop oil on the contacting surfaces of the transaxle case or case cover. Apply seal packing to the transaxle case cover as shown in the figure. Install the transaxle case cover as soon as the seal packing is applied. Apply liquid sealant to the bolt threads. Install and torque the four bolts and three nuts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Description · General
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p136 OEM manual
-
SUPER-FLOW TORQUE CONVERTER
The 'Super-Flow' torque converter is used to improve the transmission efficiency.
-
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED SHIFT SHOCK REDUCTION
When shifting the transmission, the engine torque is controlled and the clutch hydraulic pressure in the transmission is electronically controlled to reduce transmission shift shock.
-
INTEGRATED TRANSAXLE CONTROL ECU
Transaxle control ECU has been integrated with the Engine ECU.
-
SHIFT LOCK MECHANISM
To minimize the possibility of incorrect operation of the automatic transaxle, a shift lock mechanism has also been added.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Description · General Specifications
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p137 OEM manual
-
A241E Automatic Transaxle General Specifications
Transaxle type: A241E. Engine type: 5S-FE. Torque converter stall torque ratio: 2.1:1, equipped with lock-up mechanism. Gear ratios: 1st 3.643, 2nd 2.008, 3rd 1.296, O/D 0.892, Reverse 2.977. Number of discs and plates — C1 Forward Clutch: 4/4, C2 Direct Clutch: 3/3, C3 Underdrive Clutch: 3/5, B2 2nd Brake: 3/3, B3 1st & Reverse Brake: 6/5, B4 Underdrive Brake: 3/3. Number of sprags — F1 No. 1 One-Way Clutch: 18, F2 No. 2 One-Way Clutch: 30, F3 Underdrive One-Way Clutch: 30.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Operation · Mechanical Operation
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p138 OEM manual
-
OPERATING CONDITIONS
Table defining which clutches (C1, C2, C3), brakes (B1, B2, B3, B4), and one-way clutches (F1, F2, F3) are engaged for each shift lever position (P, R, N, D, 2, L) and gear, along with the state of No.1 and No.2 solenoid valves. Filled circle (●) indicates operating. Note *1: Down-shift only in the 3rd gear for the 2 range and 2nd gear for the L range — no up-shift.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Operation · Function of Components
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p139 OEM manual
-
FUNCTION OF COMPONENTS
C1 Forward Clutch: Connects input shaft and front planetary ring gear. C2 Direct Clutch: Connects input shaft and front & rear planetary sun gear. C3 U/D Clutch: Connects underdrive sun gear and underdrive planetary carrier. B1 2nd Coast Brake: Prevents front & rear planetary sun gear from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise. B2 2nd Brake: Prevents outer race of F1 from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise, thus preventing the front & rear planetary sun gear from turning counterclockwise. B3 1st & Reverse Brake: Prevents rear planetary carrier from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise. B4 U/D Brake: Prevents underdrive sun gear from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise. F1 No. 1 One-Way Clutch: When B2 is operating, this clutch prevents the front & rear planetary gear from turning counterclockwise. F2 No. 2 One-Way Clutch: Prevents rear planetary carrier from turning counterclockwise. F3 U/D One-Way Clutch: Prevents underdrive planetary sun gear from turning clockwise. Planetary Gears: These gears change the route through which driving force is transmitted, in accordance with the operation of each clutch and brake, in order to increase or reduce the input and output speed.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Operation · Function of Components
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p140 OEM manual
-
FUNCTION OF COMPONENTS (Cont'd)
The conditions of operation for each gear position are shown on the following illustrations: D or 2 Range 1st Gear (AT3216), D Range 2nd Gear (AT3217), D Range 3rd Gear (AT3218), D Range O/D (AT3219), 2 Range 2nd Gear (AT3220), L Range 1st Gear (AT3221), R Range Reverse Gear (AT3222).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Operation · Hydraulic Control System
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p141 OEM manual
-
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM COMPOSITION
The hydraulic control system is composed of the oil pump, the valve body, the solenoid valves, the accumulators, the clutches and brakes, and the governor valve as well as the fluid passages which connect all of these components.
-
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE GOVERNANCE
Based on the hydraulic pressure created by the oil pump, the hydraulic control system governs the hydraulic pressure acting on the torque converter, clutches and brakes in accordance with the vehicle driving conditions.
-
SOLENOID VALVES — No. 1 AND No. 2
There are three solenoid valves on the valve body. The No. 1 and No. 2 solenoid valves are turned on and off by signals from the ECU to operate the shift valves and change the gear shift position.
-
SOLENOID VALVE — No. 3
The No. 3 solenoid valve is operated by signals from the ECU to engage or disengage the lock-up clutch of the torque converter.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Operation · A241E Electronic Control System
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p142 OEM manual
-
GENERAL
The electronic control system for the A241E automatic transaxle provides extremely precise control of the gear shift timing and lock-up timing in response to driving conditions as sensed by various sensors located throughout the vehicle and in response to the engine's running condition. At the same time, the ECU control reduces vehicle squat when the vehicle starts out the gear shift shock. The electronic control system is also equipped with a self diagnosis system which diagnoses malfunctions of electronically controlled components and warns the driver, and a fail-safe which makes it possible for the vehicle to continue functioning when a malfunction occurs.
-
CONSTRUCTION
The electronic control system can be broadly divided into three groups; the sensors, ECU and actuators. Sensors include: Throttle Position Sensor (IDL - Idling Signal, VTA - Throttle Position Signal), Water Temperature Sensor (THW), Distributor (Ne - Engine RPM Sensor, G1/G- - Crankshaft Angle Signal), No. 1 Speed Sensor (SPD), No. 2 Speed Sensor (SP2), Neutral Start Switch (NSW - Neutral Start Signal, 2/L - Shift Lever Position Signal), Stop Light Switch (STP), O/D Main Switch (OD2), Cruise Control Computer (OD1), Battery (+B). Engine & Transaxle ECU contains: Engine - Ignition Timing Control; Transaxle - Control of Shift Timing, Control of Lock-Up Timing; Self-Diagnostic System; Back-Up System. Actuators include: ESA (Igniter, Ignition Coil, Distributor, Spark Plugs via IGt/IGf signals), No. 1 Solenoid Valve (S1), No. 2 Solenoid Valve (S2), Lock-Up Solenoid Valve (SL), O/D OFF Indicator Light / Diagnostic Code Display (OD2).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · Basic Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p143 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — SOURCE IDENTIFICATION
Trouble occurring in the ECT can stem from one of three sources: the engine, the ECT electronic control unit or the transaxle itself. Before troubleshooting, determine in which these three sources the problem lies, and begin troubleshooting with the simplist operation, gradually working up in order of difficulty.
-
Basic Troubleshooting
Before troubleshooting and ECT, first determine whether the problem is electrical or mechanical. Refer to the basic troubleshooting flow-chart. If the cause is already known, use the basic troubleshooting chart along with the general troubleshooting chart on the following page to speed the procedure. Flow: (1) Preliminary Check (See page AT-12) — Bad → Repair or Replace; OK → (2) Read Diagnostic Code (See page AT-15) — Bad → Repair or Replace; OK → (3) Manual Shifting Test (See page AT-19) — Bad → Mechanical System Tests (See page AT-31) — Bad → Repair Transaxle; OK → Electrical Control System Check (See page AT-20) — Bad → Repair or Replace.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · General Troubleshooting
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p144 OEM manual
-
General Troubleshooting
Diagnostic table mapping problems to possible causes and remedies for the A241E automatic transaxle. Problems covered: fluid discolored or smells burnt; vehicle does not move in any forward range or reverse; shift lever position incorrect; harsh engagement into any drive range; delayed 1-2, 2-3 or 3-O/D up-shift or down-shifts from O/D-3 or 3-2 and shift back to O/D or 3; slips on 1-2, 2-3 or 3-O/D up-shift or slips or shudders on acceleration; drag, binding or tie-up on 1-2, 2-3, or 3-O/D up-shift.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · General Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p145 OEM manual
-
No lock-up in 2nd, 3rd or O/D
Possible causes: Electronic control faulty (inspect electronic control, AT-20); Valve body faulty (inspect valve body, AT-112); Solenoid valve faulty (inspect solenoid valve, AT-28); Transaxle faulty (disassemble and inspect transaxle, AT-44).
-
Harsh down-shift
Possible causes: Throttle cable out of adjustment (adjust throttle cable, AT-13); Throttle cable and cam faulty (inspect throttle cable and cam, AT-50); Accumulator pistons faulty (inspect accumulator pistons, AT-156); Valve body faulty (inspect valve body, AT-112); Transaxle faulty (disassemble and inspect transaxle, AT-44).
-
No down-shift when coasting
Possible causes: Valve body faulty (inspect valve body, AT-112); Solenoid valve faulty (inspect solenoid valve, AT-28); Electronic control faulty (inspect electronic control, AT-20).
-
Down-shift occurs too quickly or too late while coasting
Possible causes: Throttle cable faulty (inspect throttle cable, AT-12); Valve body faulty (inspect valve body, AT-112); Transaxle faulty (disassemble and inspect transaxle, AT-44); Solenoid valve faulty (inspect solenoid valve, AT-28); Electronic control faulty (inspect electronic control, AT-20).
-
No O/D-3, 3-2 or 2-1 kick-down
Possible causes: Solenoid valve faulty (inspect solenoid valve, AT-28); Electronic control faulty (inspect electronic control, AT-20); Valve body faulty (inspect valve body, AT-112); Throttle cable out of adjustment (adjust throttle cable, AT-12).
-
No engine braking in 2 or L range
Possible causes: Solenoid valve faulty (inspect solenoid valve, AT-28); Electronic control faulty (inspect electronic control, AT-20); Valve body faulty (inspect valve body, AT-112); Transaxle faulty (disassemble and inspect transaxle, AT-44).
-
Vehicle does not hold in P range
Possible causes: Shift cable out of adjustment (adjust shift cable, AT-13); Parking lock pawl and spring faulty (inspect cam and spring, AT-66).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting (Preliminary Check)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p147 OEM manual
-
INSPECT AND ADJUST THROTTLE CABLE
Check that the throttle valve is fully closed. Check that the inner cable is not slack. Measure the distance between the outer cable end and stopper on the cable. Standard distance: 0 – 1 mm (0 – 0.04 in.). If the distance is not standard, adjust the cable by the adjusting nuts.
-
ADJUST NEUTRAL START SWITCH
If the engine will start with the shift selector in any range other than N or P range, adjustment is required. (a) Loosen the neutral start switch bolts and set the shift selector to the N range. (b) Align the groove and neutral basic line. (c) Hold in position and tighten the bolts.
-
INSPECT IDLE SPEED (N RANGE)
Idle speed: 700 ± 50 rpm
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting (Diagnosis System) · Diagnosis System
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p148 OEM manual
-
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
A self-diagnosis function is built into the electrical control system. Warning is indicated by the overdrive OFF indicator. Warning and diagnostic codes can be read only when the overdrive switch is ON. If OFF, the overdrive OFF indicator is lit continuously and will not blink.
-
MALFUNCTION IN SPEED SENSORS OR SOLENOIDS
If a malfunction occurs within the speed sensors or solenoids, the overdrive OFF light will not blink to warn the driver. However, there will be no warning of a malfunction with lock-up solenoid.
-
READING DIAGNOSTIC CODE BY BLINK COUNT
The diagnostic code can be read by the number of blinks of the overdrive OFF indicator when terminals T_T and E_1 are short-circuited. (See page AT-15)
-
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR / BRAKE SIGNAL NOT INDICATED
The throttle position sensor or brake signal are not indicated, but inspection can be made by checking the voltage at terminal T_T of the check connector.
-
GEAR SIGNAL CHECK WHILE DRIVING
The signals to each gear can be checked by measuring the voltage at terminal T_T of the check connector while driving.
-
DIAGNOSTIC CODE RETENTION IN MEMORY
The diagnostic (malfunction) code is retained in memory by the ECU and due to back-up voltage, is not canceled out when the engine is turned off. Consequently, after repair, it is necessary to turn the ignition switch off and remove the fuse EFI (15A) or disconnect the ENGINE and ECT ECU connector to cancel out the diagnostic (malfunction) code. (See page AT-16)
-
CHECK BATTERY FIRST
Low battery voltage will cause faulty operation of the diagnosis system. Therefore, always check the battery first.
-
USE HIGH-IMPEDANCE METER
Use a voltmeter and ohmmeter that have an impedance of at least 10 kΩ/V.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting (Diagnosis System) · Troubleshooting Flow-Chart
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p151 OEM manual
-
Overdrive OFF indicator blink on codes 42, 61, 62, 63
If diagnostic code Nos. 42, 61, 62 or 63 are output, the overdrive OFF indicator light will begin to blink immediately to warn the driver. However, an impact or shock may cause the blinking to stop; but the code will still be retained in the Engine and ECT ECU memory until canceled out.
-
No warning for diagnostic code No. 64
There is no warning for diagnostic code No. 64.
-
Simultaneous malfunction of No. 1 and No. 2 speed sensors
In the event of a simultaneous malfunction of both No. 1 and No. 2 speed sensors, no diagnostic code will appear and the fail-safe system will not function. However, when driving in the D range, the transaxle will not up-shift from first gear, regardless of the vehicle speed.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting (Electronic Control System) · Electronic Control Components
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p155 OEM manual
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL COMPONENTS
Diagram showing locations of electronic control components for the automatic transaxle system. Engine bay components: Throttle Position Sensor, Check Connector, Water Temperature Sensor, No. 2 Speed Sensor, Neutral Start Switch, Lock-up Solenoid Valve, No. 2 Solenoid Valve, No. 1 Solenoid Valve, Engine and ECT ECU. Interior/cabin components: No. 1 Speed Sensor, O/D OFF Indicator Light, Stop Light Switch, O/D Main Switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting (Mechanical System Tests) · Mechanical System Tests
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p165 OEM manual
-
PERFORM TEST AT NORMAL FLUID TEMPERATURE
Perform the test at normal operation fluid temperature (50 – 80°C or 122 – 176°F).
-
DO NOT RUN TEST LONGER THAN 5 SECONDS
Do not continuously run this test longer than 5 seconds.
-
CONDUCT TEST IN SAFE AREA
To ensure safety, conduct this test in a wide, clear, level area which provides good traction.
-
CARRY OUT TEST IN PAIRS
The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. One should observe the condition of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is performing the test.
-
EVALUATION — STALL SPEED SAME FOR BOTH RANGES, LOWER THAN SPECIFIED
If the stall speed is the same for both ranges without the rear wheels rotating but lower than specified value: Engine output may be insufficient; Stator one-way clutch is not operating properly.
-
EVALUATION — STALL SPEED IN D RANGE HIGHER THAN SPECIFIED
If the stall speed in D range is higher than specified: Line pressure too low; Forward clutch slipping; No. 2 one-way clutch not operating properly; Underdrive one-way clutch not operating properly.
-
EVALUATION — STALL SPEED IN R RANGE HIGHER THAN SPECIFIED
If the stall speed in R range is higher than specified: Line pressure too low; Direct clutch slipping; First and reverse brake slipping; Underdrive brake slipping.
-
EVALUATION — STALL SPEED IN BOTH R AND D RANGES HIGHER THAN SPECIFIED
If the stall speed in both R and D ranges are higher than specified: Line pressure too low; Improper fluid level; Underdrive brake slipping.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting (Mechanical System Tests) · Time Lag Test
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p166 OEM manual
-
PERFORM TEST AT NORMAL OPERATING FLUID TEMPERATURE
Perform the test at normal operating fluid temperature (50 – 80°C or 122 – 176°F).
-
ALLOW ONE MINUTE INTERVAL BETWEEN TESTS
Be sure to allow one minute interval between tests.
-
MAKE THREE MEASUREMENTS AND TAKE THE AVERAGE VALUE
Make three measurements and take the average value.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting (Mechanical System Tests) · Evaluation
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p168 OEM manual
-
EVALUATION — All ranges higher than specified
If the measured values at all ranges are higher than specified: Throttle cable out of adjustment; Throttle valve defective; Regulator valve defective.
-
EVALUATION — All ranges lower than specified
If the measured values at all ranges are lower than specified: Throttle cable out of adjustment; Throttle valve defective; Regulator valve defective; Oil pump defective; Underdrive one-way clutch not operating properly.
-
EVALUATION — Pressure low in D range only
If pressure is low in the D range only: D range circuit fluid leakage; Forward clutch defective; Underdrive one-way clutch not operating properly.
-
EVALUATION — Pressure low in R range only
If pressure is low in the R range only: R range circuit fluid leakage; Direct clutch defective; First and reverse brake defective; Underdrive one-way clutch not operating properly.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Troubleshooting · Automatic Shift Schedule
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p172 OEM manual
-
LOCK-UP IN 2 AND L RANGES
In the 2 and L ranges, all stages lock-up is OFF.
-
LOCK-UP RELEASE CONDITIONS
In the following cases, the lock-up will be released regardless of the lock-up pattern: When the throttle is completely closed. When the brake switch is ON.
-
O/D SHIFT INHIBIT AT LOW COOLANT TEMP
Shift up to O/D will not occur when the engine coolant temp. is below 53°C (127°F).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · On-Vehicle Repair · Throttle Cable
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p173 OEM manual
-
WORK START CAUTION
Work must be started after approx. 20 seconds or longer from the time the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK" position and the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery.
-
ON-VEHICLE COMPONENT REPLACEMENT HINT
The components mentioned below can be replaced on the vehicle without any necessity for removal of the transmission. For the respective operating procedures refer to the following pages: Valve body removal AT-49 to AT-51, installation AT-157 to AT-160; Throttle cable removal AT-39, installation AT-39 and AT-40.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (General Notes)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p204 OEM manual
-
WORK ON ONE COMPONENT GROUP AT A TIME
The instructions here are organized so that you work on only one component group at a time. This will help avoid confusion from similar-looking parts of different subassemblies being on your workbench at the same time.
-
INSPECT AND REPAIR FROM CONVERTER HOUSING SIDE
The component groups are inspected and repaired from the converter housing side.
-
COMPLETE INSPECTION, REPAIR AND ASSEMBLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
As much as possible, complete the inspection, repair and assembly before proceeding to the next component group. If a component group can not be assembled because parts are being ordered, be sure to keep all parts of that group in a separate container while proceeding with disassembly, inspection, repair and assembly for other component groups.
-
GENERAL CLEANING NOTE 1 — WASH AND BLOW CLEAN
All disassembled parts should be washed clean with any fluid passages and holes blown through with compressed air.
-
GENERAL CLEANING NOTE 2 — AIM COMPRESSED AIR AWAY FROM YOURSELF
When using compressed air to dry parts, always aim away from yourself to prevent accidentally spraying automatic transmission fluid or kerosene in your face.
-
GENERAL CLEANING NOTE 3 — USE RECOMMENDED FLUID OR KEROSENE
The recommended automatic transmission fluid kerosene should be used for cleaning.
-
PARTS ARRANGEMENT 1 — ARRANGE IN PROPER ORDER AFTER CLEANING
After cleaning, the parts should be arranged in proper order to allow efficient inspection, repairs, and reassembly.
-
PARTS ARRANGEMENT 2 — KEEP EACH VALVE WITH ITS SPRING
When disassembling a valve body, be sure to keep each valve together with the corresponding spring.
-
PARTS ARRANGEMENT 3 — SOAK NEW BRAKES AND CLUTCHES BEFORE ASSEMBLY
New brakes and clutches that are to be used for replacement must be soaked in transmission fluid for at least two hours before assembly.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 1 — COAT SEALS AND SLIDING SURFACES WITH FLUID
All oil seal rings, clutch discs, clutch plates, rotating parts, and sliding surfaces should be coated with transmission fluid prior to reassembly.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 2 — REPLACE ALL GASKETS AND O-RINGS
All gaskets and rubber O-rings should be replaced.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 3 — INSTALL SNAP RINGS CORRECTLY
Make sure that the ends of a snap ring are not aligned with one of the cutouts and are installed in the groove correctly.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 4 — REPLACE SUBASSEMBLY CONTAINING WORN BUSHING
If a worn bushing is to be replaced, the subassembly containing that bushing must be replaced.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 5 — CHECK THRUST BEARINGS AND RACES
Check thrust bearings and races for wear or damage. Replace if necessary.
-
GENERAL ASSEMBLY 6 — USE PETROLEUM JELLY TO KEEP PARTS IN PLACE
Use petroleum jelly to keep parts in place.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Second Coast Brake)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p206 OEM manual
-
INSPECT BRAKE BAND
If the lining of the brake band is exfoliated or discolored, or even part of the printed numbers are defaced, replace the brake band.
-
REMOVE SECOND COAST BRAKE PISTON COMPONENTS
Remove the spring, washer and piston rod.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Oil Pump) · Inspection
Lubrication / oil
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p209 OEM manual
-
REMOVE STATOR SHAFT
Remove the eleven bolts and stator shaft. Keep the gears in assembly order.
-
REMOVE FRONT OIL SEAL
Pry off the oil seal with a screwdriver.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Oil Pump) · Inspection & Assembly
Lubrication / oil
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p210 OEM manual
-
CHECK OIL PUMP BODY BUSHING
Using a dial indicator, measure the inside diameter of the oil pump body bushing. If the inside diameter is greater than the maximum, replace the oil pump body subassembly.
-
CHECK STATOR SHAFT BUSHINGS
Using a dial indicator, measure the inside diameter of the stator shaft bushings. If the inside diameter is greater than the maximum, replace the stator shaft.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Direct Clutch)
Clutch
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p214 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF DIRECT CLUTCH — INSTALL CLUTCH PISTON IN DIRECT CLUTCH DRUM
(a) Install new O-rings to the piston. Coat the O-rings with ATF. (b) Being careful not to damage the O-rings, press the piston into the drum with the cup side up.
-
ASSEMBLY OF DIRECT CLUTCH — INSTALL PISTON RETURN SPRING
(a) Place the return spring and snap ring onto the piston. (b) Place SST on the return spring, and compress the return spring with a shop press. SST 09350-32014 (09351-32070). (c) Install the snap ring with the snap ring pliers. Be sure the end gap of snap ring is not aligned with the spring retainer claw.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Forward Clutch) · Inspection
Clutch
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p218 OEM manual
-
REMOVE O-RINGS FROM PISTON
Remove the two O-rings from the piston.
-
IF NECESSARY, REMOVE OIL SEAL RINGS
Remove the two oil seal rings from the shaft.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Front Planetary Gear)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p222 OEM manual
-
REMOVE THRUST WASHER FROM SUN GEAR INPUT DRUM
Remove thrust washer from sun gear input drum.
-
REMOVE SUN GEAR FROM DRUM
Using the snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring from the drum. Remove the sun gear from the drum.
-
REMOVE SHAFT SNAP RING
Using the snap ring pliers, remove the shaft snap ring from the sun gear.
-
INSPECT SUN GEAR FLANGE BUSHING
Using a dial indicator, measure the inside diameter of the sun gear. Standard inside diameter: 22.025 – 22.046 mm (0.8671 – 0.8680 in.). Maximum diameter: 22.096 mm (0.8699 in.).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Front Planetary Gear)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p223 OEM manual
-
INSTALL ONE-WAY CLUTCH AND SECOND BRAKE HUB ON SUN GEAR
While turning the hub clockwise, slide the one-way clutch onto the sun gear.
-
RECHECK OPERATION OF ONE-WAY CLUTCH
Recheck operation of one-way clutch after installation.
-
INSPECT RING GEAR FLANGE BUSHING
Using a dial indicator, measure the inside diameter of the flange bushing. If the inside diameter is greater than maximum, replace the flange.
-
REMOVE RING GEAR FLANGE
Using a screwdriver, remove the snap ring. Remove the flange from the ring gear.
-
INSTALL RING GEAR FLANGE
Position the flange onto the ring gear. Using a screwdriver, install the snap ring.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Second Brake)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p225 OEM manual
-
DISC LINING INSPECTION HINT
If the lining of the disc is exfoliated or discolored, or even a part of the printed numbers are defaced, replace all discs.
-
NEW DISC SOAKING HINT
Before assembling new discs, soak them in ATF for at least two hours.
-
ASSEMBLY OF SECOND BRAKE PISTON — INSTALL PISTON
(a) Coat a new O-ring with ATF. (b) Install the two O-rings on the piston. (c) Press the piston into the drum, being careful not to damage the O-rings.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Rear Planetary Gear) · Assembly of One-Way Clutch
Clutch
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p227 OEM manual
-
REMOVE ONE-WAY CLUTCH FROM OUTER RACE
Step 4 of disassembly: (a) Remove the two snap rings and retainers from both sides. (b) Remove the one-way clutch from the outer race.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Rear Planetary Gear)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p228 OEM manual
-
INSTALL THRUST WASHERS
Step 4 of rear planetary gear assembly: (a) Coat the two thrust washers with petroleum jelly. (b) Align the tab of the washers with the hollow of the carrier.
-
INSPECTION OF REAR PLANETARY GEAR — MEASURE PLANETARY PINION GEAR THRUST CLEARANCE
Using a feeler gauge, measure the planetary pinion gear thrust clearance. If the clearance is greater than maximum, replace the planetary gear assembly.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Counter Shaft)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p235 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF COUNTER SHAFT COMPONENTS
Inspection steps for counter shaft components including planetary sun gear bushing inside diameter and planetary pinion gear thrust clearance.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Valve Body) · Upper Valve Body Components
Engine — mechanical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p249 OEM manual
-
ADJUSTING RING NOTE
The throttle pressure is changed according to the number of adjusting rings. When assembling the valve body, install the same number of adjusting rings as were removed.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Valve Body)
Engine — mechanical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p250 OEM manual
-
SPRING IDENTIFICATION HINT
During re-assembly please refer to the spring specifications above to help discriminate between the different springs.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Valve Body) · Location of Keys, Pins, Vibrating Stopper and Check Balls
Engine — mechanical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p251 OEM manual
-
KEY, STOPPER AND PIN
Identifies the location of keys (a, b, c), pins, and vibrating stopper on the automatic transaxle valve body. Key (a) is the Accumulator Control Valve key, key (b) is the Cut-back Valve key, and key (c) is the Low Coast Modulator Valve key. Multiple pins are located around the valve body perimeter and interior. The vibrating stopper is located on the left side of the valve body.
-
CHECK BALL
Identifies the location of check balls on the automatic transaxle valve body separator plate (lower body side), as shown in diagram AT5678.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Valve Body) · Lower Valve Body Components
Engine — mechanical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p252 OEM manual
-
LOWER VALVE BODY COMPONENTS
Exploded diagram identifying all components of the Lower Valve Body including: Pressure Relief Valve, Cooler By-Pass Valve, Strainer (A), spring assembly (B), 2-3 Shift Valve (C) with Key (a), Plug, Key (b), 2nd Coast Modulator Valve (D) with Plug, assembly (E) with Key (c), Lock-Up Signal Valve, Secondary Regulator Valve with spring (F), Key (f), Plug, assembly (G), Key (d), Plug, 1-2 Shift Valve, spring assembly (H), Key (e), Plug, and 3-4 Shift Valve.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Valve Body)
Engine — mechanical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p253 OEM manual
-
SPRING DISCRIMINATION HINT
During re-assembly please refer to the spring specifications above to help discriminate between the different springs.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Valve Body) · Location of Keys and Strainer
Engine — mechanical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p254 OEM manual
-
LOCATION OF KEYS AND STRAINER
Diagram showing the location of keys (a through f) and the strainer on both the Upper Side and Lower Side of the automatic transaxle valve body.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Component Parts (Differential)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p261 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF DIFFERENTIAL — INSTALL SIDE BEARING OUTER RACE OF TRANSAXLE HOUSING
(a) Place the shim onto the transaxle housing. (b) Using SST and press, press a new outer race into the transaxle housing. SST 09350-32014 (09351-32111, 09351-32130)
-
ASSEMBLY OF DIFFERENTIAL — INSTALL SIDE BEARING OUTER RACE OF TRANSAXLE CASE
(a) Place the adjusting shim onto the transaxle case. (b) Using SST and press, press a new outer race into the transaxle case. SST 09350-32014 (09351-32111, 09351-32130)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Installation of Component Parts
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p267 OEM manual
-
INSPECT PARTS CAREFULLY BEFORE ASSEMBLY
The automatic transmission is composed of highly precision-finished parts, necessitating careful inspection before assembly because even a small nick could cause fluid leakage or affect performance.
-
SOAK NEW CLUTCH DISCS BEFORE ASSEMBLY
Before assembling new clutch discs, soak them in automatic transmission fluid for at least two hours.
-
APPLY ATF TO SLIDING AND ROTATING SURFACES
Apply automatic transmission fluid on sliding or rotating surfaces of parts before assembly.
-
USE PETROLEUM JELLY FOR SMALL PARTS
Use petroleum jelly to keep small parts in their place.
-
DO NOT USE ADHESIVE CEMENTS ON GASKETS
Do not use adhesive cements on gaskets and similar parts.
-
USE NEW GASKETS AND O-RINGS
When assembling the transmission, sure to use new gaskets and O-rings.
-
DRY PARTS WITH COMPRESSED AIR
Dry all parts with compressed air – never use shop rags.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Installation of Component Parts
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p268 OEM manual
-
INSTALL THRUST BEARINGS AND RACES IN CORRECT DIRECTION AND POSITION
Be sure to install the thrust bearings and races in the correct direction and position. The diagram shows the positions of thrust bearings/races labeled A through H on the input shaft assembly, second brake/clutch assembly, and planetary gear/output shaft assembly. Labels A, B, C, G, H are thrust bearings (shown with upward arrows indicating installation direction). Labels D, E, F are thrust races (shown with downward arrows indicating installation direction).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Installation of Component Parts
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p286 OEM manual
-
PLANETARY RING GEAR INSTALLATION CHECK
If the planetary ring gear and the other parts are installed correctly into the case, the end of the bushing with the ring gear flange will be flush with a shoulder of the intermediate shaft or under.
-
INSTALL RACES AND BEARING ONTO RING GEAR FLANGE
Coat the races and bearing with petroleum jelly and install them onto the tip of ring gear flange as shown.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Shift Lock System · Component and Circuit
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p297 OEM manual
-
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM — COMPONENT AND CIRCUIT
Diagram showing the physical locations and electrical circuit of the Shift Lock System components including: Key Interlock Solenoid (steering column), Stop Light Switch (brake pedal), Shift Lock Override Button, Shift Lock Control Switch, Shift Lock Solenoid, and Shift Lock Control ECU (all on center console/shifter area). Circuit connects Battery through Stop Light Switch and Stop Light to Shift Lock Control Computer (inputs: STP, IG, ACC, KLS, E). Computer outputs SLS+/SLS- to Shift Lock Solenoid and KLS to Key Interlock Solenoid. Ignition Switch provides CIG to GAUGE fuse and IG/ACC to Shift Lock Control Computer. Connector pinouts shown: Shift Lock Control Computer (STP, IG, ACC, KLS, E — 5-pin; SLS-, SLS+ — 2-pin), Shift Lock Control Switch (P2, P, P1 — 3-pin, shown both sides), Shift Lock Solenoid (SLS+, SLS-, 2-pin), Key Interlock Solenoid (KLS+, KLS-, 2-pin).
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Wheel Alignment
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p304 OEM manual
-
TIE ROD LENGTH CHECK
If wheel angles differ from the standard specifications, check to see if the lengths of the left and right tie rods are the same. If the rod lengths are not equal, the wheel angle cannot be adjusted properly. If the tie rod lengths were changed to adjust the wheel angle, inspect the toe-in.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Wheel Alignment · Rear Wheel Alignment
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p305 OEM manual
-
CHECK STEERING AXIS INCLINATION
Steering axis inclination inspection standard: 13°30' ± 30'. Left-right error: 30' or less. Steering axis inclination is not adjustable; if measurement is not within specification, inspect and replace the suspension parts as necessary.
-
CHECK SIDE SLIP (REFERENCE ONLY)
Side slip: 3.0 mm/m (0.118 in./3.3 ft) or less.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Wheel Alignment
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p306 OEM manual
-
TOE-IN INSPECTION
Measure the distance between the marks on the front side of the tires. Toe-in Inspection STD 5 ± 1 mm (0.20 ± 0.04 in.). If not within specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts. HINT: After replacing damaged or worn suspension parts, measure the toe-in following steps (b), (c), (d) and (e). If toe-in is still not within standard, adjust the toe-in.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Front Axle Hub
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p315 OEM manual
-
INSTALL ROTOR DISC TO AXLE HUB
HINT: Before removing the rotor disc, place the matchmarks on the axle hub and rotor disc.
-
INSTALL DISC BRAKE CALIPER TO STEERING KNUCKLE
Install and torque the two bolts.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Front Suspension · SA-21
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p320 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY — INSPECT OPERATION OF SHOCK ABSORBER
(a) While pushing rod, check that the pull throughout the stroke is even, and there is no abnormal resistance or noise. (b) Push the piston rod in fully and release it. Check that it returns at a constant speed throughout. If the absorber operation is defective, replace the absorber, as and assembly.
- NOTICE: Before discarding the shock absorber, first loosen the ring nut 2 or 3 turns with SST to release the gas completely. SST 09720-00012 (09721-00071)
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Front Suspension · Lower Arm
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p324 OEM manual
-
INSPECT BALL JOINT FOR ROTATION
Remove the ball joint. Flip the ball joint stud back and forth 5 times as shown in the figure, before installing the nut. Using a torque gauge, turn the nut continuously one turn each 2-4 seconds and take the torque reading on the fifth turn. Torque (turning): 8–25 kg-cm (7–22 in.-lb, 0.8–2.5 N·m). If not within specification, replace the ball joint. Install the ball joint.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Front Suspension · Stabilizer Bar and Link
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p326 OEM manual
-
INSPECT STABILIZER LINK
Rotate ball joint arm in all directions. If movement is not smooth and free, replace stabilizer link.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Front Suspension · Stabilizer Bar and Link / Strut Bar
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p327 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF STRUT BAR — MEASURE LENGTH "L" BEFORE REMOVE
Measure length "L" before removing the strut bar.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Front Suspension · Strut Bar Removal/Installation
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p328 OEM manual
-
INSTALLATION OF STRUT BAR
See page SA-24. Steps: (1a) Install the nut, retainer, cushion and collar to the strut bar. (1b) Install the strut bar to the body, and connect to the lower arm. (1c) Install the cushion, retainer spring washer and nut.
- Do not misinstall the front and rear cushions.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Axle Shaft and Carrier
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p336 OEM manual
-
INSTALL ROTOR DISC
Align the matchmarks and install the rotor disc to the axle hub. (Step 6 of prior procedure)
-
INSTALL BRAKE CALIPER
Torque: 600 kg-cm (43 ft-lb, 59 N·m). (Step 7 of prior procedure)
-
INSTALL PLATE WASHER, BEARING LOCK NUT, BEARING LOCK NUT CAP AND NEW COTTER PIN
Install the plate washer and lock nut. With the parking brake engaged, tighten the nut. Install the lock nut cap and a new cotter pin. (Step 8 of prior procedure)
-
INSPECT REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
See page SA-31. (Step 9 of prior procedure)
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Drive Shaft (5S-FE Engine) · Removal
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p339 OEM manual
-
AXLE BEARING PROTECTION WHEN DRIVE SHAFT REMOVED
The axle bearing could be damaged if it is subjected to the vehicle weight, such as when moving the vehicle with the drive shaft removed. Therefore, if it is absolutely necessary to place the vehicle weight on the axle bearing, first support it with SST.
-
ABS SENSOR ROTOR PROTECTION
(w/ ABS) After disconnecting the drive shaft from the axle hub, work carefully so as not to damage the sensor rotor serrations on the drive shaft.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Drive Shaft (3S-GTE Engine) · Removal
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p352 OEM manual
-
AXLE BEARING PROTECTION WHEN DRIVE SHAFT REMOVED
The axle bearing could be damaged if it is subjected to the vehicle weight, such as when moving the vehicle with the drive shaft removed. Therefore, if it is absolutely necessary to place the vehicle weight on the axle bearing, first support it with SST. SST 09570-22010, 09608-16041 (09608-02010).
- The axle bearing could be damaged if it is subjected to the vehicle weight, such as when moving the vehicle with the drive shaft removed.
-
ABS SENSOR ROTOR SERRATION PROTECTION
(w/ ABS) After disconnecting the drive shaft from the axle hub, work carefully so as not to damage the sensor rotor serrations on the drive shaft.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Drive Shaft (3S-GTE Engine) · Removal / Replacement of Oil Seal
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p354 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT OF OIL SEAL
Step 1: REMOVE OIL SEAL — Using SST, drive out the oil seal. SST 09308-00010
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Drive Shaft (3S-GTE Engine)
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p362 OEM manual
-
TIGHTEN BOLTS BY HAND
Tighten the bolts by hand to avoid scratching the flange surface.
-
USE BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS
Use bolts, nuts and washers to keep the inboard joint together. Do this in the order shown, and repeat several times.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Drive Shaft (3S-GTE Engine)
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p363 OEM manual
-
BOOT INSTALLATION CHECK
Be sure the boot is on the shaft groove. Insure that the boot is not stretched or contracted when the drive shaft is at standard length.
-
BOOT CLAMP
Bend the boot clamp and lock it as shown.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension · Ball Joint / Lower Arm
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p375 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF LOWER ARM
See page SA-69.
-
DISCONNECT LOWER ARM FROM BALL JOINT
Step 1: (a) Remove the cotter pin and nut. (b) Using SST 09628-62011, disconnect the lower arm from the ball joint.
-
REMOVE STRUT ROD NUT AND RETAINER
Step 2: Remove a new strut rod nut and retainer from the lower arm.
-
REMOVE LOWER ARM
Step 3: (a) Remove the bolt holding the lower arm to the body and remove the lower arm. (b) Remove the strut rod cushion, collar and retainer from the lower arm.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension · Strut Rod
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p377 OEM manual
-
TORQUE LOWER ARM HOLDING NUT
Torque the lower arm holding nut to 1,350 kg-cm (98 ft-lb, 132 N·m).
-
INSPECT REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Inspect rear wheel alignment after lower arm holding nut torque is applied.
-
INSTALLATION OF STRUT ROD — INSTALL REAR SUSPENSION ARM No.1
Install the retainers, cushions, collar and suspension arm No.1 to the strut rod with the nut as shown. Install the nut to the bolt end. Do not misinstall the front and rear cushions. Temporarily install the strut rod holding bolt and nut and cushion to the body.
- Install the nut to the bolt end.
- Do not misinstall the front and rear cushions.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension · Strut Rod / Suspension Arm
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p378 OEM manual
-
INSTALL WHEEL AND LOWER VEHICLE
Rock the vehicle up and down to stabilize the suspension.
-
TIGHTEN STRUT ROD INSTALLATION NUT
Tighten the strut rod installation nut of the lower arm side. Torque: 1,200 kg-cm (87 ft-lb, 118 N·m)
-
TIGHTEN STRUT ROD INSTALLATION BOLT
Tighten the strut rod installation bolt of the body side. Torque: 1,200 kg-cm (87 ft-lb, 118 N·m)
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension · Suspension Arm No.1
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p379 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF SUSPENSION ARM
See page SA-69
-
INSTALL TIE ROD END AND SUSPENSION ARM TO TIE ROD TUBE
(a) Install the tie adjustting tube, tie rod adjsuting tube nuts, tie rod end and rear suspension arm No.2. tie rod tube. (b) Adjust the rear suspension arm No.2. (c) Temporarily tighten the tie rod adjusting tube nut. HINT: Fully tighten after adjusting the rear wheel alignment.
-
INSTALLATION OF SUSPENSION ARM
See page SA-69. 1. INSTALL SUSPENSION ARM TO BODY: Temporarily connect the suspension arm to the body with the bolt. 2. INSTALL SUSPENSION ARM TO REAR AXLE CARRIER: Install the suspension arm to the rear axle carrier with the bolt and nut. Torque: 1,050 kg-cm (76 ft-lb, 103 N·m). 3. INSTALL WHEEL AND LOWER VEHICLE: (a) Install the wheel and lower the vehicle. (b) Bounce the vehicle up and down to stabilize the suspension. 4. TORQUE SUSPENSION ARM HOLDING BOLT: Torque: 1,050 kg-cm (76 ft-lb, 103 N·m). 5. INSPECT REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT: See page SA-6.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p381 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT EXHAUST PIPE MOUNTING FROM REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER
Remove the two exhaust pipe mounting installation bolts.
-
DISCONNECT REAR ENGINE MOUNT FROM REAR SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER
Remove the three installation bolts of the rear engine mounting.
-
REMOVE SUSPENSION CROSSMEMBER MOUNTING BOLTS
Hold the rear suspension crossmember with a jack. Remove the four bolts, then remove the rear suspension crossmember.
-
REMOVE STABILIZER BAR
Lift down the crossmember until the front side bolt of the stabilizer bar bracket can be removed. Be careful not to damage the exhaust pipe by shoving with the stabilizer bar. Remove the two bolts and two nuts. Remove the stabilizer bar with brackets. Remove the brackets and cushions from the stabilizer bar.
SUSPENSION AND AXLE · Rear Suspension · Lateral Control Rod
Suspension & axle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p386 OEM manual
-
REMOVE ENGINE LATERAL CONTROL ROD
(a) Remove the engine lateral control rod with the No.1 and No.2 brackets. (b) Remove the engine lateral control rod from the engine No.1 lateral control rod brackets.
-
DISASSEMBLE ENGINE LATERAL CONTROL ROD
Remove the following parts: Nut, Three retainers, Two cushions, No.2 bracket.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p388 OEM manual
-
REPLACE PARTS PROPERLY
Care must be taken to replace each part properly as it could affect the performance of the brake system and result in a driving hazard. Replace the parts with parts of the same part number of equivalent.
-
KEEP PARTS AND AREA CLEAN
It is very important to keep parts and the area clean when repairing the brake system.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Check and Adjustments
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p392 OEM manual
-
CHECK THAT PEDAL RESERVE DISTANCE IS CORRECT, AS SHOWN
Release the parking brake. With the engine running, depress the pedal and measure the pedal reserve distance, as shown. Pedal reserve distance from asphalt sheet at 50 kg (110.2 lb, 490 N): More than 117 mm (4.61 in.). If the reserve distance is incorrect, troubleshoot the brake system.
-
OPERATIONAL TEST OF BRAKE BOOSTER — OPERATING CHECK
(a) Depress the brake pedal several times with the engine off and check that there is no change in the pedal reserve distance. (b) Depress the brake pedal and start the engine. If the pedal goes down slightly, operation is normal.
-
OPERATIONAL TEST OF BRAKE BOOSTER — AIR TIGHTNESS
(a) Start the engine and stop it after one or two minutes. Depress the brake pedal several times slowly. If the pedal goes down the farthest the first time, but gradually rises after the second or third time, the booster is air tight. (b) Depress the brake pedal while the engine is running, and stop the engine with the pedal depressed. If there is no change in the pedal reserve travel after holding the pedal for thirty seconds, the booster is air tight.
-
BLEEDING OF BRAKE SYSTEM — GENERAL NOTICE
If any work is done on the brake system or if air in the brake lines is suspected, bleed the system of air.
- Do not let brake fluid remain on a painted surface. Wash it off immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Checks and Adjustments
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p393 OEM manual
-
BLEED BRAKE LINE
Procedure to bleed air from the brake line.
-
CHECK FLUID LEVEL IN RESERVOIR TANK
Check the fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Fluid: SAEJ 1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT3
BRAKE SYSTEM · Master Cylinder · Inspection and Assembly
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p398 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CYLINDER BORE FOR RUST OR SCORING
Inspect the cylinder bore for rust or scoring.
-
INSPECT CYLINDER FOR WEAR OR DAMAGE
Inspect the cylinder for wear or damage. If necessary, clean or replace the cylinder. HINT: Clean the disassembled parts with compressed air.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Front Brake · PD51 DISC (For 5S-FE)
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p411 OEM manual
-
PAD WEAR INDICATOR CHECK HINT
If a squealing noise is made by the front brakes while driving, check the pad wear indicator. If there is evidence of the indicator contacting the rotor disc, the brake pad should be replaced.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Description
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p434 OEM manual
-
ABS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ABS is a brake system which controls the wheel cylinder hydraulic pressure of all four wheels during sudden braking and braking on slippery road surfaces, preventing the wheels from locking. This ABS provides the following benefits: (1) Enables steering round and obstacle with a greater degree of certainly even when panic braking. (2) Enables stopping in a panic brake while keeping effect upon stability and steerability to minimum, even on curves.
-
ABS FUNCTION
The function of the ABS is to help maintain directional stability and vehicle steerability on most road conditions. However, the system cannot prevent the vehicle from skidding if the cornering speed limit is exceeded.
-
ABS MALFUNCTION HANDLING
In case a malfunction occurs, a diagnosis function and fail-safe system have been adopted for the ABS to increase serviceability.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Connectors
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p436 OEM manual
-
ABS ACTUATOR CONNECTOR A PIN ASSIGNMENTS
6-pin connector. Pin 1: MR, Pin 2: SR, Pin 4: GND, Pin 5: R-, Pin 6: WA
-
ABS ACTUATOR CONNECTOR B PIN ASSIGNMENTS
6-pin connector. Pin 2: AST, Pin 3: MT, Pin 4: SFR, Pin 5: (center), Pin 6: SRR, lower: SFL
-
ABS ACTUATOR CONNECTOR C PIN ASSIGNMENTS
2-pin connector. Pin 1: +BM, Pin 2: +BS
-
FRONT SPEED SENSOR (LH) CONNECTOR
2-pin connector. Pin 1: FL+, Pin 2: FL-
-
FRONT SPEED SENSOR (RH) CONNECTOR
2-pin connector. Pin 1: FR+, Pin 2: FR-
-
REAR SPEED SENSOR (LH) CONNECTOR
2-pin connector. Pin 2: RL+, Pin 1: RL-
-
REAR SPEED SENSOR (RH) CONNECTOR
2-pin connector. Pin 2: RR+, Pin 1: RR-
-
ABS ECU CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS
42-pin connector. Upper row (left to right): Pin 29: SFL, Pin 28: SR, Pin 27: GND, Pin 26: R-, Pin 25: FL+, Pin 24: FR-, Pin 20: MT, Pin 18: SFR, Pin 17: TS, Pin 8: STP, Pin 6: RR+, Pin 5: RL-, Pin 1: IG. Lower row (left to right): Pin 42: SRR, Pin 41: GND, Pin 40: MR, Pin 39: FSS, Pin 38: FL-, Pin 37: FR+, Pin 32: TC, Pin 31: AST, Pin 16: PKB, Pin 15: WA, Pin 14: RR-, Pin 13: RL+, Pin 12: RSS, Pin 10: EX (★ For 3S-GTE), Pin 9: BAT. Note: ★ EX pin 10 is for 3S-GTE only.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Diagnosis System
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p437 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If a malfunction occurs, the system will identify the problem and the ECU will store the codes for the trouble items. At the same time, the system informs the driver of a malfunction via the "ABS" warning light in the combination meter. To identify the trouble by the number of blinks (diagnostic code) of the warning light turn on the ignition switch, disconnect the service connector, and use SST to connect Tc and E1 of the check connector. In the event of two codes, that having the smallest number (code) will be identified first. HINT: The warning light does not show the diagnostic codes while the vehicle is running.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Troubleshooting
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p441 OEM manual
-
Troubleshooting — ABS Warning Light and Brake Working Problems
Troubleshooting table mapping symptoms to diagnostic procedure numbers. 'ABS' warning light symptoms: (1) Always comes on after ignition switch is turned on → No.1; (2) Does not come on for 3 seconds after ignition switch on → No.2; (3) Comes on and off → No.3; (4) Comes on while running → No.1. Brake working symptoms: Brakes pull → No.4; Braking inefficient → No.4; ABS operates at ordinary braking → No.4; ABS operates just before stopping at ordinary braking → No.4; Brake pedal pulsates abnormally while ABS is operating → No.4; Skidding noise occurs while ABS working (ABS works inefficiently) → No.5.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Diagnostic Flowchart
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p442 OEM manual
-
ECU CONNECTOR CHECK
Is connector of ECU properly connected? And are all terminals in the connector? If NO: Faulty connector.
-
POWER CIRCUIT CHECK
Is there 10-16 V between terminal IG on ECU wire harness side connector and body ground? (Ignition switch on) If NO: Faulty power circuit.
-
WARNING LIGHT CHECK WITH CONNECTORS DISCONNECTED
Does warning light go off when both the ECU connector and service connector are disconnected? (Ignition switch on) If NO (Come on): Short circuit in wire harness between ECU terminal WA and actuator terminal WA. If YES (Goes off): Faulty ECU.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Diagnostic Flowchart 2
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p443 OEM manual
-
ABS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON FOR 3 SECONDS AFTER IGNITION SWITCH ON
Diagnostic flowchart for condition 2: ABS warning light does not come on for 3 seconds after ignition switch on. Step 1: Disconnect service connector and ground terminal WA of the female side connector with ignition switch on. If warning light does NOT come on → Bulb burned out or open circuit in wire harness between warning light and actuator terminal WA. If YES → Disconnect connectors from ECU and actuator, and ground terminal WA of ECU wire harness side connector with ignition switch on. If warning light does NOT come on → Open circuit in wire harness between computer terminal WA and warning light. If YES → With ignition switch off, disconnect actuator connectors, and check continuity between terminal WA and AST on actuator side. Reverse tester leads and check again. If there is NOT one way continuity between terminals → Short circuit in actuator inside diode. If YES → Faulty ECU. HINT: If the diode is short-circuited, a malfunction ECU terminal WA will occur. When inspecting the terminal, connect the ECU connecter and disconnect actuator connectors and service connector. Then turn the ignition switch on, and check that the warning light goes on. If it does, the ECU terminal is OK.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Diagnosis
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p444 OEM manual
-
SYMPTOM 3 — ABS WARNING LIGHT COMES ON AND OFF
Check for short circuit in wire harness between terminal Tc and E1 or Ts and E1 of check connector.
-
SYMPTOM 4 — BRAKES PULL / BRAKING INEFFICIENT / ABS OPERATES AT ORDINARY BRAKING / ABS OPERATES JUST BEFORE STOPPING AT ORDINARY BRAKING / BRAKE PEDAL PULSATES ABNORMALLY WHILE ABS WORKING
Follow diagnostic flowchart: (1) Disconnect service connector and connect terminals Tc and E1 of check connector (See page BR-51). (2) Does warning light show the diagnostic normal code? (Ignition on) — NO: See diagnostic code (See page BR-53). YES: proceed. (3) Try speed sensor diagnosis system. Is sensor signal level OK? (See page BR-61) — NO: Inspect speed sensor, and replace if necessary. YES: proceed. (4) Try speed sensor diagnosis system. Is sensor signal change OK? (See page BR-61) — NO: Inspect sensor rotor, and replace if necessary. YES: proceed. (5) Are each speed sensor installed in place? And are each installation bolts tightened securely? — NO: Speed sensor installation faulty. YES: proceed. (6) Is there foreign material or ferric chips on the sensor tip? — YES: Clean chips from the speed sensor. NO: proceed. (7) Disconnect connector from ECU, inspect continuity between each speed sensor terminals on wire harness side (See page BR-67). Continued on page BR-59.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Diagnostic Flowchart
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p445 OEM manual
-
ABS DIAGNOSTIC FLOWCHART (Continued from BR-58)
Step 1: Check if any abnormal change occurs in continuity when the connectors or wire harness of the speed sensor and intermediate connectors are twisted or bent. If YES (Abnormal change) → Faulty wire harness. If NO (No change) → Proceed to next step. Step 2: Inspect the actuator operation (See page BR-67). Step 3: Is actuator operation OK? If NO → Faulty actuator. If YES → Replace ECU.
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) · Diagnostic Flowchart 5
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p446 OEM manual
-
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WORKS INEFFICIENTLY — DIAGNOSTIC FLOWCHART 5
Step 1: Disconnect service connector and connect terminals Tc and E1 of check connector (See page BR-51). Step 2: Does warning light show the diagnostic normal code with ignition switch on? If NO, see diagnostic code (See page BR-53). If YES, continue. Step 3: Is there battery voltage between ECU terminal STP and body ground when depressing brake pedal? If NO, open circuit in stop light switch and/or wire harness. If YES, inspect the actuator operation (See page BR-67).
BRAKE SYSTEM · Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Brakes
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p449 OEM manual
-
ABS DIAGNOSTIC CODE BLINK PATTERN
The first number of blinks will equal the first digit of a two digit diagnostic code. After a 1.5 second pause, the 2nd number of blinks will equal the 2nd number of a two digit code. If there are two or more codes, there will be a 2.5 second pause between each code, and then indication will begin again after a 4.0 second pause, continuing in order from the smaller value up to the larger one. Each blink ON/OFF cycle is 0.12s on and 0.12s off.
STEERING · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p463 OEM manual
-
PRECAUTIONS — PARTS REPLACEMENT
Care must be taken to replace parts properly because they could affect the performance of the steering system and result in a driving hazard.
-
PRECAUTIONS — AIRBAG (USA)
The steering wheel pad has an airbag built in, so take all due precautions when handling it. For more details, see the SRS AIRBAG section.
STEERING · Steering Column
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p467 OEM manual
-
INSTALL WHEEL PAD — TORX SCREW ENGAGEMENT
Install the wheel pad after confirming that the circumference groove of the torx screws is caught on the screw case.
-
TIGHTEN FOUR TORX SCREWS
Using a torx wrench, tighten the four screws to specified torque.
-
MAKE SURE WHEEL PAD IS INSTALLED TO SPECIFIED TORQUE
Make sure the wheel pad is installed to the specified torque.
-
REPLACE WHEEL PAD IF DROPPED OR DAMAGED
If the wheel pad has been dropped, or there are cracks, dents or other defects in the case or connector, replace the wheel pad with a new one.
-
PREVENT WIRING INTERFERENCE DURING WHEEL PAD INSTALLATION
When installing the wheel pad, take care that the wirings do not interfere with other parts and are not pinched between other parts.
-
CHECK STEERING WHEEL CENTER POINT AFTER INSTALLING STEERING COLUMN
Check steering wheel center point after installing steering column.
STEERING · Steering Column · Removal / Inspection and Replacement
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p471 OEM manual
-
REMOVE MAIN SHAFT
Step 12 of steering column removal procedure.
STEERING · Steering Column · Inspection / Assembly
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p472 OEM manual
-
INSPECT UPPER BEARING
Check the upper bearing rotation condition and check for abnormal noise.
-
INSPECT KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID (A/T)
Inspect key interlock solenoid. See page AT-165.
-
INSTALL BUSHING IN COLUMN TUBE
Align the holes of the tube and projections of a new bushing, and insert the bushing in the column tube. Then install the snap ring.
STEERING · Manual Steering Gear Housing
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p478 OEM manual
-
(CANADA) DISCONNECT UNIVERSAL JOINT
Step 1 of Canada-specific removal procedure for manual steering gear housing.
-
(CANADA) DISCONNECT TIE ROD ENDS
Step 2 of Canada-specific removal procedure: remove cotter pin and nut, then using SST 09628-62011, disconnect the tie rod end from the knuckle arm.
-
(CANADA) CHECK STEERING WHEEL CENTER POINT
Step 3 of Canada-specific procedure.
-
(CANADA) CHECK TOE-IN
Step 4 of Canada-specific procedure. See page SA-4.
STEERING · Power Steering · Description
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p488 OEM manual
-
EHPS (Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering) — Description
In conventional and ordinary hydraulically-controlled power steering, hydraulic pressure needed for control is generated when the pump is turned by the engine. In the EHPS, the pump is turned by an electric motor. The ECU controls the voltage acting on the pump motor according to the movement of the steering wheel and the vehicle speed. The pump motor speed is changed accordingly to modulate the hydraulic pressure being generated in the pump.
-
NEUTRAL (STRAIGHT-AHEAD) POSITION
Fluid from the pump is sent to the control valve. If the control valve is in the neutral position, all the fluid will flow through the control valve into the relief port and back to the pump. At this time, hardly any pressure is created and because the pressure on the cylinder piston is equal on both sides, the piston will not move in either direction.
-
WHEN TURNING
When the steering main shaft is turned in either direction, the control valve also moves, closing one of the fluid passages. The other passage then opens wider, causing a change in fluid flow volume and, at the same time, pressure is created. Consequently, a pressure difference occurs between both sides of the piston and the piston moves in the direction of the lower pressure so that the fluid in the cylinder is forced back to the pump through the control valve.
STEERING · Power Steering · Description
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p489 OEM manual
-
SERVICE HINT — ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
Troubles with the power steering system are usually concerned with hard steering due to the fact that there is no assist. Before attempting repairs, determine whether the trouble lies with the pump or with the gear housing using a pressure gauge. If the fault lies with the pump, the same symptoms will generally occur whether the steering wheel is turned fully to the right or left. If the fault lies with the control valve, there will generally be a difference between the amount of assist when the steering wheel is turned left and right, causing harder steering. If the piston seal of the power cylinder is worn, there will be a loss of fluid pressure whether the steering wheel is turned right or left and the symptoms will be the same for both. Before performing an on-vehicle inspection, confirm that the power steering system is completely free of any air. Check for air in the system by observing if there is a change of fluid level in the reservoir tank when the steering wheel is turned fully to the right or left. Air in the system will sometimes result in an abnormal noise occurring from the pump or gear housing when the steering wheel is fully turned in either direction. This on-vehicle inspection must be performed every time to ensure that the power steering system is working properly after overhauling or replacing the pump or gear housing.
-
GEAR HOUSING — VISE SECURING
If the gear housing is secured directly in a vise during overhaul, there is danger of deforming it, so always first secure it in the SST provided (rack and pinion steering rack housing stand) before placing it in the vise.
-
GEAR HOUSING — OIL SEALS
The oil seals on both sides of the power cylinder are for the prevention of leakage of the high pressure fluid which acts on the piston. Always use new oil seals when reassembling and be very careful not to scratch or damage them. Because of the high pressure, even the slightest scratch will cause fluid leakage, resulting in an inoperative power steering system.
- Even the slightest scratch on oil seals will cause fluid leakage and an inoperative power steering system.
-
GEAR HOUSING — RACK SLIDING PORTION
Be very careful not to scratch the sliding portion of the rack which makes contact with the oil seals. When removing the rack ends from the rack, it is very easy to cause a burr when holding the tip of the rack with a wrench. Therefore, before assembling the rack, first check the tip for burrs and remove any with an oil stone.
- Holding the tip of the rack with a wrench can easily cause a burr — always check and remove burrs with an oil stone before assembly.
STEERING · Power Steering · Description
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p490 OEM manual
-
TEFLON RINGS FOR PISTON AND CONTROL VALVE
Teflon rings are used for the piston and control valve. These teflon rings are highly durable against wear, but if it is necessary to replace them, be careful not to stretch the new ones. After installing a teflon ring into its groove, snug it down into the groove before assembly of the cylinder or housing to prevent possible damage.
-
PRELOAD IMPORTANCE
As with the rack and pinion type steering, preload is very important. If the preload is not correct, it could result in such trouble as steering wheel play or shimmy or lack of durability, so always make sure that it is correct.
STEERING · Power Steering · On-Vehicle Inspection
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p491 OEM manual
-
BLEEDING OF POWER STEERING SYSTEM — CHECK FLUID LEVEL IN RESERVOIR TANK
Check the fluid level and add fluid if necessary. HINT: Check that the fluid level is within the HOT LEVEL of the dipstick. If the fluid is cold, check that it is within the COLD LEVEL of the dipstick. NOTICE: Use only TOYOTA PS fluid EH or equivalent. Otherwise, you may not get expected power assist.
-
BLEEDING OF POWER STEERING SYSTEM — START ENGINE AND TURN STEERING WHEEL FROM LOCK TO LOCK THREE OR FOUR TIMES
With the engine speed below 1,000 rpm, turn the steering wheel to left or right full lock and keep it there for 2–3 seconds, then turn the wheel to the reverse full lock and keep it there for 2–3 seconds.
STEERING · Power Steering (On-Vehicle Inspection) · Oil Pressure Check
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p492 OEM manual
-
CHECK THAT FLUID IN RESERVOIR IS NOT FOAMY OR CLOUDY AND DOES NOT RISE OVER MAXIMUM WHEN ENGINE IS STOPPED
Measure the fluid level with the engine running. Stop the engine and measure the fluid level. Maximum rise: 5 mm (0.20 in.)
STEERING · Power Steering (Power Steering Pump) · Removal and Installation
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p494 OEM manual
-
USE TOYOTA POWER STEERING FLUID EH
When supplementing the power steering fluid, use TOYOTA POWER STEERING FLUID EH or equivalent which is exclusively for EHPS use.
-
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE POWER STEERING PUMP
The power steering pump is not to be disassembled, so if a malfunction occurs, replace it as an assembly.
STEERING · Power Steering (Electronic Control System) · Electronic Control System
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p514 OEM manual
-
PRECAUTION
Do not open the cover or the case of the ECU and various computers unless absolutely necessary. If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.
STEERING · Power Steering · Diagnosis System
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p516 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
When a malfunction exists, the corresponding code number is stored in memory until the ignition switch is turned off. In case of a malfunction other than one identified by code No. 21, the P/S warning light is turned on to warn the driver. By connecting terminals Tc and E1 of the check connector, malfunction codes that are stored in memory can be displayed by the way the light blinks.
-
STEERING SENSOR CHECK
Steps: (a) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (b) Using SST 09843-18020, connect terminals Tc and E1 of the check connector. NOTICE: Never make a mistake with the terminal connection position as this will cause a malfunction. (c) Check that the warning light condition changes according to the steering angle and the vehicle speed as shown in the table: Below 20 km/h (12 mph) — Less than 36 degrees: BLINK; More than 36 degrees: OFF. Above 20 km/h (12 mph) — Less than 36 degrees: ON; More than 36 degrees: OFF. HINT: The steering angle is defined as 0° at the steering position at which the ignition switch and terminals Tc and E1 are turned on simultaneously. This check is not performed when a diagnostic code has been stored in memory.
STEERING · Power Steering · Inspection of Electronic Control Components
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p520 OEM manual
-
POWER STEERING DRIVER — INSPECT DRIVER SIDE CONNECTOR CONTINUITY
Inspect continuity between terminals on the driver side connector. M– to M+ shows continuity (diode direction). PGND column has no specified continuity shown.
-
POWER STEERING DRIVER — INSPECT WIRE HARNESS SIDE CONNECTORS
Disconnect the connectors and inspect the connectors on the wire harness side. Check: PGND–Ground (Constant) = Continuity; M+–M– (Constant) = Continuity; IGB–Ground with Ignition switch OFF = 0 V; IGB–Ground with Ignition switch ON = Battery voltage.
SRS AIRBAG · General Description
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p524 OEM manual
-
CHECK DIAGNOSTIC CODES BEFORE DISCONNECTING BATTERY
Malfunction symptoms of the airbag system are difficult to confirm, so the diagnostic codes become the most important source of information when troubleshooting. When troubleshooting the airbag system, always inspect the diagnostic codes before disconnecting the battery (See page AB-24).
-
WAIT 20 SECONDS AFTER IGNITION LOCK AND BATTERY DISCONNECT BEFORE STARTING WORK
Work must be started after approx. 20 seconds or longer from the time the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery. The airbag system is equipped with a back-up power source so that if work is started within 20 seconds of disconnecting the negative (–) terminal cable of the battery, the airbag may be deployed. When the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery, memory of the clock and audio systems will be cancelled. So before starting work, make a record of the contents memorized by the audio memory system. Then when work is finished, reset the audio system as before and adjust the clock. To avoid erasing the memory of each memory system, never use a back-up power supply from outside the vehicle.
- If work is started within 20 seconds of disconnecting the negative (–) terminal cable of the battery, the airbag may be deployed.
-
INSPECT SENSORS AND STEERING WHEEL PAD AFTER MINOR COLLISION
Even in cases of a minor collision where the airbag does not deploy, the front airbag sensors and the steering wheel pad should be inspected (See page AB-11).
-
USE NEW PARTS ONLY — DO NOT REUSE PARTS FROM ANOTHER VEHICLE
Never use airbag parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts, replace them with new parts.
-
REMOVE AIRBAG SENSORS BEFORE REPAIRS INVOLVING SHOCKS
Before repairs, remove the airbag sensors if shocks are likely to be applied to the sensors during repairs.
-
DISPOSE OF CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY AS TOXIC WASTE
The center airbag sensor assembly contains mercury. After performing replacement, do not destroy the old part. When scrapping the vehicle or replacing the center airbag sensor assembly itself, remove the center airbag sensor assembly and dispose of it as toxic waste.
-
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE FRONT AIRBAG SENSORS, CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY OR STEERING WHEEL PAD
Never disassemble and repair the front airbag sensors, center airbag sensor assembly or steering wheel pad in order to reuse it.
-
REPLACE DROPPED OR DAMAGED AIRBAG COMPONENTS
If the front airbag sensors, center airbag sensor assembly or steering wheel pad have been dropped, or if there are cracks, dents or other defects in the case, bracket or connector, replace them with new ones.
-
DO NOT EXPOSE AIRBAG COMPONENTS TO HOT AIR OR FLAMES
Do not expose the front airbag sensors, center airbag sensor assembly or steering wheel pad directly to hot air or flames.
-
USE HIGH-IMPEDANCE VOLT/OHMMETER FOR ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING
Use a volt/ohmmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum) for troubleshooting of the electrical circuit.
-
FOLLOW INFORMATION LABELS ON AIRBAG COMPONENTS
Information labels are attached to the periphery of the airbag components. Follow the instructions on the notices.
-
PERFORM AIRBAG WARNING LIGHT CHECK AFTER WORK IS COMPLETED
After work on the airbag system is completed, perform the airbag warning light check (See page AB-29).
SRS AIRBAG · General Description
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p525 OEM manual
-
FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR — Never reuse after deployment
Never reuse the front airbag sensors involved in a collision when the airbag has deployed. Replace both the left and right airbag sensors.
-
FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR — Arrow orientation
Install the front airbag sensor with the arrow on the sensor facing toward the front of the vehicle.
-
FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR — Anti-rust set bolts and nuts
The front airbag sensor set bolts and nuts have been anti-rust treated. When the sensor is removed, always replace the set bolt and nut with new ones.
-
FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR — Electrical connection check mechanism
The front airbag sensor is equipped with an electrical connection check mechanism. Be sure to lock this mechanism securely when connecting the connector. If the connector is not securely locked, a malfunction code will be detected by the diagnosis system (See page AB-9).
-
SPIRAL CABLE (in COMBINATION SWITCH) — Neutral position
The steering wheel must be fitted correctly to the steering column with the spiral cable at the neutral position, otherwise cable disconnection and other troubles may result. Refer to page AB-16 of this manual concerning correct steering wheel installation.
-
STEERING WHEEL PAD (with AIRBAG) — Pad placement
When removing the steering wheel pad or handling a new steering wheel pad, it should be placed with the pad top surface facing up. In this case, the twin-lock type connector lock lever should be in the locked state and care should be taken to place it so the connector will not be damaged. Do not store a steering wheel pad on top of another one. Storing the pad with its metallic surface up may lead to a serious accident if the airbag inflates for some reason.
- Storing the pad with its metallic surface up may lead to a serious accident if the airbag inflates for some reason.
-
STEERING WHEEL PAD (with AIRBAG) — Never measure squib resistance
Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. This may cause the airbag to deploy, which is very dangerous.
- Never measure the resistance of the airbag squib. This may cause the airbag to deploy, which is very dangerous.
SRS AIRBAG · General Description
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p526 OEM manual
-
GREASE AND CLEANING RESTRICTION
Grease should not be applied to the steering wheel pad and the pad should not be cleaned with detergents of any kind.
-
STORAGE OF STEERING WHEEL PAD
Store the steering wheel pad where the ambient temperature remains below 93°C (200°F), without high humidity and away from electrical noise.
-
ELECTRIC WELDING PRECAUTION
When using electric welding, first disconnect the airbag connector (yellow color and 2 pins) under the steering column near the combination switch connector before starting work.
-
DISPOSAL OF VEHICLE OR STEERING WHEEL PAD
When disposing of a vehicle or the steering wheel pad alone, the airbag should be deployed using an SST before disposal (See page AB-82). Perform the operation in a place away from electrical noise.
-
CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
The connectors to the center airbag sensor assembly should be connected or disconnected with the sensor mounted on the floor. If the connectors are connected or disconnected while the center airbag sensor assembly is not mounted to the floor, it could cause undesired ignition of the airbag system.
-
WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
The airbag system wire harness is integrated with the cowl wire harness assembly and luggage compartment wire harness assembly. The wires for the airbag wire harness are encased in a yellow corrugated tube. All the connectors for the system are also a standard yellow color. If the airbag system wire harness becomes disconnected or the connector becomes broken due to an accident, etc., repair or replace it as shown on page AB-21.
SRS AIRBAG · Description
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p527 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbag, together with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver. In a collision, the airbag sensors detect the shock, and if the front-to-rear shock is greater than a specified value, an airbag stored in the steering wheel pad is inflated instantaneously to help reduce the shock to the driver.
-
LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
Diagram identifying the location of SRS airbag system components: Front Airbag Sensor RH (front right of engine bay), Front Airbag Sensor LH (front left of engine bay), Airbag Warning Light (instrument cluster), Spiral Cable (steering column), Steering Wheel Pad with Airbag (steering wheel center), Center Airbag Sensor Assembly (center of vehicle floor/tunnel area).
SRS AIRBAG · Description · Wiring Diagram
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p528 OEM manual
-
WIRING DIAGRAM
Shows the SRS airbag system wiring including: Ignition Switch (ACC, RAD-CIG, GAUGE, ON, AM2), ECU-B, Back-Up Power Source, Power Source, Safety Circuit, Safing Sensors (x2), Spiral Cable, Squib (in Steering Wheel Pad), Memory Circuit, Diagnosis Circuit, Center Airbag Sensor, Ignition Control & Drive Circuit, Front Airbag Sensors (LH and RH), Airbag Warning Light, Check Connector, and Battery.
-
CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY CONNECTORS
Three connectors (A, B, C) with terminals as follows. Connector A: Pin 1 = -SL (LH Front Airbag Sensor negative), Pin 2 = +SL (LH Front Airbag Sensor positive). Connector B: Pin 1 = IG2 (Power Source AM2 Fuse), Pin 2 = IG1 (Power Source GAUGE Fuse), Pin 3 = ACC (Power Source RAD-CIG Fuse), Pin 4 = +B (Battery ECU-B Fuse), Pin 5 = E2 (Ground), Pin 6 = LA (Airbag Warning Light), Pin 7 = D- (Squib negative), Pin 8 = D+ (Squib positive), Pin 9 = Tc (Diagnosis), Pin 10 = E1 (Ground). Connector C: Pin 1 = +SR (RH Front Airbag Sensor positive), Pin 2 = -SR (RH Front Airbag Sensor negative). All connectors A, B, C: Terminal A = Electrical Connection Check Mechanism, Terminal B = Electrical Connection Check Mechanism.
SRS AIRBAG · Operation · Function of Components
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p529 OEM manual
-
FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR
The front airbag sensors are mounted inside of the radiator upper support. The sensor unit is a mechanical type. When the sensor detects deceleration force above a predetermined limit in a collision, the contacts in the sensor make contact, sending a signal to the center airbag sensor assembly. The sensor cannot be disassembled.
-
SPIRAL CABLE (in COMBINATION SWITCH)
A spiral cable is used as an electrical joint from the vehicle body side to the steering wheel.
-
STEERING WHEEL PAD (with AIRBAG)
The inflater and bag of the airbag system are stored in the steering wheel pad and cannot be disassembled. The inflater contains a squib, igniter charge, gas generant, etc., and inflates the bag in case of a frontal collision.
-
AIRBAG WARNING LIGHT
The airbag warning light is located on the combination meter. It goes on to alert the driver of trouble in the system when a malfunction is detected in the center airbag sensor assembly self-diagnosis. In normal operating condition when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or ON position, the light goes on for about 6 seconds and then goes off.
-
CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
The center airbag sensor assembly is mounted on the floor inside the center cluster. The center airbag sensor assembly consists of a center airbag sensor, safing sensors, ignition control and drive circuit, diagnosis circuit, etc. It receives signals from the airbag sensors, judges whether the airbag must be activated or not and diagnoses system malfunctions.
SRS AIRBAG · Operation · Airbag Connectors
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p530 OEM manual
-
AIRBAG CONNECTORS — OVERVIEW
All connectors in the airbag system are colored yellow. Connectors having special functions and specifically designed for airbags are used in the locations shown to ensure high reliability. These connectors use durable gold-plated terminals.
-
TERMINAL TWIN-LOCK MECHANISM
Each connector has a two-piece construction consisting of a housing and a spacer. This design secures the locking of the terminal by two locking devices (the spacer and the lance) to prevent terminals from coming out. Applies to Connectors 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
-
AIRBAG ACTIVATION PREVENTION MECHANISM
Each connector contains a short spring plate. When the connector is disconnected, the short spring plate automatically connects the power source and grounding terminals of the squib. Applies to Connectors 1, 4, 5.
-
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION CHECK MECHANISM
Applies to Connectors 1, 2, 6.
-
CONNECTOR TWIN-LOCK MECHANISM
Applies to Connectors 4, 5.
SRS AIRBAG · Operation
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p531 OEM manual
-
Short Spring Plate Mechanism
When the connector is disconnected, the short spring plate turns ON, creating a closed circuit at the squib side. When the connector is connected, terminals engage and the short spring plate is held open. Connector (1) has a short spring plate on the female terminal side, but the operating principle is the same as connectors (4) and (5).
-
Electrical Connection Check Mechanism
This mechanism is designed to electrically check if connectors are connected correctly and completely. The electrical connection check mechanism is designed so that the connection detection pin connects with the diagnosis terminals when the connector housing lock is in the locked condition. In a half connection state, the connection detection pin does not contact the terminal for diagnosis. In a complete connection state, the connection detection pin contacts the terminal, completing the circuit through a resistor to the front airbag sensor. The illustration shows connector (6). Connectors (1) and (2) also have the same operating principle.
SRS AIRBAG · Operation
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p532 OEM manual
-
Connector Twin-Lock Mechanism
With this mechanism connectors (male and female connectors) are locked by two locking devices to increase connection reliability. If the primary lock is incomplete, ribs interfere and prevent the secondary lock. Three states: (1) Primary Lock Incomplete — Secondary Lock Prevented; (2) Primary Lock Complete — Secondary Lock Permitted; (3) Twin-Lock Completed.
-
Airbag Activation Condition
When the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision in the hatched area (Fig. 1) and the shock is larger than a predetermined level, the airbag is activated automatically. Safing sensors are designed to go on at a smaller deceleration rate than the front and center airbag sensors. As illustrated in Fig. 2, ignition is caused when current flows to the squib, which happens when a safing sensor and a front airbag sensor and/or the center airbag sensor go on simultaneously.
-
Airbag Inflation and Deflation Sequence
When a deceleration force acts on the sensors, it causes the squib to ignite. Gas is then generated, increasing the pressure inside the bag rapidly. The inflated bag breaks open the steering wheel pad. Bag inflation then ends, and the gas is discharged through discharge holes provided behind the bag. The bag becomes deflated as a result.
SRS AIRBAG · Inspection Items and Replacement Requirements · Front Airbag Sensor
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p534 OEM manual
-
HINT: STEERING WHEEL HORN BUTTON CONTACT PLATE
If the horn button contact plate of the steering wheel is deformed, never repair it. Always replace the steering wheel with a new one.
-
HINT: STEERING WHEEL PAD CLEARANCE
There should be no interference between the steering wheel pad and the steering wheel, and the clearance should be uniform all the way around when the new steering wheel pad is installed on the steering wheel.
-
REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
In the following cases, replace the steering wheel pad, steering wheel or spiral cable. CAUTION: For replacement of the steering wheel pad, see page AB-15, 'REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION' and be sure to follow the correct procedure. Replace if: the airbag has been deployed; the steering wheel pad or spiral cable has been found to be faulty in troubleshooting; the steering wheel pad, steering wheel or spiral cable has been found to be faulty during the check in item 1.-(b) or 2.-(b); the steering wheel pad has been dropped.
SRS AIRBAG · Inspection Items and Replacement Requirements
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p535 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS — FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR
In the following cases, replace the front airbag sensor: (1) If the airbag has been deployed in a collision (replace both the left and right airbag sensors). (2) If the front airbag sensor has been found to be faulty in troubleshooting. (3) If the front airbag sensor has been found to be faulty during the check in item 2. – (b). (4) If the front airbag sensor has been dropped. For replacement see page AB-17, 'REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION'.
-
CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY — INSPECTION ITEMS: VEHICLES NOT INVOLVED IN A COLLISION
Perform a diagnostic system check (See page AB-29).
-
CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY — INSPECTION ITEMS: VEHICLES INVOLVED IN A COLLISION (IF THE AIRBAG IS NOT DEPLOYED)
Perform a diagnostic system check (See page AB-29).
-
CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY — INSPECTION ITEMS: VEHICLES INVOLVED IN A COLLISION (IF THE AIRBAG IS DEPLOYED)
(a) Perform a diagnostic system check (See page AB-29). (b) Check the following items in the center airbag sensor assembly: Deformation of the bracket or case; Vinyl seat broken; Damage to the connector. NOTICE: If the center airbag sensor assembly interferes with any other parts, perform a check after repairs.
-
REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS — CENTER AIRBAG SENSOR ASSEMBLY
In the following cases, replace the center airbag sensor assembly: (1) If the center airbag sensor assembly has been found to be faulty in troubleshooting. (2) If the center airbag sensor assembly has been found to be faulty during the check in item 2. – (b). (3) If the center airbag sensor assembly has been dropped. For replacement see page AB-19, 'REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION'.
SRS AIRBAG · Inspection Items and Replacement Requirements · Wire Harness and Connector
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p536 OEM manual
-
WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR HINT
The airbag system wire harness is integrated with the cowl wire harness assembly and luggage compartment wire harness assembly. The wires for the airbag wire harness are encased in a yellow corrugated tube and all the connectors in the system are a standard yellow color.
-
INSPECTION ITEMS — VEHICLES NOT INVOLVED IN A COLLISION
Perform a diagnostic system check (See page AB-29).
-
INSPECTION ITEMS — VEHICLES INVOLVED IN A COLLISION
Perform a diagnostic system check (See page AB-29). Check if there is a break in any of the wires in the airbag system wire harness, or if conductors are exposed. Check if the airbag system wire harness connectors are cracked or chipped.
-
REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
In the following cases, replace the wire harness or connector: If any part of the airbag system wire harness or any connector has been found to be faulty in troubleshooting. If any part of the airbag system wire harness or any connector has been found to be faulty during the check in item 2. – (b) or (c). NOTICE: If the wire harness used in the airbag system is damaged, replace the whole wire harness assembly. When the connector to the front airbag sensors can be repaired alone (when there is no damage to the wire harness), use the repair wire specially designed for the purpose (See page AB-21).
SRS AIRBAG · Removal and Installation of Component Parts · Front Airbag Sensor
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p539 OEM manual
-
DO NOT DISCONNECT WIRING CONNECTOR WITH IGNITION ON OR ACC
If the wiring connector of the airbag system is disconnected with the ignition switch at ON or ACC, diagnostic codes will be recorded.
-
NEVER USE AIRBAG PARTS FROM ANOTHER VEHICLE
Never use airbag parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts, replace with new parts.
-
NEVER REUSE SENSOR AFTER COLLISION WITH DEPLOYMENT
Never reuse the sensor involved in a collision when the airbag has deployed.
-
NEVER REPAIR A SENSOR FOR REUSE
Never repair a sensor in order to reuse it.
SRS AIRBAG · Removal and Installation of Component Parts · Center Airbag Sensor Assembly
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p541 OEM manual
-
CAUTION: WAIT BEFORE STARTING WORK
Work must be started after approx. 20 seconds or longer from the time the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery (See page AB-2).
-
DO NOT OPEN ECU COVER OR CASE UNNECESSARILY
Do not open the cover or the case of the ECU and various computers unless absolutely necessary. If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.
-
NEVER USE AIRBAG PARTS FROM ANOTHER VEHICLE
Never use airbag parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts, replace with new parts.
-
NEVER REPAIR A SENSOR FOR REUSE
Never repair a sensor in order to reuse it.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · How To Proceed With Troubleshooting
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p546 OEM manual
-
CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS
Using the CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK SHEET (See page AB-28) for reference, ask the customer in as much detail as possible about the problem.
-
WARNING LIGHT CHECK
Check the airbag warning light. If the light remains on, a malfunction is stored in the center airbag sensor assembly, so proceed to step 3. If the airbag warning light is not on, a malfunction has occurred in the airbag warning light circuit, so perform troubleshooting for code 22. HINT: Code 22 is recorded when a malfunction occurs in the airbag warning light system. If an open malfunction occurs in the airbag warning light system, the airbag warning light does not light up, so that until the malfunction is repaired, the diagnostic codes (including code 22) cannot be confirmed.
-
DIAGNOSTIC CODE CHECK AND RECORDING
Check the diagnostic codes and make a note of any malfunction codes which are output. If a normal code is output, an abnormality in the power source circuit may have occurred, so perform troubleshooting for source voltage in step 8. If code 22 is output, skip steps 4 and 5 and proceed to step 7.
-
CLEARING OF MALFUNCTION CODE (EXCEPT CODE 41)
Clear the malfunction code. HINT: The malfunction code output in step 3 indicates that a malfunction has occurred in the circuit designated by the malfunction code, but does not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or whether it was in the past. Accordingly, it is necessary to find out the present condition of the malfunction occurrence by clearing the malfunction code and performing the diagnostic code check again. If this operation is neglected and troubleshooting is performed using only the malfunction code confirmed in step 3, isolating the problem component becomes difficult and invites mistaken diagnosis.
-
DIAGNOSTIC CODE CHECK AND RECORDING / SYMPTOM SIMULATION
After repeating ignition switch ON-OFF operation (ON: wait 20 secs., OFF: wait 20 secs.) 5 times, check the diagnostic code. If any code other than code 41 is output, the malfunction is still occurring, so proceed to step 7. If code 41 only is output, the following three cases are possible: (1) Intermittent trouble occurred previously, but it is now normal. (2) The problem has been corrected, but clearing of code 41 has been forgotten. (3) There is a malfunction in the circuit for code 41. Focusing on the circuit of the malfunction code stored in step 3, use the simulation method in step 6 in order to simulate the malfunction. If the malfunction occurs, proceed to step 7; if not, proceed to step 12.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p547 OEM manual
-
BATTERY RECONNECTION NOTICE
When connecting the battery after clearing the malfunction code, always do it with the ignition switch in LOCK position. When the battery has been reconnected, turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON position after at least 2 seconds have elapsed. If the battery is reconnected with the ignition switch in ACC or ON position, or the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON within 2 seconds of connecting the battery, it is possible that the diagnosis system will not operate normally.
-
DIAGNOSTIC CODE CHART [7]
Proceed to the appropriate flow chart in step [8] in accordance with the malfunction code found in step [5] or [6].
-
CIRCUIT INSPECTION [8] / REPAIR [9]
Find out if the problem lies in a sensor, actuator or wire harness and connector, and repair the problem. After the problem part is repaired, reinstall the disassembled parts. Do not start work until at least 20 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and the negative (-) terminal cable is disconnected. The following illustration for the CIRCUIT INSPECTION shows each connector for the circuit from the center airbag sensor assembly to the steering wheel pad (squib): (1) Center Airbag Sensor Assembly connector, (2) Spiral Cable connector, (3) Steering Wheel Pad (Squib) connector.
- If incorrect procedure is used, a malfunction may occur in the system or there is the danger that the airbag may be accidentally activated during the repair operation. Carefully read the GENERAL DESCRIPTION (See page AB-2) and the cautions for each operation, and perform repairs in the correct order using the correct methods.
-
CLEARING OF MALFUNCTION CODE (EXCEPT CODE 41) [10]
When all the malfunction codes found in steps [5] and [6] have been repaired, clear the malfunction codes.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p549 OEM manual
-
SRS AIRBAG TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHART
Step 1: Customer Problem Analysis (P. AB-28). Step 2: Warning Light Check (P. AB-29) — if Does Not Light Up, route to Step 12. Step 3: Diagnostic Code Check and Recording (P. AB-29) — if Normal Code, route to Step 12; if Malfunction Code, continue. Step 4: Clearing of Malfunction Code Except Code 41 (P. AB-31). Step 5: Diagnostic Code Check and Recording (P. AB-29) — if Only Code 41 Output, proceed to Step 6 (Symptom Simulation); if Output Other Than Code 41, proceed to Step 7. Step 6: Symptom Simulation (P. AB-32) — if Only Code 41 Output, route to Step 12; if Output Other Than Code 41, proceed to Step 7. Step 7: Diagnostic Code Chart (P. AB-34) — receives routing from Steps 5, 6, and also from Step 11 if Output Other Than Code 41. Step 8: Circuit Inspection (P. AB-35). Identification of Problem. Step 9: Repair. Step 10: Clearing of Malfunction Code Except Code 41 (P. AB-31). Step 11: Diagnostic Code Check (P. AB-29) — if Output Other Than Code 41, return to Step 7; if Only Code 41 Output, continue. Step 12: Clearing of Malfunction Code 41 Stored in Memory (P. AB-31) — receives routing from Steps 2 (Does Not Light Up), 3 (Normal Code), 6 (Only Code 41 Output), and 11 (Only Code 41 Output). Step 13: Confirmation Test. END.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Customer Problem Analysis Check Sheet
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p550 OEM manual
-
SRS AIRBAG System Check Sheet
A customer problem analysis form used to record vehicle identification (Customer Name, Registration No., Registration Year, Frame No., Date Vehicle Brought In, Odometer Reading), conditions at time of problem occurrence (Date of Problem Occurrence, Weather: Fine/Cloudy/Rainy/Snowy/Various Other, Outdoor Temperature: Hot/Warm/Cool/Cold, Vehicle Operation: Starting/Idling/Driving/Constant speed/Acceleration/Deceleration/Other, Condition of road), Details of Problem, Vehicle Inspection and Repair History Prior to Occurrence of Malfunction (Including Airbag System), and Diagnosis System Inspection results including Airbag Warning Light Inspection (1st Time and 2nd Time: Remains On / Sometimes Lights Up / Does Not Light Up) and Diagnostic Code Inspection (1st Time and 2nd Time: Normal Code / Malfunction Code with code number field).
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Diagnostic Codes
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p552 OEM manual
-
SOURCE VOLTAGE DROP HINT
When the airbag warning light remains lit up and the diagnostic code is the normal code, this means a source voltage drop. This malfunction is not stored in memory by the center airbag sensor assembly and if the power source voltage returns to normal, after approx. 10 seconds the airbag warning light will automatically go out.
-
CODE 22 RECORDING CONDITION
Code 22 is recorded when a malfunction occurs in the airbag warning light system. If an open malfunction occurs in the airbag warning light system, the airbag warning light does not light up, so that until the malfunction is repaired, the diagnostic codes (including code 22) cannot be confirmed.
-
CODES 11-31 CLEARING AND CODE 41 OUTPUT
When a malfunction occurs in the airbag system, malfunction codes 11 to 31 are output. After repairing the malfunction indicated by malfunction codes 11 to 31, codes 11 to 31 are cleared from the memory, but code 41 is output instead. Once the malfunction has been detected, the airbag warning light will remain lit up until code 41 is cleared, even though the malfunction has been repaired.
-
MULTIPLE CODES ORDER
When two or more codes are indicated, the lowest numbered code will appear first.
-
UNLISTED CODE
If a code not listed on the chart is displayed, then the center airbag sensor assembly is faulty.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Symptom Simulation
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p554 OEM manual
-
VIBRATION METHOD: CONNECTORS
When vibration seems to be the major cause. Slightly shake the connector vertically and horizontally. Inspection of connectors:
-
VIBRATION METHOD: WIRE HARNESS
Slightly shake the wire harness vertically and horizontally. The connector joint, fulcrum of the vibration, and body through portion are the major areas to be checked thoroughly.
-
VIBRATION METHOD: PARTS AND SENSORS
Apply vibration slightly by a finger to the part or sensor considered to be the problem cause and check if the malfunction will occur.
- Do not apply vibration to the center airbag sensor.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p555 OEM manual
-
HEAT METHOD: When the problem seems to occur when the suspect area is heated.
Heat the component that is likely the cause of the malfunction with a hair dryer or similar object. Check to see if the malfunction will occur.
- Do not heat to more than 60°C (140°F) (Temperature limit that the component can be touched with a hand.).
- Do not apply heat directly to part in the ECU.
-
WATER SPRINKLING METHOD: When the malfunction seems to occur on a rainy day or in a high-humidity condition.
Sprinkle water onto the vehicle and check to see if the malfunction will occur. HINT: If a vehicle is subject to water leakage, the leaked water may contaminate the ECU. When testing a vehicle with a water leakage problem, special caution must be paid.
- Never apply water directly onto the electronic components.
-
OTHER: When a malfunction seems to occur when electrical load is excessive.
Turn on all electrical loads including the heater blower, headlights, rear window defogger, etc. and check to see if the malfunction will occur.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Diagnostic Code Chart
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p556 OEM manual
-
NORMAL CODE WITH WARNING LIGHT LIT
When the airbag warning light remains lit up and the diagnostic code is the normal code, this means a source voltage drop.
-
CODE 22 RECORDING CONDITION
Code 22 is recorded when a malfunction occurs in the airbag warning light system. If an open malfunction occurs in the airbag warning light system, the airbag warning light does not light up, so that until the malfunction is repaired, the diagnostic codes (including code 22) cannot be confirmed.
-
CODE 41 BEHAVIOR
When a malfunction occurs in the airbag system, malfunction codes 11 to 31 are output. After repairing the malfunction indicated by malfunction codes 11 to 31, codes 11 to 31 are cleared from the memory, but code 41 is output instead. Once the malfunction has been detected, the airbag warning light will remain lit up until code 41 is cleared, even though the malfunction has been repaired.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Check center airbag sensor assembly
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p575 OEM manual
-
POST-INSPECTION NOTE
From the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal. To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Diagnostic Chart
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p588 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSTIC CHART — AIRBAG WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT LIGHT UP
Troubleshooting for this system is different for when the airbag warning light does not light up and for when diagnostic code 22 is output. Confirm the problem symptoms first before selecting the appropriate troubleshooting procedure. HINT: If airbag warning light does not light up, perform the following troubleshooting. Step 1: Check ECU-B fuse. If NG, go to step 6. If OK, proceed to step 2. Step 2: Check connection of center airbag sensor assembly connector. If NG, Repair. If OK, proceed to step 3. Step 3: Preparation. Proceed to step 4. Step 4: Check airbag warning light circuit. If NG, Repair airbag warning light circuit. If OK, proceed to step 5. Step 5: Does airbag warning light come on? If NO, check terminal LA of center airbag sensor assembly and electrical connection check mechanism. If normal, replace center airbag sensor assembly. If YES, from the results of the above inspection, the malfunctioning part can now be considered normal. To make sure of this, use the simulation method to check. Step 6: Is ECU-B fuse burnt out again? If NO, using simulation method, reproduce malfunction symptoms (See page AB-32). If YES, check harness between ECU-B fuse and airbag warning light, and ECU-B fuse and center airbag sensor assembly.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Tc Terminal Circuit
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p599 OEM manual
-
Tc Terminal Circuit — Circuit Description
By connecting terminals Tc and E1 of the check connector, the center airbag sensor assembly is set in the diagnostic code output mode. The diagnostic codes are displayed by the blinking of the airbag warning light.
-
Diagnostic Chart — Code Not Displayed
Troubleshooting procedure when the diagnostic code is not displayed: Step 1: Check voltage between terminals Tc and E1 of check connector. If OK, go to step 3. If NG, proceed to step 2. Step 2: Check voltage between terminal Tc of check connector and body ground. If OK, check harness between terminal E1 of check connector and body ground. If NG, proceed to step 3. Step 3: Check center airbag sensor assembly. If OK, check harness between center airbag sensor assembly and check connector. If NG, replace center airbag sensor assembly.
-
Diagnostic Chart — Code Continuously Displayed
Troubleshooting procedure when the diagnostic code is continuously displayed: Step 1: Check resistance between terminal Tc of center airbag sensor assembly and body ground. If OK, replace center airbag sensor assembly. If NG, repair or replace harness or connector.
SRS AIRBAG · Troubleshooting · Diagnostic Chart
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p600 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSTIC CHART — WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram showing the Tc terminal circuit connections. The Check Connector (terminals E1 and Tc) connects via the Tc line to the Center Airbag Sensor Assembly (Tc terminal, with diode). The same Tc line branches to three ECUs, each with a diode on the Tc terminal: Power Steering ECU, Cruise Control ECU, and ABS ECU. The E1 terminal of the Check Connector is grounded.
SRS AIRBAG · Disposal of Steering Wheel Pad (with Airbag)
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p604 OEM manual
-
DISPOSAL OF STEERING WHEEL PAD (WITH AIRBAG) — GENERAL
When scrapping vehicles equipped with an airbag system or disposing of a steering wheel pad (with airbag), always first deploy the airbag in accordance with the procedure described. If any abnormality occurs with the airbag deployment, contact the SERVICE DEPT. of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC. Never dispose of a steering wheel pad which has an undeployed airbag. When disposing of a steering wheel pad with an airbag deployed in a collision, follow the same procedure given under 'AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURE (WHEN SCRAPPING THE VEHICLE), part 5, DISPOSAL OF STEERING WHEEL PAD (WITH AIRBAG)' (See page AB-84).
- Never dispose of a steering wheel pad which has an undeployed airbag.
-
THE AIRBAG PRODUCES A SIZEABLE EXPLODING SOUND WHEN IT DEPLOYS
Perform the operation out-of-doors and where it will not create a nuisance to nearby residents.
-
USE SPECIFIED SST FOR AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT
When deploying the airbag, always use the specified SST: SRS AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT TOOL (SST 09082-00700). Perform the operation in a place away from electrical noise.
-
MAINTAIN SAFE DISTANCE DURING AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT
When deploying an airbag, perform the operation from at least 10 m (33 ft) away from the steering wheel pad.
-
STEERING WHEEL PAD IS VERY HOT AFTER DEPLOYMENT
The steering wheel pad is very hot when the airbag is deployed, so leave it alone for at least 30 minutes after deployment.
-
USE GLOVES AND SAFETY GLASSES
Use gloves and safety glasses when handling a steering wheel pad with deployed airbag.
-
WASH HANDS AFTER OPERATION
Always wash your hands with water after completing the operation.
-
DO NOT APPLY WATER TO DEPLOYED AIRBAG PAD
Do not apply water, etc. to a steering wheel pad with deployed airbag.
SRS AIRBAG · Disposal of Steering Wheel Pad (with Airbag)
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p606 OEM manual
-
DISPOSAL OF STEERING WHEEL PAD (WITH AIRBAG)
Guidelines for disposing of the steering wheel pad with airbag.
- The steering wheel pad is very hot when the airbag is deployed, so leave it alone for at least 30 minutes after deployment.
- Use gloves and safety glasses when handling a steering wheel pad with deployed airbag.
- Do not apply water, etc. to a steering wheel pad with deployed airbag.
- Always wash your hands with water after completing the operation.
SRS AIRBAG · Disposal of Steering Wheel Pad (with Airbag)
Steering
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p610 OEM manual
-
CONFIRM FUNCTIONING OF SST
When deploying the airbag, always use the specified SST: SRS AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT TOOL. SST 09082-00700
-
CONNECT SST TO BATTERY
Connect the red clip of the SST to the battery positive (+) terminal and the black clip to the battery negative (-) terminal. HINT: Do not connect the yellow connector which connects with the airbag system.
-
CONFIRM FUNCTIONING OF SST
Press the SST activation switch, and confirm the LED of the SST activation switch lights up.
- If the LED lights up when the activation switch is not being pressed, SST malfunction is probable, so definitely do not use the SST.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p612 OEM manual
-
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index listing all subsections of the Body Electrical System chapter with corresponding page references: GENERAL INFORMATION (BE-2), POWER SOURCE (BE-6), IGNITION SWITCH (BE-10), LIGHTING SYSTEM (BE-13), WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM (BE-43), COMBINATION METER (BE-48), DEFOGGER SYSTEM (BE-63), POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM (BE-67), POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM (BE-73), POWER MIRROR CONTROL SYSTEM (BE-80), CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (BE-82), THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM (BE-115), AUDIO (BE-132), CLOCK (BE-160).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · General Information
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p613 OEM manual
-
WIRING COLOR CODE
Wire colors are indicated by an alphabetical code. B = Black, L = Blue, R = Red, BR = Brown, LG = Light Green, V = Violet, G = Green, O = Orange, W = White, GR = Gray, P = Pink, Y = Yellow. The first letter indicates the basic wire color and the second letter indicates the color of the stripe.
-
PIN NUMBER OF FEMALE CONNECTOR
Numbered in order from upper left to lower right.
-
PIN NUMBER OF MALE CONNECTOR
Numbered in order from upper right to lower left. HINT: When connectors with different or the same number of terminals are used with the same parts, each connector name (letter of the alphabet) and pin number is specified. e.g. A7 = No. 7 pin of connector 'A'.
-
DISTINCTION OF MALE AND FEMALE CONNECTORS
Male and female connectors are distinguished by shape of their internal pins. (a) All connectors are shown from the open end, and the lock is on top. (b) To pull apart the connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires. HINT: Check to see what kind of connector you are disconnecting before pulling apart.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · General Information · Replacement of Fuse
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p614 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT OF FUSE — EQUAL AMPERAGE RATING
If replacing the fuse be sure to replace it with a fuse with an equal amperage rating.
-
TURN OFF ALL ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE
Turn off all electrical components and the ignition switch before replacing a fuse. Do not exceed the fuse amperage rating.
-
USE A FUSE PULLER
Always use a fuse puller for removing and inserting a fuse. Remove and insert straight in and out without twisting. Twisting could force open the terminals too much, resulting in a bad connection.
-
BLOWN FUSE — SHORT CIRCUIT INDICATION
If a fuse continues to blow, a short circuit is indicated. The system must be checked by a qualified technician.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · General Information
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p615 OEM manual
-
Check for Voltage
Establish conditions in which voltage is present at the check point. Using a voltmeter, connect the negative (-) lead to a good ground point or negative (-) battery terminal and the positive (+) lead to the connector or component terminal. This check can be done with a test bulb instead of a voltmeter.
-
Check for Continuity and Resistance
Disconnect the battery terminal or wire so there is no voltage between the check points. Contact the two leads of an ohmmeter to each of the check points. If the circuit has diodes, reverse the two leads and check again. When contacting the negative (-) lead to the diode positive (+) side and the positive (+) lead to the negative (-) side, there should be continuity. When contacting the two leads in reverse, there should be no continuity. HINT: Specifications may vary depending on the type of tester, so refer to the tester's instruction manual before performing the inspection.
-
Check LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Check LED in the same manner as that for diodes. Use a tester with a power source of 3V or greater to overcome the circuit resistance. If a suitable tester is not available, apply battery voltage and check that the LED lights up.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · General Information
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p616 OEM manual
-
USE VOLT/OHMMETER WITH HIGH IMPEDANCE
Use a volt/ohmmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum) for troubleshooting of the electrical circuit.
-
CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Procedure to locate a short circuit using a test bulb in place of the blown fuse.
-
ELECTRICAL PARTS — BATTERY DISCONNECTION
Before removing and inspecting the electrical parts, set the ignition switch to the LOCK position and disconnect the negative (–) terminal cable from the battery.
- Work must not be started until after at least 20 seconds or longer from the time the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected.
-
SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM
Failure to carry out service operations in the correct sequence could cause the airbag system to deploy, possibly leading to a serious accident. When removal or installation of the parts and the yellow wire harness and connector for the airbag is necessary, refer to the precautionary notices in the AB section before performing the operation.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Source · Parts Location
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p617 OEM manual
-
POWER SOURCE – Parts Location
Identifies the location of power source components on the Toyota MR2 SW20. Battery is located in the trunk/boot area (rear compartment). Relay Block No. 5 is located in the trunk/boot area on the left side. Relay Block No. 2 is located in the rear trunk area on the right side. Relay Block No. 1 is located on the left side of the vehicle interior/footwell area and contains: Defogger Relay, Taillight Control Relay, Turn Signal Flasher.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Source
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p618 OEM manual
-
RELAY BLOCK NO. 1 — FUSE AND RELAY IDENTIFICATION
Relay Block No. 1 contains 12 fuse positions and 4 relay positions (A–D). Fuses: 1. TAIL 15A, 2. GAUGE 7.5A, 3. STOP 15A, 4. (empty), 5. TURN 7.5A, 6. DOOR 20A, 7. (empty), 8. WIPER 20A, 9. PWR 30A, 10. RAD CIG 15A, 11. DEFOG 20A, 12. (empty). Relays: A. TURN SIGNAL FLASHER, B. DEFOGGER, C. TAIL (Taillight Control), D. (empty).
-
RELAY BLOCK NO. 2 — FUSE AND RELAY IDENTIFICATION
Relay Block No. 2 contains 3 fuse positions and 4 relay positions (A–D). Fuses: 1. EFI 15A, 2. VENT 20A, 3. ECU-IG 7.5A. Relays: A. IGN, B. EFI, C. C/OPN, D. VENT.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Source · Relay Block No. 5
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p619 OEM manual
-
RELAY BLOCK NO. 5 — FUSES AND HIGH CURRENT FUSES
Fuse layout for Relay Block No. 5: 1. ALT SENCING 7.5A, 2. CDS FAN 30A, 3. RAD FAN 30A, 4. FR FOG 15A, 5. —, 6. —, 7. HEAD (LH) 15A, 8. HEAD (RH) 15A, 9. A.C 10A, 10. ECU-B 7.5A, 11. AM2 7.5A, 12. HAZ-HORN 15A, 13. RTR 30A, 14. DOME 15A, 15. AMI 50A H-Fuse, 16. HTR 40A H-Fuse, 17. A.B.S. 80A H-Fuse, 18. ALT 120A H-Fuse, 19. AM2 40A H-Fuse.
-
RELAY BLOCK NO. 5 — RELAYS
Relay layout for Relay Block No. 5: A. HTR, B. H-LP, C. HORN, D. FAN NO. 2, E. FAN NO. 1, F. FAN MAIN, G. FAN NO. 3, H. —, I. FR FOG.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Ignition Switch
Ignition
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p621 OEM manual
-
IGNITION SWITCH — Parts Location
Parts identified on vehicle diagram: Ignition Switch (steering column area), Key Unlock Warning Switch (steering column area), Seat Belt Warning Relay (rear cabin area), Door Lock Control Relay (lower door sill area), Door Courtesy Switch (door sill area).
-
IGNITION SWITCH — Wiring Diagram Reference
See Power Source Section on page BE-9.
-
KEY CONFINE PREVENTION SYSTEM — Wiring Diagram Reference
See Power Door Lock Control System on page BE-74.
-
KEY UNLOCK WARNING SYSTEM — Wiring Diagram
Circuit includes: Fuse DOME (terminal 1 to Seatbelt Warning Relay), Ignition Switch IG1 via Fuse GAUGE (terminal 2 to Seatbelt Warning Relay), Battery (ground side), Seatbelt Warning Relay (terminals 1-7 to Key Unlock Warning Switch terminal 1/5, terminal 3-2 to Driver's Door Courtesy Switch, terminal 6 ground). Key Unlock Warning Switch terminals 7/1/5. Driver's Door Courtesy Switch terminals 3/2. Connector pinouts shown: Ignition Switch and Key Unlock Warning Switch (10-pin connector, pins 4,3,2,1 top row; 10,9,8,7,6,5 bottom row), Seatbelt Warning Relay (10-pin connector, pins 4,3,2,1 top row; 10,9,8,7,6,5 bottom row), Driver's Door Courtesy Switch (2-pin connector, pins 1,2). Note: The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-8.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Ignition Switch · Troubleshooting & Parts Inspection
Ignition
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p622 OEM manual
-
INSPECT SWITCHES (Key Unlock Warning Switch/Continuity)
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 5. OFF (Ignition Key removed) — no continuity; ON (Ignition Key set) — continuity between terminals 1 and 5. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
INSPECT DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY
See Step 3 on page BE-78.
-
DOOR COURTESY SWITCH
See Step 1 on page BE-41.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting System · Parts Location
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p624 OEM manual
-
LIGHTING SYSTEM PARTS LOCATION
Diagram identifying the location of all lighting system components on the Toyota MR2 SW20. Exterior/underhood components include: Headlight, Light Retractor Motor, Light Retractor Relay, Room Light Control Relay, Relay Block No. 5 (Front Fog Light Relay, Headlight Control Relay), Door Handle Switch, Door Courtesy Switch, Ignition Switch. Interior/dashboard components include: Light Control Switch, Turn Signal Flasher, Taillight Control Relay, Front Fog Light Switch, Hazard Warning Switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Light System · System Description — Light Retractable System (w/o Light Auto Turn Off System)
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p633 OEM manual
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH IN "HEAD"
When the switch is set, continuity is produced between terminal 8 (B-8) of the light retractor relay (hereafter called LRR) and the body ground. Also continuity is made between terminals 7 (B-7) and 12 (B-12) of the LRR. Then the LRR operates so that current flows from terminal 3 (B-3) of the LRR → terminal 4 (B-4) [1 (B-1)] of the LRR → terminal 4 of the light retractor motor → terminal 5 of the motor → the body ground, and the motor starts to run in order to raise the headlights. When the headlights rise, the limit switch operates, so that continuity is broken between terminals 2 and 1 of the motor, and continuity is produced between terminals 2 and 3. As a result, because the LRR is interrupted, the headlights stay in position.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CHANGED FROM "HEAD" TO "TAIL" OR "HOLD"
When the switch is set, continuity is broken between terminal 8 (B-8) of the LRR and the body ground, and continuity is produced between terminal 6 (B-6) of the LRR and the body ground. As a result, the headlights are kept in position.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CHANGED FROM "TAIL" OR "HOLD" TO "OFF"
When the switch is set, continuity is also broken between terminal 6 (B-6) and the body ground. Then continuity is produced between terminals 11 (B-11) and 12 (B-12) of the LRR, so that the LRR operates so that current flows from terminal 3 (B-3) → terminal 4 (B-4) [1 (B-1)] of the LRR → terminal 4 of the light retractor motor → terminal 5 of the motor → the body ground, and the motor starts to run in order to retract the headlights. When the headlights are retracted, the limit switch operates, so that continuity is broken between terminals 2 and 3 of the motor, and continuity is produced between terminals 2 and 1. As a result, because the LRR is interrupted, the headlights stay in position.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting System · w/ Light Auto Turn Off System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p634 OEM manual
-
CURRENT FLOW FROM BATTERY TO LIGHT RETRACTOR RELAY
Current flows from the battery to terminal 8 (B-8) of the light retractor relay.
-
BATTERY VOLTAGE TO LIGHT RETRACTOR RELAY
Battery voltage is applied to terminal 5 (B-5) and 7 (B-7) of the light retractor relay. The numbers in [ ] are for the left side headlight.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH IN "TAIL"
When the switch is set continuity is produced between terminal 13 (B-13) of the light retractor relay (hereafter called LRR) and the body ground. Also, because continuity is produced between terminal 2 (B-2) of the LRR and the body ground, the taillight control relay (hereafter called TCR) is turned on. Then the taillights light up.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH IN "HEAD"
When the switch is set, continuity is produced between terminal 13 (B-13) of the LRR and the body ground, and 14 (B-14) of the LRR and the body ground of the LRR. Also continuity is produced between terminals 9 (B-9) and 18 (B-18) of the LRR. Then the LRR operates to lead current from terminal 8 → terminal 16 (B-16) [6 (B-6)] of the LRR → terminal 4 of the light retractor motor → terminal 5 of the motor → the body ground, and the motor starts, to run in order to raise the headlights. When the headlights rise, the limit switch operates, so that continuity is broken between terminals 2 and 1 of the motor, and continuity is produced between terminals 2 and 3. As a result, because the LRR is interrupted, the headlights stay in position.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p635 OEM manual
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CHANGED FROM "HEAD" TO "TAIL"
When the switch is set continuity is broken between terminal 14 (B-14) of the LRR and the body ground, and continuity is produced between terminal 3 (B-3) of the LRR and body ground. As a result, the headlights are kept in position. By breaking continuity between terminal 14 (B-14) of the LRR and the body ground, continuity is broken between terminal 10 (B-10) and the body ground. Then the headlights go out.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CHANGED FROM "TAIL" TO "HOLD"
When the switch is set, continuity is broken between terminal 13 (B-13) of the LRR and the body ground. Also, because continuity is broken between terminal 2 (B-2) of the LRR and the body ground, the TCR is turned off. Then the taillights go out. The headlights are kept in position, because continuity is kept between terminal 3 (B-3) of the LRR and the body ground.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CHANGED FROM "HOLD" TO "OFF"
When the switch is set, continuity is broken between terminal 3 (B-3) of the LRR and the body ground, so that continuity is produced between terminal 1 (B-1) and 18 (B-18) of the LRR. Then the LRR operates so that the current flows from terminal 8 (B-8) → terminal 16 (B-16) [6 (B-6)] of the LRR → terminal 4 of the light retractor motor → terminal 5 of the motor → the body ground, and the motor starts to run in order to retract the headlights. When the headlights are retracted, the limit switch operates, so that continuity is broken between terminals 2 and 3 of the motor, and continuity is produced between terminals 2 and 1. As a result, because the LRR is interrupted, the headlights stay in position.
-
IGNITION SWITCH TURNED FROM "ON" TO "ACC" OR "LOCK" AND DRIVER'S DOOR OPEN WITH LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH IN "HEAD" (Light Auto Turn Off system)
When the switches are set, current does not flow from the battery to terminal 4 (B-4) of the LRR, and continuity is produced between terminal 15 (B-15) of the LRR and the body ground. Also, because continuity is broken between terminals 2 (B-2) of the LRR and the body ground, and 10 (B-10) of the LRR and the body ground, the TCR and the HCR are turned off. Then the taillights and the headlights go out. Also with the light control switch in "TAIL", the taillights go out. When the ignition switch is turned on again, the taillights and headlights light normally. During light auto turn off operation, if the light switch is turned first to "HOLD" or "OFF", then turned to "TAIL" or "HEAD", both sets of lights will come on again.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Light System · Daytime Running Light System (CANADA)
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p636 OEM manual
-
Daytime Running Light System (CANADA) — Description
The daytime running light system has front fog lights and taillights that go on automatically when the engine is started. This system is standard equipment on all grade models for Canada. The daytime running lights are controlled by the light retractor relay.
-
Standby Operation
The daytime running light system is activated when the ignition switch is turned on and the engine is started. The lights are turned on and off, as shown below, depending on the condition on applicable switches. Lights do not go on when the ignition switch is merely turned on. Lights remain on when the running engine stalls. There is a 0.5 S delay between engine run state and running light activation/deactivation.
-
Terminal Bracket Note
The terminals indicated in brackets ( ) are for models w/ Light Auto Turn Off System.
-
Power Source Circuit Note
The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting System · Operation
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p637 OEM manual
-
IGNITION SWITCH "ON" AND LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH "OFF"
When the switches are set, current is led from the battery to terminal A-4 (B-4) and terminal A-9 (A-4) of the light retractor relay. After engine running, because continuity is made between terminal A-2 (B-2) of the light retractor relay and the body ground, and terminal A-6 (A-2) of the light retractor relay and the body ground of the light retractor relay, the taillight control relay and running light control relay are turned on, so the taillights and running lights will come on.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH "HEAD"
When the switch is set, continuity is made between terminal B-8 (B-14) of the light retractor relay and the body ground. Also, because the continuity between terminal A-6 (A-2) and terminal B-12 (B-18) of the light retractor relay is cut off, so the running lights will go off. HINT: If the light control switch is turned to "TAIL" or "HOLD" or "OFF", because continuity is made between terminal A-6 (A-2) and the body ground of the light retractor relay, so the running lights will come on again.
-
ENGINE STOPS (IGNITION SWITCH "ON")
When the engine is stopped, because the continuity between terminal A-6 (A-2) and terminal B-12 (B-18) of the light retractor relay remains, so the running lights also remain. HINT: If ignition switch is turned to "OFF", because the continuity between terminal A-6 (A-2) and terminal B-12 (B-18) of the light retractor relay is cut off, so running lights will go off. If light control switch is in "HOLD" or "OFF", because the continuity between terminal A-2 (B-2) and terminal B-12 (B-18) of the light retractor relay is also cut off, so taillights will also go off.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting System · Part Adjustment / Troubleshooting
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p638 OEM manual
-
Adjustment of Light Aiming
Headlight aiming is adjusted via two adjusters on the headlight assembly: one for adjustment in the Vertical Direction and one for adjustment in the Horizontal Direction.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting System · Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p640 OEM manual
-
Front fog light system does not operate — FR FOG fuse blown
Replace blown fuse and check for short. See page BE-3.
-
Front fog light system does not operate — HEAD fuse blown (w/o Daytime running light system)
Replace blown fuse and check for short. See page BE-3.
-
Front fog light system does not operate — Front fog light relay faulty
Check relay. See page BE-37.
-
Front fog light system does not operate — Headlight control relay faulty (w/o Daytime running light system)
Check relay. See page BE-34.
-
Front fog light system does not operate — Light retractor relay faulty (w/ Daytime running light system or w/ Light auto turn off system)
Check relay. See pages BE-35, 36, 39.
-
Front fog light system does not operate — Front fog light switch faulty
Check switch. See page BE-37.
-
Front fog light system does not operate — Wiring or ground faulty
Repair as necessary.
-
Illuminated entry system does not operate — DOME fuse blown
Replace fuse and check for short. See page BE-3.
-
Illuminated entry system does not operate — Room light control relay faulty
Check relay.
-
Illuminated entry system does not operate — Door courtesy switch faulty
Check switch.
-
Illuminated entry system does not operate — Door handle switch faulty (w/ Door key cylinder illumination light)
Check switch.
-
Illuminated entry system does not operate — Wiring or ground faulty
Repair as necessary.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting System · Parts Replacement
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p641 OEM manual
-
PARTS REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS (A TYPE)
Exploded diagram showing the components of the A Type lighting system switch assembly, including: Connector, Wire Harness Holder No. 1, Wiper and Washer Switch, Wire Harness Holder No. 2, Headlight Dimmer and Turn Signal Switch, Cruise Control Switch (w/o Airbag), Horn Contact, Ball Set Plate, Light Control Switch, Spring, Ball. For vehicles w/ Airbag: the Cruise Control Switch assembly is replaced with a Spiral Cable configuration.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Lighting System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p644 OEM manual
-
REMOVE HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH (A Type)
Remove four screws and the switch from the switch body.
-
REMOVE HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH (B Type)
Pry loose two locking lugs and remove the turn signal switch from the switch body. Remove two screws and the headlight dimmer switch from the switch body. Remove the headlight dimmer switch pin from the switch body with the spring.
-
REMOVE WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Remove two screws and the switch from the switch body.
-
REMOVE CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH (A Type)
Remove two screws and the switch from the body.
-
REMOVE HORN CONTACT
Remove horn contact.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Wiper and Washer System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p655 OEM manual
-
CONNECTOR DIAGRAMS
Connector pinout diagrams for: Ignition Switch (10-pin), Wiper Motor (4-pin), Wiper and Washer Switch Connector A (15-pin) and Connector B (20-pin), Washer Motor for all Canada vehicles and USA vehicles w/ Cold Area Spec. (3-pin), and Washer Motor for USA vehicles w/o Cold Area Spec. (2-pin).
-
PARTS REPLACEMENT
See Parts Replacement of Combination Switch on page BE-30.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Wiper and Washer System · Washer System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p658 OEM manual
-
Operation, Stopping at Stop Position
Test procedure for verifying wiper motor stop position functionality.
-
INSPECT WASHER SWITCH
See (Wiper and Washer Switch/Continuity) on page BE-45.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Combination Meter · Meter Circuit
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p660 OEM manual
-
METER CIRCUIT — CONNECTOR PINOUT
Connector A (12-pin), Connector B (12-pin), Connector C (10-pin), and Connector D (10-pin) wiring assignments for the combination meter circuit. A Bulb Check Relay is incorporated in the circuit. Turbo boost pressure gauge drive circuit is noted with an asterisk.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Combination Meter · Parts Inspection
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p663 OEM manual
-
INSPECT TACHOMETER (ON-VEHICLE)
Connect a tune-up test tachometer, and start the engine. Compare the tester and tachometer indications. If error is excessive, replace the tachometer.
- Reversing the connection of the tachometer will damage the transistors and diodes inside.
- When removing or installing the tachometer, be careful not to drop or subject it to heavy shocks.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Combination Meter · Meter Illumination Control System / Bulb Check System / Open Door Warning System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p673 OEM manual
-
INSPECT BULB CHECK RELAY
Inspect the bulb check relay by: (a) Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal C through a 1.4 W test bulb and the negative (-) lead to terminal B, check that the test bulb does not light up. (b) Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal A, check that the test bulb lights up. If operation is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
INSPECT WARNING LIGHT
1. INSPECT WARNING LIGHT: (a) Disconnect the connector from the door courtesy switch and ground terminal on the wire harness side connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON, check that the warning light lights up. If the warning does not light up, test the bulb.
-
INSPECT DOOR COURTESY SWITCH
See step 1 of Illuminated Entry System on page BE-41.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Defogger System · Parts Location & Wiring
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p674 OEM manual
-
DEFOGGER SYSTEM – Parts Location
The defogger system consists of the following components: A/C Control Assembly (includes Defogger Switch), Rear Window Glass (includes Rear Window Defogger Wire), Relay Block No. 1 (includes Defogger Relay), and Ignition Switch.
-
DEFOGGER SYSTEM – Wiring and Connector Diagrams
Power flows from Battery through Ignition Switch (IG1) and Fuse GAUGE to the Defogger Switch (in A/C Control Assembly, connector pins 10 and 11). The Defogger Switch also connects via Fuse DEFOG to Defogger Relay pin 5. The Defogger Relay (pins 1–5, coil on pin 1 with ground, switching contacts on pins 3–2) powers the Rear Window Defogger Wire. Pin 15 on the switch assembly connects through a resistor and indicator lamp to ground. The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified; for full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Defogger System · Troubleshooting / Parts Inspection
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p675 OEM manual
-
DEFOGGER IDLE-UP SYSTEM ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
Set the defogger switch ON, check that the engine revolutions increase.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Window Control System · Parts Location
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p678 OEM manual
-
PARTS LOCATION
Diagram showing the location of Power Window Control System components on the Toyota MR2 SW20, including: Power Window Motor (front and rear), Power Window Switch, Door Lock Control Relay, Master Switch, and Door Courtesy Switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Window Control System · Troubleshooting & Parts Inspection
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p680 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — Power window does not operate at all
Possible causes: GAUGE fuse blown (replace fuse and check for short, BE-3); PWR fuse blown (replace fuse and check for short, BE-3); Power main relay faulty (check relay, BE-72); Wiring or ground faulty (repair as necessary).
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — One-touch power window does not operate
Possible cause: Power window master switch faulty. Remedy: Check Switch (BE-69).
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — Key-off power window does not operate
Possible causes: Door lock control relay faulty (check relay, BE-72); Wiring faulty (repair as necessary).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Window Control System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p681 OEM manual
-
WINDOW LOCK SWITCH CHECK
Set the window lock switch to the lock position, check that the passenger's power window switch illumination goes out. If operation is not as specified, replace the master switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Window Control System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p683 OEM manual
-
RIGHT SIDE DOOR MOTOR/CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATION
Step (a): With the window in the full closed position, hold the power window switch in 'UP' position and check that there is a circuit breaker operation noise within 4 to 40 seconds. Step (b): With the window in the full closed position, hold the switch in 'DOWN' and check that the window begins to descend within 60 seconds. If operation is not as specified, replace the motor.
-
INSPECT DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY
See Step 3 of Power Door Lock Control System on page BE-78.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Door Lock Control System · Parts Location
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p684 OEM manual
-
PARTS LOCATION
Diagram showing the location of all Power Door Lock Control System components on the Toyota MR2 SW20, including: Ignition Switch, Door Lock Manual Switch (driver side), Door Lock Manual Switch (passenger side), Door Lock Control Relay, Key Unlock Warning Switch, Door Key Lock and Unlock Switch, Door Lock Assembly with Door Lock Motor, Door Courtesy Switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Power Door Lock Control System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p688 OEM manual
-
Door Lock and Unlock Switch/Continuity
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 3 (vehicles w/o Theft Deterrent System) or terminals (1) and (4) (vehicles w/ Theft Deterrent System). When switch is OFF (door lock set to LOCK): no continuity. When switch is ON (door lock set to UNLOCK): continuity present between terminal 1 and terminal 3. If continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock assembly.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Parts Location
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p693 OEM manual
-
Parts Location
Diagram showing the location of all cruise control system components including: Combination Meter (Cruise Control Indicator), Control Switch, Cruise Control ECU, Parking Brake Switch, Stop Light Switch, Clutch Switch, Throttle Position Sensor, Speed Sensor, Actuator, Check Connector, and Neutral Start Switch (A/T).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Connector Diagrams
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p696 OEM manual
-
Connector Diagrams — Cruise Control System
Connector pin-layout diagrams for all major components in the Cruise Control System, including: Cruise Control Switch (USA and Canada Connector A & B), Stop Light Switch (4-pin), Clutch Switch M/T (2-pin), Parking Brake Switch, Neutral Start Switch A/T (9-pin), Cruise Control ECU (26-pin), Actuator (7-pin), Starter Relay (4-pin), Throttle Position Sensor 3-pin type and 4-pin type, Speed Sensor M/T (2-pin), Speed Sensor A/T ECT (2-pin), A/T Combination Meter Connector A (12-pin) and Connector B (12-pin).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · System Description
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p697 OEM manual
-
IGNITION SWITCH AND TERMINAL POWER
When the ignition switch is turned ON, current flows from the battery to terminal 14 of the cruise control (CC) ECU. Terminal 13 of the CC ECU is always grounded.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION — USA MAIN SWITCH
When the main switch is pushed ON, current flows from terminal 4 of the CC ECU → terminal 5 of the control switch → terminal 3 of the switch → ground. As a result, the CC ECU is on standby and terminal 5 of the CC ECU is grounded. Therefore the CC indicator lights up.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION — USA SET/COAST, RESUME/ACCEL AND CANCEL SWITCH
The control switch controls the SET, COAST, RESUME, ACCEL and CANCEL functions. When the control switch is turned to each position, current flows from terminal 18 of the CC ECU → terminal 4 of the control switch → (each resistance) → terminal 3 of the switch → ground. The CC ECU detects each position the control switch is turned to, and starts operation. HINT: The SET function is detected by the CC ECU when the control switch is released from SET/COAST.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION — CANADA MAIN SWITCH
When the main switch is pushed ON, current flows from terminal 4 of the CC ECU → terminal 15 of the control switch → terminal 19 of the switch → ground. As a result, the CC ECU is on standby and terminal 5 of the CC ECU is grounded. Therefore the CC indicator lights up.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION — CANADA SET/COAST SWITCH
When the control switch is turned to SET/COAST position, the current flows from terminal 19 of the CC ECU → terminal 5 of the CC switch → terminal 19 of the CC switch → ground.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION — CANADA RESUME/ACCEL SWITCH
When the control switch is turned to RES/ACC position, the current flows from terminal 18 of the CC ECU → terminal 17 of the CC switch → terminal 19 of the CC switch → ground.
-
CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION — CANADA CANCEL SWITCH
When the control switch is turned to CANCEL position, the current flows from terminal 17 of the CC ECU → terminal 11 of the CC switch → terminal 19 of the CC switch → ground.
-
SPEED CONTROL OPERATION — SET SPEED SIGNAL
When the vehicle speed is set by the control switch, the ECU sends signal from terminal 10 → terminal 2 of the stop light switch → terminal 4 of the switch → terminal 5 of the actuator → (safety magnetic clutch) → terminal 4 of the actuator → ground.
-
SPEED CONTROL OPERATION — BELOW SET SPEED
When the actual vehicle speed drops below the set speed, the CC ECU sends a signal (voltage) from terminal 12 → terminal 6 of actuator → (motor) → terminal 7 of actuator → terminal 11 of CC ECU. This causes the motor to rotate the actuator arm in the throttle opening direction, increasing the vehicle speed. Then, when the arm reaches the prescribed angle, the CC ECU detects this at terminal 25 and stops the signal from 12.
-
SPEED CONTROL OPERATION — ABOVE SET SPEED
When the actual vehicle speed rises above the set speed, the CC ECU sends a signal from terminal 11, turning the motor in the opposite direction so that the vehicle speed is reduced.
-
SPEED CONTROL OPERATION — POSITION SENSOR
The CC ECU sends approx. 5 V from terminal 24 → terminal 1 of the actuator → (position sensor) → terminal 3 of the actuator → terminal 26 of the CC ECU. When this occurs, the position sensor sends the position of the actuator arm as a signal (voltage) from terminal 2 of the actuator to terminal 25 of the CC ECU.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Manual Cancel Operation
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p698 OEM manual
-
MANUAL CANCEL OPERATION
The CC system has the following methods of cancellation. When the CC ECU detects any of the above signals, it stops output of signals to the actuator, and cancels cruise control.
-
Speed Control Switch (CANCEL)
When the control switch is turned to CANCEL position.
-
Parking Brake Switch
When the parking brake lever is pulled, the parking brake switch is turned ON and sends a cancellation signal (ground voltage) to terminal 3 of the CC ECU.
-
Neutral Start Switch (A/T)
When the shift lever is set to "N" or "P" range, the neutral start switch is turned ON and sends a cancellation signal (ground voltage) to terminal 2 of the CC ECU.
-
Clutch Switch (M/T)
When the clutch pedal is depressed, the clutch switch is turned ON and sends a cancellation signal (ground voltage) to terminal 2 of the CC ECU.
-
Stop Light Switch
When the brake pedal is depressed, SW B of the stop light switch is turned OFF, the safety magnetic clutch (in actuator) is released, and SW A of the stop light switch is turned ON and sends a cancellation signal (battery voltage) to terminal 16 of the CC ECU.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Diagnosis System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p699 OEM manual
-
INDICATION CODE ORDER
Indication codes appear in order from No. 1.
-
NO INDICATION CODE
If there is no indication code, perform troubleshooting and inspection. (See page BE-90)
-
STOP INDICATION
Indication is stopped when the MAIN switch is re-pushed.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Diagnosis
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p700 OEM manual
-
TYPE B DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
If while driving with the cruise control on, the system is canceled by a malfunction in either the actuator, speed sensor or speed control switch circuit, the cruise control indicator light 'CRUISE' will blink 5 times. While stopped, connect terminals 3 and 11 of the check connector. If the ignition switch is turned off, the diagnostic code will be erased from the computer memory. Read the diagnostic code on the indicator light 'CRUISE'. Indication codes appear in order from No. 11. If there is no indication code, perform troubleshooting and inspection (See page BE-90).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Troubleshooting
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p701 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING PRIORITY ORDER
You will find the source of the trouble more easily be properly using the table shown below. In this table, the numbers indicate the order of priority of the causes of trouble. Check each part in the order shown.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Diagnostic Procedures
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p718 OEM manual
-
ECT SOLENOID No. 2 CIRCUIT (with A/T)
Diagnostic flowchart for ECT Solenoid No. 2 Circuit in the cruise control system on automatic transmission vehicles. Step 1: INSPECT ECT SYSTEM — Is ECT system normal? If No: Repair ECT system. Then recheck system. If Yes: Disconnect connector from CC ECU and inspect connector on wire harness side as follows. Step 2: INSPECT No. 2 SOLENOID CIRCUIT — Is there approx. 13 Ω between terminal 22 and ground? If No: Open or short circuit in wire harness between terminal 22 of CC ECU and No. 2 solenoid. If Yes: Replace CC ECU. Then recheck system.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Cruise Control ECU Circuit
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p720 OEM manual
-
INSPECT ECU CIRCUIT
Disconnect connector and inspect connector on wire harness side as shown in the chart.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System · Inspection
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p723 OEM manual
-
CLUTCH SWITCH (M/T) CONTINUITY CHECK
Switch pin free (Clutch pedal depressed): continuity between terminals 1 and 2. Switch pin pushed in (Clutch pedal released): no continuity. If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
-
NEUTRAL START SWITCH (A/T)
See page AT-29.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Cruise Control System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p725 OEM manual
-
Cruise Control Motor — Resistance Check (Closed to Open)
When the arm is moving from the closed to open position, check that resistance between terminals 2 and 3 increases from approx. 0.5 to 1.7 kΩ. If operation is not as specified, replace the motor.
-
Cruise Control Cable — Freeplay Check
(a) Check that the cruise control cable freeplay is less than 10 mm (0.39 in.). (b) If necessary adjust the cruise control cable freeplay.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Theft Deterrent System · Parts Location
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p726 OEM manual
-
PARTS LOCATION
Diagram identifying the physical location of all Theft Deterrent System components on the Toyota MR2 SW20, including: Relay Block No. 5, Relay Block No. 1, Combination Meter (Indicator Light), Front Luggage Door Courtesy Switch, Ignition Switch & Key Unlock Warning Switch, Door Key Lock and Unlock Switch (driver side), Door Key Lock and Unlock Switch (passenger side), Door Lock Assembly (Door Lock Switch, Door Lock and Unlock Switch), Door Courtesy Switch (driver side), Door Courtesy Switch (passenger side), Engine Hood Courtesy Switch, Theft Deterrent Horn, Rear Luggage Door Courtesy Switch, Luggage Door Key Unlock Switch, Theft Deterrent ECU, Starter Relay, Neutral Start Switch, Clutch Start Switch (M/T).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Theft Deterrent System · Connector Diagrams
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p728 OEM manual
-
Connector Diagrams
Visual connector pinout diagrams for the following components: Theft Deterrent ECU (20-pin), Door Key Lock and Unlock Switch (3-pin), Luggage Door Key Unlock Switch (3-pin), Door Lock Assembly (6-pin), Theft Deterrent Horn (2-pin), Courtesy Switch – Engine Hood (3-pin), Courtesy Switch – Front Luggage Door (3-pin), Courtesy Switch – Rear Luggage Door (1-pin), Courtesy Switch – Door (2-pin), Ignition Switch / Key Unlock Warning Switch (10-pin), Starter Relay (4-pin), Headlight Control Relay (3-pin), Taillight Control Relay (5-pin).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Theft Deterrent System · Troubleshooting
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p729 OEM manual
-
CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROL SYSTEM
Check that the operation of Power Door Lock Control System is normal.
-
CONFIRM MALFUNCTION CONDITIONS
When the system is not operating, lower the door glass and confirm under what conditions it does not operate, or malfunctions.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Theft Deterrent System · Indicator Light Circuit / Door Lock and Unlock Switch Circuit
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p731 OEM manual
-
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT
Diagnostic procedure for the door lock and unlock switch circuit of the Theft Deterrent system.
-
Turn ignition switch off
Turn ignition switch off before beginning diagnosis of door lock and unlock switch circuit.
-
Disconnect TD ECU connector
Disconnect TD ECU connector and inspect connector on wire harness side as follows.
-
INSPECT DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT
Is there continuity between terminal 3 and ground with driver's door unlocked? If No: Open circuit in driver's door lock and unlock switch circuit. If Yes: Proceed to inspect passenger's door lock and unlock switch circuit.
-
INSPECT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT
Is there continuity between terminal 12 and ground with passenger's door unlocked? If No: Open circuit in passenger's door lock and unlock switch circuit. If Yes: Replace TD ECU. Then recheck system.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Theft Deterrent System · Diagnostic Circuits G & H
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p735 OEM manual
-
IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch OFF. Check if RAD CIG fuse is normal. If No: Replace fuse. If operation is normal after replacement — Fuse faulty. If operation is not normal after replacement — Short circuit in wire harness between fuse and terminal 6 of TD ECU. If RAD CIG fuse is normal: Disconnect TD ECU connector and inspect connector on wire harness side. Inspect ignition switch circuit: Is there battery voltage between terminal 6 and ground with ignition switch turned to ACC or ON? If No: Open circuit in wire harness between fuse and terminal 6 of TD ECU. If Yes: Replace TD ECU. Then recheck system.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Theft Deterrent System · Diagnostic Circuits
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p736 OEM manual
-
STARTER CUT SYSTEM CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch to ST. Disconnect TD ECU connector and inspect connector on wire harness side. Turn ignition switch to ST position (*1 with shift lever at N or P position or *2 with clutch pedal depressed). Is there battery voltage between terminal 18 and ground? If Yes: Replace TD ECU. Then recheck system. If No: Short or open circuit in starter relay circuit. HINT: If starter does not operate, even when system is cancelled, before checking the circuit, use the key to turn the door lock to the unlock position and recheck starter operation. *1 A/T, *2 M/T.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Theft Deterrent System · Diagnostic Circuits
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p737 OEM manual
-
LIGHT RETRACTOR RELAY CIRCUIT (Circuit L)
Turn ignition switch off. Disconnect TD ECU connector and inspect connector on wire harness side as follows. Ground the terminal 20 and check that the headlights and taillights light up. If No: Open circuit in light retractor relay circuit; Check the light retractor relay. If Yes: Replace TD ECU.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Theft Deterrent System · Headlight & Taillight Control Relay Circuit Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p738 OEM manual
-
TAILLIGHT CONTROL RELAY CIRCUIT (w/o LIGHT AUTO TURN OFF SYSTEM)
Turn ignition switch off. Disconnect TD ECU connector and inspect connector on wire harness side. Inspect taillight control relay circuit: Is there battery voltage between terminal 19 and ground? If No: Open or short circuit in taillight control relay circuit. If Yes: Inspect taillight circuit (See pages BE-14 and 16). If taillight circuit inspection is No: Replace as necessary part. If Yes: Replace TD ECU. Then recheck system. TD = Theft Deterrent.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Theft Deterrent System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p741 OEM manual
-
INSPECT RELAY — Starter Relay/Continuity
See page ST-18.
-
INSPECT RELAY — Headlight Control Relay/Continuity
See page BE-34.
-
INSPECT RELAY — Taillight Control Relay/Continuity
See page BE-34.
-
Neutral Start Switch/Continuity
See page AT-16.
-
Clutch Start Switch/Continuity
See page CL-5.
-
Rear Luggage Door Courtesy Switch/Continuity
Terminal 1 to Switch Body: OFF (closed) — no continuity; ON (Opened) — continuity present. If operation is not as specified, replace the switch.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Radio-Tape Player Unit (built-in Power Amplifier, w/ Woofer)
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p745 OEM manual
-
Radio-Tape Player Unit (built-in Power Amplifier, w/ Woofer): Symbol U
Wiring diagram for the Radio-Tape Player Unit with built-in power amplifier and woofer (Symbol U). Shows connections from Fuse DOME, Ignition Switch (IG1/ACC), Fuse CIG & RAD (A-3/ACC), Fuse DOME (A-4/+B), Battery, and Antenna Motor Control Relay to the Radio Assembly Connector A and Connector B. Radio Assembly Connector A pins: A-1 FR(+), A-2 FL(+), A-3 ACC, A-4 +B, A-5 FR(-), A-6 FL(-), A-7 GND, A-8 ANT+, A-9 AMP+, A-10 ILL+. Connector B pins: B-1 RR(+), B-2 RL(+), B-3 RR(-), B-5 ILL-, B-6 RL(-). Front Speaker RH connected to A-1 (FR+) and A-5 (FR-); Front Speaker LH connected to A-2 (FL+) and A-6 (FL-). Rear Speaker RH connected to B-1 (RR+) and B-3 (RR-); Rear Speaker LH connected to B-2 (RL+) and B-6 (RL-). Tweeter RH and LH connected in parallel with front speaker outputs. Woofer Amplifier pins: 1 FR(+), 2 FL(+), 3 AMP+, 4 WF(+), 5 RR(+), 6 RL(+), 7 GND, 9 +B, 10 WF(-). Woofer connected to WF(+) pin 4 and WF(-) pin 10. AMP+ from Radio Assembly A-9 feeds Woofer Amplifier pin 3; +B from Fuse DOME feeds Woofer Amplifier pin 9. ILL- B-5 connects From Fuse TAIL and To Light Control Rheostat. Antenna Motor Control Relay pins: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9; relay coil terminals 3 and 1/4; motor (M) connected via relay; relay also connected to From Fuse ECU-IG and ANT+ (A-8). GND at A-7 goes to Antenna Motor Control Relay and Woofer Amplifier ground. NOTE: The POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified. For full details, see page BE-9.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p746 OEM manual
-
Radio-Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier, w/Woofer): Symbol P
Wiring diagram for Radio-Tape Player Unit with separate power amplifier and woofer, designated Symbol P.
-
Radio-Tape Player Unit + CD Player: Symbol C
Wiring diagram for Radio-Tape Player Unit combined with CD Player, designated Symbol C.
-
THE POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT has been simplified.
For full details, see page BE-8.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · System Description
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p747 OEM manual
-
RADIO WAVE BAND
The radio wave bands used in radio broadcasting are as follows: 30 kHz–300 kHz = LF (Low Frequency); 300 kHz–3 MHz = MF (Medium Frequency), AM radio wave uses amplitude modulation spanning MF; 3 MHz–30 MHz = HF (High Frequency); 30 MHz–300 MHz = VHF (Very High Frequency), FM radio wave uses frequency modulation spanning VHF.
-
SERVICE AREA
There is great difference in the size of the service area for AM, FM monaural, and FM stereo broadcasting. Thus it may happen that FM broadcast cannot be received even though AM comes in very clearly. Not only does FM stereo have the smallest service area, but it also picks up static and other types of interference ('noise') the most easily.
-
RECEPTION PROBLEMS — Fading
Besides electrical interference, AM broadcasts are also susceptible to other types of interference, especially at night. This is because AM radio waves bounce off the ionosphere at night. These radio waves then interfere with the signals from the same transmitter that reach the vehicle's antenna directly. This type of interference is called 'fading'.
-
RECEPTION PROBLEMS — Multipath
One type of interference caused by the bouncing of radio waves off of obstructions is called 'multipath'. Multipath occurs when a signal from the broadcast transmitter antenna bounces off of buildings and mountains and interferes with the signal that is received directly.
-
RECEPTION PROBLEMS — Fade Out
Because FM radio waves are of higher frequencies than AM radio waves, they bounce off of buildings, mountains, and other obstructions. For this reason, FM signals often seem to gradually disappear or fade away as the vehicle goes behind a building or other obstruction. This is called 'fade out'.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p748 OEM manual
-
COMPACT DISC PLAYER — Overview
Compact Disc (hereafter called 'CD') players use a laser beam pick-up to read the digital signals recorded on the CD and reproduce analog signals of the music, etc. There are 4.7 in. (12 cm) and 3.2 in. (8 cm) CD available.
- Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part of the player unit. Do not insert any object other than a disc into the slot.
- CD players use invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation explosure if directed. Be sure to operate the player correctly as instructed.
-
MAINTENANCE — Tape Player Head Cleaning
(a) Raise the cassette door with your finger. Next using a pencil or like object, push in the guide. (b) Using a cleaning pen or cotton applicator soaked in cleaner, clean the head surface, pinch rollers and capstans.
-
MAINTENANCE — CD Player Disc Cleaning
If the Disc gets dirty, clean the Disc by wiping the surfaces from the center to outside in the radial directions with a soft cloth.
- Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti-static record preservative.
-
AUDIO TYPES
Audio unit types and their symbols: Radio (Symbol: R); Radio-Tape Player Unit Radio 1-Din Type with Built-in Power Amplifier (Symbol: U) or Separate Power Amplifier (Symbol: P); 2-Din Type (Symbol: U); Radio-Tape Player Unit + CD Player (Symbol: C).
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · HOW TO USE DIAGNOSTIC CHART
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p749 OEM manual
-
AUDIO SYSTEM TYPE AND SYMBOL USED
Confirm the applicable type of audio system. See page BE-137. Symbols: R = w/o Tape Player, S = Radio-Tape Player (Separate), U = Radio-Tape Player Unit w/o CD Player, C = w/CD Player.
-
SYMBOL FOR TYPE OF AUDIO SYSTEM THE QUESTION APPLIES TO
If the audio system type is not applicable, proceed to next question below.
-
JUNCTION WITHOUT BLACK CIRCLE
Proceed to next question below.
-
JUNCTION WITH BLACK CIRCLE
Proceed to question for applicable audio system type.
-
SELECT QUESTION FOR APPLICABLE AUDIO SYSTEM TYPE
At branching points marked with symbol 5, select the question row that corresponds to the applicable audio system type (R, S, C) when diagnosing NO POWER COMING IN condition.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Anti-Theft System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p750 OEM manual
-
SETTING SYSTEM
The system is in operation once the customer has pushed the required buttons and entered the customer-selected 3-digit ID number. (Refer to the Owner's Manual 'SETTING THE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM'). When the audio system is shipped the ID number has not been input, so the anti-theft system is not in operation. If the ID number has not been input, the audio system remains the same as a normal audio system.
-
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM OPERATION
If the normal electrical power source (connector or battery terminal) is cut off, the audio system becomes inoperable, even if the power supply resumes.
-
CANCELLING SYSTEM
The ID number chosen by the customer is input to cancel the anti-theft system. (Refer to the Owner's Manual 'IF THE SYSTEM IS ACTIVATED'). To change or cancel the ID number, please refer to the Owner's Manual 'CANCELLING THE SYSTEM'.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Troubleshooting
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p751 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT NOTICE
When replacing the internal mechanism (computer part) of the audio system, be careful that no part of your body or clothing comes in contact with the terminals of the leads from the IC, etc. of the replacement part (spare part).
-
INSPECTION HINT
This inspection procedure is a simple troubleshooting which should be carried out on the vehicle during system operation and was prepared on the assumption of system component troubles (except for the wires and connectors, etc.). Always inspect the trouble taking the following items into consideration: Open or short circuit of the wire harness; Connector or terminal connection fault; For audio systems with anti-theft system, troubleshooting items marked (*) indicate that 'Troubleshooting for ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM' should be carried out first.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Troubleshooting for Anti-Theft System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p752 OEM manual
-
REFER TO OWNER'S MANUAL
Refer to Owner's Manual for operation details of ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM.
-
RESET ID NUMBER AFTER CANCELLATION
When the ID number has been cancelled, reset the same number after completing the operation, or inform the customer that it has been cancelled.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Diagnostic Flowcharts
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p755 OEM manual
-
NOISE PRESENT, BUT AM-FM NOT OPERATING (Radio Diagnostic 3)
Diagnostic flowchart for condition: noise present but AM-FM not operating. Applies to R: Radio, U: Radio-Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier), P: Radio-Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). Step 1: Is power for the antenna being output from the radio or radio assembly? No → Radio or radio assembly faulty. Yes → For R/U: Go to No. 23. For P: Is power for the antenna being output from the power amplifier? No → Power amplifier faulty. Yes → Go to No. 23. If radio side faulty (R/U): Radio or radio assembly faulty. Is tape player operating normally? Yes → Radio or radio assembly faulty. No → Hissing sound from speaker? No → Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair. Yes → Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair.
-
EITHER SPEAKER DOES NOT WORK (Radio Diagnostic 4)
Diagnostic flowchart for condition: either speaker does not work. Applies to R: Radio, U: Radio-Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier), P: Radio-Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). Step 1 (U/P): Is tape player operating normally? Yes → Radio assembly faulty. No → Step 2 (R/U/P): Is hiss produced by non-functioning speaker? Yes → R: Radio faulty. U: Radio assembly faulty. P: Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair. No → Is there continuity in speaker wire harness? No → Speaker wire harness faulty. Yes → Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → R: Radio faulty. U: Radio assembly faulty. P: Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Radio Diagnostic
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p756 OEM manual
-
EITHER AM OR FM DOES NOT WORK, RECEPTION POOR (VOLUME FAINT), FEW PRESET TUNING BANDS
Diagnostic flowchart for Radio (R), Radio-Tape Player Unit with Built-in Power Amplifier (U), and Radio-Tape Player Unit with Separate Power Amplifier (P). Step 1: Check for problem with radio wave signals or location (See page BE-123). If Yes: Poor signals, poor location. If No: Check if both AM and FM are defective. If No: R=Radio faulty; U/P=Radio assembly faulty. If Yes: Check if power for the antenna is being output from the radio or radio assembly. If No: R=Radio faulty; U/P=Radio assembly faulty. If Yes (R/U path): Go to No. 23. If Yes (P path): Check if power for the antenna is being output from the power amplifier. If No: Power amplifier faulty. If Yes: Go to No. 23. At No. 23 — If radio side faulty (R): Check if tape player is operating normally. If Yes: Radio assembly faulty. If No: Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? If Yes: Speaker faulty. If No (P path): [no further branch shown here]. If No (R/U path): R=Radio faulty; U=Radio assembly faulty. Check for hissing sound from speaker. If No: Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair. If Yes: Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Tape Player Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p761 OEM manual
-
TAPE PLAYER — POWER COMING IN, BUT TAPE PLAYER NOT OPERATING (Diagnostic 10)
Flowchart diagnostic for tape player not operating when power is present. Applies to: U = Radio-Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier); P = Radio-Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). Steps: (1) Functions OK if different cassette tape inserted? Yes → Cassette tape faulty. No → (2) Is radio operating normally? Yes → Radio assembly faulty. No → (3) Is there continuity in speaker wire harness? No → Speaker wire harness faulty. Yes → (4) Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → [P path] Is hissing sound from speaker? No → Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair. Yes → Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair. [U path] → Radio assembly faulty.
-
TAPE PLAYER — EITHER SPEAKER DOES NOT WORK (Diagnostic 11)
Flowchart diagnostic for either speaker not working. Applies to: U = Radio-Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier); P = Radio-Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). Steps: (1) Is radio operating normally? Yes → Radio assembly faulty. No → (2) Is hiss produced by non-functioning speaker? Yes → U: Radio assembly faulty. P: Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair. No → (3) Is there continuity in speaker wire harness? No → Speaker wire harness faulty. Yes → (4) Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → U: Radio assembly faulty. P: Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Tape Player Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p762 OEM manual
-
SOUND QUALITY POOR (VOLUME PAINT) — Tape Player Diagnostic 12
Flowchart diagnostic for poor sound quality on tape player. U = Radio-Tape Player Unit (Built-in Power Amplifier); P = Radio-Tape Player Unit (Separate Power Amplifier). Step 1: Function OK if different cassette tape inserted? Yes → Cassette tape faulty. No → Step 2. Step 2: Operates normally after cleaning the heads? (See page BE-137) Yes → Head dirty. No → Step 3. Step 3: Is radio operating normally? Yes → Radio assembly faulty. No → Step 4. Step 4: Is speaker properly installed? No → Install properly. Yes → Step 5. Step 5: Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → U: Radio assembly faulty. P: Radio assembly or power amplifier faulty.
-
TAPE JAMMED, MALFUNCTION WITH TAPE SPEED OR AUTO-REVERSE — Tape Player Diagnostic 13
Flowchart diagnostic for tape jammed or malfunction with tape speed or auto-reverse. Step 1: Functions OK if different tape (less than 120 mins.) is inserted? Yes → Cassette tape faulty. No → Step 2. Step 2: Is there a foreign object inside tape player? Yes → Remove foreign object. No → Step 3. Step 3: Operates normally after cleaning the heads? (See page BE-137) Yes → Head dirty. No → Radio assembly faulty.
-
APS, SKIP, RPT BUTTONS NOT OPERATING — Tape Player Diagnostic 14
Flowchart diagnostic for APS, SKIP, RPT buttons not operating. Step 1: Functions OK if different cassette tape inserted? No → Radio assembly faulty. Yes → Cassette tape faulty. (Less than 3 secs. of silence between songs (APS, RPT). Less than 15 secs. of silence (SKIP).)
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · CD Player Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p764 OEM manual
-
CD CANNOT BE INSERTED (Diagnostic 16)
Flowchart diagnostic for CD Player when CD cannot be inserted. Steps: 1) Is CD already inserted? Yes→Eject CD. No→2) Is auto search button of radio operating normally? Yes→Is +B applied to CD player? No→Radio assembly faulty. Yes→Check if GND (wire harness side) to CD player is OK? NG→Radio assembly faulty. OK→CD player faulty. No→3) Check if DOME fuse is OK? NG→Replace fuse. OK→4) Is +B applied to power amplifier? No→+B wire harness faulty. Yes→5) Check if GND (wire harness side) to power amplifier is OK? NG→GND faulty. OK→6) Is +B applied to radio assembly? No→Power amplifier faulty. Yes→7) Check if GND (wire harness side) to radio assembly is OK? NG→Power amplifier faulty. OK→Radio assembly faulty.
-
CD INSERTS, BUT NO POWER (Diagnostic 17)
Flowchart diagnostic for CD Player when CD inserts but there is no power. Steps: 1) Is radio operating normally? Yes→Is ACC applied to CD player? No→Radio assembly faulty. Yes→CD player faulty. No→2) Check if CIG & RAD fuse is OK? NG→Replace fuse. OK→3) Is ACC applied to power amplifier? No→ACC wire harness faulty. Yes→4) Is ACC applied to radio assembly? No→Is there continuity in ACC wire harness between the radio assembly and the power amplifier? No→ACC wire harness faulty. Yes→Power amplifier faulty. Yes→Radio assembly faulty.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · CD Player Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p765 OEM manual
-
CD PLAYER — POWER COMING IN, BUT CD PLAYER NOT OPERATING
Diagnostic flowchart #18: (1) Is CD inserted correct side up? No → Insert correctly. Yes → (2) Functions OK if different CD inserted? Yes → CD faulty. No → (3) Is radio operating normally? Yes → Is temperature inside cabin hot? Yes → Protective circuit in operation. No → Has sudden temperature change occurred inside cabin? Yes → Formation of condensation due to temp. change. No → CD player faulty. No (radio not operating) → (4) Is there continuity in speaker wire harness? No → Speaker wire harness faulty. Yes → (5) Temporarily install another speaker. Functions OK? Yes → Speaker faulty. No → (6) Hissing sound from speaker? No → Power amplifier faulty. Recheck system after repair. Yes → Radio assembly faulty. Recheck system after repair.
-
CD PLAYER — SOUND JUMPS
Diagnostic flowchart #19: (1) Does sound jump only during strong vibration? Yes → Jumping caused by vibration. No → (2) Is CD player properly installed? No → Install properly. Yes → (3) Functions OK if different CD inserted? Yes → CD faulty. No → (4) Has sudden temperature change occurred inside cabin? Yes → Formation of condensation due to temp. change. No → CD player faulty.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p766 OEM manual
-
CD Player – SOUND QUALITY POOR (VOLUME FAINT)
Diagnostic flowchart #20: (1) If functions OK with different CD inserted → CD faulty. (2) If radio operating normally (No to #1) → CD player faulty. (3) If speaker not properly installed (No to #2) → Install properly. (4) If temporarily installed another speaker and functions OK (Yes to #3) → Speaker faulty. (5) If No to #4 → Radio assembly, CD player or power amplifier faulty.
-
CD Player – EITHER SPEAKER DOES NOT WORK
Diagnostic flowchart #21: (1) If radio operating normally → CD player faulty. (2) If hiss produced by non-functioning speaker (No to #1) → Radio assembly faulty; recheck system after repair. (3) If no continuity in speaker wire harness (No to #2) → Speaker wire harness faulty. (4) If temporarily installed another speaker and functions OK (Yes to #3) → Speaker faulty. (5) If No to #4 → Power amplifier faulty; recheck system after repair.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Audio System · Noise Diagnostics
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p769 OEM manual
-
NOISE PRODUCED BY VIBRATION OR SHOCK WHILE DRIVING
Diagnostic 24: Check if speaker is properly installed. If No, install properly. If Yes, check if each system is correctly installed. If No, install properly. If Yes, with vehicle stopped, lightly tap each system and check if noise is produced. If Yes, each system is faulty. If No, noise is produced by static electricity accumulating in the vehicle body.
-
NOISE PRODUCED WHEN ENGINE STARTS
Diagnostic 25: Sequential flowchart to identify noise source when engine starts. (1) Whistling noise which becomes high-pitched when accelerator strongly depressed, disappears shortly after engine stops → Yes: Alternator noise. (2) Whining noise occurs when A/C is operating → Yes: A/C noise. (3) Scratching noise occurs during sudden acceleration, driving on rough roads or when ignition switch is turned on → Yes: Fuel gauge noise. (4) Clicking sound heard when horn button is pressed, then released. Whirring/grating sound when pushed continuously → Yes: Horn noise. (5) Murmuring sound, stops when engine stops → Yes: Ignition noise. (6) Tick-tock noise, occurs in co-ordination with blinking of flasher → Yes: Turn signal noise. (7) Noise occurs during window washer operation → Yes: Washer noise. (8) Scratching noise occurs while engine is running, continues a while even after engine stops → Yes: Water temp. gauge noise. (9) Scraping noise in time with wiper beat → Yes: Wiper noise. (10) No to all above → Other type of noise.
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM · Clock · Troubleshooting
Body electrical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p771 OEM manual
-
CLOCK CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
As shown in the illustration, those are clock circuit and connector diagrams. Inspect each terminal for applicable trouble.
BODY · General Information
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p773 OEM manual
-
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS — APPLY PROTECTION TAPE TO BODY
If there is a possibility the body and/or parts may be damaged, first remove the danger before performing repair operations. Apply protection tape to the body adjacent to the body parts when removing and installing.
-
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS — APPLY PROTECTION TAPE TO TOOLS
When prying off the body parts with a screwdriver or scraper etc., be sure to apply protection tape to the tip or blade to prevent damage to the paint film or body parts.
-
ANTI-RUST TREATMENT — REPAIR PEELING OR CRACKED SEALANT/UNDERCOAT
If anti-rust agents are damaged while repairing other parts, be sure to repair the anti-rust agent. If body sealant, paint film or undercoat are damaged by peeling, cracks, etc., be sure to repair each with an anti-rust agent.
-
ANTI-RUST TREATMENT — APPLY RUST INHIBITOR AFTER LOOSENING HINGES OR PANELS
If a hinge or exterior body panel is loosened or removed, be sure apply rust inhibitor after repairs.
BODY · General Information · Clips
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p774 OEM manual
-
CLIPS — General
The removal and installation methods of typical clips used in body parts are shown in the table below.
- If the clip is damaged during the operation, always replace it with a new clip.
-
CLIP TYPE 1 (Solid Triangle) — Removal/Installation
Use a Clip Remover to pry the clip upward for removal. Alternatively, use Pliers to squeeze the clip and pull upward for removal/installation.
-
CLIP TYPE 2 (Dashed Triangle) — Removal/Installation
Use a Screwdriver inserted under the clip head to pry and lift the clip upward for removal.
-
CLIP TYPE 3 (Dashed Rectangle) — Removal/Installation
Use a Scraper inserted under the clip to pry and lift the clip upward for removal.
BODY · General Information · CLIPS
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p775 OEM manual
-
CLIP REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (Push-pin type with center pin)
To remove: Push the center pin down, then pull the entire clip upward out of the panel. To install: Insert the clip into the hole and press the center pin down to expand and lock the clip in place.
-
CLIP REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (Screw-expansion type)
To remove: Rotate the center screw to loosen it, then pull the entire clip upward out of the panel using a trim removal tool. To install: Insert the clip into the hole and press the center screw down to lock the clip in place.
BODY · General Information · SRS AIRBAG
SRS / airbag
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p776 OEM manual
-
WAIT 20 SECONDS BEFORE STARTING WORK
Work must be started after 20 seconds or longer from the time the ignition switch is set to the LOCK position and the negative (–) terminal cable disconnected from the battery. The airbag system is equipped with a back-up power source so that if work is started within 20 seconds of disconnecting the negative (–) terminal cable of the battery, the airbag may be deployed.
-
DO NOT USE BACK-UP POWER SUPPLY
To avoid erasing the memory of each memory system, never use a back-up power supply from outside the vehicle.
-
REMOVE AIRBAG SENSORS BEFORE SHOCK-INDUCING REPAIRS
Before repairs, remove the airbag sensors if shocks are likely to be applied to the sensors during repairs.
-
REPLACE FRONT AIRBAG SENSOR SET BOLT WITH NEW ONE AFTER REMOVAL
The front airbag sensor set bolt has been anti-rust treated. When the sensor is removed, always replace the set bolt with a new one.
-
REPLACE DROPPED OR DEFECTIVE AIRBAG COMPONENTS
If the front airbag sensor, center airbag sensor or steering wheel pad have been dropped, or if there are cracks, dents or other defects in the case, bracket or connector, replace them with new ones.
-
NEVER USE AIRBAG PARTS FROM ANOTHER VEHICLE
Never use airbag parts from another vehicle. When replacing parts, replace them with new parts.
-
DO NOT EXPOSE AIRBAG SENSORS OR STEERING WHEEL PAD TO HEAT OR FLAMES
Do not expose the front airbag sensor, center airbag sensor or steering wheel pad directly to hot air or flames.
-
AIRBAG WIRE HARNESS IDENTIFICATION
The airbag system's wire harness is integrated with the cowl wire harness assembly. The wires for the airbag wire harness are encased in a yellow corrugated tube. All the connectors for the system are also a standard yellow color. If the airbag system wire harness becomes disconnected or the connector becomes broken due to an accident, etc., repair or replace it as shown on page AB-21.
-
FIT STEERING WHEEL CORRECTLY TO STEERING COLUMN
The steering wheel must be fitted correctly to the steering column with the spiral cable at the neutral position; otherwise, cable disconnection and other troubles may result. Refer to page AB-16 of this manual concerning correct steering wheel installation.
-
HANDLE STEERING WHEEL PAD WITH PAD TOP SURFACE FACING UP
When removing the steering wheel pad or handling a new steering wheel pad, it should be placed with the pad top surface facing up. In this case, the twin-lock type connector lock lever should be in the locked state and care should be taken to place it so the connector will not be damaged. Storing the pad with its metallic surface up may lead to a serious accident if the airbag inflates for some reason.
-
DO NOT APPLY GREASE OR DETERGENTS TO STEERING WHEEL PAD
Grease should not be applied to the steering wheel pad and the pad should not be cleaned with detergents of any kind.
-
STORE STEERING WHEEL PAD WITHIN TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY LIMITS
Store the steering wheel pad where the ambient temperature remains below 93°C (200°F), without high humidity and away from electrical noise.
-
FOLLOW INFORMATION LABELS ON AIRBAG COMPONENTS
Information labels are attached to the periphery of the airbag components. Follow the notices.
-
AIRBAG WARNING LIGHT INDICATES MALFUNCTION CODE
When the ignition switch is at ACC or ON and the airbag warning light remains on, the center airbag sensor assembly has detected a malfunction code. (See page AB-29)
BODY · Front Door · Components
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p780 OEM manual
-
FRONT DOOR COMPONENTS
Exploded diagram identifying all front door components including: Door Belt Moulding, Door Glass, Clip, Outside Handle, Outside Handle Switch, Door Lock Cylinder, Opening Control Link, Locking Link, Door Lock, Window Regulator (Equalizer Arm), Rear Glass Guide, Door Trim Bracket, Door Pull Handle, Door Trim, Door Inside Handle Bezel, Cap, Cover (w/o Power Window), Regulator Handle, Plate, Snap Ring, Door Trim Pocket, Inside Handle, Service Hole Cover, Lock Plate, Front Glass Guide, Speaker, Door Check, Door Window Upper Stop, Door Trim Support, Door Mirror Bracket, Rear View Mirror, Mirror Cover, Door Weatherstrip, Inner Weatherstrip, Locking Link (upper). Inset shows w/Power Window window regulator assembly variant.
BODY · Front Door · Adjustment and Disassembly
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p781 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY OF FRONT DOOR — REMOVE REGULATOR HANDLE (w/o Power Window)
Pull off the snap ring with a shop rag and remove the regulator handle and plate. (See page BO-9)
-
DISASSEMBLY OF FRONT DOOR — REMOVE DOOR INSIDE HANDLE BEZEL
Remove the screw and pull the inside handle bezel.
BODY · Front Door · Replacement of Glass / Assembly of Front Door
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p786 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF FRONT DOOR — BEFORE INSTALLING PARTS, COAT THEM WITH MP GREASE
See page BO-9. Before installing parts, coat them with MP grease as follows.
- Do not apply MP grease to the spring of the window regulator.
-
APPLY MP GREASE TO WINDOW REGULATOR
Apply MP grease to the sliding surface and gears of the window regulator.
- Do not apply MP grease to the spring of the window regulator.
-
APPLY MP GREASE TO DOOR LOCK
Apply MP grease to the sliding surface of the door lock.
BODY · Moulding
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p798 OEM manual
-
REMOVE ROOF DRIP SIDE FINISH FRONT MOULDING
(w/ T-Bar Roof) Remove four screws and the moulding. (w/o T-Bar Roof) Remove eight screws and the moulding.
-
REMOVE ROOF SIDE WEATHERSTRIP REAR RETAINER
Remove three screws and the retainer.
BODY · Moulding · Door Belt Moulding / Quarter Window Glass with Moulding
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p799 OEM manual
-
Door Belt Moulding INSTALLATION
Step 1: INSTALL DOOR BELT MOULDING (See step 12 on page BO-17). Step 2: INSTALL FRONT DOOR COMPONENT PARTS (See steps 13, 15, 16, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28 and 29 on pages BO-17 to 21).
-
Quarter Window Glass with Moulding REMOVAL
See steps 1 to 10 on pages BO-42 to 43.
-
Quarter Window Glass with Moulding INSTALLATION
See steps 1 to 12 on pages BO-43 to 44.
BODY · Moulding · Side Protection Moulding
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p800 OEM manual
-
STORE IN COOL PLACE
Store in cool place, avoiding direct sunlight, high temperature and dust.
-
AVOID SOLVENTS AND HEAT SOURCES
The moulding is of polyvinyl chloride, so do not allow it to come in contact with thinner or other solvent, open flame, or boiling water.
-
STORAGE TIME LIMIT
The storage time for the moulding and adhesive are limited to about 9 months.
BODY · Moulding · Installation
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p803 OEM manual
-
NOTICE — MOULDING INSTALLATION
Be sure that the body and moulding are heated to the proper temperature.
-
NOTICE — ADHESIVE-COATED PARTS
Do not depress the adhesive-coated parts excessively just hold them down with your thumb.
-
NOTICE — ADHESIVE OVERFLOW
Scrape off any overflowing adhesive with a plastic spatula and clean the surface with a dry rag.
-
NOTICE — POST-INSTALLATION WASHING
After installation, do not wash the vehicle for 24 hours.
BODY · Moulding · Back Window Moulding
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p805 OEM manual
-
REMOVE SIX SCREWS
Remove six screws when removing the back window moulding.
-
PRY OUT MOULDING
Insert the screwdriver between the moulding and the panel to pry out.
- Tape the screwdriver tip before use.
- Do not damage the body.
-
PULL MOULDING UPWARD
Pull the moulding upward to remove it.
BODY · Windshield · Prepare Items Listed
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p806 OEM manual
-
CHOOSE SUITABLE ADHESIVE SET
Using an adhesive set suitable for the ambient temperature. Use part 08850-00070 (Windshield glass adhesive set No.15) for 0–15°C (32–59°F), part 08850-00080 (Windshield glass adhesive set No.35) for 15–35°C (59–95°F), and part 08850-00090 (Windshield glass adhesive set No.45) for 35–45°C (95–113°F).
-
CHECK ADHESIVE USABLE TIME
After mixing main and hardening agents, finish glass installation within the specified time as shown. Example: For glass installation in an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F), apply adhesive set No. 35 within 45 minutes.
-
CHECK ADHESIVE HARDENING TIME
After main and hardening agents are mixed, leak tests should be made only after the hardening time has elapsed. Example: The hardening time for adhesive set No. 35 with an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F) is 2.5 hours.
- Do not drive the vehicle until at least double the hardening time has elapsed.
BODY · Windshield
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p809 OEM manual
-
REMOVE WINDSHIELD GLASS
Step 11 of windshield removal procedure.
- When separating, take care not to damage the paint and interior and exterior ornaments.
- Leave as much of the urethane layer on the body as possible when cutting off the glass.
BODY · Quarter Window Glass
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p814 OEM manual
-
REMOVE QUARTER WINDOW GLASS WITH MOULDING
Step 8 of removal procedure.
- Do not damage the body.
BODY · Back Window Glass · Removal and Installation
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p817 OEM manual
-
REMOVE BACK WINDOW LOWER MOULDING
Using the knife, cut off the moulding as shown.
- Do not damage the body with the knife.
-
REMOVE BACK WINDOW GLASS
Remove two screws. Remove the glass in the same manner as windshield. See step 11 on page BO-38.
BODY · T-Bar Roof
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p820 OEM manual
-
ADJUSTMENT OF REMOVABLE ROOF
Procedure to adjust the removable roof in four directions using two types of lock guides (one with hole centered, one with hole 1.5 mm (0.059 in.) off center).
BODY · T-Bar Roof · Disassembly of Removable Roof
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p823 OEM manual
-
REMOVE ROOF TOP MOULDING
Remove four nuts and the top moulding.
BODY · T-Bar Roof
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p824 OEM manual
-
REMOVE SIDE RAIL WEATHERSTRIP
Remove two screws and the weatherstrip.
-
REMOVE SIDE RAIL RETAINER
Remove three screws and the retainer.
BODY · T-Bar Roof · Assembly / Disassembly of Sunshade Trim
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p825 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY OF SUNSHADE TRIM
See page BO-48. REMOVE SUNSHADE TRIM HOLDER: Remove two screws and the holder.
-
ASSEMBLY OF SUNSHADE TRIM
See page BO-48. INSTALL SUNSHADE TRIM HOLDER: Install the holder with two screws.
BODY · Moon Roof · Components
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p828 OEM manual
-
MOON ROOF COMPONENTS
Exploded diagram identifying all moon roof components: Removable Roof, Sunshade Trim, Wind Defector Panel, Sun Visor, Holder, Inner Rear View Mirror, Map Light, Map Light Cover, Hinge Case, Opening Trim, Auxiliary Catch, Front Pillar Garnish, Sunshade Lock Stopper, Sunshade Trim Knob, Inner Weatherstrip, Roof Headlining, Removable Roof Garnish, Lock Handle, Spacer, Lock Base, Lock Garnish, Door Scuff Plate.
BODY · Moon Roof · On-Vehicle Inspection & Adjustment of Removable Roof
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p829 OEM manual
-
INSPECT REMOVABLE ROOF ALIGNMENT
With the removable roof installed, check for water leakage. Check for a difference in level between the removable roof and the roof panel. Rear side: 1.7 +0/-2.5 mm (0.067 +0/-0.098 in.)
BODY · Moon Roof
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p832 OEM manual
-
DISASSEMBLY OF REMOVABLE ROOF AND SUNSHADE TRIM (See page BO-57)
1. REMOVE REMOVABLE ROOF GARNISH — Remove two screws and the garnish. 2. REMOVE SUNSHADE LOCK STOPPER — (a) Remove the screw and the sunshade trim knob. (b) Remove two screws and the stopper.
-
ASSEMBLY OF REMOVABLE ROOF AND SUNSHADE TRIM (See page BO-57)
1. INSTALL REMOVABLE ROOF GARNISH — Install the garnish with two screws. 2. INSTALL SUNSHADE LOCK STOPPER — (a) Install the lock stopper with two screws. (b) Install the sunshade trim knob with the screw.
BODY · Instrument Panel · Removal/Installation
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p840 OEM manual
-
REMOVE FOLLOWING PARTS FROM SAFETY PAD
Remove the following parts from the safety pad: Defroster nozzle, Defroster nozzle No. 1 garnish, Defroster nozzle No. 2 garnish, Meter hood No. 1 retainer, Meter hood No. 2 retainer, Glove compartment door lock mounting bracket, Duct heater to register No. 1, Duct heater to register No. 4, No.3 register, Under cover No. 1 bracket, Pin.
-
REMOVE FOLLOWING PARTS
Remove the following parts: Defroster lower nozzle, Duct heater to register No. 3, No. 1 brace, No. 2 brace, Console box mounting No. 1 bracket.
-
SCREW SIZE CODES
Screw sizes in the illustration on the previous page are indicated using codes: Code A — phi=6 mm (0.24 in), L=20 mm (0.79 in); Code B — phi=4.5 mm (0.177 in), L=12 mm (0.47 in); Code C — phi=5.22 mm (0.2055 in), L=16 mm (0.63 in); Code D — phi=6 mm (0.24 in), L=14 mm (0.55 in); Code E — no size specified.
BODY · Body Dimensions · General Information
Body
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p844 OEM manual
-
BASIC DIMENSIONS — THREE-DIMENSIONAL DISTANCE
Straight-line distance between the centers of two measuring points.
-
BASIC DIMENSIONS — TWO-DIMENSIONAL DISTANCE
Horizontal distance in forward/rearward between the centers of two measuring points, and the height from an imaginary standard line.
-
SYMMETRY
In cases in which only one dimension is given, left and right are symmetrical.
-
DIMENSIONS AS REFERENCE
The dimensions in the following drawing indicate actual distance. Therefore, please use the dimensions as a reference.
-
MEASURING — USE TRACKING GAUGE
Basically, all measurements are to be done with a tracking gauge. For portions where it is not possible to use a tracking gauge, a tape measure should be used.
-
MEASURING — TRACKING GAUGE CONDITION
Use only a tracking gauge that has no looseness in the body, measuring plate, or pointers.
-
MEASURING HINT 1 — POINTER HEIGHT
The height of the left and right pointers must be equal.
-
MEASURING HINT 2 — CALIBRATE BEFORE USE
Always calibrate the tracking gauge before measuring or after adjusting the pointer height.
-
MEASURING HINT 3 — HANDLE WITH CARE
Take care not to drop the tracking gauge or otherwise shock it.
-
MEASURING HINT 4 — CONFIRM POINTER SEATING
Confirm that the pointers are securely in the holes.
-
TAPE MEASURE — AVOID TWISTS AND BENDS
When using a tape measure, avoid twists and bends in the tape.
-
DIAGONAL MEASUREMENT — FRONT SPRING SUPPORT
When tracking a diagonal measurement from the front spring support inner hole to the suspension member upper rear installation hole, measure along the front spring support panel surface.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · General Information
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p854 OEM manual
-
ELECTRICAL PARTS
Before removing and inspecting the electrical parts, set the ignition switch to the LOCK position and disconnect the negative (-) terminal cable from the battery.
- Work must not be started until after at least 20 seconds or longer from the time the negative (-) terminal cable is disconnected.
-
SRS AIRBAG SYSTEM
Failure to carry out service operation in the correct sequence could cause the airbag system to deploy, possibly leading to a serious accident. When removal or installation of the parts and the yellow wire harness and connector for the airbag is necessary, refer to the precautionary notices in the AB section before performing the operation.
- Failure to carry out service operation in the correct sequence could cause the airbag system to deploy, possibly leading to a serious accident.
-
WHEN HANDLING REFRIGERANT (R-12), FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED
(a) Do not handle refrigerant in an enclosed area or near an open flame. (b) Always wear eye protection. (c) Be careful that liquid refrigerant does not get in your eyes or on your skin. If liquid refrigerant gets in your eyes or on your skin: Do not rub. Wash the area with lots of cool water. Apply clean petroleum jelly to the skin. Go immediately to a physician or hospital for professional treatment. Do not attempt to treat yourself.
- Do not handle refrigerant in an enclosed area or near an open flame.
- Always wear eye protection.
- Be careful that liquid refrigerant does not get in your eyes or on your skin.
- If liquid refrigerant contacts eyes or skin: do not rub, wash with lots of cool water, apply clean petroleum jelly, seek immediate professional medical treatment, do not attempt to treat yourself.
-
WHEN REPLACING PARTS IN REFRIGERANT LINE
(a) Discharge the refrigerant in the line slowly before replacement. (b) Insert a plug immediately in disconnected parts to prevent the entry of moisture and dust. (c) Do not leave a new condenser or receiver, etc., lying around with the plug removed.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · General Information
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p855 OEM manual
-
DISCHARGE REFRIGERANT BEFORE INSTALLING NEW COMPRESSOR
Discharge the refrigerant from the charging valve before installing a new compressor. If the refrigerant is not discharged first, compressor oil will spray out with the refrigerant gas when the plug is removed.
-
DO NOT USE A TORCH FOR TUBE BENDING OR LENGTHENING
Do not use a torch for tube bending or lengthening operations. If tubes are heated with a torch, a layer of oxidation forms inside the tube, causing the same kind of trouble as an accumulation of dust.
-
WHEN HANDLING REFRIGERANT CONTAINER (SERVICE CAN)
Guidelines for safe handling of refrigerant service cans.
- The container must never be heated.
- Containers must be kept below 40°C (104°F).
- If warming a service can with hot water, be careful that the valve on top of the service can is never immersed in the water, as the water may permeate the refrigerant cycle.
- Empty service cans must never be re-used.
-
WHEN A/C IS ON AND REFRIGERANT GAS IS BEING REPLENISHED
Precautions to observe when replenishing refrigerant gas with the A/C on.
- If there is not enough refrigerant gas in the refrigerant cycle, oil lubrication will be insufficient and compressor burnout may occur, so take care to avoid this.
- If the valve on the high pressure side is opened, refrigerant flows in the reverse direction and could cause the service can to rupture, so open and close the valve on the low pressure side only.
- If the service can is inverted and refrigerant is loaded in a liquid state, the liquid is compressed and causes the compressor to break down, so the refrigerant must be in a gaseous state.
- Be careful not to load too much refrigerant gas, as this can cause trouble such as inadequate cooling, poor fuel economy, engine overheating, etc.
-
WHEN USING GAS-CYLINDER TYPE GAS LEAK TESTER
Precautions when using a gas-cylinder type gas leak tester.
- As a naked flame is used, first make sure that there are no flammable substances nearby before using it.
- Be careful, as a poisonous gas is produced when refrigerant gas comes in contact with heated parts.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Description · Locations of A/C System
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p856 OEM manual
-
LOCATIONS OF A/C SYSTEM
Top-down diagram of the Toyota MR2 SW20 showing the physical locations of all A/C system components: Condenser, Condenser Fan Motor, Radiator Fan Motor, Receiver, Water Temperature Switch, Pressure Switch, Relay Block No. 5, A/C Amplifier, Water Valve, Air Inlet Servomotor, Mode Servomotor, Blower Motor, Heater Radiator, Blower Unit, Heater Unit, Heat Sensing Tube, Expansion Valve, Evaporator, Magnetic Clutch Relay, Thermistor, Compressor Assembly, A/C Idle Up VSV. Note: RHD vehicles, for parts marked (*), are in always symmetrically opposite to LHD vehicles.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Description · Dampers Position
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p858 OEM manual
-
DAMPARS POSITION
Diagram and table describing the position of air inlet damper, mode damper, and air mix damper for each A/C control lever position. The Air Inlet Control Lever has two positions: Fresh (damper position 1) and Recirc (damper position 2). The Temperature Control Lever ranges from Warm to Cool, controlling damper positions 3, 4, and 5. The Mode Control Lever has five positions: Def (damper positions 8, 11, 15 — airflow to Side FACE and DEF vents), Foot/Def (damper positions 9, 12, 15 — airflow to Side FACE, FOOT, and DEF vents), Foot (damper positions 10, 13, 15 — airflow to Side FACE and FOOT vents, small DEF), Bi-Level (damper positions 9, 14, 16 — airflow to Center FACE, Side FACE, and FOOT vents), Face (damper positions 8, 14, 17 — airflow to Center FACE and Side FACE vents). The size of circle (O) indicates the proportion of the air flow volume.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Preparation
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p859 OEM manual
-
SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Lists all special service tools (SST) required for air conditioning system service, including tool names, SST numbers, and their intended uses.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p860 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING PRIORITY TABLE
Find the cause of trouble more easily by properly using the table. Numbers indicate the order of priority of the causes of trouble. Check each part in the order shown. If necessary, replace the part.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Refrigeration System
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p863 OEM manual
-
HINT at No. 6
These gauge indications are shown when the refrigeration system has been opened and the refrigerant charged without evacuating air.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Refrigeration System
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p865 OEM manual
-
DISCHARGING OF REFRIGERANT IN REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
See Air Conditioning Fundamentals and Repairs Pub. No. 36950E.
-
EVACUATING OF AIR IN REFRIGERATION SYSTEM AND CHARGING WITH REFRIGERANT
See Air Conditioning Fundamentals and Repairs Pub. No. 36950E.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Refrigeration Lines
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p867 OEM manual
-
INSPECT HOSE AND TUBE CONNECTIONS FOR LOOSENESS
Inspect hose and tube connections for looseness.
-
INSPECT HOSES AND TUBES FOR LEAKAGE
Using a gas leak tester, check for leakage of refrigerant.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Compressor
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p880 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CLEARANCE OF MAGNETIC CLUTCH
Set the dial-gauge to the pressure plate of the magnetic clutch. Connect the magnetic clutch lead wire to the positive (+) terminal of the battery. Check the clearance between the pressure plate and rotor, when connect the negative (–) terminal of the battery. If the clearance is not within standard clearance, adjust the clearance using shims to obtain the standard clearance.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Compressor, Receiver
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p881 OEM manual
-
RECEIVER — ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION: INSPECT SIGHT GLASS, FUSIBLE PLUG AND FITTINGS FOR LEAKAGE
Use a gas leak tester. Repair as necessary.
-
REMOVAL OF RECEIVER — DISCHARGE REFRIGERANT FROM REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Step 1 of receiver removal.
-
REMOVAL OF RECEIVER — REMOVE LEFT SIDE FRONT FENDER LINER AND UNDER COVER
Step 2 of receiver removal.
-
REMOVAL OF RECEIVER — DISCONNECT TWO LIQUID TUBES FROM RECEIVER
Step 3 of receiver removal. HINT: Cap the open fittings immediately to keep moisture out of the system.
-
REMOVAL OF RECEIVER — REMOVE RECEIVER FROM RECEIVER HOLDER
Step 4 of receiver removal.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Receiver, Condenser
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p882 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CONDENSER FINS FOR BLOCKAGE OR DAMAGE
If the fins are clogged, wash them with water and dry with compressed air. Be careful not to damage the fins. If the fins are bent, straighten them with a screwdriver or pliers.
- Be careful not to damage the fins.
-
INSPECT CONDENSER FITTINGS FOR LEAKAGE
Repair as necessary.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Condenser, Cooling Unit
Cooling
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p884 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF COOLING UNIT
1. DISCONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE FROM BATTERY 2. DISCHARGE REFRIGERANT FROM REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 3. DISCONNECT SUCTION TUBE FROM COOLING UNIT OUTLET FITTING 4. DISCONNECT LIQUID TUBE FROM COOLING UNIT INLET FITTING — HINT: Cap the open fittings immediately to keep moisture out of the system. 5. REMOVE GLOVE BOX 6. DISCONNECT CONNECTORS 7. REMOVE COOLING UNIT — Remove the three nuts and four bolts and the cooling unit.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Cooling Unit
Cooling
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p886 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF COOLING UNIT — INSTALL COMPONENTS ON EVAPORATOR
Assembly sequence for cooling unit components on evaporator.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Evaporator, Expansion Valve
Engine — mechanical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p888 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF EVAPORATOR
See Disassembly of Cooling Unit on page AC-30.
-
INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATOR
See Assembly of Cooling Unit on page AC-32.
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION (EXPANSION VALVE)
Steps to inspect expansion valve on vehicle.
-
REMOVAL OF EXPANSION VALVE
See Disassembly of Cooling Unit on page AC-30.
-
INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION VALVE
See Assembly of Cooling Unit on page AC-32.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Thermistor
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p889 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF THERMISTOR
See Disassembly of Cooling Unit on page AC-30.
-
INSTALLATION OF THERMISTOR
See Assembly of Cooling Unit on page AC-32.
-
INSPECT THERMISTOR OPERATION
Place the thermistor in cold water more than 10 cm (3.94 in.) deep. While varying the temperature of the water, measure the resistance at the connector and at the same time, measure the temperature of the water with a thermometer. Compare the two readings on the chart. If the intersection is not between the two lines, replace the thermistor.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · A/C Control Assembly · Mode Control Switch
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p891 OEM manual
-
INSPECT SWITCH CONTINUITY — Fresh/Recirc Switch
Verify continuity at terminals A-1, A-9, A-15 for FRESH (Free) and RECIRC (Pushed in) switch positions using the continuity table shown. If continuity is not as specified, replace the A/C control assembly.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · A/C Control Assembly
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p892 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF A/C SWITCH — INSPECT ILLUMINATION
Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal C-1 and the negative (–) lead to terminal C-4, then check that the illumination lights up. If illumination does not light up, test the bulb.
-
INSPECTION OF A/C SWITCH — INSPECT INDICATOR
(a) Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal C-5 and the negative (–) lead to terminal C-2. (b) Push the A/C switch button in and check that the indicator lights up. (c) Then, connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal C-3 and check that the indicator dims. If indicators operation is not as specified, replace the A/C switch.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · A/C Control Assembly · Temperature Control Lever
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p893 OEM manual
-
INSPECT SWITCH CONTINUITY
Using Connector C, check continuity between terminals C-3, C-5, and C-6 at switch positions OFF and A/C. At OFF: no continuity at any terminal. At A/C: continuity between C-5 and C-6. If continuity is not as specified, replace the A/C switch.
-
ADJUST AIR MIX DAMPER CONTROL CABLE
Set the air mix damper and the control lever to COOL, then install the control cable and lock the clamp.
-
ADJUST WATER VALVE CONTROL CABLES
Set the water valve and the control lever to COOL, then install the control cable and lock the clamp.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Servomotors
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p895 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF MODE SERVOMOTOR — INSPECT SERVOMOTOR OPERATION
Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 6 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 7. Then connect the negative (–) lead from the battery to each terminal and check that the arm rotates to each position as shown: Terminal 1 = VENT, Terminal 2 = Bi-Level, Terminal 3 = FOOT, Terminal 4 = FOOT/DEF, Terminal 5 = DEF. If operation is not as specified, replace the servomotor.
-
INSPECTION OF BLOWER MOTOR — INSPECT BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 1 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 2, check that the motor operation is smooth. If operation is not as specified, replace the motor.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Heater Main Relay, Magnetic Clutch Relay
Clutch
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p896 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF BLOWER RESISTOR — INSPECT BLOWER RESISTOR CONTINUITY
Check continuity between terminals as follows — Constant: continuity (resistance) between terminal 1 and 3, between terminal 3 and 2, and between terminal 2 and 4. If continuity is not as specified, replace the blower resistor.
-
INSPECTION OF HEATER MAIN RELAY — INSPECT RELAY CONTINUITY
Constant: continuity (coil resistance) between terminals 1 and 2; continuity between terminals 3 and 4 (NO contact open). Apply battery voltage to terminals 1 and 2: continuity between terminals 3 and 5. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
-
INSPECTION OF MAGNETIC CLUTCH RELAY — INSPECT RELAY CONTINUITY
Constant: continuity (coil resistance) between terminals 2 and 3; no continuity between terminals 2 and 4. Apply battery voltage to terminals 1 and 3: continuity between terminals 2 and 4. If continuity is not as specified, replace the relay.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Fan Main Relay, Fan Relay No.1, Fan Relay No.2, Fan Relay No.3, Vacuum Hose Circuit
Air conditioning
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p897 OEM manual
-
FAN MAIN RELAY — INSPECTION OF RELAY
Check the relay the same way as for the Heater Main Relay.
-
FAN RELAY NO.2 — INSPECTION OF RELAY
Check the relay the same way as for the Heater Main Relay.
-
FAN RELAY NO.3 — INSPECTION OF RELAY
Check the relay the same way as for the Fan Relay No.1 Relay.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM · Vacuum Switching Valve (VSV)
Engine — mechanical
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p898 OEM manual
-
ADJUSTMENT OF IDLE-UP SPEED
If idle-up speed is not as specified, adjust the idle-up speed turning the idle speed adjusting screw on the VSV.
- Do not use too much force when tightening the idle adjusting screw.
-
INSPECTION OF VSV OPERATION
Inspect VSV operation as follows: (a) Blow into pipe "A" and check that air does not come out of pipe "B". (b) Apply battery voltage (12V) between the terminals 1 and 2. (c) Blow into pipe "A" and check that air comes out of pipe "B". If a problem is found, replace the VSV.
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · Automatic Transaxle (A241E)
Transmission / transaxle
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p909 OEM manual
-
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (A241E) — Specifications
Engine stall revolution: 2,550 ± 150 rpm. Time lag N→D range: less than 1.2 seconds. Time lag N→R range: less than 1.5 seconds. Engine idle speed (A/C OFF, N range): 700 ± 50 rpm. Shift schedule (throttle valve fully open [fully closed], km/h (mph)): D range 1→2: 53-59 (33-37); 2→3: 102-112 (63-70); 3→O/D: 137-149 (85-93); [3→O/D]: 46-52 (29-32); [O/D→3]: 19-24 (12-15); O/D→3: 131-143 (81-89); 3→2: 98-108 (61-67); 2→1: 44-50 (27-31). 2 range 1→2: 53-59 (33-37); 2→1: 44-50 (27-31). L range 2→1: 34-40 (21-25). Lock-up point (throttle valve opening 5%, km/h (mph)): D range Lock-up ON O/D: 80-87 (50-54); Lock-up OFF O/D: 74-80 (46-50).
STANDARD BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Unclassified
RM179U2_1991_vol2 · p920 OEM manual
-
HOW TO DETERMINE BOLT STRENGTH
Bolt strength class is determined by marks on the bolt head or stud bolt. Hexagon head bolts: bolt head number 4=4T, 5=5T, 6=6T, 7=7T, 8=8T, 9=9T, 10=10T, 11=11T; no mark=4T. Hexagon flange bolt / w/ washer hexagon bolt: no mark=4T; two protruding lines=6T. Hexagon head bolt: two protruding lines=5T; three protruding lines=7T; four protruding lines=8T. Stud bolt: no mark=4T; grooved=6T. Welded bolt: 4T.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · Assembly Removal and Installation
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p1 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove and install the parts as shown below. Diamond symbol (◆) denotes non-reusable parts. Torque values are specified in N·m (kgf·cm, ft·lbf) format.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p7 OEM manual
-
TORQUE CONVERTER CLEANING
If the transmission is contaminated, the torque converter and transmission cooler should be thoroughly flushed with ATF.
-
INSPECT ONE-WAY CLUTCH
Install SST in the inner race of the one-way clutch (SST 09350-32014, 09351-32010). Install SST so that it fits in the notch of the converter hub and outer race of the one-way clutch (SST 09350-32014, 09351-32020).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · DESCRIPTION · GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p16 OEM manual
-
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The A241 E automatic transaxle is a 4-speed transaxle with a lock-up mechanism developed exclusively for use with a transversely-mounted engine. The A241 E automatic transaxle is an Electronically Controlled Transmission (hereafter called ECT). The automatic transaxle is mainly composed of the torque converter with lock-up clutch, 4-speed planetary gear unit, the hydraulic control system and the electronic control system. To minimize the possibility of incorrect operation of the automatic transaxle, a shift lock mechanism has also been added.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · DIFFERENTIAL OIL SEAL
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p18 OEM manual
-
DIFFERENTIAL OIL SEAL INSTALLATION
Installation procedure for LH and RH differential oil seals on the automatic transaxle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · OPERATION
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p19 OEM manual
-
OPERATION — CLUTCH AND BRAKE APPLICATION TABLE
The table defines which clutches (C1, C2, C3), brakes (B1, B2, B3, B4), and one-way clutches (F1, F2, F3) are operating (O) for each shift lever position (P, R, N, D, 2, L) and gear (1st, 2nd, 3rd, OD). Note: Down-shift only in L range, 2nd gear — no up-shift.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · OPERATION · FUNCTION OF COMPONENTS
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p20 OEM manual
-
FUNCTION OF COMPONENTS
Describes the function of each component in the automatic transaxle: C1 Forward Clutch connects input shaft and front planetary ring gear; C2 Direct Clutch connects input shaft and front & rear planetary sun gear; C3 U/D Clutch connects underdrive sun gear and underdrive planetary carrier; B1 2nd Coast Brake prevents front & rear planetary sun gear from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise; B2 2nd Brake prevents outer race of F1 from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise thus preventing the front & rear planetary sun gear from turning counterclockwise; B3 1st & Reverse Brake prevents rear planetary carrier from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise; B4 U/D Brake prevents underdrive sun gear from turning either clockwise or counterclockwise; F1 No. 1 One-Way Clutch — when B2 is operating, this clutch prevents the front & rear planetary sun gear from turning counterclockwise; F2 No. 2 One-Way Clutch prevents rear planetary carrier from turning counterclockwise; F3 U/D One-Way Clutch prevents underdrive planetary sun gear from turning clockwise; Planetary Gears change the route through which driving force is transmitted in accordance with the operation of each clutch and brake in order to increase or reduce the input and output speed.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · OPERATION
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p21 OEM manual
-
D or 2 Range 1st Gear
Schematic diagram showing power flow through the automatic transaxle in D or 2 Range 1st Gear position (reference AT3216).
-
2 Range 2nd Gear
Schematic diagram showing power flow through the automatic transaxle in 2 Range 2nd Gear position (reference AT3220).
-
D Range 2nd Gear
Schematic diagram showing power flow through the automatic transaxle in D Range 2nd Gear position (reference AT3217).
-
L Range 1st Gear
Schematic diagram showing power flow through the automatic transaxle in L Range 1st Gear position (reference AT3221).
-
D Range 3rd Gear
Schematic diagram showing power flow through the automatic transaxle in D Range 3rd Gear position (reference AT3218).
-
R Range Reverse Gear
Schematic diagram showing power flow through the automatic transaxle in R Range Reverse Gear position (reference AT3222).
-
D Range O/D
Schematic diagram showing power flow through the automatic transaxle in D Range Overdrive (O/D) position (reference AT3219).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · OPERATION · Hydraulic Control System
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p22 OEM manual
-
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM COMPOSITION
The hydraulic control system is composed of the oil pump, the valve body, the solenoid valves, the accumulators, the clutches and brakes as well as the fluid passages which connect all of these components.
-
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE GOVERNING
Based on the hydraulic pressure created by the oil pump, the hydraulic control system governs the hydraulic pressure acting on the torque converter, clutches and brakes in accordance with the vehicle driving conditions.
-
SOLENOID VALVES
There are three solenoid valves on the valve body. The No. 1 and No. 2 solenoid valves are turned on and off by signals from the PCMT to operate the shift valves and change the gear shift position. The transaxle converter clutch switch valve is operated by signals from the PCMT to engage or disengage the lock-up clutch of the torque converter.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · OPERATION · Electronic Control System
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p23 OEM manual
-
Electronic Control System
The electronic control system for controlling the shift timing and the operation of the lock-up clutch is composed of the following three parts: (a) Sensors: These sense the vehicle speed and throttle position and send this data to the PCMT in the form of electronic signals. (b) PCMT: This determines the shift and lock-up timing based upon the signals from the sensors. (c) Actuators: Solenoid valves divert hydraulic pressure from one circuit of the hydraulic control unit to another, thus controlling shifting and lock-up timing.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING · BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p38 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING OVERVIEW
Trouble occurring in the ECT can stem from one of three sources: the engine, the ECT electronic control unit or the transmission itself. Before troubleshooting, determine in which these three sources the problem lies, and begin troubleshooting with the simplest operation, gradually working up in order of difficulty.
-
BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING
Before troubleshooting and ECT, first determine whether the problem is electrical or mechanical. To do this, just refer to the basic troubleshooting flow-chart provided below. If the cause is already known, using the basic troubleshooting chart below along with the general troubleshooting chart on the following page should speed the procedure. The flow-chart sequence is: (1) Preliminary Check (See page AX-14) — Bad leads to Repair or Replace; OK leads to (2) Read Diagnostic Code (See page AX-18) — Bad leads to Repair or Replace; OK leads to (3) Manual Shifting Test (See page AX-23) — Bad leads to Mechanical System Tests (See page AX-36) — Bad leads to Repair Transaxle; OK leads to (4) Electrical Control System Check (See page AX-25) — Bad leads to Repair or Replace; OK leads to (5) Matrix Chart (See page AX-46) — Bad leads to Repair or Replace.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING · GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p39 OEM manual
-
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to A241E Automatic Transaxle Repair Manual (Pub. No. RM291U) when * mark appears in the column for page numbers.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p42 OEM manual
-
CHECK FLUID LEVEL
Check the fluid level with the normal fluid temperature (158–176°F or 70–80°C) and add as necessary. Do not overfill.
- Do not overfill.
-
INSPECT AND ADJUST THROTTLE CABLE
Check that the throttle valve is fully closed. Check that the inner cable is not slack. Measure the distance between the outer cable end and stopper on the cable. Standard boot and cable stopper distance: 0–1 mm (0–0.04 in.). If the distance is not standard, adjust the cable by the adjusting nuts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING · DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p44 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A self-diagnosis function is built into the electrical control system. Warning is indicated by the overdrive OFF indicator light. Warning and diagnostic codes can be read only when the overdrive switch is ON. If OFF, the overdrive OFF light is lit continuously and will not blink.
-
MALFUNCTION WARNING VIA O/D OFF LIGHT
If a malfunction occurs within the speed sensors (No. 1 or 2) or solenoids (No. 1 or 2), the overdrive OFF light will blink to warn the driver. However, there will be no warning of a malfunction with lock-up solenoid.
-
READING DIAGNOSTIC CODE VIA BLINK COUNT
The diagnostic code can be read by the number of blinks of the overdrive OFF indicator light when terminals TE1 and E1 are connected. (See page AX-25)
-
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR / BRAKE SIGNAL INSPECTION
The throttle position sensor or brake signal are not indicated, but inspection can be made by checking the voltage at terminal TT of the data link connector.
-
GEAR SIGNAL CHECK WHILE DRIVING
The signals to each gear can be checked by measuring the voltage at terminal TT of the data link connector while driving.
-
DIAGNOSTIC CODE RETENTION AND CANCELLATION
The diagnostic code (trouble code) is retained in memory by the PCMT and due to back-up voltage, is not canceled out when the engine is turned off. Consequently, after repair, it is necessary to turn the ignition switch off and remove the EFI fuse (15A) or disconnect the PCMT connector to cancel out the diagnostic (trouble) code. (See page AX-19)
-
CHECK BATTERY FIRST
Low battery voltage will cause faulty operation of the diagnosis system. Therefore, always check the battery first.
-
USE HIGH-IMPEDANCE TEST INSTRUMENTS
Use a voltmeter and ohmmeter that have an impedance of at least 10 kΩ/V.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING · DIAGNOSTIC CODES
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p46 OEM manual
-
HINT: CODES 62, 63, 64 — ELECTRICAL MALFUNCTION ONLY
If codes 62, 63, or 64 appear, there is an electrical malfunction in the solenoid. Causes due to mechanical failure, such as a stuck valve, will not appear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING · TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW-CHART
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p48 OEM manual
-
OVERDRIVE OFF INDICATOR BLINK WARNING
If diagnostic code Nos.42, 61, 62 or 63 are output, the overdrive OFF indicator light will begin to blink immediately to warn the driver. However, an impact or shock may cause the blinking to stop; but the code will still be retained in the PCMT memory until canceled out.
-
NO WARNING FOR CODE 64
There is no warning for diagnostic code No.64.
-
SIMULTANEOUS MALFUNCTION OF SPEED SENSORS
In the event of a simultaneous malfunction of both No.1 and No.2 speed sensors, no diagnostic code will appear and the fail-safe system will not function. However, when driving in the D range, the transmission will not up-shift from first gear, regardless of the vehicle speed.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p51 OEM manual
-
POSSIBLE GEAR POSITIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SOLENOID OPERATING CONDITIONS
Reference table showing gear positions for D range, 2 range, and L range under Normal operation, No. 1 Solenoid Malfunctioning, No. 2 Solenoid Malfunctioning, and Both Solenoids Malfunctioning conditions. X indicates malfunctions. D range normal: ON/OFF=1st, ON/ON=2nd, OFF/ON=3rd, OFF/OFF=O/D. D range No.1 solenoid malfunctioning: X/ON=3rd for all gear positions. D range No.2 solenoid malfunctioning: ON/X=1st, OFF/X=O/D, OFF/X=O/D, OFF/X=O/D. D range both solenoids malfunctioning: X/X=O/D for all. 2 range normal: ON/OFF=1st, ON/ON=2nd, OFF/ON=3rd. 2 range No.1 solenoid malfunctioning: X/ON=3rd for all. 2 range No.2 solenoid malfunctioning: ON/X=1st, OFF/X=3rd, OFF/X=3rd. 2 range both solenoids malfunctioning: X/X=3rd for all. L range normal: ON/OFF=1st, ON/ON=2nd. L range No.1 solenoid malfunctioning: X/OFF=1st, X/ON=2nd. L range No.2 solenoid malfunctioning: ON/X=1st, ON/X=1st. L range both solenoids malfunctioning: X/X=1st for all.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING · ELECTRONIC CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p53 OEM manual
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL COMPONENTS
Diagram identifying the electronic control components of the automatic transaxle system. Engine bay components include: Throttle Position Sensor, ECTS, DLC, No. 2 Vehicle Speed Pulse Generator, Park/Neutral Switch, Transaxle Converter Clutch Switch Valve, No. 2 Solenoid Valve, No. 1 Solenoid Valve, and PCMT. Interior/dashboard components include: No. 1 Vehicle Speed Pulse Generator, O/D OFF Indicator Light, Stop Light Switch, and O/D Main Switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING · Shift point too high or too low
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p55 OEM manual
-
TROUBLE NO. 2 — SHIFT POINT TOO HIGH OR TOO LOW
Warm up engine. Coolant temp.: 80°C (176°F). ATF temp.: 50–80°C (122–176°F). Connect a voltmeter to check connector terminals Tt and El. Does TT terminal voltage vary with changes in throttle opening? (See page AX-17). If YES → Faulty PCMT or Faulty transaxle. If NO → Check voltage between PC11AT terminals B/K and E: 0 V with brake pedal released, 10–14 V with brake pedal depressed. If NO → Brake signal faulty. If YES → ECU power source and ground faulty, Throttle position sensor signal faulty, or TT terminal wire open or short.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING · Trouble No. 3 No up-shift to overdrive (After warm-up)
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p56 OEM manual
-
Trouble No. 3 — No up-shift to overdrive (After warm-up)
Diagnostic flowchart for troubleshooting no up-shift to overdrive after warm-up. Steps: (1) Road test while shifting manually with solenoid wire connector disconnected. Is there overdrive up-shift in the D range when shifting from L to 2 to D? (See page AX-23). If No → Faulty transaxle. If Yes → (2) Connect solenoid wire connector, and while driving does Tt terminal voltage rise from 0 V to 7 V in sequence? If 0→7 V → Faulty transaxle, Faulty solenoid. If 0→4 V → proceed to OD2/E1 voltage check. If 0 V → (3a) Are there 10–14 V between PCMT terminals 2 and E, when in the D range? If Yes (0→2 V branch) → Faulty neutral start switch circuit, Faulty neutral start switch. If No → Try another PCMT. If 0 V (further) → (3b) Are there 10–14 V between PCMT terminals L and E, when in the D range? If No → Try another PCMT. If Yes → Faulty neutral start switch circuit, Faulty neutral start switch. (4) Is voltage between terminals OD2 and E1 as follows? O/D switch turn ON: 10–14 V; O/D switch turn OFF: 0 V. If No → Faulty O/D switch harness, Faulty O/D switch. If Yes → (5) Is voltage between terminals OD and E, as follows? Approx. 5 V. If Yes → Try another PCMT. If No → (6) Is voltage between PCMT terminals OD and E, normal with the cruise control ECU connector pulled out? If Yes → Faulty cruise control ECU. If No → Faulty PCMT, Faulty cruise control wire harness.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p64 OEM manual
-
STALL TEST PROCEDURE (PICTORIAL)
Illustrated sequence showing the stall test setup and execution: (1) Chock the wheels, (2) apply the parking brake, (3) depress the brake pedal fully with the left foot, (4) rev the engine to full throttle, (5) select D or R range and perform the stall test, observing the resulting wheel spin/exhaust output at the drive wheels.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p66 OEM manual
-
TIME LAG TEST — SHOCK NOISE CHECK
With the engine at idle and the vehicle stationary (wheels chocked), shift the selector from N to R and measure the time lag before shock noise occurs. Then shift from N to D and measure the time lag before shock noise occurs. This test is used to evaluate the condition of the automatic transaxle clutches and brakes.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p68 OEM manual
-
DIRECT CLUTCH DEFECTIVE
Direct clutch is identified as a possible cause of automatic transaxle malfunction during troubleshooting.
-
FIRST AND REVERSE BRAKE DEFECTIVE
First and reverse brake is identified as a possible cause of automatic transaxle malfunction during troubleshooting.
-
UNDERDRIVE ONE-WAY CLUTCH NOT OPERATING PROPERLY
Underdrive one-way clutch not operating properly is identified as a possible cause of automatic transaxle malfunction during troubleshooting.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING · AUTOMATIC SHIFT SCHEDULE
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p72 OEM manual
-
LOCK-UP OFF IN 2 AND L RANGES
In the 2 and L ranges, all stages lock-up is OFF.
-
LOCK-UP RELEASE CONDITIONS
In the following cases, the lock-up will be released regardless of the lock-up pattern: When the throttle is completely closed. When the brake switch is ON.
-
O/D SHIFT INHIBIT AT LOW COOLANT TEMP
Shift up to O/D will not occur when the engine coolant temp. is below 53°C (127°F).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING · Trouble Shooting Matrix Chart
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p73 OEM manual
-
TROUBLE SHOOTING MATRIX CHART
You will find the troubles easier using the table will shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of cause in troubles. Check each part in order, if necessary, replace these parts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p74 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING — HARSH ENGAGEMENT / NO LOCK-UP / SLIP OR SHUDDER / NO ENGINE BRAKING
Cross-reference table mapping transmission trouble symptoms to suspect parts. Numbers in cells indicate priority order for inspection. Parts listed include: Electrical control system check (AX-25), Accumulator control valve, 2nd coast brake (B1), C2 accumulator, U/D clutch (C3), U/D brake (B3), U/D planetary gear, B4 accumulator, C3 accumulator, 2nd coast modulator valve, B2 accumulator, 1st and reverse brake, Lock-up relay valve, Torque converter (AX-66), U/D one-way clutch (F3), Oil strainer (AX-49), Pressure relief valve, Direct clutch (C2), Forward clutch (C1), No.2 one-way clutch (F2), Second brake (B2), No.1 one-way clutch (F1), Low coast modulator valve. Symptoms covered: Harsh engagement (1st→2nd→3rd→O/D, 2nd→3rd, 3rd→O/D, O/D→3rd, 3rd→2nd); No lock-up; No lock-up OFF; Slip or shudder (Forward & Reverse after warm-up, Forward & Reverse directly after E/G start, R range, 1st, 2nd, 2nd→3rd up-shift, 3rd, O/D); No engine braking (1st→3rd, 1st, 2nd).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE · VALVE BODY
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_transaxle_auto · p77 OEM manual
-
VALVE BODY INSTALLATION
Installation procedure for the valve body.
Wiring Diagram · How to Read Wiring Diagrams · Legend
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p1 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM TITLE (A)
Indicates the System Title.
-
WIRING COLOR CODE (B)
Indicates the wiring color. Wire colors are indicated by an alphabetical code. B=Black, L=Blue, R=Red, BR=Brown, LG=Light Green, V=Violet, G=Green, O=Orange, W=White, GR=Gray, P=Pink, Y=Yellow. The first letter indicates the basic wire color and the second letter indicates the color of the stripe. Example: L-Y means Blue wire with Yellow stripe.
-
CONNECTOR PIN REFERENCE (C)
Indicates the connector to be connected to a part (the numeral indicates the pin No.).
-
PIN NUMBER (D)
Indicates the pin number of the connector. The numbering system is different for female and male connectors. Female connectors are numbered in order from upper left to lower right. Male connectors are numbered in order from upper right to lower left. The numbering system for the overall wiring diagram is the same as above.
-
RELAY BLOCK (E)
Indicates a Relay Block. No shading is used and only the Relay Block No. is shown to distinguish it from the J/B. Example: circled 1 indicates Relay Block No. 1.
-
JUNCTION BLOCK (F)
Junction Block. The number in the circle is the J/B No. and the connector code is shown beside it. Junction Blocks are shaded to clearly separate them from other parts (different junction blocks are shaded differently for further clarification). Example: 3B indicates that it is inside Junction Block No. 3.
-
RELATED SYSTEM (G)
Indicates related system.
-
WIRING HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (H)
Indicates the wiring harness and wiring harness connector. The wiring harness with male terminal is shown with arrows (downward arrow symbol). Outside numerals are pin numbers. All connectors are shown from the open end, and the lock is on top.
-
VEHICLE MODEL / ENGINE TYPE VARIATION (I)
( ) are used to indicate different wiring and connector, etc. when the vehicle model, engine type, or specification is different.
-
SEALED WIRING HARNESS (J)
Indicates a sealed wiring harness.
-
GROUND POINT (K)
Indicates a ground point.
K · SYSTEM INDEX · MR2
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p2 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM INDEX — MR2 (Page 1 to Page 21)
Index of all electrical/electronic systems with their wiring diagram locations. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System): 13-2; Air Conditioner, Cooler and Heater: 21-4; Auto Antenna: 16-2; Automatic Transmission Indicator: 2-2; Back-up Lights: 2-3; Charging: 1-4; Cigarette Lighter: 16-3; Clock: 16-3; Combination Meter: 20-2; Cruise Control: 10-2; Door Locks: 19-2; EHPS (Electro Hydraulic Power Steering): 15-2; Engine Compartment Cooling Fan: 2-4; Engine Control and ECT: 3-2 (3S-GTE), 4-2 (5S-FE A/T w/ECT), 5-2 (5S-FE M/T); Fog Lights: 8-2; Front Wiper and Washer: 8-3; Headlight: 7-2; Horn: 11-4; Ignition: 1-3; Interior Lights: 9-2; Power Source: 1~21, -1; Power Windows: 12-3; Radiator Fan and Condenser Fan: 21-2; Radio and Player: 17-2 (w/CD), 18-2 (w/o CD); Rear Window Defogger: 16-4; Remote Control Mirrors: 12-2; Shift Lock: 14-4; SRS Airbag: 14-2; Starting: 1-2; Stop Lights: 10-6; Taillights and Illumination: 6-2; Theft Deterrent System: 19-4; Turn Signal and Hazard: 11-2; Unlock and Seat Belt Warning: 9-4.
MR2 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM · Power Source and Starting · Page 1 to Page 23
Starting / charging
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p3 OEM manual
-
POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
Battery connects via B-R wire through FL MAIN 2.0L fusible link. A 40A AM2 fuse and 120A ALT fuse are present on the main power feed. A 7.5A AM2 fuse protects the AM2 circuit from the ignition switch.
-
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
Ignition switch has positions: ACC, IG1, ST (on AM1 side) and IG2, ST2 (on AM2 side). AM1 terminal connects via B-R wire on pins 11,5,13 (RHD/LHD). AM2 terminal pin 10 connects B-R wire; pin 9 B-O; pin 6 R.
-
STARTING CIRCUIT
Starter relay (coil terminals 2 and 1, contact terminals 4 and 3) is controlled through Neutral Start SW (A/T) or direct circuit (M/T). Starter relay feeds the starter motor terminal B. Cold Start Injector (EA1, terminal 7) and Start Injector Time SW are included in the starting circuit.
-
NEUTRAL START SWITCH
For A/T models, the Neutral Start SW is in the circuit between the ignition ST signal and the starter relay coil. Circuit Opening Relay (4-2) connects via B wire on A/T models.
-
IGNITION MAIN RELAY
Ignition Main Relay is fed via B-R (LHD) or B-R (RHD) wires. Relay connects to IF1 (pin 1), ID2 (pin 4), IE2 (pin 4) fuse/relay blocks. Output feeds Engine ECU (3S-GE) via R wire and W-B ground.
-
ENGINE ECU FEED
Engine ECU (3S-GE) receives power via R wire (M/T) or R-W wire (3S-FE M/T and A/T). From Engine ECU (3-4)(4-5) signal goes to Start Injector Time SW.
-
GROUND POINTS
Ground point G is located on back panel center. Ground point H is located on intake manifold.
-
THEFT DETERRENT ECU CONNECTION
Starter motor connects to Theft Deterrent ECU (14-4) via W-B wire. For Ex. Australia: W-B wire; for Australia: W-B wire (separate routing shown).
-
WIRE COLOR CODES USED
B-R = Black-Red, B-O = Black-Orange, R = Red, W = White, W-B = White-Black, R-W = Red-White, B-W = Black-White, G = Green.
-
FUSIBLE LINKS
FL MAIN 2.0L fusible link on battery positive feed. FL 1.0Y fusible link between starter relay contact output and starter terminal B.
Wiring · MR2 · Indicator / Back-Up Light / Engine Compartment Cooling Fan
Cooling
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p6 OEM manual
-
COOLING FAN WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT
Wiring diagram showing the cooling fan warning light circuit including connectors A and B (BLUE), fuse routing through B-Y wire, back-up light switch (MT/AT), connections to EA3 and EA2 connectors (pins 13 and 6), BM2 connectors (pins 4 and 5), and indicator lights R and P.
-
BACK-UP LIGHT CIRCUIT
Wiring diagram showing back-up light switch fed via B-Y wire through connector pin 2, R-B wiring for AT variant, routing to EA3 connector pin 13, then to back-up light (rear combination light) LH pin 4/5 and RH pin 4/5 via W-B ground. Blue connector B shown with 12-pin layout.
-
ENGINE COMPARTMENT COOLING FAN CIRCUIT
Wiring diagram showing power feed from 20A VENT FAN fuse (B-O wire) and 7.5A GAUGE fuse (B-Y wire). Cooling fan relay fed via B-R wires. Cooling fan motor (M) connected via L-B and G-W wires through EB1 connectors (pins 1 and 3). Cooling Fan ECU connected at pins 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 via wires B-Y, L-W, B-R, L-O, J. Engine compartment temp sensor connected to ECU pins 2-3 (L-O wire). Speed sensor connection referenced to pages 21-5 and 22-4 via EA3 connector pin 11 (V-W wire). Cooling fan warning light [comb. meter] connected through J/B No.3 via R-L wire, fuse 3A (LHD) or 3A (RHD), to LHD pin 5A / Europe RHD pin 8A / Australia pin 3B, then LHD pin 10B / Europe RHD pin 9B / Australia pin 7B via L-W wire to ID1 connector pin 12, then L-W to EA1 connector pin 5, L-Y to ECU pin 2.
ENGINE · MR2 (Cont'd) · EFI Wiring Diagram
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p7 OEM manual
-
EFI MAIN RELAY AND CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY WIRING
Wiring diagram showing power supply routing from battery through FL MAIN 2.0L fuse, 40A AM2, 120A ALT, and 50A AM1 fuses, through ignition switch (AM1/AM2/ACC/IG1/IG2/ST1/ST2 positions), EFI 15A fuse, EFI MAIN RELAY, CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY, to fuel pump motor. Connectors EA1 (pin 12, pin 2), EA2 (pin 4), EA3 (pin 8), EB1 (pin 2, pin 8) are referenced. Engine ECU connectors A (Dark Gray, 14-pin), B (Dark Gray, 18-pin), C (Dark Gray, 10-pin) are shown. Neutral Start SW inputs (1-1 and 1-2) feed relay control for both A/T and M/T variants. Ground points D, G, H located on instrument panel center and back panel center.
Engine Control · 3S-FE · Wiring Diagram
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p9 OEM manual
-
ENGINE CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM (3S-FE)
Wiring diagram showing Engine ECU connections including: ELS (Idle-Up Diode), IGF, IGT, G-, NE, G1 inputs from Igniter and Distributor; AC (A/C Magnet Clutch Relay); STJ (Cold Start Injector SW); BRK (Stop Light SW); SPD (Speed Sensor); FPU, PSW, IDL (Throttle Position Sensor); T, VF (Check Connector TE1, VF1); OX2, HT2 (Oxygen Sensor); ISCC, ISCO (ISC Valve); E1, E01, E02 (ground circuits). Also shows Check Engine lamp circuit with 7.5A GAUGE fuse, connections from Taillight Relay (10-3), Defogger SW (15-4), and Combination Meter. Wire colours include B-W, G, G-W, V-W, R-L, G-B, B-G, P, O, R-W, B-Y, BR, L-B, W-R, W, R, W-B.
ENGINE · MR2 · EFI Wiring Diagram
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p10 OEM manual
-
EFI MAIN RELAY AND CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY WIRING
Wiring diagram showing power distribution from battery through fuses (40A AM2, 120A ALT, 50A AM1, 7.5A AM2, 15A EFI), ignition switch (ACC, IG1, ST1, IG2, ST2), EFI MAIN RELAY, CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY, and FUEL PUMP connections to ENGINE ECU connectors A (Dark Gray, 22-pin), B (Dark Gray, 26-pin), and C (Dark Gray, 16-pin). Includes CHECK CONNECTOR with pins FP, TEI, VF1, OX1, +B, E1. ECU pins referenced: STA (11), B (12), B1 (13), BATT (1), FC (14), T (15), VF (9), OX2 (14 w/Catalyzer), and ground points D (instrument panel center), G (back panel center), H (location cut off).
ENGINE CONTROL · 3S-GE · Wiring Diagram
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p11 OEM manual
-
ENGINE CONTROL (3S-GE) WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram showing Engine ECU connector pinouts and circuit connections for the 3S-GE engine. Includes injectors No.1–No.4, idle-up diode (ELS), igniter signals (IGT, IGF), distributor signals (NE, G1, G2, G-), A/C circuit (A/C, ACT), cold start injector timer SW (STJ), stop light SW (STP), speed sensor (SPD), oxygen sensor (OX), water temp sensor (HT), knock sensor (KNK), RSO, RSC, ACIS, fuel pressure up (FPU), E1, EFI water temp sensor (THW), in-air temp sensor (THA), vacuum sensor (PIM), throttle position sensor (VC, VTA, IDL), and variable resistor (VA). Connectors shown: BLUE (12-pin) and GRAY (10-pin) check engine connectors. Notes: ISC valve, VSV (for ACIS), VSV (for fuel pressure control) on intake manifold.
WIRING · MR2 · Light Control / Retract System (Cont'd)
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p13 OEM manual
-
RETRACT CONTROL RELAY CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION
Connector A has terminals 1-2-3-4 (top row) and 5-6-7-8-9-0 (bottom row). Connector B has terminals 1-2-3-4-5 (top row) and 6-7-8-9-10-11-12 (bottom row). Located on front fender area.
-
LIGHT CONTROL SW (COMB. SW) SWITCH POSITIONS
Switch columns: T (Tail), EL, H (Head), D, U. Rows: OFF, HOLD, TAIL (T and H closed), HEAD (T, H, D, U closed). Terminal numbers 13 and 20 at top, 11 at bottom.
-
GROUND POINT LOCATIONS
Ground point A = Located on front left fender. Ground point B = Located on front right fender. Ground point C = (third location, partially cut off).
-
NORWAY-SPECIFIC WIRING
Several wiring paths are marked as (Ex. Norway) indicating they are excluded for Norway-specification vehicles. Norway-specific connectors include R-L, G-W, G-W, Y, LG, R-Y, G-Y, LG-R, R-Y, R, and R wire colours routed through the headlight control module.
-
REAR FOG LIGHT RELAY (DIODE)
A diode is present in the Rear Fog Light relay circuit (Ex. Norway). Inputs: terminal 3 from R line, terminal 1 from R-Y (From Rear Fog SW, B84). Output: terminal 2 to R-W line. Referenced as (Ex. Norway) circuit.
-
FUSE / RELAY RATINGS
120A ALT fuse and 50A AM1 fuse are in the main fuse block. 7.5A GAUGE fuse on B-Y line. FL MAIN 2.0L fusible link present.
-
IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTIONS
Ignition SW terminal 4 = AM1, ACC = terminal 2 side, IG1 = terminal 2, ST1 = terminal 2. AM2 side: IG2, ST2. Wire colour W (white) on AM1 and AM2 feeds.
-
CONNECTOR/JUNCTION REFERENCES
Junction connector 3A pin 9 connects to junction connector 3C pin 7 on R-L line. Junction connector II-2 (22) on W line from ignition SW. Junction connector II-2 (3) on R-W line. Junction connector II-2 (13) on R line. Junction connector 3C (11) connects to J/B No. 3 pin 11. Retract C connector and Retract Motor LH (W-B wire) also referenced.
MR2 · Wiring Diagram · Headlight / Retract Control
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p17 OEM manual
-
RETRACT CONTROL RELAY AND RETRACT MOTOR LH WIRING
Wiring diagram showing power source through FL MAIN 2.0L fuse and battery ground, through Light Control SW (Comb. SW) with positions OFF/HOLD/TAIL/HEAD controlling T, EL, H, D, U circuits, diodes for Rear Fog Light and Front Fog Light (Europe/Australia variants), Junction Connector, J/B No.3, Retract Control Relay (terminals 1,2,4,6,8,12) and Retract Motor LH (DOWN direction) with W-B ground wiring. Wire colors include W, R-W, R-G, G-Y, R, W-B. Ground points A (front left fender), B (front right fender), E (location partially cut off). Europe and Australia variant connections noted at junction connector and fog light diode circuits.
MR2 (Cont'd) · Wiring Diagram · Power Source / Taillight / Instrument Panel
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p21 OEM manual
-
POWER SOURCE AND LIGHTING CIRCUIT
Wiring diagram showing power distribution from battery through 120A ALT and 50A AM1 fuses, FL MAIN 2.0L fusible link, TAILLIGHT RELAY, 10A TAIL-RH and 10A TAIL-LH fuses, LIGHT CONTROL SW (COMB. SW) with OFF/TAIL/HEAD positions, CIGARETTE LIGHTER, HEATER CONTROL SW, FRONT FOG LIGHT SW, HAZARD SW, ASHTRAY, RADIO (w/ CD Player and w/o CD Player variants), COMB. METER, and junction connectors J/B No. 3. Wire colours present: W (white), LG (light green), LG-R (light green/red), G (green), G-Y (green/yellow), G-O (green/orange), W-B (white/black). Ground points A (front left fender), B (front right fender), C (left kick panel), D, G also shown. Norway-specific routing noted for LG and LG-R lines to/from Retract Control Relay (S-2). Light Reminder connection to page 13-5 noted.
WIRING · MR2 · Turn Signal / Hazard
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p25 OEM manual
-
MR2 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING CIRCUIT (Cont'd)
Continuation of the Toyota MR2 (SW20) turn signal and hazard warning wiring diagram. Shows power flow from battery through FL MAIN 2.0L fuse, 120A ALT and 50A AM1 fuses, ignition switch (AM1/AM2, ACC, IG1, IG2, ST1, ST2), 7.5A TURN fuse, hazard switch (B2, B1, F, TB, TL, TR, R terminals; OFF/ON positions), turn signal flasher (terminals 1, 2, 3), junction block No. 3 (connectors 3A pin 7, 3B pin 10), indicator lights in combination meter (LH pin 12, RH pin 11, RED pin 2), and side turn LH lamp (pins 1, 2). Wire colors used: W (white), B-Y (black-yellow), W-B (white-black), G-R (green-red), G-W (green-white), G-O (green-orange), G-B (green-black), G-Y (green-yellow), R (red, Europe only). Ground points A (front left fender), B (front right fender), C (location partially cut off) are identified.
MR2 · Horn · Front Wiper and Washer
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p28 OEM manual
-
HORN CIRCUIT
15A HAZ-HORN fuse supplies power via G-R wire through Horn Relay to LH and RH horns. Horn SW (COMB. SW) pin 10 triggers the relay coil. Theft Deterrent ECU (14-4) connects via BL wire to relay coil ground path. Turn Signal SW (COMB. SW) connects on pins 1, 5, 8 via G-B and G-Y wires to Rear Turn / Rear Comb. Light SW (LH pin 6, RH pin 5) and to connectors ID1 (pins 2, 3).
-
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER CIRCUIT
20A WIPER fuse supplies power via B-Y wire. Wiper Relay (18-pin block) controls Front Wiper Motor and Washer Motor. Wiper and Washer SW (COMB. SW) connects on pins 4, 7, 13, 16. Relay switch positions: OFF, INT, LOW, HIGH, WASHER — with contacts B, S, +1, +2, IN1, IN2, W, EW. Washer Motor connects on pins 1 (W-L) and 2. Front Wiper Motor connects on pins 1, 2, 3, 4 via L-W, L-R, L-B wires. Connector II2 used at pins 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12. W-B (RHD) wire exits to ground connectors A, B, C, G.
WIRING DIAGRAM · MR2 · Interior Light (LHD)
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p29 OEM manual
-
INTERIOR LIGHT CIRCUIT — MR2 (Cont'd)
Wiring diagram for the Interior Light (LHD) circuit of the Toyota MR2 SW20. Shows power flow from Battery through 120A ALT fuse and 50A AM1 fuse, through FL MAIN 2.0L fusible link, to Ignition SW (AM1, AM2 positions: ACC, IG1, ST1, IG2, ST2). A 15A DOME fuse supplies the dome/interior lamp circuit via J/B No. 3. Components shown: Interior Light switch (DOOR/OFF/ON), Door Warning Light (Comb. Meter), Rear Luggage Compartment Light, Rear Luggage Compartment Light SW, Door Courtesy Light LH, Door Courtesy SW LH, Door Courtesy Light RH, Door Courtesy SW RH. Theft Deterrent ECU inputs shown at IE-1 (pins 3, 2) and IN-1 (pins 1, 4). Door Control Relay input from connector 3B pin 4 (page 14-1). Light Reminder Relay input from connector 3B pin 5 (page 13-5). Connector references: IA2 pin 3, 6D pin 1, 3A pins 10 and 2, BK1 pins 1 and 4, 3C pin 4, ID1 pins 11, 6, ID4 pins 2, 1, 3B pins 12, 7, 2, 6, 4, 5, IE-1 pins 3, 2, IN-1 pins 1, 4. Wire colours used: W (white), R (red), R-W (red/white), R-Y (red/yellow), L-B (light blue/black). Ground points C (left kick panel) and E (right kick panel).
WIRING · Interior Light (RHD) · Light Reminder
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p31 OEM manual
-
INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL RELAY
Wiring diagram showing the Interior Light Control Relay connections for RHD vehicles, including Door Courtesy Light LH, Door Courtesy Light RH, Rear Luggage Compartment Light, Rear Luggage Compartment Light SW, and Ignition Key Cylinder Light connections via R-W wiring.
-
LIGHT REMINDER RELAY
Wiring diagram showing the Light Reminder Relay with terminals IG, KSW, CTY, TAIL connected via GR and R-L wiring. Power supplied through 7.5A GAUGE fuse (B-Y wire) and 15A RAD & CIG fuse (L-R wire). Connections differ for LHD, RHD, Australia, and Europe RHD variants. Terminals reference: pin 1=IG, pin 2=KSW, pin 3=TAIL, pin 4=CTY. Door Courtesy SW LH (LHD) terminal 13-2, Door Courtesy SW RH (RHD) terminal 13-4. From TAIL-RH Fuse (LHD) 14-2, From Taillight Relay (RHD) 16-2.
-
JUNCTION CONNECTOR REFERENCES
Junction Connector used for Ignition Key Cylinder Light circuit. Pin 4 (Ex. Australia) / Pin 3 (Australia) connects to W-B ground via J/B No. 3 at pins 9 (Ex. Australia) / 8 (Australia) referencing fuse block 3B.
-
FUSE BLOCK CONNECTIONS
LHD pin 9 = 3A fuse; RHD pin 10 = 3A fuse for R-L circuit. LHD pin 9 = 3B fuse (30A); RHD pin 12 = 3B fuse (35A). Ex. Australia pin 3 = 3A fuse; Australia pin 3 = 3A fuse for GR circuit. Ex. Australia pin 3 = 3B; Australia pin 3 = 3B for GR circuit.
-
THEFT DETERRENT ECU REFERENCE
Theft Deterrent ECU connection at 14-4 feeds Door Courtesy Light LH connector pin 4 (I-J2) and pin 3 (I-E3). From Theft Deterrent ECU also feeds interior light control relay pin 11 (I-D1). From Light Reminder Relay (13-5) feeds Door Courtesy SW RH via R-Y wire.
-
DOOR CONTROL RELAY REFERENCE
From Door Control Relay (14-1) connects via R-Y wire to Door Courtesy SW RH circuit.
MR2 (Cont'd) · Door Lock Control · Wiring Diagram
Body
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p32 OEM manual
-
DOOR LOCK CONTROL RELAY WIRING
Wiring diagram showing door lock control relay, door lock motors (driver's side and passenger side), door lock control switch (driver's), door lock and unlock switch (driver's), ignition switch, power source (battery, 120A ALT, 50A AM1, FL MAIN 2.0L fuse), 20A DOOR fuse, junction connector, J/B No. 3, and ground points. Connectors include TE2, IJ1, IJ2, IE1, IE3 series. Wire colours used: W (white), W-L (white-blue), W-R (white-red), W-B (white-black), L-W (blue-white), L-B (blue-black), L-Y (blue-yellow), L-O (blue-orange), B-Y (black-yellow), B (black), GR (grey), R-6 / R-B (red variants), G-B (green-black). Ground points B (front right fender), C (left kick panel), E, G, H indicated. Variants noted for LHD, RHD, Australia, Europe RHD, with TDS and without TDS configurations.
MR2 · Theft Deterrent System
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p34 OEM manual
-
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram for the Toyota MR2 SW20 Theft Deterrent System. Shows connections between: Theft Deterrent ECU, Security Indicator Light (connectors G and H — BLUE, 12-pin), Theft Deterrent Horn, Unlock Warning SW (Ignition SW), Rear Luggage Compartment Key Unlock SW, Security Indicator Light (Comb Meter), Front Luggage Compartment Courtesy SW, Engine Hood Courtesy SW, Rear Luggage Compartment Light SW (ref 13-2/13-4), Door Courtesy SW (ref 13-3), Starter Relay (ref 1/2), Junction Connectors (3B, EA1, ID3, BL1, BL2). Fuses shown: 15A DOME, 15A HAZ-HORN. Wire colours used: W (White), R (Red), G-R (Green-Red), GR (Grey), W-B (White-Black), W-R (White-Red), B-Y (Black-Yellow), W-G (White-Green), L-Y (Light Green-Yellow), L-O (Light Green-Orange), B-W (Black-White), L-W (Light Green-White), R-W (Red-White), R-G (Red-Green), BR (Brown), Y (Yellow), G-B (Green-Black), B (Black for LHD), W-R (White-Red for RHD). LHD/RHD variants noted throughout. Components located on intake manifold noted with triangle-W symbol.
MR2 · Remote Control Mirrors · Wiring Diagram
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p35 OEM manual
-
REMOTE CONTROL MIRRORS WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram for the Toyota MR2 (SW20) remote control mirrors system. Shows connections from power source (battery, 120A ALT fuse, 50A AM1 fuse, FL MAIN 2.0L) through ignition switch (AM1, AM2 terminals with ACC, IG1, IG2, ST1, ST2 positions) to the remote control mirror switch and remote control mirror LH and RH motors. Includes junction connector routing, 15A RADI fuse, J/B No. 3, and ground points (C = left kick panel, E = right kick panel). Covers LHD and RHD variants, with and without door lock, with and without mirror heater configurations. Switch matrix shows RH and LH mirror positions: UP, DOWN, RIGHT, LEFT across terminals B, E, HI, VI, C, V2, H2. Wire colors include W (white), W-B (white-black), GR (gray), L (blue), LG (light green), BR-R (brown-red), R-G (red-green), B-Y (black-yellow), L-R (blue-red), R (red).
Wiring Diagram · Rear Window Defogger and Mirror Heater · MR2 15
Body
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p36 OEM manual
-
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND MIRROR HEATER WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram page MR2 15 showing the electrical circuit for the Rear Window Defogger and Mirror Heater system on the Toyota MR2 SW20. Covers LHD and RHD variants, Australian and non-Australian market differences. Key components include: 7.5A Mirror Heater fuse (R-Y), 7.5A Gauge fuse (R-L), 20A Defog fuse (L-R), Defogger SW (switch), Defogger Relay, Rear Window Defogger element, LH and RH Mirror Heaters, Junction Connector, J/B No. 3, Short Pin (Rear Window Defogger, Ex. Australia), and connections to Idle-Up circuit. Wire colours used: R-B (Red-Black), R-Y (Red-Yellow), R-L (Red-Light green/Blue), W-B (White-Black), L-R (Light green-Red), B-R (Black-Red), B (Black), W (White). Connector pins noted for LHD and RHD variants at Junction Connector: pins 13(LHD)/11(RHD) and 9(LHD)/10(RHD) on fuse side; pins 9(LHD)/1(RHD) and 9(LHD)/10(RHD) on relay side. IF1 connector pins 9 and 10. IJ1 connector pins 8 and 10. 3D connector pins 1, 5, 6. 3C connector pin 9. 3B connector pin 9. IO1 connector pin 9. Ground points on right rear pillar noted for LH and RH mirror heaters and rear window defogger.
Wiring · MR2 · Power Steering / Gauge Circuit
Steering
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p37 OEM manual
-
POWER SOURCE AND IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
Diagram shows battery (FL 2.0L) connected through 120A ALT, 80A ABS, and 50A AM1 fuses to ignition switch (AM1/AM2 with ACC, IG1, IG2, ST1, ST2 positions). B-W and W wire colours used on main feeds. Ground points B, D, F located on left kick panel; ground point on right kick panel also shown.
-
7.5A GAUGE FUSE CIRCUIT
B-Y feed from ignition switch routes through 7.5A GAUGE fuse then via R-L wire to Junction Block No. 3 (connectors 3A, 3D, 3G) and to Power Steering Warning Light in combination meter (COMB. METER).
-
POWER STEERING DRIVER CIRCUIT
Power Steering Driver unit connectors: C (pins 1,2,3,5), D (pin 4), E (pin 2), F (pin 2). Wire colours: R (pin 18), W (pin 19), LG-R (pin 17), LG-B (pin 6) on connector C side; R-L, W-B, B-Y on driver output side. Steering Sensor connected via Y-W (pins 4,15 — II4 fuse link 7) and Y-R (pins 1,6 — II4 fuse link 6) wires. Speed sensor feed via V-W wire (pin 13, II4 fuse link 13) and LG wire (pin 8, II4 fuse link 8) to power steering driver.
-
JUNCTION CONNECTOR AND EARTH
Junction Connector (for Earth) connects W-B wire from Steering Sensor pin 14 and pin 12 through Junction Block No. 3 (connector 3D, pin 12) to ground points via W-B wires on pins 4, 6, 8. R-L wire used throughout junction connector pins 1 and 2 for power feed distribution. II3 fuse link (pin 12) on w/ Auto Antenna circuit route.
-
AUTO / NON-AUTO ANTENNA ROUTING NOTE
Two R-L feed paths shown: one labelled 'w/o Auto Antenna' and one labelled 'w/ Auto Antenna', both originating from the same B-Y/R-L node after the 7.5A GAUGE fuse, routing to Junction Connector pin 1 and fuse link II3 respectively.
-
GROUND POINT LOCATION KEY
Symbol B (triangle) = Located on left kick panel. Symbol D (triangle) = Located on right kick panel. Symbol F (triangle) also present on diagram.
MR2 · Power Steering · Wiring Diagram
Steering
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p38 OEM manual
-
POWER STEERING WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram showing interconnections between Power Steering ECU, Power Steering Driver, Power Steering Pump with Motor, Power Steering Relay, Power Steering Warning Light, Check Connector (TC), Speed Sensor, and Engine ECU. Connectors A and B (Gray) relate to Power Steering Warning Light. Connectors C (Gray, 6-pin), D (Gray, 2-pin), E (Gray, 2-pin) relate to Power Steering Driver. Connectors F (Gray, 2-pin) and G (Gray, 4-pin) relate to Power Steering Pump with Motor. Connectors H (Gray, 2-pin) and I (2-pin) relate to Power Steering Relay. Wire colours used include: LG, V-W, LG-R, LG-B, LG-G, W-L, W, Y-G, B-Y, B, W-B, B-W, LG, L-Y. Power Steering ECU pins referenced: 17, 6, 20, 7, 21, 8, 12, 11, 2, 1, 6, 2, 1, 1, 3, 2, 4, 13, 14, 9, 15, 11, 9, 16. Engine ECU connection at pins (3-5)(4-4)(5-4). Check Connector TC pin 15. Located on front left fender symbol applies to certain connectors. See last fold-out page for connector to J/B and connector between wire harness.
MR2 · Power Source · Power Window
Body
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p39 OEM manual
-
POWER WINDOW WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram for Toyota MR2 (SW20) Power Window system. Shows connections from Battery through FL MAIN 2.0L fuse, 40A AM2, 120A ALT, 50A AM1 fuses, 7.5A AM2 fuse, Ignition Switch (ACC, IG1, ST1, IG2, ST2 positions) to 30A POWER fuse, Power Window Master SW (with UP/DOWN switches, Lock SW, Power Window Relay), Driver's Power Window Motor (connector IE1 LHD / IE3 RHD), Passenger's Power Window Motor (connector IE2), and Power Window SW (Passenger's). LHD and RHD variants noted throughout. Wire colors include B-R, W, B-Y, B-O, L (Ex. Australia) / W-R (Australia), W-B, G (LHD) / R (RHD), R-L. Ground points C (left kick panel), E (right kick panel), G, H indicated. Connector references: AM1, AM2, IE1, IE2, IE3, IJ1, IJ2, IJ3.
MR2 · Over Drive · Wiring Diagram
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p40 OEM manual
-
O/D OFF INDICATOR LIGHT
Wiring connections for the O/D OFF indicator light via combination meter, connected through connectors A (12-pin) and B BLUE (12-pin), fed from 7.5A GAUGE fuse via fuse block J/B No. 3 (terminal 3A, terminal 8A, terminal 9, terminal 4).
-
O/D MAIN SW
O/D Main Switch connected via Junction Connector (terminal 10) and J/B No. 3 (terminal 9, terminal 3B), with ground through W-B wire.
-
O/D ECU
O/D ECU receives inputs from: Speed Sensor (22-4), O/D Water Temp SW, Kickdown Pressure SW, and controls O/D Solenoid. Connected via EA2 (terminals 1 and 2), EB1 (terminal 7), powered by 7.5A ECU-IG fuse through B-Y wire.
-
O/D DIODE
O/D Diode (BM2, terminals 1-2-3) connected between LG wire from indicator circuit and P-L wire to O/D ECU.
-
FUSE LOCATIONS
7.5A GAUGE fuse and 7.5A ECU-IG fuse are protected by fusible links ID4 (4A), ID2, and ID1 upstream. Ignition Main Relay is in the circuit. Ground locations: G = Located on back panel center; H = Located on intake manifold.
MR2 · Wiring Diagram · Cruise Control / Power Source (Cont'd)
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p41 OEM manual
-
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING — MR2 (Cont'd)
Wiring diagram showing power source distribution from battery through fusible links (FL MAIN 2.0L), fuses (40A AM2, 120A ALT, 50A AM1), ignition switch (IGNITION SW with AM1, AM2, ACC, IG1, IG2, ST1, ST2 positions), ignition main relay, fuse blocks (ID4, IF1, ID3, EB1, EA1, BL1 connectors), to cruise control actuator (motor M, resistor, diode) and cruise control indicator light (COMB. METER). Speed sensor (cruise control) feeds via connectors EB1 and EA1. Ground points E (right kick panel), F (left quarter panel), G, and H are shown. Wire colours used: B-R (Black-Red), W (White), B-Y (Black-Yellow), B-O (Black-Orange), W-B (White-Black), V-W (Violet-White), W-B (White-Black), Y-L (Yellow-Light green), Y-G (Yellow-Green), Y-B (Yellow-Blue), Y-R (Yellow-Red), G-R (Green-Red), R-L (Red-Light blue). Fuses shown: 7.5A AM2, 7.5A ECU-IG, 7.5A GAUGE. Junction block J/B No.3 connectors 3A (pin 10), 3B (pin 9), 3C (pin 10). Cruise control actuator connector BL1 pins: 16, 8, 7, 18 (16=Y-L, 8=Y-G, 7=Y-B, 18=Y-R). ECU connector ID3 pins: 13 (B-Y), 6 (V-W), 20 SPD, 13 E, 26 VR3, 25 VR2, 24 VR1, 11 MC.
Wiring Diagram · Cruise Control · Stop Light
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p42 OEM manual
-
CRUISE CONTROL AND STOP LIGHT WIRING
Wiring diagram page MR2-17 covering Cruise Control ECU connections and Stop Light Switch circuit for the Toyota MR2 (SW20) with 3S-FE/3S-GE engines. Includes connector pinouts for Cruise Control ECU (terminals: MO, L, CMS, RES, SET, CAN, TC, CLT, STP, IDL, PKB), Stop Light SW (connectors A w/ cruise control pin 1/3, connector B w/o cruise control pin 1/2), J/B No. 3 (terminal 3A, 3B, 4), Junction Connector, and High Mount Stop Light. Wire colors shown: R-W (Red-White), G-W (Green-White), G-Y (Green-Yellow), W-B (White-Black), R-G (Red-Green), G-B (Green-Blue), LG (Light Green), LG-B, LG-R, W (White), B (Black). Fuse: 10A STOP. Locations noted: G = Located on back panel center, H = Located on intake manifold. References to ARS ECU (18.4), Engine ECU (3-5, 3S-FE/3S-GE), Parking Brake SW (22-4). Cruise Control Clutch SW and Cruise Control SW (COMB. SW) with MAIN, RESUME/ACCEL, SET/COAST, CANCEL functions. Check connector reference ID3. Connector codes: EA1, EA3, ID1, ID3, BL1, 3A, 3B, 3C.
MR2 (Cont'd) · ABS Wiring Diagram · Power Source and Actuator Circuit
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p43 OEM manual
-
ABS ACTUATOR WIRING — POWER SOURCE AND GROUND
Diagram shows power supplied from battery through FL MAIN 2.0L fuse, then through 120A ALT, 80A ABS, and 50A AM1 fuses to the ignition switch (AM1, AM2 terminals). IG1 and IG2 outputs feed the ABS actuator via B-W wiring. Ground points A and B are located on front left fender and front right fender respectively.
-
CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION
Connector A (GRAY, 2-pin) and Connector B (GRAY, 6-pin) identified at ABS Actuator. Connector pin assignments shown for both connectors. LHD and RHD variants use different connector positions: LHD uses II-4 pin 4 and II-5 pin 14; RHD uses II-4 pin 4 and II-5 pin 15.
-
REGIONAL VARIANTS
Wiring paths differ by region: LHD/Australia, Europe RHD, and Ex-Europe variants noted. Europe uses BM2 connector pin 13; Ex-Europe uses IE-3 connector pin 2. Check connector connector uses TC (pin 15) and TS (pin 16) terminals.
-
ABS ACTUATOR TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
ABS Actuator terminals identified as: MT (pin 4), MR (pin 24), R- (pin 10), SR (pin 11), SRR (pin 26), SPL (pin 13), SFR (pin 1), AST (pin 16). Speed sensor inputs: TC (pin 15), TS (pin 2), FL (pin 22), FL+ (pin 9), ESS (pin 23), FR- (pin 8). Front LH and Front RH wheel speed sensors connected via B wiring.
-
WIRE COLOUR CODES
Wire colours present in diagram: W (White), B-W (Black-White), B-Y (Black-Yellow), B (Black), R-W (Red-White), G-B (Green-Black), L-Y (Light-Yellow), L-R (Light-Red), G-W (Green-White), L-W (Light-White), G-R (Green-Red), W-B (White-Black).
WIRING · MR2 (Cont'd)
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p45 OEM manual
-
STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER — CONNECTOR A (14-PIN)
14-pin connector A on the Stereo Component Amplifier. Pins labeled 1–14 with positions shown in diagram. Signals include RR+, RL+, BEEP, GND, FR+, FL+, MUTE, GND, ACC, -B, AMP.
-
STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER — CONNECTOR B (10-PIN)
10-pin connector B on the Stereo Component Amplifier. Pins labeled 1–10 with positions shown in diagram.
-
RADIO AND PLAYER (w/ CD PLAYER) — PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Radio and Player (with CD Player) connector pin assignments: Pin 14 = RR+, Pin 13 = RL+, Pin 12 = BEEP, Pin 11 = GND, Pin 6 = FR+, Pin 5 = FL+, Pin 4 = MUTE, Pin 10 = GND, Pin 9 = ACC, Pin 3 = -B, Pin 1 = AMP. Wire colors: BR (brown), Y (yellow), G (green), R (red), W (white), B (black), BR (brown), GR-R, L-O, P-L.
-
STEREO COMPONENT AMPLIFIER — SPEAKER OUTPUT PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Stereo Component Amplifier speaker output connectors: Pin 2(B) = FL+, Pin 6(B) = FL-, Pin 1(B) = FR+, Pin 5(B) = FR-, Pin 4(B) = RL+. Wire colors: P (pink), Y (yellow), LG (light green), J (brown/black). Connections route to: Front Speaker LH (connector IE1 pins 2–1 for LHD, IE2 pins 4–1 for RHD), Front Tweeter (Speaker) LH (connector IE1 pins 1–2 for LHD, IE2 pins 1–1 for RHD), Front Speaker RH (connector IJ1 pins 1–2 for LHD, IE3 pins 1–1 for RHD), Front Tweeter (Speaker) RH (connector IJ1 pins 2–2 for LHD, IE3 pins 1–2 for RHD). Pin 11 of ID4 connects RL+.
-
POWER SOURCE AND IGNITION SW CIRCUIT
Power source feeds through 40A AM2, 120A ALT, and 50A AM1 fuses. FL MAIN 2.0L fuse feeds battery. Ignition Switch positions: AM1 (pin 4), ACC (pin 3), IG1 (pin 4 contact), ST1; AM2 (pin 10), IG2 (pin 9), ST2. Fuse block: 7.5A AM2 fuse. Ignition Main Relay controlled via B-R and W-B wires. LHD uses connectors II3 (pin 13), II2 (pin 22); RHD uses II5 (pin 5), II5 (pin 22). Power distribution via B-R (battery red) and W (white) wires to radio/amplifier. Ground points: D = located on instrument panel center; G = located on back panel center.
-
LHD/RHD CONNECTOR VARIANTS
Several connectors have LHD and RHD variants: ID2/IF1 (LHD/RHD) at pins 1 on ignition main relay circuit. ID4 pin 4 (RHD) on power line B-O. IE1/IE2 (LHD/RHD) for front speaker LH. IJ1/IE3 (LHD/RHD) for front speaker RH and tweeter RH.
-
GROUND POINTS LEGEND
D (triangle with D) = Located on instrument panel center. G (triangle with G) = Located on back panel center.
MR2 · Wiring Diagram · CD Player / Clock / Cigarette Lighter
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p48 OEM manual
-
RADIO AND PLAYER CONNECTOR LAYOUT
Connector A has pins arranged as 3,4 / 8,9,10. Connector B has pins arranged as 1,2 / 3,4,5,6.
-
JUNCTION CONNECTOR NOTE
Junction Connector serves both LHD and RHD variants. W-B wiring from J/B No.3 connects via junction connector to clock (pins 1,2) and to ground. GR wiring feeds clock (pins 3,4) and cigarette lighter (pin 2).
-
GROUND LOCATION
E (ground symbol) = Located on right kick panel.
-
FUSE SOURCE — CLOCK AND CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Power source from 'TAIL-RH' Fuse (Ex. Norway/10-3) and from Retract Control Relay (Norway/10-3), pin 17, via G wire for RHD; G wire (LHD) from junction connector.
-
TAILLIGHT RELAY CONNECTION
From Taillight Relay (10-3): Australia pin 10 (3D), Ex-Australia pin 11 (3D), Australia pin 10 (3D) to J/B No.3.
-
LHD / RHD WIRING VARIANTS
W-B wiring to ground differs between LHD and RHD variants as labelled on the diagram. Both share common W-B ground bus at bottom of diagram connecting to ground points C, D, E.
Wiring Diagram · MR2 · Power Source & Instrument Panel
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p49 OEM manual
-
MR2 POWER SOURCE AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WIRING (Cont'd)
Continuation of MR2 wiring diagram showing power source (battery, 120A ALT fuse, 50A AM1 fuse, FL MAIN 2.0L fusible link, 7.5A AM2 fuse), ignition switch (ACC, IG1, IG2, ST1, ST2 positions via AM1/AM2), and instrument cluster warning light circuits including: ILLUMINATION (pin 8B), DOOR (pin 5A), REAR FOG (pin 9C), RED INDICATOR (pin 2B), HIGH BEAM (pin 10C), TURN LH (pin 12B), TURN RH (pin 11B), CHECK ENGINE (no pin shown), ABS (pin 11A). Ground points B, C, D, H shown at bottom. Ground point B located on front right fender. J/B No. 3 connector at pin 10 (30). Wire colours include W (white), B-R (black-red), B-Y (black-yellow), W-B (white-black), R-L (red-blue). Cross-references to: Tail and Illumination System (9-2 and 9-7), Interior Lights System (13-2), Rear Fog Lights System (8-2), Turn Signal and Hazard System (11-2), Headlight System (9-4/9-5), Engine Control System (9-5), EC connector pin 2.
Wiring · Combination Meter (LHD)
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p50 OEM manual
-
COMBINATION METER (LHD) WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram for the Combination Meter (LHD) showing connections for: Cooling Fan indicator, Oil Level indicator, CHG indicator, Oil pressure indicator, Brake indicator, PKB indicator, Econo Drive Monitor (Amber/Green LEDs), Fuel gauge, Water Temp gauge, Volt gauge. Connectors shown: Blue connector (A) 12-pin, Connector (B) 12-pin, and a third partial connector. Power supply via 7.5A GAUGE fuse through J/B No.3 and Junction Connector (R-L wire, B-O wire). Sensors and switches connected: Engine Oil Level Sensor (EC1), Oil Pressure SW (W-B ground), Brake Fluid Level SW (W-B ground), Parking Brake SW (W-B ground), Vacuum SW for Econo Drive Monitor (W-B ground, BR wire), Fuel Sender (G-W, BR wires), Water Temp Sender (Y-G, W-B wires). ECU connections: Engine Oil Level ECU (pins 2,3,5,6,7,17,16) with wire colors R-L, W-B, Y-B, R-B; From ABS ECU (18-4) via G-R wire to connector B pin 5 (ID3); From 'GAUGE' Fuse (21-3) to Engine Oil Level ECU. Wire colors used include: R-L, B-O, L-W, Y-B, R-B, R-G, G-R, Y-L, Y-R, G-W, Y-G, W-B. Ground references: W-B (chassis ground) at multiple points. Location notes: 7 = Located on left kick panel; triangle-D symbol = Located on instrument panel center; triangle-Y symbol = Located on intake manifold.
MR2 · Combination Meter (LHD) · Wiring Diagram
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p51 OEM manual
-
COMBINATION METER (LHD) WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram for the Toyota MR2 SW20 Combination Meter (Left-Hand Drive). Shows three connectors: A (BLUE, 12-pin), B (12-pin), and C (GRAY, 10-pin) connecting to the combination meter. Instruments depicted include: ECONO DRIVE MONITOR (AMBER and GREEN indicators), FUEL gauge, FUEL indicator, WATER TEMP gauge, VOLT gauge, TACHO gauge, SPEED SENSOR, and SECURITY indicator. Connections reference: From ABS ECU (T18-4), From Engine ECU (3-5), From Cooling Fan ECU (2-4), See Theft Deterrent System (14-5), From Ignitor (1-3). Components include FUEL SENDER (variable resistor, pins 2 and 3) and WATER TEMP SENDER (variable resistor). VACUUM SW (For Econo Drive Monitor) is located on intake manifold. Wire colors include: R-G, G-R, G-W, W-B, Y-G, Y-R, Y-I, B, BR, V-W. Connector pin references noted for ID1, ID3, EA1, EA3 junction blocks. Ground connections via W-B and BR lines.
MR2 (Cont'd) · Power Source · Wiring Diagram
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p52 OEM manual
-
POWER SOURCE WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram for Toyota MR2 SW20 power source circuit. Shows battery connected through FL MAIN 2.0L fusible link, then to 120A ALT and 50A AM1 fuse blocks. A 7.5A AM2 fuse feeds the ignition switch (IGNITION SW) with terminals AM1 (pin 4, wire W), AM2 (pin 10, wire B-R), ACC (pin 2), IG1 (pin 2), ST1, IG2 (pin 9), ST2 (pin 6). Distribution from ignition switch feeds via B-Y and B-O wires to indicator warning light cluster on instrument panel including: ILLUMINATION, DOOR, REAR FOG, HIGH BEAM, TURN LH, TURN RH, CHECK ENGINE, ABS. Cross-references: See Tail and Illumination System (10.1), See Interior Lights System (13.3), See Rear Fog Lights System (8.4), See Headlight System (7.8), See Turn Signal and Hazard System (12.2). Junction connector J/B No. 3 present. Ground points A, C, D, E, H shown — Ground point A located on front left fender. W-B wiring shown for Europe and Australia variants with connector pins 9(3B) Europe / 10(3D) Australia at J/B No. 3. Fuse block connections: II 2 (22A) and II 5 (5A).
Wiring · Combination Meter (RHD)
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p53 OEM manual
-
COMBINATION METER (RHD) WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram for the Combination Meter (RHD) showing circuits for: Cruise Control, Oil Level, Cooling Fan, CHG, Oil, Brake, Bulb Check Relay, PKB, Fuel, Water Temp, and Volt indicators. Includes Engine Oil Level ECU, Fuel Sender, Water Temp Sender, Oil Pressure SW, Brake Fluid Level SW, Parking Brake SW. Connector A (BLUE, 12-pin) and Connector B (12-pin) shown at top. Power supply via 7.5A GAUGE fuse (B-Y line). Junction Connector routes R-L to Oil Level ECU (22-3). J/B No.3 distributes B-O and R-L feeds. Europe and Australia market variants noted for Brake warning circuit. Signals from Engine ECU (3S-FE pin 4-5, 3S-GE pin 3-5), O/D ECU (16-4), Cooling Fan ECU (2-4), ABS ECU (18-4), Cruise Control ECU (17-3) are fed into combination meter pins. Wire colours used: B-Y, R-L, B-O, R, L-W, Y, Y-B, R-B, R-G, Y-L, Y-R, Y-G, W-B, V-W. Ground references: W-B to chassis ground. Location symbols: 7=Left kick panel, D=Instrument panel center, E=Right kick panel, H=Intake manifold. Connector pin references: EA3, ID1, ID2, ID3, EC1, 3A, 3B used throughout.
MR2 · Radiator Fan and Condenser Fan · Wiring Diagram
Cooling
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p55 OEM manual
-
RADIATOR FAN AND CONDENSER FAN WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram showing power source, ignition switch, fuse and relay connections for the radiator fan motor and A/C condenser fan motor on the Toyota MR2 (SW20). Includes: Battery, FL Main 2.0L fusible link, 120A ALT fuse, 40A HEATER fuse, 50A AM1 fuse, 7.5A AM2 fuse, 30A RDI FAN fuse, Ignition SW (AM1, AM2, ACC, IG1, IG2, ST1, ST2 terminals), Fan Main Relay, Fan No.1 Relay, A/C Fan Relay No.2, A/C Fan Relay No.3, Diode (Diode System), Short Pin (w/o A/C), A/C Pressure SW, Radiator Fan Motor, A/C Condenser Fan Motor. Wire colours noted: W (white), B (black), B-R (black-red), B-O (black-orange), B-Y (black-yellow), W-B (white-black), L-R (light green-red), L-W (light green-white), L (light green), W-R (white-red). Ground points A (located on front left fender), B, C, E shown. LHD/RHD variants noted for connector positions (II 4 LHD / II 5 RHD; II 5 RHD / II 3 LHD).
ENGINE · Air Conditioning · Wiring Diagram
Air conditioning
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p56 OEM manual
-
A/C SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring diagram showing A/C Magnetic Clutch Relay, A/C Pressure SW, A/C Idle-Up VSV, A/C Amplifier, A/C Water Temp SW, A/C Thermistor, A/C Magnetic Clutch, Air Inlet Servo Motor, and associated connectors (EA3, ID1, ID4, IH1, II2, 3B) with wire color codes. Connections shown include: L-R (Light Red), Y-L (Yellow-Light green), B-W (Black-White), BR-R (Brown-Red), W-L (White-Light green), Y-G (Yellow-Green), R-L (Red-Light green), P-G (Pink-Green), W-R (White-Red), P-L (Pink-Light green), W-B (White-Black), B (Black), R (Red), Y (Yellow), G (Green), W (White). Includes interfaces to Engine ECU (3-4)(4-4) and From Igniter (1-3). LHD and RHD variants noted where applicable. Australia-specific routing noted at connector 3B. Junction Connector shown on right kick panel. Components located: front right fender (A/C Magnetic Clutch Relay, A/C Pressure SW), left kick panel (ID1, ID4, EA3 connectors), right kick panel (IH1, II2 connectors). A/C and ECON switch illumination LEDs shown with resistor on control panel.
Air Conditioner, Cooler and Heater
Air conditioning
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p57 OEM manual
-
AIR VENT MODE CONTROL SERVO MOTOR WIRING
Wiring diagram showing the Air Vent Mode Control Servo Motor connections including FACE, BI-LEVEL, FOOT, FOOT-DEF, and DEF modes. The diagram includes an IC component, motor (M), and connections to the A/C Control Assembly. Wire colors shown include R-L, L-R, W-B, BR-W, L-O, L-Y, BR-B, Y, L-W, L-B, and L-Y. Junction connectors are labeled for both LHD and RHD variants (pins 15/18, 16/17, 19, 4). The A/C Control Assembly section at the bottom shows illumination LEDs and mode selector switches for FRESH/RECIRC, FACE, BI-LEVEL, FOOT, FOOT/DEF, DEF, and BLOWER SPEED (OFF, LO, M1).
-
INLET SERVO MOTOR WIRING
Wiring diagram for the Inlet Servo Motor showing R and F terminals connected to motor (M). Connections via R-L wire to junction connector (pins 11, 13, 1, 3) for both LHD and RHD configurations. Pin 12 connects to the main harness at connector pin 13 (RHD) and pin 1 (RHD).
MR2 · Junction Block and Wire Harness Connector · J/B No. 3 (Behind Combination Meter)
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p59 OEM manual
-
Junction Block and Wire Harness Connector J/B No. 3 (Behind Combination Meter)
Connector diagrams for J/B No. 3 located behind the combination meter. Connectors shown: 3A (10-pin), 3B (12-pin), 3C (11-pin).
-
I Groupe: Instrument Panel and Surrounding Area
Wire harness connectors for the instrument panel and surrounding area. Includes connectors I01 (18-pin, Engine Room Main Wire and Cowl Wire), I02 LHD (Engine Room Main Wire and Cowl Wire), I1-1 LHD (Luggage Compartment Wire and Cowl Wire), I1-2 (24-pin, Luggage Compartment Wire and Cowl Wire, with Cowl Wire).
-
B Group: Body and Surrounding Area
Wire harness connectors for body and surrounding area. Includes connectors BK1 (Roof Wire, Cowl Wire), BL1 (18-pin, Floor Wire and Cowl Wire), BL2 (Floor Wire and Cowl Wire).
ENGINE ELECTRICAL · Wiring · Connector Diagrams
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p61 OEM manual
-
CONNECTOR PIN LAYOUTS — EA3, EA4, IE2, IE3, IF1, IG, IE6, IJ1
Diagrams showing pin numbering and physical layout for the following connectors: EA3 (Engine Wire to Engine Room Main Wire, 18-pin and 18-pin), EA4 (Engine Wire to Engine Room Main Wire, 2-pin), IE2 (CR LH Wire / CR RH Wire to Cowl Wire, 14-pin and 14-pin), IE3 RHD (Front Door RH Wire to Cowl Wire, 15-pin and 15-pin), IF1 RHD (Engine Room Main Wire to Luggage Compartment Wire, multi-pin), IG (Luggage Compartment Wire, 1-pin), IE6 RHD Europe (Luggage Compartment Wire to Cowl Wire, 22-pin and 22-pin), IJ1 (Front Door RH Wire LHD / Front Door LH Wire RHD to Cowl Wire, 10-pin and 10-pin).
MR2 · Wiring · Connector Views
Unclassified
engine_3sfe_3sge_wiring · p62 OEM manual
-
CONNECTOR VIEWS — ENGINE AND BODY HARNESS
Diagrams showing pin layouts and connector orientations for the following harness connectors on the Toyota MR2 (SW20): EB1 (Engine Wire, 8-pin), EB1 (R/B No. 2, 8-pin), EC1 GRAY (Engine No. 4 Wire, 2-pin), EC1 GRAY (Engine Wire, 2-pin), IG1 (Compartment Wire, 1-pin), IG1 (Engine Room Main Wire, 1-pin), IH1 (Cowl Wire, 20-pin), IH1 (A/C Sub Wire, 20-pin), IJ1 (Cowl Wire, 10-pin), IJ2 (Front Door RH Wire LHD / Front Door LM Wire RHD, 14-pin), IJ2 (Cowl Wire, 14-pin).
IGNITION SYSTEM · 3S-GTE · Description
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p2 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION
The PCME is programmed with data for optimum ignition timing under any and all operating conditions. Using data provided by sensors which monitor various engine functions (rpm, intake air volume, eng, temperature, etc.), the microcomputer (PCME) triggers the spark at precisely the right instant. The PCME monitors the engine condition by signals from each sensor, calculates the ignition timing and sends an ignition signal to the igniter. High voltage from the ignition is distributed to each spark plug in the appropriate order to generate a spark between the electrodes, which ignites the air-fuel mixture.
-
IGNITER
The igniter temporarily interrupts the primary current with the ignition signal (IGT signal) from the PCME and generates sparks at the spark plug. Also, as a fail-safe measure, when ignition occurs an ignition confirmation signal (IGF signal) is sent to the PCME.
-
IGNITION COIL
The ignition coil uses a closed core coil with the primary coil wrapped around the core and the secondary coil wrapped around the primary coil. This allows the generation of a high voltage sufficient to cause a spark to jump across the spark plug gap.
-
DISTRIBUTOR
This correctly distributes high voltage to the spark plug of each cylinder in the specified ignition order.
-
PICKUP COILS
The NE coil detects the crank angle, and the G1 and G2 coils detect the cam angle.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 3S-GTE · Distributor Components for Removal and Installation
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p3 OEM manual
-
DISTRIBUTOR COMPONENTS FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Exploded diagram showing distributor components for the 3S-GTE engine. Components identified include: Distributor (with High-Tension Cord), O-Ring (non-reusable part), Ground Strap, Distributor Connector, No. 1 Intake Air Connector, RH Engine Hood Side Panel, Engine Under Cover, and Bracket. The O-Ring is marked as a non-reusable part.
IGNITION SYSTEM · GTE IGNITION SYSTEM (3S) · Distributor Inspection and Assembly
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p6 OEM manual
-
INSPECT SHAFT
Turn the shaft and check that it is not rough or worn. If it feels rough or worn, replace the distributor housing assembly.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 3S-GTE · Spark Plugs Inspection
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p13 OEM manual
-
SPARK PLUGS INSPECTION — NOTICE
Never use a wire brush for cleaning. Never attempt to adjust the electrode gap on used spark plug. Spark plug should be replaced every 100,000 km (60,000 miles).
IGNITION SYSTEM · 3S-GTE · Ignition Coil Inspection / Distributor Inspection
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p16 OEM manual
-
DISTRIBUTOR INSPECTION — PRELIMINARY STEPS
NOTICE: 'Cold' and 'Hot' in the following sentences express the temperature of the coils themselves. 'Cold' is from -10°C (14°F) to 50°C (104°F) and 'Hot' is from 50°C (104°F) to 100°C (212°F). Steps: 1. DISCONNECT DISTRIBUTOR CONNECTOR. 2. REMOVE DISTRIBUTOR CAP. 3. REMOVE ROTOR.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 3S-GTE · Distributor Inspection / Igniter Inspection
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p17 OEM manual
-
IGNITER INSPECTION
See procedure Spark Test.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 3S-GTE · System Circuit
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p18 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM CIRCUIT OPERATION
To maintain the most appropriate ignition timing, the PCME sends a control signal so that the igniter sends current to the ignition coil and the spark plugs produce a spark.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 3S-GTE · Precaution
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p19 OEM manual
-
DO NOT LEAVE IGNITION SWITCH ON
Do not leave the ignition switch on for more than 10 minutes if the engine does not start.
-
CONNECT TACHOMETER TEST PROBE TO TERMINAL IG (–) OF DLC1
With a tachometer connected to the system, connect the test probe of the tachometer to terminal IG (–) of the data link connector 1.
-
CONNECT TACHOMETER POWER SOURCE PROBE TO SERVICE TERMINAL +B
With a tachometer connected to the system, connect the power source probe of the tachometer to service terminal +B of the engine compartment relay box.
-
CONFIRM TACHOMETER COMPATIBILITY
As some tachometers are not compatible with this ignition system, we recommend that you confirm the compatibility of your before use.
-
NEVER ALLOW TACHOMETER TERMINALS TO TOUCH GROUND
Never allow the tachometer terminals to touch ground as it could result in damage to the igniter and/or ignition coil.
- Never allow the tachometer terminals to touch ground as it could result in damage to the igniter and/or ignition coil.
-
DO NOT DISCONNECT BATTERY WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING
Do not disconnect the battery while the engine is running.
-
CHECK IGNITER GROUNDING
Check that the igniter is properly grounded to the body.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 3S-GTE · Preparation
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p20 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
09240-00020 Wire Gauge Set — Air gap; 09843-18020 Diagnosis Check Wire
-
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09082-00015 TOYOTA Electrical Tester; 09200-00010 Engine Adjust Kit
-
EQUIPMENT
Spark plug cleaner; Tachometer; Timing light — Ignition timing
IGNITION SYSTEM · 3S-GTE · Service Specifications
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p21 OEM manual
-
IGNITION TIMING
With Terminals TE1 and E1 connected: 10° BTDC @ idle
-
FIRING ORDER
1 – 3 – 4 – 2
-
HIGH-TENSION CORD RESISTANCE
Maximum 25 kΩ per cord
-
SPARK PLUG — RECOMMENDED (ND)
PK20R8
-
SPARK PLUG — RECOMMENDED (NGK)
BKR6EP8
-
IGNITION COIL PRIMARY COIL RESISTANCE (Cold)
0.36 – 0.55 Ω
-
IGNITION COIL PRIMARY COIL RESISTANCE (Hot)
0.45 – 0.65 Ω
-
IGNITION COIL SECONDARY COIL RESISTANCE (Cold)
9.0 – 15.4 kΩ
-
IGNITION COIL SECONDARY COIL RESISTANCE (Hot)
11.4 – 18.1 kΩ
-
DISTRIBUTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR (PICKUP COIL) RESISTANCE (Cold) G1 – G(–)
125 – 200 Ω
-
DISTRIBUTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR (PICKUP COIL) RESISTANCE (Cold) G2 – G(–)
125 – 200 Ω
-
DISTRIBUTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR (PICKUP COIL) RESISTANCE (Cold) NE – G(–)
155 – 250 Ω
-
DISTRIBUTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR (PICKUP COIL) RESISTANCE (Hot) G1 – G(–)
160 – 235 Ω
-
DISTRIBUTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR (PICKUP COIL) RESISTANCE (Hot) G2 – G(–)
160 – 235 Ω
-
DISTRIBUTOR SIGNAL GENERATOR (PICKUP COIL) RESISTANCE (Hot) NE – G(–)
195 – 290 Ω
IGNITION SYSTEM · 3S-GTE · System Circuit
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p22 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM CIRCUIT OPERATION
To maintain the most appropriate ignition timing, the PCME sends a control signal so that the igniter sends current to the ignition coil and the spark plugs produce a spark.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 5S-FE · Description
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p23 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION
The PCME (& T) is programmed with data for optimum ignition timing under any and all operating conditions. Using data provided by sensors which monitor various engine functions (rpm, intake air volume, eng, temperature, etc.), the microcomputer (PCME (& T)) triggers the spark at precisely the right instant. The PCME (& T) monitors the engine condition by signals from each sensor, calculates the ignition timing and sends an ignition signal to the igniter. High voltage from the ignition is distributed to each spark plug in the appropriate order to generate a spark between the electrodes, which ignites the air-fuel mixture.
-
IGNITER
The igniter temporarily interrupts the primary current with the ignition signal (IGT signal) from the PCM (& T) and generates sparks at the spark plug. Also, as a fail-safe measure, when ignition occurs an ignition confirmation signal (IGF signal) is sent to the PCME (& T).
-
IGNITION COIL
The ignition coil uses a closed core coil with the primary coil wrapped around the core and the secondary coil wrapped around the primary coil. This allows the generation of a high voltage sufficient to cause a spark to jump across the spark plug gap.
-
DISTRIBUTOR
This correctly distributes high voltage to the spark plug of each cylinder in the specified ignition order.
-
PICKUP COILS
The NE coil detects the crank angle, and the G coil detects the cam angle.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 5S-FE · DISTRIBUTOR
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p24 OEM manual
-
COMPONENTS FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Exploded/component diagram showing the distributor and associated parts for removal and installation on the 5S-FE engine. Components identified: Distributor Connector (x2), Distributor, O-Ring (non-reusable), Air Cleaner Hose, RH Engine Hood Side Panel, Ground Strap, Engine Under Cover, Bracket.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 5S-FE · Distributor Inspection / Distributor Assembly
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p28 OEM manual
-
INSPECT SHAFT
Turn the shaft and check that it is not rough or worn. If it feels rough or worn, replace the distributor housing assembly.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 5S-FE · On-Vehicle Inspection
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p34 OEM manual
-
HINT: Prevent gasoline injection during crank
To prevent gasoline from being injected from injectors during this test, crank the engine for no more than 1-2 seconds at a time.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 5S-FE · Spark Plugs Inspection
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p36 OEM manual
-
NEVER USE A WIRE BRUSH FOR CLEANING
Never use a wire brush for cleaning spark plugs.
-
NEVER ADJUST ELECTRODE GAP ON USED SPARK PLUG
Never attempt to adjust the electrode gap on used spark plug.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 5S-FE · Signal Generator Inspection / Igniter Inspection
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p39 OEM manual
-
IGNITER INSPECTION
See procedure Spark Plug.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 5S-FE · System Circuit
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p40 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM CIRCUIT OPERATION
To maintain the most appropriate ignition timing, the PCME (& T) sends a control signal so that the igniter sends current to the ignition coil and the spark plugs produce a spark.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 5S-FE · Precaution
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p41 OEM manual
-
DO NOT LEAVE IGNITION SWITCH ON EXCESSIVELY
Do not leave the ignition switch on for more than 10 minutes if the engine does not start.
-
CONNECT TACHOMETER TEST PROBE TO DLC1 TERMINAL IG (−)
With a tachometer connected to the system, connect the test probe of the tachometer to terminal IG (−) of the data link connector 1.
-
CONNECT TACHOMETER POWER SOURCE PROBE TO SERVICE TERMINAL +B
With a tachometer connected to the system, connect the power source probe of the tachometer to service terminal +B of the engine compartment relay box.
-
CONFIRM TACHOMETER COMPATIBILITY
As some tachometers are not compatible with this ignition system, we recommend that you confirm the compatibility of your before use.
-
NEVER ALLOW TACHOMETER TERMINALS TO TOUCH GROUND
Never allow the tachometer terminals to touch ground as it could result in damage to the igniter and/or ignition coil.
- Grounding tachometer terminals can damage the igniter and/or ignition coil.
-
DO NOT DISCONNECT BATTERY WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING
Do not disconnect the battery while the engine is running.
-
CHECK IGNITER GROUND
Check that the igniter is properly grounded to the body.
IGNITION SYSTEM · 5S-FE · System Circuit
Ignition
RM285U_1993_ignition · p44 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM CIRCUIT OPERATION
To maintain the most appropriate ignition timing, the PCME (& T) sends a control signal so that the igniter sends current to the ignition coil and the spark plugs produce a spark.
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
engine_3s_family · p3 OEM manual
-
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
See page IN-2
-
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
See page IN-4
-
GENERAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
See page IN-4
-
PRECAUTIONS FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH A CATALYTIC CONVERTER
See page IN-6
-
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
See page IN-7
INTRODUCTION · How to Use This Manual
Introduction
engine_3s_family · p4 OEM manual
-
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
To assist you in finding your way through this manual, the Section Title and major heading are given at the top of every page. An INDEX is provided on the 1st page of each section to guide you to the item to be repaired. At the beginning of each section, PRECAUTIONS are given that pertain to all repair operations contained in that section. Read these precautions before starting any repair task. TROUBLESHOOTING tables are included for each system to help you diagnose the system problem and find the cause. The repair for each possible cause is referenced in the remedy column to quickly lead you to the solution.
-
REPAIR PROCEDURES
Most repair operations begin with an overview illustration. It identifies the components and shows how the parts fit together.
INTRODUCTION · How to Use This Manual
Introduction
engine_3s_family · p5 OEM manual
-
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE FORMAT
Procedures are presented in a step-by-step format. The illustration shows what to do and where to do it. The task heading tells what to do. The detailed text tells how to perform the task and gives other information such as specifications and warnings.
-
REFERENCES
References have been kept to a minimum. However, when they are required, you are given the page to go to.
-
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications are presented in bold type throughout the text in the applicable step. You never have to leave the procedure to look up your specifications. All specifications are also found in Appendix A, specifications, for quick reference.
-
CAUTIONS
CAUTIONS are presented in bold type, and indicate there is a possibility of injury to you or other people.
-
NOTICES
NOTICES are also presented in bold type, and indicate the possibility of damage to the components being repaired.
-
HINTS
HINTS are separated from the text but do not appear in bold. They provide additional information to help you efficiently perform the repair.
INTRODUCTION · Identification Information, General Repair Instructions
Introduction
engine_3s_family · p6 OEM manual
-
USE PROTECTIVE COVERS
Use fender, seat and floor covers to keep the vehicle clean and prevent damage.
-
KEEP PARTS IN ORDER DURING DISASSEMBLY
During disassembly, keep parts in order to facilitate reassembly.
-
BATTERY HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following battery-related precautions when performing electrical work or disconnecting/reconnecting the battery.
-
CHECK HOSE AND WIRING CONNECTORS
Check hose and wiring connectors to make sure that they are secure and correct.
-
NON-REUSABLE PARTS
Always replace cotter pins, gaskets, O-rings, oil seals, etc. with new ones. Non-reusable parts are indicated in the component illustrations by the "◆" symbol.
-
PRECOATED PARTS
Precoated parts are the bolts, nuts, etc. which are coated with a seal lock adhesive at the factory. If a precoated part is retightened, loosened or caused to move in any way, it must be recoated with the specified adhesive.
INTRODUCTION · General Repair Instructions
Introduction
engine_3s_family · p7 OEM manual
-
USE A SEALER ON GASKETS
When necessary, use a sealer on gaskets to prevent leaks.
-
OBSERVE BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Carefully observe all specifications for bolt torques. Always use a torque wrench.
-
USE SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS (SST) AND SPECIAL SERVICE MATERIALS (SSM)
Use of special service tools (SST) and special service materials (SSM) may be required, depending on the nature of the repair. Be sure to use SST and SSM where specified and follow the proper work procedure. A list of SST and SSM can be found at the back of this manual.
-
USE CORRECT FUSE AMPERAGE
When replacing fuses, be sure the new fuse is the correct amperage. DO NOT exceed the fuse amp rating or use one of a lower rating.
-
JACK UP AND SUPPORT VEHICLE SAFELY
Care must be taken when jacking up and supporting the vehicle. Be sure to lift and support the vehicle at the proper locations.
- After the vehicle is jacked up, be sure to support it on stands. It is extremely dangerous to do any work on the vehicle raised on a jack alone, even for a small job that can be finished quickly.
-
CHOCK WHEELS WHEN JACKING ONE END
If the vehicle is to be jacked up only at the front or rear end, be sure to chock the wheels in order to ensure safety.
-
DO NOT OPEN ECU COVER UNLESS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY
Do not open the cover or the case of the ECU unless absolutely necessary. If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.
-
REPLACE DROPPED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Be careful not to drop electrical components, such as sensors or relays. If they are dropped on a hard floor, they should be replaced and not reused.
-
PULL ON END OF VACUUM HOSE WHEN DISCONNECTING
When disconnecting vacuum hoses, pull on the end of the hose, not the middle.
-
PULL ON CONNECTOR BODY WHEN SEPARATING ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS
When separating electrical connectors, pull on the connector itself, not the wires.
-
RECOATING OF PRECOATED PARTS
For precoated parts: (1) Clean off the old adhesive from the part's threads. (2) Dry with compressed air. (3) Apply the specified seal lock adhesive to the part's threads. Precoated parts are indicated in the component illustrations by the '*' symbol.
INTRODUCTION · General Repair Instructions, Precautions for Vehicles Equipped with a Catalytic Converter
Introduction
engine_3s_family · p8 OEM manual
-
PROTECT DISTRIBUTOR, COIL, AIR FILTER, AND VSV FROM WATER DURING STEAM CLEANING
When steam cleaning an engine, protect the distributor, coil, air filter, and VSV from water.
-
NEVER USE IMPACT WRENCH ON TEMP SWITCHES OR SENSORS
Never use an impact wrench to remove or install temp. switches or temp. sensors.
-
INSERT TESTER PROBE CAREFULLY AT WIRE CONNECTORS
When checking continuity at the wire connector, insert the tester probe carefully to prevent terminals from bending.
-
USE STEP-DOWN ADAPTER WITH VACUUM GAUGE
When using a vacuum gauge, never force the hose onto a connector that is too large. Use a step-down adapter instead. Once the hose has been stretched, it may leak.
-
TAG HOSES BEFORE DISCONNECTING THEM
When disconnecting vacuum hoses, use tags to identify how they should be reconnected. After completing a job, double check that the vacuum hoses are properly connected. A label under the hood shows the proper layout.
-
USE ONLY UNLEADED GASOLINE
Use only unleaded gasoline in vehicles equipped with a catalytic converter.
-
AVOID PROLONGED IDLING
Avoid running the engine at idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
-
AVOID SPARK JUMP TEST
Perform spark jump test only when absolutely necessary and as quickly as possible. While testing, never race the engine.
-
AVOID PROLONGED ENGINE COMPRESSION MEASUREMENT
Engine compression tests must be made as quickly as possible.
-
DO NOT RUN ENGINE WHEN FUEL TANK IS NEARLY EMPTY
This may cause the engine to misfire and create an extra load on the converter.
-
AVOID COASTING WITH IGNITION TURNED OFF AND PROLONGED BRAKING
Avoid coasting with ignition turned off and prolonged braking.
-
DO NOT DISPOSE OF USED CATALYST WITH GASOLINE OR OIL CONTAMINATED PARTS
Do not dispose of used catalyst along with parts contaminated with gasoline or oil.
INTRODUCTION · Abbreviations Used in This Manual
Introduction
engine_3s_family · p9 OEM manual
-
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
A/C: Air Conditioner; ACIS: Acoustic Control Induction System; Approx.: Approximately; A/T: Automatic Transaxle; BTDC: Bottom Dead Center; BVSV: Bimetal Vacuum Switching Valve; ECU: Electronic Controlled Unit; ECT: Electronic Controlled Transaxle; EFI: Electronic Fuel Injection; EGR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation; ESA: Electronic Spark Advance; EVAP: Evaporative (Emission Control); EX: Exhaust (Manifold, Valve); Ex.: Except; FIPG: Formed in Place Gasket; FL: Fusible Link; FPU: Fuel Pressure Up; IG: Ignition; IN: Intake (Manifold, Valve); ISC: Idle Speed Control; LH: Left-hand; LHD: Left-hand Drive; MP: Multipurpose; M/T: Manual Transaxle; OD, O/D: Overdrive; O/S: Oversized; PCV: Positive Crankcase Ventilation; PS: Power Steering; RH: Right-hand; RHD: Right-hand Drive; SSM: Special Service Materials; SST: Special Service Tools; STD: Standard; SW: Switch; TCCS: TOYOTA Computer Controlled System; TDC: Top Dead Center; T-VIS: TOYOTA-Variable Induction System; TWC: Three-Way Catalyst; U/S: Undersize; VSV: Vacuum Switching Valve; VTV: Vacuum Transmitting Valve; w/: With; w/o: Without
ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p10 OEM manual
-
ENGINE MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index listing all subsections of the ENGINE MECHANICAL chapter with their starting page references: DESCRIPTION (5S-FE) EM-2, DESCRIPTION (3S-GE and 3S-GTE) EM-4, TROUBLESHOOTING EM-7, ENGINE TUNE-UP EM-11, ACOUSTIC CONTROL INDUCTION SYSTEM (ACIS) EM-25, TOYOTA-VARIABLE INDUCTION SYSTEM (T-VIS) EM-26, IDLE HC/CO CONCENTRATION CHECK METHOD (w/ TWC) EM-27, IDLE CO CONCENTRATION CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT METHOD (w/o TWC) EM-29, COMPRESSION CHECK EM-31, TIMING BELT (5S-FE) EM-33, TIMING BELT (3S-GE and 3S-GTE) EM-45, CYLINDER HEAD (5S-FE) EM-64, CYLINDER HEAD (3S-GE and 3S-GTE) EM-98, CYLINDER BLOCK (5S-FE) EM-148, CYLINDER BLOCK (3S-GE and 3S-GTE) EM-174.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Description (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p11 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION (5S-FE)
The 5S-FE engine is an in-line, 4-cylinder, 2.2 liter DOHC 16-valve engine.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Description (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p12 OEM manual
-
ENGINE CONFIGURATION
The 5S-FE engine is an in-line, 4 cylinder engine with the cylinders numbered 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 from the front. The crankshaft is supported by 5 bearings inside the crankcase. These bearings are made of aluminum alloy.
-
CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft is integrated with 8 weights for balance. Oil holes are placed in the center of the crankshaft to supply oil to the connecting rods, bearing, pistons and other components.
-
IGNITION ORDER AND CYLINDER HEAD
The ignition order is 1 – 3 – 4 – 2. The cylinder head is made of aluminum alloy, with a cross flow type intake and exhaust layout and with pent-roof type combustion chambers. The spark plugs are located in the center of the combustion chambers.
-
INTAKE MANIFOLD
The intake manifold has 4 independent long ports and utilizes the inertial super-charging effect to improve engine torque at low and medium speeds.
-
VALVES
Exhaust and intake valves are equipped with irregular pitch springs made of special valve spring carbon steel which are capable of functioning no matter what the engine speed.
-
CAMSHAFTS
The intake camshaft is driven by a timing belt, and a gear on the exhaust camshaft engages with a gear on the exhaust camshaft to drive it. The cam journal is supported at 5 places between the valve lifters of each cylinder and on the front end of the cylinder head. Lubrication of the cam journals and gears is accomplished by oil supplied through the oiler port in the center of the camshaft.
-
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment of the valve clearance is done by means of an outer shim type system, in which valve adjusting shims are located above the valve lifters. This permits replacement of the shims without removal of the camshafts.
-
PISTONS
Pistons are made of high temperature-resistant aluminum alloy, and a depression is built into the piston head to prevent interference with the valves.
-
PISTON PINS
Piston pins are the full-floating type, with the pins fastened to neither the piston boss nor connecting rods. Instead, snap rings are fitted on both ends of the pins, preventing the pins from falling out.
-
PISTON RINGS
The No.1 compression ring is made of steel and the No.2 compression ring is made of cast iron. The oil ring is made of a combination of steel and stainless steel. The outer diameter of each piston ring is slightly larger than the diameter of the piston and the flexibility of the rings allows them to hug the cylinder walls when they are mounted on the piston. Compression rings No.1 and No.2 work to prevent gas leakage from the cylinder and an oil ring works to clear oil off the cylinder walls to prevent it from entering the combustion chambers.
-
CYLINDER BLOCK
The cylinder block is made of cast iron. It has 4 cylinders which are approximately twice the length of the piston stroke. The top of the cylinders are closed off by the cylinder head and the lower end of the cylinders becomes the crankcase, in which the crankshaft is installed. In addition, the cylinder block contains a water jacket, through which coolant is pumped to cool the cylinders.
-
OIL PAN
The oil pan is bolted onto the bottom of the cylinder block. The oil pan is an oil reservoir made of pressed steel sheet. A dividing plate is included inside the oil pan to keep sufficient oil in the bottom of the pan even when the vehicle is tilted. This dividing plate also prevents the oil from making waves when the vehicle is stopped suddenly and thus shifting the oil away from the oil pump suction pipe.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Description (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p13 OEM manual
-
ENGINE DESCRIPTION (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
The 3S-GE and 3S-GTE engines are an in-line, 4-cylinder, 2.0 liter DOHC 16-valve engine.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Description (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p15 OEM manual
-
ENGINE CONFIGURATION
The 3S-GE and 3S-GTE engines are an in-line, 4 cylinder engine with the cylinders numbered 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 from the front. The crankshaft is supported by 5 bearings inside the crankcase. These bearings are made of aluminum alloy.
-
CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft is integrated with 8 weights for balance. Oil holes are placed in the center of the crankshaft to supply oil to the connecting rods, bearing, pistons and other components.
-
IGNITION ORDER AND CYLINDER HEAD
The ignition order is 1 – 3 – 4 – 2. The cylinder head is made of aluminum alloy, with a cross flow type intake and exhaust layout and with pent-roof type combustion chambers. The spark plugs are located in the center of the combustion chambers.
-
INTAKE MANIFOLD
The intake manifold has 4 (3S-GE) or 8 (3S-GTE) independent long ports and utilizes the inertial supercharging effect to improve engine torque at low and medium speeds.
-
CAMSHAFTS
Both the intake camshaft and the exhaust camshaft are driven by a single timing belt. The cam journal is supported at 5 places between the valve lifters of each cylinder and on the front end of the cylinder head. Lubrication of the cam journals and cam is accomplished by oil supplied through the oiler port in the center of the camshaft.
-
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment of the valve clearance is done by means of an outer shim type system, in which valve adjusting shims are located above the valve lifters. This permits replacement of the shims without removal of the camshafts.
-
PISTONS
Pistons are made of high temperature-resistant aluminum alloy, and a depression is built into the piston head to prevent interference with the valves.
-
PISTON PINS
Piston pins are the full-floating type, with the pins fastened to neither the piston boss nor connecting rods. Instead, snap rings are fitted on both ends of the pins, preventing the pins from falling out.
-
PISTON RINGS
The No.1 compression ring is made of steel and the No.2 compression ring is made of cast iron. The oil ring is made of a combination of steel and stainless steel. The outer diameter of each piston ring is slightly larger than the diameter of the piston and the flexibility of the rings allows them to hug the cylinder walls when they are mounted on the piston. Compression rings No.1 and No.2 work to prevent gas leakage from the cylinder and an oil ring works to clear oil off the cylinder walls to prevent it from entering the combustion chambers.
-
CYLINDER BLOCK
The cylinder block is made of cast iron. It has 4 cylinders which are approximately twice the length of the piston stroke. The top of the cylinders are closed off by the cylinder head and the lower end of the cylinders becomes the crankcase, in which the crankshaft is installed. In addition, the cylinder block contains a water jacket, through which coolant is pumped to cool the cylinders.
-
OIL PAN
The oil pan is bolted onto the bottom of the cylinder block. The oil pan is an oil reservoir made of pressed steel sheet. A dividing plate is included inside the oil pan to keep sufficient oil in the bottom of the pan even when the vehicle is tilted. This dividing plate also prevents the oil from making waves when the vehicle is stopped suddenly and thus shifting the oil away from the oil pump suction pipe.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-Up
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p20 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF ENGINE COOLANT
See steps 1 and 2 on page CO-6.
-
INSPECTION OF ENGINE OIL
See steps 1 and 2 on page LU-6.
-
INSPECTION OF BATTERY
See steps 1 and 2 on page CH-3. Standard specific gravity: 1.25 - 1.27 when fully charged at 20°C (68°F).
-
INSPECTION OF HIGH-TENSION CORDS
See page IG-6. Maximum resistance: 25 kΩ per cord.
-
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF SPARK PLUGS (Conventional Type only)
See page IG-7. 5S-FE: Correct electrode gap 1.1 mm (0.043 in.), Recommended spark plugs ND K16R-U11 / NGK BKR5EYA11. 3S-GE: Recommended spark plugs ND K20R-U / NGK BKR6EYA.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-Up · Inspection and Adjustment of Alternator Drive Belt
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p21 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELT (5S-FE)
See step 3 on page CH-3. Drive belt deflection and tension reference values for 5S-FE engine with and without A/C.
-
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELT (3S-GE AND 3S-GTE)
See step 3 on page CH-3. Drive belt deflection and tension reference values for 3S-GE and 3S-GTE engines with and without A/C.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-Up · Adjusting Shim Selection Using Chart — Intake
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p29 OEM manual
-
ADJUSTING SHIM SELECTION USING CHART — INTAKE
Use the Installed Shim Thickness (mm) chart to cross-reference the measured clearance (mm) against the currently installed shim thickness to find the replacement shim number. New shim thickness reference: Shim 02 = 2.00 mm (0.0787 in.), 04 = 2.05 mm (0.0807 in.), 06 = 2.10 mm (0.0827 in.), 08 = 2.15 mm (0.0846 in.), 10 = 2.20 mm (0.0866 in.), 12 = 2.25 mm (0.0886 in.), 14 = 2.30 mm (0.0906 in.), 16 = 2.35 mm (0.0925 in.), 18 = 2.40 mm (0.0945 in.), 20 = 2.45 mm (0.0965 in.), 22 = 2.50 mm (0.0984 in.), 24 = 2.55 mm (0.1004 in.), 26 = 2.60 mm (0.1024 in.), 28 = 2.65 mm (0.1043 in.), 30 = 2.70 mm (0.1063 in.), 32 = 2.75 mm (0.1083 in.), 34 = 2.80 mm (0.1102 in.), 36 = 2.85 mm (0.1122 in.), 38 = 2.90 mm (0.1142 in.), 40 = 2.95 mm (0.1161 in.), 42 = 3.00 mm (0.1181 in.), 44 = 3.05 mm (0.1201 in.), 46 = 3.10 mm (0.1220 in.), 48 = 3.15 mm (0.1240 in.), 50 = 3.20 mm (0.1260 in.), 52 = 3.25 mm (0.1280 in.), 54 = 3.30 mm (0.1299 in.). EXAMPLE: The 2.800 mm (0.1102 in.) shim is installed and the measured clearance is 0.450 mm (0.0177 in.). Replace the 2.800 mm (0.1102 in.) shim with a No.44 shim.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Tune-Up, Acoustic Control Induction System (ASIC)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p34 OEM manual
-
FURTHER CHECK IDLE SPEED
Idle speed: 700 ± 50 rpm. If the idle speed is not within these values, carry out either of the below listed procedures and then recheck the idle speed. Carry out a driving set, including stop-go several times at a speed above 10 km/h, or start the engine, idle for 30 seconds and then turn the engine off repeatedly. By doing this, idle data will be stored in the ISC and the idle rpm will be at specified value.
-
INSPECTION OF IDLE SPEED (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Idle speed: 800 ± 50 rpm.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Acoustic Control Induction System (ACIS), TOYOTA-Variable Induction System (T-VIS)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p35 OEM manual
-
ACIS VACUUM CHECK AT 5,100 RPM OR MORE
Check that the vacuum gauge indicates zero at 5,100 rpm or more. HINT: If regular unleaded gasoline is used, the vacuum gauge also indicates zero below 5,100 rpm.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Timing Belt (5S-FE) · Inspection of Timing Belt Components
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p47 OEM manual
-
INSPECT TIMING BELT
Do not bend, twist or turn the timing belt inside out. Do not allow the timing belt to come into contact with oil, water or steam. Do not utilize timing belt tension when installing or removing the mount bolt of the camshaft timing pulley.
- Do not bend, twist or turn the timing belt inside out.
- Do not allow the timing belt to come into contact with oil, water or steam.
- Do not utilize timing belt tension when installing or removing the mount bolt of the camshaft timing pulley.
-
TIMING BELT DEFECT — PREMATURE PARTING
If there are any defects as shown in the illustrations, check for proper installation and check the timing cover gasket for damage and proper installation.
-
TIMING BELT DEFECT — CRACKED OR DAMAGED TEETH
If the belt teeth are cracked or damaged, check to see if either the camshaft or water pump is locked.
-
TIMING BELT DEFECT — WEAR OR CRACKS ON BELT FACE
If there is noticeable wear or cracks on the belt face, check to see if there are nicks on the side of the idler pulley lock.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Timing Belt (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p65 OEM manual
-
ALIGN TIMING BELT MATCHMARKS
Align the matchmarks of the timing belt and camshaft timing pulleys.
-
CLEAN CAMSHAFT TIMING PULLEY
Remove any oil or water on the camshaft timing pulley, and keep it clean.
-
INSTALL TIMING BELT WITH TENSION
Install the timing belt, insure that there is tension between the crankshaft timing pulley and intake camshaft timing pulley.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p90 OEM manual
-
HAND-LAP VALVE AND VALVE SEAT
Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound. After hand-lapping, clean the valve and valve seat.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p92 OEM manual
-
Install bearing caps and measure Plastigage
(d) Install the bearing caps. (See step 4 on pages EM-89 to 91). Do not turn the camshaft. (e) Remove the bearing caps. (f) Measure the Plastigage at its widest point. If the oil clearance is greater than maximum, replace the camshaft. If necessary, replace the bearing caps and cylinder head as a set. (g) Completely remove the Plastigage.
- Do not turn the camshaft.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p93 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CAMSHAFT GEAR BACKLASH
Install the camshafts without installing the exhaust cam sub-gear (See step 4 on pages EM-89 to 91). Using a dial indicator, measure the backlash. If the backlash is greater than maximum, replace the camshafts.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p104 OEM manual
-
CONNECT HOSES (prior to water outlet installation)
Connect the following hoses: (1) ISC water by-pass hose, (2) Heater water hose, (3) (w/ Oil Cooler) Two oil cooler water by-pass hoses
-
INSTALL OIL COOLER HEAT PROTECTOR (w/ Oil Cooler)
Install the oil cooler heat protector. (See steps 3 on page LU-18)
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head (3S-GE and 3S-GTE) · Inspect and Grind Valves
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p132 OEM manual
-
REAM GUIDE BUSHING AFTER INSTALLATION
Using a sharp 6 mm reamer, ream the guide bushing to obtain the standard specified clearance (See page EM-119) between the guide bushing and valve stem.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p136 OEM manual
-
Measure Plastigage — Camshaft Oil Clearance
Measure the Plastigage at its widest point. If the oil clearance is greater than maximum, replace the camshaft. If necessary, replace the bearing caps and cylinder head as a set. Completely remove the Plastigage after measurement.
-
Inspect Camshaft Thrust Clearance
Install the camshafts (See step 2 on page EM-139). Using a dial indicator, measure the thrust clearance while moving the camshaft back and forth. If the thrust clearance is greater than maximum, replace the camshaft. If necessary, replace the bearing caps and cylinder head as a set.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p163 OEM manual
-
KEEP BEARINGS AND ROD TOGETHER
Keep the bearings, connecting rod and cap together.
-
ARRANGE PISTON AND ROD ASSEMBLIES IN ORDER
Arrange the piston and connecting rod assemblies in correct order.
-
STANDARD BEARING SELECTION HINT
If using a standard bearing, replace it with one having the same number marked on the connecting rod cap. There are three sizes of standard bearings, marked '1', '2' and '3' accordingly.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p166 OEM manual
-
COMPLETELY REMOVE PLASTIGAGE
Completely remove the Plastigage.
-
ARRANGE PARTS IN CORRECT ORDER
Arrange the main bearing caps, bearings and thrust washers in correct order.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p168 OEM manual
-
MEASURE CYLINDER BORE DIAMETER
Using a cylinder gauge, measure the cylinder bore diameter at positions A, B and C in the thrust axial directions.
-
REMOVE CYLINDER RIDGE
If the wear is less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.), using a ridge reamer, grind the top of the cylinder.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p171 OEM manual
-
Piston-to-cylinder oil clearance measurement
(b) Measure the cylinder bore diameter in the thrust directions. (See step 4 on page EM-157) (c) Subtract the piston diameter measurement from the minimum cylinder bore diameter measurement. If the oil clearance is greater than maximum, replace all the four pistons. If necessary, replace the cylinder block.
-
HINT (Use new cylinder block)
Use a piston with the same number mark as the cylinder bore diameter marked on the cylinder block.
-
Ring groove clearance action
If the clearance is greater than maximum, replace the piston.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p172 OEM manual
-
INSPECT PISTON PIN FIT
At 60°C (140°F), you should be able to push the piston pin into the piston pin hole with your thumb.
-
MEASURE PISTON RING END GAP
Using a feeler gauge, measure the end gap. If the end gap is greater than maximum, replace the piston ring. If the end gap is greater than maximum, even with a new piston ring, replace the cylinder block.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p174 OEM manual
-
Hone bushing to standard clearance
Using a pin hole grinder, hone the bushing to obtain the standard specified clearance (see step B above) between the bushing and piston pin.
-
Check piston pin fit at normal room temperature
Coat the piston pin with engine oil, and push it into the connecting rod with your thumb.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p189 OEM manual
-
KEEP BEARINGS AND ROD TOGETHER
Keep the bearings, connecting rod and cap together.
-
ARRANGE PISTON AND ROD ASSEMBLIES IN ORDER
Arrange the piston and connecting rod assemblies in correct order.
-
STANDARD BEARING SELECTION HINT
If using a standard bearing, replace it with one having the same number marked on the connecting rod cap. There are three sizes of standard bearings, marked "1", "2" and "3" accordingly.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p191 OEM manual
-
BEARING SELECTION BY NUMBER
If using a standard bearing, replace it with one having the same number. If the number cannot be determined, select the correct bearing by adding together the numbers imprinted on the cylinder block and crankshaft, then select the bearing with the same number as the total. There are five sizes of standard bearings, marked '1', '2', '3', '4' and '5' accordingly. EXAMPLE: Cylinder block '2' + Crankshaft '1' = Bearing '3'.
-
BEARING REPLACEMENT IF CLEARANCE EXCEEDS MAXIMUM
If the oil clearance is greater than maximum, replace the bearings. If necessary, grind or replace the crankshaft.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p192 OEM manual
-
REMOVE PLASTIGAGE
Completely remove the Plastigage.
-
ARRANGE PARTS IN ORDER
Arrange the main bearing caps, bearings and thrust washers in correct order.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (3S-GE and 3S-GTE) · Inspection and Disassembly
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p194 OEM manual
-
MEASURE CYLINDER BORE DIAMETER
Using a cylinder gauge, measure the cylinder bore diameter at positions A, B and C in the thrust axial directions.
-
REMOVE CYLINDER RIDGE
If the wear is less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.), using a ridge reamer, grind the top of the cylinder.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p197 OEM manual
-
MEASURE CYLINDER BORE DIAMETER
Measure the cylinder bore diameter in the thrust directions. (See step 4 on page EM-183)
-
CALCULATE OIL CLEARANCE
Subtract the piston diameter measurement from the minimum cylinder bore diameter measurement.
-
REPLACE PISTONS OR CYLINDER BLOCK IF OVER MAXIMUM OIL CLEARANCE
If the oil clearance is greater than maximum, replace all the four pistons. If necessary, replace the cylinder block.
-
HINT — USE NEW CYLINDER BLOCK WITH MATCHING PISTON MARK
Use a piston with the same number mark as the cylinder bore diameter marked on the cylinder block.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p198 OEM manual
-
Inspect piston pin fit
At 60°C (140°F), you should be able to push the piston pin into the piston pin hole with your thumb.
-
Piston ring end gap — replacement criteria
If the end gap is greater than maximum, replace the piston ring. If the end gap is greater than maximum, even with a new piston ring, replace the cylinder block.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p200 OEM manual
-
HONE BUSHING TO SPECIFIED CLEARANCE
Using a pin hole grinder, hone the bushing to obtain the standard specified clearance (see step B above) between the bushing and piston pin.
-
CHECK PISTON PIN FIT
Check the piston pin fit at normal room temperature. Coat the piston pin with engine oil, and push it into the connecting rod with your thumb.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Block (3S-GE and 3S-GTE) · Assembly of Cylinder Block
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p204 OEM manual
-
THOROUGHLY CLEAN ALL PARTS
Thoroughly clean all parts to be assembled.
-
APPLY ENGINE OIL
Before installing the parts, apply new engine oil to all sliding and rotating surfaces.
-
REPLACE GASKETS, O-RINGS AND OIL SEALS
Replace all gaskets, O-rings and oil seals with new parts.
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Description
Turbocharger
engine_3s_family · p210 OEM manual
-
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Systems which increase the amount of air sent to the engine are either turbocharger type (using exhaust gas to turn the turbine) or supercharger type (using the engine crankshaft, etc. to mechanically turn the pump, etc.). For CELICA 3S-GTE engine, the turbocharger type has been adopted. The turbocharger is a device which increases engine output by sending a greater amount of air-fuel mixture to the engine than under normal conditions. Engine output depends upon the volume of the air-fuel mixture ignited per unit of time. Therefore, to increase engine output, the most effective method is to send a greater amount of air-fuel mixture into the cylinder. In other words, by installing a special turbocharger and providing a higher air-fuel mixture than usual, engine output can be increased by increasing the average combustion pressure without increasing the engine speed.
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Description
Turbocharger
engine_3s_family · p211 OEM manual
-
Operation of Turbocharger
Exhaust gas acts on the turbine wheel inside the turbine housing, causing it to revolve. When the turbine wheel revolves, the impeller which is located on the same shaft also revolves, compressing the intake air which has passed through the air flow meter from the air cleaner. When expelled from the compressor housing the compressed air is supplied to the cylinders. When the engine speed increases, the exhaust gas volume increases and the turbine wheel revolutions increase (approx. 20,000 – 110,000 rpm), thus the turbocharged air pressure grows greater and engine output increases.
-
Waste Gate Valve
Although on the one hand high output is achieved by turbo-charging, if the turbocharged air pressure becomes too high, knocking occurs and, on the contrary, a reduction in engine output is caused. If the turbocharged air pressure exceeds the prescribed air pressure, the flow of exhaust gas by-passes the turbine, controlling turbine wheel revolutions and turbocharged air pressure. This by-pass valve which controls the quantity of exhaust gas flowing to the turbine is called the waste gate valve. When the turbocharged air pressure exceeds the prescribed pressure, the actuator operates, the waste gate valve opens and part of the exhaust gas by-passes the turbine. This causes a drop in the turbine revolution rate and controls the turbocharged air within the prescribed limits.
-
Intercooler
The intercooler cools the turbocharged air (intake air) put out by the turbocharger, thereby increasing the air density. As the intake air temperature decreases, the gas temperature in the combustion chamber falls and the occurrence of knocking is suppressed, giving an increase in engine output. The Celica 3S-GTE intercooler is an air cooling type located at the top of the engine, utilizing the vehicle windstream to cool the turbocharged air.
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Description
Turbocharger
engine_3s_family · p212 OEM manual
-
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Systems which increase the amount of air sent to the engine are either turbocharger type (using exhaust gas to turn the turbine) or supercharger type (using the engine crankshaft, etc. to mechanically turn the pump, etc.). For MR2 3S-GTE engine, the turbocharger type has been adopted. The turbocharger is a device which increases engine output by sending a greater amount of air-fuel mixture to the engine than under normal conditions. Engine output depends upon the volume of the air-fuel mixture ignited per unit of time. Therefore, to increase engine output, the most effective method is to send a greater amount of air-fuel mixture into the cylinder. In other words, by installing a special turbocharger and providing a higher air-fuel mixture than usual, engine output can be increased by increasing the average combustion pressure without increasing the engine speed.
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Description
Turbocharger
engine_3s_family · p213 OEM manual
-
Operation of Turbocharger
Exhaust gas acts on the turbine wheel inside the turbine housing, causing it to revolve. When the turbine wheel revolves, the impeller which is located on the same shaft also revolves, compressing the intake air which has passed through the air flow meter from the air cleaner. When expelled from the compressor housing the compressed air is supplied to the cylinders. When the engine speed increases, the exhaust gas volume increases and the turbine wheel revolutions increase (approx. 20,000 – 110,000 rpm), thus the turbocharged air pressure grows greater and engine output increases.
-
Waste Gate Valve
Although on the one hand high output is achieved by turbo-charging, if the turbocharged air pressure becomes too high, knocking occurs and, on the contrary, a reduction in engine output is caused. If the turbocharged air pressure exceeds the prescribed air pressure, the flow of exhaust gas by-passes the turbine, controlling turbine wheel revolutions and turbocharged air pressure. This by-pass valve which controls the quantity of exhaust gas flowing to the turbine is called the waste gate valve. When the turbocharged air pressure exceeds the prescribed pressure, the actuator operates, the waste gate valve opens and part of the exhaust gas by-passes the turbine. This causes a drop in the turbine revolution rate and controls the turbocharged air within the prescribed limits.
-
Intercooler
The intercooler cools the turbocharged air (intake air) put out by the turbocharger, thereby increasing the air density. As the intake air temperature decreases, the gas temperature in the combustion chamber falls and the occurrence of knocking is suppressed, giving an increase in engine output. The Celica MR2 intercooler is an air cooling type located at the top of the engine, utilizing the vehicle windstream to cool the turbocharged air.
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Precautions
Turbocharger
engine_3s_family · p214 OEM manual
-
IDLE ENGINE AFTER HARD DRIVING
Do not stop the engine immediately after pulling a trailer or high speed or uphill driving. Idle the engine for 20 – 120 seconds, depending on the severity of the driving condition.
-
AVOID SUDDEN RACING ON COLD START
Avoid sudden racing or acceleration immediately after starting a cold engine.
-
DO NOT RUN ENGINE WITHOUT AIR CLEANER
If the engine is run with the air cleaner removed, foreign material entering will damage the wheels which run at extremely high speed.
-
CHECK CAUSE OF TURBOCHARGER DEFECT BEFORE REPLACEMENT
If the turbocharger is defective and must be replaced, first check for the cause of the defect in reference to the following items and replace parts if necessary: Engine oil level and quality; Conditions under which the turbocharger was used; Oil lines leading to the turbocharger.
-
USE CAUTION WHEN HANDLING TURBOCHARGER ASSEMBLY
Use caution when removing and reinstalling the turbocharger assembly. Do not drop it or bang it against anything or grasp it by easily-deformed parts, such as the actuator or rod, when moving it.
-
PLUG PORTS BEFORE REMOVING TURBOCHARGER
Before removing the turbocharger, plug the intake and exhaust ports and oil inlet to prevent entry of dirt or other foreign material.
-
CHECK OIL PIPES FOR SLUDGE WHEN REPLACING TURBOCHARGER
If replacing the turbocharger, check for accumulation of sludge particles in the oil pipes, and if necessary, replace the oil pipes.
-
REMOVE GASKET FROM OIL PIPE AND TURBOCHARGER FLANGES
Completely remove the gasket adhered to the lubrication oil pipe flange and turbocharger oil flange.
-
USE SPECIFIED BOLTS AND NUTS
If replacing bolts or nuts, do so only with the specified new ones to guard against breakage or deformation.
-
PRE-OIL TURBOCHARGER BEFORE INSTALLATION
If replacing the turbocharger, put 20 cc (1.2 cu in.) of oil into the turbocharger oil inlet and turn the impeller wheel by hand to spread oil to the bearing.
-
CRANK ENGINE TO DISTRIBUTE OIL AFTER OVERHAUL
If overhauling or replacing the engine, cut the fuel supply after reassembly and crank the engine for 30 seconds to distribute oil throughout the engine. Then allow the engine to idle for 60 seconds.
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
Turbocharger
engine_3s_family · p215 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING HINT
Before troubleshooting the turbocharger, first check the engine itself. (valve clearance, engine compression, ignition timing etc.)
TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
Turbocharger
engine_3s_family · p216 OEM manual
-
ABNORMAL NOISE — TURBOCHARGING HEAT INSULATOR RESONNANCE
Check for loose, improperly installed or deformed insulator mount bolts, and repair or replace as necessary.
-
ABNORMAL NOISE — EXHAUST PIPE LEAKING OR VIBRATING
Check for deformed exhaust pipe, loose mount bolts or damaged gasket, and repair or replace as necessary.
-
ABNORMAL NOISE — ERRATIC TURBOCHARGER OPERATION
Refer to item 6 of INSUFFICIENT ACCELERATION, LACK OF POWER OR EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION.
-
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION OR WHITE EXHAUST — FAULTY TURBOCHARGER SEAL
Check for oil leakage in exhaust system. Remove the turbine elbow from the turbocharger and check for excessive carbon deposits on the turbine wheel. Excessive carbon deposits indicated a faulty turbocharger. Check for oil leakage in intake air system. Check for axial and radial plays in impeller wheel, and replace the turbocharger, if necessary. (See page TC-12). NOTICE: There is some oil mist from the PCV in the blowby gas so care must be taken not to diagnosis this as an oil leakage from the turbocharger.
- There is some oil mist from the PCV in the blowby gas so care must be taken not to diagnosis this as an oil leakage from the turbocharger.
EFI SYSTEM · System Description · System Description (Cont'd)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p229 OEM manual
-
3S-GE EFI SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagram showing the Engine (& ECT) ECU and all connected components for the 3S-GE engine EFI system, including: Fuel Tank, Fuel Pump, Fuel Filter, Fuel Pressure Regulator, (w/TWC) Variable Resistor, Check Connector (Terminal T), Battery, Distributor, Vehicle Speed Sensor, A/C Compressor, Stop Light Switch, Vacuum Sensor, Throttle Position Sensor, Intake Air Temp. Sensor, Ignition Coil & Ignitor, ISC Valve, Cold Start Injector, Actuator, Vacuum Tank, VSV (vacuum switching valve), Knock Sensor, Starter, Water Temp. Sensor, Cold Start Injector Time Switch, (w/TWC) Oxygen Sensor, and VSV.
EFI SYSTEM · System Description · System Description (Cont'd)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p230 OEM manual
-
3S-GTE EFI SYSTEM COMPONENT LAYOUT
Diagram showing the EFI system components and their interconnections for the 3S-GTE engine, including: Air Flow Meter, Intake Air Temp. Sensor, Turbocharger, Oxygen Sensor, Intercooler, Fuel Pressure Regulator, VSV (multiple), Knock Sensor, Actuator, Starter, Fuel Pump, Fuel Tank, Fuel Filter, ISC Valve, EGR Valve, Throttle Position Switch, Cold Start Injector, Pressure Sensor, Vacuum Tank, Cold Start Injector Time Switch, Water Temp. Sensor, Vehicle Speed Sensor, Headlight Switch, Defogger Switch, Distributor, Ignitor, A/C Compressor, Stop Light Switch, Check Connector (Terminal T), Battery, Ignition Switch, CHECK Engine Warning Light, and Engine ECU.
EFI SYSTEM · System Description
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p231 OEM manual
-
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel is supplied under constant pressure to the EFI injectors by an electric fuel pump. The injectors inject a measured quantity of fuel into the intake ports in accordance with signals from the engine (and ECT) ECU (Electronic Control Unit).
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
The air induction system provides sufficient air for engine operation.
-
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
The 5S-FE, 3S-GE and 3S-GTE engines are equipped with a Toyota Computer Control System (TCCS) which centrally controls the EFI, ESA, ISC, Diagnosis systems etc. by means of an Electronic Control Unit (ECU-formerly EFI computer) employing a microcomputer. By means of the ECU, the TCCS controls the following functions: (1) Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) — The engine (and ECT) ECU receives signals from various sensors indicating changing engine operation conditions such as: intake manifold absolute pressure (5S-FE and 3S-GE), intake air volume (3S-GTE), intake air temperature, coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle vale opening angle, exhaust oxygen content etc. The signals are utilized by the engine (and ECT) ECU to determine the injection duration necessary for an optimum air-fuel ratio. (2) Electronic Spark Advance (ESA) — The engine (and ECT) ECU is programmed with data for optimum ignition timing under any and all operating conditions. Using data provided by sensors which monitor various engine functions (rpm, coolant temperature, etc.), the microcomputer (ECU) triggers the spark at precisely the right instant. (3) Idle Speed Control (ISC) — The engine (and ECT) ECU is programmed with target idling speed values to respond to different engine conditions (coolant temperature, air conditioner ON/OFF, etc.). Sensors transmit signals to the engine (and ECT) ECU which control the flow of air through the by-pass of the throttle valve and adjust idle speed to the target value. (4) Diagnosis — The engine (and ECT) ECU detects any malfunctions abnormalities in the sensor network and lights a 'CHECK' engine warning light on the instrument panel. At the same time, the trouble is identified and a diagnosis code is recorded by the ECU. The diagnosis code can be read by the number of blinks of the 'CHECK' engine warning light when terminals TE1 and E1 are connected. For the diagnostic codes, refer to page FI-31, 33 or 35. (5) Fail-Safe Function — In the event of the sensor malfunctioning, a back-up circuit will take over to provide minimal driveability, and the 'CHECK' engine warning light will light.
EFI SYSTEM · Precautions, Inspection Precautions
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p232 OEM manual
-
PRECAUTIONS — DISCONNECT BATTERY BEFORE WORKING ON FUEL SYSTEM
Before working on the fuel system, disconnect the cable from negative (–) terminal of the battery. HINT: Any diagnostic code retained by the computer will be erased when the battery terminal is removed. Therefore, if necessary, read the diagnosis before removing the battery terminal.
-
PRECAUTIONS — NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME
Do not smoke or work near open flame when working on the fuel system.
-
PRECAUTIONS — KEEP GASOLINE OFF RUBBER OR LEATHER PARTS
Keep gasoline off rubber or leather parts.
-
CHECK CORRECT ENGINE TUNE-UP
See page EM-11.
-
PRECAUTIONS WHEN CONNECTING GAUGE
Use the battery as the power source for the timing light, tachometer, etc. Connect the test probe of a tachometer to the terminal IG ⊖ of the check connector.
-
IN THE EVENT OF ENGINE MISFIRE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN
Check proper connection of battery terminals, etc. Handle high-tension cords carefully. After repair work, check that the ignition coil terminals and all other ignition system lines are reconnected securely. When cleaning the engine compartment, be especially careful to protect the electrical system from water.
-
(w/ TWC) PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING OXYGEN SENSOR
Do not allow oxygen sensor to drop or hit against an object. Do not allow the sensor to come into contact with water.
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p233 OEM manual
-
IF VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM (HAM, CB, ETC.)
The engine (and ECT) ECU has been designed so that it will not be affected by outside interference. However, if your vehicle is equipped with a CB radio transceiver, etc. (even one with about 10 W output), it may, at times, have an effect upon engine (and ECT) ECU operation, especially if the antenna and feeder are installed nearby. Therefore, observe the following precautions:
-
INSTALL ANTENNA FAR FROM ECU
Install the antenna as far as possible from the engine (and ECT) ECU. The engine ECU is located under the radio so the antenna should be installed at the rear side of the vehicle.
-
KEEP ANTENNA FEEDER AWAY FROM ECU WIRES
Keep the antenna feeder as far away as possible from the engine (and ECT) ECU wires — at least 20 cm (7.87 in.) — and, especially, do not wind them together.
-
CHECK FEEDER AND ANTENNA ADJUSTMENT
Check that the feeder and antenna are properly adjusted.
-
DO NOT USE POWERFUL MOBILE RADIO
Do not equip your vehicle with a powerful mobile radio system.
-
DO NOT OPEN ECU COVER UNLESS NECESSARY
Do not open the cover or the case of the engine (and ECT) ECU unless absolutely necessary. (If the IC terminals are touched, the IC may be destroyed by static electricity.)
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM — OIL DIPSTICK/FILLER CAP/PCV HOSE SEPARATION
Separation of the engine oil dipstick, oil filler cap, PCV hose, etc. may cause the engine to run out of tune.
-
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM — DISCONNECTION OR CRACKS
Disconnection, looseness or cracks in the parts of the air induction system between the throttle body and cylinder head will cause air suction and cause the engine to run out of tune.
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions · Electronic Control System
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p234 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE REMOVING EFI WIRING
Before removing EFI wiring connectors, terminals, etc., first disconnect the power by either turning the ignition switch OFF or disconnecting the battery terminals. Always check the diagnosis code before disconnecting the battery terminal.
-
INSTALL BATTERY WITH CORRECT POLARITY
When installing the battery, be especially careful not to incorrectly connect the positive (+) and negative (−) cables.
-
HANDLE EFI PARTS CAREFULLY
Do not permit parts to receive a severe impact during removal or installation. Handle all EFI parts carefully, especially the engine (and ECT) ECU.
-
AVOID CARELESS TROUBLESHOOTING
Do not be careless during troubleshooting as there are numerous transistor circuits and even a slight terminal contact can cause further troubles.
-
DO NOT OPEN ECU COVER
Do not open the engine (and ECT) ECU cover.
-
PREVENT WATER ENTRY DURING INSPECTION
When inspecting during rainy weather, take care to prevent entry of water. Also, when washing the engine compartment, prevent water from getting on the EFI parts and wiring connectors.
-
REPLACE PARTS AS ASSEMBLY
Parts should be replaced as an assembly.
-
CARE WHEN HANDLING WIRING CONNECTORS
Care is required when pulling out and inserting wiring connectors. (a) Release the lock and pull out the connector. Pull on the connectors. (b) Fully insert the connector and check that it is locked.
-
INSPECTING CONNECTOR WITH VOLT/OHMMETER
When inspecting a connector with a volt/ohmmeter. (a) Carefully take out the water-proofing rubber if it is a water-proof type connector.
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions · Fuel System
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p235 OEM manual
-
INSERT TEST PROBE FROM WIRING SIDE
Insert the test probe into the connector from wiring side when checking the continuity, amperage or voltage.
-
DO NOT APPLY UNNECESSARY FORCE TO TERMINAL
Do not apply unnecessary force to the terminal.
-
INSTALL WATER-PROOFING RUBBER AFTER CHECKING
After checking, install the water-proofing rubber on the connector securely.
-
USE SST FOR INJECTOR INSPECTION
Use SST for inspection or test of the injector, cold start injector or its wiring connector. SST 5S-FE and 3S-GE: 09842-30050(A) and 09842-30070(C). 3S-GTE: 09842-30050(A) and 09842-30060(B).
-
DISCONNECTING HIGH FUEL PRESSURE LINE
When disconnecting the high fuel pressure line, a large amount of gasoline will spill out, so observe the following procedure: (a) Put a container under the connection. (b) Slowly loosen the connection. (c) Disconnect the connection. (d) Plug the connection with a rubber plug.
-
CONNECTING FLARE NUT OR UNION BOLT ON HIGH PRESSURE PIPE UNION
When connecting the flare nut or union bolt on the high pressure pipe union, observe the following procedure. Union Bolt Type: (a) Always use a new gasket. (b) Tighten the union bolt by hand. (c) Tighten the union bolt to the specified torque. Flare Nut Type: (a) Apply a light coat of engine oil to the flare nut and tighten the flare nut by hand. (b) Using SST 09631-22020, tighten the flare nut to the specified torque. HINT: Use a torque wrench with a fulcrum length of 30 cm (11.81 in.).
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p236 OEM manual
-
OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS WHEN REMOVING AND INSTALLING INJECTORS
Observe the following precautions when removing and installing the injectors.
-
INSTALL INJECTOR TO DELIVERY PIPE AND INTAKE MANIFOLD
Install the injector to delivery pipe and intake manifold as shown in the illustration. Applies to 5S-FE, 3S-GE, and 3S-GTE engine variants. For 5S-FE and 3S-GE: ensure correct orientation of grommet and O-ring between injector and delivery pipe; incorrect installation is shown as WRONG. The 3S-GTE injector uses a single O-ring at the top of the injector body.
EFI SYSTEM · Inspection Precautions
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p237 OEM manual
-
CHECK FOR FUEL LEAKS AFTER MAINTENANCE
Check that there are no fuel leaks after performing any maintenance on the fuel system.
- Always pinch the hose. Avoid bending as it may cause the hose to crack.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · Troubleshooting Hints
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p238 OEM manual
-
CHECK OTHER SYSTEMS BEFORE EFI
Engine troubles are usually not caused by the EFI system. When troubleshooting, always first check the condition of the other systems: (a) Electronic source — Battery, Fusible links, Fuses; (b) Body ground; (c) Fuel supply — Fuel leakage, Fuel filter, Fuel pump; (d) Ignition system — Spark plugs, High-tension cords, Distributor, Ignition coil, Igniter; (e) Air induction system — Vacuum leaks; (f) Emission control system — PCV system, EGR system; (g) Others — Ignition timing (ESA system), Idle speed (ISC system), etc.
-
CHECK WIRING CONNECTORS
The most frequent cause of problems is simply a bad contact in wiring connectors. Always check that connections are secure. When inspecting the connector, pay particular attention to the following points: (a) Check to see that the terminals are not bent. (b) Check to see that the connector is pushed in completely and locked. (c) Check to see that there is no signal change when the connector is slightly tapped or wiggled.
-
TROUBLESHOOT BEFORE REPLACING ECU
Troubleshoot sufficiently for other causes before replacing the engine (and ECT) ECU, as the ECU is of high quality and it is expensive.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p239 OEM manual
-
USE HIGH IMPEDANCE VOLT/OHMMETER
Use a volt/ohmmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum) for troubleshooting of the electrical circuit. (See page FI-38)
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · Symptom — Difficult to Start or No Start (Cranks OK)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p240 OEM manual
-
SYMPTOM — DIFFICULT TO START OR NO START (CRANKS OK)
Diagnostic flowchart for difficult to start or no start condition when engine cranks OK. Steps: (1) Check diagnosis system for output of diagnosis code (see page FI-28). If malfunction code(s) present, refer to pages FI-31, 33, or 35. If normal code, proceed. (2) Does engine start with accelerator pedal depressed? If OK, check ISC system: (1) ISC valve, (2) Wiring connection. If NO, proceed. (3) Check for vacuum leaks in air intake line. If BAD, check: 1. Oil filler cap, 2. Oil dipstick, 3. Hose connection(s), 4. PCV hose(s), 5. EGR system — EGR valve stays open. If OK, proceed. (4) Check ignition spark (see page IG-5). If BAD, check: 1. High-tension cords, 2. Distributor, 3. Ignition coil, 4. Igniter. If OK, proceed. (5) Check spark plugs (standard: 5S-FE 1.1 mm (0.043 in.), 3S-GE and 3S-GTE 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)). HINT: Check compression pressure and valve clearance if necessary. If NO (plugs bad/all wet), check: 1. Injector(s) — Shorted or leaking, 2. Cold start injector — Leakage (see page FI-118, 121 or 124), 3. Injector wiring — Short circuited, 4. Cold start injector time switch (see page FI-185). If OK, continued on page FI-15.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p241 OEM manual
-
CHECK FUEL SUPPLY TO INJECTOR
1. Check fuel tank. 2. Check fuel pressure in fuel line: (1) Connect terminals +B and FP of the check connector. (2) Fuel pressure at fuel hose of fuel filter can be felt. (See page FI-105 or 108). If BAD: 1. Fuel line – Leakage – Deformation 2. Fuse(s) 3. Fuel pump (See page FI-103) 4. Fuel filter 5. Fuel pressure regulator (See page FI-127, 129 or 131).
-
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Connect terminals TE1 and E1 of the check connector. 2. Check ignition timing. Standard: 10° BTDC @ idle. If BAD: Ignition timing – Adjust (See page EM-22 or 23).
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER
See page FI-38. If BAD: 1. Wiring connection 2. Power to ECU: (1) Fusible links (2) Fuses (3) EFI main relay 3. Vacuum sensor (5S-FE and 3S-GE) 4. Air flow meter (3S-GTE) 5. Water temp. sensor 6. Air temp. sensor 7. Injection signal circuit: (1) Injector wiring (2) Resistor (3S-GTE) (3) ECU.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · Symptom — Engine Often Stalls
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p242 OEM manual
-
CHECK DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Check for output of diagnosis code. See page FI-28. If malfunction code(s) output: See diagnostic code(s) on page FI-31, 33 or 35. If normal code, proceed to next check.
-
CHECK FOR VACUUM LEAKS IN AIR INTAKE LINE
If BAD, check: 1. Oil filler cap; 2. Oil dipstick; 3. Hose connection(s); 4. PCV hose(s); 5. EGR system — EGR valve stays open. If OK, proceed to next check.
-
CHECK FUEL SUPPLY TO INJECTOR
Check: 1. Fuel tank; 2. Fuel pressure in fuel line: (1) Short terminals +B and FP of the check connector. (2) Fuel pressure at fuel hose of fuel filter can be felt. See page FI-105 or 108. If BAD: 1. Fuel line — Leakage — Deformation; 2. Fuse(s); 3. Fuel pump (See page FI-103); 4. Fuel filter; 5. Fuel pressure regulator (See page FI-127, 129 or 131). If OK, proceed.
-
CHECK AIR FILTER
If BAD: Element — Clean or replace. If OK, proceed.
-
CHECK IDLE SPEED (AND IDLE CO) CONCENTRATION
Standard idle speeds: 5S-FE 700 ± 50 rpm; 3S-GE 800 ± 50 rpm; 3S-GTE 800 ± 50 rpm. If BAD: 1. ISC system — (1) Wiring connection(s); (2) ISC valve (See page FI-174, 176 or 178); (3) ECU (test by substitution); 2. Idle speed — Adjust (See page EM-24 or 25). If OK, proceed.
-
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Connect terminals TE1 and E1 of the check connector. 2. Check ignition timing. Standard: 10° BTDC @ idle. If NO: Ignition timing — Adjust (See page EM-22 or 23). If OK: Continued to page FI-17.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p243 OEM manual
-
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Check spark plugs against standard gap. Standard: 5S-FE 1.1 mm (0.043 in.), 3S-GE and 3S-GTE 0.8 mm (0.031 in.). HINT: Check compression pressure and valve clearance if necessary. If NO: Check 1. Spark plugs, 2. Compression pressure (minimum at 250 rpm: 5S-FE and 3S-GE 10.0 kg/cm2 (142 psi, 981 kPa), 3S-GTE 9.0 kg/cm2 (128 psi, 883 kPa)), 3. Valve clearance (Cold) — see standards.
-
CHECK COLD START INJECTOR
See page FI-118, 121 or 124. If BAD: 1. Cold start injector (See page FI-118, 121 or 124), 2. Cold start injector time switch (See page FI-185).
-
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
See page FI-105 or 108. If BAD: 1. Fuel pump (See page FI-103), 2. Fuel filter, 3. Fuel pressure regulator (See page FI-127, 129 or 131).
-
CHECK INJECTORS
See page FI-134, 141 or 150. If BAD: Injection condition.
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER
See page FI-38. If BAD: 1. Wiring connection, 2. Power to ECU ((1) Fusible links, (2) Fuses, (3) EFI main relay), 3. Vacuum sensor (5S-FE and 3S-GE), 4. Air flow meter (3S-GTE), 5. Water temp. sensor, 6. Air temp. sensor, 7. Injection signal circuit ((1) Injector wiring, (2) Resistor (3S-GTE), (3) ECU).
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · Symptom - Rough Idling and/Missing
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p245 OEM manual
-
CHECK DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Check for output of diagnosis code. (See page FI-28). If malfunction code(s) output, see page FI-31, 33 or 35.
-
CHECK FOR VACUUM LEAKS IN AIR INTAKE LINE
If BAD, check: 1. Oil filler cap, 2. Oil dipstick, 3. Hose connection(s), 4. PCV hose(s), 5. EGR system — EGR valve stays open.
-
CHECK AIR FILTER
If BAD, Element — Clean or replace.
-
CHECK IDLE SPEED
Standard: 5S-FE 750 ± 50 rpm, 3S-GE 800 ± 50 rpm, 3S-GTE 800 ± 50 rpm. If BAD: 1. ISC system — (1) Wiring connection(s), (2) ISC valve (See page FI-174, 176 or 178), (3) ECU (test by substitution). 2. Idle speed — Adjust (See page EM-24 or 25).
-
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Connect terminals TE1 and E1 of the check connector. 2. Check ignition timing. Standard: 10° BTDC @ idle. If NO, Ignition timing — Adjust (See page EM-22 or 23).
-
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Standard: 5S-FE 1.1 mm (0.043 in.), 3S-GE and 3S-GTE 0.8 mm (0.031 in.). HINT: Check compression pressure and valve clearance if necessary. If NO: 1. Spark plugs, 2. Compression pressure Minimum (at 250 rpm): 5S-FE and 3S-GE 10.0 kg/cm² (142 psi, 981 kPa), 3S-GTE 9.0 kg/cm² (128 psi, 883 kPa). 3. Valve clearance (Cold) — see standards. OK: Continued to page FI-20.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p246 OEM manual
-
CHECK INTAKE AIR CONTROL VALVE (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
If BAD: 1. VSV for intake air control valve (See page FI-192 or 194); 2. Vacuum leaks
-
CHECK COLD START INJECTOR (See page FI-118, 121 or 124)
If BAD: 1. Cold start injector (See page FI-118, 121 or 124); 2. Cold start injector time switch (See page FI-185)
-
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (See page FI-105 or 108)
If BAD: 1. Fuel pump (See page FI-103); 2. Fuel filter; 3. Fuel pressure regulator (See page FI-127, 129 or 131)
-
CHECK INJECTORS (See page FI-134, 141 or 150)
If BAD: Injection condition
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER (See page FI-38)
If BAD: 1. Wiring connection; 2. Power to ECU — (1) Fusible links, (2) Fuses, (3) EFI main relay; 3. Vacuum sensor (5S-FE and 3S-GE); 4. Air flow meter (3S-GTE); 5. Water temp. sensor; 6. Air temp. sensor; 7. Injection signal circuit — (1) Injector wiring, (2) Resistor (3S-GTE), (3) ECU; 8. Oxygen sensor (w/ TWC) (See page FI-201)
-
CHECK VARIABLE RESISTOR (3S-GE w/o TWC) (See page FI-190)
If BAD: Variable resistor
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · SYMPTOM — ENGINE BACKFIRES-Lean Fuel Mixture
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p248 OEM manual
-
CHECK DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Check for output of diagnosis code. See page FI-28. If malfunction code(s) present, see diagnostic codes on pages FI-31, 33 or 35.
-
CHECK FOR VACUUM LEAKS IN AIR INTAKE LINE
If BAD: 1. Oil filler cap 2. Oil dipstick 3. Hose connection(s) 4. PCV hose(s) 5. EGR system — EGR valve stays open
-
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Connect terminals TE1 and E1 of the check connector. 2. Check ignition timing. Standard: 10° BTDC @ idle. If NO: Ignition timing — Adjust (See page EM-22 or 23)
-
CHECK IDLE SPEED
Standard: 5S-FE 700 ± 50 rpm, 3S-GE 800 ± 50 rpm, 3S-GTE 800 ± 50 rpm. If BAD: 1. ISC system (1) Wiring connection(s) (2) ISC valve (See page FI-174, 176 or 178) (3) ECU (test by substitution) 2. Idle speed — Adjust (See page EM-24 or 25)
-
CHECK COLD START INJECTOR
See page FI-118, 121 or 124. If BAD: 1. Cold start injector (See page FI-118, 121 or 124) 2. Cold start injector time switch (See page EM-24 or 25)
-
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
See page FI-105 or 108. If BAD: 1. Fuel pump (See page FI-103) 2. Fuel filter 3. Fuel pressure regulator (See page FI-127, 129 or 131). If OK: Continued to page FI-23.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p249 OEM manual
-
CHECK INJECTORS
Check injectors (See page FI-134, 141 or 150). If BAD: Injector — Clogged.
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER
Check EFI electronic circuit using volt/ohmmeter (See page FI-38). If BAD, check: 1. Wiring connection; 2. Power to ECU — (1) Fusible links, (2) Fuses, (3) EFI main relay; 3. Vacuum sensor (5S-FE and 3S-GE); 4. Air flow meter (3S-GTE); 5. Water temp. sensor; 6. Air temp. sensor; 7. Injection signal circuit — (1) Injector wiring, (2) Resistor (3S-GTE), (3) ECU; 8. Oxygen sensor (w/ TWC) (See page FI-201).
-
CHECK VARIABLE RESISTOR (3S-GE w/o TWC)
Check variable resistor (See page FI-190). If BAD: Variable resistor.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting · Symptom — Muffler Explosion (After Fire) Rich Fuel Mixture-Misfire
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p250 OEM manual
-
CHECK DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Check for output of diagnostic code. (See page FI-28). If malfunction code(s) present, see diagnostic code(s) on page FI-31, 33 or 35. If normal code, proceed to next step.
-
CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Connect terminals TE1 and E1 of the check connector. 2. Check ignition timing. Standard: 10° BTDC @ idle. If NO (not to standard), adjust ignition timing (See page EM-22 or 23).
-
CHECK IDLE SPEED
Standard: 5S-FE 700 ± 50 rpm, 3S-GE 800 ± 50 rpm, 3S-GTE 800 ± 50 rpm. If BAD: 1. ISC system — (1) Wiring connection(s), (2) ISC valve (See page FI-174, 176 or 178), (3) ECU (test by substitution). 2. Idle speed — Adjust (See page EM-24 or 25).
-
CHECK COLD START INJECTOR
See page FI-118, 121 or 124. If not OK: 1. Cold start injector (See page FI-118, 121 or 124). 2. Cold start injector time switch (See page FI-185).
-
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
See page FI-105 or 108. If BAD: Fuel pressure regulator (See page FI-127, 129 or 131).
-
CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
See page FI-157, 163, 165 or 169. If BAD: Throttle body.
-
CHECK INJECTORS
See page FI-134, 141 or 150. If BAD: Injector — Leakage. If OK, continued to page FI-25.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p251 OEM manual
-
CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Check spark plugs against standard gap specifications. Check compression pressure and valve clearance if necessary. Standard gap: 5S-FE 1.1 mm (0.043 in.); 3S-GE and 3S-GTE 0.8 mm (0.031 in.). If NO: check 1. Spark plugs, 2. Compression pressure, 3. Valve clearance (Cold).
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER
See page FI-38. If BAD: 1. Throttle position sensor, 2. Injection signal circuit: (1) Injector wiring, (2) Fuel cut PRM (See page FI-212), (3) Engine ECU, 3. Oxygen sensor (w/ TWC).
-
CHECK VARIABLE RESISTOR (3S-GE w/o TWC)
See page FI-190. If BAD: Variable resistor.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p253 OEM manual
-
CHECK INTAKE AIR CONTROL VALVE (3S-GE and 3S-GTE)
(3S-GE) Check if air control valve is open with engine running at 5,100 rpm above. (3S-GTE w/ Regular Gasoline) Check if air control valve is open with throttle valve open. (3S-GTE w/ Premium Gasoline) Check if air control valve is open with engine running at 4,200 rpm above. If BAD: 1. VSV for intake air control valve (See page FI-192 or 194) 2. Vacuum leaks
-
CHECK EFI ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT USING VOLT/OHMMETER
(See page FI-38) If BAD: 1. Wiring connection 2. Power to ECU: (1) Fusible links (2) Fuses (3) EFI main relay 3. Vacuum sensor (5S-FE and 3S-GE) 4. Air flow meter (3S-GTE) 5. Water temp. sensor 6. Air temp. sensor 7. Injection signal circuit: (1) Injector wiring (2) Resistor (3S-GTE) (3) ECU
EFI SYSTEM · Diagnosis System
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p254 OEM manual
-
CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CHECK
1. The 'CHECK' engine warning light will come on when the ignition switch is placed at ON and the engine is not running. 2. When the engine is started, the 'CHECK' engine warning light should go off. If the light remains on, the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.
EFI SYSTEM · Diagnosis System
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p255 OEM manual
-
READ DIAGNOSTIC CODE FROM CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT
Read the diagnostic code as indicated by the number of flashes of the 'CHECK' engine warning light.
-
NORMAL SYSTEM OPERATION (NO MALFUNCTION)
The light will alternately blink ON and OFF about 2 times per second. For 5S-FE and 3S-GE: blink interval is 0.26 seconds ON / 0.26 seconds OFF. For 3S-GTE: blink interval is 0.25 seconds ON / 0.25 seconds OFF.
-
MALFUNCTION CODE INDICATION
In the event of a malfunction, the light will blink every 0.5 seconds (5S-FE and 3S-GTE) or 0.52 seconds (3S-GE). The first number of blinks will equal the first digit of a 2-digit diagnostic code and, after a 1.5 second pause, the 2nd number of blinks will equal the 2nd digit. If there are two or more codes, there will be a 2.5 second pause between each. After all the codes have been signalled there will be a 4.5 second pause and they will all be repeated as long as terminals TE1 and E1 of the check connector are connected. In the event of a number of trouble codes, indication will begin from the smaller value and continue in order to the larger.
EFI SYSTEM · Diagnosis System
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p256 OEM manual
-
CANCELLATION VIA BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
Cancellation can also be done by removing the battery negative (–) terminal, but in this case, other memory systems (clock, etc.) will also be cancelled out.
-
UNCANCELLED CODE RETENTION
If the diagnostic code is not cancelled out, it will be retained by the engine (and ECT) ECU and appear along with a new code in the event of future trouble.
-
CHECK FOR STORED CODE BEFORE BATTERY REMOVAL
If it is necessary to work on engine components requiring removal of the battery terminal, a check must first be made to see if a diagnostic code has been recorded.
-
DIAGNOSIS INDICATION — MULTIPLE CODES
When 2 or more codes are indicated, the lowest number (code) will appear first.
-
DIAGNOSIS INDICATION — CODE RETENTION
All detected diagnostic codes, except code Nos. 16, 51 and 53, will be retained in memory by the engine (and ECT) ECU from the time of detection until cancelled out.
-
DIAGNOSIS INDICATION — WARNING LIGHT BEHAVIOUR
Once the malfunction is cleared, the "CHECK" engine warning light on the instrument panel will go off but the diagnostic code(s) will remain stored in engine (and ECT) ECU memory (except for code Nos. 16, 51 and 53).
-
REMOVE SST AFTER DIAGNOSTIC CHECK
After the diagnostic check, remove SST 09843-18020.
EFI SYSTEM · Diagnosis System
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p257 OEM manual
-
CANCELLING DIAGNOSTIC CODE
After repair of the trouble area, the diagnostic code retained in memory by the ECU must be cancelled out by removing the fuse 'EFI 15A' for 10 seconds or more, depending on ambient temperature (the lower the temperature, the longer the fuse must be left out) with the ignition switch OFF.
-
CANCELLATION HINT — BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
Cancellation can also be done by removing the battery negative (–) terminal, but in this case, other memory systems (clock, etc.) will also be cancelled out.
-
UNCANCELLED CODE RETENTION
If the diagnostic code is not cancelled out, it will be retained by the ECU and appear along with a new code in the event of future trouble.
-
CHECK BEFORE BATTERY TERMINAL REMOVAL
If it is necessary to work on engine components requiring removal of the battery terminal, a check must first be made to see if a diagnostic code has been recorded.
-
POST-CANCELLATION ROAD TEST
After cancellation, perform road test of the vehicle to check that a normal code is now read on the 'CHECK' engine warning light. If the same diagnostic code appears, it indicates that the trouble area has not been repaired thoroughly.
-
DIAGNOSIS INDICATION — LOWEST CODE FIRST
When 2 or more codes are indicated, the lowest number (code) will appear first.
-
DIAGNOSIS INDICATION — CODE MEMORY RETENTION
All detected diagnostic codes, except code No.51, and No.53 will be retained in memory by the ECU from the time of detection until cancelled out.
-
DIAGNOSIS INDICATION — CHECK LIGHT AND STORED CODES
Once the malfunction is cleared, the 'CHECK' engine warning light on the instrument panel will go off but the diagnostic code(s) remain stored in ECU memory (except for code No.51 and No.53).
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter · Location of Fuses and Fusible Links
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p265 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES DESIGNED FOR SEPARATE SYSTEMS
The following troubleshooting procedures are designed for inspection of each separate system, therefore the procedures may vary somewhat. However, troubleshooting should be performed while referring to the inspection methods described in this manual.
-
CHECK FUSES, FUSIBLE LINKS AND CONNECTORS FIRST
Before beginning inspection, it is best to first make a simple check of the fuses, fusible links and the condition of the connectors.
-
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON SHORT OR OPEN CIRCUIT SUPPOSITION
The following troubleshooting procedures are based on the supposition that the trouble lies in either a short or open circuit in a component outside the computer or a short circuit within the computer.
-
REPLACE ECU IF PROPER VOLTAGE IS PRESENT BUT TROUBLE PERSISTS
If engine trouble occurs even though proper operating voltage is detected in the computer connector, then it can be assumed that the engine (and ECT) ECU is faulty and should be replaced.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p266 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES ARE DESIGNED FOR SEPARATE SYSTEM INSPECTION
The following troubleshooting procedures are designed for inspection of each separate system, and therefore the actual procedure may vary somewhat. However, troubleshooting should be performed while referring to the inspection methods described in this manual.
-
CHECK FUSES, FUSIBLE LINKS AND CONNECTORS BEFORE INSPECTION
Before beginning inspection, it is best to first make a simple check of the fuses, fusible links and the condition of the connectors.
-
TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON SHORT OR OPEN CIRCUIT SUPPOSITION
The following troubleshooting procedures are based on the supposition that the trouble lies in either a short or open circuit in a components outside the computer or a short circuit within the computer.
-
REPLACE ECU IF PROPER VOLTAGE DETECTED BUT ENGINE TROUBLE PERSISTS
If engine trouble occurs even though proper operating voltage is detected in the computer connector, then it can be assumed that the ECU is faulty and should be replaced.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter · EFI System Check Procedure (5S-FE w/o ECT)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p267 OEM manual
-
PERFORM VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS WITH CONNECTORS CONNECTED
Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected (ex. Code No.10).
-
VERIFY BATTERY VOLTAGE
Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or more when the ignition switch is in 'ON' position.
-
USE HIGH IMPEDANCE VOLTMETER
Using a voltmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum), measure the voltage at each terminal of the wiring connectors.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p270 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN BATT AND E1 (Terminal No. 2)
Diagnostic flowchart for troubleshooting No. 2 terminal condition: BATT – E1, No voltage. STD Voltage: 10–14 V. Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals BATT and E1. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal BATT and body ground. If NO: Check fuse and fusible link. If BAD: Replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU terminal and battery. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK (voltage present at BATT to body ground): Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If OK: Try another ECU. If BAD: Repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p274 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN THA AND E2 DIAGNOSTIC FLOW
Step 1: Confirm there is no voltage between ECU terminals THA and E2 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If NO, refer to +B - E1 trouble section No.1 (See page FI-41). If OK, check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, check air temp. sensor (See page FI-188). If air temp. sensor is BAD, replace air temp. sensor. If air temp. sensor is OK, check wiring between ECU and air temp. sensor. If wiring is OK, try another ECU. If wiring is BAD, repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p276 OEM manual
-
No voltage between STA and E1 (IG SW START)
Diagnostic flowchart for trouble No. 8: STA-E1 terminals showing no voltage during cranking. Step 1: Check starter operation. If OK, check wiring between ECU terminal STA and ignition switch terminal ST1. If BAD, repair or replace. Step 2: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If OK, try another ECU. If BAD, repair or replace. Also check fusible links, battery, wiring and ignition switch — if BAD, repair or replace. Step 3: Check that there is voltage at terminal 50 of starter (IG SW START) STD voltage 6-14V. If OK, check starter. If NO, check wiring between ignition switch terminal ST1 and starter terminal 50.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p279 OEM manual
-
No Voltage at ECU Terminals W – E1 (No. 11)
Troubleshooting procedure for no voltage between ECU terminals W and E1 when there is no trouble (CHECK engine warning light off) and engine is running. STD voltage should be 10–14 V. Steps: (1) Confirm no voltage between ECU terminals W and E1 at idle. (2) Check for voltage between ECU terminal W and body ground. If NO voltage at W: check GAUGE fuse (15 A) and CHECK engine warning light — if BAD repair or replace; if fuse blows again check wiring between ECU terminal W and fuse — if BAD repair or replace. If OK voltage at W: (3) Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground — if OK try another ECU; if BAD repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p280 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — No Voltage at A/C Terminal (Terminal 12: A/C – E1)
Step 1: Confirm there is no voltage between ECU terminals A/C and E1 with air conditioning ON. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal A/C and body ground. If NO: Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, try another ECU. If OK at Step 2: Check compressor running — if OK, check wiring between ECU terminal A/C and amplifier (if BAD, repair or replace); if compressor BAD, check that there is voltage between amplifier terminal and body ground (if BAD, repair or replace); if OK, check wiring between amplifier and ECU or compressor (if BAD, repair or replace).
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p281 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS VF AND E1 — DIAGNOSTIC FLOWCHART
Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals VF and E1. Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal VF and body ground. If NO: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If that wiring is OK: Try another ECU. If that wiring is BAD: Repair or replace. If VF to body ground is OK: Check if air is leaking into air induction system. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check spark plugs (See page IG-7). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check distributor and ignition system (See page IG-4). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check fuel pressure (See page FI-103). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check injectors (See page FI-134). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: *Check cold start injector (See page FI-118) [Rich malfunction only]. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check vacuum sensor (See page FI-136). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Step 2: Check operation of oxygen sensor (See page FI-201). If OK: System normal. If BAD: Check wiring between oxygen sensor and ECU. If BAD: Repair wiring. If OK: Replace oxygen sensor.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter · EFI System Check Procedure (5S-FE w/ ECT)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p282 OEM manual
-
PERFORM VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS WITH CONNECTORS CONNECTED
Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected. (ex. Code No.10)
-
VERIFY BATTERY VOLTAGE
Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or more when the ignition switch is in 'ON' position.
-
USE HIGH IMPEDANCE VOLTMETER
Using a voltmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum), measure the voltage at each terminal of the wiring connectors.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p284 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS +B OR +B1 AND E1 (IG SW ON)
Diagnostic flowchart for trouble No. 1 (+B/+B1 – E1, No voltage, IG SW ON, STD 10–14 V). Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals +B or +B1 and E1 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If NO: Check fuses, fusibles link and ignition switch — if BAD repair or replace; if OK check EFI main relay (see page FI-182) — if BAD replace; if OK check wiring between EFI main relay and battery — if BAD repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If OK: Try another ECU. If BAD: Repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p285 OEM manual
-
No Voltage Between BATT and E1 (No. 2)
Diagnostic flowchart for trouble condition: No voltage between ECU terminals BATT and E1. STD Voltage: 10-14V. Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals BATT and E1. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal BATT and body ground. If NO: Check fuse and fusible link. If BAD: Replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU terminal and battery. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK (from Step 2): Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground (Step 3). If OK: Try another ECU. If BAD: Repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p287 OEM manual
-
VC – E2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Step 1: No voltage between ECU terminals VC and E2 (IG SW ON). Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If OK: Check throttle position sensor (See page FI-163). If throttle position sensor is BAD: Repair or replace. If throttle position sensor is OK: Check wiring between ECU and throttle position sensor. If wiring is OK: Try another ECU. If wiring is BAD: Repair or replace wiring. If no voltage at +B/+B1: Refer to +B – E1 trouble Section (No.1) (See page FI-56).
-
VTA – E2 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Step 1: No specified voltage at ECU terminals VTA and E2 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminals VC and E2 (IG SW ON). If NO: Refer to VC – E2 trouble section. If OK: Step 3: Check throttle position sensor (See page FI-163). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU and throttle position sensor. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Try another ECU.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p289 OEM manual
-
No voltage between ECU terminals No.10 and/or No.20 and E01 and/or E02 (IG SW ON)
Step 1: Verify there is no voltage between ECU terminals No.10 and/or No.20 and E01 and/or E02 with ignition switch ON. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal No.10 and/or No.20 and body ground. If NO: Check fusible links and ignition switch — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, proceed to step 3. If OK: Check wiring between ECU terminal E01 and/or E02 and body ground — if OK, try another ECU; if BAD, repair or replace. Step 3: Check resistance of each injector. STD resistance: Approx. 13.8 Ω. If OK: Check wiring between ECU terminal No.10 and/or No.20 and battery — if BAD, repair or replace. If BAD: Replace injector.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p291 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN THW AND E2 (Trouble No. 7)
Diagnostic flowchart for no voltage condition between ECU terminals THW and E2 with IG SW ON and coolant temperature at 80°C (176°F). Standard voltage should be 0.1–1.0 V. Step 1: Confirm there is no voltage between ECU terminals THW and E2 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If NO, refer to +B–E1 trouble section (No.1, page FI-56). If OK, check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, proceed to Step 3: Check water temp. sensor (See page FI-186). If BAD, replace water temp. sensor. If OK, check wiring between ECU and water temp. sensor. If OK, try another ECU. If BAD, repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p292 OEM manual
-
No voltage between STA and E1 (IG SW START)
Diagnostic flowchart for No. 8: Terminals STA – E1, Trouble: No voltage, Condition: Cranking, STD voltage: 6–14 V. Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals STA and E1 (IG SW START). Check starter operation. If OK, check wiring between ECU terminal STA and ignition switch terminal ST1. If BAD on wiring check, repair or replace. If starter operation is BAD, proceed to step 2: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If OK, try another ECU. If BAD, repair or replace. Also check fusible links, battery, wiring and ignition switch. If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, proceed to step 3: Check that there is voltage at terminal 50 of starter (IG SW START) STD voltage: 6–14 V. If OK, check starter. If NO, check wiring between ignition switch terminal ST1 and starter terminal 50.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p293 OEM manual
-
CHECK IGT – E1 NO VOLTAGE (IDLING)
Diagnostic flowchart for trouble No. 9: No voltage between ECU terminals IGT and E1 during idling. Step 1: Confirm there is no voltage between ECU terminals IGT and E1 (Idling). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal IGT and body ground (Idling). If NO voltage at IGT to body ground: Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, try another ECU. If OK voltage at IGT to body ground: Check fusible links and ignition switch — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, check distributor (see page IG-11) — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, check wiring between ECU and battery — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, check igniter (see page IG-12) — if BAD, repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p295 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS W AND E1 (IDLING)
Diagnostic flowchart for trouble No. 11 (terminals W – E1, no voltage). Condition: No trouble ('CHECK' engine warning light off) and engine running. STD voltage: 10–14 V. Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals W and E1 (Idling). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal W and body ground. If NO → Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If OK → Try another ECU. If BAD → Repair or replace. If OK (voltage present at W to body ground) → Check GAUGE fuse (15A) and 'CHECK' engine warning light. If OK → (fuse blows again) Check wiring between ECU terminal W and fuse. If BAD → Repair or replace. If BAD (fuse/light bad) → Repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p296 OEM manual
-
No Voltage at A/C – E1 Terminals (Air Conditioning ON)
Diagnostic flowchart for trouble code No. 12 (terminals A/C – E1, no voltage, air conditioning ON). Step 1: Confirm no voltage between ECU terminals A/C and E1 with air conditioning ON. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal A/C and body ground. If NO: Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground — BAD → Repair or replace; OK → Try another ECU. If OK at step 2: Check compressor running — OK → Check wiring between ECU terminal A/C and amplifier — BAD → Repair or replace; BAD (compressor) → Check that there is voltage between amplifier terminal and body ground — BAD → Repair or replace; OK → Check wiring between amplifier and ECU or compressor — BAD → Repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p297 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS VF AND E1
There is no voltage between ECU terminals VF and E1. Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal VF and body ground. If NO: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If that check is OK: Try another ECU. If that check is BAD: Repair or replace. If voltage between VF and body ground is OK: Check if air is leaking into air induction system. If BAD: Repair/replace. If OK: Check spark plugs (See page IG-7). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check distributor and ignition system (See page IG-4). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check fuel pressure (See page FI-103). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check injectors (See page FI-134). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: *Check cold start injector (See page FI-118) [*Rich malfunction only]. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check vacuum sensor (See page FI-189). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check operation of oxygen sensor (See page FI-201). If OK: System normal. If BAD: Check wiring between oxygen sensor and ECU. If BAD: Repair wiring. If OK: Replace oxygen sensor.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter · EFI System Check Procedure (3S-GE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p298 OEM manual
-
PERFORM VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS WITH CONNECTORS CONNECTED
Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected. (ex. Code No.10)
-
VERIFY BATTERY VOLTAGE
Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or more when the ignition switch is in 'ON' position.
-
USE HIGH IMPEDANCE VOLTMETER
Using a voltmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum), measure the voltage at each terminal of the wiring connectors.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p300 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN +B/+B1 AND E1 DIAGNOSTIC FLOW
Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals +B or +B1 and E1 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If NO: Check fuses, fusible links and ignition switch — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, check EFI main relay (see page FI-182) — if BAD, replace; if OK, check wiring between EFI main relay and battery — if BAD, repair or replace. If OK at step 2: Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground — if OK, try another ECU; if BAD, repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p301 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS BATT AND E1 (Check No. 2)
Diagnostic flowchart for trouble condition: No voltage between ECU terminals BATT and E1. Step 1: Confirm there is no voltage between ECU terminals BATT and E1. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal BATT and body ground. If NO: Check fuse and fusible link — if BAD, replace; if OK, check wiring between ECU terminal BATT and battery — if BAD, repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground (Step 3) — if OK, try another ECU; if BAD, repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p303 OEM manual
-
VC – E2 Diagnostic Procedure
Step 1: No voltage between ECU terminals VC and E2 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If NO: Refer to +B – E1 trouble section (No.1) (See page FI-72). If OK: Check throttle position sensor (See page FI-165). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU and throttle position sensor. If OK: Try another ECU. If BAD: Repair or replace.
-
VTA – E2 Diagnostic Procedure
Step 1: No specified voltage at ECU terminals VTA and E2 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminals VC and E2 (IG SW ON). If NO: Refer to VC – E2 trouble section. If OK: Step 3: Check throttle position sensor (See page FI-165). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU and throttle position sensor. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Try another ECU.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p306 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN THA AND E2 (Trouble No. 6)
Diagnostic flowchart for no voltage condition between ECU terminals THA and E2 with IG SW ON at intake air temperature 20°C (68°F). Standard voltage should be 1–3 V. Step 1: Confirm no voltage between ECU terminals THA and E2 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If NO, refer to +B1–E1 trouble section No.1 (See page FI-72). If OK, check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, proceed to Step 3: Check air temp. sensor (See page FI-188). If BAD, repair air temp. sensor. If OK, check wiring between ECU and air temp. sensor. If OK, try another ECU. If BAD, repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p308 OEM manual
-
No voltage between STA and E1 (Trouble No. 8)
Diagnostic flowchart for checking no voltage between ECU terminals STA and E1 during cranking. Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals STA and E1 (IG SW START). Check starter operation. If OK, check wiring between ECU terminal STA and ignition switch terminal ST1. If BAD, proceed to step 2. Step 2: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If OK, try another ECU. If BAD, repair or replace. Also check fusible links, battery, wiring and ignition switch; if BAD, repair or replace. Step 3: Check that there is voltage at terminal 50 of starter (IG SW START) STD voltage 6-14V. If OK, check starter. If NO, check wiring between ignition switch terminal ST1 and starter terminal 50.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p309 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS IGT AND E1 (IDLING)
Diagnostic troubleshooting flowchart for No. 9: Terminals IGT – E1, Trouble: No voltage, Condition: Idling, STD voltage: 0.7 – 1.0 V. Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals IGT and E1 (Idling). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal IGT and body ground (Idling). If NO: Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, try another ECU. If OK at Step 2: Check fusible links and ignition switch — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, check distributor (See page IG-11) — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, check wiring between ECU and battery — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, check igniter (See page IG-12) — if BAD, repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p310 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE AT RSC/RSO — E1 (Terminal No. 10)
Diagnostic flowchart for No voltage condition between ECU terminals RSC or RSO and E1 with IG SW ON and Engine (and ECT) ECU connectors disconnected. Step 1: Confirm there is no voltage between ECU terminals RSC or RSO and E1 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If NO, refer to +B - E1 trouble section (No.1) (See page FI-72). If OK, proceed to Step 3. Step 3: Check resistance between ISC valve terminals +B and RSC or RSO. STD resistance: Approx. 19.3 - 22.3 Ω. If BAD, replace ISC valve. If OK, check wiring between ECU and ISC valve. If wiring BAD, repair or replace. If wiring OK, try another ECU.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p311 OEM manual
-
No voltage between ECU terminals W and E1 (Idling)
Diagnostic flowchart for trouble No. 11 (terminals W – E1, no voltage, condition: no trouble 'CHECK' engine warning light off and engine running, STD voltage 10–14 V). Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals W and E1 (Idling). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal W and body ground. If NO: proceed to step 3 — check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground; if OK try another ECU, if BAD repair or replace. If OK: Check GAUGE fuse (15 A) and 'CHECK' engine warning light; if BAD repair or replace; if fuse blows again check wiring between ECU terminal W and fuse — if BAD repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p312 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN AC1 AND E1 (AIR CONDITIONING ON)
Diagnostic flowchart for trouble No. 12: terminals AC1–E1, no voltage condition with air conditioning ON. STD voltage should be 8–14V. Step 1: Confirm no voltage between ECU terminals AC1 and E1 with air conditioning ON. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal AC1 and body ground. If NO: Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK, try another ECU. If OK at Step 2: Check compressor running. If OK: Check wiring between ECU terminal AC1 and amplifier — if BAD, repair or replace. If compressor BAD: Check that there is voltage between amplifier terminal and body ground — if BAD, repair or replace; if OK: Check wiring between amplifier and ECU or compressor — if BAD, repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter · Oxygen Sensor Diagnostic Flow
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p313 OEM manual
-
NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS VF AND E1
There is no voltage between ECU terminals VF and E1. Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal VF and body ground. If NO: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground. If that wiring is OK: Try another ECU. If that wiring is BAD: Repair or replace. If OK (voltage present at VF to body ground): Check if air is leaking into air induction system — BAD: Repair or replace. OK: Check spark plugs (See page IG-7) — BAD: Repair or replace. OK: Check distributor and ignition system (See page IG-4) — BAD: Repair or replace. OK: Check fuel pressure (See page FI-108) — BAD: Repair or replace. OK: Check injectors (See page FI-141) — BAD: Repair or replace. OK: *Check cold start injector (See page FI-121) — BAD: Repair or replace (*Rich malfunction only). OK: Check vacuum sensor (See page FI-189) — BAD: Repair or replace. OK: Check operation of oxygen sensor (See page FI-201) — OK: System normal. BAD: Check wiring between oxygen sensor and ECU — BAD: Repair wiring. OK: Replace oxygen sensor.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter · EFI System Check Procedure (3S-GTE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p314 OEM manual
-
PERFORM VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS WITH CONNECTORS CONNECTED
Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected. (ex. Code No.10)
-
VERIFY BATTERY VOLTAGE
Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or more when the ignition switch is in 'ON' position.
-
USE HIGH IMPEDANCE VOLTMETER
Using a voltmeter with high impedance (10 kΩ/V minimum), measure the voltage at each terminal of the wiring connectors.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p317 OEM manual
-
No voltage between BATT and E1 (No. 2)
Troubleshooting procedure for no voltage between ECU terminals BATT and E1. Step 1: Confirm there is no voltage between ECU terminals BATT and E1. Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal BATT and body ground. If NO: Check fuse and fusible link — if BAD replace; if OK check wiring between ECU terminal BATT and battery — if BAD repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground (step 3). If OK: Try another ECU. If BAD: Repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter · VC-E2 and VTA-E2 Diagnostics
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p319 OEM manual
-
VC – E2: No voltage between ECU terminals VC and E2 (IG SW ON)
Step 1: No voltage between ECU terminals VC and E2 (IG SW ON). Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If OK: proceed to Step 2 — Check throttle position sensor (See page FI-169). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK after TPS check: Check wiring between ECU and throttle position sensor. If OK: Try another ECU. If BAD: Repair or replace. If NO voltage at +B/+B1: Refer to +B – E1 trouble section (No.1) (See page FI-88).
-
VTA – E2: No specified voltage at ECU terminals VTA and E2 (IG SW ON)
Step 1: No specified voltage at ECU terminals VTA and E2 (IG SW ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminals VC and E2 (IG SW ON). If NO: Refer to VC – E2 trouble section. If OK: proceed to Step 3 — Check throttle position sensor (See page FI-169). If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Check wiring between ECU and throttle position sensor. If BAD: Repair or replace. If OK: Try another ECU.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p326 OEM manual
-
No Voltage at RSC/RSO — E1 (No. 10) Diagnostic Flowchart
When there is no voltage between ECU terminals RSC or RSO and E1 with IG SW ON: (1) Check voltage between ECU terminal +B or +B1 and body ground (IG SW ON). If NO voltage, refer to +B – E1 trouble section (No.1), page FI-72. If OK, proceed. (2) Check resistance between ISC valve terminals +B and RSC or RSO. STD resistance: approx. 19.3 – 22.3 Ω. If BAD, replace ISC valve. If OK, proceed. (3) Check wiring between ECU and ISC valve. If BAD, repair or replace. If OK, try another ECU.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter · No voltage W-E1
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p327 OEM manual
-
CHECK NO VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECU TERMINALS W AND E1 (IDLING)
Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals W and E1 (Idling). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal W and body ground. If NO voltage at W to body ground, proceed to check GAUGE fuse (15A) and CHECK engine warning light — if OK check wiring between ECU terminal W and fuse (if BAD: repair or replace); if fuse/light BAD: repair or replace (if fuse blows again: check wiring between ECU terminal W and fuse — if BAD: repair or replace). If OK voltage at W to body ground, proceed to Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground — if OK: try another ECU; if BAD: repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p329 OEM manual
-
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — No voltage between AC1 and E1 (Air conditioning ON)
Step 1: There is no voltage between ECU terminals AC1 and E1 (Air conditioning ON). Step 2: Check that there is voltage between ECU terminal AC1 and body ground. If NO: Step 3: Check wiring between ECU terminal E1 and body ground — BAD: Repair or replace; OK: Try another ECU. If OK at step 2: Check compressor running — OK: Check wiring between ECU terminal AC1 and amplifier — BAD: Repair or replace. If compressor BAD: Check that there is voltage between amplifier terminal and body ground — BAD: Repair or replace; OK: Check wiring between amplifier and ECU or compressor — BAD: Repair or replace.
EFI SYSTEM · Troubleshooting with Volt/Ohmmeter
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p330 OEM manual
-
CHECK CONNECTOR PROCEDURE (Step 2)
Connect SST between Check Connector terminals E1 and TE1, then connect voltmeter between Check Connector terminals VF1 and E1 to monitor oxygen sensor feedback voltage signal.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Fuel Pump
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p331 OEM manual
-
FUEL PUMP — COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
The fuel pump is a centrifugal/impeller-type electric pump. Key components include: Outlet (top), Inlet (bottom), Check Valve, Relief Valve, Bearing (upper and lower), Armature, Magnet, and Impeller. The impeller rotates within a casing with inlet and outlet ports positioned radially.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Fuel Pump)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p341 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF FUEL PUMP
See page FI-112.
-
INSTALL FUEL PUMP FILTER TO FUEL PUMP
Install the pump filter with a new clip.
-
INSTALL FUEL PUMP TO FUEL PUMP BRACKET
(a) Install the rubber cushion to the fuel pump. (b) Connect the fuel hose to the outlet port of the fuel pump. (c) Connect the lead wire to the fuel pump with the spring washer and nut. Connect the two lead wires. (d) Install the fuel pump by pushing the lower side of the fuel pump.
-
INSTALL FUEL SENDER GAUGE TO FUEL PUMP BRACKET
(a) Install the sender gauge with the two screws.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Fuel Pump) · Removal/Installation
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p344 OEM manual
-
REMOVE FUEL PUMP FROM FUEL PUMP BRACKET (Step 5)
(a) Pull out the lower side of the fuel pump from the bracket. (b) Remove the rubber cushion from the fuel pump. (c) Remove the nut and spring washer, and disconnect the lead wire from the fuel pump. Disconnect the three lead wires. (d) Disconnect the fuel hose from the fuel pump, and remove the fuel pump.
-
REMOVE FUEL PUMP FILTER FROM FUEL PUMP (Step 6)
(a) Using a small screwdriver, remove the clip. (b) Pull out the pump filter.
-
REMOVE PUMP BRACKET ASSEMBLY
(b) Pull out the pump bracket assembly. (c) Remove the gasket from the pump bracket.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Fuel Pump) · Disassembly / Assembly
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p350 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF FUEL PUMP
See page FI-95. Steps: 1. INSTALL FUEL PUMP FILTER TO FUEL PUMP — Install the pump filter with a new clip. 2. INSTALL FUEL PUMP TO FUEL PUMP BRACKET — (a) Connect the fuel hose to the outlet port of the fuel pump. (b) Connect the lead wire to the fuel pump with the spring washer and nut. Connect the three lead wires. (c) Install the rubber cushion to the fuel pump. (d) Install the fuel pump by pushing the lower side of the fuel pump.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Cold Start Injector (5S-FE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p353 OEM manual
-
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF COLD START INJECTOR
On-vehicle inspection of the cold start injector resistance.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Cold Start Injector (5S-FE))
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p354 OEM manual
-
REMOVE COLD START INJECTOR
Remove the two bolts, cold start injector and gasket.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Cold Start Injector (5S-FE))
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p355 OEM manual
-
INSPECT LEAKAGE
In the condition above, disconnect the test probes of SST (wire) from the battery and check fuel leakage from the injector. SST 09842-30050. Fuel drop: One drop or less per minute.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Cold Start Injector (3S-GE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p356 OEM manual
-
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF COLD START INJECTOR
On-vehicle inspection procedure for the cold start injector resistance.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Cold Start Injector (3S-GE)) · Inspection and Installation
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p358 OEM manual
-
INSPECT FUEL SPRAY
Connect the test probes of the SST (wire) to the battery, and check that the fuel spray is as shown. SST 09842-30050. NOTICE: Perform this check within the shortest possible time.
- Perform this check within the shortest possible time.
-
INSPECT LEAKAGE
In the condition above, disconnect the test probes of SST (wire) from the battery and check fuel leakage from the injector. SST 09842-30050. Fuel drop: One drop or less per minute. (b) Disconnect the battery negative (-) cable. (c) Remove SST. SST 09268-41045, 09842-30050 and 09843-18020. (d) Connect the fuel inlet hose with two new gaskets and the union bolt.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Cold Start Injector (3S-GTE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p359 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION — INSPECT RESISTANCE OF COLD START INJECTOR
Steps: (a) Remove the throttle body (See steps 1 to 10 on pages FI-170, 171). (b) Disconnect the cold start injector connector. (c) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the terminals. Resistance: 2–4 Ω. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the cold start injector. (d) Reconnect the cold start injector connector. (e) Reinstall the throttle body (See steps 2 to 12 on pages FI-172, 173).
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Cold Start Injector (3S-GTE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p361 OEM manual
-
INSPECT LEAKAGE
Disconnect the test probes of SST (wire) from the battery and check fuel leakage from the injector. Fuel drop: One drop or less per minute. Disconnect the battery negative (−) cable. Remove SST.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Fuel Pressure Regulator (5S-FE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p362 OEM manual
-
INSPECT FUEL PRESSURE
Inspect fuel pressure. See page FI-105.
-
HINT: SLOWLY LOOSEN THE UNION BOLT
Slowly loosen the union bolt when disconnecting the fuel return pipe from the pressure regulator.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Fuel Pressure Regulator (5S-FE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p363 OEM manual
-
REMOVE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Step 3 of removal procedure: (a) Remove the two bolts, and pull out the pressure regulator. (b) Remove the O-ring from the pressure regulator.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Fuel Pressure Regulator (3S-GE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p364 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
INSPECT FUEL PRESSURE (See page FI-108)
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Fuel Pressure Regulator (3S-GE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p365 OEM manual
-
REMOVE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Loosen the lock nut, and remove the pressure regulator. Remove the O-ring from the pressure regulator.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Fuel Pressure Regulator (3S-GTE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p366 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
INSPECT FUEL PRESSURE (See page FI-108).
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System · Fuel Pressure Regulator (3S-GTE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p367 OEM manual
-
REMOVE INJECTOR COVER
Remove the four screws, injector cover and four insulators.
-
REMOVE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Loosen the lock nut, and remove the pressure regulator. Remove the O-ring from the pressure regulator.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Injectors (5S-FE))
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p373 OEM manual
-
INSPECT INJECTION VOLUME
Connect SST (wire) to the injector and battery for 15 seconds, and measure the injection volume with a graduated cylinder. Test each injector two or three times. SST 09842-30070. Volume: 48-58 cc (2.9-3.5 cu in.) per 15 sec. Difference between each injector: 5 cc (0.3 cu in.) or less. If the injection volume is not as specified, replace the injector.
-
INSPECT LEAKAGE
In the condition above, disconnect the test probes of SST (wire) from the battery and check the fuel leakage from the injector. SST 09842-30070. Fuel drop: One drop or less per minute. Disconnect the battery negative (-) cable. Remove SST. SST 09268-41045 and 09843-18020.
EFI SYSTEM · Fuel System (Injectors (3S-GE))
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p380 OEM manual
-
CONNECT CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Using SST, connect terminals +B and FP of the check connector. SST 09843-18020.
-
MEASURE INJECTION VOLUME
Connect SST (wire) to the injector and battery for 15 seconds, and measure the injection volume with a graduated cylinder. Test each injector two or three times. SST 09842-30070. Volume: 66 – 82 cc (4.0 – 5.0 cu in.) per 15 sec. Difference between each injector: 5 cc (0.3 cu in.) or less. If the injection volume is not as specified, replace the injector.
-
INSPECT LEAKAGE
In the condition above, disconnect the test probes of SST (wire) from the battery and check the fuel leakage from the injector. SST 09842-30070. Fuel drop: One drop or less per minute. Disconnect the battery negative (–) cable. Remove SST. SST 09268-41045 and 09843-18020.
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Air Flow Meter (3S-GTE only)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p390 OEM manual
-
INSPECT RESISTANCE OF AIR FLOW METER
On-vehicle inspection procedure: (a) Disconnect the air flow meter connector. (b) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between each terminal. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the air flow meter. (c) Reconnect the air flow meter connector.
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System (Air Flow Meter (3S-GTE only))
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p391 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF AIR FLOW METER — INSPECT RESISTANCE OF AIR FLOW METER
Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between each terminal by moving the measuring plate. Between terminals E2 - VS: resistance 200–600 Ω when fully closed; 20–1,200 Ω when fully open. HINT: Resistance between terminals E2 and VS will change in a wave pattern as the measuring plate slowly opens. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the meter.
-
INSTALLATION OF AIR FLOW METER
1. INSTALL AIR FLOW METER TO AIR CLEANER CAP — Install the air flow meter with the gasket, lock plate, four plate washers, four nuts and bolt. Pry the lock plate on the nut. 2. INSTALL AIR CLEANER CAP AND AIR FLOW METER ASSEMBLY. 3. CONNECT AIR CLEANER HOSE. 4. CONNECT ACCELERATOR CABLE TO CLAMP. 5. CONNECT AIR FLOW METER CONNECTOR.
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Idle Speed Control (ISC) Valve (5S-FE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p410 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF ISC VALVE
Step 1: REMOVE THROTTLE BODY (See steps 1 to 9 on page FI-159). Step 2: REMOVE ISC VALVE — Remove the four screws, ISC valve and gasket.
-
INSTALLATION OF ISC VALVE
Step 1: INSTALL ISC VALVE — (a) Place a new gasket on the throttle body. (b) Install the ISC valve with the four screws. Step 2: INSTALL THROTTLE BODY (See steps 2 to 10 on page FI-162).
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Idle Speed Control (ISC) Valve (3S-GE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p412 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF ISC VALVE
1. REMOVE THROTTLE BODY (See steps 1 to 9 on page FI-166). 2. REMOVE ISC VALVE: Remove the four screws, ISC valve and gasket.
-
INSTALLATION OF ISC VALVE
1. INSTALL ISC VALVE: (a) Place a new gasket on the throttle body. (b) Install the ISC valve with the four screws. 2. INSTALL THROTTLE BODY (See steps 2 to 10 on page FI-168).
EFI SYSTEM · Air Induction System · Idle Speed Control (ISC) Valve (3S-GTE)
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p414 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF ISC VALVE
Step 1: REMOVE THROTTLE BODY (See steps 1 to 10 on pages FI-170, 171). Step 2: REMOVE ISC VALVE — Remove the four screws, ISC valve and gasket.
-
INSTALLATION OF ISC VALVE
Step 1: INSTALL ISC VALVE — (a) Place a new gasket on the throttle body. (b) Install the ISC valve with the four screws. Step 2: INSTALL THROTTLE BODY (See steps 2 to 12 on pages FI-171, 173).
EFI SYSTEM · Electronic Control System · Location of Electronic Control Parts
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p415 OEM manual
-
ECU AND CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY LOCATION
The Engine (& ECT) ECU is located inside the cabin at the center console area. The Circuit Opening Relay is located adjacent to the ECU on the center console.
-
OTHER CONTROL PARTS (5S-FE) LOCATION
The following components are located in the engine bay: Vacuum Sensor (upper right area), EGR VSV (upper left area), Water Temperature Sensor (left side of engine), Intake Temperature Sensor (right side intake), Oxygen Sensor (lower left, exhaust side), Cold Start Injector Time Switch (lower right), EFI Main Relay (lower left area).
Electronic Control System · EFI SYSTEM · Location of Electronic Control Parts
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p416 OEM manual
-
OTHER CONTROL PARTS (3S-GE) — COMPONENT LOCATIONS
Diagram identifying locations of electronic control parts for the 3S-GE engine: Vacuum Sensor, (w/ TWC only) Oxygen Sensor, Fuel Pressure Control, Cold Start Injector Time Switch, (w/o TWC only) Variable Resistor, Intake Air Temperature Sensor, ACIS VSV, Water Temperature Sensor, EFI Main Relay.
-
OTHER CONTROL PARTS (3S-GTE) — COMPONENT LOCATIONS
Diagram identifying locations of electronic control parts for the 3S-GTE engine: EGR VSV, FVIS VSV, Fuel Pump Relay, Turbocharging Pressure Sensor, Turbocharging Pressure VSV, Cold Start Injector Time Switch, Water Temperature Sensor, Oxygen Sensor, EFI Main Relay, Fuel Pump Resistor, Solenoid Resistor.
EFI SYSTEM · Electronic Control System · Location of Electronic Control Parts
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p417 OEM manual
-
LOCATION OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL PARTS (CONT'D) — 5S-FE
Diagram showing the physical location of electronic control components on the 5S-FE engine/vehicle. Components identified: Oxygen Sensor (Main), Cold Start Injector Time Switch, Water Temp. Sensor, Vacuum Sensor, EGR Gas Temp. Sensor, Engine (& ECT) ECU, EFI Main Relay, Circuit Opening Relay, Sub-Oxygen Sensor (CALIF. only), Intake Air Temp. Sensor, EGR VSV, Fuel Pressure VSV.
EFI SYSTEM · Electronic Control System · Location of Electronic Control Parts
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p418 OEM manual
-
LOCATION OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL PARTS (3S-GTE)
Diagram identifying the physical location of all electronic control system components on the 3S-GTE engine as installed in the vehicle. Components identified: Oxygen Sensor, EGR VSV, EGR Gas Temp. Sensor, Turbocharging Pressure Sensor, Engine ECU, Fuel Pump Resistor, Water Temp. Sensor, Cold Start Injector Time Switch, Circuit Opening Relay, EFI Main Relay, Fuel Pump Relay, Solenoid Resistor, Turbocharging Pressure VSV, T-VIS VSV.
Electronic Control System · EFI SYSTEM · Engine (and ECT) Electronic Controlled Unit (ECU)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p441 OEM manual
-
PERFORM VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS WITH CONNECTORS CONNECTED
Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors connected.
-
VERIFY BATTERY VOLTAGE
Verify that the battery voltage is 11 V or more when the ignition switch is ON.
COOLING SYSTEM · Description
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p453 OEM manual
-
COOLING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This engine utilizes a pressurized water circulation cooling system which includes a thermostat equipped with a by-pass valve mounted on the inlet side.
COOLING SYSTEM · Description
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p455 OEM manual
-
COOLING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The cooling system is composed of the water jacket (inside the cylinder block and cylinder head), radiator, water pump thermostat, electric fan, hoses and other components. Coolant which is heated in the water jacket is pumped to the radiator through which an electric fan blows air to cool the coolant as it passes through. Coolant which has been cooled is then sent back to the engine by the water pump, where it cools the engine. The water jacket is a network of channels in the shell of the cylinder block and cylinder head through which coolant passes. It is designed to provide adequate cooling of the cylinders and combustion chambers which become hot during engine operation.
-
RADIATOR
The radiator performs the function of cooling the coolant which has passed through the water jacket and become hot, and it is mounted in the front of the vehicle. The radiator consists of an upper tank and lower tank, and a core which connects the two tanks. The upper tank contains coolant from the water jacket and the filler inlet. It also has a hose attached through which excess coolant can flow. The lower tank has an outlet and drain cock for the coolant. The core contains many tubes through which coolant flows from the upper tank to the lower tank as well as cooling fins which radiate heat away from the coolant in the tubes. The air sucked through the radiator by the electric fan, as well as the wind generated by the vehicle's travel, passes through the radiator, cooling the coolant. Models with automatic transmission include an automatic transmission fluid cooler built into the lower tank of the radiator. A fan with an electric motor is mounted behind the radiator to assist the flow of air through the radiator. The fan operates when the coolant temperature becomes high in order to prevent it from becoming too high.
-
RADIATOR CAP
The radiator cap is a pressure type cap which seals the radiator, resulting in pressurization of the radiator as the coolant expands. The pressurization prevents the coolant from boiling even when the coolant temperature exceeds 100°C (212°F). A relief valve (pressurization valve) and a vacuum valve (negative pressure valve) are built into the radiator cap. The relief valve opens and lets steam escape through the overflow pipe when the pressure generated inside the cooling system exceeds the limit (coolant temperature: 110 – 120°C, 230 – 248°F, pressure: 0.3 – 1.0 kg/cm², 4.3-14.2 psi, 29.4-98.1 kPa). The vacuum valve opens to alleviate the vacuum which develops in the coolant system after the engine is stopped and the coolant temperature drops. The valve's opening allows the coolant in the reservoir tank to return to the cooling system.
-
RESERVOIR TANK
The reservoir tank is used to catch coolant which overflows the cooling system as a result of volumetric expansion when the coolant is heated. The coolant in the reservoir tank returns to the radiator when the coolant temperature drops, thus keeping the radiator full at all times and avoiding needless coolant loss. Check the reservoir tank level to learn if the coolant needs to be replenished.
-
WATER PUMP
The water pump is used for forced circulation of coolant through the cooling system. It is mounted on the front of the cylinder block and driven by a timing belt.
-
THERMOSTAT
The thermostat has a wax type by-pass valve and is mounted in the water inlet housing. The thermostat includes a type of automatic valve operated by fluctuations in the temperature. This valve closes when the coolant temperature drops, preventing the circulation of coolant through the engine and thus permitting the engine to warm up rapidly. The valve opens when the coolant temperature has risen, allowing the circulation of coolant. Wax inside the thermostat expands when heated and contracts when cooled. Heating the wax thus generates pressure which overpowers the force of the spring which keeps the valve closed, thus opening the valve. When the wax cools, its contraction causes the force of the spring to take effect once more, closing the valve. The thermostat in this engine operates at a temperature of 82°C (180°F).
COOLING SYSTEM · Troubleshooting
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p456 OEM manual
-
THERMOSTAT REMOVAL HINT
If the engine tends to overheat, removal of the thermostat will adversely effect cooling efficiency.
COOLING SYSTEM · Water Pump
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p460 OEM manual
-
INSPECTION OF WATER PUMP
Turn the pulley and check that the water pump bearing moves smoothly and quietly.
COOLING SYSTEM · Thermostat
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p463 OEM manual
-
INSPECT THERMOSTAT
HINT: The thermostat is numbered with the valve opening temperature. (a) Immerse the thermostat in water and gradually heat the water. (b) Check the valve opening temperature. Valve opening temperature: 80–84°C (176–183°F). If the valve opening temperature is not as specified, replace the thermostat. (c) Check the valve lift. Valve lift: 8 mm (0.31 in.) or more at 95°C (203°F). If the valve lift is less than specification, replace the thermostat. (d) Check that the valve spring is tight when the thermostat is fully closed. If necessary, replace the thermostat.
COOLING SYSTEM · Radiator
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p465 OEM manual
-
CLEANING OF RADIATOR
Using water or a steam cleaner, remove any mud and dirt from the radiator core. If using a high pressure type cleaner, be careful not to deform the fins of the radiator core. If the cleaner nozzle pressure is 30-35 kg/cm2 (427-498 psi, 2,942-3,432), keep a distance of at least 40-50 cm (15.75-19.69 in.) between the radiator core and cleaner nozzle.
- If using a high pressure type cleaner, be careful not to deform the fins of the radiator core. If the cleaner nozzle pressure is 30-35 kg/cm2 (427-498 psi, 2,942-3,432), keep a distance of at least 40-50 cm (15.75-19.69 in.) between the radiator core and cleaner nozzle.
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fan · System Circuit
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p466 OEM manual
-
ELECTRIC COOLING FANS — SYSTEM CIRCUIT
The electric cooling fan system is powered from the battery through a fusible link (ALT 100A) and AM2 (30A) fuse to the Engine Main Relay. The ignition switch (AM2 to IG2) feeds a Fuse IGN (7.5A). For vehicles with A/C, the A/C High Pressure Switch controls the No. 1 Fan Relay. Without A/C, the Water Temp. Switch directly controls the No. 1 Fan Motor. For 3S-GE (Europe) models, an additional circuit includes an RDI (30A) fusible link, CDS (30A) fuse, No. 2 Fan Relay, No. 2 Fan Motor, and A/C Water Temp. Switch.
-
COMPONENTS — No. 1 Fan Assembly
No. 1 fan assembly consists of: Fan, Fan Shroud, and Fan Motor.
-
COMPONENTS — No. 2 Fan Assembly (3S-GE Europe)
No. 2 fan assembly (3S-GE Europe) consists of: Fan, Fan Shroud, and Fan Motor.
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fan
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p469 OEM manual
-
Inspect relay operation (cooling fan relay)
B. Inspect relay operation: (a) Apply battery voltage to terminals 1 and 2. (b) Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between terminals 1 and 3. (c) Check that there is no continuity between terminals 1 and 4. If operation is not as specified, replace the relay.
COOLING SYSTEM · Description
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p470 OEM manual
-
COOLING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This engine utilizes a pressurized forced circulation cooling system which includes a thermostat equipped with a by-pass valve mounted on the inlet side.
COOLING SYSTEM · Description
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p471 OEM manual
-
COOLING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The cooling system is composed of the water jacket (inside the cylinder block and cylinder head), radiator, water pump, thermostat, electric fan, hoses and other components. Coolant which is heated in the water jacket is pumped to the radiator, through which an electric fan blows air to cool the coolant as it passes through. Coolant which has been cooled is then sent back to the engine by the water pump, where it cools the engine. The water jacket is a network of channels in the shell of the cylinder block and cylinder head through which coolant passes. It is designed to provide adequate cooling of the cylinders and combustion chambers which become heated during engine operation.
-
RADIATOR
The radiator performs the function of cooling the coolant which has passed through the water jacket and become hot, and it is mounted in the front of the vehicle. The MR2 radiator is different from that in other models, in that it is a cross flow type in which the coolant flows horizontally. It includes side tanks and a core which connects them. The inlet for coolant from the water jacket and the drain cock for draining out coolant are located in the left tank. The outlet coolant and an air drain, which facilitates the supply of coolant to the engine are located in the right tank. The core contains many tubes through which coolant flows from left tank to the right tank as well as cooling fins which radiate heat away from the coolant in the tubes. Air sucked in by the electric cooling fan, as well as the wind generated by the vehicle's travel, passes through the radiator, cooling the coolant heated by the water jacket as it passes through the tubes in the core. Models with automatic transmission include an automatic transmission fluid cooler incorporated into the cooling pipes. A fan with an electric motor is mounted behind the radiator to assist the flow of air through the radiator. The fan operates when the coolant temperature becomes high in order to prevent it from becoming too high.
-
RADIATOR CAP
The radiator cap is a pressure type cap which seals the radiator, resulting in pressurization of the radiator as the coolant expands. The pressurization prevents the coolant from boiling even when the coolant temperature exceeds 100°C (212°F). A relief valve (pressurization valve) and a vacuum valve (negative pressure valve) are built into the radiator cap. The relief valve opens and lets steam escape through the overflow pipe when the pressure generated inside the cooling system exceeds the limit (coolant temperature: 110–120°C, 230–248°F, pressure; 0.3–1.0 kg/cm², 4.3–14.2 psi, 29.4–98.1 kPa). The vacuum valve opens to alleviate the vacuum which develops in the coolant system after the engine is stopped and the coolant temperature drops. The valve's opening allows the coolant in the reservoir tank to return to the cooling system.
-
RESERVOIR TANK
The reservoir tank is used to catch coolant which overflows the cooling system as a result of volumetric expansion when the coolant is heated. The coolant in the reservoir tank returns to the radiator when the coolant temperature drops, thus keeping the radiator full at all times and avoiding needless coolant loss. Check the reservoir tank level to learn if the coolant needs to be replenished.
-
WATER PUMP
The water pump is used for forced circulation of coolant through the cooling system. It is mounted on the front of the cylinder block and driven by a timing belt.
-
THERMOSTAT
The thermostat has a wax type by-pass valve and is mounted in the water inlet housing. The thermostat includes a type of automatic valve operated by fluctuations in the coolant temperature. This valve closes when the coolant temperature drops, preventing the circulation of coolant through the engine and thus permitting the engine to warm up rapidly. The valve opens when the coolant temperature has risen, allowing the circulation of coolant. Wax inside the thermostat expands when heated and contracts when cooled. Heating the wax thus generates pressure which overpowers the force of the spring which keeps the valve closed, thus opening the valve. When the wax cools, its contraction causes the force of the spring to take effect once more, closing the valve. The thermostat in this engine operates at a temperature of 82°C (180°F).
COOLING SYSTEM · Troubleshooting, Engine Coolant Check
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p472 OEM manual
-
THERMOSTAT REMOVAL HINT
Removal of the thermostat would have an adverse effect, causing a lowering of cooling efficiency. Do not remove the thermostat, even if the engine tends to overheat.
COOLING SYSTEM · Replacement of Engine Coolant · Engine Coolant Circuit
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p473 OEM manual
-
AVOID BURNS — COOL ENGINE BEFORE WORK
To avoid the danger of burns, do not begin work until the engine and coolant are properly cooled down.
- Do not begin work until the engine and coolant are properly cooled down.
-
PERFORM WORK ON LEVEL SURFACE
To ensure that coolant is poured in properly, perform the operation at a level area. Performing work with the vehicle inclined may cause improper removal of coolant or improper air removal when pouring coolant.
- Performing work with the vehicle inclined may cause improper removal of coolant or improper air removal when pouring coolant.
-
CHECK WATER LEVEL AFTER REPLACEMENT
When replacement has been performed, check the water level in the water filler and reservoir tank once or twice within 500 km (311 miles) of driving or within one week.
COOLING SYSTEM · Water Pump · Components
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p478 OEM manual
-
WATER PUMP COMPONENTS — 3S-GTE
Exploded view of water pump assembly for 3S-GTE engine showing: Water Pump, Gasket (non-reusable), Water Pump Cover, O-Ring (non-reusable), Thermostat, Gasket (non-reusable), Water Inlet, Gasket (non-reusable), Water By-Pass Pipe, Oil Dipstick Guide. Refer to page LU-18 for lubrication system details.
-
WATER PUMP COMPONENTS — 5S-FE
Exploded view of water pump assembly for 5S-FE engine showing: Water Pump, Gasket (non-reusable), Water Pump Cover, O-Ring (non-reusable), Thermostat, Gasket (non-reusable), Water Inlet, Gasket (non-reusable), Water By-Pass Pipe.
-
NON-REUSABLE PARTS
Parts marked with a filled diamond (◆) are non-reusable and must be replaced during reassembly. These include all Gaskets and O-Rings in both the 3S-GTE and 5S-FE water pump assemblies.
COOLING SYSTEM · Water Pump · Inspection and Installation
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p480 OEM manual
-
INSPECT WATER PUMP
Turn the pulley and check that the water pump bearing moves smoothly and quietly.
COOLING SYSTEM · Thermostat
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p482 OEM manual
-
INSPECT THERMOSTAT
HINT: The thermostat is numbered with the valve opening temperature. (a) Immerse the thermostat in water and gradually heat the water. (b) Check the valve opening temperature. If the valve opening temperature is not as specified, replace the thermostat. (c) Check the valve lift. If the valve lift is less than specification, replace the thermostat. (d) Check that the valve spring is tight when the thermostat is fully closed. If necessary, replace the thermostat.
COOLING SYSTEM · Radiator
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p484 OEM manual
-
CLEANING OF RADIATOR
Using water or a steam cleaner, remove any mud and dirt from the radiator core.
- If using a high pressure type cleaner, be careful not to deform the fins of the radiator core. If the cleaner nozzle pressure is 30-35 kg/cm2 (427-498 psi, 2,942-3,432), keep a distance at least 40-50 cm (15.75-19.69 in.) between the radiator core and cleaner nozzle.
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fans (Radiator Cooling Fans (w/ A/C)) · System Circuit
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p489 OEM manual
-
ELECTRIC COOLING FANS – Radiator Cooling Fans (w/ A/C) SYSTEM CIRCUIT
System circuit diagram showing the electric cooling fan wiring for vehicles equipped with A/C. Power is supplied from Battery through FL MAIN 2.0L, FL AM1 50A, and FL ALT 120A fusible links. The ignition switch feeds AM1/IG1 and AM2/IG2 circuits. Fuse AM2 7.5A is in the ignition circuit. Fuse RAD FAN 30A feeds No. 1 Cooling Fan Relay and No. 2 Cooling Fan Relay (with Diode). Fuse CDS FAN 30A feeds No. 2 Cooling Fan Relay and No. 2 Radiator Cooling Fan (A/C) motor. Fuse GAUGE 7.5A feeds the A/C Amplifier circuit. The Fan Main Relay controls main power distribution. No. 3 Cooling Fan Relay is controlled via the A/C Amplifier (terminal 3/10/9). The A/C Pressure Switch is connected between No. 1 and No. 2 Cooling Fan Relays. Water Temp. Sensor (motor symbol) is connected to No. 3 Cooling Fan Relay (terminals 10, 9, 15, 13). A/C Amplifier terminals: 1=To A/C Idle-Up VSV, 2=To A/C Pressure Switch, 4=To A/C Control Assembly, 6=(arrow), 7=To Engine (& ECT) ECU, 8=To A/C Magnet Clutch Relay, 11=To A/C Thermistor, 14=To A/C Thermistor, 17=(arrow), 15/13/18=To Igniter. No. 1 Radiator Cooling Fan (Engine) is driven by the engine-side fan circuit. No. 2 Radiator Cooling Fan (A/C) is driven by the A/C-side fan circuit.
-
LOCATION OF RADIATOR COOLING FAN COMPONENTS
Component location diagram for the radiator cooling fan system on the Toyota MR2 SW20. Under-hood relay/fuse box contains: No. 3 Cooling Fan Relay ('FAN No. 3'), No. 1 Cooling Fan Relay ('FAN No. 1'), FL ALT 120A fusible link, FL AM1 50A fusible link, Fan Main Relay ('FAN MAIN'), Fuse AM2 7.5A, No. 2 Cooling Fan Relay ('FAN No. 2'), Fuse RAD FAN 30A, Fuse CDS FAN 30A. Separate fuse box contains Fuse GAUGE 7.5A. Engine bay components: Water Temp. Sensor (located on engine), A/C Amplifier (located at rear of vehicle), No. 2 Radiator Cooling Fan (A/C) (located at radiator), No. 1 Radiator Cooling Fan (Engine) (located at radiator).
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fans (Radiator Cooling Fans (w/ A/C)) · On-Vehicle Inspection & Inspection of Radiator Cooling Fan Components
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p490 OEM manual
-
INSPECT A/C AMPLIFIER FOR CIRCUIT
Disconnect the A/C amplifier connector, and check the connector on the wiring harness side as shown in the chart on the next page.
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fans (Radiator Cooling Fans (w/ A/C))
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p492 OEM manual
-
INSPECT RELAY OPERATION (preceding relay, terminals 3/4/5)
Apply battery voltage across terminal 1 and 2. Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between terminals 3 and 4. Check that there is continuity between terminals 3 and 5. If operation is not as specified, replace the relay.
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fans (Radiator Cooling Fans (w/ A/C)) · Disassembly and Assembly
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p494 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF RADIATOR COOLING FANS
1. INSTALL FAN MOTOR 2. INSTALL FAN
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fans (Radiator Cooling Fan (w/o A/C)) · On-Vehicle Inspection & Component Inspection
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p497 OEM manual
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION — Low Temperature (Below 83°C (181°F))
Step 1: TURN IGNITION SWITCH 'ON' — Check that the cooling fan stops. If not, check the cooling fan relays and water temperature switch, and check for a separated connector or severed wire between the cooling fan relay and water temperature switch. Step 2: DISCONNECT WATER TEMPERATURE SWITCH CONNECTOR — Check that the cooling fan rotates. If not, check the fan main relay, cooling fan relays, cooling fan and fuses, and check for a short circuit between the cooling fan relay and water temperature switch. Step 3: CONNECT WATER TEMPERATURE SWITCH CONNECTOR.
-
ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION — High Temperature (Above 93°C (199°F))
Step 4: START ENGINE — (a) Raise coolant temperature to above 93°C (199°F). (b) Check that the cooling fan rotates. If not, replace the water temperature switch.
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fans (Radiator Cooling Fan (w/o A/C))
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p498 OEM manual
-
REMOVAL OF RADIATOR COOLING FAN
REMOVE NO. 1 RADIATOR COOLING FAN (See page CO-25)
-
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF RADIATOR COOLING FAN
See page CO-26
-
INSTALLATION OF RADIATOR COOLING FAN
INSTALL NO. 1 RADIATOR COOLING FAN (See page CO-27)
COOLING SYSTEM · Electric Cooling Fans · Engine Compartment Cooling Fan (3S-GTE)
Cooling
engine_3s_family · p503 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY OF ENGINE COMPARTMENT COOLING FAN
1. INSTALL FAN MOTOR 2. INSTALL FAN
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Description
Lubrication / oil
engine_3s_family · p506 OEM manual
-
LUBRICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A fully pressurized, fully filtered lubrication system has been adopted for this engine. The system includes: Oil Pan → Oil Strainer → Oil Pump (with Relief Valve) → Oil Filter (with Relief Valve, and optional Oil Cooler with Relief Valve) → Main Oil Hole → branching to: (1) Crankshaft → Connecting Rods → Pistons; (2) Cylinder Head → Camshaft Journals → Cams → Valve Lifters & Valve Stems → Camshaft Gear. Diagrams shown for both 5S-FE and 3S-GE engine variants. Both engines feature Relief Valve, Oil Strainer, Oil Cooler, and Oil Filter. Oil Cooler is an optional (*) component.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Description
Lubrication / oil
engine_3s_family · p508 OEM manual
-
LUBRICATION SYSTEM OVERVIEW
A pressure feeding lubrication system has been adopted to supply oil to the moving parts of this engine. The lubrication system consists of an oil pan, oil pump, oil filter and other external parts which supply oil to the moving parts in the engine block. Oil from the oil pan is pumped up by the oil pump. After it passes through the oil filter, it is fed through the various oil holes in the crankshaft and cylinder block. After passing through the cylinder block and performing its lubricating function, the oil is returned by gravity to the oil pan. A dipstick on the center left side of the cylinder block is provided to check the oil level.
-
OIL PUMP
The oil pump pumps up oil from the oil pan and sends it under pressure to the various parts of the engine. An oil strainer is mounted in front of the inlet to the oil pump. The oil pump itself is a trochoid type pump, inside of which there is a drive rotor and a drive rotor. When the driven rotor rotates, the driven rotor rotates in the same direction, and since the axis of the drive rotor shaft is different from the center of the driven rotor, the space between the two rotors is changed as they rotate. Oil is drawn in when the space is wide and is discharged when the space in narrow.
-
OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR
At high engine speeds, the engine oil supplied by the oil pump exceeds the capacity of the engine to utilize it. For that reason, the oil pressure regulator works to prevent an oversupply of oil. During normal oil supply, a coil spring and valve keep the by-pass closed, but when too much oil is being fed, the pressure becomes extremely high, overpowering the force of the spring and opening the valves. This allows the excess oil to flow through the valve and return to the oil pan.
-
OIL FILTER
The oil filter is a full flow type filter with a built-in paper filter element. Particles of metal from wear, airborn dirt, carbon and other impurities can get into the oil during use and could cause accelerated wear or seizing if allowed to circulate through the engine. The oil filter, integrated into the oil line, removes these impurities as the oil passes through it. The filter is mounted outside the engine to simplify replacement of the filter element. A relief valve is also included ahead of the filter element to relieve the high oil pressure in case that filter element becomes clogged with impurities. The relief valve opens when the oil pressure overpowers the force of the spring. Oil passing through the relief valve by-passes the oil filter and flows directly into the main oil hole in the engine.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Replacement of Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Lubrication / oil
engine_3s_family · p511 OEM manual
-
SKIN CONTACT WITH MINERAL OIL
Prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oil will result in the removal of natural fats from the skin, leading to dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin cancer.
-
PROTECTIVE MEASURES WHEN CHANGING ENGINE OIL
Care should be taken, therefore, when changing engine oil to, minimize the frequency and length of time your skin is exposed to used engine oil. Protective clothing and gloves, that cannot be penetrated by oil, should be worn. The skin should be thoroughly washed with soap and water, or use waterless hand cleaner, to remove any used engine oil. Do not use gasoline, thinners, or solvents.
-
USED OIL DISPOSAL
In order to preserve the environment, used oil must be disposed of only at designated disposal sites.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil Pump
Lubrication / oil
engine_3s_family · p517 OEM manual
-
REPLACEMENT OF CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL
See page EM-165.
-
ASSEMBLY OF OIL PUMP
See page EM-11.
-
INSTALL DRIVE AND DRIVEN ROTORS
Step 1 of oil pump assembly.
-
INSTALL RELIEF VALVE
Step 2 of oil pump assembly.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil Cooler
Lubrication / oil
engine_3s_family · p521 OEM manual
-
DISCONNECT WATER BY-PASS HOSES FROM OIL COOLER
Disconnect the two water by-pass hoses.
-
REMOVE OIL COOLER
Remove the nut, then remove the relief valve, plate washer, oil cooler and gasket, then remove the O-ring from the oil cooler.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil Cooler · Removal / Inspection
Lubrication / oil
engine_3s_family · p524 OEM manual
-
INSPECT RELIEF VALVE
Push the valve with a wooden stick to check if it is stuck. If stuck, replace the relief valve.
-
INSPECT OIL COOLER
Check the oil cooler for damage or clogging. If necessary, replace the oil cooler.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil Nozzles · 3S-GTE
Lubrication / oil
engine_3s_family · p532 OEM manual
-
INSPECT RELIEF VALVES (OIL NOZZLES)
Push the valve with a wooden stick to check if it is stuck. If stuck, replace the relief valve.
-
INSTALL OIL NOZZLES (WITH RELIEF VALVES)
Using a 5 mm hexagon wrench, install the oil nozzle with the bolt. Install the four oil nozzles. Torque: 93 kg-cm (81 in.-lb, 9.1 N·m)
-
INSTALL CRANKSHAFT
(5S-FE: See pages EM-169 to 173) (3S-GE, 3S-GTE: See pages EM-193 to 197)
IGNITION SYSTEM · Precautions, Troubleshooting
Ignition
engine_3s_family · p534 OEM manual
-
DO NOT LEAVE IGNITION SWITCH ON
Do not leave the ignition switch on for more than 10 minutes if the engine will not start.
-
TACHOMETER TEST PROBE CONNECTION
With a tachometer connected to the system, connect the test probe of the tachometer to terminal IG⊖ of the check connector.
-
TACHOMETER POWER SOURCE CONNECTION
With a tachometer connected to the system, connect the power source probe of the tachometer to service terminal +B of the engine compartment relay box.
-
CONFIRM TACHOMETER COMPATIBILITY
As some tachometers are not compatible with this ignition system, we recommend that you confirm the compatibility of yours before use.
-
NEVER ALLOW TACHOMETER TERMINAL TO TOUCH GROUND
NEVER allow the tachometer terminal to touch ground as this could damage the igniter and/or ignition coil.
- NEVER allow the tachometer terminal to touch ground as this could damage the igniter and/or ignition coil.
-
DO NOT DISCONNECT BATTERY WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING
Do not disconnect the battery when the engine is running.
-
CHECK IGNITER GROUND
Check that the igniter is properly grounded to the body.
IGNITION SYSTEM · Ignition System Circuit
Ignition
engine_3s_family · p536 OEM manual
-
ELECTRONIC SPARK ADVANCE (ESA)
The ECU is programmed with data for optimum ignition timing under any and all operating conditions. Using data provided by sensors which monitor various engine functions (rpm, intake air volume, eng. temperature, etc.) the microcomputer (ECU) triggers the spark at precisely the right instant.
IGNITION SYSTEM · On-Vehicle Inspection · Spark Test
Ignition
engine_3s_family · p537 OEM manual
-
SPARK TEST — NO SPARK DIAGNOSTIC FLOWCHART
If spark does not occur, follow this diagnostic sequence: 1) CHECK CONNECTION OF IGNITION COIL, IGNITER AND DISTRIBUTOR CONNECTORS — if BAD, connect securely. 2) CHECK RESISTANCE OF HIGH-TENSION CORD (max 25kΩ per cord, see page IG-6) — if BAD, replace the cord(s). 3) CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO IGNITION COIL AND IGNITER: turn ignition switch to ON and check for battery voltage at ignition coil positive (+) terminal — if BAD, check wiring between ignition switch to ignition coil and igniter. 4) CHECK RESISTANCE OF IGNITION COIL (see page IG-10): Primary (Cold) 0.40-0.50 Ω, Secondary (Cold) 10.2-13.8 kΩ — if BAD, replace the ignition coil. 5) CHECK RESISTANCE OF SIGNAL GENERATOR (PICKUP COIL) (see page IG-12): 5S-FE 170-210 Ω; 3S-GE/3S-GTE G1-G⊖ 140-180 Ω, G2-G⊖ 140-180 Ω, NE-G⊖ 180-220 Ω — if BAD, replace the distributor housing assembly. 6) CHECK AIR GAP OF DISTRIBUTOR (see page IG-11): 0.2-0.4 mm (0.008-0.016 in.) — if BAD, replace the distributor housing assembly. 7) CHECK IGT SIGNAL FROM ECU (see pages 49, 65, 81 or 97) — if BAD, check wiring between ECU, distributor and igniter, only then try another ECU. 8) If all OK, TRY ANOTHER IGNITER.
IGNITION SYSTEM · On-Vehicle Inspection · Platinum Tipped Type
Ignition
engine_3s_family · p540 OEM manual
-
NEVER USE A WIRE BRUSH FOR CLEANING
Never use a wire brush for cleaning platinum tipped spark plugs.
-
NEVER ATTEMPT TO ADJUST GAP ON USED PLUG
Never attempt to adjust gap on a used platinum tipped plug.
IGNITION SYSTEM · On-Vehicle Inspection
Ignition
engine_3s_family · p544 OEM manual
-
IGNITER
See procedure Spark Test on page IG-5.
STARTING SYSTEM
Starting / charging
engine_3s_family · p547 OEM manual
-
STARTING SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index listing: TROUBLESHOOTING (ST-2), STARTING SYSTEM CIRCUIT (ST-2), STARTER (ST-3).
STARTING SYSTEM · Troubleshooting, Starting System Circuit
Starting / charging
engine_3s_family · p548 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagnostic table listing problems, possible causes, remedies and page references for the starting system. Problems covered: Engine will not crank, Engine cranks slowly, Starter keeps running, Starter spins-engine will not crank.
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter · Components
Starting / charging
engine_3s_family · p549 OEM manual
-
STARTER COMPONENTS — 1.0 kw Type
Exploded diagram identifying all components of the 1.0 kw starter: Snap Ring, Pinion Gear, Compression Spring, Starter Housing, Idle Gear Bearing, Starter Clutch, Compression Spring, Clutch Shaft, Steel Ball, Beating Retainer, Spring Retainer, Front Bearing, Stop Collar, Magnetic Switch, Return Spring, Armature, Rear Bearing, Field Frame (Field Coil), Brush Holder, End Cover.
-
STARTER COMPONENTS — 1.4 kw Type
Exploded diagram identifying all components of the 1.4 kw starter: Snap Ring, Pinion Gear, Compression Spring, Starter Housing, Idle Gear Bearing, Compression Spring, Starter Clutch, Clutch Shaft, Steel Ball, O-Ring (x2), Bearing Retainer, Spring Retainer, Front Bearing, Stop Collar, Magnetic Switch, Return Spring, Armature, Rear Bearing, Field Frame (Field Coil), Brush Holder, End Cover.
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter · Removal / Inspection and Repair
Starting / charging
engine_3s_family · p551 OEM manual
-
INSPECT COMMUTATOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between the segments of the commutator. If there is no continuity, replace the armature.
-
INSPECT COMMUTATOR FOR GROUND
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between the commutator and armature coil core. If there is continuity, replace the armature.
-
INSPECT COMMUTATOR FOR DIRTY AND BURNT SURFACE
If the surface is dirty or burnt, correct with sandpaper (No. 400) or on a lathe.
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter · Inspection
Starting / charging
engine_3s_family · p552 OEM manual
-
INSPECT FIELD COIL FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between the lead wire and field coil brush lead. If there is no continuity, replace the field frame.
-
INSPECT FIELD COIL FOR GROUND
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between the field coil end and field frame. If there is continuity, replace the field frame.
STARTING SYSTEM · Starter · Bearings and Magnetic Switch
Starting / charging
engine_3s_family · p556 OEM manual
-
PERFORM PULL-IN COIL OPEN CIRCUIT TEST
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between terminals 50 and C. If there is no continuity, replace the magnetic switch.
-
PERFORM HOLD-IN COIL OPEN CIRCUIT TEST
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between terminal 50 and the switch body. If there is no continuity, replace the magnetic switch.
CHARGING SYSTEM · Precautions, Troubleshooting, Charging System Circuit
Starting / charging
engine_3s_family · p562 OEM manual
-
CHECK BATTERY CABLE CONNECTIONS
Check that the battery cables are connected to the correct terminals.
-
DISCONNECT BATTERY CABLES DURING QUICK CHARGE
Disconnect the battery cables when the battery is given a quick charge.
-
DO NOT USE HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTER
Do not perform tests with a high voltage insulation resistance tester.
-
NEVER DISCONNECT BATTERY WITH ENGINE RUNNING
Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running.
CHARGING SYSTEM · On-vehicle Inspection
Starting / charging
engine_3s_family · p564 OEM manual
-
CHECK DRIVE BELT TENSION
Using SST A 09216-00020 and SST B 09216-00030, check the drive belt tension. If the belt tension is not as specified, adjust it.
-
NEW BELT DEFINITION
"New belt" refers to a belt which has been used 5 minutes or less on a running engine.
-
USED BELT DEFINITION
"Used belt" refers to a belt which has been used on a running engine for 5 minutes or more.
-
BELT FIT CHECK
After installing a belt, check that it fits properly in the ribbed grooves.
-
BELT GROOVE CHECK
Check by hand to confirm that the belt has not slipped out of the groove on the bottom of the pulley.
-
NEW BELT RUN-IN
After installing a new belt, run the engine for about 5 minutes and recheck the belt tension.
-
VISUALLY CHECK ALTERNATOR WIRING AND LISTEN FOR ABNORMAL NOISES
Check that the wiring is in good condition. Check that there is no abnormal noise from the alternator while the engine is running.
-
CHARGE WARNING LIGHT RESULT
If the light does not go off as specified, troubleshoot the charge light circuit.
CHARGING SYSTEM · Alternator · Components
Starting / charging
engine_3s_family · p566 OEM manual
-
ALTERNATOR COMPONENTS — 5S-FE M/T
Exploded view of alternator components for 5S-FE M/T variant. Components identified: Pulley, Drive End Frame (Stator), Front Bearing, Retainer, Rotor, Rear Bearing, Bearing Cover, Brush Holder Cover, Brush Holder, Spring, Brush, IC Regulator, Rectifier Holder, Rectifier End Frame, Rubber Insulator.
-
ALTERNATOR COMPONENTS — Others
Exploded view of alternator components for all other engine variants. Components identified: Pulley, Drive End Frame (Stator), Front Bearing, Retainer, Rotor, Alternator Washer, Rear Bearing, Bearing Cover, Seal Plate, Rectifier End Frame, Rear End Cover, Brush Holder Cover, Brush Holder, IC Regulator, Rectifier Holder, Rubber Insulator.
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · Engine Mechanical (3S-GE and 3S-GTE) · Specifications
Engine — mechanical
engine_3s_family · p583 OEM manual
-
Drive Belt Deflection — Alternator w/ A/C New belt
9-11 mm (0.35-0.43 in.)
-
Drive Belt Deflection — Alternator w/ A/C Used belt
13-16 mm (0.51-0.63 in.)
-
Drive Belt Deflection — Alternator w/o A/C New belt
11-14 mm (0.43-0.55 in.)
-
Drive Belt Deflection — Alternator w/o A/C Used belt
12-18 mm (0.47-0.71 in.)
-
Drive Belt Tension (Alternator Reference) w/ A/C New belt
70-80 kg
-
Drive Belt Tension (Alternator Reference) w/ A/C Used belt
30-45 kg
-
Drive Belt Tension (Alternator Reference) w/o A/C New belt
47-72 kg
-
Drive Belt Tension (Alternator Reference) w/o A/C Used belt
36-52 kg
-
Battery specific gravity
1.25-1.27 when fully charged at 20°C (68°F)
-
High-tension cord resistance limit
25 kΩ per cord
-
Ignition timing
10° BTDC @ idle (w/ Terminals TE1 and E1 connected)
-
Firing order
1-3-4-2
-
Idle speed
800 ± 50 rpm
-
Idle CO concentration w/ TWC
0-0.5%
-
Idle CO concentration w/o TWC
1.0 ± 0.5%
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · EFI System (5S-FE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p589 OEM manual
-
EFI SYSTEM (5S-FE) SPECIFICATIONS
Service specification table for the EFI system on the 5S-FE engine covering: fuel pressure regulator, cold start injector, injector, throttle body, throttle position sensor (w/o ECT and w/ ECT), ISC valve, cold start injector time switch, water temp. sensor, throttle opener setting speed, and fuel cut rpm.
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · EFI System (3S-GE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p592 OEM manual
-
EFI SYSTEM (3S-GE) SPECIFICATIONS
Reference specifications for fuel pressure regulator, cold start injector, injector, throttle body, throttle position sensor, ISC valve, cold start injector time switch, water temp sensor, oxygen sensor, ACIS VSV, fuel pressure VSV, and fuel cut rpm for the 3S-GE EFI system.
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · EFI System (3S-GTE)
EFI / fuel injection
engine_3s_family · p595 OEM manual
-
EFI SYSTEM (3S-GTE) SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel pressure regulator: Fuel pressure at No vacuum 2.3-2.7 kg/cm² (33-38 psi, 226-265 kPa). Cold start injector resistance 2-4 Ω; fuel leakage one drop or less per minute. Injector resistance 2-4 Ω; injection volume 101-114 cc (6.2-7.0 cu in.) per 15 sec; difference between each cylinder 5 cc (0.3 cu in.) or less; fuel leakage one drop or less per minute. Throttle body fully closed angle 6°. Throttle position sensor: clearance 0 mm/0 in — VTA-E2 0.2-0.8 kΩ, IDL-E2 2.3 kΩ or less, IDL-E2 (open) Infinity, VTA-E2 (open) 3.3-10 kΩ, VC-E2 3-7 kΩ; clearance 0.50 mm/0.020 in and 0.70 mm/0.028 in noted; throttle valve fully opened position. ISC valve resistance +B-RSC or RSO 19.3-22.3 Ω. Cold start injector time switch resistance STA-STJ below 10°C (50°F) 30-50 Ω; above 25°C (77°F) 70-90 Ω; STA-Ground 30-90 Ω. Air flow meter resistance VS-E2 measuring plate fully closed 200-600 Ω, fully open 20-1,000 Ω; VC-E2 200-400 Ω; FC-E1 Infinity (measuring plate fully closed), Zero (others); THA-E2 at -20°C (-4°F) 10-20 kΩ, at 0°C (32°F) 4-7 kΩ, at 20°C (68°F) 2-3 kΩ, at 40°C (104°F) 0.9-1.3 kΩ, at 60°C (140°F) 0.4-0.7 kΩ. Fuel pump resistor resistance approx. 0.73 Ω. Solenoid resistor resistance +B-No.10, No.20, No.30 or No.40 4-6 Ω. Water temp. sensor resistance at -20°C (-4°F) 10-20 kΩ, at 0°C (32°F) 4-7 kΩ, at 20°C (68°F) 2-7 kΩ, at 40°C (104°F) 0.9-1.3 kΩ, at 60°C (140°F) 0.4-0.7 kΩ, at 80°C (176°F) 0.2-0.4 kΩ. Oxygen sensor heater coil resistance 5.1-6.3 Ω. T-VIS VSV resistance 33-39 Ω. EGR VSV resistance 33-39 Ω. Turbocharging pressure VSV resistance 24-30 Ω. Fuel cut rpm w/ vehicle speed 0 km/h and coolant temp. 80°C (176°F): fuel cut rpm 2,000 rpm, fuel return rpm 1,600 rpm.
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS · Ignition System, Starting System, Charging System
Ignition
engine_3s_family · p599 OEM manual
-
IGNITION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Firing order: 1-3-4-2. Spark plug: See page A-2 or 6. High-tension cord resistance: 25 kΩ per cord. Ignition coil primary coil resistance: 0.40-0.50 Ω; secondary coil resistance: 10.2-13.8 kΩ. Distributor air gap: 0.2-0.4 mm (0.008-0.016 in.). Signal generator (pickup coil) resistance — 5S-FE: 170-210 Ω; 3S-GE/3S-GTE G1 to G⊖: 140-180 Ω; G2 to G⊖: 140-180 Ω; NE to G⊖: 180-220 Ω.
-
STARTING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Starter (12V 1.0kW): no-load current 90 A or less at 11.5 V, 3,000 rpm or more. Spring installed load STD: 1.79-2.41 kg (3.9-5.3 lb, 17-24 N). Starter (12V 1.4kW): no-load rpm 3,500 or more.
-
CHARGING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Drive belt tension: See page A-2 or 6. Battery specific gravity when fully charged at 20°C (68°F): 1.25-1.27. Alternator rated output: 12V-70A. Rotor coil resistance: 2.8-3.0 Ω. Alternator regulator (IC) regulating voltage: 13.9-15.1 V at 25°C (77°F); 13.5-14.3 V at 115°C (239°F).
STANDARD BOLT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Unclassified
engine_3s_family · p601 OEM manual
-
HOW TO DETERMINE BOLT STRENGTH
Bolt class is determined by the mark on the bolt head or bolt type. Hexagon head bolt: Bolt head number 4=4T, 5=5T, 6=6T, 7=7T, 8=8T, 9=9T, 10=10T, 11=11T; No mark=4T; Two protruding lines=5T; Three protruding lines=7T; Four protruding lines=8T. Hexagon flange bolt w/ washer hexagon bolt: No mark=4T; Two protruding lines=6T. Stud bolt: No mark=4T; Grooved=6T. Welded bolt: 4T.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p2 OEM manual
-
LOW COMPRESSION DIAGNOSIS — OIL SQUIRT TEST
If the cylinder compression in one or more cylinders is low, pour a small amount of engine oil into the cylinder through the spark plug hole and repeat steps (a) through (c) for cylinders with low compression. If adding oil helps the compression, chances are that the piston rings and/or cylinder bore are worn or damaged. If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating is improper, or there may be leakage past the gasket.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Mechanical
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p27 OEM manual
-
INSTALL CONNECTING ROD CAP
Install the connecting rod cap. (See step 6 in Cylinder Block Assembly). 1st Torque: 25 N-m (250 kgf-cm, 18 ft-lbf). 2nd Turn 90°. NOTICE: Do not turn the crankshaft.
- Do not turn the crankshaft.
-
REMOVE CONNECTING ROD CAP
Remove the connecting rod cap. (See procedure (b) and (c) above)
-
MEASURE PLASTIGAGE
Measure the Plastigage at its widest point. If the oil clearance is greater than maximum, replace the bearings. If necessary, grind or replace the crankshaft. HINT: If using a standard bearing, replace it with one having the same number marked on the connecting rod cap. There are three sizes of standard bearings, marked '1', '2' and '3' accordingly.
-
REMOVE PLASTIGAGE
Completely remove the Plastigage.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p28 OEM manual
-
KEEP BEARINGS AND CONNECTING ROD PARTS TOGETHER
Keep the bearings, connecting rod and cap together. Arrange the piston and connecting rod assemblies in correct order.
-
PROTECT CRANKSHAFT DURING PISTON INSTALLATION
Cover the connecting rod bolts with a short piece of hose to protect the crankshaft from damage. Push the piston, connecting rod assembly and upper bearing through the top of the cylinder block.
-
KEEP MAIN BEARING CAP PARTS IN ORDER
Keep the lower bearing and main bearing cap together. Arrange the main bearing caps and lower thrust washers in correct order.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p30 OEM manual
-
MEASURE PLASTIGAGE AND CHECK OIL CLEARANCE
Measure the Plastigage at its widest point. Standard clearance for No-3 STD: 0.025–0.044 mm (0.0010–0.0017 in.); U/S 0.25: 0.027–0.067 mm (0.0011–0.0026 in.). Others STD: 0.015–0.034 mm (0.0006–0.0013 in.); U/S 0.25: 0.019–0.059 mm (0.0007–0.0023 in.). Maximum clearance: 0.08 mm (0.0031 in.). If oil clearance is greater than maximum, replace the bearings. If necessary, grind or replace the crankshaft.
-
SELECT CORRECT MAIN BEARING
If using a standard bearing, replace it with one having the same number. If the number of the bearing cannot be determined, select the correct bearing by adding together the numbers imprinted on the cylinder block and crankshaft, then selecting the bearing with the same number as the total. There are five sizes of standard bearings, marked '1', '2', '3', '4' and '5' accordingly. If replacing the cylinder block subassembly, the bearing standard clearance will be: No.3: 0.027–0.054 mm (0.0011–0.0021 in.); Others: 0.017–0.044 mm (0.0007–0.0017 in.).
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · EG2-125
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p33 OEM manual
-
INSPECT CYLINDER BORE DIAMETER
There are three sizes of the standard cylinder bore diameter, marked '1', '2' and '3' accordingly. The mark is stamped on the top of the cylinder block. Using a cylinder gauge, measure the cylinder bore diameter at positions A, B and C in the thrust and axial directions. If the diameter is greater than maximum, rebore all the four cylinders. If necessary, replace the cylinder block.
-
REMOVE CYLINDER RIDGE
If the wear is less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.), using a ridge reamer, grind the top of the cylinder.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Piston and Connecting Rod Inspection
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p35 OEM manual
-
ARRANGE PARTS IN ORDER
The piston and pin are a matched set. Arrange the pistons, pins, rings, connecting rods and bearings in correct order.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Boring
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p40 OEM manual
-
BORE ALL FOUR CYLINDERS
Bore all the four cylinders for the oversized piston outside diameter.
-
REPLACE PISTON RINGS
Replace all the piston rings with ones to match the oversized pistons.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · 5S-FE ENGINE · Cylinder Head
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p87 OEM manual
-
CLEAN VALVE GUIDE BUSHINGS
Using a valve guide bushing brush and solvent, clean all the guide bushings.
-
CLEAN CYLINDER HEAD
Using a soft brush and solvent, thoroughly clean the cylinder head.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p90 OEM manual
-
HINT: Different bushings for intake and exhaust
Different the bushings are used for the intake and exhaust.
-
Heat cylinder head before installing guide bushings
Gradually heat the cylinder head to 80–100°C (176–212°F).
-
Install intake guide bushing
(Intake) Using SST and a hammer, tap in a new guide bushing until there is 8.0–8.8 mm (0.315–0.346 in.) protruding from the cylinder head. SST 09201-70010
-
Install exhaust guide bushing
(Exhaust) Using SST and a hammer, tap in a new guide bushing until the snap ring makes contact with the cylinder head. SST 09201-70010
-
Ream guide bushing after installation
Using a sharp 6 mm reamer, ream the guide bushing to obtain the standard specified clearance (See step 5 above) between the guide bushing and valve stem.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · EG2-70
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p91 OEM manual
-
CHECK VALVE HEAD MARGIN THICKNESS
Check the valve head margin thickness. If the margin thickness is less than minimum, replace the valve.
-
CHECK VALVE OVERALL LENGTH
Check the valve overall length. If the overall length is less than minimum, replace the valve.
-
CHECK VALVE STEM TIP FOR WEAR
Check the surface of the valve stem tip for wear. If the valve stem tip is worn, resurface the tip with a grinder or replace the valve. NOTICE: Do not grind off more then minimum.
- Do not grind off more then minimum.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Engine Mechanical
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p92 OEM manual
-
CHECK VALVE SEATING POSITION
Apply a light coat of prussian blue (or white lead) to the valve face. Lightly press the valve against the seat. Do not rotate valve.
-
CHECK VALVE FACE AND SEAT
If blue appears 360° around the face, the valve is concentric. If not, replace the valve. If blue appears 360° around the valve seat, the guide and face are concentric. If not, resurface the seat. Check that the seat contact is in the middle of the valve face with the following width: 1.0 – 1.4 mm (0.039 – 0.055 in.). If not, correct the valve seats as follows: (1) If the seating is too high on the valve face, use 30° and 45° cutters to correct the seat. (2) If the seating is too low on the valve face, use 75° and 45° cutters to correct the seat.
-
HAND-LAP VALVE AND VALVE SEAT
Hand-lap the valve and valve seat with an abrasive compound. After hand-lapping, clean the valve and valve seat.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Cylinder Head Assembly
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p97 OEM manual
-
THOROUGHLY CLEAN ALL PARTS
Thoroughly clean all parts to be assembled.
-
APPLY NEW ENGINE OIL
Before installing the parts, apply new engine oil to all sliding and rotating surfaces.
-
REPLACE ALL GASKETS AND OIL SEALS
Replace all gaskets and oil seals with new ones.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p109 OEM manual
-
CONNECT VSV HOSES AND CONNECTOR
Connect the following hoses: (1) Vacuum hose (from port E of VSV) to fuel pressure regulator; (2) Vacuum hose (from port G of VSV) to gas filter. Connect the VSV connector.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p110 OEM manual
-
CONNECT HOSES AND CONNECTORS TO THROTTLE BODY
Connect the following hoses: (1) Vacuum hose (from upper port of TVS) to port "P" of throttle body; (2) Vacuum hose (from port "Q" of EGR vacuum modulator) to port "E" of throttle body; (3) Vacuum hose (from port "R" of EGR vacuum modulator) to port "R" of throttle body; (4) PCV hose (from cylinder head) to throttle body; (5) Air hose (port F of A/C idle-up valve). Connect the following connectors: Throttle position sensor connector. IACV connector.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · ENGINE MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p117 OEM manual
-
ENGINE MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
The 5S-FE engine is an in-line, 4-cylinder, 2.2 liter DOHC 16-valve engine.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Troubleshooting
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p121 OEM manual
-
CO/HC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
If the CO/HC concentration does not comply with regulations, perform troubleshooting in the order given below: (a) Check oxygen sensor operation (See Oxygen Sensor Inspection under MPI System). (b) See the table below for possible causes, and then inspect and correct the applicable causes if necessary.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · ENGINE MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p122 OEM manual
-
ENGINE MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
The 5S-FE engine is an in-line, 4-cylinder, 2.2 liter DOHC 16-valve engine.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p123 OEM manual
-
ENGINE OVERVIEW — CYLINDER NUMBERING AND CRANKSHAFT
The 5S–FE engine is an in–line, 4–cylinder engine with the cylinders numbered 1–2–3–4 from the front. The crankshaft is supported by 5 bearings inside the crankcase made of aluminum alloy.
-
CRANKSHAFT BALANCE WEIGHTS AND OIL SUPPLY
The crankshaft is integrated with 8 weights for balance. Oil holes are placed in the center of the crankshaft to supply oil to the connecting rods, bearing, pistons and other components.
-
IGNITION ORDER AND CYLINDER HEAD DESIGN
The ignition order is 1–3–4–2. The cylinder head is made of aluminum alloy, with a cross flow type intake and exhaust layout and with pent–roof type combustion chambers. The spark plugs are located in the center of the combustion chambers.
-
INTAKE MANIFOLD — INERTIAL SUPERCHARGING
The intake manifold has 4 independent long ports and utilizes the inertial supercharging effect to improve engine torque at low and medium speeds.
-
VALVE SPRINGS — IRREGULAR PITCH
Exhaust and intake valves are equipped with irregular pitch springs made of special valve spring carbon steel which are capable of functioning no matter what the engine speed.
-
CAMSHAFT DRIVE AND LUBRICATION
The intake camshaft is driven by a timing belt, and a gear on the intake camshaft engages with a gear on the exhaust camshaft to drive it. The cam journal is supported at 5 places between the valve lifters of each cylinder and on the front end of the cylinder head. Lubrication of the cam journals and gears is accomplished by oil being supplied through the oiler port in the center of the camshaft.
-
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT — OUTER SHIM TYPE
Adjustment of the valve clearance is done by means of an outer shim type system, in which valve adjusting shims are located above the valve lifters. This permits replacement of the shims without removal of the camshafts.
-
PISTONS — MATERIAL AND DESIGN
Pistons are made of high temperature–resistant aluminum alloy, and a depression is built into the piston head to prevent interference with the valves.
-
PISTON PINS — FULL-FLOATING TYPE
Piston pins are the full–floating type, with the pins fastened to neither the piston boss nor the connecting rods. Instead, snap rings are fitted on both ends of the pins, preventing the pins from falling out.
-
PISTON RINGS — MATERIALS AND FUNCTION
The No.1 compression ring is made of steel and the No.2 compression ring is made of cast iron. The oil ring is made of a combination of steel and stainless steel. The outer diameter of each piston ring is slightly larger than the diameter of the piston and the flexibility of the rings allows them to hug the cylinder walls when mounted on the piston. Compression rings No.1 and No.2 work to prevent gas leakage from the cylinder and the oil ring works to scrape oil off the cylinder walls to prevent it from entering the combustion chambers.
-
CYLINDER BLOCK — MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION
The cylinder block is made of cast iron. It has 4 cylinders which are approximately twice the length of the piston stroke. The top of each cylinder is closed off by the cylinder head and the lower end of the cylinders becomes the crankcase, in which the crankshaft is installed. In addition, the cylinder block contains a water jacket, through which coolant is pumped to cool the cylinders.
-
OIL PAN — DESIGN AND DIVIDING PLATE
The oil pan is bolted onto the bottom of the cylinder block. The oil pan is an oil reservoir made of pressed steel sheet. A dividing plate is included inside the oil pan to keep sufficient oil in the bottom of the pan even when the vehicle is tilted. This dividing plate also prevents the oil from making waves when the vehicle is stopped suddenly and the oil shifts away from the oil pump suction pipe.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Special Tools & Equipment
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p126 OEM manual
-
EQUIPMENT
The following general equipment items are required for engine mechanical service on the 5S-FE engine: Battery specific gravity gauge, Belt tension gauge, Caliper gauge, CO/HC meter, Compression gauge, Connecting rod aligner, Cylinder gauge, Dial indicator, Dye penetrant, Engine Tune-up tester, Heater, Magnetic finger, Micrometer, Piston ring compressor, Piston ring expander, Plastigage, Precision straight edge, Soft brush, Spring tester (Valve spring), Steel square (Valve spring), Thermometer.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p139 OEM manual
-
HINT: TIMING BELT MATCHMARK ALIGNMENT CHECK (WHEN RE-USING TIMING BELT)
After loosening the crankshaft pulley bolt, check that the timing belt matchmark aligns with the end of the No. 1 timing belt cover when the crankshaft pulley groove is aligned with the timing mark "0" of the No. 1 timing belt cover. If the matchmark does not align, align as follows:
-
ALIGN MATCHMARK WHEN OUT OF ALIGNMENT ON CLOCKWISE SIDE
Align the matchmark by pulling the timing belt up on the water pump pulley side while turning the crankshaft pulley counterclockwise. After aligning the matchmark, hold the timing belt and turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise, and align its groove with timing mark "0" of the No. 1 timing belt cover.
-
ALIGN MATCHMARK WHEN OUT OF ALIGNMENT ON COUNTER-CLOCKWISE SIDE
Align the matchmark by pulling the timing belt up on the No. 1 idler pulley side while turning the crankshaft pulley clockwise. After aligning the matchmark, hold the timing belt and turn the crankshaft pulley counterclockwise, and align its groove with timing mark "0" of the No. 1 timing belt cover.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · TROUBLESHOOTING
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p151 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE USAGE
Find the source of trouble by correctly using the table shown. Each number shows the order of priority of the causes of the trouble. Check each part in the order shown. If necessary, replace the part.
-
WIRE HARNESS INSPECTION HINT
When inspecting a wire harness or circuit, the electrical wiring diagrams at the end of volume 2 of repair manual should be referred to and the circuits of related systems also should be checked.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Tune-Up
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p154 OEM manual
-
CHECK OIL QUALITY
Check the oil for deterioration, entry of water, discoloring or thinning. If oil quality is poor, replace the oil.
-
CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
The oil level should be between the "L" and "F" marks on the dipstick. If low, check for leakage and add oil up to the "F" mark.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · EG2-12
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p155 OEM manual
-
AIR FILTER INSPECTION AND CLEANING
1. REMOVE AIR FILTER: Remove the air cleaner cap and air filter. 2. INSPECT AND CLEAN AIR FILTER: (a) Visually check that the air filter is not excessively damaged or only. If necessary, replace the air filter. (b) Clean the air filter with compressed air. First blow from the inside thoroughly, then blow off the outside of the air filter. 3. REINSTALL AIR FILTER.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · Alternator Drive Belt · Inspection
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p157 OEM manual
-
NEW BELT DEFINITION
"New belt" refers to a belt which has been used less than 5 minutes on a running engine.
-
USED BELT DEFINITION
"Used belt" refers to a belt which has been used on a running engine for 5 minutes or more.
-
CHECK BELT SEATING IN RIBBED GROOVES
After installing the belt, check that it fits properly in the ribbed grooves. Check by hand to confirm that the belt has not slipped out of the groove on the bottom of the pulley.
-
RECHECK TENSION AFTER NEW BELT INSTALLATION
After installing a new belt, run the engine for about 5 minutes and recheck the belt tension.
5S-FE ENGINE · ENGINE MECHANICAL · Valve Clearance
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p159 OEM manual
-
ARRANGE GROMMETS IN ORDER
Arrange the grommets in correct order, so that they can be reinstalled into their original positions. This minimizes any possibility of oil leakage due to reuse of grommets.
ENGINE MECHANICAL · 5S-FE ENGINE · Adjusting Shim Selection Chart (Intake)
Engine — mechanical
RM285U_1993_5sfe_engineme · p161 OEM manual
-
INTAKE SHIM SELECTION EXAMPLE
The 2.800 mm (0.1102 in.) shim is installed, and the measured clearance is 0.450 mm (0.0177 in.). Replace the 2.800 mm (0.1102 in.) shim with a new No.11 shim.
-
SHIM THICKNESS HINT
New shims have the thickness in millimeters imprinted on the face.
3S-GTE ENGINE · LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Description & Operation
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_3sgte_lubricat · p1 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION
A fully pressurized, fully filtered lubrication system has been adopted for this engine.
-
OPERATION
Oil flow path: OIL PAN → OIL STRAINER → OIL PUMP (with RELIEF VALVE) → OIL FILTER (with RELIEF VALVE) → OIL COOLER (with RELIEF VALVE) → MAIN OIL HOLE → distributed to: CRANKSHAFT (→ CONNECTING RODS → PISTONS), TURBOCHARGER, OIL NOZZLES, CYLINDER HEAD (→ CAMSHAFT JOURNALS → CAMS → VALVE LIFTERS & VALVE STEMS).
3S-GTE ENGINE · LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_3sgte_lubricat · p3 OEM manual
-
LUBRICATE OIL FILTER GASKET
Lubricate the filter rubber gasket with clean engine oil.
-
INSTALL OIL FILTER BY HAND
Tighten the oil filter by hand until the rubber gasket contacts the seat of the filter mounting.
-
FINAL TIGHTEN OIL FILTER WITH SST
Using SST 09228-06500, give it an additional 3/4 turn to seat the filter.
3S-GTE ENGINE · LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil Cooler Inspection / Installation
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_3sgte_lubricat · p10 OEM manual
-
OIL COOLER INSTALLATION
See Components for Removal and Installation. Install oil cooler bracket as follows: (a) Install two new O-rings to the oil cooler bracket. (b) Apply a light coat of engine oil on the small O-ring. (c) Install the oil cooler bracket with the four bolts. Torque: 78 N-m (800 kgf-cm, 58 ft-lbf).
3S-GTE ENGINE · LUBRICATION SYSTEM · OIL NOZZLE
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_3sgte_lubricat · p15 OEM manual
-
OIL NOZZLES INSPECTION — INSPECT RELIEF VALVE
Push the valve with a wooden stick to check if it is stuck. If stuck, replace the relief valve.
-
OIL NOZZLES INSTALLATION — INSTALL OIL NOZZLES
Using a 5 mm hexagon wrench, install the oil nozzle with the bolt. Install the four nozzles. Torque: 9.1 N–m (93 kgf–cm, 81in.–lbf)
-
OIL NOZZLES INSTALLATION — INSTALL CRANKSHAFT
See Cylinder Block under Engine Mechanical.
3S-GTE ENGINE · LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Oil Pump Inspection / Oil Pump Oil Seal Replacement
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_3sgte_lubricat · p29 OEM manual
-
OIL PUMP OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT — REMOVE OIL SEAL
Using a screwdriver, pry out the oil seal.
-
OIL PUMP OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT — INSTALL OIL SEAL
Using SST and a hammer, tap in a new oil seal until its surface is flush with the oil pump cover edge. Apply MP grease to the oil seal lip.
3S-GTE ENGINE · LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_3sgte_lubricat · p34 OEM manual
-
INSTALL OIL PAN
Install the oil pan with seventeen bolts and two nuts. Torque: 5.4 N–m (55 kgf–cm, 48 in.–lbf). Install the dipstick. Connect the turbocharger oil outlet hose to the oil pan. Connect the oil level sensor connector.
3S-GTE ENGINE · LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_3sgte_lubricat · p36 OEM manual
-
CONNECT TRANSAXLE CONTROL CABLES
Connect the two transaxle control cables to the transaxle.
-
EXHAUST PIPE INSTALLATION HINT
The stabilizer bar and drive shaft will be in the way while installing the exhaust pipe. Follow directions according to illustration. Steps are labeled 1st, 2nd, 3rd with Push and Clear indicators for maneuvering around the stabilizer bar and drive shaft.
3S-GTE ENGINE · LUBRICATION SYSTEM · Description & Operation
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_3sgte_lubricat · p41 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION
A fully pressurized, fully filtered lubrication system has been adopted for this engine.
-
OPERATION
Oil flow path: OIL PAN → OIL STRAINER → OIL PUMP (with RELIEF VALVE) → OIL FILTER (with RELIEF VALVE) → OIL COOLER (with RELIEF VALVE) → MAIN OIL HOLE → distributed to: CRANKSHAFT → CONNECTING RODS → PISTONS; OIL NOZZLES; TURBOCHARGER; CYLINDER HEAD → CAMSHAFT JOURNALS → CAMS → VALVE LIFTERS & VALVE STEMS.
3S-GTE ENGINE · LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_3sgte_lubricat · p42 OEM manual
-
LUBRICATION SYSTEM OVERVIEW
A pressure feeding lubrication system has been adopted to supply oil to the moving parts of this engine. The lubrication system consists of an oil pan, oil pump, oil filter and other external parts which supply oil to the moving parts in the engine block. Oil from the oil pan is pumped up by the oil pump. After it passes through the oil filter, it is through the various oil holes in the crankshaft and cylinder block. After passing through the cylinder block and performing its lubricating function, the oil is returned by gravity to the oil pan. A dipstick on the center left side of the cylinder block is provided to check the oil level.
-
OIL PUMP
The oil pump pumps up oil from the oil pan and feeds it under pressure to the various parts of the engine. An oil strainer is mounted in front of the inlet to the oil pump to remove impurities. The oil pump itself is a trochoid type pump, inside of which is a drive rotor and a driven rotor. When the drive rotor rotates, the driven rotor rotates in the same direction, and since the axis of the drive rotor shaft is different from the center of the driven rotor, the space between the two rotors is changed as they rotate. Oil is drawn in when the space widens and is discharged when the space becomes narrow.
-
OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR (RELIEF VALVE)
At high engine speeds, the engine oil supplied by the oil pump exceeds the capacity of the engine to utilize it. For that reason, the oil pressure regulator works to prevent an oversupply of oil. During normal oil supply, a coil spring and valve keep the by-pass closed, but when too much oil is being fed, the pressure becomes extremely high, overpowering the force of the spring and opening the valves. This allows the excess oil to flow through the valve and return to the oil pan.
-
OIL FILTER
The oil filter is a full flow type filter with a relief valve built into the paper filter element. Particles of metal from wear, airborne dirt, carbon and other impurities can get into the oil during use and could cause accelerated wear or seizing if allowed to circulate through the engine. The oil filter, integrated into the oil line, removes these impurities as the oil passes through it. The filter is mounted outside the engine to simplify replacement of the filter element. A relief valve is also included ahead of the filter element to relieve the high oil pressure in case the filter element becomes clogged with impurities. The relief valve opens when the oil pressure overpowers the force of the spring. Oil passing through the relief valve by-passes the oil filter and flows directly into the main oil hole in the engine.
3S-GTE ENGINE · LUBRICATION SYSTEM · PREPARATION
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_3sgte_lubricat · p43 OEM manual
-
SST (SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS)
List of special service tools required for lubrication system service: 09032-00100 Oil Pan Seal Cutter; 09226-10010 Crankshaft Front & Rear Bearing Replacer (Crankshaft front oil seal); 09228-06500 Oil Filter Wrench; 09616-30011 Steering Worm Bearing Adjusting Screw Wrench (Oil pump pulley); 09620-30010 Steering Gear Box Replacer Set including (09627-30010) Steering Sector Shaft Bushing Replacer (Oil pump oil seal) and (09631-00020) Handle (Oil pump oil seal).
-
RECOMMENDED TOOLS
09090-04000 Engine Sling Device (For suspending engine); 09200-00010 Engine Adjust Kit; 09905-00013 Snap Ring Pliers.
-
EQUIPMENT
Oil pressure gauge; Torque wrench.
STARTING SYSTEM · PARK NEUTRAL SWITCH (PNS) · Inspect Starter Relay
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p1 OEM manual
-
CLUTCH START SWITCH
See MX section.
-
PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH (PNS)
See AX section.
STARTING SYSTEM · DESCRIPTION
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p3 OEM manual
-
DESCRIPTION
The starter is a reduction type with a small, high-speed motor used to drive the pinion gear. The starting system consists of: AM2 Fuse (7.5 A) located in the fuse block, Starter located in the engine compartment, Starter Relay located at the rear of the vehicle, Park/Neutral Switch located at the base/transmission area, and Clutch Start Switch located in the cabin area.
STARTING SYSTEM · Operation · System Circuit
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p4 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM CIRCUIT OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned to START position, current flows from terminal 50 to the coil of the solenoid and the plunger is pulled by the magnetic force of the coil. When the plunger is pulled to the left as shown above, the contact plate of the plunge allows current from the battery to flow directly from terminal 30 to the motor, and the starter rotates. When the engine is running and the ignition switch is returned to ON, the magnetic force of the coil disappears and the contact plate of the plunger is returned to its original position by the return spring. Battery voltage no longer flows from terminal 30, so the motor stops.
STARTING SYSTEM · PARK NEUTRAL SWITCH (PNS) · Inspect Starter Relay
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p5 OEM manual
-
CLUTCH START SWITCH
See MX section for Clutch Start Switch information.
-
PARK NEUTRAL SWITCH (PNS)
See AX section for Park Neutral Switch (PNS) information.
STARTING SYSTEM · SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p7 OEM manual
-
STARTER SERVICE DATA
Rated voltage and output power: 12 V 1.4 kW, 12 V 1.6 kW. No-load characteristics (Current): 90 A or less at 11.5 V. No-load characteristics (rpm): 3,000 rpm or more (Compact type); 3,500 rpm or more (Conventional type). Spring installed load: 18–24 N (1.79–2.41 kgf, 3.9–5.3 lbf).
STARTING SYSTEM · STARTER · Components for Disassembly and Assembly
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p12 OEM manual
-
COMPONENTS FOR DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY — CONVENTIONAL TYPE (1.4 kW AND 1.6 kW)
Exploded diagram showing all components for the Conventional Type starter (1.4 kW and 1.6 kW): Idler Gear, Pinion Gear, Bearing, Steel Ball, Clutch Shaft, Compression Spring, Pinion Gear, Snap Ring (non-reusable), Compression Spring, Starter Clutch, Bearing Retainer, Spring Retainer, Starter Housing, Stop Collar, Front Bearing, Magnetic Switch, Return Spring, Armature, Rear Bearing, O-Ring (multiple), Field Frame (Field Coil), End Cover, O-Ring (non-reusable), Brush Holder, O-Ring (non-reusable), Dust Protector.
-
COMPONENTS FOR DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY — COMPACT TYPE (1.4 kW)
Exploded diagram showing all components for the Compact Type starter (1.4 kW): Bearing, Pinion Gear, Steel Ball, Clutch Shaft, Compression Spring, Pinion Gear, Snap Ring (non-reusable), Compression Spring, Starter Clutch, Spring Retainer, Starter Housing, Stop Collar, Front Bearing, Magnetic Switch, Return Spring, Armature, Rear Bearing, O-Ring (multiple), Field Frame (Field Coil), End Cover, O-Ring (non-reusable), Brush Holder, O-Ring (non-reusable), Dust Protector.
-
NON-REUSABLE PARTS
Parts marked with a diamond symbol (◆) are non-reusable and must be replaced during assembly. These include: Snap Ring, O-Ring (End Cover), O-Ring (Rear Bearing area), O-Ring (Brush Holder area).
STARTING SYSTEM · STARTER
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p16 OEM manual
-
INSPECT FIELD COIL FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between the lead wire and field coil brush lead. If there is no continuity, replace the field frame.
-
INSPECT FIELD COIL FOR GROUND
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity between the coil end and field frame. If there is continuity, repair or replace the field frame.
-
INSPECT BRUSH LENGTH
Using a vernier caliper, measure the brush length. If the length is less than minimum, replace the brush holder and field frame.
STARTING SYSTEM · STARTER · Bearings
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p20 OEM manual
-
INSTALL SNAP RING AND STOP COLLAR
(d) Push down the pinion gear. (e) Using snap ring pliers, install a new snap ring. (f) Using pliers, compress the snap ring. (g) Check that the snap ring fits correctly. (h) Remove the starter housing and clutch assembly from the brass bar. (i) Using a plastic-faced hammer, tap the clutch shaft and install the stop collar onto the snap ring.
STARTING SYSTEM · STARTER · Magnetic Switch / Starter Assembly
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p22 OEM manual
-
PERFORM PULL-IN COIL OPEN CIRCUIT TEST
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between terminals 50 and C. If there is no continuity, replace the magnetic switch.
-
PERFORM HOLD-IN COIL OPEN CIRCUIT TEST
Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity between terminal 50 and the switch body. If there is no continuity, replace the magnetic switch.
STARTING SYSTEM · PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH (PNS) · Inspect Starter Relay
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p29 OEM manual
-
CLUTCH START SWITCH
See MX section.
-
PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH (PNS)
See AX section.
STARTING SYSTEM · OPERATION
Starting / charging
RM285U_1993_starting · p30 OEM manual
-
SYSTEM CIRCUIT — OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned to START position, current flows from terminal 50 to the coil of the solenoid and the plunger is pulled by the magnetic force of the coil. When the plunger is pulled to the left as shown above, the contact plate of the plunge allows current from the battery to flow directly from terminal 30 to the motor, and the starter rotates. When the engine is running and the ignition switch is returned to ON, the magnetic force of the coil disappears and the contact plate of the plunger is returned to its original position by the return spring. Battery voltage no longer flows from terminal 30, so the motor stops.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_e153 · p1 OEM manual
-
ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal and installation the parts as shown below. Non-reusable parts are marked with a diamond symbol (♦). Specified torques are indicated in N·m (kgf·cm, ft·lbf) format throughout the diagram.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · DESCRIPTION
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_e153 · p44 OEM manual
-
USING A RAZOR BLADE AND GASKET SCRAPER, REMOVE OLD SEALANT
Using a razor blade and gasket scraper, remove all the old sealant (FIPG) material from the gasket surfaces.
-
THOROUGHLY CLEAN ALL COMPONENTS
Thoroughly clean all components to remove all the loose material.
-
CLEAN BOTH SEALING SURFACES
Clean both sealing surfaces with a non-residue solvent.
-
APPLY SEAL PACKING
Apply the seal packing in approx. 1 mm (0.04 in.) bead along the sealing surface.
-
ASSEMBLE WITHIN 10 MINUTES
Part must be assembled within 10 minutes of application. Otherwise, the sealant (FIPG) material must be removed and reapplied.
-
GEAR AND SHAFT LAYOUT
The gear and shaft layout is the same as the E153 manual transaxle.
-
SYNCHROMESH MECHANISM — 2ND AND 3RD GEAR
A triple-cone type synchromesh mechanism is used in the second gear and a double-cone type synchromesh mechanism is used in the third gear to improve the shift feeling characteristics. This helps to reduce the shifting effort, provide smoothly shifting.
-
REVERSE SYNCHROMESH MECHANISM
A reverse synchromesh mechanism is used to suppress gear engagement noise in reverse gear shifting while providing smoothly shifting.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · DIFFERENTIAL CASE (Standard Type)
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_e153 · p68 OEM manual
-
MEASURE PRELOAD AT STARTING
Using a small torque wrench, measure the preload. New bearing (Add output shaft preload): 0.2–0.4 N·m (2.0–4.1 kgf·cm, 1.7–3.6 in.·lbf). Reused bearing (Add output shaft preload): 0.1–0.2 N·m (1.3–2.5 kgf·cm, 1.1–2.2 in.·lbf). If the preload is not within specification, select the thrust washers. HINT: The total preload will change about 0.1–0.2 N·m (1–2 kgf·cm, 0.9–1.7 ft·lbf) with each shim thickness.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · INPUT SHAFT
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_e153 · p73 OEM manual
-
MEASURE CLEARANCE OF NO.2 SHIFT FORK AND HUB SLEEVE
Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the hub sleeve and shift fork. Maximum clearance: 1.0 mm (0.039 in.). If the clearance exceeds the limit, replace the shift fork or hub sleeve.
-
INSPECT INPUT SHAFT
Check the input shaft for wear or damage. Using a micrometer, measure the outer diameter of the input shaft journal surface. Using a dial indicator, check the shaft runout.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · OIL PUMP
Lubrication / oil
RM285U_1993_e153 · p78 OEM manual
-
CHECK SIDE CLEARANCE
Using a precision straight edge and feeler gauge, measure the side clearance of both rotors.
-
REMOVE OIL PUMP DRIVE ROTOR AND DRIVEN ROTOR
Remove oil pump drive rotor and driven rotor.
-
IF NECESSARY, REPLACE O-RING
Using a screwdriver, remove the O-ring. Apply gear oil to the O-ring. Install the O-ring.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · OPERATION
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_e153 · p81 OEM manual
-
OPERATION
The illustrations below show the engagements of transaxle gears. Six gear engagement diagrams are shown: 1st gear (1st Drive Gear, 1st Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly), 2nd gear (2nd Drive Gear, 2nd Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly), 3rd gear (3rd Drive Gear, 3rd Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly), 4th gear (4th Drive Gear, 4th Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly), 5th gear (5th Drive Gear, 5th Driven Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly), and Reverse (Reverse Drive Gear, Reverse Driven Gear, Reverse Idler Gear, Differential Drive Gear, Differential Assembly).
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · OUTPUT SHAFT · Component Parts Inspection
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_e153 · p84 OEM manual
-
REMOVE NO. 1 HUB SLEEVE ASSEMBLY AND FIRST GEAR
Using a press, remove the NO.1 hub sleeve and 1st gear.
-
REMOVE SYNCHRONIZER RING AND NEEDLE ROLLER BEARINGS
Remove the synchronizer ring and needle roller bearings.
-
REMOVE OUTPUT SHAFT FRONT BEARING
Using SST, remove the output shaft front bearing. SST 09950-00020, 09950-00030
MANUAL TRANSAXLE · TROUBLESHOOTING
Transmission / transaxle
RM285U_1993_e153 · p104 OEM manual
-
TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE USAGE
You will find the troubles easier using the table well shown below. In this table, each number shows the priority of causes in troubles. Check each part in order. If necessary, replace these parts.
No matches.